En 840D SL Complete Commissioning v45

SINUMERIK 840D sl
Commissioning Documentation
Sinumerik 840D sl
Edition 2014.04
Training Manual
This document was produced for training purposes.

Siemens assumes no responsibility for its contents.
SINUMERIK 840D sl
Commissioning Manual for

Turning and Milling machines
Valid for:
Sinumerik 840D sl Software 4.5

Start
Contents
Machine Test
Protocol
A002
A060
Service and A061
System
Commissioning Menu Structure
Overview
Tools A021
Access Levels/
Time and Date
Settings
A041
Machine and
Setting Data
A003 A007 A044 A035
Battery and Fan Electronic Licensing of Program
Exchange Logbook Options Handling
A017
Data
Management
A010 A036
A030 A051 A053
PCU and TCU NCU
Digital Inputs & Line and Motor Axis and Drive
Connections Connections
Outputs Modules Diagnostics
and Diagnostics and Diagnostics
A008
MCP&PP72/48
Connections
and Diagnostic
A058 A031 A026

A037 A033
PLC Onboard PLC Alarms Creating a PLC
Alarm Structure PLC Functions
Diagnostics and Messages Program
A068
Commissioning
Sequence
A084 A101 A016 A102 A110

Encoder Servo Additional Axis Tool Technology
Adjustments Optimisation Installation Management Setup Milling
A111
Technology
Setup Swivel
A122
A006 Technology A121 A120
A011 Setup
Electrical Technology Technology
Run MyScreens Subspindle and
Cabinet Design Setup Y Axis Setup Turning
Tailstock
Appendix A
Hardware
Differences
Appendix B Appendix C
Technology PLC End
Settings Interface
SIEMENS TEST PROTOCOL
Machine Test Protocol Sinumerik 840D sl
Product / Version Company:
Address:
Sinumerik 840D sl SW4.5
Machine Range Machine Type - Features Spindle Config. MLFB KW Axis Conf MLFB N/M
Electrical Cabinet Protocol attached Safety Integrated Protocol Attached
Distribution list
Name Company / e-mail Name Company / e-mail
Department Department
Title

Document no. Date
File name:
Protocol version 1.2
Copyright  Siemens AG 2013 All Rights Reserved.

Contents
1 RESPONSIBLE PERSONS:................................................................................................................................................................................ 5
1.1 Schedule ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5
1.2 Participants carrying-out the test ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 5
2 SUMMARY AND RESULT ................................................................................................................................................................................... 6
2.1 Summary .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6
2.2 Result.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6
2.2.1 Exception List ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6
2.3 Release Siemens ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6
2.4 Release from Machine Tool Builder ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 6
3 BACK UP ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 7
3.1 Modified data ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 7
3.2 Data Backup .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 7
4 CHANGE LOG ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8
4.1 Changes to the machine. ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8
5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 9
5.1 Machine...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 9
5.2 Control ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 9

Page 2/42 Date: 24.03.2014 Protocol version 1.2

6 TEST OBJECTIVE ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 10
6.1 Note .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10
7 FUNCTIONS TESTED ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 11
8 DETAILED TEST ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 13
8.1 Machine area ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 13

8.1.1 Jog  Ref ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 13
8.1.2 Jog  MCP ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15
8.1.3 Jog  HMI Softkeys......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 18
8.1.4 MDA  Teachin............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 20
8.1.5 MDA  HMI Softkeys ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 21
8.1.6 MDA  MDA  Teachin................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 23
8.1.7 AUTO ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 24
8.2 Technology ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 26

8.2.1 Milling General ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 26
8.2.2 Milling 3+2 ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 27
8.2.3 Milling 5 Axis ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 28
8.2.4 Turning Basic .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 29
8.2.5 Turning Advanced ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 30
8.3 Parameter ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 32

8.3.1 Machine Builder Options .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 32
8.3.2 Measure tool...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 32
8.3.3 Setting data........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 32
8.3.4 Magazine ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 33
8.3.5 Tool List ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 34
8.4 Geometry ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 35

8.4.1 Circularity test HMI .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 35
8.4.2 Renishaw circularity test ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 35
8.5 Safety Integrated ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 35

8.5.1 Safety related test .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 35

8.6 Password protection................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 36

8.6.1 Securing data areas............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 36
8.7 Various ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 37

1 Responsible persons:
1.1 Schedule
Test carried out at (OEM Name):
From :
To:
1.2 Participants carrying-out the test
Name Company / Department

2 Summary and result

2.1 Summary
2.2 Result
Release of the machine recommended (YES/NO/Reason): ___________
2.2.1 Exception List

The machine has been released for sale with the following exceptions:
Function: Test Number Remark
2.3 Release Siemens

Machine can be released for Sale: Confirm with Signature
Siemens
Date Author Company / Department Signature
2.4 Release from Machine Tool Builder
Machine Manufacturer
Date Name Company / Department Signature

3 Back up
3.1 Modified data
Machine data number Original Value New Value
3.2 Data Backup
Create data backup after completing the test and attach it to the protocol.
Appendices:
- ____________ (NC Archive)

- ____________ (PLC Archive)
- ____________ (Drive Archive)
- ____________ (HMI Archive)
- ____________ (Complete Archive)
- ____________ (Clone TGZ file for series production)
- ____________ (Image for restore)
-

4 Change Log
4.1 Changes to the machine.
Date Change Reason Tested Responsible person Signature

5 System description
5.1 Machine
Type
Serial No.
Configuration
Axes
Spindle
Measuring devices
Miscellaneous
5.2 Control
NC type Sinumerik 840D
Serial No.
Machine control panel
Software version:
User software
PLC Application

6 Test objective
6.1 Note
The test plan extends the commissioning documentation of 840D sl with Sinumerik Operate.
The application is tested with the current test plan, which helps to achieve for the most part an error-free interaction of SINUMERIK with the machine. No guarantee for fault-free machine application can be
guaranteed.
Siemens is not responsible for the PLC safety related functions which are implemented on the Machine. The Machine tool builder is responsible in satisfying the receiving countries “Safety regulations regarding
CNC machine tools” regulations.
Basic knowledge of operation and programming of 840D is necessary for carrying out the test. In case of some test tasks, it is necessary to start an automatic program or to trigger the machine functions. It is,
therefore, explicitly indicated that all operations that trigger machine functions should only be carried out by the employee of the machine manufacturer, who is authorized to do this.
The necessary programs are to be created directly at the machine.
ALL RELEVANT TESTS HAVE TO BE CARRIED OUT WITH THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS:
1) Siemens Code(DIN) and ShopMill/ShopTurn with  Metric system of units

2) Siemens Code(DIN) and ShopMill/ShopTurn with  Inch System of Units
3) ISO / dialect with  Metric system of units
4) ISO / dialect with  Inch system of units

7 Functions tested
Confirm the functions as per the test plan
Test . Function Result / Accepted/To Do

8.1 Machine
8.1.1 Jog  Ref
8.1.2 Jog  MCP
8.1.3 Jog  HMI Soft keys
8.1.4 MDA  Teachin
8.1.5 MDA  HMI Soft keys
8.1.6 MDA  MDA  Teachin
8.1.7 AUTO  DRF, Jog
8.2 Technology
8.2.1 Milling General
8.2.2 Milling 3+2
8.2.3 Milling 5 Axis
8.2.4 Turning Basic
8.2.5 Turning Advanced
8.3 Parameter
8.3.1 Machine Builder Options
8.3.2 Measure Tool
8.3.3 Setting data

Test . Function Result / Accepted/To Do

8.3.4 Magazine
8.3.5 Tool List
8.4 Geometry
8.4.1 Circularity test HMI
8.4.2 Renishaw circularity test
8.5 Safety integrated
8.5.1 Safety related test
8.6 Password protection
8.6.1 Securing data areas
8.7 Various
8.7.1 General tests

8 Detailed Test
8.1 Machine area
8.1.1 Jog  Ref
Technology Test Description Tested OEM Alternative / or Tested Reason for OEM To Do´s
No Comments / not Alternative
relevant
T+M
1 Machine Start-up in Jog-REF
T+M Automatic referencing (Jog -

2 REF Cycle start)
T+M Reference not necessary

(Absolute measuring
3
system)(Start-up in JOG)
T+M Prevention of Axis faults, when

starting in axis operation, the
Spindles with axis functionality
4
should be referenced during the
referencing procedure.
T+M Additional equipment requiring

reference point approach should
be referenced prior to the first
5
NC Start (Turret). “Alarm
prevention”

T+M Prior to referencing it should be

possible to change to JOG and
manually move the axis to a safe
position.
If the axis is resting on the
Hardware limit switch, it should
6 be possible to JOG the axis
away in the opposite direction.
The message "Axis lies on
Hardware end limit" should
remain even after powering the
machine off and on.
T+M Restarting the reference

procedure (interruption / E-Stop)
should be possible without
7
having to switch the machine off
and on.
T+M Repeating the referencing

procedure should be possible,
after reaching reference point -
8
repeating the process without a
fault message.
T+M The feedrate and Spindle enable

signals should not be active
immediately after power-on of
the machine. The operator must
9
enable these signals with the
respective key presses on the
MCP

8.1.2 Jog  MCP
relevant
T+M If the axis is resting on the
Hardware limit switch, it should
1 be possible to JOG the axis
away in the opposite direction.
T+M It should be possible in the

RESET state to change to JOG
2
mode
T+M When changing from REF to Jog

- Operator must select again the
3 required axis. There should be
no pre selected axis.
T+M Select axis - the axis should

travel in the defined direction
when the (+- Pushbutton) is
4 pressed. The axis should travel
with the feedrate defined in the
NC machine data.
T With Turning machines it should

also be possible to move more
axes at the same time. The
5
machine builder has to realize
this in the PLC.
M With Milling machines it is also

possible to Jog axes
simultaneously; however the
6
machine builder has to realize
this in the PLC.

T+M The machine builder should also

ensure that the rotary axis can
be jogged, including rotary axis
7
functionality with Spindles.
C+ button = spindle direction M4
C- button = spindle direction M3
T+M The feedrate override should be
effective on all axes which can
be Jogged. All axes should come
8
to standstill when the feed
override is set to zero.
T+M When the feed stop button is

pressed the Jog plus and minus
buttons should have no effect on
9
any axis motion. The axis should
all come to a stop.
T+M When the spindle stop button is

pressed the Jog plus and minus
buttons should have no effect on
10
the spindle motion. The spindles
should all come to a stop.
T When Spindle direction buttons

are available, the spindle should
move clockwise or anti-clockwise
11 dependent upon which button is
press. The default speed is
defined in the machine data.
T+M The Spindle override should

correct the currently controlled
12
spindle/s.
T+M Do all axis move according to

13 the work plane, defined in the
DIN standard.

T+M When direction keys are pressed

simultaneously, the axis in
motion should stop immediately.
Further motion can only be
14
achieved when both buttons are
once again released, and the
desired direction button pressed
again
T+M WCS >><< MCS
With key not pressed (MCS)
the axis should be moved using
the Machine axis interface, and
the axis will move on an
individual basis, without active
rotations.
15
With key pressed (WCS) the
axis should be moved using the
Channel axis interface, and the
axis will move on an individual
basis, with active rotations.
T+M Repos
With interruption in Automatic, it
should be possible to switch to
Jog, move axis away from the
16
contour, subsequently return to
Automatic / Repos and Jog the
axis back to the previous
position.

8.1.3 Jog  HMI Soft keys

Technology Test Description Tested OEM Alternative / or Tested Reason for OEM Alternative To Do´s
No Comments / not
relevant
T+M T,S,M  T-D
Select a tool from the tool list,
using SK TOOL and IN
MANUAL. Press cycle start tool
should be transferred into the
spindle or positioned before the
work piece.
1 The tool must not rotate if
already present in the spindle or
present before the work piece.
Repeat the process with other
tools from the magazine.
Prior to changing from a driven
tool, the rotating tool should be
stopped prior to changing.
T+M Spindle 
Set a spindle speed and activate
2 "Cycle Start" (together with
spindle M function) Repeat the
procedure with further spindles.
T+M Spindle gear change
3 Change gear, if a gear box is
available on the machine.
T+M Spindle direction 
Program M3 and M4 on all
spindles which are available on
4
the machine and ensure for the
programmed code that spindle
rotates in the correct direction.

No Comments / not
relevant
T+M
5
T+M Measure Tool 

Manual 
Test with all types of possible
6 tools
Automatic 
Test with all types of possible
tools
T+M Position 
All axis must be available,
ensure that it is possible to move
7
the spindle (C-Axis function)
without first running in spindle
operation
T+M MCS / WCS 
8 Should change only the display
from MCS/WCS
T+M Hand wheel 
Test in both MCS and WCS
Syncron-actions.
show currently active
9
SYNACT
Settings 
Test and acknowledge
functionality of the Setting data’s

8.1.4 MDA  Teachin

No Comments / not
relevant
T+M Teach-in 
1 It should be possible to Jog the
axis in MDA - Teach-in

8.1.5 MDA  HMI Softkeys

No Comments / not
relevant
T+M Program Control 
When the PRT checkbox is set
the axis should work internally,
and not physically move the axis.
The signal should work only in
1
Automatic mode - when
changing to Jog/MDA the signal
should not be active except
when an external switch is used.

DRY - When selected, the axis
should move with the feedrate
2 which is defined in Settings. This
should only be available in
Automatic.

M01 - When selected, the next
occurrence of M01 in the NC
3 program should cause the NC
program to stop and wait for the
next NC start.

When DRF is selected it should
be possible in the Automatic
mode of operation to move the
4
axis with the Hand wheel, the
position will be stored in the DRF
offset.

No Comments / not
relevant
SKP - When selected, the next
5 NC block with the Skip block
instruction will not be executed.
T+M G functions 
G - Functions for the reset state
of the machine - To be checked
6 for:
Turning
Milling
T+M Auxiliary functions 

Machine tool builder should
check that the functions which
7
he does not allow in MDA are
not processed.
T+M >> Extend SK 

All G functions
G - Functions for the reset
8 state of the machine - To be
checked for:
Turning
Milling
T+M > Extend menu 
Hand wheel 
Move axis using Hand wheel in
9
the machine axis interface or
using Geoax interface in
connection with Teach-in mode

8.1.6 MDA  MDA  Teachin

No Comments / not
relevant
T+M MDA 
Tool change in MDI window -
T01 + Cycle start for Turning
1 machines
T01 M06 + Cycle start for Milling
machines.
T+M MDA 
It should not be possible to Jog
2 the axis in MDA - exception :
Teach-in is active
T+M Teach-in 
Hand wheel 
Move axis using Hand wheel in
3
the machine axis interface or
using Geoax interface in
connection with Teach-in mode

8.1.7 AUTO
No Comments / not
relevant
T+M Move axis using Hand
wheel/Jog/Inc in the machine
1
axis interface to generate a DRF
offset
T+M Jog in Automatic 
Jog Mode Mask is set to 0 as
standard, which means you are
not able to Jog the axis in
Automatic, with the exception of
Teach-in.
2 Jog Mode Mask is set to 1,
means you are able to Jog the
axis in Automatic. The machine
builder should explicitly set this
machine data when he requires
this functionality.
T+M AUTO 
3
Cycle start
T+M AUTO 
4
Cycle Stop
T+M AUTO 
5
Cycle single block
T+M AUTO 
6
Program reset
T+M AUTO 
7
Feed Stop in Program effect
T+M AUTO 
8
Spindle stop in Program - effect
T+M AUTO 
9
Feed override = 0

T+M AUTO 
10
Spindle override = 50
T+M AUTO 
11
Effect of E-Stop
T+M Program control 
12
PRT - Program Test
13
DRY - Dry run feedrate
14
M01 - Program stop
15 DRF - Differential hand wheel
offset
16
SKP - Block skip
T+M Block search 
M,S,T,H - Effect
17
Search to Tool

8.2 Technology
8.2.1 Milling General
No Comments / not
relevant
M
1 ShopMill Licensed
M Customer Cycles
2
CUST800 etc
M Settings for Technology and
3
measuring cycles
M Settings for Tool management
4
views
M
5 Cycle settings when multitasking
M Specific customer cycle

6
CUST832
M
7 3/5 Axis M Dynamics MD Test
M Tool change with DRF

8
Deactivation M6
M
9
M
10
M
11
M
12

8.2.2 Milling 3+2
No Comments / not
relevant
M
1 Settings for Swivelling
M Tool change with active

2
CYCLE800 / Transmit / Tracyl
M
3 Settings Transmit / Tracyl
M Reset State with Head/ Table /

4
Mixed kinematic
M Power off state / Head / Table /
5
Mixed kinematic
M
6
M
7
M
8
M
9
M
10
M
11
M
12

8.2.3 Milling 5 Axis

No Comments / not
relevant
M
1 Settings for Traori
M
2 Settings for CUST832
M
3 Correct Trafo Type set
M
4 Tool Change with active Traori
M Reset State with Head/ Table /

5
Mixed kinematic
M Power off state / Head / Table /
6
Mixed kinematic
M Settings for Orientation /
ORIAXES reset
7 ORIEULER
ORIMKS
ORIWKS reset
M
8
M
9
M
10
M
11
M
12

8.2.4 Turning Basic

No Comments / not
relevant
T Is the coordinate system
1
displayed correctly in the editor?
T Are the softkeys for the standard
2
cycles displayed in the editor?
T Is the “plunge-cutting” and
3 “plunge-turning” softkey
displayed in the editor?
T Are the softkey for the
4 remaining-material machining
displayed in the editor?
T Is the “Tailstock” parameter
5 displayed in the program
header? (only in ShopTurn)
T Is the “parts gripper” parameter
6
displayed in the cut-off cycle?
T Does the parts gripper in the cut-
7
off cycle function correctly?
T Is a program simulated
8
correctly?
T Is a simulated program
9 represented correctly in the 3D
view?
T Is a program simulated correctly
10
with a open working-area door?
T Is the simulation aborted when
11
the “Reset” key is pressed?
T Is the calculated program run
12 time updated during the
simulation?
T Is a program executed correctly
13
when you press “Cycle Start”?

T Is the “Base block” softkey

14
displayed?
T Is the ”Simultaneous recording”
15
softkey displayed?
T
16 Does “Block search” work right?
T
17 Does ”REPOS” work right?
8.2.5 Turning Advanced

No Comments / not
relevant
T Is a Face milling contour milled
1
correctly on main spindle?
T Is a Face milling contour milled
2
correctly on counterspindle?
T Is a Peripheral milling contour
3
milled correctly on main spindle?
T Is a Peripheral milling contour
4 milled correctly on
counterspindle?
T Is a Y-Axis milling contour milled
5
T Is a Y-Axis milling contour milled
6
T Is a B-Axis milling contour milled
7
T Is a B-Axis milling contour milled
8

T Is a position pattern
9 drilled/tapped correctly on main
spindle?
T Is a position pattern
10 drilled/tapped correctly on
counterspindle?
T Works the counterspindle cycle
11
correctly? (only in ShopTurn)
T Works turning with B axis on the
12
main spindel correctly?
T Works turning with B axis on the
13
counterspindel correctly?
T Are the softkeys for the
14 measuring cycles displayed in
the editor?
T Works a measurement program
15
with zero-offset correctly?
T Works a measurement program
16
with tool-offset correctly?
T Works a workpiece
17 measurement program
correctly?
T Works the measurement result
18
pictures correctly?

8.3 Parameter
8.3.1 Machine Builder Options

No Comments / not
relevant
T+M Test the commissioning of
1 machine builder options
T+M Test the activation / deactivation

2 of machine builder options
8.3.2 Measure tool

No Comments / not
relevant
T+M Measure the length of the Tool
1
T+M Measure the Diameter / radius of

2 the tool
8.3.3 Setting data

No Comments / not
relevant
T+M Spindle data - minimum spindle
speed should be set to a value
1
not equal to 0

8.3.4 Magazine
relevant
T+M Relocate a tool in the Magazine
1
T+M Position the Magazine

2
T+M Rename a tool

3
T+M Disable magazine locations -
4
T+M Test oversize tools

5
T+M Test tools with fixed locations
6
T+M Test interruption scenarios in tool
changer
 Reset the channel
7
 Emergency stop
 Isolator switch
M Test Hand loaded Tools in

8
program
T+M L6 Optimised, Spindle Tool =
9
Pre-selected Tool

8.3.5 Tool List

relevant
T+M Enter a new tool directly in the
1 spindle

2 Magazine

3 Buffer
T+M Delete a tool directly in Spindle

4
T+M Delete a tool from the Magazine
5
T+M Delete a tool from the buffer
6
T+M Unload the tool in the spindle

7
T+M Machine with sub-spindle should

be possible to create 2 tools for
8 1 turret position (different tool
types !!!)
T+M It must be possible to

program/call a tool with tool
9 name (e.g. T="name") and also
turret position T1
T+M
10 Relocate a tool in the Spindle
T+M
11 Tool Change in Inch and Metric

8.4 Geometry
8.4.1 Circularity test HMI

No Comments / not
relevant
T+M
1 Geometry axis
T+M
2 Thread boring
8.4.2 Renishaw circularity test

No Comments / not
relevant
T+M
1 Machine axis
T+M
2 Geometry axis
8.5 Safety Integrated
8.5.1 Safety related test

No Comments / not
relevant
T+M Safety integrated protocol
1
attached.

8.6 Password protection
8.6.1 Securing data areas

No Comments / not
relevant
T+M Key switch 
Tools
1
Tool wear length and radius
Tool length and radius
T+M Key switch 
2
Create a tool
T+M Key switch 
3
Delete a tool
T+M Programming 
4
Open program
T+M Programming 
5
Edit program
T+M Programming 
6
Select program (NC)
T+M Offsets 
fine
7
coarse
10
11

8.7 Various
No Comments / not
relevant
T+M EUNA data input in
1
Prototype
T+M
2 EUNA data Upload Test
T+M Clone backup (TGZ )

3 available for Series
machines.
T+M Country specific safety
regulations included in
4
PLC program + door
interlocks etc.
T+M NCK, HMI, PLC and Drive
5
archives tested.
T+M TGZ file for series
6
production tested
T+M Adaptive Friction
7
compensation active
T+M Advanced Surface
8 Machine date set and
tested
T+M Customer Cycles
9
optimised and tested






A060 System Overview
Sinumerik
Operate
Module Description:
The 840D sl Sinumerik Operate system is made up of a variety of hardware components.

This module gives a graphical overview of some of the components and shows where each com-
ponent is connected.
A detailed description of the components is given in the NC61 catalogue.
Module Objective:
Upon completion of this module you will have a basic understanding of the 840D sl Sinumerik Op-
erate system and the components which make up the system.
Content: 840D sl with TCU

840D sl with PCU50.x
Sinumerik
840D sl with PCU50.x and TCU

Component Overview: SINAMICS S120 / 840D sl
NCU and NX Modules
S120 Booksize Components
S120 Line Modules DC link Components
S120 Motor Modules
Sensor Modules
Terminal Modules, DRIVE CLIQ Hub
Operator panels
Drive CLiQ rules
840D sl Sinumerik Operate V4.5 Page 1 This document was produced for training purposes.
A060
A060
A060 Page 2 840D sl Sinumerik Operate

System Overview A060
System Overview:
START
Sensor
Modules
840D sl with
TCU
Terminal
Modules,
DRIVE CLIQ
Hub
840D sl with
PCU50.x
Operator
Panels
840D sl with
PCU50.x and
TCU
Drive CLiQ
Rules
Component
Overview:
S120 / 840D sl
System Overview:
END
NCU and NX
Modules
S120
Booksize
Components
S120 Line
Modules &
DC link
Components
S120
Booksize
Motor
Modules
Notes
840D sl Sinumerik Operate Page 3 A060

840D sl with TCU
USB
USB X202 System network.
MCP
Network
hub/switch.
Hand-wheels
via MCP
Connection
kit
X120 system network

Factory
Network Handheld
Digital I/O: Terminal
Sinamics & NC
X120 & X132
DriveCLiQ DMC20
DriveCLiQ DriveCLiQ
DriveCLiQ
Hub
X122
X126 Profibus:
PLC periphery X132
DMS
X120
Scales/encoders
X130 via SMx & DMC
X126 modules.
NCU NX LM MM MM
Filter
Sinamics S120
Booksize
X127
Service
Supply Network
Reactor
Notes

840D sl with PCU50.5
DVI External monitor

X1
Factory network.
OP0xx & PCU50.x
USB
USB
X501
USB
USB X500 System network.
Network
hub/switch.
Hand-wheels
via MCP
Connection
kit
X120 system network

Factory
Network Handheld
Terminal
Digital I/O:
Sinamics & NC
X120 & X132
DriveCLiQ DMC20
DriveCLiQ DriveCLiQ
DriveCLiQ
Hub
X122
X126 Profibus:
PLC periphery X132
DMS
X120
Scales/encoders
X130 via SMx & DMC
X126 modules.
NCU NX LM MM MM
Filter
Sinamics S120
Booksize
X127
Service
Network
Reactor
Notes

840D sl with PCU50.x and TCU
DVI
Factory
OP0xx & PCU50.x Network
USB
USB X501
USB X500 USB X202
USB USB
MCP
Network
hub/switch.
Connection
kit
X120 system network
Handheld
Terminal
Digital I/O:
Sinamics & NC
X120 & X132
X122 DMC20
X126 Profibus: DriveCLiQ
PLC periphery X132 Hub.
X120
X130
X126
NCU NX LM MM
Filter
Sinamics S120 DMS
Booksize Scales/encoders
via SMx & DMC
X127 modules.
Service
Network
Reactor
Notes

Component Overview: S120 / 840D sl
SINUMERIK and SINAMICS automation system components.
NCU 710.3
NCU 720.3
NCU 730.3
NX 10.3
NX 15.3
Notes

840D sl NCU and NX
840D sl NCU and NX
NCU
SINAMICS S120 Line Module
Motor Module
NX10
NX15
Property NCU 710.3 PN NCU 720.3 PN NCU 730.3 PN
Cooling ribs No Yes Yes
DRIVE-CLiQ Ports 4 6 6
Axes Up to 8 Up to 31 Up to 31
NX10.3 / 15.3 Up to 2 Up to 5 Up to 5
TCU Up to 2 Up to 4 Up to 4
Notes

Key Data for NCU and NX
Notes

Schematic representation of the NCU 7x0
X150 PROFINET
X126 PROFIBUS DP
X136 PROFIBUS
DP 2
Internal structure of the NCU
SINAMICS
integrated
SOC 2
PROFINET
Notes

NCU 730.3
Measuring Sockets Location:

Socket Function Technical data
T0 Measuring socket 1 Resolution: 8 bit, max. output range of the test signal: 0 ... 5 V
T1 Measuring socket 2 Load current: max. 3 mA
T2 Measuring socket 3
M Ground The reference potential is terminal M
The measuring sockets are only suited for banana plugs with a diameter of 2 mm.
Notes

Name Function Status Meaning

RDY Ready Red There is at least one fault (e.g. RESET, watchdog
monitoring etc. ) or the Control Unit is booting up.
Flashing red/orange Error accessing Compact Flash Card

(0.5 Hz)
Orange Accessing Compact Flash Card
Flashing orange (0.5 Hz) Updating the firmware of the connected DRIVE-CLiQ
components
Flashing orange (2 Hz) Firmware update is complete for components. Wait for
POWER ON for the components in question.
Green NC powered up and everything in cyclic mode
Flashing green/orange or LED-supported recognition of connected DRIVE-CLiQ
red/orange (1 Hz) component is activated: (p0124[0] = 1).
RUN PLC Run Green PLC ready to operate
STOP PLC Stop Orange PLC stopped
SU/PF PLC FORCE Red FORCE activated
SF PLC SF Red PLC group error
DP BUS1 F Red PROFIBUS group error X126
DP/MPI BUS2 F Red PROFIBUS group error X136
PN PN Fault Red PROFINET IO group error X150
SY/MT PN SYNC Green  Synchronization status (SY) of the onboard PROFINET
IO interface (X150)
 Maintenance status (MT) of the NCU
(presently without function)
OPT BUS3 F Off The PROFINET system runs correctly; data exchange to all
configured IO devices runs.
Rot  Bus fault (no physical connection)
 Incorrect transmission rate
Flashing red  Failure of a connected I/O device.
(2 Hz)  Incorrect or no configuration.
NOTICE
If all the LEDs are flashing, the PLC must be reset via the mode selector (move switch to
position "3" to reboot).
Notes

NX10.3/NX15.3
Notes

Status LEDs - NX10.3 / 15.3
LED Color Status Description

RDY Off Electronic power supply outside permissible tolerance range
Green Continuous light NX is ready for operation

Flashing light 2 Hz Writing to Compact Flash Card
Red Continuous light NX is presently booting and at least one fault is present (e.g. RESET,
watchdog monitoring, basic system fault).
Flashing light 0.5 Hz Boot error (e.g. firmware cannot be loaded into the RAM)
Orange Continuous light Firmware loading into RAM
Flashing light 0.5 Hz Unable to load firmware into RAM
Flashing light 2 Hz Firmware CRC fault
DP Off Electronics power supply outside the permissible tolerance range, NX
is not ready to run.
Green Continuous light CU_LINK is ready for communication and cyclic communication is
running.
Flashing light 0.5 Hz CU_LINK is ready for communication and no cyclic communication is
running.
Red Continuous light At least one CU_LINK fault is present.
CU_LINK not ready for operation (e.g., after switching on)
RESET button
The RESET button is on the front of the module under the cover.
NOTICE
When the pushbutton is actuated, the locally connected drive systems are brought to a
standstill with no feedback to the control. In other words, the drive and controller run
asynchronously once the drive has successfully booted up.
Notes

NX10 / NX15: Connection DRIVE CLiQ
X105
15
X100
14
NX10/15 (1)
NX10/15 (2)
DRIVE-CLiQ topology
NX components can be connected to the Control Unit via DRIVE-CLiQ. The following rules apply for the
wiring:
 Only one star topology is permitted between the NX and the Control Unit. This means that only one NX
can be operated per DRIVE-CLiQ port on a Control Unit.
 DRIVE-CLiQ ports not assigned to NX can be wired to other DRIVE-CLiQ components.
 Once an NX has been connected and configured, you cannot simply insert it into a different DRIVE-
CLiQ port, as the addresses of the integrated drives are set permanently from the point of view of the
PLC.
The following table illustrates this relation:
DRIVE-CLiQ Port Drive PROFIBUS addresses

X105 15
X104 14
X103 13
X102 12
X101 11
Notes

S120 Booksize Components
840D sl as central control unit
Line Modules for power supply :

 Smart Line Module 400V max. 55kW
 Basic Line Module 400V max. 100kW
 Active Line Modules 400V max. 120kW
One or several motor modules to control the motors

 Single Motor Module, max 200A
 Double Motor Module, max 18A
Optional DC Link Components

 Braking Module
 Braking Resistor
 Capacitor Module
Additional Optional Components:
Sensor Modules: SMC10 (Resolver)

SMC20 (Encoder)
SMC30 (TTL/HTL)
Terminal Modules: TM15, TM31, TM41
Active/ Smart Line Module

Central power supply to the DC link is provided by Book size line modules
Single/ Double Motor Module

Book size motor modules obtain their energy from the DC link and supply the connected motors.
SMC10/20/30
Cabinet-mounted sensor modules are used when a motor with a DRIVE-CLiQ interface is not available and
external encoders are required in addition to the motor encoder.
SME20/25
Measuring systems outside the cabinet can be connected directly to the Sensor Module External.
Notes

SINAMICS: Component Connection Diagram
Quicker and easier Start-up with SMI

Automatic detection of motors and encoders
Storage of technical and logistics data
Storage of the equivalent circuit diagram and encoder data in the motor
Integration of direct position measurement systems

Use of measuring systems with DRIVE-CLiQ interface
Use of SMC/SME modules for signal conversion to DRIVE-CLiQ
Third-Party Encoders / Motors

Integration via SMC/SME modules
Parameter assignment via start-up screens
Motion Connect 500 mainly for fix wiring.
Motion Connect 500 plus

for low mechanical load
.
Motion Connect 700 for highly dynamic machines (e.g. Linear drives).
Motion Connect 800 or the high mechanical needs in drag chains.
Notes

S120 Line Modules & DC link components
Smart Line Modules

Autonomous unregulated infeed/regenerative feed-
back unit (line-commutated feedback via IGBTs)
Active Line Modules

 Self-commutated infeed/regenerative feedback unit
(with bidirectional IGBTs)
 Reduced line harmonics with highest drive dynam-
ics; robust with weak mains systems; high availability
 Improved utilization of motors via higher,
regulated DC link voltage
 With DRIVE-CLiQ for control from the Control unit
CU
Basic Line Modules

 unregulated DC Link Voltage
 No regenerative feedback
 With all BLM: DC-link rails to both sides of line mod-
ule
Active Interface Modules for 16 kW, 36 kW, 55 kW und 80 W/120 kW
Active Interface Modules

are line-side interfaces for the Active Line Modules.
They contain the following functional units:
 Line reactors
 Low-frequency/switching frequency filters
 Line filters to EN 61800-3, category C3
Line Reactor for Line Modules

A line reactor is always required.
• On Active line modules, it is absolutely essential for the operation of the step-up converter.
• Is mandatory with Smart Line Modules to reduce the line harmonics and to protect against high
overshoot currents.
Networks All Line Modules are designed for connection to grounded, star (TN, TT) and non-grounded, symmet-
rical IT supply systems.
BLM The 100kW module hasn‘t got the integrated braking resistor module control.
Notes

Smart Line Modules - 5 kW and 10 kW
Terminal strip X21 for Smart Line Modules 5 kW and 10 kW

Terminal Designation Technical specifications
1 DO: Ready Check back signal: Smart Line Module ready
The signal switches to high level when the following
conditions have been met:
 Electronics power supply (X24) OK
 DC link is precharged
 Pulses enabled (X21.3/4)
 No over-temperature
 No over-current
2 DO: Prewarning DO: Prewarning
High = no prewarning
Low = prewarning
 Over-temperature warning threshold/I2t
5 kW
prewarning: 64°C, over-temperature threshold: 69°C
10 kW
prewarning: 68°C, over-temperature threshold: 73 ℃
 No regenerative feedback capability due to a line fault
[only monitored when feedback is activated (see
terminal X22.2)]
3 EP +24 V (Enable Pulses) Voltage 24 VDC
Current consumption: 10 mA
4 EP M (Enable Pulses) Isolated input
Max. connectable cross-section: 1.5 mm2
Type: Screw terminal 1 (see the chapter titled "Control cabinet installation and EMC/Connection system")
Terminal strip X22 for Smart Line Modules 5 kW and 10 kW

1 24 V power supply Electronics power supply for controlling digital inputs
X22.2 and 3.
2 DI: Disable Regeneration Deactivate feedback (high active).
No power is supplied back to the network from the DC
link. The regenerative energy of the motors may have
to be reduced using a combination of the Braking
Module and braking resistor.
3 DI: Reset Reset faults (negative edge)
4 Ground Electronics ground
Max. connectable cross-section: 1.5 mm2
X24 24 V terminal adapter
Terminal strip X24

1 24 V power supply Power supply voltage DC 24 V
4 Ground Electronics ground
The 24 V terminal adapter is supplied as standard.

Max. connectable cross-section: 6 mm2
Notes

LED Status - 5 kW and 10 kW Smart Line Modules

LED Color Status Description, cause Remedy
RDY Off Electronics power supply is missing or outside —
permissible tolerance range.
Green Continuous light Component is ready to operate. —
Orange Continuous light Pre-charging not yet complete. —
bypass relay dropped out
EP terminals not supplied with 24 V DC.
Red Continuous light Over-temperature, Diagnose fault (via output
Over-current terminals) and acknowledge it
(via input terminal)
DC LINK — Off Electronics power supply is missing or outside —
permissible tolerance range.
Orange Continuous light DC link voltage within permissible tolerance range. —
Red Continuous light DC link voltage outside permissible tolerance range. Check the line voltage.
Line supply fault.
16 kW to 55 kW Smart Line Modules

Terminal strip X21 (EP terminals) for 16 kW to 55 kW Smart Line Modules
Terminal Function Technical specifications
1 + TEMP Temperature sensors1): KTY 84-1C130/PTC/bimetallic

2 - TEMP switch with NC contact
3 EP +24 V (Enable Pulses) Voltage: 24 VDC

4 EP M (Enable Pulses) Isolated input
Signal propagation times:
L → H: 100 μs
H → L: 1000 μs
1) The temperature sensor type can be selected via parameter p0601; the temperature is displayed via r0035 (see
SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual).
Temperatures are detected but not evaluated in the Smart Line Module.
LED Status - Smart Line Modules ≥ 16 kW

Status Description, cause Remedy
RDY DC LINK
Off Off Electronics power supply is missing or outside permissible tolerance range. —
Green — The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking —
place.
Orange The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking —
place. The DC link voltage is present.
Red The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking Check line voltage
place. The DC link voltage is too high.
Orange Orange DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established. —
Red — At least one fault is present in this component. Remedy and
Note: acknowledge
The LED is activated regardless of whether the corresponding messages have been fault
reconfigured.
Green/red — Firmware is being downloaded. —
(0,5 Hz)
Green/red — Firmware download is complete. Wait for POWER ON. Carry out a POWER
(2 Hz) ON
Green/orange — Component detection via LED is activated (p0124). —
or Note:
Red/orange Both options depend on the LED status when
component recognition is activated via p0124 = 1.
Notes

SINAMICS Power Components : Line Modules
Properties of Infeed
• Supply voltage 3AC 380-480V, 50/60Hz
• IP20 protection
• cooling: Internal and external air cooling
• Ambient temperature: 0-40 °C without derating, to 55°C with derating
• Height: 380mm
• Depth: 270mm
Smart line modules Supply power (kW) / width (mm)
• 5/50 -> without Drive-CLiQ ports
• 10/50 -> without Drive-CLiQ ports
• 16/100
• 36/150
• 50/200
Active line modules Supply power (kW) / width (mm)
• 16/100
• 36/150
• 55/200
• 80/300
• 120/300
ALM Control Modes
Control Modes The active line module can be operated in one of two different control modes,
depending on the parameterized line supply voltage (p210):
Active Mode DC link voltage is controlled with respect to a settable reference value.
The Line Module acts as a Step-up converter with regulated DC link voltage and
sinusoidal supply voltage.
Smart mode The DC link voltage is not regulated, but results from the rectified supply voltage
Notes

ALM Control Modes
SINAMICS: DC Link Components
Braking
Braking Module
Module und Bremswiderstände
and braking resistors
Two braking resistors are available:
Zwei Bremswiderstände stehen zur Verfügung:
Booksize: 0,3 kW continuous braking power
Booksize: 0,3 kW Dauerbremsleistung
(25 kW peak power)
(25 kW braking
1,5 kW continuous Spitzenleistung)
power
(100 kW peak
1,5 kW power)
Dauerbremsleistung
(100 kW Spitzenleistung)
Capacitor Module
Capacitor modules
IsDient zur
used for Erhöhung
increasing the DCder
linkZwischenkreiskapazität
capacity in order um
tokurzzeitige
deal with shortNetzausfälle
power failures zu überbrücken.
Control Supply Modules

Control
Supplies DC Supply
24V powerModule
via the mains or
via the DC
Stellt DC link.24-V-Stromversorgung über das Netz oder
This way it is possible, for example, to perform
den Zwischenkreis zur Verfügung.
emergency retraction motions in a controlled way
Damit ist es beispielsweise möglich gezielte
Notrückzugsbewegungen durchzuführen.
Braking Modules/ Braking Resistor

Conversion of DC link energy to thermal loss in the external braking resistor.
As the Smart and Active Line Modules are capable of feedback, braking modules and braking resistors
are not required for normal operation.
These components must only be provided if a machine must be stopped
in a controlled way at power failure (feedback operation no longer possible).
Notes

S120 Booksize Motor Modules
Features Booksize Format

• With the double motor modules two autonomous motor modules are integrated
in one housing (space savings up to 50%)
• Connection via the DC link and DC 24V bus bars integrated in the system.
• Safety Integrated functions such as "safe standstill" (SH/SBH) and
"safe braking control" (SBC).
• Overload capacity of the motor modules similar to SIMODRIVE 611.
• The specified depth of 270mm only applies to devices with air cooling. Models with forced
convection cooling and cold plate cooling have a reduced depth.
• All components in the SINAMICS S system are cULus approved.
The cULus mark is a test mark of Underwriters Laboratories (UL) and indicates compliance
with UL and CSA (Canadian Standard Association) standards.
Properties of the Motor Modules
• Supply voltage DC 510-720V
• IP20 protection
• Cooling: Internal / external air cooling or cold plate cooling
• Ambient temperature: 0-40 °C without derating, up to 55°C with derating
• Height: 380mm
• Depth: 270mm
Single Motor Modules
Rated output current: from 3A to 200A
Maximum output current: from 6A to 282A
Width: from 50mm to 300mm
Double Motor Modules
Rated output current: from 3A to 18A
Maximum output current: from 6A to 36A
Width: from 50mm to 100mm
Notes

X21/X22 EP terminals / temperature sensor Motor Module
Terminal Function Technical specifications
1 + TEMP Temperature sensors 1): KTY 84-1C130/PTC/bimetallic

switch with NC contact
2 - TEMP
3 EP +24 V (Enable Pulses) Supply voltage: 24 V DC (20.4 V to 28.8 V)

Isolated input
4 EP M (Enable Pulses) Signal propagation times:
L → H: 100 μs
H → L: 1000 μs
The pulse inhibit function is only available when Safety
Integrated Basic Functions are enabled.
1) The temperature sensor type can be selected via parameter p0601; the temperature is displayed via r0035 (see
SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual).
Status LED Description - Motor Modules
Status Description, cause Remedy

RDY DC LINK
Off Off Electronics power supply is missing or outside permissible tolerance range. —
Green — The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking —
place.
Orange The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking —
place. The DC link voltage is present.
Red The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking Check line voltage
place. The DC link voltage is too high.
Orange Orange DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established. —
Red — At least one fault is present in this component. Remedy and
Note: acknowledge fault
The LED is driven irrespective of the corresponding messages being reconfigured.
Green/red — Firmware is being downloaded. —

(0.5 Hz)
Green/red — Firmware download is complete. Wait for POWER ON. POWER OFF/ON
(2 Hz)
Green/orange — Detection of the components via LED is activated (p0124). —
or Note:
Red/orange Both options depend on the LED status when module recognition is activated via
p0124 = 1.
Notes

Sensor Module
Sensor Module Cabinet (SMC)
The Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC10, SMC20 and SMC30 be used if a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ interface is
available or if, in addition to the motor encoder further external sensors are required. The SMCs evaluate these measur-
ing systems and set the values to Drive-CLiQ.
The SMC supplies the power to the encoder; the SMC, however, must be provided separately with 24 VDC power.
SMC10/20
SMC30 The SMCs have the following interfaces:
 1 DRIVE-CLiQ interface
 1 encoder connection, including motor

temperature detection (KTY84-130 or PTC) via Sub
-D connector or terminals
 1 connection for the electronics power supply via

the 24 V DC power supply connector
 1 PE/protective conductor connection
1) Signal cables twisted in pairs and shielded.
Notes

Status LED Description - SMC 10, SMC 20

RDY — Off Electronics power supply is missing or outside permissible —
READY tolerance range.
Green Continuous light The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE- —
CLiQ communication is taking place.
Orange Continuous light DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established. —
Red Continuous light At least one fault is present in this component. Remedy and
The LED is activated regardless of whether the
corresponding messages have been reconfigured.
Green/Red Flashing Firmware is being downloaded. —
0.5 Hz
Flashing Firmware download is complete. Wait for POWER ON Carry out a POWER
2 Hz ON
Green/orange Flashing light Component recognition via LED is activated (p0144). —
or Note:
Red/orange Both options depend on the LED status when component
recognition is activated via p0144 = 1.
Status LED Description - SMC30

RDY — Off Electronics power supply is missing or outside permissible —
READY tolerance range.
Green Continuous light The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE- —
CLiQ communication is taking place.
Orange Continuous light DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established. —
Red Continuous light At least one fault is present in this component. Remedy and
corresponding messages have been reconfigured
0.5 Hz
Flashing Firmware download is complete. Wait for POWER ON Carry out a POWER
2 Hz ON
Green/orange Flashing light Component recognition via LED is activated (p0144). —
or Note:
Red/orange Both options depend on the LED status when component
recognition is activated via p0144 = 1.
OUT > 5 V — Off Electronics power supply is missing or outside permissible —

tolerance range.
Power supply ≤ 5 V.
Orange Continuous light Electronics power supply for encoder system available. —
Power supply > 5 V.
Important:
Make sure that the connected encoder can be operated
with a 24 V power supply. If an encoder that is designed
for a 5 V supply is operated with a 24 V supply, this can
destroy the encoder electronics.
.
Notes

Sensor Module External (SME)
Direct encoder systems outside the cabinet can be connected to the Sensor Modules External SME20, SME25, SME120 and
SME125 with protection type (IP67) . The SMEs evaluate these encoder systems and convert the values to DRIVE-CLiQ.
The SME provides the encoder power supply. The power supply for the SME is provided from the connected DRIVE-CLiQ
cable.
SME20/SME25 feature the following interfaces:
SME20 / 25 X500 DRIVE-CLiQ-interface

X100 encoder connector via circular plug
24 V DC electronics power supply via DRIVE-CLiQ link from

the Control Unit/Motor Module
 1 PE/protective conductor connection
SME 20
 Incremental direct encoder systems with SIN/COS (1 Vpp) and reference signal can be
connected.
 KTY/PTC temperature sensors can be used for evaluation of the motor temperature.
 The Sensor Module is only suitable for motors without absolute track signals (C/D track):
– Induction motors (e.g. 1PH)
– Synchronous motors with pole position identification (e.g. 1FN, 1FW, 1FE)
SME 25
 Direct encoder systems with EnDat 2.1 or SSI with SIN/COS (1 Vpp) incremental signals
can be connected, however without reference signal.
Notes

SME120 / 125 SME120/SME125 have the following interfaces:
X300 hall-effect sensor connection via circular connector

(SME120 only)
X100 encoder connection via circular connector
X500 DRIVE-CLiQ-interface
X 200 temperature sensor connection via circular connector
24 V DC electronics power supply via DRIVE-CLiQ link

from the Control Unit or Motor Module
1 PE/protective conductor connection
The SME 120/125 are always used when the temperature signals of the motors do not have protective separation or where this
separation is not possible for certain reasons.SME120/SME 125 is mainly used in linear motor applications.
SME 120
A Hall sensor box can be connected to determine the commutation position of a linear motor.
Incremental direct encoder systems with SIN/COS (1 Vpp) and reference signal can be connected.
SME 125
Direct encoder systems with EnDat 2.1 or SSI with SIN/COS (1 Vpp) incremental signals can be connected, however without
reference signal.
Notes

Terminal Module, DRIVE CLIQ Hub
TM 15
The number of available digital inputs and outputs within a drive system can be
expanded with the TM15 Terminal Module. The TM15 Terminal Module communicates
with a Control Unit via DRIVE-CLiQ.
The following are located on the TM15 Terminal Module:
X500/501 2 DRIVE-CLiQ-sockets
X524 Connection for the DC 24-V electronic power supply
RDY multicolor status-LED
X520 24 bidirectional digital inputs/outputs

X521 (isolation in 3 groups with 8 channels each)
X522 24 green status LEDs for indicating the logical signal status of
the relevant terminal
Notes

TM 31
With the TM31 Terminal Module, the number of available digital inputs and outputs and
the number of analog inputs and outputs within a drive system can be expanded.
The TM31 Terminal Module also features relay outputs with changeover
contact and a temperature sensor input.

X500/501 2 DRIVE-CLiQ-sockets
X 524 Connection for the DC 24-V electronic power supply
S5 current/voltage changeover switch for analog inputs
X521 2 analog inputs
X540 Auxiliary voltage for digital inputs
X522 2 analog outputs

1 temperature sensor input (KTY84-130 or PTC)
X520 4 digital inputs

X530 4 digital inputs
X542 2 relay outputs with changeover contact
Notes

TM 41
With the TM41 Terminal Module, the number of available digital inputs and outputs and
the number of analog inputs and outputs within a drive system can be expanded. The
encoder interface of the TM41 delivers TTL signals as incremental encoder simulation to
the Control Unit.

X500/501 2 DRIVE-CLiQ sockets
X524 Connection for the DC 24-V electronic power supply
X514 connection for the 24 V DC supply to digital outputs (X521)
Z-Pulse LED for signalling zero mark detection for encoder interface
X520 1 interface for simulation of TTL incremental encoder (RS422)
X522 4 digital inputs (with electrical isolation)
X523 1 analog inputs
Notes

Status LED Description - Terminal Module TM 15, TM 31:

READY — Off Electronics power supply is missing or outside permissi- —
ble
tolerance range.
Green Continuous The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE- —
light CLiQ communication is taking place.
Orange Continuous DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established. —
light
Red Continuous At least one fault is present in this component. Remedy and
light Note: acknowledge fault
corresponding messages have been reconfigured.
0.5 Hz
Flashing Firmware download is complete. POWER OFF/ON
2 Hz
Green/ Flashing light Component recognition via LED is activated (p0154). —
orange Note:
or Both options depend on the LED status when component
Red/orange recognition is activated via p0154 = 1.
Status LED Description - Terminal Module TM 41:

READY — Off Electronics power supply is missing or outside permissi- —
ble
tolerance range.
Green Continuous The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE- —
light CLiQ communication is taking place.
Orange Continuous DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established. —
light
Red Continuous At least one fault is present in this component. Remedy and
light Note: acknowledge fault
corresponding messages have been reconfigured
0.5 Hz
Flashing Firmware download is complete. Wait for POWER ON POWER OFF/ON
2 Hz
Green/ Flashing light Component recognition via LED is activated (p0154). —
orange Note:
or Both options depend on the LED status when component
Red/orange recognition is activated via p0154 = 1.
Z puls- — Off Zero mark found; wait for zero mark output; OR —
es component switched off.
Red Continuous Zero mark not enabled or zero mark search. —
light
Green Continuous Stopped at zero mark.
light
Flashing light Zero mark is output at each virtual revolution. —
Notes

DRIVE CLIQ Hub.
DMC 20 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module Cabinet 20 / External 20

displacement • Star-shaped distribution of a DRIVE-CLiQ line
• Extension of DRIVE-CLiQ Ports, e.g. for direct encoders
• Separating parts of the drives without errors in the remaining ones
• Parking of parts of the drives
Advantage • The DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module allows individual DRIVE-CLiQ devices to be removed without inter
rupting the data exchange with the remaining devices in the DRIVE-CLiQ line ( Hot-Plugging ).
• Reducing the number of DRIVE-CLiQ cables in the cable carrier, because
signals from more than one encoder can be collected with one DRIVE-CLiQ Hub
Module and forwarded to the Control Unit through a single DRIVE-CLiQ cable.
Notes

Operator panels
Operator panel fronts:
High performance
 Brilliant 8",10" ,12", 15“ and
19"displays“
 USB on the front panel
Rugged
 Front-mounted IP65 with
membrane keyboard
 High MTBF of backlighting
 Temperature up to 55°
Modular
 Can be combined with PCU or
TCU, keyboard and machine
control panel
Machine Control Panels, Hand-Held Controllers:
 SINUMERIK
integrated key switch
 Slots for control devices
 Optional connector for

direct keys/handwheel
 Enabling button
 Emergency STOP
 Ergonomic
Notes

PCU 50.5
Fan ON/OFF DC 24V 2x Ethernet 2 x PCI
Profibus 4x USB2.0 RS232 DVI-I

DP/MPI
Interface:
 2 Ethernet 10/100/1000 MBit/s,
 4 external USB ports (USB 2.0 Typ A)
 DVI-I-Interface (VGA-Monitors via optional adapter)
 12 MBit/s PROFIBUS-DP / MPI
 SINUMERIK Operator panel front
Expansion slots:
 PCI-Slot (Slot 1 / Slot 2)
 Compact Flash Card
Multiple Operator Panels on 1 NCU + 1 PCU
 User interface on several

OPs with one TCU each
 NCU 710 up to 2
 PCU 50.5 or
NCU 720/730 up to 4
 Different screen resolutions pos-
sible
 100 m between the switch and
device
 Arbitrary number of panels
through intelligent displacement
with more than 2/4 TCUs
(n x T compared to 1 x M
Notes

Drive CLiQ rules
Obligatory Rules for DRIVE-CliQ
•• Max. 198
Max. 198 DRIVE-CLiQ
DRIVE-CLiQ Teilnehmer
participants per NCU pro NCU
• Max. 14 participants on one connnector
•• Max.
Max 8 14 Teilnehmer
participants in a row an einem Anschluss
• No ring wiring
•• Max 7 Teilnehmer
No Double wiring in Reihe
• Keine Ringverdrahtung
• Keine Doppelverdrahtung
No ring wiring
No Double wiring
Optional Rules for DRIVE-CliQ
Adherence to these rules

• Motorgeber anallows automatic topology
zugehörigem MoModetection.
• For a motor module, the associated motor encoder must also
• Möglichst viele NCU-Ports nutzen
be connected.
• Use as many of the DRIVE-CLiQ connection points on the
NCU as possible as this allows better capacity utilization.
Notes

SINUMERIK 840D sl drive quantity framework
Supplementary conditions
General rules DQ-cycle No. Remark
Only SERVO control
No TMs permitted
No add-ons in addition to linear / rotary safety
125µs 14 axes
Double Motor Modules AC/AC have not been considered
Max. number of DQ count as two components The current hardware configuration determines
nodes / port / DRIVE-CLiQ HUB is not the components to be considered (also deactivat-
5 counted*) ed DOs / Sensor Modules must be considered in
62,5µs
the quantity framework)
NC SI is provided for all axes
Max. number of DQ Double Motor Modules and Tdp >= 2ms / TncSI >= 12 ms
nodes along the -/- 8 DRIVE CLiQ HUB count as The sampling times are set via p112 = 3 (4 kHz)
resp. p112 = 4 (8 kHz)
longest path two components *)
Motor Direct DRIVE-CLIQ

measuring measuring HUB
Quantity frameworks DQ-cycle NCU NX ALM MOMO systems systems
NCU + NX, max 125µs 1 1-5 1 5 5 5 4

125µs 1 6 6 6 4
NX15, max 62,5µs 1 3 3 3 1
31,25µs 1 1 1 1 1
NX10, max 125µs 1 3 3 3 1
*) 840D sl Basic /
NCU710.3 + S120 125µs The SINAMICS S120 Combi counts as 5/6 DRIVE-CLiQ components
Combi, max
Notes

A060 END System Overview
IP-Adressen NCU
X120 System Network
IP Address Network Station Remarks
192.168.214.1 NCU on X120 Default
192.168.214.2 - 9 Additional NCUs with fixed IP address Unassigned
192.168.214.10 - 239 Fixed Additional TCUs, subsequently for additional PCUs, NCUs, DHCP clients
MCPs & MPPs
192.168.214.241 Fixed IP address for PCU50 (Connected via ETH2 of PCU) Default
192.168.214.242 - 249 Additional PCUs with a fixed IP address Unassigned
192.168.214.250 - 254 For PGs/PCs with a fixed IP address (Service connection) Unassigned
X127 Service Network
IP Address Network Device Remarks
192.168.215.1 NCU on X127 Default
192.168.215.2 - 23 Service use with PG/PC DHCP clients
192.168.215.24 - 30 For fixed IP devices e.g. modem Unassigned
A060: END

A002 Service and Commissioning Tools
Sinumerik
Operate
Module Description:
In order to integrate the Sinumerik 840D sl CNC to a machine tool, various software tools are re-
quired. The tools which enable the machine tool builder to create the PLC program for the machine,
configure the drives etc. Some of the software tools are also used for service tasks.
Software to be installed:
 PLC Toolbox DVD (PLC basic program, Sinumerik Add-on for STEP7, NC Var selector, PLC
symbols generator)
 Start-up Tool - From the Sinucom commissioning/service DVD. (Configuration of Tool Manage-
ment, configuration of drives and running service commands)
 Access MyMachine - System card back-up, Remote control (Viewer)
Simatic Manager installation is not covered in this module but is a requirement.
Module Objective:
Upon completion of this module the course participant will be able to do the following:
 Install the software tools from the PLC toolbox DVD.

 Install the Access MyMachine software tool.
 Install the Start-up Tool
 Set the network settings of the host computer
 Connect to the controller using each of the software packages.
Content:
PLC Toolbox Installation.
Sinumerik
Start-up Tool Installation
Access MyMachine Installation.
Network Settings
Online Connection-Access MyMachine
Online Connection-HMI Advanced
Online Connection-Simatic Manager
840D sl SINUMERIK Operate V4.5 Page 1 This document was produced for training purposes.
A002
A002
A002 Page 2 840D sl SINUMERIK Operate

Service and Commissioning Tools A002
Service and
Commissioning
Tools:
START Online
Connection:
SIMATIC Manager
PLC Toolbox
Installation
Service and
Commissioning
Tools:
END
Start-up (IBN)
Tool
Installation
Access
MyMachine
Installation
Network Settings
Online
Connection:
Access MyMachine
Online
Connection:
Start-up (IBN) Tool
Notes
840D sl SINUMERIK Operate Page 3 A002

PLC Toolbox Installation The Toolbox components need to be selected:
Toolbox content:
PLC Basic Program for 840D sl
Sinumerik Add-on for STEP7
NCVar Selector
PLC Symbols Generator
Installation Process:
Installation is started with the “setup.exe” file.
Double click the “Setup.exe”

file to start the toolbox
installation.
Acknowledge any dialogue boxes and allow the installation to

complete.
The toolbox components will now be installed, starting with A dialogue box will confirm that the installation was success-
the PLC Basic Program. ful:
Notes

Start-up Tool Installation Acknowledge any dialogue boxes and allow the installation to
complete.
The Start-up Tool can be found on the Sinucom Commission-
ing/Service Tools DVD For the 840D sl controller, the “SolutionLine” variant has to be
(Part number for current version: 6FC5250-0AY00-0AG0) selected.
The Start-up (IBN) Tool software must only be used for drive
configuration and tool management set-up.
Installation:
Installation is initialised by running the “Setup.exe” file:
On completion, the computer needs to be restarted in order to

finalise the installation.
Notes

Access MyMachine Installation Installation:
Access MyMachine allows a remote operation between the To install the Access MyMachine software, locate the
828D controller and a computer running windows. “Setup.exe” file in the root of the Access MyMachine DVD.
Start the installation by double clicking the file.
Data such as part programs can be transferred between the
remote computer and the controller.
A viewer is included which is used to view and change the

controller settings remotely (Dependant upon access rights).
The software can also be used to write images to compact

flash cards for service and commissioning tasks.
Note:
The Access MyMachine software is not part of the toolbox
DVD.
Double click the

“Setup.exe” file to start
the installation.
Acknowledge any dialogue boxes and allow the installation to

complete.
Network Settings Select the “Network and Sharing Center” option.

X127 is a DHCP server with a fixed IP address of
192.168.215.1 and subnet mask of 255.255.255.224
IP addresses from 192.168.215.2 to 192.168.215.31 are auto-
matically issued to any PC connected to X127.
The name of the network adapter of the PC is required.
This can be found in the “Network connections” area of the
computer:
Select “Control
Panel” from the
Start Menu of the Select “Change
PC. adapter settings”
Notes

Make a note of the name of the network adapter associated Select the “Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)” option,
with the Local Area Connection. followed by the “Properties” button:
In the example below the network adapter is of the type:
Intel® 82579LM Gigabit Network.
Note: Network adapter may be different between PC makes

and types.
Double click the Local Area Connection icon:
Select the “Obtain an IP address automatically” option. Connect a suitable Ethernet cable between the PC and X127
of the controller. In some situations this may need to be a
cross-over cable.
The connection status can be checked via the “Details” option
of the Local Area Connection.
The PC is now set to receive an IP address from a DCHP

server, i.e. X127 of the 828D controller.
Notes

The PC has been assigned the first available IP address of

192.168.215.2 by the DHCP server of X127.
Online Connection-Access MyMachine Set the privilege level to “Run this program as an administra-
tor“
Administrator Privilege Level
The Toolbox programs should always be run with privileges
set to Administrator.
Setting the Administrator Privilege:

Right click on the icon of the Access MyMachine program and
select “Properties“.
Notes

A dialogue box appears where the choice of connection is

made.
A default connection is available, this is specifically for
connecting to X127 of the controller (IP address
192.168.215.1).
When the program is opened for the first time after the
installation it is necessary to assign a password for encryption
purposes.
It is necessary to login with a password depending on the ac- The access level determines which data can be accessed via
cess level required: Access MyMachine.
The “Manufacturer” login grants the most access, the “User”
login is the most restrictive.
Select the login and enter the password.
Passwords:
Manufacturer-SUNRISE
Service-EVENING
User-CUSTOMER
Notes

After a short delay the data folders of the controller will appear in the lower half of the Access MyMachine program, this indicates
that a successful connection was made.
Online Connection: StartUp (IBN) Tool Administrator Privilege Level

The Toolbox programs should always be run with privileges
During installation a folder is created on the desktop of the set to Administrator.
computer. Within this folder are shortcuts for starting the NC
Connect Wizard and the StartUp Tool. Setting the Administrator Privilege:
Right click on the icon of the StartUp Tool program and se-
lect “Properties“
Note: For Windows 7 version, IBN Start-up in separate Desk-

top is not supported.
Notes

NC Connect Wizard:
The NC Connect Wizard is used to select the interface and
adjust the settings which enable the StartUp Tool to commu-
nicate with the controller.
Choose the 840D solutionline option:
Select the “Engineering Tools (Recommended)” option. Connection/cabling information is provided, a crossover or
This is specifically for connecting via X127 straight cable can be used depending upon the network adapt-
er of the PG/PC.
Notes

Setting the PG/PC Interface:

X127 has a fixed IP address of 192.168.215.1.
It is also necessary to check the PG/PC interface setting to
ensure that the software is able to communicate. These set-
tings are checked in the “Control Panel” area of the PG/PC.
In the “Control Panel” area, select and open the “Set PG/PC
Interface” program.
The connection setting can be saved under a suitable name

for future use, do not change any other settings.
Select “Finish” to complete the task.
The Access point and network adapter have to be selected.

The Access Point required is the “Sinumerik_CP” option.
Network adaptor example: Intel® 82579LM Gigabit Network
The “Access Point

of the Application”
needs to be
selected from the
list.
(SINUMERIK_CP)
Select the
network adapter
which is in use.
Connect an ethernet cable between the computer and port
X127 of the controller. Run the Start-up tool via the “Start-Up
Tool” shortcut.
Notes

The software will boot to the following screen: Online Connection: SIMATIC Manager
A SIMATIC Manager shortcut icon is placed on the
PC desktop during the installation process.
Administrator Privilege Level

The service/commissioning programs should always be run
with privileges set to Administrator.
Setting the Administrator Privilege:

Right click on the icon of the SIMATIC Manager program and
select “Properties“
To exit the software, select the F10 key on the PG/PC

keyboard followed by the “EXIT” soft-key.
F10
Set the privilege level to “Run the program as administrator“ Setting the PG/PC Interface:
To allow the program to communicate via Ethernet it is nec-

essary to set the PG/PC interface.
Start the SIMATIC Manager program
The setting for the connection can now be changed. Open the
“Options” menu and select “Set PG/PC Interface.
Notes

A002 END Service and Commissioning Tools
The Ethernet adapter of the computer needs to be selected

from the list.
In the example below, the network adapter is of the type:
Intel® 82579LM Gigabit Network.
Any changes are indicated with an information box.
Checking the online connection: The accessible nodes in this case are:
Ensure that a suitable Ethernet cable is connected between Numerical Control Unit (ncu1)
the PC and X127 of the controller. Thin Client Unit (TCU1)
Machine Control Panel (mcp-ie192)
To check the connection select “Accessible nodes” on the tool
bar.
After a short delay the available Accessible nodes will be dis-

played.
Accessible nodes are the hardware components which are
connected to X120. The internal routing of the controller allows
these to be accessed via X127
Seeing these shows that the connection to the controller has
been established.
A002: END
Notes

A061 Menu Structure
Sinumerik
Operate
Module Description:
The 840D sl SINUMERIK Operate system is split into 6 menu areas. Each menu area is sub-
divided to allow the user easy access to the necessary areas of the system.
Menu Areas:
 Machine
 Parameter
 Program
 Program Manager
 Diagnostics
 Start-up
Module Objective:
Upon completion of this module you will know the menu areas of the 840D sl SINUMERIK Operate
system.
Content:
Sinumerik
Menu Select Button

Mode Selection
Menu Selection
Menu Area: Machine
Menu Area: Parameter
Menu Area: Program
Menu Area: Program Manager
Menu Area: Diagnostics
Menu Area: Start-up
Short Cut Keys
A061
A061

Menu Structure A061
Menu
Structure:
START
Menu Area:
Program
Manager
Menu Select
Button
Menu Area:
Diagnostics
Mode
Selection
Menu Area:
Start-up
Menu
Selection
Short cut
keys
Menu Area:
Machine (JOG
Mode)
Menu
Structure:
END
Menu Area:
Machine (MDA
Mode)
Menu Area:
Machine
(AUTO Mode)
Menu Area:
Parameter
Menu Area:
Program
Notes

A061 Menu Structure
Menu Select Button
The menu system of the 840D sl SINUMERIK Operate is accessed via the “Menu Select” button.
The location of the “Menu Select” button is always to the lower right of the screen of the operator panel.
Examples:
Notes

Menu Structure A061
Mode Selection
Pressing the Menu Select button reveals 6 horizontal menu soft-keys and 5 vertical soft-keys.
The 5 vertical soft-keys can be used to change between the machine modes: This can also be
achieved via the Machine Control Panel.
Vertical Soft-key Functionality:
Automatic mode (AUTO) is selected.
Manual Data Automatic mode (MDA) is selected.
Jog mode (JOG) is selected.
Reposition mode (REPOS) is selected.
Reference Point (REF POINT) mode is selected.
Notes

A061 Menu Structure
Menu Selection
The 6 horizontal soft-keys are used to select the different menus.

It is also possible to select the menus via the integrated NC keyboard of certain types of OP or the remote NC keyboard versions.
Menu Soft-keys: Brief Description
The Machine menu displays information such as the axis

positions, distances to go, feedrates, spindle speeds, active tool etc
Functionality such as manual tool selection, tool/work-piece measurement, hand-
wheel selection can be performed by selecting the relevant soft-key.
The functionality depends upon the selected operating mode.
The Parameter menu displays information such tool/magazine data, work offsets,
user variables etc.
It is possible to carry out functions such as creating tools, editing existing tool/
magazine data, editing work offsets/variables/setting data.
The Program menu is used to display a part program, only if a program is already
open will its contents be displayed. Editing of the part program is possible here. If
a part program is not already open, the Program Manager will be open.
The Program Manager menu displays the “Part program/subprogram/workpiece”

directories. Programs/subprograms/workpieces can be
created or opened for editing. It is also possible to save to/from controller using
memory devices (CF/USB) or RS232 interface.
The Diagnostics menu is used for diagnosing machine problems, information

about current/past alarms can be viewed. The status of drives, axes, networks,
NC/PLC variables, utilization etc can be viewed. It is also possible to check the
software/hardware versions of the system.
Machine information and service reports are also entered via the
diagnostics menu.
The Start-up menu is used for a wide variety of functions, these

Include password entry, machine data modifications, creating archives, creating
alarm files, time/date settings, network set-up, licensing/option selection, system
data management, servo optimisation etc.
Reboot HMI
A further soft-key is available which is used for rebooting the HMI only. This is
found via the Menu extension key.
Notes

Menu Structure A061
Menu Area: Machine (JOG Mode)
Menu Area: Machine (MDA Mode)
Notes

A061 Menu Structure
Menu Area: Machine (AUTO Mode)
Menu Area: Parameter
Notes

Menu Structure A061
Menu Area: Program
Menu Area: Program Manager
Notes

A061 Menu Structure
Menu Area: Diagnostics
Menu Area: Start-up
Notes

Menu Structure A061
Short cut Key sequences
Keys Function
+ In the program manager and in the program editor from the cursor position,
selects directories or program blocks up to the beginning of the window.
+ Positions the cursor to the topmost line of a window.
+ In the program manager and in the program editor from the cursor position,
selects directories or program blocks up to the end of the window.
+ Positions the cursor to the lowest line of a window.
+ Editing box - Moves the cursor further to the right by one word.
Navigation - Moves the cursor in a table to the next cell to the right.
Keys Function
+ Editing box - Moves the cursor further to the left by one word.
Navigation - Moves the cursor in a table to the next cell to the left.
+ Editing box - Moves the cursor in the table to the beginning of the table.
Navigation - Moves the cursor to the beginning of a window.
+ In the program manager and in the program editor, selects a contiguous

selection of directories and program blocks.
+ Editing box - Moves the cursor in the table to the end of the table.
Navigation - Moves the cursor to the end of a window.
+ In the program manager and in the program editor, selects a contiguous,

selection of directories and program blocks.
Notes

A061 Menu Structure
Keys Function
Moves the cursor to the last entry.

+
Moves the cursor to the last entry in the last line.

+
In the program manager and in the program editor from the cursor position,
+ selects directories or program blocks up to the end of the window.
Deletes a word selected to the left of the cursor.

+
In the actual window, selects all entries (only in the program editor and pro-
+ A gram manager).
Keys Function
Copies the selected content. The text is located in the clipboard.

+ C
Scrolls the actual user interface through all installed languages one after the
+ L other.
Scrolls the actual operator interface through all installed languages in the
+ + L inverse sequence.
Generates a screenshot from the actual operator interface and saves it as a

+ P file in the HMI data/Logs/Screenshots folder.
Cuts out the selected text. The text is located in the clipboard.
+ X
Notes

Menu Structure A061
Keys Function
Reactivates changes that were undone (only in the program editor).

+ Y
Inserts text from the clipboard: either pastes the text from the clipboard at
+ V the actual cursor position or pastes text from the clipboard at the position of
the selected text.
Creates a complete archive on an external data carrier (USB-FlashDrive).

+ + S
Backs up the log files on the USB-FlashDrive. If a USB-FlashDrive is not

+ + D inserted, then the files are backed-up in the manufacturer's area of the Sys-
tem CF-Card.
Keys Function
Feed over ride to maximum in Simulation

+ M
Feed over ride is increased in Simulation

+
Feed over ride to decreased in Simulation

+
Opens the Editor to enter Asian characters.

+ S
Editing box - Deletes the first word to the of the cursor.

+ Navigation - Deletes all characters
A061: END
Notes

A061 END Menu Structure

A021 Access Levels / Time and Date settings
Sinumerik
Operate
Module Description:
The data of 840D sl controller is protected by using one of seven access levels, four of which are
set via a key-switch and three by password.
This module explains the different access levels, how to set these levels and how to protect
individual files.
It is also important that the system date and time are correct.
This is necessary for checking when an alarm occurred or when a file (Part program, archive etc)
was created or edited.
If at the time of installation, the time and date is not set correctly, the Guarantee period of the con-
troller could be effected.
Before the date and time displays can be edited, the password for the “User” or higher must be en-
tered.
Module Objective:
Upon completion of this module you will be able to set the different access levels using a password
or key switch, and set the time and date for the system.
You will also be able to change the access levels of individual NC programmes.
Content:
Sinumerik
Password and key-switch information
Setting and Deleting the Password
Protection of files
Customising Soft-key Access Levels
Setting the Date and Time
A021
A021
A021 Page 2 840D sl Operate SINUMERIK

Access Levels / Time and date settings A021
Access Levels /
Time & Date:
START
Password
and
key-switch
information
Setting and
Deleting the
Password
Protection of
files
Customising
Soft-key
Access
Levels
Time and
Date
Setting
Access Levels /
Time & Date:
END
Notes
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operate Page 3 A021

A021 Access Levels / Time and date settings
Password and key-switch information
The following table shows the password/key-switch positions

and associated access levels/users. Key switch Colour coded keys
Access
Intended user Protected via
level Access levels of the three keys:
1 Manufacturer Password: SUNRISE
Key colour Switch position Access level
2 Installation Engineer, Password: EVENING
No key required 0 7
3 End User Password: CUSTOMER
Black 0&1 6-7
4 Programmer, Setter Key-switch position 3 Green 0, 1 & 2 5-7
5 Qualified operator Key-switch position 2 Orange 0, 1, 2 & 3 4-7
6 Trained operator Key-switch position 1 It is the responsibility of the OEM to ensure that the key-switch
signals are transferred to the PLC interface.
7 Untrained operator Key-switch position 0
DB10.DBB56 is used for the transfer of the key-switch signals.
The key switch is located on the MCP and has four positions.
Three colour coded keys are available, each of which allow a DB10 Key-switch signals to NC (PLC  NC)
different access level.
This is standard on Siemens machine control panels. It is pos- Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
sible that a manufacturer may use a different method to set the
interface signal. DBB56 Key- Key- Key- Key-
switch switch switch switch
Pos.3 Pos.2 Pos.1 Pos.0
Setting and Deleting the Password
Setting the password:

A dialogue box is opened, this box shows the current access
The screen for entering the password is reached via the fol-
level and allows a password to be entered using the key-
lowing key presses:
board.
After typing the password it is confirmed by pressing the “OK”

soft key.
Notes

The dialogue box disappears and the current access level is Changing the password:
displayed above the left hand horizontal soft-keys.
It may be necessary to change the password from the default.
To change a password select the “Change password” soft
key.
Note: The password values are not saved in archive files.

Therefore, if a changed password is forgotten, you must:
 Load standard NC data (To reset the passwords to

default values)
 Read-in an archive. (To return the machine to a run-
ning condition)
Note: The password remains active after power off/on.

Module A033 explains how password deletion can be auto-
mated.
Protection of files
The properties of the file are found by paging right and select-
Certain files such as important cycles, programmes etc can be ing the properties Soft-key.
individually protected against accidental editing, deletion or
execution. They can also be hidden from view.
The file to be protected has to be located before the properties
can be edited. In this example, the part programme A dialogue box allows four properties to be changed.
“Example.MPF” is to have it’s properties changed.
In the following example, the program:
The “Part program” directory is located by selecting the
“Program manager” key.  Can only be executed if the “Service” password or
higher is active
 Can only be written to (Edited) if the “Manufacturer”
password or higher is active
 Will only be listed if the key switch position 2 or higher
is active
 Can only be read if the key switch position 3 or higher
is active
Example: TEST.MPF file has been selected in the Part Pro-
grams directory.
Notes

A021 Access Levels / Time and date settings
Customising Soft-key Access Levels
It is possible to set the access levels for each soft-key.

The function must first be activated in the Setup area.
When the correct settings have been entered the “OK” soft
key has to be selected.
When the “OK” key is pressed the function will be activated.

Use the mouse “Left click” to select the
This is confirmed by the message 150100
required access level.
The menu will automatically disappear when the selection is
made.
If an access level is already active the “Original setting” op-
tion will be available.
To set the access levels of the soft-keys it is necessary to con-

nect a mouse into the USB socket of the controller.
Place the mouse pointer over the relevant soft-key and select
the “Right click” button.
Example: Changing the access level of the “System data” soft-

key to Manufacturer.
Place the mouse pointer over

the soft-key and “Right click”
Notes

A summary of any changes to access levels can be seen in

the “Customize softkeys” area
The “Original setting” soft-key can be used to return the

access levels of all the soft-keys to their default state.
Setting the Date and Time (TCU)
The date/Time screen is reached with the following soft key

sequence:
The time and date can now be checked and corrected if

necessary.
If the date or time is changed, each element has to

be confirmed using the “Input” key.
Once all elements of the time & date are correct

Use the cursor keys to move between the data fields. press the “OK” soft key. The current date/time will
The format can be changed by highlighting the required input then be updated with the new values.
field and using the “Select” key.
Notes

A021 END Access Levels / Time and date settings
Setting the Date and Time (PCU50)
On systems with a PCU there are two date/time areas, one for
the NCU and one for the PCU. When the date and time is set
it is automatically transferred to both areas.
The time and date can now be checked and corrected if

necessary.
If the date or time is changed, each element has to

be confirmed using the “Input” key.
Once all elements of the time & date are correct

press the “OK” soft key. The current date/time will
then be updated with the new values.
A021: END
Notes

A041 Machine and Setting Data
Sinumerik
Operate
Module Description:
Machine and Setting data's are used in many ways to influence the operation of a machine.
During commissioning some of the machine data is automatically set while other machine data has
to be manually set.
Over time, as the machine mechanically wears it may be necessary to edit certain machine data
such as compensation data's.
This module shows the different machine data areas and how to activate the machine data.
Module Objective:
Upon completion of this module you will be able to locate the different Machine/Setting data areas
and be able to carry out adjustments if required.
You will also be able to create a customised user list containing machine and setting data which
are specific to a particular function/area of the machine.
Content:
Sinumerik
Machine & Setting Data Overview
Editing Machine & Setting Data
User Views
A041
A041

Machine and Setting Data A041
Machine and
Setting Data:
START
Machine &
Setting Data
Overview
Editing
Machine &
Setting Data
User Views
Machine and
Setting Data:
END
Notes

Machine & Setting Data Overview Each range contains the individual machine/setting data.
Machine data is often referred to as MD, while setting data is
General assignment referred to as SD.
The Machine/Setting data are divided into the following ranges:

Machine/Setting Data Location:
Range Description The following soft-key selection is used to locate the MD/SD
area.
9000 - 9999 Display machine data
10000 - 19999 General machine data
20000 - 29999 Channel-specific machine data
30000 - 39999 Axis-specific machine data
41000 - 41999 General setting data
42000 - 42999 Channel-specific setting data
The data is listed in numerical order with the MD/SD number
43000 - 43999 Axis-specific setting data in the left column. The following columns show the descrip-
51000 - 51999 General cycle machine data tion/name, value, units and activation requirement.
52000 - 52999 Channel-specific cycle machine data

53000 - 53999 Axis-specific cycle machine data
54000 - 54999 General cycle setting data
55000 - 55999 Channel-specific cycle setting data
56000 - 56999 Axis-specific cycle setting data
MD/SD identification:
MD/SD name Activation
Number (System language) Value method The MD/SD name contains identifiers so that the system can
identify that particular data.
Units
1st character
$ = System variable (Present on all MD & SD)
2nd character (Defines between MD or SD)

M = Machine data
S = Setting data
3rd character (Defines type of MD/SD)

M = Display Machine Data
N = General Machine Data / Setting data
C = Channel Machine Data / Setting data
A = Axis Machine Data / Setting Data
4th character
S = Cycle Data (Defines MD/SD as cycle data)
Examples:
Plain text description 9900 $MM_MD_TEXT_SWITCH Display MD
the selected MD/SD.
54600 $SNS_MEA_WP_BALL_DIAM General Cycle SD
55623 $SCS_MEA_EMPERIC_VALUE Channel Cycle SD
30200 $MA_NUM_ENCS Axis MD
Notes

The following data ranges are used for the machine data: Indexes:
$MM_ Display machine data Certain MD/SD have indexes. The function and number of
$MN_ General machine data indexes depends on the data in question.
$MC_ Channel-specific machine data
Example:
$MA_ Axis-specific machine data General MD 10000 $MN_AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB
$MNS_ General cycle machine data
$MCS_ Channel-specific cycle machine data This MD is used for defining the names of the axes in the
$MAS_ Axis-specific cycle machine data system. Each axis name is assigned to an index the MD.
The following data ranges are used for the setting data:
$SN_ General setting data

$SC_ Channel-specific setting data
$SA_ Axis-specific setting data
$SNS_ General cycle setting data
$SCS_ Channel-specific cycle setting data
$SAS_ Axis-specific cycle setting data Further examples:
30240[0] $MA_ENC_TYPE = The type of encoder connected
to the 1st measuring system input.
30240[1] $MA_ENC_TYPE = The type of encoder connected
to the 2nd measuring system input.
Help Function: Activation of the MD/SD:
The function of each MD/SD is described in detail via the There are four methods available for activating the MD/SD.
“Help” key. The method depends on the MD/SD in question.
The MD/SD first needs to be selected and then the “Help” key The right hand column of the screen displays the required
pressed. The key is found on the NC keyboard method.
Active via “Reset (po)” soft-key or controller

power off/on.
Active on selection of “Set MD active (cf)” soft

key.
A detailed description will be displayed. This will include units,
limits etc as well as the functionality. Active on selection of the appropriate PLC
interface signal, usually via MCP “Reset” key.
Active immediately the “Input” key is selected

to confirm the value.
Notes

Units for MD/SD Unit Description
The function of the MD/SD determines the units in use. mm/rev millimetres/revolution: linear feed-rate deter-
mined by a rotary axis.
The following table shows the abbreviations and descriptions of
the units. m/s³ Meters/second-cubed: linear jerk
rev/s³ revolutions/second-cubed: rotary jerk
Kg Kilogram: Measurement of mass
Unit Description
mm millimetre: Linear measurement.
mm/sec Millimetres/second: Linear velocity/speed
Nm Newton-metre
rpm Revolutions/minute: rotational velocity/speed
mH milli-Henry: Measurement of inductivity
m/s² Meters/second-squared: Linear acceleration
rev/s² revolutions/second-squared: rotary acceleration A Amperes (Amps): Electrical current
kgm² V Volts: Electrical potential

Kilogram/meter-squared: Moment of inertia
s seconds: measurement of time.
Some MD/SD have no units associated with them. In this case
Hz Cycles/second: Frequency. use the “Help” function to determine the data type required.
deg Degrees: Angular measurement.
Editing Machine & Setting Data The machine data which are available for viewing can be re-
stricted via the “Display options” soft-key
To locate the machine data screens first ensure that the rele-
vant access level is active (Module B021 Protection Levels)
then use the following key sequence:-
The default is for the General Machine screen to be displayed
Notes

The Machine & Setting Data is separated into different groups. For further data the “Menu Extension” key must be selected.
This allows access to the Setting Data and also the Display
General MD and general Cycle MD. Machine Data.
Channel-specific MD and channel-specific Cycle MD.
Axis-specific MD and axis-specific Cycle MD.
User Views- Allows the user to create list of specific

machine data.
Control Unit MD.
Supply MD (ALM/SLM-only DriveCLiQ types).
Drive MD (Motor Modules)
General SD and general Cycle SD.
Channel-specific SD and channel-specific Cycle SD.
Axis-specific SD and axis-specific Cycle SD.

When the correct MD has been found, a value can be en-
tered. In this example we are going to change Display MD
Display MD. 9900 from 0 to 1. This will change the MD/SD description
from system language to plain text.
The correct machine data should first be located. This is

done by either using the page/cursor keys or the search
function.
The search function is activated with the “Search” soft key. If
the Machine Data number is known this can be typed into the
dialogue box. It is also possible to enter part or all of the MD
name in text format.
Notes

The correct machine data has to be highlighted. The number Some MD/SD have no units associated with them. In this case
1 is entered and confirmed with the “Input” key. use the “Help” function to determine the data type required.
MD/SD with “Bit patterns”
If the letter “H” appear as the last digit in the “Value” column the
On pressing the “Input” key the text of the machine data MD/SD requires a value in Hexadecimal format. A bit pattern
changes immediately (see below). This will apply to all MD/ can be viewed.
SD. To view the bit pattern, highlight the MD/SD and then use the
“Select” key found on the NC keyboard.
Example: Channel MD 20310
A descriptive list of each individual bit is displayed. Use the

cursor keys to highlight the required bit, use the select key to
activate/deactivate the bit.
REMEMBER:- Create a data backup.

Any changed MD/SD should be saved in an archive.
See Module A017.
Notes

User Views
The “User views” function allows a customised list of machine

data to be made. MD/SD can be listed that are of importance
to a specific task/function of the machine.
Enter a name for the list e.g. SPINDLE_PARAMETERS.

The “User views” soft-key will also be displayed in the
“Parameter/Setting data” area if the option is selected.
Edit existing machine data list or create new machine data list.
The new entry will be displayed in the View menu.

It is now possible to add the required MD/SD.
In the following example Axis MD for the spindle will be added.
The required MD/SD type is selected from the list and con-
firmed with the “Input” key.
The General machine data will be displayed by default.

A list of all types of data can be viewed on the “Select” list
Notes

Select the data to be added to the list. Repeat the procedure to add further data to the list.
Text for information purposes can be added:
The text entered in the “Text” area will be displayed on the list.
The text entered in the “Description” area is displayed at the
bottom of the screen.
Text to be displayed on the list.

Or
(Maximum 30 displayable characters)
The selected MD will appear on the screen.
Detailed text to be displayed at the bottom of

the screen. (Maximum 80 characters)
The position of the text line can be selected when editing is Short text description.
complete.
Or
Example of a list of spindle specific MD complete with descrip-

tive texts:
Detailed text description.
Notes

Modifying a MD/SD entry:
The entries on the list can be modified by selecting the

“Properties” soft-key.
Select the entry to be modified and press the “Properties” soft-

key.
The changes that can be made will depend on the MD/SD in

question.
In this example, a different axis for the MD has been selected.
Or
Any unwanted items are removed via the “Delete” Soft-key.

To change the order that the items appear on the list, first se-
lect the item to be moved and then move it up/down the list via
the “Up” or “Down” soft-keys.
Each press will move the item one position.
A041: END
Notes

A041 END Machine and Setting Data

A035 Program Handling
Sinumerik
Operate
Module Description:
It is often a requirement to store machining programs off-line on an external computer.
Access MyMachine is a multi-functional software tool which connects via Ethernet (X127 & X130),
one of the functions offers the possibility to connect remotely to controllers in order to transfer ma-
chining programs to and from an external computer.
An External Viewer is included in the software which is used to remotely view and if necessary
make changes to the data of the controller.
It is also possible to configure and assign controller soft-keys to networked computers as another
method of program handling.
Module Objective:
Upon completion of this module you will be able to:
 Connect remotely via network to the controller using Access MyMachine and use copy and
paste functions to transfer machining programs.
 Use the External Viewer to monitor and/or change the data of the controller.
 Configure soft-keys in the Program manager and assign these to networked computers.
Content:
Sinumerik
Access MyMachine connected via X127
Program Handling
External Viewer
Configuring a Network Drive
Network & OP
A035
A035

Program Handling A035
Program
Handling:
START
Access My-
Machine
via X127
Access My-
Machine
via X130
Access My-
Machine
Configuration
of Bookmarks
External
Viewer
Configuring a
Network Drive
Network
&
OP
Program
Handling:
END
Notes

Select the “Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)” option,

Access MyMachine connected via X127 followed by the “Properties” button:
Connection using X127 (DHCP Server)

A DHCP server is an Ethernet port which issues IP addresses.
In order for a successful connection to be made it is necessary
set the external computer to receive an IP address automati-
cally. This is selected in the properties area of the TCP/IP
internet protocol.
Select the option “Obtain IP address automatically” Double click the “Access MyMachine ” icon which is found on
the PC desktop
When the program is opened for the first time after the
installation it is necessary to assign a password for encryp-
tion purposes.
Notes

A dialogue box appears where the choice of connection is

made.
A default connection is available, this is specifically for con-
necting to X127 of the controller (IP address 192.168.215.1).
The connection process will now start:
Select the “User” login and enter the password.
Password:-CUSTOMER
When the information box has cleared, the folder structure of the host PC will be seen in the top half of the Access MyMachine
program. The lower half shows the folder structure of the controller.
Notes

Configuring Interface X130
Ethernet interfaceX130 is configurable, the port can be as-

signed a fixed IP address or be set to automatically acquire
an IP address.
Interface X130 is primarily for connecting to the company
network. When configuring for connection to a company net-
work, certain information from the company network adminis-
trator is
required.
Firewall: X130 has a firewall which can inhibit the online

connection of certain software tools. It is possible to open
ports to allow connections to be made.
Change the firewall with the following key selection:
Computer Network Settings
When using X130 in a manual set-up, the IP address and

subnet mask of the external computer will also have to be
manually entered. If the controller is part of an existing
network this address must be unique.
The following example shows how to manually assign an IP

address of 192.168.100.2 and subnet mask of 255.255.255.0.
The subnet mask must match the one entered on the
controller.
Select the ‘Use the following IP address” option and enter a

unique IP address, example 192.168.100.2 with a subnet
mask of 255.255.255.0
Notes

X130 Controller Set-up An overview of the X120 and X130 interfaces is displayed.
X120 is the system network to which is connected hardware
The controller settings for X130 can now be entered. such as Machine Control Panels (MCPs), Operator Panels
(OPs) etc. This interface cannot be configured.
Any existing X130 settings should be recorded before any X130 is the company network and is configurable.
changes are made.
IP address restrictions- IP addresses 192.168.215.xxx &

192.168.214.xxx. are reserved for use by the system.
Addresses within these ranges should not be used for X130.
The following example shows how to manually assign an IP

address to X130.
Locate the “TCP/IP diagnostics” screen with the following key

selection:
A more detailed view of the interfaces can be seen. To

configure X130 select “Change”.
Notes

The settings can now be changed. Use the cursor and select The following example shows X130 being manually configured
keys to navigate the screen. with an IP address of 192.168.100.1 and a subnet mask of
255.255.255.0
Address Type: DHCP-To obtain IP address automatically.
Manual-To enter a defined IP address.
When the settings have been entered select the “OK” soft-key”
and perform power off/on of the controller.
Allow the configuration process to complete Allow the boot process to complete.
Check that the settings for X130 are correct
Note the message displayed above the horizontal soft-keys:
Changes will become effective after HW-Reset NC/HMI
Switch the control off/on to activate the settings.
Notes

The “Availability” of the network connection is shown. In the example below X120 has a green/white tick symbol with an
availability of 100%, this indicates that the connection has hardware attached and is healthy.
X130: Connection not

in use
X120: Connection in
use
Access MyMachine Connection
A default connection is available in Access MyMachine for

connecting to X127. If Ethernet port X130 is to be used a new
connection will have to be created.
Enter the IP address of X130 (192.168.100.1) also enter a

connection name and choose a login level (Manufacturer,
Service, User) and the correct password for the selected log-
in.
Notes

Controller IP address
Connection name The new connection is now listed in the Available connec-
tions list:
Login: User
Password: CUSTOMER
Set the Transmission The new connection can now be tested

mode to LAN
A connection can also be made from the toolbar: A few moments later the connection will be made and the fold-
er structure of the controller will be displayed in the lower half
of the Access MyMachine program
From the drop down menu select the connection to be used

then press the “Connect” button.
Programs and files can now be copied and pasted between

the host PC and the controller.
It is also possible to create files/directories on the controller.
Notes

Access MyMachine -Configuration of Bookmarks
Operator specific files are located in three directories:

MPF - Main Program Files
SPF - Sub Program Files
WKS - Work-piece Directory
These directories are found in the NC data folder of the con-

troller.
Bookmarks
Standard Bookmarks are preset by default and are used to

take the user directly to certain areas of the controller. It is
also possible for the user to add further bookmarks.
NC data folder containing Standard Bookmarks- selected

MPF, SPF & WKS folders from the drop-down list
Adding Bookmarks A name for the bookmark needs to entered and then saved.
Bookmarks are added by right-clicking on a folder that is to be

bookmarked and selecting “Add to bookmarks”.
Example: Right click on the WKS folder
Notes

The Bookmark will now appear in the Bookmark list. To transfer files between the controller and PC use the right-
click and copy/paste functions
External Viewer
The external viewer duplicates the controller display on the

external computer including menu and soft-key functionality.
When the viewer connects, access can be restricted on the
HMI or by the PLC interface.
To configure the HMI use the following soft-key sequence:
Viewing Rights-HMI
Rights for remote access - Selected in HMI
Do not allow remote access-Prevents remote connections.
Allow remote monitoring-The remote computer can monitor
the controller.
Allow remote operation-The remote computer can access the
various screens of the controller and changes can be per-
formed.
Viewing Rights-PLC
Rights for remote access, Specified by PLC (Not settable on
screen)
The access can be restricted/blocked via the user PLC with
interface signals. These signals have priority over the
“Selected in HMI” settings. It may be necessary to Contact
the machine manufacturer if the PLC is restricting the viewer
access.
Notes

Behaviour for remote access:
When a connection attempt is made a dialogue box will ap-

pear which requires acknowledgement, this determined how
long the dialogue box stays on the screen.
When set to “allowed”, then the controller will allow the con-
nection, even when the dialogue box has not been acknowl-
Importen:
edged.
ext. viewer in original colours only with transmission mode LAN!
If set to “Denied” the connection will be blocked if the dialogue
box is not acknowledged.
The settings are saved by selecting the “OK” soft-key.
Connecting the Remote Viewer
To start this function select the following icon from the Access
MyMachine tool bar.
Alternatively select “Start” from the “Remote control” drop
down menu.
When the viewer attempts to connect, providing that the remote viewer has not been blocked, the screen of the controller
will be displayed.
If an acknowledgement is required, a dialogue box will appear. The person at the controller should acknowledge with the
“Yes” soft-key.
This should be done within the time limit specified on the HMI-set-up screen.
When the connection is successful the viewer will display the

same screen as the controller.
Notes

The following keys are used to navigate the

controller from the remote PG/PC:
F1 to F8 - Horizontal soft-keys
Shift & F1 to F8 - Vertical soft-keys
F9 - Page Back/Up
F10 - Menu Select
Shift & F9 - Page right
F12 - Help function
Escape - Alarm Cancel
Select - Space Bar
Programs, machine data etc can be directly

changed from the remote computer, archives
can also be created.
Configuring a Network Drive
Create a user account "AUDUSER" with password protection "SUNRISE".
Add or remove user accounts
with accounts selecting and opening.
Notes

Create a new account “AUDUSER“
Entering as a password "SUNRISE"
Show the local User and Groups: start Lusrmgr.msc with
Notes

Setup Network Drive

A shared folder is required on the PC for the storage of files.
The transfer of programs can be achieved by mapping a soft-
key to a networked Computer. The soft-key will appear in the For reasons of security it is possible to restrict network access
Program Manager area of the controller. to the shared folder by setting “Permissions”.
The computer connected to the network must have been The following example will show how to create a folder on the
logged in with a username and password. This information will D drive and how to set up sharing and permissions.
be required for inputting on the controller.
The option “Use sharing Wizard” should be deselected via the
The computer log-in used in this example is: “Tools” menu in Windows® Explorer:
Username: AUDUSER
Password: SUNRISE
Select the D drive, right click with the mouse pointer in the
right hand Window and create a new folder.
Deselect “Use sharing Wizard” Enter a suitable name for the new folder.
Notes

Right click on the folder and select “Properties”. The share permissions for the new folder can be set. The
folder access over the network can be restricted to certain
users. The following example sets the permissions for
Select the “AUDUSER” (Log-in name of the computer).
“Sharing” tab
Select “Share
Select this folder”.
“Advanced The “Share
Sharing” name” will auto-
matically take
the folder name
Notes

A list of user is revealed when the “Find Now” button is select-

ed.
The list of users authorised to use the computer is displayed.

It is possible to set up permissions for any user on the list.
Locate and select “AUDUSER” from the list.
The user named “AUDUSER” is now authorised to access the

shared folder. The type of access is determined next.
The following settings allow the user “AUDUSER” to have full About Shared Folders:
control of the shared folder including editing/creating items.
Start Fmgmt.msc with:
Notes

Displays shared folders, current sessions, and open files.
Logical Drive Set-up
Mapping the Shared Folder
The folder previously set up for sharing now needs to be

mapped from the controller to allow programs to be trans-
ferred between the controller and PC.
The following procedure will create a soft-key in the Pro-

gram manager area which, when selected will display the
content of the shared folder and allow file transfer using
copy and paste functions.
Use the following key selection to reach the Logical Drives

configuration screen:
The USB port is configured as default, this should be left

untouched. The next available free area is position 2. Use
the cursor and select keys to navigate the screen.
Notes

In the following example, details of the external PC have The new soft-key will now be available in the Program area:
been entered.
Information such as IP address, share name, log on details
etc. are required.
Ensure that a suitable network cable is connected and select
the “Activate drive” soft-key.
A message will be displayed briefly above the horizontal soft-

keys to show a connection was made. To continue press the
“OK” soft-key.
Files can be copied to/from the controller using the Copy/

Paste soft-keys.
The new folder is also available in the “System data” area.

This provides a convenient method of saving files such as
archives to a safe storage location.
Notes

Network & OP´s
To activate the Network & OP´s settings carry out a reset procedure:
Configuration of port X130 Network
Ethernet port X130 is configurable and can be assigned a fixed IP address or be set to automatically obtain an IP address.
Port X130 is primarily for connecting to the company network. When configuring for connection to a company network, certain
information is required from the company network administrator.
Per default, the port has an activated firewall, which can cause connection problems. The firewall should therefore be
deactivated.
The firewall for port X130 can be deactivated

via Change.
Notes

Configuration of port X120 Network
All operator stations in the system network (TCUs, HT8, PCU 50) are administered on the NCU with "master priority", i.e. this
contains the config.ini files relevant for the runtime and also the .leases file with all the IP addresses assigned in the system.
Adjusting system network on “master priority“
Setting VNC Connection of the OP/TCU
The server IP address is set via the properties of the TCU, e.g. 192.168.214.1 (HMI of the NCU) or 192.168.214.241 (HMI of
the PCU with distributed configuration).
For example, for a loading point with OP8/TCU and a distributed PCU50 with OP15 and TCU in the operator panel. One VNC
points to the HMI NCU (OP8), the other to the HMI PCU.
The distribution of the config.ini files

to all the other NCUs/PCUs is per-
formed by the master NCU with the
"Reload" softkey.
With the "Invalidate cache" softkey

and subsequent Power Off/On of the
entire system, the NCUs/PCUs are
assigned their specified IP addresses
and new IP addresses assigned for
TCUs and MCPs and then the .leases
file distributed to all NCUs/PCUs.
Notes

The config.ini files of all operator stations can be edited directly on the master NCU with the page OPs , on each HMI.
The distribution of the data to all NCUs/PCUs is performed automatically with each change.
All settings with regard to network-

ing and TCU configuration can be
made via “Network & OP´s“!
The Config.ini files

card/user/common/tcu/<TCU-
Name>/common/tcu/config.ini and
the basesys.ini are edited via Net-
work & OP´s
Removal of TCUs
TCUs that are not active can be removed on the Avaible operator panels …. .!
Notes

A035 END Program Handling
Configuration of one NCU with TCUs and MCPs
In principle, no special settings (basesys.ini) are required for this configuration. DHCP server and internal HMI sl remain
switched on.
Configuration of one NCU with one PCU 50.3, MCPs and, if required, TCUs
The following settings (basesys.ini) of the NCU are required for this configuration:
As a rule, the internal HMI sl should be switched off, because the operation of two HMIs (HMI Advanced and Operate) on one
NCU is only permitted in special cases.
If the system contains a TCU (HT8) that is to be connected to the PCU 50.3 per default, the IP address of the PCU must be
entered at VNC connection (config.ini)!
A035 : END
Notes

A044 License and Option Management
Sinumerik
Operate
Module Description:
When a CF card with options is purchased a software License key is issued. The License key is
linked to the CF card via the card serial number.
This module explains the licensing procedure and how to activate options.
Module Objective:
Upon completion of this module you will be able to check the control for the correct License and
activate options.
Content:
Sinumerik
Entering and checking Licenses
Assigning Licenses
A044
A044

License and Option Management A044
License and
Option
Management:
START
Entering and
Checking
Licenses &
Options
Assigning
Licenses
License and
Option
Management:
END
Notes

Entering and Checking Licenses & Options
To check the License number, use the following key

combination:
Information regarding the License and the CF card serial num-

ber is displayed.
The License number is specific to the internal compact flash
card serial number.
For this reason a copied CF card cannot be used without gen-
erating an error message.
The License key can be entered on this page. This is activated
by an NCK reset using the “Reset (po)” soft-key.
The control should arrive with documentation regarding the

License key and options. This needs to be kept in a secure
place.
The License key should be saved at first commissioning and

prior to attempting any work where the NC data might be lost/
reloaded. This is described on page 6.
If the License key is lost it is possible to retrieve it via the inter-

net, the serial number of the internal CF card will be needed to
recover the License key.
The licensing page can be found at:

www.siemens.com/automation/license
Notes

For retrieving a lost key, use the “Show License Key” option,
found in the left hand column.
From the “Please select” menu, choose “Hardware serial
number”.
This is the serial number of the internal CF card taken from
the License screen shown on the controller.
The license key will now be displayed. A license report can

be requested and emailed to an email address.
The license key can be saved as a text file by right clicking on

the “Save license as a key file” link.
Example: Saving as a text file
Notes

Saving the License number: The new folder now appears. Select “OK” to save the License
key file to this folder.
It is possible to save the License number to a file so that it
can easily be restored.
Choose the destination for the License key.
Create a new directory if required.
A message is displayed momentarily above horizontal soft-

keys.
Notes

Restoring the License number:
Select the “Read in License key” soft-key.
Highlight the License key file and press the “OK” soft-key.
Transferring License key from a text file
The License key will copy from the keys.txt and direct insert
transferred to the key-box!
The License key will now appear in the License key box.
Handling of Options: To select an option use the cursor keys to highlight the de-
sired option and then press the “Select” key to activate or en-
The “All options” soft-key can be selected to view all set and ter a number depending on the type of option being activated.
licensed options. An NC reset (Reset (po) ) is required to complete the proce-
dure.
Non-licensed options:
If a non-licensed option is activated, the controller will issue a
License alarm.
Notes

To see all non-licensed options, select the “Missing Licenses”

soft-key.
Assigning Licenses
If a License key is insufficient for a required option, it is possible

to assign a new License key that includes the missing option.
The assignment of a new License key is done via the internet.
Each option is issued a License Certificate. The certificates are

delivered with the CF card and contains the License and dis-
patch note numbers.
Example: A License certificate
Sequence: Access the “Web License Manager“ on a PC with Internet ac-

cess: http://www.siemens.com/automation/license
The licensing is achieved by a series of steps on the Siemens
licensing website.
Before commencing note the hardware serial number and the

hardware type from the License manager screen.
Step 1 of 5 - Login:
To login, select “Direct Access“ on the “Web License Manager“
screen.
Notes

Enter the License number and the dispatch note number. Con-
tinue to step 2 with the “Next“ button.
Step 2 of 5 - Identify Product:

Enter the hardware serial number and select the product. Con-
tinue to step 3 with the “Next“ button.
Step 3 of 5 - Selecting the option:

Any options not yet assigned are displayed. You can now as-
sign additional options to the hardware. Continue to step 4
with the “Next“ button.
Notes

Step 4 of 5 - Assigning the License:

The selected option is now ready for assigning.
Step 5 of 5 - Generate License Key:

The License Key includes all options assigned for the specified
hardware.
There are three methods for saving the file. Two of these are in
PDF or TXT format.
The remaining option is as an ALM file, this can be read directly
into the controller as described earlier in the module.
You assign the Licenses to the hardware specified by clicking

the “Assign“ button.
Save the file to a suitable place in order that it can be loaded to

the controller.
Change to the licensing screen and enter the License Key by

Saving the License as an ALM file: pressing the “Read in License key“ soft-key.
Select the file to be loaded and continue with the “OK” soft-key.
Download the License Key by double clicking the following link.
Notes

It can be checked whether the License Key has been entered

successfully by pressing the “All options“ soft-key and checking
that the missing option is licensed.
Setting the Options according to the License Key:

It is possible to set all the options that are assigned to the cur-
rent License key by selecting the “Set option acc. Lic” soft-key
All options should now be set according to the License key:
A044: END
Notes

A044 END License and Option Management

A007 Electronic Logbook
Sinumerik
Operate
Module Description:
The electronic logbook function of the 840D sl controller is used to enter data such as manufactur-
er (OEM), dealer and user information, 1st and 2nd commissioning dates as well as records of ser-
vice visits.
This data is then saved to a log file. The log file has to be uploaded into the EUNA database via
the upload website.
The function is not only necessary for warranty issues but also for service personnel (records of
new and previous service visits) and also for quality control measures.
Module Objective:
Upon completion of this module the course participant will be able to do the following:
 Import/Enter Logbook data

 Make logbook entries
 Save and load the log file using the Online Registration website.
Content:
Sinumerik
Logbook information
Importing/Entering Logbook data
1st Commissioning-Start-up Complete
2nd Commissioning-Machine Installed
Recording a Service Visit
Saving the Logbook data - identSNAPSHOT
Uploading to the Online Registration Website
A007
A007

Electronic Logbook A007
Electronic Logbook:
START
Logbook
information
Importing/
Entering
Logbook
data
1st Commis-
sioning-
Start-up
Complete
2nd Commis-
sioning-
Machine
Installed
Recording a
Service Visit
Saving the
Logbook Data-
identSNAP-
SHOT
Uploading to
the Online
Registration
Website
Electronic Logbook:
END
Notes

Logbook Information identSNAPSHOT
In the past, the validity of warranty claims was difficult to man- When the information has been entered it needs to be saved,
age and was the cause of delayed service response times. this is via a soft-key on the Logbook screen. This procedure
System/hardware faults were logged in paper logbooks which will create a log file.
were then usually left on the machine and often became dam-
aged or lost. This is known as the “identSNAPSHOT” function and is a
snapshot of the system including version data, cycle data,
By using EUNA and the Electronic Logbook system, the war- hardware components etc
ranty will automatically start, a record of the machine details
and breakdowns will also be available on the controller. Each time a logbook entry is made, the log file should be
saved and uploaded to the EUNA database via the Online
The time and date of each entry is recorded; it is im- Registration Website.
portant that the time and date settings of the controller are
correct. Incorrect time and date settings can lead to early The name of the file is made from a combination of the ma-
expiry of the warranty. chine name and system CF card serial number.
It is necessary to make entries at certain stages during the life

of the machine:
- Manufacturer information at OEM

- Dealer information at delivery and installation of machine
- End user information at delivery and installation of machine
- 1st Commissioning - End of start-up at Manufacturer
- 2nd Commissioning Machine installed - End of start-up at
end user
- All service visits
Importing/Entering the Logbook Data File Function
The OEM and Dealer information can be imported to the con- oem.xml Manufacturer information
troller in three ways: oemsubs.xml Manufacturer subsidiary information
 Import the XML file via the “Import” soft-key. dealer.xml Dealer information
(Preferred method) user.xml End user information
 Copy/paste the XML file in the “System data” area. ma_types.xml List of available machine types
The files are imported using the “Import” soft-key.
 Type the information directly on the controller. If the files are not available they can be created directly on the
(When the files are not available.) controller or offline on a computer.
Machine Identity File (identity.xml)

The preferred method is to obtain the correct xml files from
your Siemens contact partner. These are pre-populated files When the information has been imported the “identity.xml” file
containing the relevant OEM/machine information etc. Using is automatically created which contains all the information
this method guarantees the consistency between the data from the imported xml files.
stored in EUNA and the data stored on the machine.
If data is already present in the logbook area and needs to be
The following files can be imported: overwritten, then the identity.xml should first be deleted from
the system.
The machine name/number is stored in General Machine Data

17400. This is individual to the machine and needs to be en-
tered here.
Notes

Concept for Electronic Logbook Data Import and Upload:
Offline preparation identSNAPSHOT-Controller

File upload
(identity.xml, MD17400)
OEM Data OEM Data (identity.xml)
oem.xml/oemsubs.xml: *Customer number*

Load via “Import” soft-key.
*Country*
*Manufacturers name*
*Town*
Dealer Data Dealer Data (identity.xml)
dealer.xml: *Customer number* Export & upload

Load via “Import” soft-key.
*Country* Online
Registration
*Dealers name*
*Town* Configuration data:

components, machine identity,
licences, version information,
logbook entries etc.
User Data User Data (identity.xml)
user.xml: Not usually available

Load via “Import” soft-key. until point of sale.
Logbook entries
1st Commissioning
2nd Commissioning
Service visits
If the controller has existing machine identity data, it is necessary to delete the “identity.xml” file.
The location of the file varies between systems operating with a PCU50 or NCU.
The location of the “identity.xml” file:
PCU50: System hard disk\C:\ProgramData\Siemens\MotionControl\user\sinumerik\hmi\data\version\identity.xml
NCU: System CF card\user\sinumerik\hmi\data\version\identity.xml
Notes

Data Import function Ensure that the files to be imported are available on the control-
ler, network PC or USB memory device.
The Electronic Logbook is located in the Diagnostics area of the
controller:
Select the location of the file to be imported, e.g. USB.
Default Manufacturer screen with no data entered:
Select the file to be imported, e.g. oem.xml
A machine name/number is compulsory.
The information will now appear on the screen. In this example

the Manufacturer file (oem.xml) was loaded.
To see data for Dealer or End User select the relevant soft-key.
Enter the machine name and/or number, e.g. VMC123.

The value entered here is transferred to General MD 17400.
Notes

Machine type
The machine type can be manually typed at the same time as

the name/number is entered. Alternatively a list of machine
types can be viewed if the “ma_types.xml” has been imported.
Example of an “ma_types.xml” file that has been edited to in-

clude three machine types.
Once the choice of machine type is made it cannot be undone

unless the “identity.xml” file is deleted.
When the file is imported, the machine types will appear in the
drop down list.
Copy and Paste function Locate the destination folder (Machine identity).
It is also possible to copy the files from USB/networked PC via

the “system data” area using the copy and paste functions.
Cursor to the source containing the file e.g. USB device.
The controller now needs to be powered off/on.
Notes

Subsidiary files The default screen displays the manufacturer data.
Subsidiary files are used to define the details of manufacturer

regional offices.
Example: A machine manufacturer has its head office in Ger-

many, and also has regional offices in other countries, e.g.
United Kingdom.
In this case, “oem.xml” would contain the details of the head
office; “oemsubs.xml” would contain the details of the regional
office.
When an “oemsubs.xml” file is imported to the controller, the
“Manufacturer” soft-key is used to toggle between the OEM
and OEM subsidiary data.
Example: Import the “oem.xml” and “oemsubs.xml” files as

described previously.
Select the “Manufacturer” soft-key to view the “oem subsidi-
ary” data
No data will be displayed until an “Address selection” has been

made. This is the name of the branch, i.e. the subsidiary.
To return to the manufacturer details, select the “Reg. office of

manufact.” soft-key.
This the original manufacturer soft-key with different text. The
text of the soft-key changes depending on the current selected
screen.
Select the branch/subsidiary name; in this case “ABC SUB” Templates for xml Files
Templates for the various xml files are available in the

“HMI data\Templates\Examples\Machine identity” folder.
The subsidiary details will be displayed.
Notes

The templates can be used if the files cannot be obtained from

the Siemens partner. They should be copied and edited to
leave the original templates intact.
Example template for dealer.xml.
The file contains various

xml commands but no deal-
er data. Manually Entering Machine Identity Data
If the data has to be manually entered due to lack of an xml

file, the data can be typed directly into the controller.
Select which data is to be entered; Manufacturer, Dealer, End

user.
Example: A “dealer.xml” file with dealer information. The file
can be imported using the method described earlier.
Or Or A summary of the information can be seen.
Example: Manually entered “End user” data.
Notes

1st Commissioning-Start-up Complete
When the machine has been commissioned at the manufac-

turer the “Start-up Complete” soft-key is selected. This auto-
matically logs the current time and date.
2nd Commissioning-Machine Installed
When the machine has been installed at the end-user (2nd

commissioning) the “Machine Installed” soft-key is pressed
This automatically logs the current time and date.
To confirm that 1st Commissioning is complete.
The information will appear on the main logbook page.
To confirm that 2nd Commissioning is complete.
The name and company/department of the engineer should

The information is now added to the main logbook page . be entered followed by a detailed description of the fault and
work carried out.
Recording a Service Visit
Whenever an engineer visits the machine to carry out mainte-

nance etc., a record of the visit and information about the
work carried out should be entered into the Logbook.
To do this select the “New Entry” soft key.
Notes

The details of the service visit are now shown on the Logbook The save procedure should be carried out after each data
page. entry in the logbook.
To save the data to a file first locate and select the “Save”
soft-key.
The file should be saved to the default “Version data” folder as

a standard procedure to ensure that a copy is locally available .
The file is to be uploaded to the online registration website via

an external PC, therefore it should also be saved to an external
USB/CF device.
Saving the Logbook data
The following procedure shows how to save the newly entered

data to a file.
The file contains all information about the system (Controller,
drives, software and hardware etc) as well as the information
entered on the logbook pages.
The file is given a default name using details from the machine
information page. This can be changed. A comment can also
be added.
Two files are created by default, Version data and Configura-
tion data.
The “Version data (.TXT)” file is a text file and contains details
regarding the versions of the controller, drives etc.
The “Configuration data (XML)” file is an xml file and contains
more information about the whole system including the log- In this example, the files are saved in the “version” folder.
book entries. It is this file which needs to be uploaded to the
database via the internet. PCU50: System hard disk\C:\ProgramData\Siemens\
MotionControl\user\sinumerik\ hmi\data\version
NCU: System CF card\user\sinumerik\hmi\ data\version
The information will now be saved.
Notes

The file can be opened for viewing in the “System data” area: The information that was entered via the Logbook screen is
now stored in the xml file.
Service visits are found at the end of the file: Uploading to the Online Registration Website
Use the copy/paste function to transfer the xml file to a USB

stick in preparation for uploading to the Online Registration
Website.
New Log Files

A new log file needs to be created when anything new is added
to the logbook.
The file must then be uploaded to the EUNA database.
The Online Registration website address is:

www.siemens.com/sinumerik/register
A language selection is available and an email address is

The file is closed with the following soft-key selection. required. Notification emails will be sent to this address if the
“Enable email status notification“ option is selected. To continue
use the “Next” key.
Notes

Language selection
Entering the email address and enabling the “enable email

status notification” selection.
Continue with the “Next” button.
To upload the XML file select the “XML Upload” key.
Notes

Use the “Browse” key to locate the file.
The selected file is now ready to upload, select the “Upload”

key.
Notes

After a short delay an information box will indicate a successful The uploaded file will be seen in the “Assigned files list”
upload operation.
The “Action Bar” of the assigned files list is used for various Problems with uploading the XML files
functions.
Refresh the page
Upload an XML file
View the file
In the event of an error during the upload process will be

Delete the file
necessary to email the xml file to:
service.euna.industry@siemens.com
A007: END
Notes

A007 END Electronic Logbook

A003 Battery and Fan Exchange
Sinumerik
Operate
Module Description:
Certain components are equipped with backup batteries which maintain data stored in the volatile
ram area. Some are fitted with fans for the cooling of the electronics.
During the lifespan of the equipment it is possible that the battery will become less efficient, result-
ing in a drop in voltage or that the cooling fans show signs of wear and tear. In either case the bat-
teries or fans must be replaced.
A data backup should be made before exchanging the battery (this is described in Module A017).
Caution
The Lithium-batteries must be replaced only by identical replacements or by types recommended
by the manufacturer. Otherwise component damage may occur.
Module Objective:
Upon completion of this module you will be able to locate and change the PCU50 battery and the
NCU battery and fans.
Content:
Sinumerik
Battery Health and Safety Warning
PCU 50.x: Replacing the Battery
840D sl NCU: Replacing the Fan/Battery-Module.

Replacing the Battery
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operate V4.5 Page 1 This document was produced for training purposes.
A003
A003

Battery and Fan Exchange A003
Battery and fan

Exchange:
START
Batteries:
Health and
Safety Warning
PCU 50.x:
Replacing
the battery
840D sl NCU:
Replacing
the battery/
fans
Battery and fan

Exchange:
END
Notes

A003 Battery and Fan Exchange
Batteries: Health and Safety Warning Danger of explosion and release of harmful substances!
Lithium batteries pose a risk to health and safety, please Do NOT:

read the following before commencing the exchange of Throw a lithium battery into a fire
batteries. Solder anything to the casing
Open the casing
The Lithium-batteries must be replaced only by types Short circuit the terminals
recommended by the manufacturer. Failure to do this can Expose to temperatures above 100°C
lead to component damage.
DO:
Dispose of used batteries using the local connection point Dispose of properly
specifically set-up locally so that they are correctly recy- Protect from direct sunlight,
cled or are disposed of as hazardous waste. Avoid excessive humidity and condensation.
Observe the correct polarity.
PCU 50.x: Replacing the battery 5. Open the battery compartment on the left side of the
PCU 50.x
Before disconnecting the battery all present BIOS Settings (Image 1).
must be recorded.
6. Remove the battery holder (Image 2).
This is particularly important if the default values have been
changed and have not been saved in the user profile. 7. Disconnect the cable (Image 3).
8. Re-connect the cable on the new battery.
9. Remove the old battery from the holder.
Note
10. Clip the new battery into the holder.
If the new battery is connected within 1 minute of disconnect-
ing the old battery, all settings (including date / time) will be 11. Close the battery compartment.
maintained. 12. Power on and enter the BIOS page, check the BIOS-
Setup settings or restore user profile.
Procedure: Image 1: Battery location with battery cover open.

The PCU50.x is commonly located behind the operating panel
(OP). In certain cases it may be located remotely from the OP.
1. Switch OFF the control unit and switch ON again.

2. When the text ”Press F2 to enter set-up” is displayed at
the bottom of the screen, press the 2nd softkey or the F2
key on an external keyboard.
3. Record the BIOS settings.
4. Switch OFF the control unit once more and lock the main
switch to prevent accidental switching on of the power.
Image 1
Notes

Battery and Fan Exchange A003
Image 2: Battery being withdrawn from the PCU50.x. Image 3: Battery fully withdrawn, revealing the connector.
Connector which
allows easy
exchange of the
battery.
Image 2
Image 3
Note:
Batteries are perishable items. They should be replaced
every 5 years (by PCU50.x) as a safeguard against unex-
pected problems.
840D sl NCU: Replacing the Battery/Fans Note:

NCU Batteries are perishable items. They should be replaced
The battery and fans of the 840D sl NCU are contained in the every 3 years (by NCU 7x0.x ) as a safeguard against
same housing which fits to the underside of the NCU box. unexpected problems.
The battery and fans can be replaced separately or the whole
unit.
Battery Information:
Fan Information:
Battery buffered data is stored in the SRAM located on the
NCU board.  Fan warning: If one of the fans no longer rotates.
If the battery voltage falls to a critical level (2.7 to 2.9 Volts)  Fan fault: If both fans are stopped.
alarm number “2100 NCK battery warning threshold reached”
will be triggered. Approximately one minute later the components will be
The battery must then be replaced within 6 weeks of the alarm switched OFF automatically and the status will be indicated by
first appearing. means of the red SF LED.
If the battery voltage drops to the next critical level (2.4 to 2.6
Volts) alarm “2101 NCK battery alarm” is triggered. In this Some battery/fan housings contain two fans.
case if the power is removed the buffered data will likely be
lost/corrupted.
NOTICE:
To avoid loss of data, the dual fan/battery module must be replaced during operation. When doing this, observe that the Con-
trol Unit can only be operated for a maximum of 1 minute without fans. If this time is exceeded, the Control Unit will shut itself
down.
Notes

A003 END Battery and Fan Exchange
Replacement: Location and components of Battery/fan housing:
The fan/battery module is replaced as follows.

Removal: Fan Rear
Battery locator
1. Gently push the fan/battery module backward. This will
release the retaining clips.
2. The fan/battery module can now be lowered and the rear
locator slid from the NCU box.
Replacing:
Push to
1. Hold the fan/battery module tilted slightly forward. release Battery/fan housing
2. Insert the locator into the guide at the bottom of the NCU
box.
3. Lift the front of fan/battery module upward, until the
retaining clips lock into place.
The fan/battery module and the control unit are interfaced via
two small plug/sockets, these are automatically connected
when the fan/battery module is locked into place.
Replacement of Battery:
If only the battery is to be replaced, the previous procedure for

removing the battery/fan module should be followed.
The battery is then disconnected via the plug/socket and then

withdrawn from the battery/fan module.
The new battery is fitted in the reverse order.
Connection for
battery lead
Battery lead
connector
A003: END
Notes

A017 Data Management
Sinumerik
Operate
Module Description:
It is necessary to have procedures in place for saving and restoring the customers data stored in
the CNC.
The following cases have to be taken into consideration:

 Series machine production
 Exchange of the TCU
 Exchange of the PCU/Hard disk drive
 Exchange of the NCU/PLC
 Exchange of the system CF card
The back-up method used can differ between machines, depending upon the hardware configura-
tion in use.
This module describes the methods for saving data so that it can be restored in the event of any of
the above eventualities.
Module Objective:
Upon completion of this module the course participant will know how to:
 Create and restore archives.

 Create and restore a system image.
 Create and restore a Ghost image
Content:
Sinumerik
Archives: TCU & PCU50
TGZ Backup Files
PCU50.5 XP Ghost-Images
PCU50.5 WIN 7 Ghost-Images
Siemens assumes no responsibility for its contents. A017
A017

Data Management A017
Data Management:
START
Archives:
TCU & PCU50
TGZ Backup
Files
PCU50.5 XP:
Ghost-Images
PCU50.5 WIN 7:
Ghost-Images
Data Management:
END
Notes

Archives TCU & PCU50 PLC hardware upgrade archive (SDB’s only) - Creates a
PLC archive for use when starting up series machines.
Series Start-up archives can be used to save NC, PLC, Drive (For testing the PLC periphery components)
and HMI data.
Archives are created for a variety of reasons: Read in series start-up - Archives are read-in with this option.
Create original status archive - Used to create an archive

 Series machine production that will return the machine to its delivery state.
 Exchange of the TCU
Read in original status archive - For reading in the original
 Exchange of the PCU status archive
 Exchange of the NCU/PLC
 Exchange of the system CF card Creating a Series Start-up Archive:
The method for creating archives is the same for both PCU50
To create a Series Start-up Archive locate the relevant area by
& TCU. However, when the data is stored locally it is to differ-
using the following key sequence.
ent destinations.
In the case of the TCU the archives are stored on the system
CF card.
With the PCU50 the data is stored on the hard disk drive.
Ensure that the option “Create series start-up” is selected and

The screen displayed has five choices: select “OK”.
Create series start-up - Archives of the four control compo-

nents (NC, PLC, Drives, HMI) can be created with this option
Compensation data
Cycles
Offsets
R parameters
Part Programs
Workpieces
Option data
Global and Local user data (GUD & LUD)
PLC data: This will create an archive suited to restoring the

PLC user program.
Drive data: This will create an archive containing data for the
Sinamics drives.
HMI data: This saves data that is stored on the HMI.

The list comprises of:-
Cycle storage
Texts
Templates
Control Components: Applications
Configurations
The controller data is split into four components Version data
Logs
NC data:- The NC data consists of: User views
All machine and Setting data (except for drive machine data) Dictionaries
Tool & magazine data
Notes

The four control components are available for selection. They Creating an NC archive
can be selected in any combination to create archives contain-
ing different data. The following example will create an NC archive including
compensation data.
The NC data can be selected with or without compensation
data. Use the cursor and select keys to select the necessary check
Compensation data is machine specific data such as lead boxes.
screw error compensation. This would not be included in an The comment area at the bottom of the screen offers the
archive used for series machine production. chance to add information about the archive.
The Drive data can be saved in two formats:
Archives containing drive data should be created using the ACX

format. ASCII format is for expert use only.
If the HMI component is chosen you can include “All” HMI data
or be selective of the data to include via the “Execute” option.
The destination of the archive has to be chosen, this can be

locally on the system CF card/hard disk drive or externally to a
USB device or networked PC.
It is suggested that an archive be kept locally on the controller.
Copies can be made externally for use in the event of a data
restore.
Notes

A name must be entered for the archive.
An information box indicates that the archive was successfully

created.
The archive will now be created and stored in the destination

specified earlier.
Restoring a Series Start-up Archive: Select the source from which the archive is to read in from.
To restore an archive the option ”Read in start-up archive”

needs to be selected
Notes

Information about the selected archive is displayed. This in- The archive will be read in and a series of status boxes are
cludes any comments entered by the creator. displayed.
The software version of the system that the archive was creat-
ed on is also displayed.
A final status box will be displayed which confirms that the

archive was read in successfully.
Creating Original Status Archives
Original status archives are used to restore the machine to its

delivery state. (Part programs, tool data, work offsets etc will
not be present)
The HMI selection has two options:
The files of the HMI can be quite large. To prevent the inclu-
sion of any unnecessary files it is possible to select which HMI
The default selections are shown below. It has to be decided files are to be included.
by the machine builder which components are needed to re-
turn the machine to its original delivery state. All: This option will include all the HMI data
Notes

Execute: With this option you can select which HMI files to
include in the archive.
When the “Execute” option is selected a list of components of

the HMI is displayed. The items that are greyed out are items
which have no data currently associated with them.
Allow the archiving process to complete:
The individual components are selected using the cursor/

select keys
Reading in Original Status Archives
To restore an original status archive, the option ”Read in origi-

nal status archive” needs to be selected.
Notes

As only one Original Archive is allowed there isn’t a list select Status boxes will be displayed informing of the progress of the
from. Information about the archive contents is displayed. read-in procedure
If any overwrite questions arise, carefully read the message When the archive has been read in a status box is
before continuing with one of the responses below. displayed to confirm this.
All files will be overwritten, archive continues to read in .
No overwriting, archive continues to read in.
Skip overwriting the file in question, archive continues

to read in.
Cancel the archive read in procedure.
Overwrite the file in question, archive continues to read

in.
Notes

Creating Archives with Shortcut keys
A quick method of making a complete archive to a USB device

is by selecting 3 keys simultaneously.
The keys to be pressed are “CTRL” + “ALT” + “S”
Simultaneously select the following keys to produce the ar-

chive.
+ + The boxes will clear when the archive has been saved
A file with the .arc extension will be created and given a de-
Several dialogue boxes will be shown, these will clear when fault name which includes time and date information.
the archive has been created. It should be checked that the file exists on the USB/CF device
before commencing work.
Example:
TGZ backup files
Another method of creating a backup of the System CF card is

using the Emergency Boot System.
A USB service stick is required. This is a bootable stick which
contains Emergency Boot System software.
When plugged into interface X125 the system will boot from the
USB device into the Emergency Boot System menu.
From this menu it is possible to create/restore a backup file. Locate the “linuxbase.img” file and select “Open”
The backup file will be of the TGZ type.

TGZ files are ideal for creating a backup for use with series
machine production. This is because the licence details con-
tained on the destination CF card will be left intact.
Creating a USB service stick.

Access MyMachine is used for creating a USB service stick.
The software is delivered in “zip” format and should be extract-
ed to a suitable place on a computer.
When extracted, the file “linuxbase.img” can be found in the
following path:
Emergency Boot System 840Dsl Vxx\eboot_system
Run the Access MyMachine and select “Writing image to CF

card” found on the “NC Commissioning” menu.
Notes

Select the drive letter of the USB stick.
The writing process will begin
Creating a CF card backup (TGZ file)
Starting the Emergency Boot System.
Switch off the controller and insert the bootable USB stick
into X125 of the NCU.
The following screen will be displayed:
The process can be repeated of required.
Insert the USB stick into X125 of the NCU and switch
on the NCU.
After successful boot up the Emergency Boot System will
be displayed. Cursor to the “Backup NCU Software and Data” menu item
and select “Ok”
Notes

A suitable filename should be entered. This should contain

information that helps identify the file to other users. The TGZ
extension is mandatory.
A number of backup choices are available, select the menu

item “Backup Complete CF card to USB memory stick”
The backup procedure will begin.
On completion, press any soft-key.
The original screen will be displayed.

The USB stick should be removed and the system rebooted.
Check that the file exists on the USB stick, the file should be
stored in a safe place, and be accessible to service personnel.
Notes

Restoring a CF card backup (TGZ)
The restoring of the TGZ file is also achieved from the Emer-
gency Boot System menu.
The backup TGZ file needs to be present on the USB Service

stick.
Insert the USB service stick
The status of the procedure is displayed, allow this to continue.
On completion, press any of the soft-keys.
Power the controller off/on.

Standard NC machine data will have been loaded, it will be
necessary to load an archive containing the most up to date
data.
Notes

PCU 50.5 XP: Ghost Images

Hard Disk Partitions:
The PCU50 operates with a Solid State Disk (SSD) which con-
tains the operating system (Windows®), Sinimerik basic In order to enable the separation of the software packages, the
software, Sinumerik 840D sl Operate software, archives, user hard disk of the PCU 50.5 WIN XP is sub-divided into four
files etc. NTFS partitions, each with different functionality.
The (SSD) is divided into four partitions (C, D, E, F)
The method used to back-up the SSD drive is Norton Ghost®.
Norton Ghost is present on all replacement SSD drives to facili- Description of Partitions:
tate creating and restoring a Ghost image.
The procedure produces a “Ghost image”. The size of the Partition C Emergency: Active primary partition
Ghost image will depend on the individual application but is in (Service/tools menu)
excess of 1GB.
The image can be saved externally to a USB device, provided Partition D TMP: Extended partition
that there is sufficient space or via network. (Local images, install, update)
It is also possible to create local Ghost images of partitions C,
E & F to partition D. Partition E System: Primary partition
Prior to creating a Ghost image it is recommended that the (Windows® operating system)
archiving procedure is followed and that the files are saved to
the PCU. Partition F USER: Primary partition
(HMI, Shopmill/turn, Step7, OEM)
PCU50.5 :
Service switch to "E" to boot the PCU 50.5 from the
USB service system.
Creating a USB service stick
PCU 50.5 start up in service mode
Start the PCU.

During the boot up, there is a time interval for pressing key “3“ when the HMI Base Version
information appears on the lower right of the background screen.
Notes

Plug a USB memory with at least 8 GB into a PCU USB port.
Launch Ghost32.exe in directory E:\Tools
Select Ghost: Local → Disk → From Image. As the source, select D:\Eboot\eboot.gho and
as the destination select the USB memory store (recognizable by its storage capacity).
Result:
After successfully transferring eboot.gho to the USB memory store, the service system for
the PCU is ready to use.
Using the same procedure, create a service system on a PG/PC. For this, you need the Fille Ghost32.exe and eboot.gho
on a PG/PC
Booting from the USB service system
Set the service switch to "E", if you wish to boot the PCU 50.5 from the USB service system.
Creating Ghost Images The ServiceCenter will now be started. This runs from
Ram disk and takes a short while to load.
First insert the USB (At least 16GB) device into the rear USB
interface.
The Ghost image is created via the ServiceCenter of the
PCU50.
Power on the controller
Notes

The Ghost image now needs to be given a name. Be sure to A summary will be displayed showing details of the Ghost im-
select “Enter” to confirm the image name. age.
Restoring Ghost Images
Images are also restored using the Service Menu.
The process will begin, this may take some time depending
upon the size of the Ghost image
Notes

Select the Ghost image to be restored. A summary will be displayed showing details of the Ghost
image.
The restore process will begin, details such as time elapsed The computer (PCU50) name can be changed if required.
and time remaining are shown. If the PCU is connected to a factory network a specific name
may have to be entered.
Select “OK” to reboot the system.
Notes

PCU 50.5 WIN 7: Ghost Images
The PCU50 operates with a Solid State Disk (SSD) which con-
tains the operating system (Windows®), Sinimerik basic Partitions
software, Sinumerik 840D sl Operate software, archives, user C: SYSTEM (incl. EMERGENCY)
files etc.
The (SSD) is divided into four partitions D: USER (incl. TMP
C: SYSTEM (incl. EMERGENCY)
D: USER (incl. TMP)
The method used to back-up the SSD drive is Norton Ghost®.
Norton Ghost is present on all replacement SSD drives to facili-
tate creating and restoring a Ghost image. Service-Mode
The procedure produces a “Ghost image”. The size of the Pressing key „3“ on the control panel during PCU boot
Ghost image will depend on the individual application but is in or
excess of 5GB. Service switch to “3“
The image can be saved externally to a USB device, provided USB-Boot
that there is sufficient space or via network. Service switch to “E“
It is also possible to create local Ghost images.
Prior to creating a Ghost image it is recommended that the
archiving procedure is followed and that the files are saved to
the PCU.
Creating a USB service stick for PCU 50.5 WIN 7 Ghost
Service switch to „3“ and turn on the PCU.
„Show desktop“ and

startGhost32 with:
Notes

Select Ghost: Local → Disk → From Image. As source, select D:\Eboot\eboot.gho, as the destination select the USB memory
store (recognizable by its storage capacity).
Result:
After successfully transferring eboot.gho to the USB memory store, the service system for
the PCU is ready to use.
Using the same procedure, create a service system on a PG/PC. For this, you need the file Ghost32.exe and eboot.gho on a PG/
PC.
Creating Ghost Images The ServiceCenter will now be started. This runs from Ram
disk and takes a short while to load.
First insert the USB (At least 16GB) device into the rear USB
interface.
The Ghost image is created via the ServiceCenter of the
PCU50.
Service switch to “E” and Power on the controller.
Select disk backup with mouse or
Notes

Select drive S: (USB Boot stick).
Start restoring Ghost with „Backup“

„File name“ now needs to be given a name.
Notes

Restoring Ghost Images With „Select source“, select a ghost file.

Images are also restored using the Service Menu.
Select Disk Restore with mouse or
Notes

Select drive S: (USB Boot stick), and mark Ghost File (*gho) .
Read Ghost File with „Restore“.
Notes

A017: END
Notes

A017 END Data Management
Notes

A010 PCU, TCU and OP Diagnostics and Interfaces
Sinumerik
Operate
Module Description:
The PCU50.x is an industrial PC on which the operating system (Windows®), the Sinumerik basic
software, the Sinumerik 840D sl Operate software, ShopMill/ShopTurn, archives, user files, etc. are
installed. Two 7-segment displays and two status LEDs are integrated for the diagnostics (e.g. for
operation without a monitor).
The PCU 50.3 is equipped with a hard disk drive.
The PCU 50.5 is equipped with an electronic SSD (Solid State Disk) drive. A Service switch with
power button are also integrated for the diagnostics.
The TCU (Thin Client Unit) serves solely as a human/machine interface and has no data storage
possibilities or diagnostic LEDs/displays. Various interfaces are found on the TCU.
Operator Panels (OP) are used for interfacing the PCU/TCU to the controller. The PCU/TCU is easi-
ly mounted on the rear of the OP. The OP has 2 x LEDs for basic diagnostic functionality and a sin-
gle USB interface.
Module Objective:
Upon completion of this module you will be able to locate:
 Diagnostic LEDs and displays of the PCU and understand their meaning.
 Interfaces of the PCU
 Interfaces of the TCU
 Operator Panel
Content:
Sinumerik
PCU50.5: Interfaces
PCU50.x: Diagnostic Service
TCU: Interfaces
Operator Panel Diagnostics
A010
A010

PCU, TCU and OP Diagnostics and Interfaces A010
PCU/TCU/OP
Diagnostics and
Interfaces:
START
PCU50.5:
Interfaces
PCU50.x:
Diagnostic
Service
TCU:
Interfaces
Operator
Panel
Diagnostics
PCU/TCU/OP
Diagnostics and
Interfaces:
END
Notes

PCU50.5: Interfaces
The interfaces of the PCU50.3 are located on two sides
X70
Digital Video
Interface X4 X60 USB 2.0
(DVI) MPI/DP Port 1 / 2
Port 3 / 4
X1 X0 S0
2 x PCI-
Ethernet 1 +24 VDC ON/OFF
slots
Factory Net supply switch
X2
Ethernet 2
System Net
Service module
Alternative installation location
The Service module can be
remounted on the side panel
for portrait assembly. BIOS battery
location
Notes

X44 I/O interface for con-

nection of the I/O cable of the
operator panel front
X42 Optional connection

for operator panel fronts with
USB 2.0 front interface
X400 1st LVDS interface for

connection of the TFT display
cable
X401 2nd LVDS-interface

for dual LVDS displays (e.g.
OP 19) - is behind X400 (can
be reached by removing the
SSD housing cover)
Service module SSD housing cover (substitute for hard

as delivered disk) Solid State Disks
PCU 50.5 XP
2 x 7-segment displays
Switch setting Function
0 Normal mode (delivery condition)

2 x LEDs: H1 and H2
9 Reset BIOS to factory settings
E Boot from USB-device (Eboot-stick)

Service switch
Power button
This can be used to start and stop the Windows operating sys- PCU 50.5 WIN 7
tem.
Switch setting Function
0 Normal mode (delivery condition)
3 Boot with Service Desktop
9 Reset BIOS to factory settings
E Boot from USB-device (Eboot-stick)
Notes

PCU50.5: Diagnostic LEDs and 7-Segment Displays LED LED H1 H2 Status

H1 H2 Dis- Dis-
play play
The diagnostics displays of the PCU50.x consist of 2 x LEDs
and 2 x 7 segment displays. Orange Orange Output of After switch on
BIOS post
codes
Orange Off After cycling the BIOS
H1 H2
LED and Orange Off After starting Windows
LED and
7-segment 7-segment 1 0 Start Load device
display display Windows drivers needed
for Windows
2 0 PCU PCU hardware
hardware service has
H1: Assigned to the PCU basic software. Displays status service been started
codes for system booting and shutdown. 5 0 Network Wait for net-
work interfac-
H2: Assigned to the application software. es
Status codes during system power up. 8 0 TCU Wait for FTP
support server to start
test step 1
9 0 TCU Wait for TCU
support network boot
test step 2 and TCU
hardware ser-
vice to start
Status codes during system power up, continued. Status codes during operation.
LED LED H1 H2 Status LED LED H1 H2 Status

H1 H2 Dis- Dis- H1 H2 Display Display
play play
Flashing 0 0 OK
A 0 TCU Wait for VNC green
support test server to start
step 3 Flashing Error: See below
red
B 0 HMI Wait for HMI 1 0 Temperature Housing or
manager manager to alarm CPU over
start temperature
E 0 PCU General fault: 2 0 Fan alarm Housing or
Base see Windows CPU fan, low
software “Event viewer” speed or
failure
3 0 Hard disk S.M.A.R.T*
alarm hard disk
error
6 0 VNC server
failure, or
stop VNC
service
Notes

Status codes during shutdown.
LED LED H1 H2 Status

H1 H2 Dis- Dis-
play play
Flashing 5 0 Shutdown active

red/
green
In order to maintain the higher level of system availability, we Fan

recommend the preventive replacement of PC components Fans are components subject to wear. The fan speed is moni-
that are subject to wear in accordance with the replacement tored and an alarm issued at failure.
intervals listed in the following table. The main cause of failure for fans is pollution. The first criterion
for replacement should be a visual inspection. If the fan is very
dirty, it should be replaced. In the field, a replacement interval
Component Replacement interval of 5-7 years has proven itself under average industrial condi-
tions.
Electronic SSD drive > 5 years
Back-up battery
Fan 5-7 years Batteries are components subject to wear. They should be
changed every 5 years in order to guarantee the long-term
CMOS back-up battery 4/5 years functionality of the device. If a plug-in PCI card is also supplied
from the battery (centralized battery concept), the preventive
replacement is reduced to 4 years.
SSD
In industrial environments, it can be assumed that the service
life is longer then conventional mechanical hard disks, and ac-
cording to present knowledge, is > 5 years.
The write load is a factor that has a significant effect on the
total service life.
Notes

A010 END PCU, TCU and OP Diagnostics and Interfaces
TCU: Interfaces On the rear side of the TCU are two ribbon cable connectors
for connecting to the operator panel.
Ribbon cable connectors:

X206
+24 VDC
supply
X201
CF card
(Not enabled)
X202
System
Ethernet
X203 & X204

2 x USB
For the NC keyboard and
USB memory devices.
Operator Panel Diagnostics
There are two LEDs located on the front of the OP (Operator

Panel). The LEDs indicate:
 The supply of power to the PCU/TCU
 Temperature of the PCU outside the permissible
range (5—55º C)
In normal running conditions the Power LED is permanently lit.

The temperature LED illuminates when the PCU50 housing or
1 x USB interface
The rear of the operator panels are designed so that the PCU/
TCU can be easily mounted.
There are two ribbon cable connectors for transferring signals
between the OP and the PCU/TCU
A010: END
Notes

A036 NCU Diagnostic Displays and Switches
Sinumerik
Operate
Module Description:
All variants of NCU’s are equipped with status LED’s and a 7 segment display.
When alarms relating to the NCU occur it is recommended that the status LED’s etc be checked to
help achieve a speedy diagnosis.
The 7 segment display can also be used to output the IP address of the NCU.
Two rotary switches, one for NCK functions and one for PLC functions are also present. Certain
tasks can be performed by changing the position of the switches.
The location and description of the status LED’s, 7 segment display and rotary switches is de-
scribed in this module.
Module Objective:
Upon completion of this module you will be able to check the status LED’s and 7 segment display
of the NCU.
Content:
Sinumerik
LED Status & 7 Segment Display Status
NCK & PLC Rotary Switches
A036
A036

NCU Diagnostic Displays and Switches A036
NCU Diagnostic
Displays and
Switches:
START
Status LED’s
and 7 Segment
Display
NCK & PLC

Rotary Switch-
es
NCK & PLC

general reset
NCU Diagnostic
Displays and
Switches:
END
Notes

A036 NCU Diagnostic Displays and Switches
Status LED’s and 7 Segment Display.
The NCU diagnostic features are found on the lower front face
and consists of a 7-segment display unit and 8 status-LED’s.
LED Location
7 segment display Location
Area of LED’s and 7 segment

display.
The 7 segment display is found
beneath the light blue clip-on
cover.
LED Colour Explanation LED Colour Explanation

There is at least one fault (e.g. RESET, STOP orange PLC in the Stop status (PLC stop)
red Watchdog monitoring etc.), or the control unit
is in process of booting. SU/PF red FORCE activated (PLC force)
red/ flashing 0.5Hz. Error accessing Compact SF red PLC group error
orange Flash Card DP red PROFIBUS group error X126
orange Accessing Compact Flash Card DP/
red PROFIBUS group error X136
MPI
flashing (0.5 Hz). Updating the firmware of
RDY orange
the connected DRIVE-CLiQ components PN red PROFINET IO group error X150
flashing (2 Hz). Firmware update is complete Synchronization status (SY) of the
orange for components. Wait for POWER ON for the onboard PROFINET IO interface (X150)
components in question. SY/MT green
Maintenance status (MT) of the NCU
(presently without function)
green NC operative
The PROFINET system runs correctly;
gn/og Flashing (1 Hz). LED-supported recognition
off data exchange to all configured IO devic-
or of connected DRIVE-CLiQ component is
es runs.
rd/og activated: (p0124[0] = 1).
OPT Bus fault (no physical connection)
RUN green PLC operative (PLC run) red
Incorrect transmission rate
Failure of a connected I/O device.
red
Incorrect or no configuration
Notes

NCU Diagnostic Displays and Switches A036
7-Segment display 7-segment display during power up.
The 7-Segment display is located behind the lower cover of 7-segment Meaning
the control unit. display
The display can output a single numeric value (0 to 9) or a
1 Not applicable.
single letter (A, C, E, F, P). A decimal point is present to the
lower right of the numeric value. 2 Not applicable.
It serves as a status display during commissioning and can 3 Debugger was initialised.
be used to display the following information:
4 NRK operating system was successfully activat-
 IP address of the NCU ed.
5 NRK operating system has booted, init task is
 Test and diagnosis information being processed (The application boots)
 Status during booting 6 Initialisation was successfully performed; the
6. control is in cyclic operation and the cycles are
During normal operation a "6." is displayed with the point active.
flashing. The “RDY” LED will be green and constant. F Internal error.
An "8" indicates that the fan is defective or that the Control 1 or 2 CF card and SRAM data do not match. To re-
Unit is operating without a fan. solve this problem, a general reset is required by
booting with NCK- Switch position 1 or 2.
During the boot phase the display changes to indicate the
different stages of the boot process.
System Errors 7_segement display in relation to “RDY” LED (See above)
System errors are indicated by a combination of the “RDY” 7 segment Meaning

LED and the 7-segment display. display
“RDY” LED fault description: Permanent error

“Crash”: Operating system crash (similar to a
C “Blue screen” in Windows) Further details can be
“RDY” LED Meaning found in the system log-file.
Flashing red Permanent error: System stopped P “Partition”: Error when repartitioning
@ 2Hz (See below for 7-segment display) Temporary error
Flashing red/ Temporary error: System may continue with
orange @ restricted functions. “Error”: A read or write error has occurred on the
Compact Flash Card (an additional point is dis-
2Hz (See below for 7-segment display) E
played to indicate a “write error). It is possible
that the CF card is defective.
“Full”: The Compact Flash Card is full, it is possi-
ble that not all services will have started.
F When booting, the error is displayed for 1 minute;
the system will then continue to boot, however, it
can be assumed that problems will occur.
Notes

A036 END NCU Diagnostic Displays and Switches
NCK and PLC rotary switches NCK switch functionality
Two rotary switches, one for NCK functions and one for PLC Switch
Function
functions are also present. Certain tasks can be achieved Position
depending on the position of the switches.
0 Normal NCK boot up
Some tasks require a restart for activation, the “RESET” but- 1 NCK boot up with default values (Memory reset)
ton is conveniently located for this purpose.
7 Debug mode, NCK is not started.
8 IP address is displayed on 7 segment display
All others Not relevant.
PLC switch functionality.
RESET-button Switch
Function
Position
NCK start-up 0 Run

switch
1 Run (Protected mode)
PLC mode 2 STOP

selector switch.
3 Memory reset on boot up (MRES)
All others Not relevant.
NCK and PLC general reset

NCK and PLC = general reset !
NCK and PLC (incl. SDB) general reset

When commissioning the NCU for the first time, in order to
achieve a defined initial state of the whole system, a general
NCK and PLC reset must be performed. NCK general reset
Turn the NCK commissioning switch to position “1“  NCK commissioning switch to position “1“
and the PLC commissioning switch to position “3“.  Initiate a power on reset by switching-off the control and
Initiate a power on reset by switching-off the control and switching-on again – or by pressing the Reset button
switching-on again – or by pressing the Reset button.
Allow the system to run-up and wait for 5 on the 7-Segment  Run-up to wait for 6 on the 7-Segnent display
display  NCK commissioning switch to position “0“
LED "STOP" flashes and the LED "SF" is lit ! Turn the PLC
commissioning switch to "2" → “3“ → “2“ NCK = erased (standard–MD loaded)!
The LED "STOP" first flashes faster and then changes to
steady light.
Turn the PLC and the NCK switch back to position “0“
A036: END
Notes

A030 Digital Inputs and Outputs
Sinumerik
Operate
Module Description:
The 840D sl has interfaces for the connection of Digital inputs and outputs (I/O).
These are located on X122 ,132 & X142.
Connections used within the drive group components are known as BiCo’s.
The connectors X122 &X 132 is for Sinamics and X142 for NCK functionality.
Certain connections can be configured either as an output or an input via machine data.
The digital I/O are used to handle various signals, for example:
 Drive Enables
 Probe Inputs
 Automatic Line Contactor Control
 External Reference Mark (Bero)
This module shows the pin assignment of each connector and shows several examples of how a
BiCo is assigned to a function, including probes and line contactors and how NCK I/O are used in a
machining program.
Module Objective:
Upon completion of this module you will be able to locate the interface connectors and configure
individual connections to perform certain functions.
Content:
Sinumerik
X122, X132 & X142 Terminal Location and Description.
Digital Input/Output Terminal Description
Assignment of the BICO’s
NCK Inputs and Outputs
A030
A030

Digital Inputs and Outputs A030
Digital Inputs and

Outputs:
START
Interface
Description
Assigning
BICO’s
NCK Inputs
and
Outputs
Digital Inputs and

Outputs:
END
Notes

Interface Description The Binary Connectors (BiCo’s) of X122 and X132 are used to
assign Sinamics inputs/outputs to a specific function e.g. Ena-
X122, X132 & X142 digital I/O interfaces are located beneath bling of drives, BERO’s, automatic line contactor control etc
the flip-down cover of the NCU. X142 is used for NC digital inputs and outputs.
Certain terminals are automatically assigned to a function by

default, remaining terminals can be assigned to a function via
X122 X132 X142 machine data.
The status of the terminals is transferred to CU parameter

r0722 which is referred to when assigning a function.
Ext. 24V
+ M
Sinumerik NCU7x0 1* Fast inputs/outputs (Must be shielded).
X124 2* Electrical isolation for digital inputs (DI) if jumper open.
+ 3* Can be parameterised as Inputs or outputs.
+
M
M X122 X132 X142
1 DI 0 1 DI 4
1 Not used
2 DI 1 2 DI 5
2 Not used
3 DI 2 3 DI 6
3 NCK DI1
4 DI 3 4 DI 7
4 NCK DI2
5 DI 16 5 DI 20
5 M
6 DI 17 6 DI 21
6 NCK DI3
7 M1 7 M2
2* 2* 7 NCK DI4
8 M 8 M
8 M
9 DI/DO 8 1* 9 DI/DO 12 1*
9 NCK DO1
10 DI/DO 9 1* 10 DI/DO 13 1*
10 NCK DO2
11 M 11 M
11 M
12 DI/DO 10 1* 12 DI/DO 14 1*
12 NCK DO3
13 DI/DO 11 1* 13 DI/DO 15 1*
13 NCK DO4
14 M 14 M
3* 3* 14 M
Notes

X122 - Default BiCo assignments
BICO connection
X122 Signal Function/Default Setting
Source Destination
ON/OFF1 for DriveCLiQ line mod-

Pin 1 Sinamics DI 0 CU-r0722.0 Infeed p0840
ules (ALM, SLM >=16Kw)
Each drive 2nd OFF3,

Pin 2 Sinamics DI 1 OFF3 drive enable-Fast Stop CU-r0722.1
p0849
SH/SBC 1 – Group 1
p9620 (all drives in the
Pin 3 Sinamics DI 2 SINAMICS Safety Integrated CU-r0722.2
group)
(SH enable = p9601)
group)
(SH enable = p9601)
Pin 5 Sinamics DI 16 Freely available CU-r0722.16
Pin 7 Ground (G1) Ground for pins 1 to 6

Pin 8 Ground (M) Ground for terminals 9, 10, 12, 13
SH/SBC – Group 1 (Input) p9774 bit 1
Sinamics DI/O8
Pin 9 SINAMICS Safety Integrated CU-p0738 BICO from CU after the 1st
(Rapid input)
drive in the group
Sinamics DI/O9 p9774 bit 1
SH/SBC – Group 2 (Input) CU-p0739
Pin 10 (Rapid input) BICO from CU after the 1st
SINAMICS Safety Integrated
drive in the group
Sinamics DI/O10
Pin 12 Bero 1 - external zero mark (Input) CU-r0722.10 Drive p0495=2
(Rapid input)
Sinamics DI/O11 Probe 1: central measuring Each drive p0488, Index
Pin 13 CU p680[0]=3
(Rapid input) (Input) (MD13210=0) encoder 1, 2, 3=0
Notes

X132-Sinamics I/O
Default setting (In bold)/ BICO connection

X132 Signal
suggested setting Source Destination
Pin 4 Sinamics DI 7 Line contactor feedback signal CU-r0722.7 LM p0860

Sinamics DI/O Infeed operation (Output)
Pin 9 LM-r0863.0 CU-p0742
12 (Line Module with DRIVE CliQ)
Sinamics DI/O Infeed ready to start (Output)
Pin 10 LM-r0899.0 CU-p0743
13 (If L M with DriveCliQ)
Line contactor control (Output) LM-r0863.1 CU-p0744
Sinamics DI/O
14
2nd OFF 2 (Input) CU-r0722.14 Drive p0845
Sinamics DI/O Probe 2: central measuring (Input) CU-p680[1]=6 Each drive p0489,
Pin 13
15 (MD13210=0) CU-p728 bit 15=0 Index 1, 2, 3=0
Notes

X142-NCK I/O

Pin 1 Reserved Reserved
Pin 3 NCK DI 0 Digital Input $A_IN[1]
Pin 5 GND Ground
Pin 8 GND Ground
Pin 9 NCK DO 0 Digital Output $A_OUT[1]
Pin 11 GND Ground
Pin 14 GND Ground
Notes

Assigning BiCo’s Use the “Select” key to give a more detailed view.
Assigning a BiCo to a function requires changing machine

data.
The default setting for OFF3 can be checked as an example.
The OFF3 signal is input on X122.2, the status of this signal The information regarding the source of the OFF3 signal
is displayed via CU r0722.1. (X122.2) can be viewed.
In order for the signal to have any effect on the operation of
the drives It has to be referenced to each drive.
This is achieved through p0849 for each drive.
Parameter p849 Source of OFF3 signal:
Example: How the OFF3 signal is assigned to X axis p0849 CU parameter r722.1
Physical connection of the OFF3 signal:

CU X122 pin 2 = r722.1
By default, the OFF3 signal of each servo (p849) is assigned

to CU X122.2/r722.1.
Assignment of probe inputs: Assigning probe 2 to X132.13

From the list highlight the required input
Probe 1 is assigned to X122.13 by default. i.e. [6]DI/DO 15 (X132.13).
Press “Input” to enter the value.
In the following example, probe 2 will be assigned to BICO con-
nector X132.13.
The standard probing function of the 840D sl is “Centralised

measuring”.
The probes are assigned with CU parameter p680.
Notes

Assigning the probe inputs
Checking the functionality of the Bico terminals:
X132.9, 10, 12 & 13 can be used as either inputs or outputs.

This can be changed by the setting of CU parameter p728.
The default setting is for inputs which is correct for probing

operations. P728 Bits 12, 13 14 &
15 set as inputs by
default
Note:
- Workpiece probe at measurement input 1 by default

(MD52740 Bit 0=0)
- Tool probe at measurement input 2 by default

(MD52740 Bit 16=1)
Activation of Probe Soft-keys:
The soft-keys for the probing operation are not displayed as

standard. To display the soft-keys it is necessary to set
General Setting Data 54780 bit 2 and 54782 bit 2.
Notes

Setting the Probe Dimensions.

The probe radius has to be has to be entered into General
Machine Data 51780.
The following example shows probe 1 with a diameter of 5mm Or
5mm.
Select the input terminal to which the BERO switch is

Assigning the Spindle BERO Connector: connected (X122.10).
The training equipment has a proximity switch connected to
X122.10, this is for the spindle BERO (External zero mark)
signal.
To make this active the relevant Drive Machine Data (p495)
has to be set.
Ensure that the correct drive is selected, i.e. Spindle.
The status of the save process is displayed directly above the

horizontal soft-keys:
The assignment of the Drive Machine Data p495 and the

BERO switch input is now complete.
When the process is complete another message will be briefly

displayed:
Saving the Changes:
The changed data needs to be saved, use the following soft-

key sequence to save the drive data:
Checking the status of X122 and X132 via CU parameter
r722
The training equipment has two red buttons on the left off the
MCP, these are connected to X122.11 (Left button) and
X132.11 (Right button).
The status of the probe inputs and any other input can be
checked via CU parameter r722: CU digital inputs status.
The Hexadecimal value is displayed:
Notes

The status of the r722 bit editor is displayed when the “Select”
key is pressed. A change in status is not automatically updat-
ed, the page needs to be refreshed to view any changes.
By pressing the red buttons the status of the probe inputs will
go high. (Bits 11 & 15)
Configuring the automatic line contactor.

The automatic line contactor function is used to ensure correct
switching of the line supply to the line modules (DriveCLiQ
versions only)
The following example shows how to configure the line con-

tactor coil and line contactor feedback signals.
The feedback (Input) signal will be assigned to X132 pin 4
(Sinamics digital input 7).
The coil signal (Output) will be assigned to X132 pin 12
(Sinamics digital input 14).
Configuring the feedback signal:
The table of X132 shows information about the source and

destination. For the feedback signal, the source is CU param-
eter r0722.7. The destination of this signal is LM parameter
p0860.
Use the following soft-key selection to locate the set-up pag-
es.
Notes

For identification purposes, the LED of

the module can be made to flash.
The supply voltage can be manually entered or detected auto-

matically.
Select the check box for SINAMICS-internal line contactor.
A summary of the line supply data is displayed, this can be

saved to a text file if required.
The BICO connectors for line contactor operation are pre-

assigned.
X132.12 Output to line contactor coil.
X132.4 Input from line contactor.
Notes

The new BiCo settings need to be saved, select the “Yes” soft-
key.
The following dialogue box indicates the state of save Checking the Line Contactor Signals
process, the box clears when the process is complete.
The status of the line contactor feedback signal can be checked
via CU parameter r722.7
The status of the line contactor coil digital output can be
checked using CU parameter r747.14
The example below shows bit 14 is high.
Notes

NCK Digital Inputs and Outputs Example: Setting an NCK output via a part program.
NCK digital I/O can be addressed directly from machining The NCK outputs can be set directly from a part program. The
programs. following example will show how NCK digital input 2 is set and
unset.
To address Inputs, for example Digital NCK input 2, the fol-
lowing has to be entered in the part program: $A_IN[2] Select “MDA” mode.
Inputs cannot be written to (Read only) but their status can be

checked and used to influence the machining operation.
Type in the following text:
Addressing outputs is done in a similar manner, example ad-
dress for digital output 2: $A_OUT[2]
$A_OUT[2] = 1 Set NCK output 2 to 1 Optional program
stop, program will
The digital outputs are not active by default. General machine M00 halt until Cycle
data 10360 $MN_FASTIO_DIG_NUM_OUTPUTS is used to Start is pressed.
activate the outputs.. $A_OUT[2] = 0 Set NCK output 2 to 0
The value entered determines how many output bytes will be M30 Program end
available.
Press Cycle Start.
The program will stop at the “M00” command, a message will The status of the PLC variable can now be checked.
be displayed.
Optional stop active.
Note:
Interface X142 on training equipment has been wired so that

X142 pin 4 ($A_IN[2]) and X142 pin 10 ($A_OUT[2]) are
linked.
This allows demonstration of the use of an NCK input in MDA

mode ands also shows that X142 pin 10, does actually out-
put a physical voltage.
Notes

Example: Using NCK inputs in a part program
The NCK inputs can also be used in the part program. The
following program checks the status of NCK input 9 and dis-
plays a relevant message.
Type the following into the MDA screen:

Setting NCK output 2 to 1 will
$A_OUT[2] = 1 also set NCK input 2.
If NCK input 2 = 1
IF $A_IN[2] == 1 GOTOF LABEL1
jump forward to LABEL1.
MSG (“NCK INPUT 2 IS LOW”) Message line showing that Start the program via the “Cycle Start” button.
the input is low.
M00 M00 Program stops until cycle start is pressed.
M30 M30 Program end.
LABEL1: LABEL1 used for the jump command (GOTOF).
Message line for showing

MSG (“NCK INPUT 2 IS HIGH”) that the input is high.
M00 M00 Program stops until

cycle start is pressed.
M30 M30 Program end.
When “IF $A_IN[2] == 1 GOTOF LABEL1” is reached, the sys- When the cycle start is pressed again the program will see the
tem will check the status of digital input $A_IN[2] for a value of 1. M30 instruction and the program will be reset, the message
If this is true the program will jump to LABEL1 and continue from will clear.
there.
The program message will be displayed and the cycle will pause
because of the M00 instruction.
The program now needs to be edited so that NCK output 2 is

set to 0.
Notes

A030 END Digital Inputs and Outputs
Start the program via the “Cycle Start” button.
The program will not process the GOTOF command because

of the status of Input 2.
Instead it will process the next block which is the message
“NCK Input 2 is LOW” the program will halt due to the M00
command.
When the cycle start is pressed again the program will see the
M30 instruction and the program will be reset, the message
will clear.
The status of the input can be checked in the same way as

the output:
A030: END
Notes

A051 Line and Motor Modules
Sinumerik
Operate
Module Description:
The 840D sl Sinumerik Operate is designed to work with the Sinamics S120 drive family using the
Drive-CLiQ bus system.
The S120 Booksize version of drive components are the most common in use with the 840D sl
controller. S120 Blocksize/Chassis versions are also available.
This module describes the S120 Booksize line and motor components, including connection and
power off/on requirements.
Module Objective:
Upon completion of this module you will know how the drive components of the 840D sl system are
integrated and how the power to these components should be applied and removed.
Content:
Sinumerik
Topology
General Information
Drive Module power Supply
Smart Line Module (SLM)
Active Line Module (ALM)
Motor Module (MM)
Supply and Enabling Examples
A051
A051

Line and Motor Modules A051
Line and Motor

Modules:
START
Topology
General In-
formation
Drive Module
power
Supply
Smart Line Module

(SLM)
Active Line
Module (ALM)
Motor Module
(MM)
Supply and
Enabling
Examples
Line and Motor

Modules:
END
Notes

Topology
Example– 5 axis system (Spindle, X, Y, Z, A) “fast commissioning“
The system assigns the object/component numbers on the Drive-CLiQ Bus in the order they are connected
The order is with the compounds X100, X200 and X201 fixed and goes until the last X201.
From the last DO (MoMo 5 / 6), the components are then assigned in reverse order from X203.
Drive objects are ControlUnits, MotorModule and LineModule with Drive-CLiQ.

A drive object consists of the components “MotorModul, Motor, encoder interface and encoder “.
Motors, encoders etc are classed as drive components.
.
CU is always object number 1.
Objects are numbered in red text.

Components are numbered in purple text.
NCU 1 MoMo 2 MoMo 3 4 MoMo 5 6
X105
1 2 3 4 5 6
X104
X103 X203 X203
X102 X202 X202 X202
X101 X201 X201 X201
X100 X200 X200 X200
Sp X Y Z A X500
SMI- 21 SMI- 18 SMI- 15 SMI- 12 SMI- 9 SMC
ENC- 22 ENC- 19 ENC- 16 ENC- 13 ENC- 10 ENC- 7
MOT- 23 MOT- 20 MOT- 17 MOT- 14 MOT- 11 MOT- 8
2 3 4 5 6 6
Notes

Topology
Example- 7 axis system with NX ...“fast commissioning“
Equipment connected to X101 is assigned to the CU, the numbering is continued complete-
ly.
For those involved in NX... (CU) the connected drives/motors uses the same numbering
Drive system
rules as the CU.
Drive device 1: NCU

NCU 1 ALM 2 MoMo 3 MoMo 4 5 MoMo 6 7
X105
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
X104
X103 X203 X203
X102 X202 X202 X202 X202 DMC 23
X101 X201 X201 X201 X201

X505
X100 X200 X200 X200 X200
X504
X503
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 X500 X500
SMI- 20 SMI- 17 SMI- 14 SMI- 11 SMI- 8 X502 SMC SMC
ENC- 21 ENC- 18 ENC- 15 ENC- 12 ENC- 9 SMC- 24 SMC- 26
MOT- 22 MOT- 29 MOT- 16 MOT- 13 MOT- 10 X501 ENC- 25 ENC- 27
3 4 5 6 7 X500
Drive device 2: CU
NX 1 MoMo 2 3
X105
1 2 3
X104
X103 X203
X102 X202
X101 X201
M6 M7 X500
SMI- 7 SMI- 4
X100 X200 ENC- 8 ENC- 5 SMC
MOT– 9 MOT– 6 SMI- 10
ENC- 11
2 3
Notes

A051 END Line and Motor Modules
SINAMICS Communication CU
STEP7 (HW-Config) DP Slave
SINAMICS S120
properties
Numeric Control
Numeric Control
Extension Drive-
Extension
Parameter Parameter Telegram type-
Component Parameter I/O adress
p978[0-9] p922 Length
p922
drive objects Telegram type
Telegram type
list
MoMo 3 3 136 136. PZD-15/19 4100
MoMo 4 4 136 136. PZD-15/19 4140
MoMo 5 5 136 136. PZD-15/19 4180
MoMo 6 6 136 136. PZD-15/19 4220
MoMo 7 7 136 136. PZD-15/19 4260
not available 255 not available 136. PZD-15/19 4300
CU 1 391 391. PZD-3/7 6500

end of cyclical
0
data
ALM 2 9 999. BICO 6514
1. NX 60
SINAMICS Communication NX 15
STEP7 (HW-Config) DP Slave
SINAMICS S120
properties
Numeric Control
Numeric Control
Extension Drive-
Extension
Parameter Parameter Telegram type-
Component Parameter I/O adress
p978[0-9] p922 Length
p922
drive objects Telegram type
Telegram type
list
MoMo 2 2 136 136. PZD-15/19 4340
MoMo 3 3 136 136. PZD-15/19 4380
NX 1 391 391. PZD-3/7 6530
not available 255

end of cyclical
0
data
Notes

Communication NC- CU/NX
NC CU/NX
Achs-MD NC- MD PLC HW - Config
NCU PLC- E/A-

Slot Adr.
IDX MD 13050 1=DRV1 4100
[0] 4100 2=DRV2 4140
AX MD 30110 [1] 4140 3=DRV3 4180
MD 30220 [2] 4180 4=DRV4 4220
1:X1 2 [3] 4200 5=DRV5 4260
2:Y1 1 [4] 4260 6=DRV6 4300
3:Z2 3 [5] 4300 7=CU 6500
4:SP1 4 [6] 4340 8 =Alm] 6514
5:A1 5 [7] 4380
6:C1 7 [8] 4420 NX15 PLC- E/A-
7:TC1 8 Slot Adr.
[9] 4460
1=DRV1 4340
[10] 4500
2=DRV2 4380
[11] 4540
3=DRV3 4420
4=DRV4 4460
passive
IDX MD 13120 5=DRV5 4500
[0] 6500 6=DRV6 4540

[1] 6530 7=CU 6530
[2] 0 8=Alm 6534
Notes

General Information
Example, S120 Line module with two motor modules:
Line and Motor Modules
Line and motor modules are responsible for supplying power to

the motors.
The Sinumerik 840D sl works with the Sinamics S120 range of
drive products.
All Motor Modules have to be connected to the Drive-CLiQ bus
system.
All Line Modules with the exception of 5 & 10Kw SLM modules
have to be connected to the Drive-CLiQ bus system.
Line modules require a 3 phase AC supply, this is rectified into

a DC supply which is then supplied to the motor modules via
the DC link bus bars.
Motor modules convert the DC link back into a controllable AC

supply which is used to drive the servo motors.
By regulating the frequency and voltage of the AC supply to the
servo motors it is possible to precisely control the movement of
motors.
Line and motor modules are available in different variants de-

pending on the machine requirements.
Each module requires a +24V DC control voltage, this is sup-

plied by the user to the line module and then distributed to the
motor modules via a bus system. Line Module Motor Modules
(LM) (MM)
Bridging device for

Drive Module power Supply 24V DC Electronics supply (X24) continuity of the
+24V DC bus
Power Requirements between drive
modules.
The drive modules require two power supplies in order to op-
erate.
A 3 phase AC supply (380V to 480V +10% (-15% < 1 min) to

the bottom of the line module is used to produce the 600V DC +24V DC Bus-bar
link. The DC link is distributed to the motor modules via a bus
bar system on the front of the drive modules beneath a flip 0V DC Bus-bar
down cover.
+ DC Link Bus-bar
An electronics supply (+24V DC) is required and must be sup- - DC Link Bus-bar
plied to the Line Module via connector X24. This is then dis-
tributed by a bus bar system to the remaining drive modules.
The electronic supply is used internally by the drive modules
LM MM1 MM2
for powering of the electronic circuitry etc. Externally it is used
for supplying the Drive-CLiQ encoders and fault, ready and
enable signals. X24– Electronic Supply 24V DC
X24 “M” Terminal: Electronics ground

Location of the electronics supply and DC link bus bars:
“+” Terminal: +24V DC (20.4V to 28.8V)
Notes

Smart Line Modules (SLM) X21: X22:

Various signals Various signals
The SLM is responsible for rectifying the AC mains supply into
the DC link voltage which is then utilised by the Motor Mod-
ules. X24:Electronics
This DC link voltage is non-stabilised on all SLM types supply Electronics/DC link
The SLM is also responsible for handling the regenerative cur- bus bars (below
rent caused by the braking of motors. The regenerative current flip down cover)
is fed back into the mains network. This eliminates the need for
braking resistors and complex measures for heat dissipation.
The SLM is available in 5, 10, 16 & 36Kw variants with internal
or external cooling capability.
Smart Line Modules- 5 & 10Kw LED status
The 5 & 10Kw SLM’s are not used on the Drive-CLiQ network,
because of this there are slight differences with terminal func-
tionality compared to Drive-CLiQ type modules.
Example:-An internally cooled 10Kw SLM module showing

terminal locations etc.
X1: Mains supply

Protective earth (3-Phase AC)
connections
Connector locations X21, X22 & X24 X22 Terminal description and functionality
Terminal Function Description

+24 V DC Supply for use with the
+24V DC
1 functions of X22.2 & 3 described be-
(Output)
low.
Applying +24V DC will cause the re-
X21: X22: (SLM 5 & 10Kw
generation function to be disabled.
Enable, ready only)
and fault sig- Regeneration and In some cases it may be necessary to
nals fault stop the regeneration of current
Disable
reset signals caused by braking motors. Example:-
2 Regeneration
A poor quality mains Network not able
(Input)
to handle regeneration.
Note: The fitting of resistor modules to
dissipate excess energy will be re-
quired when this function is used.
Applying +24V DC will cause the re-
X24: setting of any drive faults.
24V DC Elec- Fault Reset A fault occurring on the drives system
3
tronics sup- (Input) will be latched, this can be reset with
this function providing the cause of
the original fault is no longer present.
0V DC Must be connected to the same 0V of
4
(Ground) the electronics supply (X24).
SLM
Notes

X21 Terminal description and functionality
Switches high (+24V DC) when the following conditions are true:
 Electronics supply present (X24).
 DC Link is pre-charged.
Ready Signal
 Pulses enabled (X21.3)
1  No over-temperature
(Output)
 No over-current
It is recommended that the signal is connected directly to the 840D sl controller via con-
nector X122 pin 1. This is the OFF1 enable signal.
Switches low when any of the following conditions arise:

 Over-temperature threshold reached.
 I²t threshold reached.
Pre-warning  Mains fault making regenerative feedback impossible. If feedback is intentionally
2
(Output) deactivated (X22.2 is high) this warning is disabled.
This signal is for use by the manufacturer to set a user alarm and alert the operator to a
problem.
X21 Terminal description and functionality
Applying +24V DC will cause the pulses to be enabled. (Current consumption:10mA)
This signal must be removed at least 10ms prior to the 3-phase mains supply being re-
moved.
Failure to do this can lead to damaged drive modules. This is especially important when
the axes/spindles are decelerating and causing regenerative currents. if the mains circuit
Enable Pulses is opened these regenerative currents remain within the drive system causing damage to
3
(Input) the modules.
It is recommended that this terminal is connected via an early break contact on the ma-
chine isolator switch and the line contactor (If used).
If the terminal is used by the manufacturer it must be ensured that it is controlled in the
suggested manner.
When used in this way the transistors will be switched off and mains regeneration halted,
the motors will then coast to a halt. This is not suitable for an emergency stop situation.
Enable Pulses
4 Must be connected to the 0V of the enable pulses supply.
(Ground)
Notes

LED Status Display X200/X201/

X21:Pulse ena- X202:
ble Drive-CLiQ
LED Colour Status Explanation connectors
Green On Module is healthy and operational.
X24:Electronic
Pre charging of DC link active; By- s supply
Yellow On
pass relay dropped out.
Electronics/DC
READY Over temperature/current fault or link bus bars
(Top) Red On electronics power supply outside (below flip
permitted range. down cover)
Electronics power supply outside
Off
permitted range.
DC LINK
Yellow On DC link voltage within tolerance.
(Bottom)
Red On DC link voltage outside tolerance.
LED status
Indicators
Smart Line Modules- 16Kw and above
These models are always required to be connected to the

Drive-CLiQ drive bus network.
The functionality of certain terminals is therefore different from
the non-Drive-CLiQ SLM modules.
Regeneration can be deactivated by parameter P3533-Inhibit
regenerative operation.
Protective X1: Mains sup-
Terminal locations of an internally cooled 36Kw SLM: earth ply
terminals
Connector locations X21, X24, X200, X201 & X202 X21 Terminal description and functionality
X21: Terminal Function Description

Pulse enable (PE) 1 Not used Not used
2 Not used Not used
X202:
Drive-CLiQ
X201:
Drive-CLiQ
X200:
Drive-CLiQ
X24:
24V DC Electronics
Supply
Notes

Terminal Function Description LED Status Display

Applying +24V DC enables the pulses. LED Colour Status Explanation
(Current consumption:10mA)
Electronics power supply out-
This signal must be removed at least Off
side permitted range.
10ms prior to the 3-phase mains supply
being removed. Module configured and ready,
Failure to do this can lead to damaged Green On Drive-CLiQ communication is
drive modules. This is especially im- active.
portant when the axes/spindles are re- Drive-CLiQ communication is
generating. If the mains circuit is opened Orange On being established/module not
in this state, regenerative currents remain READY configured.
Enable (Top)
within the drive system causing damage Red On At least one fault is present.
Pulses
to the modules. Green/ Flashing Firmware download procedure
3 Input
It is recommended that this terminal is Red 2Hz is running.
(EP)
connected via an early break contact on
the machine isolator switch and the line Green/
contactor (If used). Orange Flashing Component recognition is active
If the terminal is used by the manufactur- or Red/ 2 Hz (p0124 = 1)
er it must be ensured that it is controlled Orange
in the suggested manner. Electronics power supply out-
Off
When used in this way the transistors will side permitted range.
be switched off and mains regeneration DC link voltage within tolerance-
halted, the motors will then coast to a DC LINK Orange On Only if unit is configured and
halt. This is not suitable for an emergency (Bottom) ready.
stop situation. DC link voltage outside toler-
EP Must be connected to the 0V of the ena- Red On ance-Only if unit is configured
4
(Ground) ble pulses supply. and ready.
Active Line Modules (ALM) X21: X200/X201/

Pulse enable, X202:
The ALM is responsible for the rectification of the AC mains temperature Drive-CLiQ
supply into the DC link voltage which is then utilised by the sensor
Motor Modules.
This DC link voltage is also stabilised unlike the SLM mod- X24: Electronics/DC
ules Electronics link bus bars
The ALM is also responsible for handling regenerative current supply. (below flip
caused by the braking of motors. down cover)
The regenerative current is fed back into the mains network.
This eliminates the need for braking resistors and complex LED status
Indicators
measures for heat dissipation.
Regeneration can be deactivated by parameter P3533-Inhibit
regenerative operation.
The modules are available in 16, 36, 55, 80 & 120Kw variants
with internal or external cooling capability.
The ALM is always connected to the Drive-CLiQ bus and has
four Drive-CLiQ connections.
The stabilised DC link makes the ALM suitable for high dy- X1:
namic machinery where the acceleration and positioning of 3-Phase AC
Protective Mains supply
axes/spindles is critical. earth
connections.
Terminal locations of ALM modules:-
Notes

Location of ALM connectors X21, X24, X200, X201 & X202 X21 Terminal description and functionality
X21:
Enable and
Temperature sensor. Terminal Function Description
+ Temp Temperature sensor input from Active
1
(Input) Interface Module (Observe the polarity)
X203: Drive-CLiQ. - Temp Temperature sensor input from Active
2
(Input) Interface Module (Observe the polarity)
X202: Drive-CLiQ.
X201: Drive-CLiQ.
X200: Drive-CLiQ.
X24: 24V DC
Electronics supply
Terminal Function Description ALM LED Status Display.

Applying +24V DC enables the pulses. LED Colour Status Explanation
(Current consumption:10mA)
Electronics power supply
This signal must be removed at least Off
outside permitted range.
10ms prior to the 3-phase mains supply
being removed. Module configured and ready,
Failure to do this can lead to damaged Green On Drive-CLiQ communication is
drive modules. This is especially im- active.
portant when the axes/spindles are DriveCLiQ communication is
regenerating. If the mains circuit is Orange On being established/module
opened in this state, regenerative cur- not configured.
rents remain within the drive system Red On At least one fault is present.
Enable causing damage to the modules.
READY Green/ Flashing Firmware download procedure
3 Pulses It is recommended that this terminal is
(Top) Red 2Hz is running.
(Input) connected via an early break contact
on the machine isolator switch/line con- Green/
tactor. Orange Flashing Component recognition is active
If the terminal is used by the manufac- or Red/ 2 Hz (p0124 = 1)
turer it must be ensured that it is con- Orange
trolled in the suggested manner. Electronics power supply outside
Off
When used in this way the transistors permitted range.
will be switched off and mains regener- DC link voltage within tolerance-
ation halted, the motors will then coast DC LINK Orange On Only if unit is configured and
to a halt. This is not suitable for an (Bottom) ready.
emergency stop DC link voltage outside tolerance-
situation. Red On Only if unit is configured and
EP Must be connected to the 0V of the ready.
4
(Ground) enable pulses supply.
Notes

Motor Modules (MM) X200/X201/X202:

X21: Drive-CLiQ
Enables etc.
Motor Modules are responsible for converting the DC link volt-
age into a variable AC voltage in order to drive the motors.
The modules have to be connected to the Drive-CLiQ bus.
Single/double axis and internally/externally cooled versions
are available. Electronics/DC
Double axis modules are equipped with four Drive-CLiQ con- link bus bars
nectors, one more than the single axis modules. (below flip down
cover)
Single Axis MM
Available in the following rated current output sizes: LED Status
3, 5, 9, 18, 30, 45, 60, 85, 132 & 200A. Indicators
X11: Brake output
Example: A single axis MM showing connector locations etc. for MM of 45A and
above
Protective
X1: Output to
earth
Motor, including
terminals
the brake output
for MM less than
45A
X22:Motor 2
Double Axis MM X21:Motor 1
Enables etc.
Available in the following rated current output sizes: Enables etc.
3, 5, 9 & 18A
Example: A double axis MM showing connector locations.

These units will have two identical Motor/Brake connectors X200/X201/ Electronics/DC
(X1 & X2) and two identical enable connectors (X21 & X22). X202/X203: link bus bars
Drive-CLiQ (below flip down
connectors cover)
LED Status
Indicators
X1 & X2 Output
to Motor,
including the
brake output for
Protective MM less than
earth 45A
connections
X11: Brake out-

put for MM of 45A
Notes

Terminal descriptions
Positive temperature sensor input from
+ Temp
X21: Pulse 1 non-Drive-CLiQ temperature sensor.
(Input)
Enable etc. Type:- KTY84-1C130/PTC
Negative temperature sensor input from
X22: Pulse - Temp
2 non Drive-CLiQ temperature sensor.
X21: Pulse Enable etc. (Input)
Enable etc. Type:- KTY84-1C130/PTC
X203: Applying +24V DC will cause the pulses
Drive-CLiQ of the individual axis to be enabled.
X202:
Drive-CLiQ (Current consumption:10mA)
X202: When the signal is low, “Safe pulse
X201: Drive-CLiQ suppression” is activated.
Drive-CLiQ Note:-No electrical isolation occurs
X201: Enable between the Motor module and the motor.
X200: Drive-CLiQ Pulses This enable signal is only operational if the
3
Drive-CLiQ (EP) Safety Integrated function “Safe Standstill
X200: Input (SH)” is enabled.
Drive-CLiQ This is a dual channel monitoring system of
the Control Unit and Motor Module. The
status of the Enable Pulses input is cross
checked against the corresponding CU
input, an error is reported if they do not
Single axis Double match.
EP Must be connected to the 0V of the enable
4
Connector X21 & X22 (X22 only for double axis (Ground) pulses supply.
modules)
LED Status Display Motor connector (MM less than 45A)

LED Colour Status Explanation
Screw terminals. Not
Electronics power supply out- on Crimped cable
Fixing Metal connector
Off side types housing, also
permitted range.
Module configured and ready,
Green On Drive-CLiQ communication is Brake: Posi-
Brake: Nega-
active. tive tive Connec-
Drive-CLiQ communication is tion
READY Orange On being established/module not
(Top) configured.
Locating key- Locating key
Red On At least one fault is present. -
Green/ Flashing Firmware download procedure
Red 2Hz is running.
Green/
Orange Flashing Component recognition is active Motor: Phase Motor: Motor:
U Phase V Phase W
or Red/ 2 Hz (p0124 = 1)
Orange
Electronics power supply
Off
outside permitted range.
For MM modules of 45A and above, the brake is supplied by a
DC link voltage within tolerance-
separate connector (X11).
DC LINK Orange On (Only if unit is configured and
(Bottom) Ready)
The brake control circuit is isolated therefore it is not permissi-
DC link voltage outside toler- ble to connect the VE brake connector to the 0 V common of
Red On ance (Only if unit is configured the machine.
and ready)
Notes

Minimum 10ms-
Supply and Enabling Examples if supply disconnected
while drive is operational
For trouble free operation it is essential that the drives are
powered on/off and enabled correctly.
If the mains supply switch/contactor is opened while the drive Mains supply
pulses are enabled and the drive is in regeneration mode, the E Stop active
regenerative current which is normally fed back into the mains DB56.DBX0.1
will have no where to go, except that is into the motor and line Input to ALM/SLM via line switch
modules, this can result in damage to these modules. Enable Pulses
ALM/SLM
The solution is to use an auxiliary contact fitted to the mains X21.3
switch and drive line contactor.
Output/Input from/to 840D
This auxiliary contact must open at least 10ms before the In-feed ready.
From/to 840D sl
main contacts open. Link X132.10 to
The contact is wired to the Pulse Enable terminal of the SLM/ X122.1 (OFF1)
ALM module.
Energise line Output from 840D
If the Main switch or contactor is operated while the drive is in contactor–
operation the pulses will be disabled and the motors will free 840D sl X132.12
wheel to a standstill. (Except when the Safety Integrated func- Output
tion “Safe Stop” is enabled) Input from N/O contact
Line contactor
Any potentially harmful current will be unable to enter the drive energised-
modules as the transistors are now switched off. 840D sl X132.4
Input
Below is the timing diagram for the enabling of drives via the Input to ALM/SLM
OFF3 Enable
controller using a line Contactor. from user to
840D sl
X122.2
Notes

Notes

A051 END Line and Motor Modules
A051: END
Notes

A053 Axis and Drive Diagnostics
Sinumerik
Operate
Module Description:
In the event of a problem with the machine it may be necessary to check the status of an axis/
drive.
The information obtained from these status screens can be very useful to technical personnel and
help speed up the fault finding process.
Module Objective:
Upon completion of his module you will be able to use the Axis & Drive diagnostic functions.
Content:
Sinumerik
Service Overview Screen
Axis Diagnostics
Drive Diagnostics
A053
A053

Axis and Drive Diagnostics A053
Axis and Drive

Diagnostics:
START
Service
Overview
Screen
Axis
Diagnostics
Drive
Diagnostics
Axis and Drive

Diagnostics:
END
Notes

Service Overview Screen The indicators change appearance depending on the condition
of the signal.
To navigate to the relevant diagnostics page please use the
following key presses. The signal is healthy, in the case of an enable, the
signal is high. For a monitoring signal there is no fault
present.
The signal is missing i.e. low (Enable signals only).
The signal is indicating a fault (Monitoring signals

The screen shows the status of various enable/monitoring only).
signals via indicators.
The signal is inactive/not in use.
Example: The diagnostics page showing a motor over temper-

ature problem on Axis 1. In this case the encoder cable was
not connected to the drive.
The displayed axes can be changed to suit personal prefer-

ences.
The “Active axes” soft-key will only display axes

that are currently active. Axes disabled via machine
data or parked axes will not be displayed.
The “All axes” soft-key will display any axes that are
currently configured as active or inactive.
The “Selected axis” soft-key allows selected axes to

be viewed.
Example below shows how to view axes 1 and 3
only.
Notes

Axis Diagnostics The selected axis is displayed at the top of the diagnostics
screen.
Axis specific information.
Each axis is displayed individually, changing to another axis

This detailed information can be very useful when a problem is done with the “Axis +” and “Axis -” soft keys.
occurs on the machine.
OR
An alternative method of selecting the required axis is via the

“Axis selection” soft key.
This the quickest method on a machine with many axes.
Useful information about the axis in question ranging from

positional data to current and torque readings is available.
Further information can be seen by using the page/cursor
keys.
Notes

Drive Diagnostics The drive diagnostics screen shows useful information regard-
ing the motor and drive states such as motor temperature, DC
Drive specific information link voltage etc.
For more detailed information regarding each individual drive,

select the “Service drive” soft key.
More diagnostics information is revealed by
using the page/cursor keys
Drive System.
Further drive diagnostic information, specifically Sinamics re-

lated, can be found by selecting the “Drive system” soft key.
The status of the Drive-CLiQ drive objects can be seen. The CU is the only drive object displayed, to view the other
drive objects press the “Input” key.
A healthy drive object, fully enabled ready for
operation.
A drive object with a warning e.g. enable missing.
A drive object with a fault.
Notes

The following screen shows a healthy system, indicated by the

green tick symbols.
Drives not ready or in a fault condition will display yellow or

red symbols.
The following example shows MSP1 exhibiting a problem. Example: The “Status indicator” information indicates that axis
To see more information about the cause, cursor to the failed is in commissioning mode.
axis and select the “Details” soft-key. The lower half of the screen offers further information.
The screen will display information regarding the cause of

the problem.
Use the “Drive object +” & “Drive object -” soft-keys to check

the status of other axes.
OR
A more serious situation is indicated by the appearance of

red/white cross symbol.
Example– MX1 (Servo 1) axis showing a fault with encoder 1
(SMI20).
Notes

Two further soft-keys are also available for displaying further

information. Selecting the “Faults” soft-key also displays more
information which indicates a problem with encoder
1, drive component 18.
Selecting the “Warning” soft-key displays more infor-
mation which indicates a problem with encoder 1.
The “Help” key, found to the lower right of the vertical soft-
keys can be used to get more information about Warnings/
Faults. The alarms and warnings can also be seen on the alarm
screen.
Notes

The alarms displayed can be filtered via machine data 13150

“SINAMICS_ALARM_MASK”.
Many alarms are generated when the system detects a com-

CU (Drive object 1) is connected
ponent error. The machine data is used to filter out alarms via X100 to a motor module
which may be confusing. The default value is 0909 this sets (Drive object 2) socket X200.
bits 0, 3, 8 & 9. For service and commissioning work it maybe
necessary to view more alarms. Setting the machine data to
FFFF will result in all alarms being displayed.
The default value should always be re-entered when the ser-
vice/commissioning work is complete.
Topology
The topology of the drive system can be seen when the

“Topology” soft-key is selected.
Topology shows the Drive-CLiQ interconnections of the drive
objects and components.
Notes

The topology display can also be used to help identify faults. Drive component renaming
The component names can be changed to a more suitable

name if desired:
When a drive object has a fault, the text

will be displayed in red or grey.
Example: Renaming of Motor_Module_2 to Spindle.
Press the “OK” soft-key to confirm the changes, wait for the
dialogue box to clear.
Notes

Display options Automatic Firmware Update:

When replacement drive hardware is fitted it is important that
The topology display can be changed via the “Display op- the firmware version is correct. In normal circumstances the
tions” soft-key: system automatically loads the firmware to any modules not
at the correct firmware level. If the firmware is not automati-
cally updated the “Load firmware” soft-key can be used.
Firmware:
Firmware is a software that is written to the internal flash
memory of the Drive-CLiQ components. Firmware updates
are used to keep the components up to date with the latest
technological advances. The firmware version is dependant
upon the current system software version.
Manual Firmware Update:

The “Load firmware” soft-key located in the Configuration
area which is accessed via the “Configuration” soft-key.
Notes

When the process is running the top LED of the drives will
flash red. Other Drive-CLiQ components will also indicate the
process in a similar way.
When the update has finished a complete power off/on of the
controller/drives is required.
The configuration area has several further functions:
The Drive Object and Component names can be changed via

the “Change” soft-key.
The system assigns default names to the objects/components.
It is not always apparent from these names what the function of
each object/component is.
Using more suitable names can help with object identification in
the event of a problem.
The changes are accepted when the “OK” soft-key is pressed.
Example: Details of MX1 Servo Motor:
Electronic Rating Plates
Useful information is displayed when the “Details” soft-key is

selected.
These are known as the ”Electronic Rating Plates”.
Example: Details of MX1 axis Motor Module:
Notes

The “Sort” soft-key is used to view the components in a partic-

ular order according to Drive Object, Wiring, Component num-
ber or Axis number:
Comparison Levels:
Some of the information on the screen can only be viewed by

using the cursor left/right keys.
Display Settings
The level of displayed information about the components can

be controlled with the “Display options” function.
To the right of the screen, a column named “C.level” can be To change the level of comparison select the “Change” soft-
seen. key and then the “Insert” key.
This is used to set the comparison level for the Drive-CLiQ
components.
The system compares the stored details of the electronic rat-
ing plate of each object with the actual components connect-
ed to the Drive-CLiQ bus.
Once the drive system is configured it is continually moni-
tored. Alarms will be displayed if a fault occurs or an unknown
object is detected.
Notes

A053 END Axis and Drive Diagnostics
Comparison Levels:
High-compares the complete electronic rating plate.
Medium– compares the component type and order number.
Low– compares the component type.
Minimum– compares the component class.
Service case 1: If a new component is to be fitted to a system

to replace a faulty one it is not necessary to change the com-
parison level. The system should automatically load the cor-
rect firmware to the new component.
Service case 2: If two existing components are to be inter-

changed to prove a fault e.g. Motor Module 1 & Motor Module
2, the system will detect this and issue alarms depending on
the setting of the comparison level.
In this case setting the comparison level to low would allow
the modules to be interchanged without alarms occurring.
A053: END
Notes

A008 MCP & PP72/48 PN Connections and
Diagnostics
Sinumerik
Operate
Module Description:
The Machine Control Panels (MCP) are connected to the system network X120 (Industrial Ethernet)
of the 840D sl Sinumerik controller .
Each MCP, maximum of two, needs to be uniquely addressed via its addressing switch.
It is also necessary to understand the parameterisation of PLC function block FB1 to determine start
address of MCP I/O.
This module shows how the MCPs are addressed, how the parameterisation of the function block is
made and the Profinet configuration of PP72/48 I/O modules.
Module Objective:
Upon completion of this module the course participant will know how to configure and install a
Siemens machine control panel (MCP) and PP72/48 periphery I/O modules.
Content:
Sinumerik
Machine Control Panel Types
MCP483 PN Front and rear Layout
MCP310 PN Front and rear Layout
Machine Control Panel Addressing
Machine Control Panel Interface Signals
Machine Control Panel Signal Test
PP72/48 PN Description and Interface Signals
Profinet Configuration PP72/48
A008
A008

MCP & PP72/48 PN Connections and Diagnostics A008
MCP & PP72/48 PN

Connections and
Diagnostics:
START
Machine
Control Pan-
el Types
MCP483
Front and
Rear layout
MCP310
Front and
Rear layout
MCP
Configuration
and
Addressing
Machine Control
Panel Interface
Signals
MCP Signal
Test
PP72/48 PN De-
scription and
Interface Signals
Profinet Con-
figuration
MCP &
PP72/48
MCP & PP72/48 PN

Connections and
Diagnostics:
END
Notes

A008 MCP & PP72/48 PN Connections and Diagnostics
Machine Control Panel Types
Mechanical and membrane types of MCP are available in two formats (MCP483 and MCP310). The MCP483 is
483mm in width; the MCP310 is 310mm in width.
The major differences between the two formats are, the number of keys, layout of keys etc The input/output assign-
ment also differs.
The functionality and purpose of the two variants is, however, identical (controlling of axes, mode selection etc).
There are no separate MCPs for turning or milling technologies.
MCP483:
6FC5303-0AF22-0AA1 MCP483C PN (Mechanical type keys)

6FC5303-0AF22-1AA1 MCP483 PN (Membrane type keys)
S1
MCP310:
6FC5303-0AF23-0AA1 MCP310C PN (Mechanical type keys)

6FC5303-0AF23-1AA1 MCP310 PN (Membrane type keys)
Notes

MCP483 Front Layout
Note:- Cycle stop, Feed stop & Spindle stop-signals are inverted i.e. Normally closed.
Buttons T1 to T15 are free for use by the manufacturer.
The two blanks can be removed to allow the user to add extra buttons/switches/lamps.
MCP483 Rear Layout
X10
X53
X54 X60 X61
X3 X51
X52
X55
X20
H3
H2
X30 H1 X21
X5
S2
Interface Description:- X51 Digital inputs X60 Hand-wheel

S2 Addressing switch. X52 Digital inputs X61 Hand-wheel
X5 Key-switch interface X53 Digital outputs
X10 24V DC supply X54 Digital outputs
X20 Port 1 Ethernet connection in. X55 Digital inputs
X21 Port 2 Ethernet connection out.
X30 Feedrate override interface. LED Indicators:
X31 Spindle override interface. H1 Power OK (Green)
H2 BUSSYNC
H3 BUSFAULT
Notes

MCP310 Front Layout
Note:- Cycle stop, Feed stop & Spindle stop-signals are inverted i.e. normally closed.
Buttons T1 to T16 are free for use by the manufacturer.
The six blanks can be removed to allow the user to add extra buttons/switches/lamps.
MCP310 Rear Layout
X1
X5
X5 X60
X3 X5
X5
X5
X2
H3
H2
X3 H1
X2
X5
S2
Interface Description:-
X51 Digital inputs X60 Hand-wheel
S2 Addressing switch
X52 Digital inputs X61 Hand-wheel
X5 Key-switch interface
X53 Digital outputs
X10 24V DC supply
X54 Digital outputs LED Indicators:
X20 Port 1 Ethernet connection in.
X55 Digital inputs H1 Power OK (Green)
X21 Port 2 Ethernet connection out.
H2 BUSSYNC
X30 Feedrate override interface.
H3 BUSFAULT
X31 Spindle override interface
Notes

Machine Control Panel Configuration and Addressing Parameter description:
Determining the MCP start address MCPNum Number of MCPs on the system.
Function Block FB1 is used for configuring the I/O assignment MCP1In Pointer-The start address of the MCP inputs.
of the MCPs.
Module “A033 PLC Functions” describes the full configuration MCP1Out Pointer-The start address of the MCP outputs.
procedure for the MCPs.
FB1 is called from within Organisation Block OB100. There are MCP1BusAdr Addressing of MCP, set by dip-switch
many parameters associated with FB1.
MCP1BusType Bus type; 55 = Ethernet
The following is an example of FB1, the parameters for setting
the I/O start addresses for a single MCP.
The MCP is connected to X120 system network.
X120 is a DHCP server with a default IP address of
CALL FB 1 , DB 7(
192.168.214.1 and a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0.
MCPNum := 1,
MCP1In := P#I 0.0,
MCP1Out := P#Q 0.0,
MCP1StatSend := P#Q 8.0,
MCP1StatRec := P#Q 12.0,
MCP1BusAdr := 192,
MCPBusType := B#16#55,
NCKomm := TRUE,
ExtendAlMsg := FALSE);
Each hardware item connected to the network needs a unique The following table shows examples of S2 switch positions and
address. the resulting addresses, including the default address of 192.
This is determined by the setting of S2 on the MCP.
Meaning/
Each switch position from 1 to 8 represents a value which is Switch S2
address
active when the switch position is set to “On”.
All switches in the “On” position have their values added to- 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
gether to give the address of the MCP. Off Off - - - - - - - - Reserved
Switch positions 9 & 10 must always set to “Off” to enable

Ethernet operation. - - Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off 0
- - Off Off Off Off Off Off Off On 1
Switch S2: Positions and relevant values.
- - Off Off Off Off Off Off On Off 2
Switch S2 Value when in
Position “On” state - - Off Off Off Off Off Off On On 3
1 1 - - : : : : : : : : :
2 2 192 (Delivery
- - On On Off Off Off Off Off Off
setting)
3 4
- - : : : : : : : : :
4 8
- - On On On On On On On Off 254
5 16
- - On On On On On On On On 255
6 32
7 64
8 128
9 Always OFF
10 Always OFF
Switch S2
Notes

The following tables show the interface signals for an MCP483. The letter “n” should be substituted for the “Pointer” value
entered when FB1 was parameterised (MCP1IN, MCP2IN, MCP1Out and MCP2Out).
MCP483 PN Signals from machine control panel (keys)
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Spindle override Operating Mode
IBn
D C B A JOG TEACH IN MDA AUTO
IBn+1 REPOS REF INC var. 10000 INC INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1
IBn+2 Key-switch Key-switch Feed *Feed

Spindle start *Spindle stop NC Start *NC Stop
position 0 position 2 start stop
Key-switch Feedrate override

IBn+3 Reset Single block
position 1
E D C B A
Direction keys Axis selection keys
IBn+4 Rapid Key switch
+ - position 3 X 4th axis 7th axis
traverse R10
R15 R13 R1 R4 R7
R14
Axis selection keys
IBn+5 Y Z 5th axis MCS/WCS 8th axis 6th axis
R9
R2 R3 R5 R12 R8 R6
Unassigned customer keys
IBn+6
T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15
IBn+7
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8
IBn+10 KT-IN8 (X55.2) KT-IN7 (X55.1) KT-IN6 (X52.3) KT-IN5 (X52.2) KT-IN4 (X52.1) KT-IN3 (X51.3) KT-IN2 (X51.2) KT-IN1(X51.1)
IBn+11 KT-IN9 (X55.3)
MCP483 PN Signals to machine control panel (LEDs)

Machine function Operating mode
QBn
INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 JOG TEACH IN MDA AUTO
QBn+1 Feed *Feed

NC Start *NC Stop REPOS REF INC var. INC 10000
start stop
Direction Minus X 4th axis 7th axis Single block

QBn+2 Spindle start *Spindle stop
R13 R1 R4 R7 R10
QBn+3 Z 5th axis 8th axis 6th axis Direction Plus

MCS/WCS
R3 R5 R11 R9 R8 R6 R15
Unassigned customer keys Y
QBn+4
T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 R2
QBn+5
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8
QBn+6 Reset R14
QBn+7 KT-OUT6 KT-OUT5 KT-OUT4 KT-OUT3 KT-OUT2 KT-OUT1

(X54.3) (X54.2) (X54.1) (X53.3) (X53.2) (X53.1)
Signals marked with * are inverse signals.
Notes

The following tables show the interface signals for an MCP310. The letter “n” should be substituted for the “Pointer” value en-
tered when FB1 was parameterised.
MCP310 PN Signals from machine control panel (keys)
IBn *NC Stop Spindle - Spindle 100% Spindle + Single block JOG MDA AUTO
NC Start Spindle right *Spindle stop Spindle left Key-switch REF REPOS Teach IN
IBn+1 position 3
Feed start *Feed stop INC var. Key-switch

IBn+2 position 0
INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1
Feedrate override
IBn+3 Reset Key-switch Key-switch E (16) D (8) C (4) B (2) A (1)
Direction keys
IBn+4 Rapid KT-IN5 KT-IN4 KT-IN3 KT-IN2 KT-IN
traverse (X52.2) (X52.1) (X51.3) (X51.2) (X51.1)
+ -
IBn+5 Axis selection
T16 KT6(X52.3) 6th axis 5th axis 4th axis Z Y X
IBn+6 T9 T10 T11 T12 WCS MCS T13 T14 T15

IBn+7 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8
IBn+10 KT-IN8 KT-IN7 KT-IN6 KT-IN5 KT-IN4 KT-IN3 KT-IN2 KT-IN
(X55.2) (X55.1) (X52.3) (X52.2) (X52.1) (X51.3) (X51.2) (X51.1)
IBn+11 KT-IN9
(X55.3)
Spindle override
IBn+13
E (16) D (8) C (4) B (2) A (1)
MCP 310 PN Signals to machine control panel (LEDs)

QBn *NC Stop Spindle Dec. Spindle 100% Spindle Inc. Single Block JOG MDA AUTO
NC RESET REF REPOS Teach In

QBn+1 start
Spindle right *Spindle Stop Spindle left
QBn+2 Feed Start *Feed Stop INC var. INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1
QBn+3
Minus Plus Rapid KT-OUT5 KT-OUT4 KT-OUT3 KT-OUT2 KT-OUT1
QBn+4 Direction Direction traverse (X54.2) (X54.1) (X53.3) (X53.2) (X53.1)
QBn+5 T16 KT-OUT6 6th axis 5th axis 4th axis Z Y X

(X54.3)
T9 T10 T11 T12 MCS/WCS T13 T14 T15
QBn+6
QBn+7 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8
Signals marked with * are inverse signals.
Notes


KT-IN7
1
User I/O pin assignment KT-IN8
2
The 9 inputs and 6 outputs available on plugs X51 to X55 are KT-IN9
3
designed for use with switches/buttons and indicator lamps
which can be installed in the blanked holes of the MCP. M (0 volts)
4
Below shows the I/O assignment of each individual plug.
X55
The input terminals in the normally open state measure 5 V DC
(Supplied by the MCP) Output Assignment (X53 & X54):
The inputs work by sinking the 5 V DC signals to 0 V (M).
The outputs terminals are supplied with +24 V DC from the

MCP. KT-OUT1 KT-OUT4
1 1
No external voltages should be applied to the input and output KT-OUT2 KT-OUT5
2 2
terminals.
KT-OUT3 KT-OUT6
3 3
Input Assignment (X51, X52 & X55): M (0 volts) M (0 volts)
4 4
KT-IN1 KT-IN4
1 1 X53 X54
KT-IN2 KT-IN5
2 2 The outputs are capable of supplying 1.2 Watts per output, it is
KT-IN3 KT-IN6 not permissible to connect relays, valves or other inductive
3 3
devices.
M (0 volts) M (0 volts)
4 4
X51 X52
MCP signal test
The signals to and from the MCP can be checked using the on-
board diagnostic feature of the controller.
To locate the diagnostic screens use the following soft-key
selection:
On the screen it is possible to enter the inputs and outputs of

the MCP and check the functionality of each button/key.
Notes

To ensure that the correct signal is selected, first check the FB1 parameterisation for the “Pointer” value (Page 9).
Secondly, refer to the relevant Machine Control Panel Interface Signal tables.
Example::
To test the NC start button input signal on an MCP310 with a “Pointer” of 0, the input I1.7 needs to be monitored.
Cycle Start button not pressed:
Cycle Start button pressed:
PP72/48 PN Description and Interface Signals

S1
PP72/48 PN modules are a compact component which con-
nect to the Profinet network (Ports PN1 or PN2 of the PPU).
There are two variants, one of which is all digital while the X111
second offers both digital and analogue functionality.
A 24 V DC supply is required.
In total 72 digital inputs and 48 digital outputs are available on
each of the two variants.
The analogue module has an additional two analogue inputs
and two analogue outputs.
X222
Part number:- 6FC5311-0AA00-0AA0 Digital only
(PP72/48D PN)
6FC5311-0AA00-1AA0 Digital/analogue
(PP72/48 2/2A PN)
X2 X2
X333
X1
Notes

Pin assignment X111

Ribbon cable connections.
Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
The following tables show the pins and I/O addresses for
ribbon connectors X111, X222, X333. This is assuming 1 0V DC 19 I2.0 37 Q0.6
the PP72/48 PN is configured with a start address of 0 2 +24VDC O/P 20 I2.1 38 Q0.7
(Input bytes 0, 1, & 2 and output bytes 0 & 1).
3 I0.0 21 I2.2 39 Q1.0
Note: The first input byte of X222 has FAST gating hard-
ware. 4 I0.1 22 I2.3 40 Q1.1
5 I0.2 23 I2.4 41 Q1.2
6 I0.3 24 I2.5 42 Q1.3
7 I0.4 25 I2.6 43 Q1.4
8 I0.5 26 I2.7 44 Q1.5
9 I0.6 27 Not used 45 Q1.6
10 I0.7 28 Not used 46 Q1.7
11 I1.0 29 Not used 47 +24V DC I/P
12 I1.1 30 Not used 48 +24V DC I/P
13 I1.2 31 Q0.0 49 +24V DC I/P
14 I1.3 32 Q0.1 50 +24V DC I/P
15 I1.4 33 Q0.2
16 I1.5 34 Q0.3
17 I1.6 35 Q0.4
18 I1.7 36 Q0.5
Pin assignment X222 Pin assignment X333
Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 0V DC 19 I5.0 37 Q2.6 1 0V DC 19 I8.0 37 Q4.6
2 +24V DC O/P 20 I5.1 38 Q2.7 2 +24V DC O/P 20 I8.1 38 Q4.7
3 I3.0 21 I5.2 39 Q3.0 3 I6.0 21 I8.2 39 Q5.0
4 I3.1 22 I5.3 40 Q3.1 4 I6.1 22 I8.3 40 Q5.1
5 I3.2 23 I5.4 41 Q3.2 5 I6.2 23 I8.4 41 Q5.2
6 I3.3 24 I5.5 42 Q3.3 6 I6.3 24 I8.5 42 Q5.3
7 I3.4 25 I5.6 43 Q3.4 7 I6.4 25 I8.6 43 Q5.4
8 I3.5 26 I5.7 44 Q3.5 8 I6.5 26 I8.7 44 Q5.5
9 I3.6 27 Not used 45 Q3.6 9 I6.6 27 Not used 45 Q5.6
10 I3.7 28 Not used 46 Q3.7 10 I6.7 28 Not used 46 Q5.7
11 I4.0 29 Not used 47 +24V DC I/P 11 I7.0 29 Not used 47 +24V DC I/P
12 I4.1 30 Not used 48 +24V DC I/P 12 I7.1 30 Not used 48 +24V DC I/P
13 I4.2 31 Q2.0 49 +24V DC I/P 13 I7.2 31 Q4.0 49 +24V DC I/P
14 I4.3 32 Q2.1 50 +24V DC I/P 14 I7.3 32 Q4.1 50 +24V DC I/P
15 I4.4 33 Q2.2 15 I7.4 33 Q4.2
16 I4.5 34 Q2.3 16 I7.5 34 Q4.3
17 I4.6 35 Q2.4 17 I7.6 35 Q4.4
18 I4.7 36 Q2.5 18 I7.7 36 Q4.5
Notes

Profinet Configuration - MCP & PP72/48
Each hardware item connected to the Profinet network needs a unique IP address.
This is determined by the setting of S2 on the MCP and S1 on the PP72/48.
Each Profinet device has an IP address in the range 192.168.214.xxx . The switch setting determines the last part of the IP
address xxx.
Switch S1/S2
The selected IP address will determine the I/O that will be assigned. This is seen in the following tables:
For all Profinet applications switch positions 9 and 10 need to be set to on.
Switch S1 - PP72/48 Default device name

Switch S1/S2 Binary Value Switch S2 - MCP483/MCP310
Position pp72x48pn xxx
1 1
The switch positions 1 to 8 define the default device name of
2 2
the I/O module. There are up to 128 default device names. If
3 4 these default device names are used, there is no need for
initialization.
4 8
binary value 9 = pp72x48pn9
5 16
6 32 DCP-Mode
Switch S1 to S8 be switched "on".
7 64 In this mode, there is no default device name.
8 128 The device name must be set using initialization and remains
saved on the I/O module. It is first deleted when the factory
9 Profinet=ON setting is restored, e.g. using STEP7.
10 Profinet=ON
A008: END
Notes

A008 END MCP & PP72/48 PN Connections and Diagnostics

A026 Creating a PLC program
Sinumerik
Operate
Module Description:
The Step 7 PLC Programming package is used to create the machine interface program for the
840D sl Sinumerik Operate.
In order to use the Step 7 package to its upmost, it is necessary to know the structure of the Sinu-
merik controller and the structure of its interface; this knowledge is required in order to produce a
machine tool oriented PLC program which adheres to the relevant safety regulations of the desti-
nation country.
Module Objective:
Upon completion of this module you will know how to use the Step 7 Programming tool to:
 Create a PLC program

 Install the Sinumerik PLC Basic Program
 Configure the PLC Hardware
 Download a PLC project to the controller from a computer
Content:
Sinumerik
S7-300 PLC Cyclic Operation
840D sl Sinumerik Operate PLC
Integrate Basic PLC
Basic PLC Framework
Reserved Functions
Reserved Data
Example Base Program
A026
A026

Creating a PLC program A026
Create
PLC Program:
START
Step 7-300
PLC
840D sl
Sinumerik
Operate PLC
Integrating
the Basic
PLC
Basic PLC
Framework
Reserved
Functions and
Function
Blocks
Reserved
Data Blocks
Example:
Base
Program
Create
PLC Program:
END
Notes

Step7 300 PLC: PLC

Start-up Operating system
PII (Periphery Image Inputs)
PII (Program Image Inputs)
OB 100 (Program startup)

CALL FCxxx FCxxx
.... ....
Statement List Statement List
.... ....
Ladder diagram Ladder diagram
.... ....
BE (Program end) BE (Program end)
PIO (Program Image outputs)
PIO (Periphery Image Outputs)
Step7 300 PLC:

Cyclic operation OB 1 (Program entry Cyclic)
....
CALL FCxxx FCxxx
.... ....
Statement List
Statement List ....
PII (Program Image Inputs) Ladder diagram
....
....
.... BE (Program end)
CALL FBxxx,DBxxx
PII (Periphery Image Inputs) FBxxx DBxxx - Instance
....
Ladder diagram .... ....
.... Statement List ....
.... .... ....
Ladder diagram ....
.... ....
BE (Program end Cyclic) BE (Program end)
PIO (Program Image outputs)
PIO (Periphery Image Outputs)

PLC
Operating system
Notes

840D sl Sinumerik Operate PLC
DB2 Messages
PLC Start-up TO Interface
Operating system
FC 10
PII (Periphery Image Inputs) PLC User IF NCK

FB1 Internal IF
PII (Program Image Inputs) Parameterisation
Startup Functions
OB 100 (Program startup) From
Sinumerik System Interface
CALL FB1,DB7
...... BE (Program end) DB9 Compile Cycles
User Program, here: To Inter-
...... TO Interface face
Ladder diagram DB7 FROM Interface
...... Basic program
Statement List Parameters
BE (Program end) Settings DB10 Mode Group
....
PIO (Program Image outputs) .... TO Interface
....
PIO (Periphery Image Outputs) FROM Interface
FC 2 Cyclic DB11 NC
to/from
FC2 PLC User / TO Interface
OB 1 (Program entry Cyclic)
Sinumerik System NCK Internal
Sinumerik 840D FROM Interface
CALL FC2
PLC Basic
......
Program
User Program, here: INTERFACE DB19 HMI
Control
...... TO Interface
BE (Program end)
CALL FBxxx,DBxxx FROM Interface
......
Ladder diagram FBxxx
.... DB21 Channel
Or Statement List
.... TO Interface
Statement List Ladder diagram
.... FROM Interface
......
BE (Program end)
BE (Program end Cyclic) DB31 Axis
DBxxx Instance TO Interface
....
.... FROM Interface
PIO (Program Image outputs) ....
....
PIO (Periphery Image Outputs) DB71,72,73
Tool Management
PLC TO Interface
Operating system
FROM Interface NCK Cyclic
to/from
PLC User IF
PII (Periphery Image Inputs)
PII (Program Image Inputs)
Notes

Integrating the Basic PLC
Note: PLC Toolbox installation is described in Module

A002.
In order to create the User PLC program, firstly the PLC Basic
Program has to be installed and implemented.
The Basic Program takes the form of a Step 7 Library which
Installation of Basic program
has to be integrated into the User Project. and additional support tools.
:Sinumerik Addons
Toolbox Installation: : NC Var Selector
: Symbol generator
Toolbox installation
CD
Library Integration and Hardware Configuration:
In order to integrate the Basic program into the User Program,

the necessary “Sinumerik“ hardware components must be
made available for the hardware configuration. This is
achieved through the installation of the “Sinumerik ADDON“.
Hardware configuration displaying the Sinumerik Addon

components:
Hardware configuration
tool:
Open to select the PLC
hardware.
Hardware
Configurati-
Sinumerik
“Addons”
Sinumerik Library:
open and copy to
project.
The PROFINET IO system can be inserted from the context

menu when not activated when inserting the NCU.
Notes

Basic PLC Framework
Upon successful integration of the “Sinumerik Hardware“ and

Machine periphery in the Hardware configuration utility, the
compilation of the hardware components can be started.
Upon completion the S7 Program objects can be found in the
user project.
The library blocks can now be copied into the corresponding
directories of the user program; the symbol table can be
overwritten.
OB1 + OB100
With
Basic Program
Calls
Basic Program
(as Library)
copy to User
program.
The Basic PLC program can be seen by opening OB1 and/or OB100 in the Step 7 editor.
In OB1, the basic program is executed through the call to FC2, and in OB100 with the call to FB1.
Notes

Reserved Functions and Function Blocks
Number Function
FB 15 Basic program
FB 1, FC 2, FC 3, FC 5 Basic program
FC 0 ... 29 Reserved for Siemens
FB 0 ... 29 Reserved for Siemens
FC 30 ... 999 1) Free for user assignment
FB 30 ... 999 1) Free for user assignment
FC 1000 ... 1023 Reserved for Siemens
FB 1000 ... 1023 Reserved for Siemens
FC 1024 ... upper limit Free for user assignment
FB 1024 ... upper limit Free for user assignment
1)
The actual upper limit of the block number (FB/FC) depends on the PLC/CPU on which the selected NCU is located.
Notes

Reserved Data Blocks
Overview of data blocks

DB no. Name Function Package
1 Reserved for Siemens BP

2 ... 5 PLC-MELD PLC messages BP
6 ... 8 Basic program
9 NC-COMPILE Interface for NC compile cycles BP
10 NC INTERFACE Central NCK interface BP
11 Mode group 1 Interface mode group BP
12 Computer link and transport system interface
13 ... 14 Reserved for basic program
15 Basic program
16 PI Service definition
17 Version identifier
18 Reserved for basic program

19 HMI interface
Overview of data blocks

DB no. Name Function Package
20 PLC machine data
21 ... 30 CHANNEL 1 ... n Interface NC channels BP
BP
31 ... 61 AXIS 1 ... m Interfaces for axes/spindles
or free for user assignment
62 ... 70 Free for user assignment
71 ... 74 Tool management BP
75 ... 76 M group decoding
77 Data block for MCP signals
78 ... 80 Reserved for Siemens
81 ... 999 Free for user assignment
1000 ... 1099 Reserved for Siemens
1100 ... High Free for user assignment

limit
The actual upper limit of the block number (DB) depends on the PLC/CPU on which the selected NCU is located.
The data blocks of channels, axes/spindles and tool management functions that are not activated may be as-
signed as desired by the user.
Notes

Example: Base Program Integration

Select the Sinumerik controller from menu tree.
Create a New Project e.g. 840Dsl Sinumerik Operate.
Start the Step 7 Hardware configuration.
Configure the Profinet network Periphery not connected to Profinet
Select - not networked -
Notes

Periphery connected to Profinet Change- Name - to Profinet(1) - this step is not necessary but
is logical, as the original name is „Ethernet“ and could cause
confusion later with diagnostics.
Select - New - to Create new active Network
The Profinet Input/Output system can

now be extended with additional mo-
dules from the Profinet branch of the
Hardware catalogue.
Notes

The Profinet periphery PP72/48 will be

inserted and configured in this examp-
le.
The board can be found in the compo-
nent list under - PROFINET IO - I/O -
SINUMERIK.
First insert the Object container, and
the individual components can inserted
into the respective slots of the Module
object.
If the Object is not existing in the Hard-

ware catalogue, it should be imported
from the GSD file .
The PP72/48 is such a case, and can
be found in the PLC Toolbox as shown.
Updating the Profinet Topology
All profinet modules have to be inserted to the network, from

the component list.
The components have to be connected to each other to crea-
te the Profinet Topology, this is carried out using the Topolo-
gy editor.
To start the Topology editor, right click one of the Profinet
objects and select the "Profinet IO Topology" from the menu.
The start address can be changed if necessary, this is carried

out by double clicking the slot number to enter the Object pro-
perties, and under the address tab the start address can be
changed.
Notes

The Topology editor con-

sists of the Topology win-
dow on the left side and
the component tree on the
right.
Using the mouse compo-

nents (connections) from
the component list can be
dragged to their respec-
tive position in the Topolo-
gy Windows.
In the above Topology picture an example can be seen of a

PP72/48 connected to Port 1 of the X150 on the NCU board.
It is imperative that the correct ports are connected, in this
case - port-001(X1) is physically connected to Port 1 (X150
P1 R) of the NCU and this has to be replicated in the Topolo-
gy as can be seen above.
Notes

In addition to the Topology, a device number and IP have to

be assigned.
To assign the device number you right click the object and
select the Object properties.
In the Object properties dialog box, the device number In addition the Device name has to be changed to reflect
matching the device number set physically on the module the Device number.
(PP72/48 Dip switch S1) should be selected. The Device number has to be therefore appended to the
The default Dip switch settings for the PP72/48 are set for Device name.
Device number 9, therefore the number 9 has to be defined
in the Object properties. In the case of the PP72/48 as default pp72x48pn9 will be
the resulting Device name, which has to be unique on the
bus.
Notes

Dip switches and Device names

Switch S1 - PP72/48 Default device name
Switch S1/S2 Binary Value
Position pp72x48pn xxx
1 1
The switch positions 1 to 8 define the default device name of
2 2
the I/O module. There are up to 128 default device names. If
3 4 these default device names are used, there is no need for
initialization.
4 8
binary value 9 = pp72x48pn9
5 16
6 32 DCP-Mode
Switch S1 to S8 be switched "on".
7 64 In this mode, there is no default device name.
8 128 The device name must be set using initialization and remains
saved on the I/O module. It is first deleted when the factory
9 Profinet=ON setting is restored, e.g. using STEP7.
10 Profinet=ON
Notes

Configure the Profibus network
If the periphery is not connected to the Profibus, select "not

networked" under Profibus (DP X126) Object properties.
If periphery is connected to the Profibus, select New and
create a networked Profibus.
Configure the Profibus network - no changes required Select the newly entered Bus and confirm with ok
Notes

At this point the "PROFIBUS DP

master system" can be seen and
components from the component list
can be inserted onto the Bus.
Notes

A026 END Creating a PLC program
Profibus populated with ET200S
Notes

Adding additional components Additional axes can be added e.g. NX boards
Save and compile the project.
Notes

After a successful compilation, the Step7 Program Objects You can now search for the Library which was installed from
are available to the user. the Toolbox, and open it in the Step 7 editor.
The Library, as it appears in the Step 7 editor. The Library and the user program open in the Step 7 editor.
Notes

Program blocks in the PLC Basic Program. Source code in the PLC Basic Program.
Copying of the Program Blocks from Library to User program. Always overwrite OB1 when copying from the Library, otherwi-
se the Basic PLC will not be called with FC2.
The Library blocks are now present in the user project.
Notes

Copying of the Source Blocks from Library to User program Copying of the Symbol Table from Library to User program.
After successful integration of the Basic PLC Program, OB1 OB100:

and OB100 should look the same as in the following two
examples.
OB1:
Notes

In order to complete the example, the two parameters in ORGANIZATION_BLOCK OB 100

TITLE =
OB100 / FB1 have to be changed to suit the address and { S7_language := '9(1) English (United States)
type of MCP being used. 13.10.2010 16:56:20' }
VERSION : 1.0
MCP1BusAdr :=192
MCP1BusType :=55 VAR_TEMP
OB100_EV_CLASS : BYTE ;
OB100_STRTUP : BYTE ;
Bus Address is dependant upon the DIP switches on the OB100_PRIORITY : BYTE ;
back of the MCP and is described in Module A008. OB100_OB_NUMBR : BYTE ;
Bus Type can be 5 which determines Ethernet, alternatives OB100_RESERVED_1 : BYTE ;
OB100_RESERVED_2 : BYTE ;
are described in the Module A033 PLC Functions. OB100_STOP : WORD ;
OB100_RESERVED_3 : WORD ;
OB100_DATE_TIME : DATE_AND_TIME ;
END_VAR
BEGIN
NETWORK
TITLE =
CALL FB 1 , DB 7 (
MCPNum := 1,
MCP1In := P#I 0.0,
MCP1Out := P#Q 0.0,
MCP1BusAdr := 192,
NCKomm := TRUE);
//Insert User program from here
END_ORGANIZATION_BLOCK
Traversing keys
In addition the MCP (Machine Control Panel) has to be trans-
fered Overrides
Function Description: Key-operated switch
The Machine Control Panel signals can be transferred from

the MCP periphery to the corresponding signal at the PLC --> Prerequisites for the Function:
NCK Interface.
If a standard signal transfer is acceptable then one of the MCP Hardware available
following Step 7 Functions can be called, dependant upon
the MCP type. HMI Requirement:
None
FC19 MCP 19“ Milling
FC25 MCP 19“ Turning

Drive requirement (Sinamics):
FC24 MCP small None
FC26 HT6
NCK Requirement:
The following group signals are transferred: None
Mode Groups
PLC Requirement:
Axis selections
Parameterisation of the corresponding Step 7 Function.
WCS/MCS switchover commands
Notes

Steps to achieve running function: Axis sequence for FC19,FC25 etc
Parameterisation of the corresponding Function.

The axis sequence for the FC19 can be found in the inter-
face DB10 beginning at DBB8 for the first axis, a maximum
Parameter description of FC19 of 9 axis can be configured.
The Machine axis number has to be entered into the Inter-
Signal Type Format Range of Remark face byte.
values Axis numbers 1 - 9 are entered sequentially as default.
BAGNo I BYTE 0 - b#16#0A No. of mode group to
and which the mode sig-
b#16#10 - nals are transferred. Parameter BAGNo
b#16#1A BAGNo >= b#16#10
means access to the
second machine con- The BAG NO is a parameter with size BYTE.
trol panel. This Byte can be considered as Left and Right nibble(4
ChanNo I BYTE 0 - B#16#0A Channel no. for the bits).
channel signals The left nibble is the BAG No for the 2nd MCP if available,
the right nibble being the BAG no for the 1st MCP.
SpindleIFNo I BYTE 0 - 31 Number of the axis
(B#16#1F) interface declared as a
spindle
FeedHold Q BOOL Feed stop from MCP, MCP 2 MCP 1
modal
Bit 4 - 7 Bit 0 - 3
SpindleHold Q BOOL Spindle stop from
MCP, modal BAGNo BAGNo
With the following logic in OB1, the download to the PLC All Blocks can now be downloaded, System data should
can take place. also be loaded.
CALL FC 24 (
BAGNo := B#16#1,
ChanNo := B#16#1,
SpindleIFNo := B#16#4,
FeedHold := M 100.0,
SpindleHold := M 100.1,
SpindleDir := M 100.2);
After the download, a new start should be carried out.
A026: END
Notes

A033 PLC Functions
Sinumerik
Operate
Module Description:
The following functions are available in the PLC:
 PLC Start-up parameterisation

 MCP (Machine Control Panel) Transfer
 Reading and writing of NC Variables
 PI Services
 Reading Global User Data’s
 Starting ASUP
 Axis / Spindle control
Module Objective:
Upon completion of this module you will be able to perform the above listed PLC tasks.
Content:
Sinumerik
PLC Start-up parameterisation
MCP (Machine Control Panel) Transfer
Reading and writing of NC Variables
PI Services
Reading Global User Data´s
Starting ASUP
Axis / Spindle control
A033
A033

PLC Functions A033
PLC
Functions:
START
PLC Start-up
Parameteri-
sation
MCP
Transfer
Reading and
Writing of
NC Variables
PI Services
Reading Glob-
al User data´s
Starting ASUP
Axis / Spindle
control
PLC
Functions:
END
Notes

A033 PLC Functions
PLC Start-up parameterisation ORGANIZATION_BLOCK OB 100

TITLE =
{ S7_language := '9(1) English (United States)
13.10.2010 16:56:20' }
The PLC interface is made up of a series of Step 7 Data VERSION : 1.0
Blocks, the number and length of the data blocks is deter-
mined by the system on startup. VAR_TEMP
OB100_EV_CLASS : BYTE ;
The machine tool builder can also influence this process and OB100_STRTUP : BYTE ;
others using the parameterisation possibilities of the PLC Ba- OB100_PRIORITY : BYTE ;
OB100_OB_NUMBR : BYTE ;
sic program in OB100. OB100_RESERVED_1 : BYTE ;
OB100_RESERVED_2 : BYTE ;
The parameterisation is carried out with the direct parameteri- OB100_STOP : WORD ;
sation of the Function Block 1 in the OB100 start-up routine, OB100_RESERVED_4 : WORD ;
these values are made available to the PLC Basic program OB100_DATE_TIME : DATE_AND_TIME ;
through the use of an Instance DB (DB7) of the FB1. END_VAR
BEGIN
NETWORK
Example:- TITLE =
CALL FB 1 , DB 7 (
MCPNum := 1,
MCP1In := P#I 0.0,
MCP1Out := P#Q 0.0,
MCP1BusAdr := 192,
NCKomm := TRUE);
In addition to the Interface being configured, various other

functions are implemented,
including:-
 Define the number of MCPs
 Define the address range of MCPs
 Defining the type of MCP
 Hand held unit configuration
 PLC Communication to NCK option
 Alarm configuration
The parameters of FB1 and their meaning can be found on

the following pages.
Notes

PLC Functions A033
Parameter description of FB1
Signal Type Format Value range Comment

MCPNum I INT Up to 2 Number of active MCP
0: No MCPs available
MCP1In I POINTER E0.0 to E120.0 Start address for input signals of relevant ma-
MCP2In or chine control panel
M0.0 to M248.0
or
DBn DBX0.0 to DBXm.0
MCP1Out I POINTER A0.0 to A120.0 Start address for output signals of relevant ma-
MCP2Out or chine control panel
M0.0 to M248.0
or
MCP1StatSend I POINTER A0.0 to A124.0 Currently no significance
MCP2StatSend or
M0.0 to M252.0
or
MCP1StatRec I POINTER A0.0 to A124.0 Currently no significance
MCP2StatRec or
M0.0 to M252.0
or
MCP1BusAdr I INT 1 ... 126 DP slave: PROFIBUS address
MCP2BusAdr 192 .. 223 Ethernet MCP: DIP-Setting
MCP1Timeout I S5time Recommendation: 700 ms Cyclic sign-of-life monitoring for machine con-
MCP2Timeout trol panel
MCP1Cycl I S5time Recommendation: 200 ms Relevant only for PROFIBUS

MCP2Cycl
MCPMPI I BOOL false Available owing to compatibility
MCP1Stop I BOOL 0: Start transfer of machine control panel

MCP2Stop signals
1: Stop transfer of machine control panel
signals
DP slave: Slave deactivated
MCP1NotSend I BOOL 0: Send and receive operation activated

MCP2NotSend
1: Receive machine control panel signals
only
MCPSDB210 I BOOL false Available owing to compatibility
MCPCopyDB77 I BOOL false Available owing to compatibility
MCPBusType I BYTE Righthand half byte (bits 0...3) for MCP1

Lefthand half byte (bits 4...7) for MCP2
b#16#33: PROFIBUS
b#16#44: PROFIBUS on the MPI/DP port
b#16#55: Ethernet
B#16#66: PROFINET
Notes

A033 PLC Functions
Parameter description of FB1 - cont.

BHG I INT 0, 5 Handheld unit interface
0: No HHU
5: HHU on Ethernet
BHGIn I POINTER E0.0 to E124.0 Start address

or PLC receive data
M0.0 to M252.0 from HHU
or
BHGOut I POINTER A0.0 to A124.0 Start address
or PLC transmit data
M0.0 to M252.0 to HHU
or
BHGStatSend I POINTER A0.0 to A124.0 Available owing to compatibility
or
M0.0 to M252.0
or
BHGStatRec I POINTER A0.0 to A124.0 Available owing to compatibility
or
M0.0 to M252.0
or
BHGInLen I BYTE HHU default: Available owing to compatibility
B#16#6 (6 Byte)
BHGOutLen I BYTE HHU default: Available owing to compatibility
B#16#14 (20 Byte)
BHGTimeout I S5time Recommendation: 700 ms Available owing to compatibility
BHGCycl I S5time Recommendation: 100 ms Available owing to compatibility

BHGRecGDNo I INT HHU default: 2 Ethernet DIP switch
BHGRecGBZNo I INT HHU default: 2 Available owing to compatibility
BHGRecObjNo I INT HHU default: 1 Available owing to compatibility
Notes

PLC Functions A033

BHGSendGDNo I INT HHU default: 2 Available owing to compatibility
BHGSendGBZNo I Int HHU default: 1 Available owing to compatibility
BHGSendObjNo I INT HHU default: 1 Available owing to compatibility
BHGMPI I BOOL false Available owing to compatibility
BHGStop I BOOL 0: Start transmission

of handheld unit signals
1: Stop transmission
of handheld unit signals
BHGNotSend I BOOL 0: Send and receive operation activated
1: Receive handheld unit signals only
NCCyclTimeout I S5time Recommendation: 200 ms Cyclic sign-of-life monitoring NCK
NCRunupTimeout I S5time Recommendation: 50 s Power-up monitoring NCK
ListMDecGrp I INT 0 ... 16 Activation of expanded

M group decoding
0: Not active
1...16: Number of M groups
NCKomm I BOOL PLC NC communications services

(FB 2/3/4/5/7:
Put/Get/PI_SERV/GETGUD)
TRUE: active
MMCToIF I BOOL Transmission of HMI signals to interface

(modes, program control etc.)
TRUE: Active
HWheelMMC I BOOL TRUE: Handwheel selection via HMI
FALSE: Handwheel selection via user

program
ExtendAlMsg I BOOL Activation extension of the FC10 (see Sec-
tion "Structure and Functions of the basic
program")
MsgUser I INT 0 ... 32 Number of user areas for messages (DB2)
UserIR I BOOL Local data expansion OB40 required for

processing of signals from user
IRAuxfuT I BOOL Evaluate T function in OB40
IRAuxfuH I BOOL Evaluate H function in OB40
IRAuxfuE I BOOL Evaluate DL function in OB40
Notes

A033 PLC Functions

UserVersion I POINTER DBxx Pointer to string variable.
The associated string variable is indicated
in the version display
(max. 41 characters).
OpKeyNum I INT 0 ... 2 Number of active
Direct control key modules
0: no Ethernet direct control keys avail-
able.
Op1KeyIn I POINTER P#Ex.0 Start address for the input signals of the
Op2KeyIn or affected direct control key modules
P#Mx.0
or
P#DBn.DBXx.0.
Op1KeyOut I POINTER P#Ax.0 Start address for the output signals of the
Op2KeyOut or affected direct control key modules
P#Mx.0
or
P#DBn.DBXx.0.
Op1KeyBusAdr I INT 1 ... 191 Direct control keys via
Op2KeyBusAdr Ethernet: TCU Index:
Op1KeyStop I BOOL 0: Start transmission
Op2KeyStop of direct control key signals
1: Stop transmission
of direct control key signals
Op1KeyNotSend I BOOL 0: Send and receive operation activated
Op2KeyNotSend
1: Receive
direct control key signals only
OpKeyBusType I BYTE b#16#55 b#16#55: Ethernet
IdentMcpBusAdr I INT 1 ... 254 only IE devices
IdentMcpProfilNo I BYTE 0, 1 Profile of a device
0: complete device
1: only direct control keys
IdentMcpBusType I BYTE b#16#5 only IE devices
IdentMcpStrobe I BOOL Activate query
MaxBAG Q INT 1 ... 10 Number of mode groups
MaxChan Q INT 1 ... 10 Number of channels
MaxAxis Q INT 1 ... 31 Number of axes
ActivChan Q ARRAY[1...10] Bit string for active channels

OF BOOL
Notes

PLC Functions A033

ActivAxis Q ARRAY[1..31] Bit string for active axes
OF BOOL
UDInt Q INT Quantity of INTEGER machine data in
DB20
UDHex Q INT Quantity of hexadecimal machine data in
DB20
UDReal Q INT Quantity of REAL machine data in
DB20
IdentMcpType Q BYTE Type (HT2, HT8, ...)
IdentMcpLengthIn Q BYTE Length info

input data in PLC
IdentMcpLengthOut Q BYTE Length info
output data in PLC
Notes

A033 PLC Functions
Traversing keys
MCP (Machine Control Panel) Transfer
Overrides
Function Description: Key-operated switch
With the following Step 7 Functions, the Machine Control Pa-

nel signals can be transferred from the MCP periphery to the Prerequisites for the Function:
corresponding signal at the PLC --> NCK Interface.
If a standard signal transfer is acceptable then one of the follo- MCP Hardware available
wing Step 7 Functions can be called, dependant upon the
MCP type. HMI Requirement:
None
FC19 MCP 19“ Milling
FC25 MCP 19“ Turning

FC24 MCP small None
FC26 HT6
NCK Requirement:
The following group signals are transferred: None
Mode Groups
PLC Requirement:
Axis selections
Parameterisation of the corresponding Step 7 Function.
WCS/MCS switchover commands
Steps to achieve running function: Axis sequence for FC19,FC25 etc
Parameterisation of the corresponding Function.

The axis sequence for the FC19 can be found in the inter-
face DB10 beginning at DBB8 for the first axis, a maximum
Parameter description of FC19 of 9 axis can be configured.
The Machine axis number has to be entered into the Inter-
Signal Type Format Range of Remark face byte.
values Axis numbers 1 - 9 are entered sequentially as default.
BAGNo I BYTE 0 - b#16#0A No. of mode group to
and which the mode sig-
b#16#10 - nals are transferred. Parameter BAGNo
b#16#1A BAGNo >= b#16#10
means access to the
second machine con- The BAG NO is a parameter with size BYTE.
trol panel. This Byte can be considered as Left and Right nibble(4
ChanNo I BYTE 0 - B#16#0A Channel no. for the bits).
channel signals The left nibble is the BAG No for the 2nd MCP if available,
the right nibble being the BAG no for the 1st MCP.
SpindleIFNo I BYTE 0 - 31 Number of the axis
(B#16#1F) interface declared as a
spindle
FeedHold Q BOOL Feed stop from MCP, MCP 2 MCP 1
modal
Bit 4 - 7 Bit 0 - 3
SpindleHold Q BOOL Spindle stop from
MCP, modal BAGNo BAGNo
Notes

PLC Functions A033
Reading and Writing of NC Variables

The NC Var selector is part of the PLC Toolbox.
Function Description:
During the manufacturing process it may be necessary to have Prerequisites for the Function:
data available to the NC program from the automation system
in order to optimize the NC machining process. The prerequisite for the function, is the parameter:
This could take the form of a numerical value being transferred
to an R Parameter or a machine setting data receiving from NCKomm := True
the automation system an optimised value.
In the opposite direction it may be necessary to influence the The parameter belongs to FB1 which is parameteri-
automation system dependent upon the current NC machining sed in OB100.
process, positional data available in the automation system is
an example of this.
HMI Requirement:
Two function blocks are available for the function of :
None
Reading NC data - FB2
Writing NC data - FB3 Drive requirement (Sinamics):
In addition to the FBs, a tool is available for the engineering None

PC, this tool is required for generating the necessary parame- NCK Requirement:
ter values for the two function blocks.
None
The tool is called (NC Var selector).
The parameter values which are obtained from the NC Var PLC Requirement:
selector point to the storage location within the NC which are
required as destination or as source, determined by a READ Parameterisation of FB2 or FB3 in the PLC
or WRITE function.
Steps to achieve function:
Before parameterising FB2 or FB3 the address of the varia-

ble has to be known, and stored in a user Data Block.
This is carried out with the NC Var selector tool.
In order to create the address data the following steps should
be followed:
Start the NC Var Selector
The correct variable database has to be selected with

each new project, in the case of Sinumerik Operate.
Start a new Project
Notes

A033 PLC Functions
Upon database selection, a complete list of the available vari-

ables are displayed.
The name and the address of the required variable can now
be selected from the list of available variables.
In order to make the selection of the variable easier, a com-
prehensive help file is available.
Notes

PLC Functions A033
It can be seen in the following screenshot that the possibility

The variables can be inserted into the users project using the exists also to parameterise a variable with the value zero (0).
right mouse button, in some cases an input window will ap- In this case the user structure which is generated by the NC
pear, further parameterisation can be carried out at this point. Var selector can be further parameterised in the PLC user
E.g. Channel / axis number etc... program, thus offering an even higher degree of flexibility to
the user.
In the following screenshot, two R parameters are used as an When the user has completed the selection of the necessary
example. variables, the user variable table can be saved.
The first with fixed parameterisation, not parameterising with The file can be saved to a project directory, this directory is
zero, and the second using parameterised value zero. free for the user.
It is therefore possible to manipulate the number of the R The format of the file is „Step 7 source code“ with the data
parameter in the user PLC program. type STRUCT. The STRUCT is contained in a Data Block
container, this Data Block can be configured in the Code se-
lections menu.
Notes

A033 PLC Functions
Configuration of user DB Saving of var file (variable file)
The following describes how the STRUCT information is The AWL file can be inserted directly into the Step 7 project
transferred into the Step 7 project. with the marked icon green.
In the following screenshot, the marked area indicates the link A window allows the project and path to be defined, and with
where the user can select the AWL file name and generate OK you will find your AWL information in the source file folder
the foresaid file. of your Step 7 project.
Notes

PLC Functions A033
It is recommended that the option „transfer DB and Symbol“

be set.
The following screenshot shows the DB number and symbol
name in the Step 7 Symbol table.
This AWL can now be opened in the Step 7 editor, and can
be compiled into S7 DB Format for usage as a parameter
value to the FB2 or FB3.
After successful compilation in Step 7 The call and parameterisation of the FB2 and FB3 can now
take place according to the following parameter description:
Notes

A033 PLC Functions
GET FB2 PUT FB3

Signal Type Format Range of Remark
values
values
Req I BOOL Job start with positive
signal edge Req I BOOL Job start with positive
signal edge
NumVar I INT 1 ... 8 Number of variables to
NumVar I INT 1 to 8 Number of variables to
(corresponds be read
(corresponds to be written
to use of Addr1
use of Addr1 to
to Addr8)
Addr8)
Addr1 to I ANY [DBName]. Variable identifiers from
Addr8 [VarName] NC Var selector Addr1 to Addr8 I ANY [DBName]. Variable identifiers from
[VarName] NC Var selector
Unit1 to Unit8 I BYTE Area address, optional
Unit 1 to Unit 8 I BYTE Area address, optional
for variable addressing
Column1 to I WORD Column address, op-
Column8 tional for variable ad- Column 1 to I WORD Column address, op-
Column 8 tional for variable ad-
dressing
dressing
Line1 to I WORD Line address, optional
Line 1 to Line 8 I WORD Line address, optional
Line8 for variable addressing
Error Q BOOL Negative acknowledg-
Error Q BOOL Negative acknowledg-
ment of job or execution
ment of job or execu-
of job impossible
tion of job impossible
NDR Q BOOL Job successfully exe-
cuted Data are available Done Q BOOL Job successfully exe-
cuted
State Q WORD See error identifiers
SD1 to SD8 I/Q ANY P#Mm.n BYTE Data to be written
RD1 to RD8 I/Q ANY P#Mm.n BYTE Target area for read
x...
x... data
P#DBnr.dbxm.
P#DBnr.dbxm.
n BYTE x
n BYTE x
Notes

PLC Functions A033
Reading and writing of NC variables is only possible with the

FB1,DB7 variable: NCKomm:= true Example: Reading and writing R parameter.
FUNCTION "Read-Write NC" : VOID

TITLE =
VERSION : 0.1
ORGANIZATION_BLOCK OB 100 BEGIN
TITLE = NETWORK
{ S7_language := '9(1) English (United States) 13.10.2010 TITLE =Read R parameter
16:56:20' }
VERSION : 1.0 A I 80.7;
FP M 110.0; // Transition Marker
BEGIN S M 110.1;
NETWORK A M 110.3;
TITLE = FP M 110.4; // Transition Marker
R M 110.1;
CALL FB 1 , DB 7 ( CALL "GET" , DB 110 (
MCPNum := 1, Req := M 110.1,
MCP1In := P#I 0.0, NumVar := 1,
MCP1Out := P#Q 0.0, Addr1 := "ncvar".C1_RP_rpa1_1,
MCP1StatSend := P#Q 8.0, Error := M 110.2,
MCP1StatRec := P#Q 12.0, NDR := M 110.3,
MCP1BusAdr := 192, State := MW 111,
MCPBusType := B#16#55, RD1 := MD 113);
NCKomm := TRUE); Option
Symbol table showing the Symbol name and Absolute name

NETWORK of the VAR Data Block
TITLE =Write R parameter
A I 81.0;
S M 117.1;
A M 117.3;
R M 117.1;
CALL "PUT" , DB 111 (
Req := M 117.1,
NumVar := 1,
Addr1 := "ncvar".C1_RP_rpa0_1,
Line1 := W#16#2,
Error := M 117.2,
Done := M 117.3,
State := MW 118,
SD1 := MD 113);
END_FUNCTION
Notes

A033 PLC Functions
Content of VAR DB with symbol name.

C1_RP_rpa0_1:
STRUCT
SYNTAX_ID : BYTE := B#16#82;
Area_Unit : BYTE := B#16#41;
Column : WORD := W#16#1;
Line : WORD := W#16#0;
BlockType : BYTE := B#16#15;
// ------------------------------------------------------- NumOfLine : BYTE := B#16#1;
// File : E:\NCVar Projects\DBData.awl DataType : BYTE := B#16#F;
// Length : BYTE := B#16#8;
// Source File : E:\NCVar Projects\DBData.var END_STRUCT ;
// Generation Date: 16/12/2010 Time: 16:02:55
// ------------------------------------------------------- END_STRUCT ;
DATA_BLOCK DB 120 Ncvar = Symbol name BEGIN

VERSION : 0.0 END_DATA_BLOCK
STRUCT
C1_RP_rpa1_1:
STRUCT
SYNTAX_ID : BYTE := B#16#82;
Area_Unit : BYTE := B#16#41;
Column : WORD := W#16#1;
Line : WORD := W#16#1;
BlockType : BYTE := B#16#15;
NumOfLine : BYTE := B#16#1;
DataType : BYTE := B#16#F;
Length : BYTE := B#16#8;
END_STRUCT ;
PI Services PI service Function
CRCEDN Create new cutting edge

Function description: Automate an Operator function
CREACE Create cutting edge
The following PI services are available:
CREATO Generate tool
PI service Function DELECE Delete a cutting edge
ASUP Assign interrupt DELETO Delete tool
CANCEL Execute cancel MMCSEM Semaphores for various PI services
CONFIG Reconfiguration of tagged machine data TMCRTO Create tool
DIGION Digitizing on TMFDPL Empty location search for loading
DIGIOF Digitizing off TMFPBP Empty location search
FINDBL Activate block search TMGETT T-number for the specified tool identifier
with duplo number
LOGIN Activate password TMMVTL Prepare magazine location for loading,
unload tool
LOGOUT Reset password
TMPOSM Position magazine location or tool
NCRES Trigger NC-RESET
TMPCIT Set increment value for workpiece counter
SELECT Select program for processing for one
channel TMRASS Reset active status
SETUDT Sets the current user data to active TRESMO Reset monitoring values
SETUFR Activate user frame TSEARC Complex search using search screen
forms
Notes

PLC Functions A033
Function Description: cont. HMI Requirement:

None
PI services are typically mimics of Operator actions which
can be carried out from the PLC.
A typical example is the setting and the resetting of the pass- None
word, this is an action which is often carried out by the oper-
ator but can also be automated using the PLC program.
It is therefore possible to automate the deactivation of the PLC Requirement:

password at system start-up, Parameterisation of FB4 or FB7 in the PLC
Prerequisites for the Function: NCK Requirement:

Dependant upon function
NCK prerequisite is dependant upon the function.
PLC Prerequisite:
The prerequisite for the function is the parameter:
NCKomm := True
The parameter belongs to FB1 which is

parameterised in OB100.
Steps to achieve running function:
ORGANIZATION_BLOCK OB 100
TITLE =
{ S7_language := '9(1) English (United States) 13.10.2010
16:56:20' }
VERSION : 1.0
BEGIN
NETWORK
TITLE =
CALL FB 1 , DB 7 (
MCPNum := 1,
MCP1In := P#I 0.0,
MCP1Out := P#Q 0.0,
MCP1BusAdr := 192,
NCKomm := TRUE); Option
Notes

A033 PLC Functions
Parameter description of FB4 Error codes

Signal Type Format Range of values Remark
State Significance Note
Req I BOOL Job request
PIService I ANY [DBName]. PI service 3 Negative acknowledg- Internal error, try:
[VarName] description1) ment, job not NC RESET
Standard is: "PI". executable
[VarName] 6 FIFO full Job must be repeat-
Unit I INT 1... Area number ed since queue is full
Addr1 to I ANY [DBName]. Reference to strings 7 Option not set BP parameter
Addr4 [VarName] specification accord- "NCKomm" is not set
ing to selected PI 9 Transmission occupied Job must be repeat-
service ed
WVar1 to I WORD 1... INTEGER or WORD 13 (0x0d) ANY data reference String data required
WVar10 variables. Specifica- incorrect has not been param-
tion according to eterized
selected PI service, 14 (0x0e) PIService parameter No valid PI descrip-
Error Q BOOL Negative acknowl- reference incorrect tion
edgment of job or 15 (0x0f) String too long Addr1.. Check Addr4
execution of job im- strings
possible
Done Q BOOL Job successfully
executed
In order to use the LOGIN PI service, a string variable has to Example of Password Login and Logout
be available as parameter source.
The string variable is the name of the Password, it is con- FUNCTION "PIServices" : VOID
tained in a user DB using data type STRING.
A I 81.1;
STRING[8] := `SUNRISE ` NOTE 8 Characters - use SPACES S M 122.1;
A M 122.3;
R M 122.1;
CALL "PI_SERV" , DB 132 (
Req := M 122.1,
The DB121 is created and used for the examples, The GUD PIService := "PI".LOGOUT,
string is not required in this module. Unit := 1,
Error := M 122.2,
Done := M 122.3,
State := MW 123);
A I 81.2;
S M 125.1;
A M 125.3;
R M 125.1;
CALL "PI_SERV" , DB 133 (
Req := M 125.1,
PIService := "PI".LOGIN,
Unit := 1,
Addr1 := DB121.L_IN,
Error := M 125.2,
Done := M 125.3,
State := MW 126);
END_FUNCTION
Notes

PLC Functions A033
Reading Global User data´s

Parameter part for Addr1 -- PI Login
Global User Data's can be both read and written to by the au-
tomation system (PLC).
Global User Data's are often referred to as GUD's . The OEM

is able to define his own user variables in this way.
Dependant upon the OEM functionality of the relevant GUD it
may be necessary in process to read the current value to the
PLC or to write the value from the PLC.
With the Function Block FB5 you are able to read the value of
a GUD.
Because GUD's are generated by the OEM (user), it is not

possible to obtain the internal address of the variable with the
NC Var selector in order to write the GUD.
By reading the content of the variable with FB5 and with addi-
tional parameterisation of the FB5 the internal address can be
obtained as a result parameter of the FB5, this result / output
parameter can be used as a destination parameter with the
FB2 PUT allowing an indirect way to write the GUD's.
Prerequisites for the Function: HMI Requirement:

None
GUD Data's available in the NC
None
Plus the parameter:
NCKomm := True NCK Requirement:

GUD Data available
The parameter belongs to FB1 which is
PLC Requirement:
Parameterisation of FB5 in the PLC
Steps to achieve running function:
Notes

A033 PLC Functions
ORGANIZATION_BLOCK OB 100 Signal Type Format Value Comment

TITLE =
range
13.10.2010 16:56:20' } Req I BOOL Job start with positive
VERSION : 1.0
signal edge
BEGIN Addr I ANY [DBName]. GUD variable name in
NETWORK
TITLE =
[VarName] a variable of data type
STRING
CALL FB 1 , DB 7 ( Area I BYTE Area address:
MCPNum := 1,
MCP1In := P#I 0.0, 0: NCK variables
MCP1Out := P#Q 0.0,
MCP1StatSend := P#Q 8.0, 2: Channel variables
MCP1StatRec := P#Q 12.0, Unit I BYTE NCK area: Unit:=1
MCP1BusAdr := 192,
MCPBusType := B#16#55, Channel area: Chan-
NCKomm := TRUE); Option nel no.
//Insert User program from here Index1 I INT Field index 1 of varia-
ble
Variable has the value
0 if no field index is
used.
Parameter description of FB5
Index2 I INT Field index 2 of varia-
ble
Variable has the value
0 if no field index is
used.
Signal Type Format Value Comment Error codes

range
CnvtToken I BOOL Activate generation of a State Meaning Note
10 byte variable token
VarToken I ANY [DBName]. Address to a 10-byte WORD H WORD L
[VarName] token (see example)
Error Q BOOL Negative acknowledg- 0 1 Access error
ment of job or execution
of job impossible
0 2 Error in job Incorrect compilation
Done Q BOOL Job successfully execut- of Var. in a job
ed
0 3 Negative ac- Internal error, try:
State Q WORD See error identifiers knowledgment, NC RESET
RD I/Q ANY P#Mm.n data to be read job not executa-
BYTE x... ble
P#DBnr.db 0 4 Data areas or Check data to be
xm.n data types do not read in RD
BYTE x tally
1 4 Insufficient local read variable is long-
user memory er than specified in
available RD
0 6 FIFO full Job must be repeat-
ed,
since queue is full
Notes

PLC Functions A033
State Meaning Note

In order to read a GUD value, the OEM must first generate
WORD H WORD L and activate the GUD file using the HMI function available in
the System explorer.
0 7 Option not set BP parameter
"NCKomm" is not set The name of the GUD name has to be parameterised as a
STRING variable to the function block, at parameter; Addr.
0 8 Incorrect target RD may not be local
If the GUD variable is an array, then the array index can be
area (SD) data
parameterised also.
0 9 Transmission Job must be repeated
occupied According to the description , field index refers to array index.
0 10 Error in address- Unit contains value 0
ing You can additionally use the parameters, to obtain the ad-
0 11 Address of varia-Address check (or vari- dress of the GUD for parameterisation with FB3 PUT
ble invalid able name), area, unit
CnvtToken Activate generation of a 10 byte variable token
1 ... 8 13 (0x0d) ANY data refer- String/NcVar data re- VarToken [DBName].[VarName] Address to a 10-byte token
ence incorrect quired has not been
parameterized
0 15 (0x0f) String more than GUD variable name
32 characters too long
Create and activate GUD file and variables Example reading GUD PLC Parameterisation
FUNCTION "Read_a_GUD" : VOID

TITLE =
A I 81.3;
S M 128.1;
A M 128.3;
R M 128.1;
CALL "GETGUD" , DB 134 (

Req := M 128.1,
Addr := DB121.GUD_GJ,
Area := B#16#0,
Unit := B#16#1,
Index1 := 2,
Syntax in order to generate an NCK GUD Array variable with Index2 := 0,
Error := M 128.2,
the name __GJ Done := M 128.3,
State := MW 129,
RD := MD 131);
END_FUNCTION
Notes

A033 PLC Functions
The variable in the NC viewed on HMI in settings. Starting ASUP
An ASUP (Asynchronous Subroutine) is an NC Subroutine

written normally by the OEM, this subroutine is started from
the automation system (PLC). If a user NC Program is cur-
rently active, it will be interrupted according to the parameter-
isation of the PLC user program.
The ASUP function is carried out in two steps:
1) ASUP Preparation
PI Service ASUP FB4
Only possible in NCK Reset State
2) ASUP Start
Parameterisation and call of FC9
Prerequisites for the Function: Steps to achieve running function:
ASUP available in the NC
Plus the parameter:

NCKomm := True TITLE =
13.10.2010 16:56:20' }
The parameter belongs to FB1 which is VERSION : 1.0
BEGIN
NETWORK
HMI Requirement: TITLE =
None CALL FB 1 , DB 7 (
MCPNum := 1,
MCP1In := P#I 0.0,
Drive requirement (Sinamics): MCP1Out := P#Q 0.0,
None MCP1StatSend := P#Q 8.0,
MCP1BusAdr := 192,
NCK Requirement: NCKomm := TRUE); Option
ASUP available
PLC Requirement:
Parameterisation of FB4 and FC9 in the PLC
Notes

PLC Functions A033
Parameter description of FC9

Example of initialisation and call of ASUP
Signal Type Format Value Remark
range FUNCTION "ASUP_TEST" : VOID
TITLE =
VERSION : 0.1
Start I BOOL
ChanNo I INT 1 ... 10 No. of the NC channel BEGIN
NETWORK
IntNo I INT 1 ... 8 Interrupt No. TITLE =
Active Q BOOL 1 = Active
Done Q BOOL 1 = ASUP completed A I 81.4;
Error Q BOOL 1 = Interrupt switched FP M 135.0; // Transition Marker
S M 135.1;
off A M 135.3;
StartErr Q BOOL 1 = Interrupt number FP M 135.4; // Transition Marker
R M 135.1;
not assigned or delet- CALL "PI_SERV" , DB 135 (
ed Req := M 135.1,
Ref I/Q WORD Global 1 word per FC 9 (for PIService := "PI".ASUP,
Unit := 1,
variable internal use) Addr1 := DB121.Path,
(MW, Addr2 := DB121.PName,
DBW,..) WVar1 := W#16#1,
WVar2 := W#16#1,
Prior to calling FC9, the ASUP has to be initialised with the WVar3 := W#16#0,
WVar4 := W#16#0,
PI service ASUP. Error := M 135.2,
The following example shows the initialisation and the call of Done := M 135.3,
the ASUP with FC9. State := MW 136);
The PI service PI.ASUP requires two strings to be defined in
a user DB, the strings being the „Path“ and the name of the
ASUP.
Content of PLC ASUP

Example of initialisation and call of ASUP
A I 81.5;
FP M 135.4;
S M 135.5;
A M 135.7;
FP M 135.6;
R M 135.5; The following NC Program block will be interrupted:
CALL "ASUP" (
Start := M 135.5,
ChanNo := 1,
IntNo := 1,
Activ := M 138.0,
Done := M 135.7,
Error := M 138.1,
StartErr := M 138.2,
Ref := MW 139); The Interruption can now be seen:
END_FUNCTION
Create ASUP in the Manufacturer directory.
Notes

A033 PLC Functions
Currently running program to be interrupted

Data Block used for STRING Data on various Function Block
calls.
ASUP Interruption Axis / Spindle control
With axis / spindle control it is possible to move an axis or a

spindle from the automation system.
The following is an example of what can be carried out with

the block:
Position spindle
Rotate spindle
Oscillate spindle
Indexing axes
Positioning axes
Notes

PLC Functions A033
Prerequisites for the Function: FUNCTION FC 114 : VOID

TITLE =
VERSION : 0.1
The axis has to be defined as a concurrent positioning axis in BEGIN
the NC machine data. MD30450 NETWORK
TITLE =
HMI Requirement: A I 81.6;
FP M 141.0;
None S M 141.1;
A M 141.3;
Drive requirement (Sinamics): FP M 141.4;
R M 141.1;
None R M 141.7;
A I 81.7;
NCK Requirement: FP M 141.6;
S M 141.7;
Concurrent positioning axis CALL "SpinCtrl" (
Start := M 141.1,
PLC Requirement: Stop := M 141.7,
Parameterisation of the FC18 in the PLC Funct := B#16#5,
Mode := B#16#1,
AxisNo := 1,
Steps to achieve running function: Pos := 5.000000e+003,
Parameterisation of FC18 FRate := 1.000000e+005,
InPos := M 141.3,
Error := M 141.5,
State := MB 142);
END_FUNCTION

Parameter description of FC18 values
Mode I BYTE 0 to 5 0: Pos to absolute pos
Signal Type Format Range of Remark 1: Pos incrementally
values 2: Pos shortest path
Start I BOOL Start spindle control from PLC 3: Pos absolute, positive ap-
Stop I BOOL Stop spindle control from PLC proach direction
4: Pos absolute, negative
Funct I BYTE 1 to B#16#0B 1: Position spindle approach direction
2: Rotate spindle 5: Rotational direction as for
3: Oscillate spindle M4
4: Indexing axis
AxisNo I INT 1 - 31 No. of axis/spindle to be trav-
5: Positioning axis metric ersed
6: Positioning axis inch
7: PosAxis metric with hand- Pos I REAL 0,1469368 I -38 Rotary axis: Degrees
wheel override to Indexing axis: Indexing posi-
8: PosAxis inch with hand- 0,1701412 I tion
wheel override +39 Linear axis: mm or inches
9: Rotate spindle with FRate I REAL 0,1469368 I -38 Rotary axis and spindle: rev/
automatic gear stage selec- to min
tion 0,1701412 I See under table containing
A: Rotate spindle with con- +39 info about FRate
stant cutting rate (m/min) InPos Q BOOL 1 = Position reached,
B: Rotate spindle with con- or function executed
stant cutting rate (feet/min)
Error Q BOOL 1 = error
State Q BYTE 0 to 255 Error code
Notes

A033 END PLC Functions
Reference material
Data Block content for examples: DB121
A033: END
Notes

A037 Alarm Structure
Sinumerik
Operate
Module Description:
The 840D sl SINUMERIK system offers various possibilities for diagnosis, one of which is displaying
alarms and messages.
Alarms and messages are generated to indicate the machine status and faults in the control unit,
drive system or machine. They are used to assist the user with identifying the cause of machine stop-
pages.
Alarms/messages are sub-divided into the following ranges:

 NCK
 HMI
 SINAMICS
 PLC
Module Objective:
Upon completion of this module you will understand the alarm and message structure of the 840D sl
system.
Content:
Sinumerik
NCK Alarms and Messages Structure
Alarm Display Description
Alarm Acknowledgement
Alarm Log
Suppress Alarm Function
A037
A037

Alarm Structure A037
NCK Alarms and

Messages:
START
NCK Alarms
and Messages:
Structure
Alarm Display
Description
Alarm
Acknowledgement
Alarm Log
Suppress
Alarm
Function
NCK Alarms and

Messages:
END
Notes

NCK Alarms and Messsages: Structure 102000 - 102999 Services
The NCK alarm structure is divided into three areas. Each area 103000 - 103999 Machine
has been assigned a separate range of alarm/message num- 104000 - 104999 Parameter
bers.
105000 - 105999 Programming
Message/Alarm 106000 - 106999 Reserved
Function range
Nr.
107000 - 107999 OEM
NCK-Alarms/Messages
108000 - 108999 HiGraph
000000 - 009999 General alarms
109000 - 109999 Distributed systems (M to N)
010000 - 019999 Channel alarms
110000 - 110999 Cycles
020000 - 029999 Axis/spindle alarms
111000 - 111999 ShopMill, ShopTurn
060000 - 064999 Cycle alarms SIEMENS
113000 - 113999 Expanding User Interface (Easy screen)
065000 - 069999 Cycle alarms user
114000 - 114999 HT6
070000 - 079999 Compile cycles Manufacturer and OEM
119000 - 119999 OEM
HMI-alarms/messages
120000 - 129999 HMI advanced messages
100000 - 100999 Basic system
130000 - 139999 OEM
101000 - 101999 Diagnosis
142000 - 142099 RCS Host/Viewer
149000 - 149999 ePS
Message/Alarm Nr. Function range 231000 - 231999 Drive CLiQ component encoder 1
232000 - 232999 Drive CLiQ component encoder 2
SINAMICS-Alarms
233000 - 233999 Drive CLiQ component encoder 3
201000 - 203999 Control unit (CU)
234000 - 234999 Reserved
204000 - 204999 Reserved
235000 - 235999 Terminal Module 31 (TM31)
205000 - 205999 Power Unit
236000 - 236999 Reserved
206000 - 206999 Infeed
240000 - 240999 Controller extension (NX32)
207000 - 207999 Drive
241000 - 248999 Reserved
208000 - 208999 Option board
249000 - 249999 Sinamics GM7SM7GL
209000 - 209999 Reserved
250000 - 250999 Communication board (Comm Board)
213000 - 213002 Licence
250500 - 259999 Reserved
230000 - 230999 Drive CLiQ component power unit
Notes

Alarm Display Description Alarm No. Alarm acknowledge method.
When an alarm is activated it will be displayed on the top line

of the controller display.
More than Brief alarm description.

one alarm
present
If more that one alarm is present (Indicated by the arrow) they

can be made to rotate in turn by setting Display Machine Data
9056.
With values of less than 500 there is no rotation cycle. Values

of 500 to 10000 (milliseconds) set the time that each alarm/
message is displayed for.
The machine data is activated with an NC reset.
To see extra information, highlight an alarm and select the

“Help” key.
A full list of alarms can be seen in the “Diagnostics” area.
Notes

The information will be displayed in a pop-up box. Help Screen Function Description:
Detailed display of the selected alarm when the “Help”

key is selected.
On board operating and programming manuals.
A list of key words is displayed, each is a shortcut to the

correct help-file.
The partial text of an alarm can be searched for.
The pop-up box will be displayed on the whole screen.
Used to open the link to the help-file from a keyword or

search item.
Returns to the keyword or search item.
Exits the help screens.
Alarm Acknowledgement
When an alarm has occurred and the cause rectified, the

alarm will have to be acknowledged.
The type of acknowledgement depends upon the type/ Acknowledgement is via the MCP “Reset” button.
seriousness of the alarm. This will also reset the machining program.
Some alarms needs a reset of the system while others re-
quire acknowledgement via a pushbutton.
Acknowledgement types:
Acknowledgement is via the NC keyboard “Alarm can-
cel” button.
The required acknowledgement is indicated to the right of the
This should not reset the machining program.
alarm number on the alarm display line.
Acknowledgement is via the “Delete HMI alarm” in the

“Diagnostic” area.
Requires action by the operator before continuing with

the Cycle Start. Alarm can also be cleared by the MCP
“Reset” button
This is specifically related to PLC user alarms.
A button/key/switch should be provided by the manu-
Controller needs to be powered off/on or an NCK pow- facturer to facilitate the acknowledgement of the
er on via the “Reset (po)” soft-key in the “Setup” area. alarms.
Notes

Alarm Log
A log of alarms that have occurred can be seen by selecting

the “Alarm protocol” soft key.
This shows the time when the alarm occurred and when it
was cleared.
The “Display new” soft key is used to refresh the list and
display any alarms that have recently occurred.
There are a number of options which can be selected by us-

ing the cursor and select keys and confirmed with the “OK”
soft key:
Number of entries:
This sets the maximum number of alarms displayed on the
alarm log page.
Write mode file: Off

The “Settings” soft key is used to configure the alarm log. No storing of the log file will take place to the internal flash
memory (Compact flash card)
At every event: Each time an alarm occurs this will be record-
ed to the compact flash memory.
When this option is selected, a warning is displayed. By leav-
ing this option permanently set, the life of the internal flash
card will be reduced.
Notes

Write mode file: Time controlled:

The log will be saved at the interval entered in the Write inter-
val area (max. 32000 seconds).
This will cause less wear and tear of the CF card but still car-
ries similar risk of damage to the CF card.
The HMI will require restarting for the changes to become

effective
Suppress Alarm Function
Certain alarms can be suppressed via General Machine Data

11410 & 11415.
More detailed information is viewed with the “Help” key
The bit editor is viewed by pressing the “select” key.
Notes

A037: END
Notes

A037 END Alarm Structure

A031 PLC Alarms and Messages
Sinumerik
Operate
Module Description:
Alarms and messages are essential to inform operators, maintenance personnel etc. of the state of
the machine.
Alarms and messages can be configured to have different behaviour on the operation of the ma-
chine.
User help files can be created to give a more detailed description of each alarm/message.
This module describes how the alarms and messages are activated.
The effect an alarm has on the system is described and how to acknowledge an alarm.
Module Objective:
Upon completion of this module you can configure, activate and set the attributes of
messages and alarms and create user help files.
Content:
General Information
Sinumerik
Alarm and Message Screens
Alarm Configuration
Entering the Alarm Text
User Help Files
A031
A031

PLC Alarms and Messages A031
PLC Alarms
and
Messages:
START
General
Information
Alarm
Configuration
User Help
Files
PLC Alarms
and
Messages:
END
Notes

General information *1)
The PLC alarms/messages are sub-divided into the following Messages/alarms within these ranges are activated via the
ranges: user PLC. Each message/alarm has an interface bit within
DB2 to facilitate the activation of each individual alarm.
Message/Alarm No. Function The reaction of the machine to alarms within the
500000/600000 range is predefined by the system.
400000 - 499999 *
2)
PLC-messages in general Alarms within the 700000 range do not have any effect on the
machine unless they are configured to do so via the user PLC
program.
1)
500000 - 599999 * PLC-messages for channel
*2)
1)
600000 - 609999 * PLC-messages for axis and spindle Messages/alarms within these ranges are system generated
and cannot be configured by the user.
1)
700000 - 709999 * PLC-messages for user
2) PLC-messages for sequence chains/

800000 – 899999 *
graphics
2)
810000 - 810009 * PLC system messages
As soon as a fault occurs on the machine, the corresponding Alarms/messages appear at the top of the screen
alarm will be displayed in the message line at the top of the
screen.
The alarm number, acknowledgement method and a short text
description will be displayed.
Further alarms are indicated by a downward pointing arrow, to

the right of the alarm number.
The alarms/messages can be displayed in red or black. Red is

traditionally used to indicate a more serious alarm and black is
used for a message.
The alarm/message text can be input via the controller or creat-

ed offline.
Alarm/message details.
Notes

Alarm/ The alarms and messages are categorised and accessed via
message different soft-keys
Alarm
number clearance
The “Alarm list” screen displays serious alarms
The “Messages” screen displays less serious

alarms .
Indication that Alarm/

further alarms are message
active. description.
A list of active alarms/messages can be viewed.
The alarms displayed at the top of the screen can be made to Alarm Configuration
cycle in turn after a set time.
This is controlled by Display Machine Data 9056. The alarm/messages list can be entered directly on the con-
troller:
With values of less than 500 there is no rotation cycle. Values

of 500 to 10000 set the time that each alarm/message is dis-
played for.
The units are milliseconds.
The machine data is activated with an NC reset.
Notes

Alarm/ The file name is:

Alarm/ message oem_alarms_plc_eng.ts. The “eng” part of the name is the
message Colour language identifier.
number. selection
Language identifier examples:
eng = English
deu = German
fra = French
ita = Italian
esp = Spanish
Alarm/ Selection of a chs = Chinese (Simplified)
message pop-up box cht = Chinese (Traditional)
description. when alarm kor = Korean
is active. ptb = Portuguese (Brazil)
The file can be edited on the controller or saved externally for

editing/forwarding elsewhere. Select the “Open” soft-key to
open the file.
When the texts have been completed it is necessary to switch
the controller off/on to activate the changes.
The data is now saved to an xml file in the following location:

NCU: SystemCF card\oem\sinumerik\hmi\lng
PCU50: C:\ProgramData\Siemens\MotionControl\
oem\sinumerik\hmi\lng
NCU: Location of the alarm text file. PCU: Location of the alarm text file.
Notes

The entries made previously on the controller can be seen in User PLC Requirements
the file.
PLC Interface signals (DB2)
DB2 is used for activating the alarms/messages.

Each alarm number has its own interface bit which, when set
high will activate the alarm.
Whether an alarm behaves as a an Error Message (EM) or

Operator Message (OM) is pre-defined for all PLC user alarm
in the 500000 and 600000 ranges.
Exception:
Setting FB1 parameter - ExtendALMsg:= True
With this setting the alarm reaction can be configured using
DB5
A list of all the interface signals is found in Module Appendix C

PLC Interface.
To make the alarm system operational it is necessary to call Channel Alarms 510000 to 511315:
and parameterize FC10 in the user PLC program.
The following table is a sample of DB2. This shows the inter-
Calling FC10 face signals for alarms 510000 to 511315. These are alarms
for channel 1. (See Module Appendix C for additional channel
signals)
See below for description The red text denotes that the alarm is classed as an Error
Message. Alarms in the blue text classifies them as Operator
Messages.
Declaring the alarm clear signal. Error messages, when activated, will appear on the “Alarm
(e.g. I3.7 (MCP reset button) list” screen and require an acknowledgement to clear.
(FC10 “Quit” function e.g. I3.7)
FC10 parameter : ToUserIF:=TRUE Operator Messages will appear on the “Messages” screen
Error messages/alarms in the 500000 and 600000 ranges and remain displayed until the interface bit is set to 0.
(Set via DB2) will be displayed. The controller will automati- The effect of a message on the system is also shown for each
cally issue feed-hold, read-in disables etc. byte. This is only if FC10 parameter ToUserIF:= True.
FC10 parameter : ToUserIF:=FALSE

Error messages/alarms in the 500000 and 600000 ranges
(Set via DB2) will be displayed. The controller will not auto-
matically issue feed-hold, read-in disables etc. This is the
responsibility of the OEM.
Notes

Following is an Example assuming the parameter

"ExtendALMsg:=" False
DB2 interface signals for alarms 510000 to 511315: DB2

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Byte
510231 510230 510229 510228 510227 510226 510225 510224
DB2 9
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Read-in disable-Operator message (OM)
Byte 510307 510306 510305 510304 510303 510302 510301 510300
510007 510006 510005 510004 510003 510002 510001 510000
10
NC start disable-Error message (EM)
0
Feed and read-in disable-Error message (EM)
510315 510314 510313 510312 510311 510310 510309 510308
510015 510014 510013 510012 510011 510010 510009 510008
11
NC start disable-Operator message (OM)
1
Feed and read-in disable-Operator message (OM)
511107 511106 511105 511104 511103 511102 511101 511100
510107 510106 510105 510104 510103 510102 510101 510100
12
Feed stop Geometry axis-Error Message (EM)
2
511115 511114 511113 511112 511111 511110 511109 511108
510115 510114 510113 510112 510111 510110 510109 510108
13
Feed stop Geometry axis-Operator message (OM)
3
511207 511206 511205 511204 511203 511202 511201 511200
510123 510122 510121 510120 510119 510118 510117 510116
14
Feed stop Geometry axis-Error Message (EM)
4
Feed and read-in disable-Operator message (OM)
511215 511214 511213 511212 511211 511210 511209 511208
15
510131 510130 510129 510128 510127 510126 510125 510124 Feed stop Geometry axis-Operator message (OM)
5
Read-in disable-Operator message (OM)
511307 511306 511305 511304 511303 511302 511301 511300
16
510207 510206 510205 510204 510203 510202 510201 510200 Feed stop Geometry axis-Error Message (EM)
6
Read-in disable-Error message (EM)
511315 511314 511313 511312 511311 511310 511309 511308
17
510215 510214 510213 510212 510211 510210 510209 510208 Feed stop Geometry axis-Operator message (OM)
7
Read-in disable-Error message (EM)
510223 510222 510221 510220 510219 510218 510217 510216

8
Read-in disable-Operator message (OM)
Axis and Spindle Alarms 600000 - 609999 User PLC Alarms 700000 - 709999
Alarms in the 600000 - 699999 range are used for creating a Alarms in the 700000 - 709999 range are free for configuring
feed/spindle stop. in the user PLC program.
Two bytes are reserved for each axis/spindle. The first of The effect the alarm has on the system is entirely the respon-
which is defined as error messages (EM) while the second sibility of the machine manufacturer.
byte is defined as operator messages (OM). The alarms are separated into error messages (EM), and
operator messages (OM)
DB2 interface signals for alarms 600100 to 600415: DB2 interface signals for alarms 700000 to 700063:
DB2 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 DB2 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Byte Byte
144 600107 600106 600105 600104 600103 600102 600101 600100 180 700007 700006 700005 700004 700003 700002 700001 700000
Feed stop/spindle stop for axis/spindle 1
181 700015 700014 700013 700012 700011 700010 700009 700008
145 600115 600114 600113 600112 600111 600110 600109 600108
146 600207 600206 600205 600204 600203 600202 600201 600200 182 700023 700022 700021 700020 700019 700018 700017 700016
Feed stop/spindle stop for axis/spindle 2 183 700031 700030 700029 700028 700027 700026 700025 700024
147 600215 600214 600213 600212 600211 600210 600209 600208

184 700039 700038 700037 700036 700035 700034 700033 700032
148 600307 600306 600305 600304 600303 600302 600301 600300

185 700047 700046 700045 700044 700043 700042 700041 700040
149 600315 600314 600313 600312 600311 600310 600309 600308 186 700055 700054 700053 700052 700051 700050 700049 700048
150 600407 600406 600405 600404 600403 600402 600401 600400

187 700063 700062 700061 700060 700059 700058 700057 700056
151 600415 600414 600413 600412 600411 600410 600409 600408
Notes

Alarm Activation When the interface signals are high, the alarms/message will
be displayed on the relevant screen.
The interface signals have to be set in the user PLC.
The following example shows how alarms 700000 (EM) and
700032 (OM) can be activated.
Notes

Following is a Function diagram base upon"ExtendALMsg:=" False

and FC10 parameter ToUserIF True and False
cancel alarm display

Error message
Quit := I3.7
CALL FC10
ToUserIF := True
Quit : = I 3.7
FC35 - Alarm Block
A I 88.4
= DB2.DBX0.0 Error Message
A I 88.5
= DB2.DBX1.0 Operator Message Interface signal to
ToUserIF := True NCK
Group Signal Trans-
fer
Feed Hold
ToUserIF := False
No Signal Transfer CALL FC10
CALL FC10 ToUserIF := True
ToUserIF := False Quit : = I 3.7
Quit : = I 3.7
Notes

Following is a Function diagram base upon"ExtendALMsg:=" True

and FC910 parameter ToUserIF True and False
Without Alarm no
display
CALL FC10
ToUserIF := True
Quit : = I 3.7
FC35 - Alarm Block
A I 88.4
= DB2.DBX0.0 Feed hold effect
without alarm
A I 88.5 Interface signal to
= DB2.DBX1.0 Feed hold effect NCK
ToUserIF := True
without alarm
Group Signal Trans-
fer
Feed Hold
ToUserIF := False
No Signal Transfer Controlled directly from
CALL FC10 customer PLC when
ToUserIF := False ToUserIF:= False
Quit : = I 3.7
With alarm no dis-
play
CALL FC10
ToUserIF := True
Quit : = I 3.7
FC35 - Alarm Block
A I 88.6
= DB2.DBX310.0 Error Message
A I 88.7
= DB2.DBX311.0 Operator Message Interface signal to
ToUserIF := True NCK
Group Signal Trans-
fer
Feed Hold
ToUserIF := False
No Signal Transfer Controlled directly from
CALL FC10 customer PLC when
ToUserIF := False ToUserIF:= False
Quit : = I 3.7
Notes

Additional Functions with "ExtendALMsg:=" True
 The user messages can be parameterized in the sec-  The alarms / messages also get the 16-bit integer addi-
ond decade of the message number in the numerical tional value (%Z parameter in the alarm text) in addi-
range 0 to 9. The display value of the second decade tion to the alarm number for the user area 0. The user
must be written by the user in the DB 5 in the array must write the 16-bit integer values in the DB 2 in the
variable UserDek2No. A number can be defined for Array variable ZInfo0 parallel to setting an alarm bit. An
each user area, see DB 5 in the basic program. integer value is available for each bit in the user area 0.
The second digit can therefore be changed:

Alarm 700000 or 710000 or 750000, it can be used to identify  The structuring of the DB 2 in UDT1002 can be recog-
a logical station on the machine. nized (basic program). In case of new alarm functions,
the UDT1002 must be assigned symbolically to the
DB2.
L6
T ALMSG_DB.ZInfo0[8]
Alarm : 700008 "Axis No %Z Temperature Fault"

L5
T DB5.UserDek2No[0] Result: 700008 "Axis No 6 Temperature Fault"
Notes

User Help Files
To further enhance the fault finding procedure it is possible to create a “Help” file.
When the HELP key is pressed the details of the selected alarm will be displayed on the screen.
Help file information and Rules:

The help file is of the type HTML (Hyper Text Mark-up Language) and needs to be stored in a specific directory.
File location for English language:
NCU: System CF-Card\oem\sinumerik\hmi\hlp\eng\sinumerik_alarm_plc_pmc
PCU: C:\ProgramData\Siemens\MotionControl\oem\sinumerik\hmi\hlp\eng\sinumerik_alarm_plc_pmc
The italicised text denotes folders that require creating. Separate folders are required for each language where the Help file is to
be utilised.
Examples:
English - eng\sinumerik_alarm_plc_pmc
German - deu\sinumerik_alarm_plc_pmc
The HTML file name:

sinumerik_alarm_oem_plc_pmc.html
A separate file needs to be created and stored in each of the language folders.
HTML script language

Once the file is created the HTML code can be entered. HTML uses tags, each tag has a specific function.
Tags have to be opened and closed in the correct manner, example:
<html> Opening the “html” tag

Information/more tags entered here etc.
</html> Closing the “html” tag
Table of Common HTML Tags:
TAG Description
html Root element-Main tag for the help file, contains all other tags, first to be opened and
last to be closed.
head Contains document information, opened immediately after the HTML tag, closed
directly before the BODY tag is opened.
body The main body of the HTML document, determines what will be displayed on the
screen. Opened immediately after the closing the HEAD tag. Closed immediately
before the HTML tag.
table Creates a table for the help file information.
tr Table row, creates a row within the table.
td Table data cell. Used within the tr tag, contains the text that is to be displayed on the
help screen. The tag is used with the width attribute to determine the width of the cell
and the valign attribute to align the text within a cell.
p Used to begin a new paragraph.
b Text will be written in bold type.
i Text will be written in italic type.
br Starts a new line.
Notes

Example help file

Below is an example help file for alarm 700000. The text has been coloured to assist with understanding the contents.
<html>
<head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset="UTF-8"/><title></title></head>
<body>
<table>
<tr>
<td width="15%"><a name="700000">700000</a></td>
<td width="85%">Hydraulic Pressure Low</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td valign="top" width="15%">Parameter:</td>
<td width="85%">N/A</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td valign="top" width="15%">Explanation:</td>
<td width="85%">I8.1 is low.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td valign="top" width="15%">Reaction:</td>
<td width="85%">Emergency Stop Initiated</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td valign="top" width="15%">Remedy:</td>
<td width="85%">The hydraulic unit has indicated a fault. Check oil level. Check pressure switch. Clean filter if necessary.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td valign="top" width="15%">Part number:</td>
<td width="85%">Hydraulic oil type: AAA. Pressure switch type: BBB Filter type CCC</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td valign="top" width="15%">Program continuation:</td>
<td width="85%">Machine restart required</td>
</tr>
</table>

</body>
</html>
The “a” tag is known as an anchor.

The system is able to cross reference the highlighted alarm with the entry within the “a” tag.
<td width="15%"><a name="700000">700000</a></td>
When an alarm is selected and the help key is pressed the system uses the anchor to locate and display the correct table contents
for the selected alarm.
Adding further alarms to the HTML file is simply a case of copying/pasting the existing “table” tag and its contents and editing to suit
the individual alarm.
The contents of the “head” tag should not be changed. This determines the content type and text format.
Notes

Creating the help files/directories on the controller NCU “hlp” folder location:
The folders can be created directly on the controller or by using

the Access MyMachine software package.
Creating the help file folders on the controller:
Locate the directory where the folders are to be created.

NCU: System CF-Card\oem\sinumerik\hmi\hlp
PCU50: C:\ProgramData\Siemens\MotionControl\oem\
sinumerik\hmi\hlp
PCU “hlp” folder location: Select the “Directory” soft-key, this is usually already selected
by default.
Enter the directory name, this is the language directory.

Several will have to be created if help files are to be available
for more than one language. See previous page for language
specific folder names.
Below: Creating a folder for English help files.
Cursor to the “hlp” directory and select the “New” soft-key.
Notes

Highlight the “eng” folder and select the “New” soft-key.
Type in the help file name

“sinumerik_alarm_oem_plc_pmc.html“.
Enter the mandatory name for the new directory:
“sinumerik_alarm_plc_pmc”.
Creating the help file:

Cursor to “sinumerik_alarm_plc_pmc” directory and select the
“New” soft-key followed by the “Any” soft-key.
The file will automatically open in readiness for the HTML code NCU:
to be entered. System CF card\user\sinumerik
\hmi\hlp\eng\sinumerik_alarm_plc_pmc
The file is closed with the “exit” soft-key: “System CF card\oem\sinumerik
\hmi\hlp\eng\sinumerik_alarm_plc_pmc
PCU50:
C:\ProgramData\Siemens\MotionControl\user\sinumerik\
hmi\hlp\eng\sinumerik_alarm_plc_pmc
Creating the help files/directories on an external PC C:\ProgramData\Siemens\MotionControl\oem\sinumerik\
hmi\hlp\eng\sinumerik_alarm_plc_pmc
It is also possible to create the directories/help files offline using
an ASCII editor (e.g. Notepad®).
This is usually a more comfortable method than stood at the
controller.
These files have to be transferred to the controller and placed in
the correct folders using the USB /CF Interfaces or with the
Access MyMachine software.
The file needs to be placed in certain folders on the controller.

The “sinumerik_alarm_oem_plc_pmc.html” file has to be
placed in one of the following directories:
Notes

Testing the help file on the controller If several alarms exist, cursor to the correct one.
To test the Help file the alarm specified in the Help file should
be activated.
Alarm 700000 is activated by DB2.DBX180.0
With the alarm active locate the “Alarms/Messages” screen.
The alarm will appear in either the “Alarmlist” or “Messages”

screen depending how it has been configured.
Or
The HELP function is activated by the “HELP” key.
A031: END
Notes

A031 END PLC Alarms and Messages
A031: END

A058 PLC Onboard Diagnostics
Sinumerik
Operate
Module Description:
The 840D sl SINUMERIK controller has onboard PLC diagnostic capabilities to aid users with the
fault finding procedure.
It is possible to monitor the status of external inputs and outputs and also internal system signals.
It is also possible to trace the status of variables over defined time periods using the NC/PLC
Trace function
Module Objective:
Upon completion of this module you will be able to:
 Check the status of user PLC Variables

 Check the status of user system variables
 Use the NC/PLC Trace function
Content:
Sinumerik
User PLC Variables
System Variables
Onboard Diagnostics: Detailed Description
NC/PLC Trace function
A058
A058

PLC Onboard Diagnostics A058
PLC Onboard
Diagnostics:
START
User PLC
Variables
System
Variables
Onboard
Diagnostics:
Detailed
Description
NC/PLC Trace
Function
PLC Onboard
Diagnostics:
END
Notes

User PLC Variables
Address Formats
The format that a variable (Operand) is entered on the diagnostics screen will be dependent on the type of data being diagnosed.
The format can be in single bit, byte, word & double word format.
Bit- This refers to a single element of logic e.g. I4.0, Q5.5, M100.6, DB31.DBX2.1. The Bit part is the number after the decimal
point. The value of a bit is either 1 or 0.
Byte- A Byte is a collection of 8 bits of logic in the same group. e.g.

Input Byte 4 (IB4) contains the bits I4.0, I4.1, I4.2, I4.3, I4.4, I4.5, I4.6, I4,7.
When working with bytes it must be remembered that the numbering counts up from the right as shown below.
IB4
Bit no 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Value 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
In this example I4.1, I4.2, I4.5 & I4.7 are equal to 1. Another term for being equal to 1 is that these bits are High.
The bits equal to 0 are termed as being Low.
Output Bytes (QB), and Marker Bytes (MB) can also be used in the same way.
Word– A Word is a collection of 16 bits of logic which encompasses two

consecutive Bytes.
A Word can only be addressed as 0 or an even number (IW0, IW2, IW4 etc) odd numbers are not allowed.
As with the Byte format the numbering starts from the right.
Example IW4
IB4 IB5
Bit no 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Value 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1
In this example I4.0, I4.1, I4.4, I4.5, I4.6, I5.0, 5.2, I5.5, I5.7 are equal to 1.Output Words (QW) and Marker Words (MB) can also
be used in the same way.
Double Word– A Double Word is a collection of 32 bits of logic which encompasses two consecutive Words (Four consecutive
Bytes).
A Double Word can only be addressed as 0 or as a number which is a multiple of four, (ID0, ID4, ID8, ID12 etc) odd numbers
are not allowed.
Example ID4
IB4 IB5 IB6 IB7
Bit no 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Value 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1
Output Words (QD) and Marker Words (MD) can also be used in the same way.
Data Blocks (DB):-

System Data Blocks are used for interfacing between different areas of the controller and the User PLC, Module A034 describes
this in more detail.
The user can also create Data Blocks.
Data Blocks can be written in different formats e.g. :

DB31.DBX0.0 Data Block 31, Data Block Bit 0.0
DB31.DBB1 Data Block 31, Data Block Byte 1
DB31.DBW10 Data Block 31, Data Block Word 10
DB31.DBD12 Data Block 31, Data Block Double Word 12
Notes

To locate the PLC Diagnostics screen use the following soft- The status of the PLC variable to be checked should typed into
key sequence: the “Variable” column (Bit, byte, word, double word).
Example, using inputs to show the different format possibilities
The following screen will be displayed, it is possible that there

are entries already present on the screen.
Format
The variable value can be viewed in different formats. The for-

mat has to be selected from the list:
Format description: Variable Possible Format
Formats Description Inputs Ix.x, IBx, IWx, IDx
B Binary Outputs Qx.x, QBx, QWx, QDx
H Hexadecimal Bit memory Mx.x, MBx, MWx, MDx
D Decimal without sign Timers Tx
±D Decimal with sign Counters Cx
F Floating point number (for double words) Data Blocks DBx.DBXx.x, DBx.DBBx, DBx.DBWx,
DBx.DBDx
A ASCII characters
Timers can only be viewed in the “Decimal” format.
The variable will be displayed in the selected format: Counters can be viewed “Decimal”, Binary” and Hexadecimal”
format.
PLC variables are the most commonly checked during fault

finding, e.g. inputs from switches, outputs to coils etc.
The following table shows the PLC variables that can be moni-
tored: Entries can be edited by using the Insert, and Cursor keys
found on the NC keyboard.
Notes

System Variables The types of variable available for selection are:

A list of available system variables is displayed via the “Insert System variables
variable” soft-key. NC
The available variables are listed when the soft-key is select- Axis
ed. Channel
Mode groups
Global user data
PLC
The filter is used to narrow down the variables on view.
The search window can be used to locate the required variable.

Partial or whole names can be entered.
The variable used in this example is an axis variable, therefore

an axis has to be chosen.
Choose the variable from the list, e.g. “aaRef Axis
Notes

The chosen variable will appear on the screen. Onboard Diagnostics: Detailed Description
Operand +/-:
The “Operand +” and “Operand -”soft-keys are used for

locating operands (Variables) within the same group.
The values within the square brackets identify the individual

variables e.g:
or
Display Comments:
[U1= Channel No. , 1 = Axis No.]
Further information about the variable can be displayed by
selecting the “Display Comments” and “Details” soft-key.
Change:
For test purposes it may be necessary to manually change

(Force) an operand. This is achieved with the “Change” soft
The comments can be edited if necessary. In the case of user key.
PLC inputs and outputs, the comments will require adding.
The operand in question has to be highlighted and the new

Details: value entered and confirmed with the “OK” soft key.
The details of the variable can be viewed:
Notes

Enter the new value e.g. 1 Delete All:
The “Delete all” soft-key will delete all entries in the list.
Note:
It is useful to have this function in the commissioning stages.
After data loss, it may also be necessary to enter values into
Data Blocks using this method. This depends upon the ma-
chine manufacturer.
Caution should be taken when attempting to manually enter
data as unwanted movements may occur.
It is not possible to force operands which are being addressed
by the PLC program.
Individual entries can be cleared via the ”Delete” soft-key

found on the NC keyboard.
Further functions The file can be saved locally or externally to a USB device or
networked PC. It is always useful to have the file stored
Further functions are available when the “Menu extension/ locally.
page right” soft-key is pressed: Choose a suitable destination e.g. User\Variable masks.
Save screen:
The variables that are listed can be saved to a file. This is

useful if a set of operands have been selected which relate to
a certain area of the machine e.g. the toolchanger.
The file can be loaded each time the toolchanger signals need
to be monitored.
Notes

Load mask:
When required, the saved file can easily be loaded.
Enter a suitable name for the file, e.g. Toolchange signals:
The variable will now appear on the status screen. NC/PLC Trace Function
The “NC/PLC trace” function is used to trace the status of

variables over a given time. The results of the trace are dis-
played on the screen in a graph format.
To locate the NC/PLC Trace screen, follow the soft-key se-

quence:
Load symbols:
If a symbols file (*.snh) is available, this can be loaded with the

“Load symbols” soft-key.
The following screen will be displayed. The variables can be
typed directly or selected from the list displayed when the
“Choose variable” soft-key is selected.
Note: Symbols files are created with the Step7 software pack-
age. They then have to be converted into files with the “.snh”
extension, in readiness for loading via the “Load symbols” soft-
key.
Notes

A058 END PLC Onboard Diagnostics
Colour of Show/hide
trace. trace
Style of
trace line
The trace time and various other settings can be modified:
Example: Tracing the status of I16.0 over a 10 second period.
Enter the variable into column marked “Variable”. A comment

will automatically be entered.
The colour of the trace and the trace line can be selected.
After the set time has elapsed, the trace will be automatically
displayed.
The example shows that the input I16.0 switched from 0 to 1
on three occasions during the 10 second period
The trace can now be started:
The trace can be examined in detail using the zoom functions.

Up to 16 variables can be traced at once.
Traces can be saved and loaded from external sources in
“xml” format.
A058: END
Notes

A068 Commissioning sequence
Sinumerik
Operate
Module Description:
The 840D sl controller, together with the “Sinumerik Operate” operator interface is a modular CNC
controller, designed for a wide range of different machine types and technologies.
In order to achieve the full machine functionality many functions have to be brought together and
be commissioned.
The sequences which we follow in this module will ensure that the machine is commissioned in the
correct sequence and that no faults are generated by incorrect settings appearing at the wrong
time.
It will also ensure that the machine is commissioned in an acceptable time period with the highest
degree of stability and quality.
Module Objective:
Upon completion of this module you will be able to configure a milling machine with 3 linear axis, 2
rotary and spindle according to the defined commissioning procedure.
This procedure is necessary to ensure compatibility and quality of the installation.
Content:
Sinumerik
Overall commissioning procedure for 840D sl
Factory settings
HMI Configuration
PLC Program
Drive configuration
DMS and NC Axis assignment
Machine data optimisation
Drive optimisation
A068
A068

Commissioning sequence A068
Commissioning
sequence:
START
Preparations
for 1st Com-
missioning
HMI Language -
Password -
Time / date /
Alarm Text
Machine
Configuration:
BAG/Channel/Axis
PLC Part 1:
Hardware
configuration and
MCP
Drive Firmware
Update and
Topology
Recognition
DMS and
NC Axis
Assignment
Commissioning
sequence:
END
Notes

Sinumerik 840D commissioning sequence
1. Tools/software installation (A002)
2. Preparations for 1st Commissioning
3. HMI Language - Password - Time and date -

Alarm Text
4. Machine configuration, BAG / Channel / Axis
5. PLC part 1, Hardware Configuration and

MCP
6. Drive firmware update and configuration
7. NC Axis assignment
8. NC machine data configuration
9a. PLC part 2, OEM signals, enables etc.
9b. Tool Management (A102)
10. Drive optimisation (A101)
11. Data management (A017)
Notes

1. Tools/software installation
Please refer to Module A002 for a detailed description of how To load NC Standard data:
to install the necessary tools.
SVC / NCK = 1 + PO
2. Preparations for 1st Commissioning To load PLC Standard data
PLC = 3 + PO
To ensure that the controller is ready for the first commission-
ing the following should be carried out: PO = Power ON / NCK Reset
 Card is new and has not previously been used.

 Electrical installation finished
 Mechanical installation finished
Status after PO (Power on)
After returning SVC / NCK switch to position 0 , switch PLC
from position 3 --> 2 --> 3 wait for LED `STOP` showing con-
stant yellow, then switch PLC -> RUN
The following LED status should be reached.
3. Language - Password - Time and date -

Alarm Text
At this point in the commissioning procedure it is necessary to

perform the following:
Set Language
Set Password
Correct Time and Date settings
Enter Pre-configured PLC user Alarms
It is essential at this point that the Time and date be correctly

set, this is a requirement for the EUNA / RSC
End: Loading of Standard data
Notes

Set Language
The password - “SUNRISE” is recommended , followed by
“OK” soft-key.
The password will now be set to manufacturer level as

displayed above the horizontal soft-keys.
Set Password
Correct Time and Date settings Configure alarms
The customer will install the PLC during the commissioning

procedure, it could happen that customer alarms are present
at this time which requires that the alarm text exists prior to
the PLC program.
At this stage in the procedure you can choose to enter the
texts directly or read the alarm text file into the controller.
Notes

4. Machine configuration, BAG / Channel / Axis
After HMI configuration the NCK should be configured.
This NCK configuration includes :
Options according to Licenses
Number of Mode Groups
Number of Channels / assignment
Number of Axis / Spindles
Axis names
Assignment of Axis
End: HMI Language - Password -
Time and date - Alarm Text
Options according to Licenses In the next step the options can be set according to the ma-
chine configuration.
If the System CF card has been purchased with Licensing,
the current license can be viewed in the Start-up area under In order to activate an option an NCK reset is necessary
Licenses. (Reset PO)
“License key is sufficient“ is displayed, indicating that no op-

tions are set without the necessary license.
Notes

After checking that the respective licenses have been cor-

rectly set, the machine can be configured.
After performing an NCK reset, the controller may start-up
with the following screen, this screen indicates that an initial
In our example a Five axis milling machine with one spindle
start-up of the drive system is necessary.
will be configured.
The start-up of the drive system is carried out later in the start
-up process, therefore continue the process with the “cancel“
The number of machine axis / spindles therefore has to be
Soft-key
increased to Six. This is done by entering the additional axis
numbers in the Channel machine data 20070[0....n], in the
respective index.
In order to activate the new axis, an NCK reset has to be

performed.
After NCK reset, it can bee seen that the axis are available
with default names.
Notes

The axis names can now be changed according to the require- The following naming convention is used for the part program-
ment of the machine tool builder. ming:
In this example the following names and axis types will be X Geometry axis 1 Linear
used: Y Geometry axis 2 Linear
Z Geometry axis 3 Linear
X1 Machine axis 1 Linear SP1 Rotary axis (SP) Spindle / Rotary
Y1 Machine axis 2 Linear A Rotary axis Rotary
Z1 Machine axis 3 Linear C Rotary axis Rotary
SP1 Machine axis 4 Rotary / Spindle
A1 Machine axis 5 Rotary These names are defined in the corresponding Channel ma-
C1 Machine axis 6 Rotary chine data 20080[0....n].
These are the names of the axis which will be seen in Jog/Ref
screen at every power on of the machine, and are not the axis
names which appear in the part program, an exception to this
is when directing the axis to go to Reference position in the
NC part program, other exceptions exist and can be found in
the NC part program guide.
These names are defined in the corresponding General ma-

chine data 10000[0....n].
Notes

It can bee seen in the following screenshot that although the The following machine data: 30300, 30310 and 30320 are
required axis are available, they are of not the required axis necessary in order to define an axis as rotary. These settings
type. are also the prerequisite setting for spindles.
The axis are set as linear by default and have to be converted
to their required type using the axis machine data.
The A1 and C1 have to be converted to the Rotary type and

the SP1 has to be converted also to type “Rotary“ and be
assigned as a Spindle.
The machine data should be changed to the value of 1. Following rotary axis definition, the SP axis can be assigned
Upon changing MD30300 the alarm message 4070 will be as a Spindle. This definition is made with axis machine data
displayed, indicating that the measuring system unit will be 35000 = 1 . With definition 1, the rotary axis is defined as a
changed at the next NCK reset. The default linear measuring spindle and with 20090 = 1 assigned as the master Spindle
unit is the mm and this will changed to deg, for Rotary axis / for the defined channel, and is programmed with the address
spindles. “S“
Notes

The required configuration can be seen in the following

screenshot.
It should be noted however that this is only the basic machine
configuration and not the end requirement, many more ma-
chine data have to be changed in order to achieve this.
It can be seen that our main configuration is reached.
3 Linear
1 Spindle
2 Rotary
End: Machine configuration,

BAG / Channel / Axis
Example Step 7 Hardware configuration: Profibus

5. PLC part 1, Hardware configuration + MCP
The PLC program can now be loaded.
The minimum requirement being:
Step 7 Hardware part
PLC Basic program - correctly configured
In addition, it is suggested that the machine control panel

logic with sufficient enables be loaded in order to test the
previously configured system.
Notes

Example Step 7 Hardware configuration: Pbus + Pnet Example- MCP transfer:
CALL FC 2 ;

CALL FC 24 (
BAGNo := B#16#1,
ChanNo := B#16#1,
SpindleIFNo := B#16#4,
FeedHold := M 100.0
SpindleHold := M 100.1
SpindleDir := M 100.2);
SET ;
= DB31.DBX 1.5;
= DB32.DBX 1.5;
= DB33.DBX 1.5;
= DB34.DBX 1.5;
= DB35.DBX 1.5;
= DB36.DBX 1.5;
Upon successful loading of the PLC part and a subsequent

NCK reset the controller will restart with only one error mes-
sage existing; 120402 first start-up of Sinamics required.
This is the only fault message which should be expected at
this time during the start-up procedure.
End: PLC part 1, Hardware

configuration and MCP.
Notes

6. Drive firmware update and configuration
A system whose drives have not been configured will boot by

default to the following screen.
When the “OK” soft-key is selected the system will check the
equipment connected to the DriveCLiQ bus.
The firmware will be loaded to any hardware not at the latest
version.
The configuration of the connected drive hardware will be
saved to the controller as part of the drive configuration
procedure.
A series of information boxes will be displayed, allow the

process to complete.
Switch the power off/on.
The drive components that are connected to the DriveCLiQ

bus are now displayed on the controller.
Note: No axes have been assigned at this stage.
Notes

Topology of Training Simulator S120
NCU 1 MoMo 2 MoMo 3 4 MoMo 5 6

X105
1 2 3 4 5 6
X104
X103 X203 X203
X102 X202 X202 X202
X101 X201 X201 X201
X100 X200 X200 X200
X500
SMI- 21 SMI- 18 SMI- 15 SMI- 12 SMI- 9 SMC
ENC- 22 ENC- 19 ENC- 16 ENC- 13 ENC- 10 ENC- 7
MOT- 23 MOT- 20 MOT- 17 MOT- 14 MOT- 11 MOT- 8
2 3 4 5 6 6
S120 Drives: DMS Encoder Configuration Use the “Drive +” OR “Drive -” soft-keys to locate the drive
which has been incorrectly assigned the DMS (Servo 3.3.6)
In certain situations it is not possible for the topology to as-
sign components according to the machine configuration. Or
In this case the assignment has to be changed manually. Servo 3.3.6 is selected
The following example is necessary because the Spindle

Direct Measuring System (DMS) is connected to another
axis (A axis).
The system needs to be configured so that it associates this

encoder with the spindle (Physical location of the encoder).
Deselecting the DMS encoder from Servo 3.3.6 (A axis):
To continue select the following soft-key sequence:
Notes

The encoder has to be first deselected from Servo 3.3.6 (A

By paging down to the bottom of the screen it can be seen axis) to free it up for assignment to the Servo 3.3.2 (spindle)
that this drive does in fact have a 2nd encoder assigned to Select the “Change” soft-key.
it.
The encoder type is unknown at this stage and will be add-
Press the “Next step” soft-key until the Encoder assignment

screen is displayed, the page will show two encoders as-
signed to the axis.
Deselect Encoder 2:
Press the “Next step” soft-key
Drive Configuration will be read:
The system detects the removal of the encoder and issues an

alarm which is normal at this stage..
Press the “Next step” soft-key the Summary screen is dis-

played.
This now shows Servo 3.3.6 with only one encoder.
Notes

A dialogue box shows that the configuration has changed and Assigning the DMS encoder to the Spindle:
that save be carried out.
This is not necessary at this stage because the encoder has Use the “Drive +” OR “Drive -” soft-keys to locate Servo
still to be assigned to the Spindle. 3.3.2
Or Servo 3.3.2 is selected
Der zweite Geber muss jetzt der richtigen Achse zugeordnet

werden. In diesem Fall ist dies Antrieb 2 (Spindel).
Press the “Next step” soft-key until the Encoder assignment Select the Encoder 2 checkbox.
screen is displayed. From the list select the DMS encoder.
The top two encoders on the list are the ones available to the
The page will show one encoder assigned to the servo. spindle. The 1st one being the DMS (Motor_Module_6.X201-
SM_7-Encoder_8), the 2nd being the one already assigned
as the motor encoder.
The remaining items on the list are motor encoders which are
already assigned.
Below: Encoder 2 (Motor_Module_6.X201-SM_7-Encoder_8)

selected and assigned to the DMS.
Notes

Press the “Next step” soft-key until the Encoder 2 configu- The details of the encoder need to be manually entered, select
ration screen appears. the “enter data” soft-key.
In this case the encoder is of the type: Rotary incremental

Sine/Cosine type with 1024 pulses and one zero mark per
revolution.
The position actual value needs to be inverted due to the
mounting method of the DMS encoder.
The screenshot below has had the encoder type and infor-
mation entered:
The bottom of the summary screen shows Encoder 2 details:
The encoder now appears in the list as a User-defined type:
Press the “Next step” soft-key until the Summary screen ap-
pears.
Notes

The DMS assignment is now complete and needs to be

saved, press the “Yes” soft-key.
The new settings will now be saved and the system will re-
boot.
End of DMS assignment.
End: Drive Firmware Update and

Topology Recognition
7. DMS and NC Axis Assignment.
At this point the drive objects and components have been

identified and confirmed in the database. This is a logical
representation and may not match the mechanical system,
an example of this mismatch is when an encoder is found
attached to the bus, but this bus connection (component) is
having a different physical location on the machine.
Spindle having a direct measuring system , however the
encoder is connected to the A axis MM.
The next steps in the drive configuration require the use of

the HMI Start-up tool for the PC.
The machine NC configuration shows no drives are assigned: Axis assignment missing.
Notes

Drives overview screen:

The default drive displayed is the Servo 3.3.2.
The example below shows the drive without any set-point or

actual value components assigned.
Axis assignment is now achieved with the “Assign axis “ soft-

key: Select the “Change” soft-key.
A dialogue box warns of the necessity to set certain machine Use the mouse to reveal the list of axes and highlight the
data after the assignment is complete. correct axis for the selected motor module, confirm with the
“Input/enter” key.
The axis assignment procedure automatically sets certain ma-
chine data using information taken from the motor electronic
rating plate.
Information such as ball screw pitches, feed rates etc. should

be entered manually.
Notes

If more axes are to be assigned select “No”, otherwise select

The same selection is automatically entered into the other “Yes”.
fields. It is not necessary to change these on a standard in-
stallation.
Confirm the selection by pressing the “Accept” key.
In this example the remaining servos still need assigning:
Servo 3.3.3 X axis

Servo 3.3.4 Y axis
Servo 3.3.5 Z axis
The spindle motor module set-point and actual values Servo 3.3.6 A axis
have been assigned to the nc axis MSP1.
Select the next drive to be assigned and repeat as previously.
Or
When all axes have been assigned the changes need to be After axis assignment and NCK Reset - Alarm Free
activated with an NCK reset, select “Yes” .
Axes assigned to the servos.
Notes

OFF1 + OFF3 axis Turning ?
End: NC Axis Assignment
Notes

B068 END Commissioning sequence
A068: END

A084 Encoder Adjustment
Sinumerik
Operate
Module Description:
All positioning axes require referencing in order for the controller to position them. The procedures
for the referencing of incremental and absolute encoders is described along with the most im-
portant machine data.
Module Objective:
Upon completion of this module you will be able to synchronise/adjust the measuring system for
the Sinumerik 840D sl controller.
Content:
Sinumerik
Referencing Incremental Encoders
Referencing Absolute Encoders
Machine Data Information
Automatic Referencing
A084
A084

Encoder Adjustment A084
Encoder
Adjustment:
START
Referencing
Incremental
Encoders
Referencing
Absolute
Encoders
Machine Data
Information
Automatic
Referencing
Encoder
Adjustment:
END
Notes

Referencing Incremental Encoders
General Information
Axes equipped with incremental encoders require referencing
each time that the NCK is powered off/on or reset.
This usually entails traversing the axis to a switch which then
initiates the referencing procedure. Certain machine data's are
available to influence this procedure and adjust it to individual
requirements.
Some axes have a second encoder fitted for positioning opera-
tions. It needs to be checked which measuring system is active,
as that will be the one which requires referencing.
To check which measuring system is active we can look at the
“Axis diagnostics” area.
Look for the “Measuring system 1 active” and “Measuring sys- If it is uncertain whether an axis has an incremental or abso-
tem 2 active”. A green tick symbol indicates which measuring lute encoder fitted, this can be checked via axis machine data
system is active for each axis., typically the motor encoder. A 30240.
2nd measuring circuit is typically a linear scale on an axis or an To check the machine data use the following soft key se-
encoder for a spindle. quence.
Some manufacturers may also switch between measuring sys-
tems. If there is uncertainty about this please contact the manu-
facturer for information.
Machine data 30240[0] & [1] can also be checked.
If the active measuring circuit is 1, machine data 30240[0]

should be used to identify the encoder type.
Ensure that the correct axis is selected.
Or should be used to identify the encoder type.
Incremental encoder = 1
Absolute encoder =4
To reference an axis fitted with an incremental encoder, an

interface signal needs to be switched high in the user PLC
program. This is usually done with a switch positioned at a
suitable place on the axis slide way.
During the reference procedure the axis will traverse towards
the switch, on activation of the switch the interface signal will
be set.
A sequence of axis moves will then take place which are con-
trolled by the NC and influenced by machine data.
(Further details are shown on the following pages)
Example of an axis reference switch input activating a refer-

ence point approach interface bit.
Notes

Before referencing can be initiated the controller needs to be

placed into Reference Mode by selecting the “REF.POINT”
button on the machine control panel. The LED should Illumi-
nate, the “JOG” mode LED remains illuminated.
Interface signal DB3x.DBX12.7 “Delay Ref. Pt approach” Confirmation that the correct mode is selected can be seen
needs to be set to high to initiate the referencing procedure. at the top of the screen.
Each axis has its own variable which is identified by chang-
ing the x for a numerical value which represents the axis,
see below-
1st axis - DB31.DBX12.7

2nd axis - DB32.DBX12.7
3rd axis - DB33.DBX12.7
etc.
The axis must now be moved in the direction of the refer-

ence switch. This can be done manually via the axis jog
keys or automatically if automatic referencing is set-up.
The direction of movement is set via machine data.
The axis should move uninterrupted towards the reference
switch. Some systems require that the jog direction button is
continually depressed throughout the reference cycle, it is
Each axis can be referenced individually. It is also possible more common to find that the axis will continue to move
to reference the axes automatically. This usually set up by even when the jog direction button is released.
the machine builder and will be explained in more detail later
in the module.
To reference an individual axis select the correct axis via the

machine control panel.
Notes

Referencing sequence diagram for incremental encoder
In the event of the values of machine data 34080 & 34090 equalling less than the stopping distance of the axis, the controller will
automatically readjust to the correct position.
34040 $MA_REFP_VELO_SEARCH_MARKER = 0
34080 $MA_REFP_MOVE_DIST + 34090 $MA_REFP_MOVE_DIST_CORR = > 0
Velocity
Reference point cam
switch activated
0 1
MD34020 Ref. point approach velocity
34070 Ref. point position velocity
MD34040 Ref. point search marker velocity
Position
Cam switch 1 0
Axis referenced. Marker pulse detected Reverse direction
The control receives a reference axis command, the axis accelerates to the feed-rate in machine data
34020 $MA_REFP_VELO_SEARCH_CAM then searches for the reference switch input to become high.
The reference switch is operated and the axis decelerates.
The axis reverses direction at the feed-rate set in machine data.

34040 $MA_REFP_VELO_SEARCH_MARKER.
Feed-rate as machine data 34040 $MA_REFP_VELO_SEARCH_MARKER.

Search for next reference marker
Reference marker is detected. The axis accelerates to the feed-rate set in

machine data 34070 $MA_REFP_VELO_POS to a position which is the sum of machine data 34080
$MA_REFP_MOVE_DIST and
34090 $MA_REFP_MOVE_DIST_CORR
Notes

When an axis is referenced the controller issues interface Referencing Absolute Encoders
signals:
General information
1st axis DB31.DBX60.4 1st measuring circuit is referenced Absolute encoders need referencing on first commissioning
1st axis DB31.DBX60.5 2nd measuring circuit is referenced and remain referenced until a problem occurs with encoder or
2nd axis DB32.DBX60.4 1st measuring circuit is referenced the NCK. Re loading of an archive will also necessitate the
2nd axis DB32.DBX60.5 2nd measuring circuit is referenced referencing of the encoder.
etc. Procedure:
First it must be ascertained that the encoder is of the absolute
type. This can be done by checking the motor data rating plate
The position display will indicate the axis is referenced and dis- (In the case of an integrated motor encoder)
play any values stored in machine data: Checking with the supplier of the encoder is another method
34100 $MA_REFP_SET_POS of determining the correct type.
Machine data 30240[0] & [1] can also be checked.

Symbol indicating the axis is referenced.
If the active measuring circuit is number 1, then the value of
machine data 30240[0] should be used to identify the encoder
type.

should be used to identify the encoder type.
Value from Axis MD 34100 The following values determine the encoder type:
Incremental encoder =1
Absolute encoder =4
Check that machine data 34200 ENC_REFP_MODE is set to 0

This enables the control to take over the value in machine data
34100 $MA_REFP_SET_POS.
Check that machine data 34210 ENC_REFP_STATE is set to
1. This is to enable encoder calibration to take place.
Check whether machine data

34010 REFP_CAM_DIR_IS_MINUS is set to 0 OR 1.
The procedure requires that the axis be moved to a know
mechanical position e.g. 150mm. Locate machine data
34100 $MA_REFP_SET_POS and enter 150.
Notes

The axis to be referenced should be moved to the known

mechanical position using “Jog” mode in the direction deter-
mined by the value of machine data:
34010 REFP_CAM_DIR_IS_MINUS.
A value of 0 and the approach will be in the positive direction,

a value of 1 will make the approach negative.
The feed rate when approaching this position should be re-
duced to avoid inaccuracies caused by backlash.
Before referencing can be initiated the controller needs to be

placed into Reference Mode by selecting the “REF.POINT”
button on the machine control panel. The LED should Illumi-
nate, the “JOG” mode LED remains illuminated.
Confirmation that the correct mode is selected can be seen at

the top of the screen. The A axis of the training equipment is fitted with an absolute
encoder.
Select the axis to be referenced and then press the same di-
rection key used to position the axis earlier.
The A axis of the training equipment is fitted with an absolute
encoder.
The axis will not physically move but the position display will
change to show the axis is referenced symbol and the refer-
ence point set position will be shown as the position of the
axis (150 mm).
Machine data 34210 will have changed to 2 to indicate a
successful procedure.
Notes

Machine Data Information

If the axis fails to reach the reference cam it is probably due
If a machine does not have reference switch cam it is possi- to machine data-34030 $MA_REFP_MAX_CAM_DIST
ble to reference from the zero mark by changing machine (Default value 10000 mm) This is the maximum distance to
data- 34000 $MA_REFP_CAM_IS_ACTIVE (Default value 1) the reference cam.
A value of 0 will deactivate the cam. The controller will issue alarm:-20000 Channel %1 axis %2
This is used for example on axes that have only one refer- reference cam not reached.
ence mark along the entire traversing range and rotary axes
that have only one reference mark per revolution. When the reference switch is activated the axis reverses di-
rection in search of the reference marker. This search speed
The direction that the axis approaches the reference switch is determined by machine data- 34040
can be changed by machine data- $MA_REFP_VELO_SEARCH_MARKER (Default value
34010 $MA_REFP_CAM_DIR_IS_MINUS (Default value 0) 300.0 mm/min).
The default value will result in the reference point approach in
a positive direction. To reverse the direction a value of 1 has The direction that the reference marker search direction is
to be entered. changed by machine data-
34050 $MA_REFP_SEARCH_MARKER_REVERSE
The initial approach speed for referencing is determined by (Default value 0)
machine data- 34020 $MA_REFP_VELO_SEARCH_CAM The default value cause the axis to search for the reference
(Default value 5000.0 mm/min) cam in the opposite direction to the direction specified in ma-
chine data 34010 $MA_REFP_CAM_DIR_IS_MINUS.
Entering a value of 1 in machine data 34050 will reverse the
cam search direction.
If the axis fails to reach the reference marker it is probably due

to machine data- 34090 $MA_REFP_MOVE_DIST_CORR (Default value 0.0
34060 $MA_REFP_MAX_MARKER_DIST (Default value 20 mm) This machine data is used to accurately set the position
mm) This is the maximum distance the axis can travel without and correct discrepancies caused by an encoder exchange or
finding the marker.. mechanical work.
The controller will issue alarm:-20002 Channel %1 axis %2 The values in machine data 34080 & 34090 are added togeth-
zero mark missing. er to determine the distance the axis moves.
When the marker is detected the axis will either stop or move Usually the position display shows zero after an axis has been
to a position determined by the values of two machine data referenced. This can be changed by machine data 34100
(34080 & 34090 see below for further explanation) $MA_REFP_SET_POS (Default value 0.0 mm)
The speed at which this position sought is determined by ma- The value entered in here will be displayed on the screen as
chine data- soon as referencing is complete.
34070 $MA_REFP_VELO_POS (Default value 10000.0 mm/ This is used when the reference position is not the mechanical
min). zero of the machine. The machine data does not result in the
axis physically moving.
34080 $MA_REFP_MOVE_DIST (Default value -2.0 mm).
Once the marker has been detected it is advisable to move
the axis away from the marker (Into the machining area). This
is achieved by putting a value in machine data 34080.
If the axis was asked to reference again while still on the
marker this could result in the axis going toward the end of the
slide.
Notes

A084 END Encoder Adjustment
Automatic Referencing
Automatic referencing cycle

To set the automatic referencing function it has to be decided
in what order you want the axes to referencing. It is common
for example that on a milling machine the Z axis needs to be
referenced first, this helps eliminate the chance of a collision.
The order is set by axis machine data
$MA_REFP_CYCLE_NR (Default 1)
Possible entries:-
0 = no referencing cycle participation.
1 to 15 = allowable range for setting the sequence.
-1 = no reference required for Cycle start.
Up to eight axes can be referenced at the same time.
To initiate the automatic cycle the necessary interface bit

(DB21.DBX1.0 ) has to be set.
Example of how the automatic referencing cycle can be initi-

ated:
Ref Mode active NC start request Activate

(Mode group 1) (Channel 1) referencing
(Channel 1)
Interface signal DB21.DBX33.0 changes to 1 while the

referencing cycle is active.
A084: END
Notes

A101 Servo Optimisation
Sinumerik
Operate
Module Description:
This module explains the step by step procedure to optimise the current, speed and position con-
troller loops within the Sinumerik 840D sl/ Sinamics S120.
The procedure uses the on-board functionality of the Sinumerik Operate system.
Module Objective:
To ensure the necessary level of compatibility and consistency between machines configured with
the Sinumerik 840D sl controller. A defined Optimisation procedure should be adhered to and this
procedure is defined in this module.
Caution: These procedures result in axis movement. All necessary safety precautions must be tak-
en into account. Make sure that that you read through and understand the entire procedure before
beginning.
Content:
Sinumerik
Introduction
Auto Servo Tuning
Axis Jerk
Utilisation
Circularity Test
Additional Spindle Optimisation
A101
A101

Servo Optimisation A101
Servo
Optimisation:
START
Introduction
Auto Servo
Tuning
Axis Jerk
Utilisation
Circularity
Test
Additional
Spindle
Optimisation
Servo
Optimisation:
END
Notes

Introduction Saving Drive settings
Activating Machine Data changes Every time the S120 drive is powered on or a “Drive Reset” is
performed, the S120 drive data is loaded to the relevant drive
Throughout this procedure, certain machine data changes need from a stored file. Therefore when drive machine data are
to be activated. To the right of each parameter value there is an altered, the drive data must be saved so that the change is
indication of how the particular change takes effect. The follow- retained after the next power off/on or “Drive Reset”.
ing is a list of these indications and their meaning. NOTE: An “NCK Reset” does not affect the drive data.
In order to save drive data:

In the “Drive MD” area, press the “Save/Reset” then the
po The relevant machine data requires an “NCK Reset” to “Save” then the “Drive System” soft-key. Messages at the bot-
take effect tom left of the screen indicate the status of the save process.
When the save process is complete, the message “All drive
re The relevant machine data requires activation of the objects backed up” appears.
“Reset” key to take effect
cf The relevant machine data requires activation of the
“Set MD active” softkey to take effect.
im The relevant machine data is immediately active.
Controller Block Diagram Auto Servo Tuning
840D sl/S120 controller structure: The 840D sl CNC and S120 Using the Automatic Servo Tuning feature we can optimize the
drive controller structure contain three cascaded closed loop current, speed and position controller loops, including velocity
controllers (current, speed and position). Each controller must feed forward.
be optimized in succession starting with the innermost current
controller, then the speed controller and finally the position Aim: To tune a single axis or spindle using HMI Sinumerik Oper-
controller. The machine dynamic limits for velocity, accelera- ate.
tion and jerk are set in the interpolator. The speed control loop
is always closed via the motor encoder while the position con-
trol loop can be closed via the motor encoder or direct meas-  Performing frequency response measurements
uring system.
 Calculation of speed control loop
SINUMERIK 840D PROFIBUS –DP DRIVE  Setting current setpoint filters
 Calculation of position control loop
 Checking the actual response of the proposed control

loops
 Feed forward control : equivalent speed control time
 Interpolation paths
Notes

Notes: To get to the Auto Servo Tuning feature press the “Menu Se-
lect” key followed by the “Setup” key. Then press “Optim./test”.
A second measuring circuit should be enabled if available.
Axis MD32640 Dynamic stiffness control is automatically

set to = 1 by default and by the Auto Servo Tune function.
This enables position control in a faster cycle time.
When using dynamic stiffness control, Axis MD32110
ENC_FEEDBACK_POL must be = 1.
If the feedback polarity needs to be inverted it must be done
in the Sinamics drive with p410.
p410[0] & [1] Encoder inversion actual value:

Bit 0: Invert speed actual value
Bit 1: Invert position actual value
Example: To invert the 2nd encoder speed and position actu-

al values - p410[1] = 3
If Auto Tuning a main spindle it is possible that the PLC ser-

vo enable signal is missing. The OEM should provide a
method of switching this PLC interface signal on for servo
tuning.
The default screen is the Auto Servo Tuning screen, if this is

not the case select the “Auto servo tuning” soft-key.
The default settings are for Single Pushbutton Tune with mini-
mum user interaction. The “Enable strategy selection during
tuning” checkbox is for expert use only.
The screen shows whether an axis has been tuned or not. A

tuned axis will have a time and date of the tuning displayed.
The following example shows the X axis has been selected.
Notes

Tuning Strategy: Speed Controller Settings:
It is possible to further influence the optimisation procedure by The important settings are: Tuning Aggressiveness and
making certain selections via the “Select Strategy” soft-key in Minimum integral time Tn
the initial tuning page prior to tuning.
Here it is possible to influence:

 Tuning Aggressiveness
 Minimum Integral Time
 Kv Factor (Position Controller)
 Feed Forward (FFW) Type
Custom Selections
Tuning Aggressiveness: Position Controller Settings:
This parameter determines the selection of Kp and Tn based

on stability margins.
Default = 0.5473
Min = 0 [most robust]
The important settings are: Kv (Position controller) reduc-
Max = 1 [most aggressive]
tion factor and Feed forward type.
Minimum integral time Tn:
This parameter prevents AST from setting the speed loop inte-
grator time too low.
When AST would otherwise have selected a value lower than
this parameter, the actual value used is limited to the value set
by the Minimum integral time Tn.
Default = 10.0 ms
Min = 0.5 ms
Max = 100 ms
Note: In cases where it is expected to have a higher inertia/

mass than is available at the time of tuning, then the Minimal
Integral Time (Tn) should be set to 10-20 ms.
Increasing the Tn time makes the axis less aggressive and
more robust.
Notes

Description of Position Controller Settings:
Kv reduction factor:
This parameter is like the aggressiveness of the position controller.

It applies specific reduction to the maximum Kv computed by AST.
The maximum Kv is the largest Kv that would result in zero position overshoot (with feedforward disabled).
Default = 0.6
Min = 0.1
Max = 1.0
Feed Forward Type:

Feed Forward (FFW) is used to minimise contour deviation (Increased accuracy)
The machine application requirements define the need for activating feed forward (FFW).
There are two types of Feed Forward available-Speed and Torque.
Torque FFW produces the highest accuracy.
When either type of Feed Forward is active the servo response becomes very dynamic, thus, jerk limited acceleration is al-
ways necessary to smooth the dynamic response.
The user must weigh the benefits of the higher contour accuracy when feed forward is active with the possible increased overall
acceleration time (Slower machining cycle times) when jerk limited acceleration is used.
Speed or Torque Feed Forward:

With Speed FFW, it is probable that the contour deviation is already quite low during acceleration because of the use of jerk
limitation. With Torque Feed Forward the contour deviation is always low and is the preferred choice.
One problem with Torque FFW can be any changes in axis inertia, i.e. due to a different mass being placed on a machining
table of the moving type.
During Torque FFW the system anticipates the amount of current required using MD 32650 AX_INERTIA, if the axis inertia
changes, this will be wrong.
However, Torque FFW is still better than Speed FFW, even if the inertia is up to 50% incorrect.
Torque FFW is optimal where the axis inertia does not change e.g. on a fixed base style of machine
On a moving table style of machine you can make a compromise by using the mass of a typical test piece and fixture .
Machine and Drive Data for Speed/Torque FFW:
Speed Torque
Data Description
FFW FFW
P922
IF1 Profidrive telegram selection
Each 116/136 136
(Default =136 at V4.5, must match MD13060)
drive
13060
[0]...[x] Drive Telegram Type
116/136 136
General (Default =136 at V4.5, must match P922)
MD
32620
FFW Mode
[0]...[x] 3 4
(Set by Auto Servo Tune)
Axis MD
Notes

Starting the Auto Servo Tune (AST) Function: After pressing “OK” a dialogue box will appear requesting the
user to press cycle start button on the machine control panel.
The Auto Servo Tune can now be started.
Check that the axis to be tuned is in a safe position, if it is not
“Jog” axis to the middle of its travel. Press “OK” to accept.
Various screens will be displayed as the Auto Servo Tune When the tuning is complete the following screen will be dis-
procedure continues. played allowing the new and original values to reviewed.
Cycle start will be required on several occasions. This example is of the Position Controller.
Notes

The Speed controller settings can also be viewed The new values will be used if the “Accept” soft-key is select-
ed.
Example: Speed controller settings for review. The dialogue box warns that the remaining axes must be
tuned in order to achieve proper interpolation results.
The time and date of the tuning will now be shown: Interpolating Axes:
Interpolation means that the axes performing the contour need

to have the same following error.
After single axis tuning each axis has different controller set-
tings that are optimal for that axis.
To ensure an equal following error the controller settings have

to be adapted to suit the least responsive axis; this includes
The remaining axes should now be tuned in the same way the Kv factor and Feed Forward. (The parameters chosen for
the interpolating axes can be seen on the next page)
Now the axis selection can be made for the tuning of the inter-
polation paths. Select the “Interp. path” soft-key.
Notes

The axes that will be interpolating together now have to be Strategy Description:
assigned to the Channel 1 path
Maximal matching:
Effective Kp are matched
Kp can be reduced to up to 10% of original value.
Feed axis Kp is not reduced to match a lower effective value of
the main spindle
Main spindle Kp is not reduced to match a lower effective Kp
of a feed axis.
The interpolation path strategy can now be decided, the default Moderate matching:
is “1103 Reduce stand alone optimal regulators with partial Effective Kp are matched.
matching” Kp can be reduced to up to 50% of original value.
Feed axis Kp is not reduced to match a lower effective value of
the main spindle.
Main spindle Kp is not reduced to match a lower effective Kp of
a feed axis.
Partial matching:
Effective Kp are NOT matched.
Custom matching:
The user can now use the lower selection box to customize the
interpolation path strategy.
General settings for path interpolation of axes:
Dynamic Stiffness Control (DSC) will be enabled or disabled

in all axes. Allows higher Position Controller gains (Kv factor)
when enabled. Press the “Edit and tune” soft-key.
Feed forward:
If all axes have been tuned with torque FFW, then this setting
will remain for path interpolation.
If FFW_Mode is mixed (3 or 4), then FFW_MODE=3 will be set
for all axes. Select the axes that can interpolate together.
If one axis has been tuned without FFW, then all axes will be The following example shows X, Y, Z and the Spindle having
set to FFW_MODE=0 being selected.
Speed set point filters: Finds limiting time constant

Calc. Kp/inertia for later adaption of axes.
Tn will be matched in all axes.
Reference model (speed ctrl.) will be matched.
Kv-factor will be recalculated, lowest set for all axes.
Equiv. Time will be recalculated, largest set for all axes.
AX_JERK-Filter disabled
DYN_MATCH_TIME disabled
Kv (Position Control Gain) will always be matched !
Notes

Select the required strategy and continue with the “OK” soft-
key.
The new settings will now be calculated and offered for review.
Press the “Accept” soft-key. Auto Servo Tuning is now complete.
Further checks and setting are required to fully optimise the

drives. These are described in the remainder of the document.
Axis Jerk Jerk limiting is active when “SOFT” is programmed and de-
activated when “BRISK” is programmed.
After AST is completed the axis acceleration should be “SOFT” mode is set as the default reset state via channel MD
set to the machine tool builders requirement (a check is 20150[20] = 2.
made later during torque utilization testing). It is recommended to use “SOFT” as the default reset value.
The procedure that follows is for fine tuning controller settings
and preventing vibration by limiting the Jerk. Fine tuning will If channel MD 20150[20] = 1, "BRISK" mode is active as a
be a compromise of accuracy on the component and machin- default on power up, (acceleration without jerk limit).
ing time. If channel MD 20150[20] = 2, "SOFT" mode is active as a de-
fault on power up, (acceleration with jerk limit).
Jerk limited acceleration can now be optimized using the HMI
Operate Trace function.
Example: Effect of Jerk on acceleration curve.
Jerk is used to smooth the acceleration response by applying
a time for the change in acceleration.
Jerk is also used to prevent vibration and also to prevent the Blue: without
mechanics from shock. If there is a positioning overshoot to Jerk Limited
reduce via Jerk it is caused by a mechanical response. acceleration
Jerk is defined in units/sec3, i.e. acceleration ([units/sec2 / Red: with jerk

time [sec]). The time it takes for the acceleration change to Limited
take place, [sec] = acceleration [units/s2] / jerk [units/s3]. acceleration
Axes do not have to have the same Jerk value.
The result of jerk-limited acceleration is rounded corners at

the start and end of the acceleration phase of the velocity
profile and smoothed motion.
Notes

Positioning Response: The program contains commands for activating/deactivating

The positioning response of the axis can be checked using the trace trigger:
the HMI Operate trace tool and a commanded position step
via part program at different feed-rates. FFWON
In cases where a direct scale is used, the actual slide re- SOFT
sponse can easily be viewed. $AN_SLTRACE=0; Reset start servo trace trigger
In cases where the motor encoder is used to close the posi- LAB:
tion loop (indirect feedback), the actual response of the slide G01 Y-110 F10000
is not visible to the closed loop or the trace tool. G04 F0.5
On machines with 840D sl in general jerk values will be be- $AN_SLTRACE=1; Start servo trace trigger
tween 20 and 100. Y-160
G04 F0.5
There is no need to reach the programmed feed-rate. If we GOTOB LAB
are looking for mechanical vibration then quite often small
distances (e.g. 3 to 10mm) have more excitation and act more Machine Data:
like a worst case. To check the mechanical behaviour without the influence of
A dwell time should be used after the set-point position is the position controller, the Servo Gain Factor (Position Con-
reached, e.g. 0.5 second. trol Gain) should be set to 0.
The initial programmed velocity can be approximately ½ of
the maximum axis velocity and the response should be Positioning tolerances should opened up to prevent errors
checked at all of the feed-rate override increments as well as during the test.
the maximum speed.
MD 32200 POSCTRL_GAIN = 0
Part Program For Jerk Test: MD 36012 STOP_LIMIT_FACTOR = 100
The test part program should traverse the axis backwards and MD 36400 CONTOUR_TOL = 20
forwards.
The following NC program can be used in Automatic or MDA
mode.
This may be different depending on the configuration of the
actual machine.
Selecting the Trace Signals:
A trace of the Set and Actual Position values is required. Use

the following key sequence to reach the trace screen:.
The filter search function can be used to find the signal:
The required variables can now be selected:
Notes

The first signal required is the position set-point: The selected variable will now appear in the list:
The second signal required is the position actual value of the

active measuring system:
The axis needs to be selected, e.g. Y axis:
In the following example the trace will be started via a com-

mand from a part program:
The trigger variable can be easily selected via the “Quick list”
soft-key:
Select the $AN_SLTRACE==1 option.

It is also possible to trigger the trace from a value taken from
the previously selected signals or from one of the many system
variables available via the “Choose variable” soft-key.
Trace Duration and Trigger Conditions:
The trace can be started manually or automatically. The du-

ration of the trace can also be set:
Notes

The trace will last for 5 seconds as indicated below: Starting/Initialising the Trace:
The trace is started/initialised via the “Start trace” soft-key.

This will depend on the selection made on the “Settings”
screen.
In our example the trace will be started via a command from the
part program.
Select the “Start trace” soft-key to initialise the trace:
The trace is now initialised and will be started when the trigger
is set via the part program.
Viewing the Trace Results: Scaling the Trace:
Start the previously entered program: It is necessary to view the part of the trace where the axis
arrives at the set position. In order to see this in detail it is
necessary to scale the trace:
The axis will move and the selected signals will be monitored
for 5 seconds, the results will then be displayed: The following example shows the scaling set up to view the
axis positioning at -110mm.
The values entered will give a 100 micron window around the
target position of -110mm.
Individual machines/axes may require different scaling.
Notes

Optimising the Jerk:
It is necessary to set the Jerk so that there is no overshoot of

the actual position. This caused by a jerk value that is too high.
Having a Jerk value that is too low can also be detrimental to
the machine as this effects the time it takes to position an axis.
Without the position controller the axis positions with no over-

shoot.
The remaining positioning error exists because the position
controller is switched off and the axis is moving with just feed
forward signals.
Any overshoot when coming into position comes from the me-
chanics and can be eliminated using jerk limitation.
The following examples show the effect that different Jerk val-
ues have on the positioning of an axis.
It is first necessary to check the following machine data:
MD 32200 POSCTRL_GAIN = 0
MD 32610 VELO_FFW_WEIGHT = 1.0
MD 32620 FFW_MODE = 3 or 4
MD 32810 EQUIV_SPEEDCTRL_TIME = As Auto Tuned
The set position (Yellow) and the actual position (Green) do
not match, this is because the position controller is not active.
Example: Jerk too high This diagram shows how the jerk is increased until there is an
overshoot in the response of the mechanics.
To adjust the Jerk, Axis Machine Data 32431 is used.
Remove the overshoot by decreasing the MAX_AX_JERK.
MD 32431 MAX_AX_JERK = 600
Restart the part program:
Start the trace:
Notes

Example: Jerk too low Positioning with feed forward and position controller ac-
MD 32431 MAX_AX_JERK = 2 tive:
With the Jerk too low the positioning contour will be rounded. When the Jerk has been optimised the position controller
needs to be activated as well as Feed Forward.
Adjust the Machine Data where necessary:
MD 32200 POSCTRL_GAIN = As optimised

MD 32610 VELO_FFW_WEIGHT = 1.0
MD 32620 FFW_MODE = 3 or 4
MD 32810 EQUIV_SPEEDCTRL_TIME = As optimised
MD 20150[23] =2 Feed Forward can then be enabled as a

Example: Jerk optimised default.
MD 36012 STOP_LIMIT_FACTOR = original value
With the Jerk optimised there is little or no overshoot and the MD 36400 CONTOUR_TOL = original value
positioning contour is square.
Example:
Good positioning without overshoot when feed forward and
jerk are correctly optimized:
Notes

Utilisation
If allowed by the machine builder, MD 32300 can be set so that
Utilisation is directly affected by the acceleration. the torque utilization during the acceleration phase of the worst
case load and velocity lies between 80% and 90% of the limit
Checking the maximum axis acceleration: depending on how much safety factor is desired.
The torque utilization under worst-case load and velocity con-
ditions should be checked after the Kv factor and Feed For-
ward have been optimized to be sure that the torque limit is The "Servo trace" start up tool is used to measure the velocity
not reached. actual value of the relevant active measuring system and the
torque utilization percentage via the “Utilization (m_set/
Maximum axis acceleration: Axis MD 32300 defines the m_set_limit)” trace signal. When the “Utilization (m_set/
maximum axis acceleration. The default value is [1 m/sec 2 m_set_limit)” trace signal =100%, the drive is on current limit!
(metric), 39.37 in/sec2 (inch) and 2.77 rev/sec2 (rotary)]. Each
axis can have a different acceleration setting.
A test part program should traverse the axis a sufficient dis-
Important! Machine mechanics limit the maximum axis tance that allows the programmed rapid velocity to be reached,
acceleration. The machine builder must define the re- e.g. 300 mm.
quired setting value! If not defined, the default value
should be used unless the machine builder authorizes an
increase.
If the acceleration value is changed it is necessary to re-

evaluate the jerk settings.
Program for checking the utilization: The three traces will be displayed together, select the “Fit all”
soft-key.
SOFT
$AN_SLTRACE=0; Reset start servo trace trigger
LAB:
G0 X10
$AN_SLTRACE=1; Start servo trace trigger
X310
GOTOB LAB
M30
Select the following signals for monitoring:

Velocity actual value meas. System 2
Utilization (m_set/m_set_limit)
Torque prod curr. Act val. i(q)
Notes

It is necessary to know the maximum values of the 3 traces.

Select the “Cursors” soft-key and position them on each of the
traces in order to read the maximum values..
Velocity:
Cursor positioned at the top of

Trace selection the trace shows that the
maximum velocity reached was
36 m/min.
It is necessary to know the maximum values of the 3 traces.

Select the “Cursors” soft-key and position them on each of the
traces in order to read the maximum values..
Utilization: Current:
Cursor positioned at the top of Cursor positioned at the top of

Trace selection the trace shows that the Trace selection the trace shows that the
utilization maximum reached maximum current reached was
was 58.52% 10.53A
Notes

Summary:
The maximum velocity of 36 m/min is reached with a utilization of 58.52%.
The “Utilization (m_set/m_set_limit)” signal selection displays the utilized percentage of the active current limit.
The active current limit is: P0640 = [RMS amps].
P0640 is limited to whichever is the lower of P0338 Motor Limit Current/ Mot I Max [RMS amps] or r0209 Power Unit Maximum
Current/ PU I Max [RMS amps]
In this example P0640 was 18A, therefore utilization is: 18A x 58.52/100 = 10.53A.
Note: This test was done on a milling machine Y axis with a dividing head on the table. The 58% utilisation allows for additional
weight to be added without causing problems. Utilisation should be kept to 85% maximum. The acceleration can be changed to
affect the utilisation.
If the acceleration value is changed then the jerk must be rechecked.
Circularity Test
The “built-in” circularity test of HMI Operate is used to check the interpolation of axes that will work together. The tool
measures a circle with reference to the motor or direct measuring system. Machine mechanical alignment is not considered in
the result. This gives the commissioning engineer the ability to clearly separate controller Optimization issues from mechanical
issues.
Axis MD32200, MD32400, MD32402, MD32410, MD32490, MD32500, MD32510, MD32520, MD32540, MD32620, MD32640,
MD32810, MD32900, MD32910, MD32930, MD32940 and drive P1421 to P1426, P1400, P1433, P1434 are checked via this
procedure.
The following positional error compensations should be switched off when this procedure is carried out. Backlash Comp
MD32450, Encoder Comp MD32700, CEC Comp MD32710, Temperature Comp MD32750, Friction Comp MD32500.
Note: Backlash MD32450 must be adjusted using an external device e.g. ball bar or dial gauge.
The best overall contouring results are achieved when the circle test results in the correct actual size, shape and minimum p/p
deviation between combinations of interpolating axis, (X-Y, X-Z, Y-Z).
A circle test part program and the circularity test start up tool can be used to measure and evaluate these results. The “worst
case” test circle radius and path feed rate must result in a realistic radial acceleration that the machine is capable of. Machine
builders typically have specifications for test circle radius and feedrate.
Standard machine builder circle tests typically use a radius of 100 mm or 150 mm at feed rates determined by the machine build-
er. The machine builder defines the acceptable result specifications.
High speed cutting requirements are usually more stringent and test circles for high speed cutting machines might be in the range
of 10 to 25 mm radius at feed rates of 5 m/min to 10 m/min. For high speed cutting machines, the results are normally accepta-
ble when the p/p deviation </= 0.010 mm, and the actual size is equal to the programmed radius at the worst case path feedrate.
Example of an X-Y circle part program –

Position, feedrate and active plane must be adapted to the machine!
FFWON
SOFT
G90 G01 F3000 X150 Y50 Z-100
LAB:
G91 G64 G02 X0 Y0 I10
GOTOB LAB
M30
Notes

Select “Optim./test”. Select the “Circular. Test” soft-key.
Setting the “Circularity test” parameters: The example program should first be modified to fit the ma-
Set the desired measuring parameters to match the pro- chine positions, feed rates and plane if necessary. The ex-
grammed circle: ample program uses circular interpolation and runs the pro-
grammed circle continuously. Follow the specific machine
Measurement: Select the relevant axes and the “active” procedures to run the test part program.
measuring system.
Important: The circularity test must be activated manually by
Parameter: Enter the programmed radius and feed rate. The pressing the "Start" soft-key after the test program is started.
multiplier should remain at 1.
Resolution: Set the resolution as desired, e.g. 0.010 mm/grad
Representation: Select “Mean radius”.
Notes

The machine data below are from an actual machine which The circle below shows the results after feed forward has been
was used for the following circularity test examples optimized however the mean radius is 0.0019mm too large.
Data Description X Y
32200 POSCTRL_GAIN 8.50 8.50
P1460 SPEEDCTRL_GAIN1 3.01 3.89
P1462 SPEEDCTRL_INTEGRATOR_TIME_1 6.18 6.18
P1433 SPEEDCTRL_REF_MODEL_FREQ 106.3 106.3
P1440 NUM_SPEED_FILTERS 0 0
32610 VELO_FFW_WEIGHT 1.0 1.0
32620 FFW_MODE (Speed or Torque) 3 or 4 3 or 4
32810 EQUIV_SPEEDCTRL_TIME 0.0022 0.0022
32400 AX_JERK_ENABLE 0 0
As a general rule, with feed forward optimised, the actual radi-

us will be too large.
This can be corrected using a time constant
(MD32410 AX_JERK_TIME)
If necessary enable the time constant in all axes.
The circle size is now corrected using MD32410 The circle is now just 0.00021 mm oversize.
AX_JERK_TIME
The jerk time should be enabled and the jerk mode selected:
It is recommended to use MD32402 AX_JERK_MODE =2
A Power on Reset is required to activate the new setting.
Data Description X Y
32200 POSCTRL_GAIN 8.50 8.50
P1460 SPEEDCTRL_GAIN1 3.01 3.89
P1462 SPEEDCTRL_INTEGRATOR_TIME_1 6.18 6.18
P1433 SPEEDCTRL_REF_MODEL_FREQ 106.3 106.3
P1440 NUM_SPEED_FILTERS 0 0
32610 VELO_FFW_WEIGHT 1.0 1.0
32620 FFW_MODE (Speed or Torque) 3 or 4 3 or 4
32810 EQUIV_SPEEDCTRL_TIME 0.0022 0.0022
32400 AX_JERK_ENABLE 1 1
32402 AX_JERK_MODE 2 2
32410 AX_JERK_TIME 0.012 0.012
Notes

If the jerk time of interpolating axes is different, the circle In some situations different jerk values can be used to correct
shape will be affected. circle errors.
Data Description X Y Data Description X Y

32400 AX_JERK_ENABLE 1 1 32400 AX_JERK_ENABLE 1 1
32402 AX_JERK_MODE 2 2 32402 AX_JERK_MODE 2 2
32410 AX_JERK_TIME 0.015 0.012 32410 AX_JERK_TIME 0.012 0.0125
Notes

Additional Spindle Optimization
Check Preset MD as below also any relevant parameter for spindle/axis interpolation.
Example is for 8000 rpm Spindle Motor with no mechanical gear ranges.
The following parameters can be pre-set to the suggested values in the charts below. The values will vary depending upon the
application.
Machine Machine Data Name Value Explanation
Data
MD 30300 IS_ROT_AX 1 Rotary axis/spindle
MD 30310 ROT_IS_MODULO 1 Modulo conversion for rotary axis/spindle
MD 30320 DISPLAY_IS_MODULO 1 Modulo 360 degree display for rotary axis/spindle
MD 32000 MAX_AX_VELO[0] 8000 Max axis velocity
MD 32010 JOG_VELO_RAPID 60 Traverse rate in rapid jog
MD 32020 JOG_VELO 10 Traverse rate in jog
MD 32040 JOG_REV_VELO_RAPID 60 Rotary traverse rate in rapid jog
MD 32050 JOG_REV_VELO 10 Rotary traverse rate in jog
MD 32200 POSCTRL_GAIN[0] x As optimized
MD 32200 POSCTRL_GAIN[1] x As optimized
MD 32620 FFW_MODE 3 or 4 3 = Velocity FFW, Torque FFW = 4
MD 32640 STIFFNESS_CONTROL_ENABLE 1 Dynamic Stiffness Control
MD 32810 EQUIV_SPEEDCTRL_TIME[0] x As optimized
MD 32810 EQUIV_SPEEDCTRL_TIME[1] x As optimized
MD 34000 REFP_CAM_IS_ACTIVE 0 If no bero switch
MD 34020 REFP_VELO_SEARCH_CAM 30 Reference point approach velocity
MD 34040 REFP_VELO_SEARCH_MARKER[0] 30 Creep velocity
MD 34040 REFP_VELO_SEARCH_MARKER[1] 30
MD 34060 REFP_MAX_MARKER_DIST[0] 370 Maximum distance to reference mark
MD 34060 REFP_MAX_MARKER_DIST[1] 370
MD 33000 FIPO_TYPE 3 Type of interpolator
MD 35000 SPIND_ASSIGN_TO_MACHAX 1 Assignment of spindle to machine axis
MD 35100 SPIN_VELO_LIMIT 8000 Maximum spindle speed
MD 35110 GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO[0] 8000 Maximum spindle speed for gear change
MD 35110 GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO[1] 8000
MD 35130 GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT[0] 8000 Maximum spindle speed for gear stage
MD 35130 GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT[1] 8000
MD 35200 GEAR_STEP_SPEEDCTRL_ACCEL[0] X Acceleration in speed control mode ;to be optimized
MD 35200 GEAR_STEP_SPEEDCTRL_ACCEL[1] X
MD 35210 GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL[0] X Acceleration in position control mode ;to be optimized
MD 35210 GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL[1] X
MD 35500 SPIND_ON_SPEED_AT_IPO_START 2 Feedrate enable for spindle in the set range
MD 35550 DRILL_VELO_LIMIT[0] 4000 Maximum spindle speed for tapping
MD 35550 DRILL_VELO_LIMIT[1] 4000
MD 36000 STOP_LIMIT_COARSE 0.4 In position course limit
MD 36010 STOP_LIMIT_FINE 0.1 In position fine limit
MD 36030 STANDSTILL_POS_TOL 5 Standstill tolerance
MD 36040 STANDSTILL_DELAY_TIME 1 Delay for standstill monitoring
MD 36050 CLAMP_POS_TOL 1 Clamping tolerance
MD 36060 STANDSTILL_VELO_TOL 2 Tolerance for “Axis/spindle” stopped
MD 36200 AX_VELO_LIMIT[0] 8800 Threshold for velocity monitoring
MD 36200 AX_VELO_LIMIT[1] 8800
MD 36300 ENC_FREQ_LIMIT[0] 1000000 Encoder limit frequency
MD 36300 ENC_FREQ_LIMIT[1] 1000000
MD 36400 CONTOUR_TOL 30 Tolerance band for contour monitoring
P 1433 SPEED_CONTROLLER_REFERENCE x As optimized
_MODEL_NATURAL_FREQUENCY
Notes

A check should now be made of the speed control acceleration.

Firstly identify the acceleration time without any influence by the NC.
Set MD: 35200 [0]$MA_GEAR_STEP_SPEEDCTRL_ACCEL = 9999 ( t=V/a t=9000/60s/9999 t=15ms therefore no influence).
35200 [1]$MA_GEAR_STEP_SPEEDCTRL_ACCEL = 9999
Now look at the motor data sheet. E.g. 1PH8089-1VM02-0MG1 asynchronous motor:
Acceleration/deceleration with the original motor data equates to

the S1 curve.
P640 Current limit 17.7 A

(P305 rated motor current x1,5)
P1520 Torque limit upper/motoring 4.8 Nm
P1521 Torque limit lower/regenerative -4.8 Nm
P1530 Power limit motoring 1.5 KW
P1531 Power limit regenerating -1.5 KW
Locate the trace screen:

Required Variables:
Speed actual value motor

Active power
Torque prod curr. Act. Val i(q)
Torque set point (Limited)
Ensure that the Spindle is selected when adding the variables:
The required variables can now be selected:
Notes

When the trace function is complete select the “Fit all” soft-
key:
Enter a program in MDA.
S8000 M03
G04 F5
M30
Initialize the trace and then run the part program:
The cursors are used to determine the acceleration time: The power taken/available to accelerate the motor can be
viewed on trace 2:
Trace selection:
Active power
Time taken to accelerate to

Trace selection: commanded speed
Actual speed = 2.5 seconds
Maximum available power

=1.5Kw = S1 curve.
Cursors positioned at
beginning of trace and at the
point where the commanded
speed is reached.
Notes

The torque set-point can be viewed on trace 4: Acceleration/deceleration can now be modified by using the
motor data sheet, up to the maximum values, however this
depends upon the application.
Trace selection:
Torque set-point
Enter the values to suit the application. In this case short ac-
celeration/deceleration time was the requirement.
The maximum values from the motor data sheet are entered
into the relevant Drive Data:
P640 Current limit 32 A

P1520 Torque limit upper/motoring 20.7 Nm
P1521 Torque limit lower/regenerative -20.7 Nm
P1530 Power limit motoring 13 KW
P1531 Power limit regenerating -13 KW
Torque set-point
=4.8 Nm = S1 curve.
Run the spindle and trace function.

The time taken to accelerate to the commanded speed can
now be checked.
Trace selection:
Actual speed
Acceleration = 0.795 seconds
Adjust MD:
35200[0] & [1] $MA_GEAR_STEP_SPEEDCTRL_ACCEL to
give the machine tool builders requirement for spindle acceler-
ation.
Notes

Spindle Position Controller The following singles need to be selected on the Trace screen:
A test can now also be made to set up the position control ac- Position setpoint (64 bit)
celeration and jerk by doing a test with solid tapping. Position actual value meas. System (64 bit)
Contour deviation (64 bit)
Load (m_set/m_set, limit) (64 bit)
Check MD 35550 [0] & [1] DRILL_VELO_LIMIT, this is the
maximum speed for tapping. Note: When monitoring measuring systems, ensure that the
correct signal is selected i.e. measuring system 1 or 2.
Check SD 55484 $SCS_DRILL_TAPPING_SET_MC[0]=1, this
keeps the spindle in positioning mode during tapping.
The following program can be used which will tap 10 holes in

the same position.
SUPA D0 G0 G90 Z-200
FFWON
M19
SOFT
LAB:
G331 Z-214 S4000 K1
G332 Z-200 S4000 K1
REPEAT LAB P=9
M30
Select the trace trigger etc., via the “Settings” soft-key. Start the trace and press “Cycle Start” on the machine control
The example shows the trace triggered when the actual posi- panel.
tion goes above 5 degrees. The trace will record for 10 sec-
onds.
In the example below, utilization is reaching 64% and therefore

the position control acceleration can be increased. However
during tapping the spindle maybe operating above the S1 curve
and so it must be ensured that utilization does not reach 100%
otherwise “Contour monitoring” alarms will appear.
Optimize 35210 $MA_GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL and

32431 $MA_MAX_AX_JERK for optimum results
Also check p1464, p1465 adaptive control range for spindle.
Notes

A101 END Servo Optimisation
The following example shows the effect of increasing the posi-

tion control acceleration from 120 to 160, the utilisation then
increased from 64% to 88%.
If the application is purely a tapping machine a test can be

made to tap 100 holes and then servo trace can be repeated
to make sure utilisation never reaches 100%.
Acceleration = 64%
Acceleration = 88%
A101: END
Notes

A016 Additional Axis Installation
Sinumerik
Operate
Module Description:
A common requirement is for a standard machine to be fitted with an additional axis.

This requirement usually arises after the machine has left the factory.
This module describes the procedure for adding an additional axis to a 3 axis + spindle milling ma-
chine while keeping the original settings intact and takes the form of a running example.
Module Objective:
Upon completion of this module you will be able to retrofit an axis to a running system.
Content:
Sinumerik
Options and Licensing
Adding the Additional Axis
A016
A016

Additional Axis Installation A016
Additional Axis
Installation:
START
Options and
Licensing
Adding the
Additional
Axis
Additional Axis
Installation:
END
Notes

Options and licensing
Any additional axes may need to be licensed to check whether

the licence already exists go to the licence screen:
The new axis can also be named accordingly.
It may be necessary to obtain a new licence if the current one

does not allow further axis expansion.
To activate the machine data a “Reset (po)” procedure is re-

quired.
The new axis also needs to be added in the channel machine

data area.
Configuring the Additional Axis The axes have been assigned to the drives in the following
way:
To replicate a standard 3 axes + spindle milling machine, the
drive configuration has been changed so that the only the X axis Double motor module 1, 1st drive.
double axis modules are used. Y axis Double motor module 1, 2nd drive
The single axis module that was previously used for the spin- Z axis Double motor module 2, 1st drive.
dle will now become the additional axis. Spindle Double motor module 2, 2nd drive.
The 3 axis + spindle DriveCLiQ configuration can be seen
below: When the new hardware is connected and powered reapplied,
the system will detect the new hardware and issue an alarm.
In order to keep the original Sinamics drive settings (Bico’s)

intact, the topology recognition process for the drives should
not be carried out. This action will reset the Bico’s to factory
status.
Instead, the function is available where the extra hardware
can be manually added.
Notes

When the new hardware is fitted and the controller powered The procedure is carried out using the Start-up Tool.
up, the system will detect the extra hardware and issue an
alarm. Run the Start-up tool:
Configuration with the additional axis can be seen below:
Ignore error 201416 which indicates that the system has

detected an additional component.
To add the new component use the following procedure:
The new hardware is displayed in red:
The new components and component numbers are displayed
Notes

The new drive has to be assigned to the correct NC axis
Select the new axis
Or
Select the axis from the “Setpoint” drop-down menu.
To complete the assignment an NCK power off/on is required.
The axis will automatically be selected for the “Actual value”.
Notes

The axis assignment function results in certain machine data

for the axis being set. This is normally enough for the axis to
be tested.
Testing will only be possible if the PLC interface signals for

the new axis are set.
Interface signals required for this example:
DB35.DBX1.5 Activate 1st measuring system

DB35.DBX2.1 Controller enable
DB35.DBX21.7 Pulse enable
A full list of interface signals is available in Appendix C.
Optimisation procedures should also be carried out on the

axis.
A016: END
Notes

A016 END Additional Axis Installation

A102 Tool Management
Sinumerik
Operate
Module Description:
This module explains step by step the installation of Tool Management on a turning machine and
on a milling machine.
Module Objective:
After working through this module you will be capable of commissioning Tool Management on a
turning machine and on a milling machine.
Content:
Sinumerik
Fundamentals
User Interface PLC - NCK
Machine data for Tool Management
Magazine Configuration
Tool load / unload
Tool change sequence
HMI customization
Tool change with a turret
840D sl SINUMERIK Operate V4.5 Page 1

A102

Tool management A102
Tool Management:
START
Fundamentals
User Inter-
face
PLC - NCK
Machine data
for Tool Ma-
nagement
Magazine
Configuration
Load / Unload
Tool change
sequence
Customizing
the Tool Ma-
nagement
HMI
Tool change
with turret
Tool Management:
END
Notes

A102 Tool management
Fundamentals
Software Requirements
 840D sl Sinumerik Operate SW 4.5

 Toolbox 840D sl SW 4.5
 STEP7 5.5
 Start-up-Tool 7.7
Options
 “Tool Management, more than 3 Magazines“

Order Nr. 6FC5800-0AM88-0YB0
Tool Management Start up sequence
1. Tools/Software installation
2. Load the machine data
3. Magazine configuration
4. Tool load/unload
5. Tool change sequence
6. HMI modifications
Notes

Tool Management Checklist
Tool management functions Remarks
Define new tool /Multitool

Tool load
Tool unload
Tool relocate
Position Magazine
Define a new tool directly in the magazine
Define a new tool directly in the spindle
Delete a tool in the magazine
Delete a tool in the spindle
Relocate the tool in the spindle

Position a Multitool
Prepare tool change
Tool change
Do tool change with a fixed location tool
Do tool change with a hand tool

Do tool change with a Multitool
Reset during tool change
Emergency Stop during tool change
Main switch during tool change
Tool recovery functions
Tool change after block search
Tool change during Simulation
Tool change in Program Test
Tool change in Inch und Metric
Tool change in T,S,M
Tool change during *Measure Tool* function
Notes

Notes

Tool manangement
Magazine configuration
Magazine (9999)
Location (2)
Magazin (2)
LP2
Location (1...n)
Reference (2, 1) etc.
CL
Magazine (9998) Gr2

Location (3) Magazine (1)
Sp Location (1...n)
Reference (1, 1) etc.
Location (1) Gr1
Location (2)
LP1
Magazine (9999)
Location (1)
Magazine 1, 2 Real magazines CL Change Location

e.g. chain, turret, box magazine LP1 Loading Position 1 (Spindle/Manual)
Magazine 9998 Buffer magazine LP2 Loading Position 2 (Magazine)
Magazine 9999 Loading magazine Sp Spindle
Gr1 Gripper 1
Gr2 Gripper 2
Notes

Tool Load
Tool list
Do not permit create tool
on magazine location
MD52270.0=1
New Tool/
Load Multitool
“MILLING_10”
“Face_Mill_20”
New Tool/
Multitool Load Magazine -> PLC
“MULTITOOL_1”
Magazine
Move magazine/Tool
to load position
Spindle Load Spindle -> PLC
Load/unload tool
to/from spindle disa-
bled MD52270.3=1
Gripper Load Spindle -> PLC
Enable loading/
relocating of tools on
buffer SD54215.10=1
Load
“Turning_Tool_1”
Load Multitool
Multitool
-> No order to PLC
New Tool
Notes

Tool Unload
Tool list
Delete Tool/
Unload Multitool
“MILLING_10”
“Face_Mill_20”
Delete Tool/
Multitool Unload Magazine -> PLC
“MULTITOOL_1”
Magazine
Move magazine/Tool
to load position
Spindle Unload Spindle -> PLC
Load/unload tool
to/from spindle disa-
bled MD52270.3=1
Gripper Unload Spindle -> PLC
Enable loading/
buffer SD54215.10=1
Unload
Unload Multitool
Multitool
-> No order to PLC
Delete Tool
Notes

Tool Relocate
Magazine
Hide relocate tool
MD52270.8=1
Relocate
“Face_Mil_20”
“MULTITOOL_1”
Magazine location Relocate -> PLC
Move magazine/Tool
to load position
Relocate
“Face_Mil_20”
Spindle Relocate -> PLC
“MULTITOOL_1”
Gripper Relocate -> PLC
Enable loading/
buffer SD54215.10=1
Notes

Position magazine
Magazine
Hide position maga-
zine MD52270.9=1
Position
magazine
Magazine location
Load position Positioning magazine -> PLC
Move magazine/Tool to
load position
Position Multitool
Spindle
Position
Multitool
“MULTITOOL_1”
Multitool position Positioning Multitool -> PLC
Move spindle/Tool to Multi-

tool position
Notes

Tool change process for milling machines
programGUIDE
Block Search
Destination N100 T=“Face_Mill_20” Tool preparation -> PLC
Move magazine/Tool
N100 to change position
PROG_EVENT -> After BLS
Block Search Cycle

=1
ShopMill MD52212.3
M06 L6.SPF
N5...
=0 N150 N10...
.. Program test active?
..
.. Simulation active?
..
ISFILE -> CYCPE_MA .. Block search active?
..
.. Tool in Spindle?
..
.. Hand tool?
Hand tool permitted
..
MD22562.1=1
..
..
..
N85 M206 Toolchange order -> PLC

..
..
M17
M30
Notes

Tool change process for milling machines
ShopMill
Tool preparation
ShopMill SD55212.0=1
HEADER
Tool preparation -> PLC

MILLING
Toolchange -> L6
Block Search
Destination DRILLING
CENTERING
Move magazine/Tool
to change position
CENTERING Toolchange -> L6


DRILLING
Block Search Cycle

ShopMill MD52212.3 =1
DRILLING Toolchange -> L6

=0 TAPPING
L6.SPF
N5...
ISFILE -> CYCPE_MA N10...
Toolchange .. Program test active?
TAPPING
-> L6 ..
..
.. Block search active?
..
.. Tool in Spindle?
..
.. Hand tool?
Hand tool permitted
..
MD22562.1=1
..
..
END ..
N85 M206 Toolchange order -> PLC

..
..
M17
Notes

Tool change process for turning machines
programGUIDE
Block Search
Destination N100 T=“Turning_Tool_1” TCHANGE.SPF
N5...
N10...
.. Program test active?
..
N100 .. Simulation active?
..
.. Block Search active?
..
PROG_EVENT -> After BLS ..
..
..
..
..
..
Block Search Cycle ..
=1
ShopTurn MD52212.3
N85 Txx Toolchange order -> PLC
..
..
M17
=0
T=“Turning_Tool_2”
ISFILE -> CYCPE_MA
M30
Notes

Tool change process for turning machines
ShopTurn
HEADER
ROUGHING Toolchange -> TCHANGE

Block Search
Destination DRILLING
CENTERING Toolchange -> TCHANGE

Block Search Cycle

ShopTurn MD52212.3 =1
DRILLING
Toolchange -> TCHANGE
=0
TCHANGE.SPF
N5...
ISFILE -> CYCPE_MA N10...
TAPPING Toolchange .. Program test active?
-> TCHANGE ..
..
.. Block Search active?
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
END ..
N85 Txx Toolchange order -> PLC

..
..
M17
Notes

Structure of Tool Management
HMI
Tool list
Tool wear list
OEM-Tool list
Magazine list
NCK
Manage tool data

- State
- Monitoring (cutting time/ pieces)
- Offsets
Manage magazine data

- Magazine
- Magazine locations
Tool Management
- Tool search
- Empty location search
- Tool change
- Load, unload
PLC
Magazine control
Gripper control
Spindle control
Safety interlocks
Notes

User Interface PLC - NCK
The interface is set up for Tool Management functions: Load/Unload and tool change. The Functions FC6
(Multitool), FC7 (Turret) and FC8 are used to communicate changes in the current positions of tools.
NCK PLC
PLC machine pro-

gram (OB100)
DB4
CALL FB1
Magazine con-
Create the TM-DB‘s
figuration
DB74 (DB71-74 and
Internal DB DB1071-1073)
for TM
PLC machine pro-

gram (OB1)
Basic program DB71
Machine data (FB15) Load/unload Machine functions
positions Load/Unload and
Tool change
DB1071
Data for Mul-
titool (Load) CALL FC 6, 7, 8
Acknowledgment for
the transfer steps
DB72
Changing or
point Spindle
DB71, 72, 73
Tool manage- Standard end ac-
ment DB1072 knowledgment
Data for Mul-
titool (Spindle)
DB73
Changing
point Turret
Magazine data DB1073

Data for Mul-
titool (Turret)
FC 6, 7, 8
Transfer blocks Acknowledge /
Status
Notes

Overview of the interface data blocks
The PLC-NCK interface has these data blocks for tool load/unload and for tool change.
Data block no. Responsible for:
Interface for magazine configuration
DB4 There is an interface in DB4 for configuring each loading/unloading

point and changing point. These data are used to create the data
blocks for tool management (DB71-74 and DB1071-1073).
Interface for loading/unloading points
There is an interface in DB71 for each loading point (max. 16) which
DB71 has been configured for the magazine (Interface 1-16).
The interface for loading point 1 is active when loading directly into the
Spindle. Interface 1 is also used for relocate functions.
Interface for spindle as changing position
DB72
There is an interface in DB72 for each of the available spindles (max.
16) as defined in the magazine configuration, (Interface 1 - 16).
Interface for turret as change position
DB73
There is an area in DB73 for each turret (max 16, Interface 1 - 16).
DB74 Internal data block for tool management
Data for Multitool (Load/unloading points)

DB1071
DB1071 applies to Multitool (Load-/Unload) for each of the available
loading points.
Data for Multitool (Spindle)
DB1072
DB1072 applies to Multitool (Spindle) for each available Spindle.
Data for Multitool (Turret)
DB1073
DB1073 applies to Multitool (Turret) for each available turret.
Notes

Overview of the basic program blocks
The PLC basic program has the following functions to communicate changes in the status or position of tools in
the case of tool load/unload and tool change.
Function no. Responsible for:
FC6 Transfer block for Tool Management and Multitool
The function is used in case of position and status changes (Load/

Unload, Tool change) .
FC6 is used in the case of “Multitool“ .
FC6 has the same functionality as FC8, but it also incorporates the
Multitool functionality.
FC7 Transfer block for Tool change with turret
FC7 is used for tool change with a turret.

FC8 Transfer block for Tool Management
The function is used in case of position and status changes (Load/

Unload, Tool change).
Notes

Tool management interface
Interface for loading/unloading magazine (DB71)
DB71 Interface for loading/unloading magazine (NCK->PLC)

Interface (I) active

DBB0
I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
DBB1
I16 I15 I14 I13 I12 I11 I10 I9
DBB2 Standard end acknowledgement

PLC->NCK I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
DBB3
PLC->NCK I16 I15 I14 I13 I12 I11 I10 I9
Reserved Reserved Position- Order Position- Relocate Unload Load
ing from NC- ing
DBB n Multitool Program Magazine
File in Reserved Acknowle

extended dge
DBB n+1 area Status = 3
(DB1071) PLC->NCK
DBB n+2 Assigned channel (8 bit INT)
DBB n+3 Tool management no. (8 bit INT)
DBD n+4 Unassigned parameter 1 (Dword)
DBW n+16 Identification for loading/unloading station (Int), (fixed value 9999)
DBW n+18 No. of loading station (INT)
DBW n+20 Magazine no. (source) for unloading/reloading/positioning (INT)
DBW n+22 Location no. (source) for unloading/reloading/positioning (INT)
DBW n+24 Magazine no. (target) for loading/reloading/positioning (INT)
DBW n+26 Location no. (target) for loading/reloading/positioning (INT)
Notes

DB71 Interface for loading/unloading magazine (NCK->PLC)

Reserved Loading/
unloading
DBB n+28 without
magazine
movement
Reserved
DBB n+29
Initial addresses of the loading/unloading points (max. 16)

Loading/unloading point 1: n = 4
Interface for loading / unloading (Multitool) (DB1071)
DB1071 Loading / unloading points (NCK→PLC)

DBW n+0 Distance code (1: location number, 2: distance, 3: angle)
DBW n+2 Number of Multitool locations (number of locations of the Multitool)

Multitool location distance (distance of the MT location to be positioned from the reference location,
DBD n+4
corresponding to the distance coding)
DBW n+8 Multitool number (internal T number of the Multitool)
DBW n+10 Multitool location number (location number within the Multitool to which the Multitool positions to)
DBW n+12 Tool holder (spindle or tool holder number)
DBW n+14 Reserved
DBW n+16 Reserved
DBW n+18 Reserved
Initial addresses of the loading/unloading points (max. 16)

Notes

Interface for spindle as change position (DB72)
DB72 Signals from spindle (NCK->PLC)

DBB0
I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
DBB1
I16 I15 I14 I13 I12 I11 I10 I9
DBB3
PLC->NCK I16 I15 I14 I13 I12 I11 I10 I9
Spindle Remove Load OldT in T0 Prepare Perform Obligatory
Tool re- manual manual buffer no change change change
mains in tool tool (n-42) (initiate:
spindle M06)
DBB n

extended dge
(DB1072) PLC->NCK

Buffer identification (Int), (fixed value 9998)
DBW n+16
(corresponds to ”Target position for new tool”)
DBW n+18 relative location (target or source) in buffer (INT)
DBW n+20 Magazine no (source) for new tool (INT)
DBW n+22 Location no. (source) for new tool (INT)
DBW n+24 Magazine no. (target) for old tool (INT)
DBW n+26 Location no. (target) for old tool (INT)
DBW n+28 Tool new: location type (INT)
DBW n+30 Tool new: size left (INT)
DBW n+32 Tool new: size right (INT)
DBW n+34 Tool new: size top (INT)
DBW n+36 Tool new: size bottom (INT)
Tool status for tool new
Manual 1:1 Master to be load- to be un- ignore ID for tool
DBB n+38 tool Change tool ed loaded disabled in buffer
Notes


Tool was Tool fixed Tool being Prewarn- Tool Tool Tool Active tool
DBB n+39 in use location changed ing limit measured disabled enabled
coded reached
DBW n+40 Tool new: T no. (INT)

DBW n+42 If DBX (n+0.4) = 1, then buffer location of old tool is entered here.
DBW n+44 Original magazine of new tool
DBW n+46 Original location of new tool
Initial addresses of the Spindles (max. 16)

Spindle 1: n = 4
Spindle 2: n = 52
Interface for spindle (Multitool) (DB1072)
DB1072 Spindle (NCK -> PLC)

DBW n+0 Distance code (1: Location number, 2: Distance, 3: Angle)
DBW n+2 Number of Multitool locations
DBD n+4 Multitool distance
DBW n+8 Multitool number (new tool)
DBW n+10 Multitool location number (new tool)
DBW n+12 Multitool number (old tool)
DBW n+14 Multitool location number (old tool)
DBW n+16 Location type
DBW n+18 Tool size left
DBW n+20 Tool size right
DBW n+22 Tool size above
DBW n+24 Tool size below
DBW n+26 Tool status
DBW n+28 T number of the tool
DBW n+30 Tool holder
DBW n+32 Original magazine of the new tool
DBW n+36 Reserved
bis Reserved
DBW n+48 Reserved
Initial addresses of the Spindles (max. 16)
Spindle 1: n = 0
Spindle 2: n = 50
Notes

Interface for circular magazine (DB73)
DB73 Signals from circular magazine (NCK -> PLC)

DBB0
I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
DBB1
I16 I15 I14 I13 I12 I11 I10 I9
DBB3
PLC->NCK I16 I15 I14 I13 I12 I11 I10 I9
Reserved Remove Reserved T0 Reserved Perform Obligatory
manual change change
DBB n tool (initiation:
T no.)

extended dge
(DB1073) PLC->NCK

DBW n+16 Reserved
DBW n+18 Reserved
DBW n+20 Circular magazine no. (INT)
DBW n+22 Location no. for new tool (INT)
DBW n+24 Magazine no. for old tool (INT)
DBW n+26 Location no. for old tool (INT)
DBW n+28 Tool new: location type (INT)
DBW n+30 Tool new: size left (INT)
DBW n+32 Tool new: size right (INT)
DBW n+34 Tool new: size top (INT)
DBW n+36 Tool new: size bottom (INT)
Manual 1:1 Master to be load- to be un- ignore ID for tool
DBB n+38 tool Change tool ed loaded disabled in buffer

Tool was Tool fixed Tool being Pre- Tool Tool Tool ena- Active tool
DBB n+39 in use location changed warning measured disabled bled
coded limit
reached
Notes

DB73 Signals from circular magazine (NCK -> PLC)

DBW n+40 Tool new: T no. (INT)
DBW n+42 Original location of new tool in this circular magazine
Initial addresses of the Turrets (max. 16)

Turret 1: n= 4
Turret 2: n = 48
Interface for Turret (Multitool) (DB 1073)
DB1073 Turret (NCK -> PLC)

DBW n+0 Distance code (1: Location number, 2: Distance, 3: Angle)
DBW n+2 Number of Multitool locations
DBD n+4 Multitool distance
DBW n+8 Multitool number (new tool)
DBW n+10 Multitool location number (new tool)
DBW n+12 Multitool number (old tool)
DBW n+14 Multitool location number (old tool)
DBW n+16 Location type
DBW n+18 Tool size left
DBW n+20 Tool size right
DBW n+22 Tool size above
DBW n+24 Tool size below
DBW n+26 Tool status
DBW n+28 T number of the tool
DBW n+30 Tool holder
DBW n+32 Original magazine of the new tool
DBW n+36 reserved
to reserved
DBW n+48 reserved
Initial addresses of the Turrets (max. 16)

Turret 1: n= 0
Turret 2: n = 50
Notes

Basic program blocks for tool management
FC6: Transfer block for tool management and multitool
Value
Signal Type Type Comment
range
Start E BOOL 1 = Start of transfer
TaskIdent E BYTE 1..5 Interface or tank identifier
1: Loading/unloading location
2: Spindle change position
3: Turret change position
4: Asynchronous transfer
5: Asynchronous transfer with location reservation
TaskIdentNo E BYTE 1… Number of associated interface or channel number. The
upper nibble can specify the interface number for asynchro-
nous transfer (e.g. B#16#12, 1st interface, 2nd channel).
NewToolMag E INT -1, 0 … Current magazine number of tool to be replaced

-1: Tool remains at its location
NewToolLoc E INT 0 … max. Current location number of new tool
location
number
OldToolMag E INT -1, 0 … Current magazine number of tool to be replaced
OldToolLoc E INT 0 … max. Current location number of tool to be replaced

location
number
Status E INT 1 … 10 Status information about transfer operation
103 … 105
MultitoolLoc E INT 0 … max. Multitool location No.
location
number
Ready A BOOL 1 = Transfer complete
Error A INT 0 … 65535 Error feedback
0: No error has occurred
1: Unknown "TaskIdent"
2: Unknown “TaskIdentNo“
3: Illegal task ("signal "Interface (SS) active" of selected
turret = "FALSE")
Other values: The number corresponds to the error mes-
sage of the tool management function in the NCK caused
by this transfer.
Notes

FC7: Transfer block for tool change with turret
Value
range
ChgdRevNo E BYTE 1.. Number of turret interface
Error A INT 0…3 Error feedback
1: No turret present
2: Illegal turret number in parameter "ChgdRevNo"
3: Illegal job ("interface active" signal for Illegal job
("interface active" signal for
FC8: Transfer block for tool management
Value
range
TaskIdent E BYTE 1..5 Interface or tank identifier
1: Loading/unloading location
2: Spindle change position
3: Turret change position
4: Asynchronous transfer
5: Asynchronous transfer with location reservation
TaskIdentNo E BYTE 1… Number of associated interface or channel number. The
upper nibble can specify the interface number for asynchro-
nous transfer (e.g. B#16#12, 1st interface, 2nd channel).
NewToolMag E INT 1, 0 … Current magazine number of tool to be replaced

NewToolLoc E INT 0 … max. Current location number of new tool
location
number
OldToolMag E INT 1, 0 … Current magazine number of tool to be replaced
OldToolLoc E INT 0 … max. Current location number of tool to be replaced

location
number
Status E INT 1 … 10 Status information about transfer operation
103 … 105
Error A INT Error feedback
1: Unknown "TaskIdent"
2: Unknown “TaskIdentNo“
3: Illegal task ("signal "Interface (SS) active" of selected
turret = "FALSE")
Other values: The number corresponds to the error mes-
sage of the tool management function in the NCK caused
by this transfer.
Notes

Parameter Status of FC6 and FC8
Acknowl-
Status Explanation
edgment
Synchronous 1 The WZV operation is finished.
Final- In the case of loading/unloading/reloading, the tool has arrived at the required
Acknowledg- target address. In the case of "Prepare change", the new tool is now available. In
ment the case of "Change" (spindle or revolver), the tools addressed in the interface
have now reached the required target addresses.
The tool-change operation is thus completed.
2 The "new" tool cannot be made available.
This status is only admissible in conjunction with the "Prepare Change" command.
When this status is applied, the PLC must be prevented from making a change
with the proposed tool. The proposed (new) tool is disabled by the tool manage-
ment function in the NCK. A new command is then output by the tool management
with a duplo tool.
3 An error occurred.
The tool positions must not have been changed. Any changes to the magazine
positions which have taken place in the meantime must be notified beforehand.
4 It would be better to position the "old" tool in the magazine position speci-
fied in parameters "OldToolMag" and "OldToolLoc"..
This status is permissible only in conjunction with preparation for tool change
(change into spindle). After this status has been transferred to the tool manage-
ment in the NCK, the tool management tries to consider the specified magazine
position in the next command. But this is done only when this position is free.
5 The operation is complete.
The "new" tool is in the position specified in parameters "NewToolMag",
"NewToolLoc". In this case, the specified tool is not really in this position, but is still
in the same magazine location. However, this magazine location has been moved
to the position set in the parameters (e.g. tool change position).
6 The WZV job has been completed.
This status has the same function as status 1, but, in addition, a reservation of the
source location is carried out. This status is only permitted when reloading.
7 Initiate repetition of the command "Prepare Tool".
This status is only admissible in conjunction with the "Change tool" command. This
status is intended for use when the "new" tool has changed its position (e.g. via an
asynchronous command of the "new" tool). After "Ready = 1" has been provided
by FC 8, the "Prepare Change" command is repeated automatically with the same
tool.
10 The WZV operation is finished.
This status has the same function as status 1,with the one difference that the mag-
azine position ($TC_MAP8) is not changed. This status is only permitted with the
Load/ Unload/ Relocate jobs.
Synchronous 103 The "new" tool can be inserted.
Intermediate- This status is permitted only in the tool change preparation, when the PLC may
Acknowledg- reject the new tool (e.g. in case of MD20310 Bt 4=1).
ment 104 The "new" tool is in the position specified in parameters "NewToolMag",
"NewToolLoc".
This status may be used only in conjunction with revolvers, chain-type magazines
and disk magazines for the "Tool change preparation" phase. Status enables the
tool management to adjust the current position of a magazine and to improve the
search strategy for subsequent commands.
105 The specified buffer has been reached by all tools involved.
The tools are in the specified tool positions (parameters "NewToolMag",
"NewToolLoc", "OldToolMag", "OldToolLoc").
Notes

Jobs from tool management
Jobs Interface Acknowledgment Applications, special features
Jobs from NCK Loading DB71 FC6/FC8, TaskIdent =1, NewToolLoc =Target destination of the tool
tool manage- TaskIdentNo NewToolMag =Target magazine
ment =InterfaceNo. OldToolLoc =No. of the loading point
Status =1 OldToolMag =9999
Unloading DB71 FC6/FC8, TaskIdent =1, NewToolLoc =No. of the loading point
TaskIdentNo NewToolMag =9999
=InterfaceNo. OldToolLoc =Location of the tool to be unloaded
Status =1 OldToolMag =MagNo of the tool to be unloaded
Relocating DB71 FC6/FC8, TaskIdent =1, NewToolLoc =Target position of the tool
TaskIdentNo NewToolMag =Target magazine
=InterfaceNo. OldToolLoc =Source location
Status =1 OldToolMag =Source magazine
Positioning DB71 FC6/FC8, TaskIdent =1, Positioning at the loading magazine correspond-
TaskIdentNo ing to the interface number.
=InterfaceNo. NewToolLoc =Loading point or buffer
Status =5 NewToolMag =9999 or 9998
OldToolLoc =Mag. location to be positioned
OldToolMag =Magazine to be positioned
Prepare tool DB72 FC6/FC8, TaskIdent =2, Positioning new tool to the change position, old
change TaskIdentNo tool remains in spindle to complete status 1, in
=InterfaceNo. order that the change command can be output.
OldToolLoc =Buffer (spindle)
NewToolLoc =New tool location
Change in spin- DB72 FC6/FC8, TaskIdent =2, Old tool is unloaded (Gripper or directly into mag-
dle TaskIdentNo azine), new tool is loaded to spindle. Status 1
=InterfaceNo. required, so that part program processing is con-
tinued.
NewToolLoc =Buffer (spindle)
OldToolLoc =Old tool location
Without NCK FC6/FC8, TaskIdent =4, Old tool may need to be transferred asynchro-
Command: TaskIdentNo nously to the location specified in the prepare
Return old Tool =ChannelNo. change command to move the tool from the grip-
to magazine per to the magazine.
Change with DB73 NormallyFC7 or FC6/ When turret has finished swivelling, FC7 is called
turret FC8, TaskIdent =3, with turret no. as parameter ChgdRevNo.
TaskIdentNo =TurretNo.
Position chang- Asynchronous FC6/FC8, TaskIdent =4, General tool transport from the PLC
es of tools with- Transfer TaskIdentNo NewToolMag/NewToolLoc =Target
out job from =ChannelNo. OldToolMag/OldToolLoc =Source
NCK Status =1
Asynchronous FC6/FC8, TaskIdent =5, Tool transport from PLC
Transfer with TaskIdentNo NewToolMag/NewToolLoc =Buffer
location reser- =ChannelNo. OldToolMag/OldToolLoc =Source in the real mag-
vation for tool Status =1 azine
transport
Asynchronous FC6/FC8, TaskIdent =4, Communicate the actual magazine position (e.g.
Transfer without TaskIdentNo after turret cycles) to the NCK
tool movement =ChannelNo. NewToolMag/NewToolLoc =Actual location
to align the Status =5 OldToolMag/OldToolLoc =Change or loading
magazine posi- point
tion
Notes

Machine data for Tool Management
Tool Management requires that changes are made to the machine data for memory configuration. The TO blocks
need to be assigned to the channels, furthermore memory is required in the non-retentive RAM.
NC-TM
TO Block 2
TO Block 1
Magazine data
$TC_MAP...
NC-Channels
One magazine configurati-
on for each TO Block Channel 2
Channel 1
Multitool data Machine
$TC_MTP... data
Tool Management
Tool data
$TC_TP...
Cutting edge data

$TC_DP...
Note:
- The cutting edge data are available by default.

- The tool data are only available when tool monitoring is active.
- The magazine and multitool data are only available when the magazine management is active.
Notes

Overview of the Machine data
Settings
MD Identifier Default Description
TM
10715 $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE -1 6 M function to be replaced by a subroutine
10716 $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME ““ L6 Subroutine name for M function replacement
10717 $MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME ““ Name of tool-changing cycle for T function replacement
10718 $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_PAR -1 M function replacement with parameters
10719 $MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_MODE 0H Setting of T function substitution
- Bit 0: Substitution of the D or DL number
- Bit 1: Call time for block start or block end
- Bit 2: Call time for block start and block end
11415 $MN_SUPPRESS_ALARM_MASK_2 8H Masking of alarm outputs
- Bit 16: Alarm 17212, 17214, 17215, 17216 (Manual tools)
11450 $MN_SEARCH_RUN_MODE 0H Parameterization for search run
Bit 0: Alarm 10208 after action blocks
Bit 1: Automatic PROG_EVENT start after block search
Bit 2: The output of the spindle functions is suppressed
15710 $MN_TCA_CYCLE_NAME ““ Name of tool-changing cycle for TCA function replacement
17500 $MN_MAXNUM_REPLACEMENT_TOO 0 Maximum number of replacement tools
LS
17504 $MN_MAX_TOOLS_PER_MULTITOOL 6 Maximum number of tool locations per multitool
17530 $MN_TOOL_DATA_CHANGE_COUNT 1FH 1FH Mark tool data change for HMI
ER - Bit 0: Change tool status
- Bit 1: Change residual number of tool
- Bit 2: Tool data in update service
- Bit 3: Magazine data in update service
- Bit 4: ISO data in update service
18080 $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MA 0H Bit 0 = 1 Memory reservation for tool management (SRAM)
SK Bit 1 = 1 - Bit 0: Provide magazine management data
Bit 3 = 1 - Bit 1: Provide monitoring data
Bit 10 = 1 - Bit 2: Provide OEM/CC data
- Bit 3: Consider adj. location
- Bit 4: Complex search for tools in magazine
- Bit 5: Wear monitoring
- Bit 6: Classification of magazines in wear groupings
- Bit 7: Adapter of magazine locations
- Bit 8: Additive and/or set-up offsets
- Bit 9: Handling a turret
- Bit 10: The multitool function is available
18082 $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL 30 100 Number of tools the NCK can manage (SRAM)
18083 $MN_MM_NUM_MULTITOOL 15 Number of multitools the NCK can manage (SRAM)
18084 $MN_MM_NUM_MAGAZINE 3 3 Number of magazines the NCK can manage (SRAM)
18085 $MN_MM_NUM_MULTITOOL_LOCATI 30 Number of multitool locations the NCK can manage (SRAM)
ONS
18086 $MN_MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATIO 30 35 Number of magazine locations the NCK can manage (SRAM)
N
18100 $MN_MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN 30 200 Tool offsets in the TO range (SRAM)
_TOA
18105 $MN_MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO 9 Maximum value of D number
18106 $MN_MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_PE 9 Maximum number of D numbers per tool
RTOOL
19320 $ON_TECHNO_FUNCTION_MASK 0H Bit 4 = 1 Activation of tool management
- Bit 4: Tool monitoring and Magazine management
- Bit 25: Tool monitoring
Notes

Overview of the Machine data
Settings
TM
20110 $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK 1H 41H Definition of basic control settings after reset/part program end
- Bit 0: RESET mode
- Bit 6: Active tool length compensation
20120 $MC_TOOL_RESET_VALUE 0 Tool length compensation. during run-up (reset/part program
end)
20124 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLH 0 Tool holder number
OLDER
20128 $MC_COLLECT_TOOL_CHANGE 1 Tool change commands to PLC after block search
20130 $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VAL 0 Tool edge length compensation. during run-up (reset/part pro-
UE gram end)
20270 $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT 1 Initial position of tool cutting edge without programming
20310 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK 0H Bit 0 = 1 Activation of tool management functions
Bit 1 = 1 - Bit 0: Magazine management active
Bit 3 = 1 - Bit 1: Monitoring functions active
Bit 14 = 1 - Bit 2: OEM-/CC- functions active
Bit 24 = 1 - Bit 3: Adjacent location treatment
- Bit 4: Requirement Tool change preparation
- Bit 5: HL/PLC sync. for main spindle on transport ack.
- Bit 6: HL/PLC sync. for second. spindle on transport ack.
- Bit 7: HL/PLC Sync. for main spindle during PLC ack.
- Bit 8: HL/PLC sync. for second. spindle during PLC ack.
- Bit 9: Simulation on PLC acknowledgements
- Bit 10: Tool change command only after PLC prep. ack.
- Bit 11: Preparation command with same tool
- Bit 12: Preparation command when tool already in spindle
- Bit 13: Trace of tool sequences
- Bit 14: Automatic tool change during RESET and Start
- Bit 15: No return transport with multiple preparation cmd.
- Bit 16: Programming T=“Location number“
- Bit 17: Control of time monitoring via PLC
- Bit 18: Message to PLC with last replacement tool
- Bit 19: Synchronization behaviour (Bits 5-8)
- Bit 20: Behaviour during program test
- Bit 21: Response to tool state “W“
- Bit 22: T=“Location number" + tool sub-group ($TC_TP11)
- Bit 23: On offset selection no synchronization with HL
- Bit 24:Command number 8 and 9 ignore location reservation
20320 $MC_TOOL_TIME_MONITOR_MASK 0H 1H Time monitoring for tool in tool holder
- Bit 0: Monitoring tool in tool holder 1
22550 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE 0 1 New tool offset with M function
22560 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE 6 206 M function for tool change
22562 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MO 0H Bit 1 = 1 Response to tool change errors

DE - Bit 1: Manual tools permitted
28085 $MC_MM_LINK_TOA_UNIT 1 Assignment of a TO unit to a channel (SRAM)
28450 $MC_MM_TOOL_DATA_CHG_BUFF 400 400 Buffer for tool data changes (DRAM)
_SIZE
Notes

Overview of the Technology settings
Settings
TM
51200 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_TM_GEO 5 Write tool offset geometry data protection level
51201 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_TM_WEAR 6 Write tool offset wear data protection level
51202 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_TM_WEAR_ 7 Protection level for tool offset restricted writing of wear data
DELTA
51203 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_TM_SC 7 Write tool offset total offsets protection level
51204 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_TM_EC 7 Write tool offset use offsets protection level
51205 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_TM_SUPVIS 7 Write tool offset monitoring data protection level
51206 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_TM_ASSDN 7 Write tool offset unique D number protection level

O
51207 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_TM_WGROU 7 Write tool offset wear groups protection level
P
51208 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_TM_ADAPT 7 Write tool offset adapter data protection level
51209 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_TM_NAME 4 Write tool offset tool name protection level
51210 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_TM_TYPE 4 Write tool offset tool type protection level
51211 $MNS_ACCESS_READ_TM 7 Read tool offset data protection level
51212 $MNS_TM_WRITE_WEAR_ABS_LIMIT 0.999 Maximum tool wear value

51213 $MNS_TM_WRITE_WEAR_DELTA_LI 0 Maximum difference value restricted tool wear input
MIT
51214 $MNS_TM_WRITE_LIMIT_MASK 7H Validity of the restricted tool wear input
- Bit 0: Use for cutting edge data, wear
- Bit 1: Use for SC data, total offsets
- Bit 2: Use for EC data, use offsets
51215 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_TM_ALL_PA 4 Protection level TM details - write all parameters
RAM
51216 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_TM_TOOL_C 4 Protection level TM create tool
REATE
51217 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_TM_TOOL_D 4 Protection level TM delete tool
ELETE
51218 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_TM_TOOL_L 4 Protection level TM load tool
OAD
51219 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_TM_TOOL_U 4 Protection level TM unload tool
NLOAD
51220 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_TM_TOOL_M 4 Protection level TM relocate tool
OVE
51221 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_TM_TOOL_R 4 Protection level TM reactivate tool
EACTIVATE
51222 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_TM_TOOL_M 4 Protection level TM measure tool
EASURE
51223 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_TM_TOOL_C 4 Protection level TM create tool cutting edge
REATE
51224 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_TM_TOOL_D 4 Protection level TM delete tool cutting edge
ELETE
51225 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_TM_MAGAZI 4 Protection level TM position magazine
NE_POS
Notes

Overview of the Technology settings
Settings
TM
52210 $MCS_FUNCTION_MASK_DISP 3H Function mask Display
- Bit 4: Show follow-on tool in T,F,S window
52212 $MCS_FUNCTION_MASK_TECH 0H Function mask Cross-technology
- Bit 3: Call block search cycle for ShopMill/ShopTurn
52229 $MCS_ENABLE_QUICK_M_CODES 0H Enable fast M functions (for ShopMill/ShopTurn)
- Bit 0: Enable fast M functions: coolant OFF
- Bit 1: Enable fast M functions: coolant 1 ON
- Bit 2: Enable fast M functions: coolant 2 ON
- Bit 3: Enable fast M functions: coolant 1 and 2 ON
52230 $MCS_M_CODE_ALL_COOLANTS_O 9 M code for all coolants OFF (for ShopMill/ShopTurn)
FF
52231 $MCS_M_CODE_COOLANT_1_ON 8 M code for coolant 1 ON (for ShopMill/ShopTurn)
52232 $MCS_M_CODE_COOLANT_2_ON 7 M code for coolant 2 ON (for ShopMill/ShopTurn)
52233 $MCS_M_CODE_COOLANT_1_AND_2 -1 M code for coolant 1 and 2 ON (for ShopMill/ShopTurn)
_ON
52240 $MCS_NAME_TOOL_CHANGE_PROG ““ Tool change program for G code steps
52270 $MCS_TM_FUNCTION_MASK 0H Function mask Tool management
- Bit 0: Do not permit Create tool on magazine location
- Bit 1: Load/unload disable when machine is not in reset
- Bit 2: Load/unload disable for emergency stop
- Bit 3: Load/unload tool to/from spindle disabled
- Bit 4: Load directly in spindle
- Bit 7: Create tool using the T number
- Bit 8: Hide Relocate tool
- Bit 9: Hide Position magazine
- Bit 10: Reactivate tool using Position magazine
- Bit 11: Reactivate tool in all monitoring modes
- Bit 12: Hide Reactivate tool
52271 $MCS_TM_MAG_PLACE_DISTANCE 70 Distance between individual magazine locations
52274 $MCS_TM_LOAD_STATION 0 2 Number of Loading stations
52281 $MCS_TOOL_MCODE_FUNC_ON -1 M code for tool-specific function ON (for ShopMill)
52282 $MCS_TOOL_MCODE_FUNC_OFF -1 M code for tool-specific function OFF (for ShopMill)
54215 $SNS_TM_FUNCTION_MASK_SET 0H Function mask Tool management
- Bit 0: Diameter display for rotating tools
- Bit 1: Default direction of rotation for all turning tools is M4
- Bit 2: Create tool without name proposal
- Bit 3: Input disable for tool name and tool type of loaded
tools
- Bit 4: Input disable for loaded tools, if the channel is not in
Reset
- Bit 5: Calculate tool wear inputs additively
- Bit 6: Numerical input of the tool ident
- Bit 7: Fade out tool monitoring parameter
- Bit 8: Diameter display for transverse axis - Geometry
- Bit 9: Diameter display for transverse axis - Wear
- Bit 10: Enable loading/relocating of tools on buffer locations
- Bit 11: Creation of new tools in gripper locations is disabled
- Bit 12: Do not unload measuring tools if ”Unload all” function
is executed.
55212 $SCS_FUNCTION_MASK_TECH_SET 6H Function mask Cross-technology
- Bit 0: Tool preselection active (for ShopMill)
Notes

Overview of the Magazine and Tool Data
Magazine data
Description:
MLSR - MAP: Magazine description data
MAMP - MPAC: Magazine user data
MDP - MPP: Magazine location data

- MPPC: Magazine location user data
MPTH
- MPTH: Magazine location type hierarchy
MPPC
- MDP: Distance to change location
MPP - MAMP: Magazine block data
MAPC - MLSR: Magazine location assignment to spindle
MAP The magazine data are only available when the magazine
management is active.
Multitool data Description:

- MTP: Multitool description data
MTPPC
- MTPC: Multitool user data
MTPP
- MTPP: Multitool location data
MTPC - MTPPC: Multitool location user data
MTP
The Multitool data are only available when the magazine
management is active.
Tool data
Description:
TPC - TP: Tool related data
TPG - TPG: Tool related grinding data
TP - TPC: Tool related user data
Note: The Tool data are only available when tool monitoring
is active.
Cutting edge data

Description:
ECP - DP: Cutting edge data
SCP - DPC: Cutting edge user data
MOPC - MPO: Cutting edge monitoring
MOP - MOPC: User cutting edge monitoring

- SCP: Location dependent offsets fine
DPC
- ECP: Location dependent offsets course
DP
Notes

Description of the Magazine and Tool Data
Magazine data
Parameter Default Description
Magazine block data (MAMP)

$TC_MAMP1 ““ Identifier of the configuration magazine
$TC_MAMP2 0 Type of tool search (Bit 0-7) and Art type of empty location search (Bit 8-15)
- Bit 0: active tool/ lowest Duplo
- Bit 1: shortest distance
- Bit 2: active tool/ min. $TC_TP10
- Bit 3: monitor for lowest actual value
- Bit 4: monitor for largest actual value
- Bit 5: monitor for $AC_MONMIN
- Bit 6: first current magazine (Bit 7=1)
- Bit 7: complex search in magazines
- Bit 8: first location forward
- Bit 9: current location forward
- Bit 10: last location backward
- Bit 11: current location backward
- Bit 12: symmetric actual location
- Bit 13: 1:1 Change
- Bit 14: Hierarchies
- Bit 15: Location type hierarchies
$TC_MAMP3 0 Procedure for tools in a wear group
Magazine description data (MAP)
$TC_MAP1 0 Type of magazine (1: Chain, 3: Turret, 5: Box magazine, 7: Buffer magazine,
9: Loading magazine)
$TC_MAP2 ““ Identifier of magazine
$TC_MAP3 2 Status of magazine
- Bit 0: active magazine
- Bit 1: disabled
- Bit 2: magazine is at load position
- Bit 3: Tool motion is active
- Bit 4: Magazine may be moved
- Bit 5: Reserved
- Bit 6: Magazine is fixed location coded
- Bit 7: Reserved
- Bit 8: Edge location must not be overlapped left
- Bit 9: Edge location must not be overlapped right
- Bit 10: Edge location must not be overlapped top
- Bit 11: Edge location must not be overlapped bottom
$TC_MAP6 1 Number of tiers (box magazine only)
$TC_MAP7 0 Number of columns
$TC_MAP8 0 Current magazine position relative to change position
$TC_MAP9 0 Current wear group number
$TC_MAP10 0 Current tool search strategies of magazine, see MAMP2.
Magazine user data (MAPC)

$TC_MAPC1 0 Magazine user data 1..10
to
$TC_MAPC10
Notes

Magazine data
Magazine location data (MPP)
$TC_MPP1 0 Location type (1: Magazine location, 2: Spindle/tool holder, 3: Gripper,

4: Loader, 5: Transfer location, 6: Loading station, 7: Loading point)
$TC_MPP2 9999 Location type (0: every tool fits in this location)
$TC_MPP3 FALSE Consider adjacent location(1=on, 0=off)
$TC_MPP4 1 Location state
- Bit 0: Disabled
- Bit 1: Free to accept a tool
- Bit 2: Reserved for tool from buffer
- Bit 3: Reserved for new tool to be loaded
- Bit 4: Occupied in left half location
- Bit 5: Occupied in right half location
- Bit 6: Occupied in upper half location
- Bit 7: Occupied in lower half location
- Bit 8: left half location reserved
- Bit 9: right half location reserved
- Bit 10: top half location reserved
- Bit 11: lower half location reserved
- Bit 12: Wear group disabled
- Bit 13: Overlapping permitted
$TC_MPP5 0 Location type index

$TC_MPP6 0 T No. of tool at this location
$TC_MPP7 0 No. of adapter in magazine location
$TC_MPP_SP 0 For tool speed and acceleration monitoring
$TC_MPP66 0 No. of the tool, for which the identification “reserved for tool in buffer“ is set
Magazine location user data (MPPC)
$TC_MPPC1 0 Magazine location user data 1..10

to
$TC_MPPC10
Magazine location type hierarchy (MPTH)
$TC_MPTH1 9999 Magazine location type hierarchy 1..7

to
$TC_MPTH7
Distance to change location (MDP)
$TC_MDP1 9999 Distance between tool change position of magazine and location of first inter-
nal magazine (loading magazine 9999)
$TC_MDP2 9999 Distance between tool change position of magazine and location of second
internal magazine (buffer magazine 9998)
Magazine location assignment to spindle (MLSR)
$TC_MLSR 9999 System variable for assigning magazine locations of the buffer magazine to
the spindle
Notes

Multitool data
Multitool description data (MTP)
$TC_MTPN 0 Number of locations
$TC_MTP2 “MT-Nr.“ Multitool identifier

$TC_MTP3 1 Size on left
$TC_MTP4 1 Size on right
$TC_MTP5 1 Size on above
$TC_MTP6 1 Size on below
$TC_MTP7 9999 Magazine location type
$TC_MTP8 0 Multitool status
- Bit 0: active tool
- Bit 1: enabled
- Bit 2: disabled
- Bit 3: measure
- Bit 4: prewarning limit reached
- Bit 5: Multitool being changed
- Bit 6: fixed location coded
- Bit 7: tool was in use
- Bit 8: identifier for tools in buffer
- Bit 9: ignore disabled state
- Bit 10: to be unloaded
- Bit 11: to be loaded
- Bit 12: master tool
- Bit 13: reserved
- Bit 15: hand tool
$TC_MTP_POS 0 Multitool position
$TC_MTP_KD Type of distance coding (1: Location number, 2: Distance, 3: Angle)
Multitool user data (MTPC)
$TC_MTPC1 0 Multitool user data 1..10
to
$TC_MTPC10
Multitool location data (MTPP)
$TC_MTPP2 0 Multitool location type

$TC_MTPP4 0 Multitool location state
$TC_MTPP6 0 T number of tool at this location
$TC_MTPP7 0 Adapter number of adapter at this location
$TC_MTPPL 0 Distance from reference location, distance “length“
$TC_MTPPA 0 Distance from reference location, distance “angle“
Multitool location user data (MTPPC)
$TC_MTPPC1 0 Multitool location user data 1..10
to
$TC_MTPPC10
Notes

Tool data
Tool related data (TP)
$TC_TP1 T-Nr. Duplo number
$TC_TP2 “T-Nr.“ Tool identifier

$TC_TP3 1 Size on left
$TC_TP4 1 Size on right
$TC_TP5 1 Size on above
$TC_TP6 1 Size on below
$TC_TP7 9999 Magazine location type
$TC_TP8 0 Tool status
- Bit 0: active tool
- Bit 1: enabled
- Bit 2: disabled
- Bit 3: measure
- Bit 4: prewarning limit reached
- Bit 5: tool being changed
- Bit 6: fixed location coded
- Bit 7: tool was in use
- Bit 8: identifier for tools in buffer
- Bit 9: ignore disabled state
- Bit 10: to be unloaded
- Bit 11: to be loaded
- Bit 12: master tool
- Bit 13: reserved
- Bit 15: hand tool
$TC_TP9 0 Tool monitoring method
- Bit 0: tool life
- Bit 1: workpiece count
- Bit 2: wear monitoring active
- Bit 3: wear monitoring, location dependent offset fine active
$TC_TP10 0 Replacement change strategy
$TC_TP11 0 Tool information
Tool related user data (TPC)
$TC_TPC1 0 Tool related user data 1..10

to
$TC_TC10
Notes

Cutting edge data
Cutting edge data (DP)
$TC_DP1 9999 Tool type

$TC_DP2 0 Cutting edge position
$TC_DP3 0 Geometry length 1
$TC_DP6 0 Geometry radius
$TC_DP7 0 Geometry corner radius (tool type 700 slotting saw)
$TC_DP8 0 Geometry length 4 (tool type 700 slotting saw)
$TC_DP10 0 Geometry angle 1
$TC_DP11 0 Geometry angle 2 for conical milling tools
$TC_DP12 0 Wear length 1
$TC_DP15 0 Wear radius
$TC_DP16 0 Wear slot width/rounding radius
$TC_DP19 0 Wear angle 1
$TC_DP20 0 Wear angle 2 for conical milling tools
$TC_DP21 0 Adapter length 1
$TC_DP24 0 Clearance angle
$TC_DP25 0 For ShopMill/ShopTurn:

A bit-coded value for various states of tools is stored here for ShopMill and
ShopTurn (turning direction, coolant 1/2, number of teeth)
Cutting edge user data (DPC)
$TC_DPC1 0 Cutting edge user data 1..10

to
$TC_DPC10
Notes

Set up the machine data for the tool management Activate the option “Tool Management, more than 3
magazines“ (if necessary)
The various Tool Management functions are activated via

machine data. The standard function includes 3 magazines. Buffers and
loading magazines count as magazines.
Prerequisite:
Magazine 1
- License key for the “Tool Management, more than 3 Mag-
azines“ option is available (if necessary).
Procedure: Magazine 2 (Option)

- Activate the Option “Tool Management, more than 3 Mag-
azines“ (if necessary)
- Activate Tool Management

Buffer magazine (9998)
- Set the number of magazines and magazine locations
- Set the number of tools and the number of cutting edges

Load magazine (9999)
- Set the number of multitools
The option is activated in the menu “Licenses“ in the “Setup“

area . A valid license key is required.
Notes

Activate Tool Management Enable Tool Management
MD19320 Activation of Tool Management

Tool Management requires these minimum machine data set-
tings. Bit 4 = 1 Tool monitoring and magazine manage-
ment
Bit 25 = 0 Tool monitoring
Reserve memory for Tool Management
MD18080 Memory organisation for Tool Management
Bit 0 = 1 Reserve memory for magazine manage-

ment
Bit 1 = 1 Reserve memory for tool monitoring
Bit 3 = 1 Reserve memory for adjacent location

check
Bit 10 = 1 Multitool function is enabled
Note:
MD18080 and MD20310 Bits 0-3 must always be the same.
Activate Tool Management Buffer for changes to tool data
MD20310 Activation of Tool Management MD28450 = 400 Number of entries in the buffer for HMI up-
date. This MD concerns how the HMI
Bit 0 = 1 Magazine management active shows data of tools, whose data is changed
via part program instructions (e.g. NEWT).
Bit 1 = 1 Tool monitoring active
Activation of the tool cutting time monitor
Bit 3 = 1 Adjacent location check
MD20320 Cutting time monitor for tool in tool holder
Bit 0 = 1 Cutting time monitor for tool in tool holder 1

Check the HMI settings for changes to tool data
MD17530 Tool data change counter

Assigning the TO Blocks
Bit 0 = 1 Change tool status
MD28085 = 1, 1 Assignment of TO blocks to channels
Bit 1 = 1 Change residual number of tools The TO area includes all tool and maga-
zine data known to the NCK. The maximum
Bit 2 = 1 Tool data in update service number of TO blocks is equal to the num-
ber of channels currently enabled.
Bit 3 = 1 Magazine data in update service 1.1: TO block 1 is assigned to channels 1
and 2.
Bit 4 = 1 ISO data in update service 1, 2: TO block 1 is assigned to channels 1,
TO block 2 is assigned to channels 2
Notes
This MD concerns how the HMI shows data of tools, whose
data is changed via part program instructions (e.g. NEWT).

Define the number of magazines and magazine locations Define the number of Multitools
MD18084 Number of magazines.
(Default = 3) Note: Min. 3 magazines incl. buffer and MD18083 Number of Multitools
load magazines. (Default = 15)
MD18086 Number of magazine locations. MD18085 Number of Multitool locations
(Default = 30) Note: Add together all locations in all maga- (Default = 30)
zines. MD17504 Max. locations per Multitool
(Default = 6)
Example: Chain magazine 30 locations and double gripper
MD18084 = 3
- Chain magazine (magazine 1)
- Buffer magazine (magazine 9998)
- Load magazine (magazine 9999)
MD18086 = 35
- 30 locations for chain magazine
- 3 locations for buffer magazine (gripper 1/2 and spindle)
- 2 locations for Load magazine (load location at chain maga-
zine and spindle)
Example: Multitool holder with three tools
Note:
Assigning the magazines to the locations is done in the mag-
azine configuration.
Define the max. number of tools and cutting edges Once Tool Management has been successfully activated, the
magazine data have to be configured. The following alarms
MD18082 Max number of tools which the NC can indicated this.
(Default = 30) handle.
Note: Each tool has at least 1 cutting edge. 2
MD18100 Number of cutting edges in theTO block
(Default = 30)
1
Suggested values for JobShop applications
MD18082 = 100 Number of tools

MD18100 = 200 Number of edges
1. Magazine data missing in the NC

2. Magazine data missing in the PLC
Notes

Magazine Configuration Magazine configuration: how to create, how to load
The magazine configuration can be accomplished with the Example: Chain magazine (30 locations) with double gripper
software tool “HMI-Start-up Tool on PG/PC“.
Magazine configuration
The magazine configuration contains:
- Definition of the magazines Magazine 1

(Chain) 30 locations
- Definition of the magazine locations
- Definition of the buffer locations
- Definition of the load locations
- Definition of the search strategy
Buffer magazine
(9998) 3 locations (Spindle and
two Grippers)
Requirements:
- HMI Start-up-Tool for PG/PC is installed.
Load magazine
(9999) 2 locations (load location
Procedure: for Spindle and magazine)
- Create the magazine configuration
- Load magazine data into the NC

Load magazine
data
- Load magazine data into the PLC
NC PLC
(INI-Datei) (DB4)
Notes

Configuration of a chain magazine Start the magazine configuration
Example: Chain magazine (30 locations) with double gripper

Define the magazine
L2
9999,2
L1 G1
9999,1 9998,2 M1 Magazine 1
Sp Spindle
1
M1 G1 Gripper 1
G2 Gripper 2
Sp L1 Load loc. 1
G2 L2 Load loc. 2
9998,1
9998,3
M1
Start HMI Startup-Tool
1. Set up a new magazine (chain magazine with 30 locations)
Define the buffer locations
Define the spindle
Sp
1. Define the spindle as a location.

2. Assign spindle to magazine
(Distance to change loc.=0).
Notes

Define Gripper 1 Define Gripper 2
1 1
Sp Sp G2
G1 G1
2 2
3 3
1. Define the gripper 1 as a location. 1. Define the gripper 2 as a location.

2. Assign gripper 1 to spindle. 2. Assign gripper 2 to spindle.
3. Assign gripper 1 to magazine 3. Assign gripper 2 to magazine
(Distance to change loc.=0). (Distance to change loc.=0).
Define load locations Define load location 2
Define load location 1
1
L1
L2
L1
1 1. Define load location 2.

2. Assign load location 2 to magazine
1. Assign load location 1 to magazine.

Notes

Define the magazine configuration Specify the search strategy
Define a new magazine configuration
2 3
3
1. Set location search “symmetric actual location“ .
2. Set location coding “variable“.
3. Set consider adjacent location.
1. Define a new magazine configuration.

2. Assign the magazine to the magazine configuration.
3. Assign the locations to the magazine configuration .
1. Set location search “symmetric actual location“ 3. Set “Consider adjacent loc.”
2. Set Location coding “variable“ Generate configuration file (INI-file)
The configuration file is generated as an INI file and

stored within “HMI Start-up-Tool“ .
Notes

Configuration file (INI file)

N1140 ;
N10 ; N1150 $TC_MPP1[9998,1]=2
N20 ; 02-11-2011 16:37:59 N1160 $TC_MPP2[9998,1]=0
N1170 $TC_MPP3[9998,1]=0 Spindle
N30 ; N1180 $TC_MPP4[9998,1]=2
N40 ; ---------------------------------------- N1190 $TC_MPP5[9998,1]=1
N50 ; Magazine configuration: Mag_conf N1200 ;
N60 ; ---------------------------------------- N1210 ; Spindle-assignment
N70 ; N1220 $TC_MLSR[2,1]=0 Spindle-
N80 ; Delete old data N1230 $TC_MLSR[3,1]=0
N90 ; Gripper assign
N100 $TC_MAP1[0]=0 N1240 ;
N110 $TC_DP1[0,0]=0 N1250 $TC_MPP1[9999,2]=7
N120 ; N1260 $TC_MPP2[9999,2]=0
N1270 $TC_MPP3[9999,2]=0 Load loc. 2
N130 ; Configuration N1280 $TC_MPP4[9999,2]=2
N140 ; N1290 $TC_MPP5[9999,2]=2
N150 $TC_MAMP1="Mag_conf"
N160 $TC_MAMP2=4097 Search strate- N1300 ;
N170 ; gy N1310 $TC_MPP1[9999,1]=7
N1320 $TC_MPP2[9999,1]=0
N180 ; Magazine N1330 $TC_MPP3[9999,1]=0 Load loc. 1
N190 ; N1340 $TC_MPP4[9999,1]=2
N200 $TC_MAP1[1]=1 N1350 $TC_MPP5[9999,1]=1
N210 $TC_MAP2[1]="Magazine"
N220 $TC_MAP3[1]=17 Magazine 1 N1360 ;
N230 $TC_MAP6[1]=1 N1370 ; Offsets
N240 $TC_MAP7[1]=30 N1380 ;
N250 $TC_MAP10[1]=4097 N1390 $TC_MDP2[1,2]=0
N1400 $TC_MDP2[1,3]=0 Distances to
N260 ; N1410 $TC_MDP2[1,1]=0
N270 $TC_MAP1[9998]=7 change loc.
N280 $TC_MAP2[9998]="Buffer magazine" N1420 $TC_MDP1[1,2]=4
N290 $TC_MAP3[9998]=17 N1430 $TC_MDP1[1,1]=0
N300 $TC_MAP6[9998]=1 N1440 ;
Magazine N1450 ; End of file
N310 $TC_MAP7[9998]=3 9998 N1460 ;
N320 $TC_MAP10[9998]=0 N1470 M17
N330 ;
N340 $TC_MAP1[9999]=9
N350 $TC_MAP2[9999]="Loading magazine"
N360 $TC_MAP3[9999]=17
N370 $TC_MAP6[9999]=1
N380 $TC_MAP7[9999]=2 Magazine
N390 $TC_MAP10[9999]=0 9999
N400 ;
N410 ; Locations
N420 ;
N430 $TC_MPP1[1,1]=1
N440 $TC_MPP2[1,1]=1
N450 $TC_MPP3[1,1]=1 Location 1
N460 $TC_MPP4[1,1]=2
N470 $TC_MPP5[1,1]=0
… to
N970 $TC_MPP1[1,30]=1
N980 $TC_MPP2[1,30]=1
N1000 $TC_MPP4[1,30]=2
N1010 $TC_MPP5[1,30]=0
N1020 ;
N1030 $TC_MPP1[9998,2]=3
N1040 $TC_MPP2[9998,2]=0
N1050 $TC_MPP3[9998,2]=0 Gripper 1
N1060 $TC_MPP4[9998,2]=2
N1070 $TC_MPP5[9998,2]=1
N1080 ;
N1090 $TC_MPP1[9998,3]=3
N1100 $TC_MPP2[9998,3]=0
N1110 $TC_MPP3[9998,3]=0 Gripper 2
N1120 $TC_MPP4[9998,3]=2
N1130 $TC_MPP5[9998,3]=2
Notes

Modifications to the magazine configuration Variables in the configuration file
Activate search strategy 1:1 change

Parameter Explanation
Search strategy 1:1 change can set via $TC_MAMP2 und $TC_MAMP1 Identifier of the configuration magazine
$TC_MAP10. In each case bit 13=1.
$TC_MAMP2 Type of tool search (Bit 0-7) and Art type of
Note: empty location search (Bit 8-15)
Bit 13 can not be set in the HMI-Start-up Tool configuration - Bit 0=1: active tool/ min. Duplo
screen. The Configuration file (INI file) must be changed. - Bit 12=1: symmetric actual location
- Bit 13=1: 1:1 Change
$TC_MAP1 Type of magazine (1=Chain, 7=Buffer maga-
zine, 9=Loading magazine)
Configuration file (INI file) $TC_MAP2 Identifier of magazine
$TC_MAP3 Status of magazine
... - Bit 0=1: active magazine
N160 $TC_MAMP2=4097 - Bit 4=1: Magazine may be moved
...
N250 $TC_MAP10[1]=4097 $TC_MAP6 Number of tiers (box magazine only)
...
$TC_MAP7 Number of columns
$TC_MAP10 Current tool search strategies of magazine,
see MAMP2.
$TC_MPP1 Location type (1=Magazine location,
... 2=Spindle/tool holder, 3=Gripper, 7=Loading
N160 $TC_MAMP2=12289 point)
... $TC_MPP2 Location type (0=every tool fits in this loca-
N250 $TC_MAP10[1]=12289
... tion)
$TC_MPP3 Consider adjacent location(1=on, 0=off)
$TC_MPP4 Location state
New search strategy - Bit 1=1: Free to accept a tool
- Bit 0=1: active tool/ min. Duplo $TC_MPP5 Location type index
- Bit 12=1: symmetric actual location
- Bit 13=1: 1:1 Do old tool /new tool swap $TC_MLSR System variable for assigning magazine loca-
tions of the buffer magazine to the spindle
$TC_MDP1 Distance between tool change position of
magazine and location of first internal maga-
zine (loading magazine 9999)
magazine and location of second internal
magazine (biffer magazine 9998)
Notes

Load the magazine data into the NC (INI file) The configuration INI file is transferred to the „Workpiece“
directory of the NC.
Select AUTO mode and press NC-Start .
The configuration is loaded. All magazine and buffer data

1 will be created new.
Note:
2 After the successful loading of the configuration file, the INI
file in the „Workpiece“ directory of the NC is deleted.
After the successful loading of the configuration file, the

magazine and buffers will be displayed by the control in
the parameter area.
1. Select the configuration file.

2. Press softkey “Load“ .
Display on the controller
Layout of the tool list

1. Spindle
2. Gripper 1 and 2
3. Magazine locations 1 to 30
Notes

Load the magazine data into the PLC (DB4) Magazine configuration (DB4)
1
2
1 - Chain magazine (Magazine 1)

2 - Buffer magazine (Magazine 9998)
3 - Load magazine (Magazine 9999)
1. Press the Softkey “Create PLC data“ to load the config-
uration. This action loads the magazine parameters to
DB4.
Interface for magazine configuration (DB4) After successful loading of the PLC data and after the PLC
has been restarted all the interface data blocks for theTool
Management will be re-initialised or created if not existing.
DB4 Interface magazine configuration (HMI  PLC)
Number of magazines including buffer magazine and load-
DBB64
ing magazine
<
DBW65
Magazine number
(...)
DBB67 Magazine type (1: Chain, 3: Turret, 5: Box magazine,
(...) 7: Buffer magazine, 9: Loading magazine)
DBW68
Number of locations
(...)
>
The Alarm 410151 “Magazine data for the tool management
DBW n Number of spindles missing in the PLC“ will be no longer displayed.
Initial addresses of the Magazines

Magazine 1: DBW65
Magazine 2: DBW70
Magazine 3: DBW75
Address = (Content DBB64 * 5) + 65
Notes

Notes

Load / Unload Example: Chain magazine with double gripper
Load loc. 2
Tool load/unload is done via the loading location defined in
the machine configuration. L2
Load loc. 1 9999,2
Each loading location has it own interface area in DB71.
The interfaces are set up to handle the tool management G1

L1 9998,2 M1 Magazine 1
commands: *Tool load*, *unload*, *Relocate* and *position 9999,1 Sp Spindle
magazine*. M1 G1 Gripper 1
G2 Gripper 2
The PLC functions FC6 (Multitool), FC8 and the Standard Sp L1 Load loc. 1
G2 L2 Load loc. 2
end acknowledgment with DB71 are used to communicate 9998,1
9998,3
the current positions of tools.
Procedure:
- Assign loading locations.
- PLC program to handle the acknowledgments for the tool

management commands.
Assign loading locations Display on the controller
Load location 1 is permanently assigned to the Spindle.
Load location 2 is assigned to the magazine via machine data

52274 = 2.
Tool load locations

1
MD52274=2 Number of the load location
1. Magazine location on change position

2. Magazine location on loading point
Notes

Loading into the magazine
Using the dialogue for *Load*, either a completely new tool

can be created and loaded to the magazine or a tool out of the
tool list can be transferred to a location in the magazine.
1. Enter the desired location and confirm with OK -> Job to

PLC (DB71.DBX34.0=1).
1. Select the tool.

2. Press the softkey “Load“.
Example: Load a tool into the magazine Sequence load magazine
“CUTTER1“ Job “Load“ (DB71 Interface 2)
2
L2
9999,2 1
G1
9998,2
Position the correct magazine location
L1 (DB71.DBW58/60) to the load location
9999,1 1 M1 Magazine 1
Sp Spindle
M1 G1 Gripper 1
G2 Gripper 2
Sp L1 Load loc. 1
9998,1 L2 Load loc. 2 2
G2 Place the tool into the magazine by

9998,3 hand
Acknowledge the “Load“ job
Notes

Job: Load magazine DB71 Acknowledgement for load the magazine with FC6

FC6 Parameter Explanation
Interface (I) active Start TRUE Transfer will be started
DBB0
I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1 TaskIdent 1 DB71 Interface
TaskIdentNo 2 Interface 2
PLC->NCK
I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
NewToolMag DB71.DBW58 Destination Mag. for load
Re- Re- Posi- Order Posi- Relo- Un- Load
serve serve tionin from tionin cate load NewToolLoc DB71.DBW60 Destination location for load
DBB34 d d g NC- g
Multi- Pro- Mag-
OldToolMag 0 When loading =0
tool gram azine
OldToolLoc 0 When loading =0
Data Reserved Ack.
in sta-
Status 1/10 1: Process finished
DBB35 DB10 tus 3 10: Process finished - no
71 change to $TC_MAP8
MultitoolLoc -1 When Loading =-1
DBW50 Identification for loading station (fixed value 9999)
DBW52 No. of loading station
Example: Load tool to magazine location 9
DBW54 Magazine no. (source) for unloading/reloading/positioning DB71.DBW54 =0
DB71.DBW56 =0
DBW56 Location no. (source) for unloading/reloading/positioning
DB71.DBW58 =1
DBW58 Magazine no. (target) for loading/reloading/positioning DB71.DBW60 =9
DBW60 Location no. (target) for loading/reloading/positioning
PLC Programming example with acknowledgement using FC6 NETWORK Start Transfer
TITLE =Tool management status transfer
NETWORK CALL FC 6 (//Tool management transfer block

Load magazine Start := DB150.DBX 16.0,//Start
TITLE =Ack load interface 2
TaskIdent := DB150.DBB 0,
A I 86.0; TaskIdentNo := DB150.DBB 1,
A DB71.DBX 0.1; //Interface 2 active NewToolMag := DB150.DBW 2,//Pos new tool
A DB71.DBX 34.0; //Load active NewToolLoc := DB150.DBW 4,
FP M 150.0; OldToolMag := DB150.DBW 6,//Pos old tool
JCN M100; OldToolLoc := DB150.DBW 8,
L 1; Status := DB150.DBW 10,//Status
T DB150.DBB 0; //DB71 MultitoolLoc := DB150.DBW 12,
L 2; Ready := DB150.DBX 16.1,
T DB150.DBB 1; //Interface 2 Error := DB150.DBW 14);
L DB71.DBW 58;
T DB150.DBW 2; //Target magazine for load A DB150.DBX 16.1; //Poll ready
L DB71.DBW 60; R DB150.DBX 16.0; //Reset start
T DB150.DBW 4; //Target location for load L DB150.DBW 14; //Error information
L 0; L 0;
T DB150.DBW 6; <>I ; //Evaluate error
T DB150.DBW 8; R DB150.DBX 16.0; //Reset start
L 1;
T DB150.DBW 10; //Status 1
L -1;
T DB150.DBW 12;
S DB150.DBX 16.0; //Start FC6
M100: NOP 0;
Notes

Unloading from the magazine Example: Unload a tool from the magazine
A tool can be removed from a location in the magazine with

the „Unload“ dialogue. “CUTTER1“
2
L2
9999,2
G1
9998,2
L1
Sp Spindle
M1 G1 Gripper 1
2 G2 Gripper 2
1 Sp L1 Load loc. 1
9998,1 L2 Load loc. 2
G2
9998,3
1. Select the magazine location.

2. Press the softkey “Unload“ -> Job to PLC
(DB71.DBX34.1=1).
Sequence unload magazine
Job “Unload“ (DB71 Inter-

face 2)
Position the correct magazine location

(DB71.DBW54/56) to the load location
Remove the tool from the magazine by

hand
Acknowledge the “Unload“

job
Notes

Job: Unload magazine DB71 Acknowledgement for unload the magazine with FC6

Interface (I) active Start TRUE Transfer is started
DBB0
I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1 TaskIdent 1 DB71 interface
PLC->NCK
I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
NewToolMag 0 When loading =0
serve serve tion- from tionin cate load NewToolLoc 0 When loading =0
DBB34 d d ing NC- g
Multi- Pro- Mag- OldToolMag DB71.DBW50 Source Magazine for unload
tool gram azine
OldToolLoc DB71.DBW52 Source Location for unload
Data Reserved Ack
in Sta- Status 1/10 1: Process finished
DBB35 DB10 tus 3 10: Process finished - no
71 change to $TC_MAP8
MultitoolLoc -1 When unloading =-1
DBW52 No. of loading station Example: Unload tool from magazine location 9
DB71.DBW52 =2
DBW56 Location no. (source) for unloading/reloading/positioning DB71.DBW54 =1
DB71.DBW56 =9
DBW58 Magazine no. (target) for loading/reloading/positioning
DB71.DBW58 =0
DBW60 Location no. (target) for loading/reloading/positioning DB71.DBW60 =0

Unload magazine Start := DB150.DBX 16.0,//Start
TITLE =Ack unload interface 2
A DB71.DBX 34.1; //Unload active NewToolLoc := DB150.DBW 4,
L 2; Ready := DB150.DBX 16.1,
L 0;
T DB150.DBW 2; A DB150.DBX 16.1; //Poll ready
L DB71.DBW 50; L DB150.DBW 14; //Error information
T DB150.DBW 6; //Source magazine for unload L 0;
L DB71.DBW 52; <>I ; //Evaluate error
T DB150.DBW 8; //Source location for unload R DB150.DBX 16.0; //Reset start
L 1;
L -1;
T DB150.DBW 12;
M110: NOP 0;
Notes

Loading a tool to the spindle
Using the dialogue for *Load *, either a completely new tool

can be created and loaded to the spindle or a tool out of the
tool list can be transferred to the spindle
1. Press softkey “Spindle“ -> Job to PLC (DB71.DBX4.0=1).
1. Select a tool.
2. Press the softkey “Load“.
Example: Load a tool to the spindle Sequence: load to the spindle
Job “Load“ (DB71 Interface

“CUTTER1“ 1)
L2
1 9999,2
G1
9998,2 1
L1
9999,1
M1 Magazine 1 Put the tool into the spindle by hand
Sp Spindle
T0 M6 M1 G1 Gripper 1
G2 Gripper 2
Sp L1 Load loc. 1
9998,1 L2 Load loc. 2
G2 Acknowledge the “Load“

9998,3 job
Important:
A tool which was loaded into the spindle by hand will always
be deposited in the magazine at the next tool change or T0
M6 command.
This will happen even though hand tools are allowed accord-
ing to MD22562 Bit 1 = 1.
Notes

Job: Load spindle DB71 Acknowledgement for load the spindle with FC6

Interface (I) active Start TRUE Transfer will be started
DBB0
DBB2 Standard end acknowledgement TaskIdentNo 1 Interface 1
PLC->NCK
I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
NewToolMag DB71.DBW28 Destination Mag. for load
serve serve tionin from tionin cate load NewToolLoc DB71.DBW30 Destination Loc for load
DBB4 d d g NC- g
Multi- Pro- Mag- OldToolMag 0 When loading =0
tool gram azine
OldToolLoc 0 When loading =0
Data Reserved Ack
in Sta- Status 1 Process finished
DBB5 DB10 tus 3
71 MultitoolLoc -1 When loading =-1

DBW22 No. of loading station Example: Load a tool to the spindle
DB71.DBW24 =0
DBW24 Magazine no. (source) for unloading/reloading/positioning
DB71.DBW26 =0
DB71.DBW30 =1

Load spindle Start := DB150.DBX 16.0,//Start
TITLE =Ack load interface 1
A DB71.DBX 4.0; //Load active NewToolLoc := DB150.DBW 4,
L 1; Ready := DB150.DBX 16.1,
L DB71.DBW 28;
T DB150.DBW 2; //Target magazine for load A DB150.DBX 16.1; //Poll ready
L DB71.DBW 30; R DB150.DBX 16.0; //Reset start
T DB150.DBW 4; //Target location for load L DB150.DBW 14; //Error information
L 0; L 0;
L 1;
L -1;
T DB150.DBW 12;
M120: NOP 0;
Notes

Unload the spindle Example: Unload the tool in the spindle
The „Unload“ dialogue can be used to unload the tool in the “CUTTER1“
spindle.
L2
1 9999,2
G1
9998,2
L1
M1 Magazine 1
9999,1
Sp Spindle
1
Txx M6 M1 G1
G2
Gripper 1
Gripper 2
2 Sp L1 Load loc. 1
9998,1 L2 Load loc. 2
G2
9998,3
1. Select the Spindle.

2. Press the softkey “Unload“ -> Job to PLC
(DB71.DBX4.1=1).
Sequence unload the spindle
Job “Unload“ (DB71 Inter-

face 1)
Unload the spindle tool by hand
Acknowledge the “unload“

job
Notes

Job: Unload spindle DB71 Acknowledgement for unload the spindle with FC6

Start TRUE Transfer is started
DBB0
I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
PLC->NCK
NewToolMag 0 When unloading =0
serve serve tionin from tionin cate load NewToolLoc 0 When unloading =0
DBB4 d d g NC- g
Multi- Pro- Mag- OldToolMag DB71.DBW20 Source Mag. for unload
tool gram azine
OldToolLoc DB71.DBW22 Source Location for unload
Data Reserved Ack.
in sta- Status 1 Process finished
DBB5 DB10 tus 3
MultitoolLoc -1 When unloading =-1
71

DBW22 No. of loading station Example : Unload tool from spindle
DB71.DBW20 =9999
DB71.DBW24 =9998
DBW26 Location no. (source) for unloading/reloading/positioning
DB71.DBW26 =1
DB71.DBW30 =0
PLC-Program example for acknowledgement with FC6 NETWORK Start Transfer


Unload Spindle Start := DB150.DBX 16.0,//Start
TITLE =Ack unload interface 1
A DB71.DBX 4.1; //Unload active NewToolLoc := DB150.DBW 4,
L 1; Ready := DB150.DBX 16.1,
L 0;
T DB150.DBW 6; //Source magazine for unload L 0;
T DB150.DBW 8; //Source location for unload R DB150.DBX 16.0; //Reset start
L 1;
L -1;
T DB150.DBW 12;
M130: NOP 0;
Notes

Relocate tool
A magazine tool can be moved from one location to another

with the „Relocate“ dialogue.
1
2
1
1. Enter the desired location and confirm with OK -> Job to

PLC (DB71.DBX4.2=1).
1. Select the tool to be relocated.
2. Press softkey „Relocate“.
Example: Relocate a tool to the spindle Sequence for tool relocacte
“CUTTER1“
Job “Relocate“
L2
9999,2
G1
9998,2 1
L1 2
9999,1 M1 Magazine 1 Bring the correct magazine location to
Sp Spindle the load position and remove the tool
M1 G1 Gripper 1 from the magazine by hand.
G2 Gripper 2
Sp L1 Load loc. 1
9998,1 1 L2 Load loc. 2
2
G2
9998,3 “CUTTER1“
Bring the correct magazine location to
the load position and place the tool into
the magazine by hand.
Acknowledge the
“Relocate“ job
Notes

Job: Relocate tool DB71 Acknowledgement for Relocate tool with FC6

DBB0
PLC->NCK
I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
NewToolMag DB71.DBW28 Destination mag. for relocate
serve serve tionin from tionin cate load NewToolLoc DB71.DBW30 Destination loc. for relocate
DBB4 d d g NC- g
Multi- Pro- Mag- OldToolMag DB71.DBW24 Source mag. for relocate
tool gram azine
OldToolLoc DB71.DBW26 Source location for relocate
Data Reserved Ack.
in sta- Status 1/6 1: Process finished - relocate
DBB5 DB10 tus 3 within magazine 1
71 6: Process finished - relocate
to magazine 9998 with loca-
tion reservation.
DBW22 No. of loading station MultitoolLoc -1 When relocate =-1
DBW24 Magazine no. (source) for unloading/reloading/positioning
Example: Relocate the tool from location 9 to 5
DB71.DBW26 =9
DB71.DBW28 =1
DBW30 Location no. (target) for loading/reloading/positioning DB71.DBW30 =5
PLC program example for acknowledgment with FC6

NETWORK Start Transfer
NETWORK
TITLE =Ack relocate interface 1
Relocate tool CALL FC 6 (//Tool management transfer block
Start := DB150.DBX 16.0,//Start
A I 86.0; TaskIdent := DB150.DBB 0,
A DB71.DBX 0.0; //Interface 1 active TaskIdentNo := DB150.DBB 1,
A DB71.DBX 4.2; //Relocate active NewToolMag := DB150.DBW 2,//Pos new tool
FP M 150.4; NewToolLoc := DB150.DBW 4,
JCN M140; OldToolMag := DB150.DBW 6,//Pos old tool
L 1; OldToolLoc := DB150.DBW 8,
T DB150.DBB 0; //DB71 Status := DB150.DBW 10,//Status
L 1; MultitoolLoc := DB150.DBW 12,
T DB150.DBB 1; //Interface 1 Ready := DB150.DBX 16.1,
L DB71.DBW 28; Error := DB150.DBW 14);
T DB150.DBW 2; //Target magazine for relocate
L DB71.DBW 30; A DB150.DBX 16.1; //Poll ready
T DB150.DBW 4; //Target location for relocate R DB150.DBX 16.0; //Reset start
T DB150.DBW 6; //Source magazine for relocate L 0;
T DB150.DBW 8; //Source location for relocate R DB150.DBX 16.0; //Reset start
L DB71.DBW 28;
L W#16#270E;
<>I ;
JC M142; //Relocate to spindle? no->
L 6;
JU M141;
M142: L 1;
M141: L -1;
T DB150.DBW 12;
SET ;
M140: NOP 0;
Notes

Position magazine Example: Position the magazine to the load location
The „Position magzine“ dialogue is used to position a particu-

L2
lar magazine pocket to the load position. 9999,2
G1
9998,2
L1
Sp Spindle
M1 G1 Gripper 1
G2 Gripper 2
Sp L1 Load loc. 1
9998,1 L2 Load loc. 2
1 G2
9998,3
1. Select the magazine pocket.

2. Press the softkey “Position magazine“ -> Job to PLC
(DB71.DBX34.3=1).
Sequence: Position Magazine
Job “Position Magazine“
Position the magazine pocket

(DB71.DBW54/56) tot he load position.
Acknowledge the “Position

Magazine“ job
Notes

Job: Position magazine DB71 Acknowledgement: Position magazine with FC6

DBB0
PLC->NCK
I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
NewToolMag DB71.DBW58 Destination mag. for position-
ing
serve serve tionin from tionin cate load
DBB34 d d g NC- g NewToolLoc DB71.DBW60 Destination location for posi-
Multi- Pro- Mag- tioning
tool gram azine OldToolMag 0 When positioning =0
Data Reserved Ack. OldToolLoc 0 When positioning =0
in sta-
DBB35 DB10 tus 3 Status 5 Process finished
71
MultitoolLoc -1 When positioning =-1
Example: Bring magazine pocket 9 to the load position
DB71.DBW58 =9999
PLC program example for acknowledgement with FC6 NETWORK Start Transfer

Position magazine Start := DB150.DBX 16.0,//Start
TITLE =Ack position magazine inter-
face 2 TaskIdent := DB150.DBB 0,
TaskIdentNo := DB150.DBB 1,
A I 86.0; NewToolMag := DB150.DBW 2,//Pos new tool
A DB71.DBX 0.1; //Interface 2 active NewToolLoc := DB150.DBW 4,
A DB71.DBX 34.3; //Magazine pos. active OldToolMag := DB150.DBW 6,//Pos old tool
FP M 150.5; OldToolLoc := DB150.DBW 8,
JCN M150; Status := DB150.DBW 10,//Status
T DB150.DBB 0; //DB71 Ready := DB150.DBX 16.1,
L 2; Error := DB150.DBW 14);
T DB150.DBB 1; //Interface 2
L DB71.DBW 58; A DB150.DBX 16.1; //Poll ready
T DB150.DBW 2; //Target mag for position R DB150.DBX 16.0; //Reset start
T DB150.DBW 4; //Target loc for position L 0;
L 0; <>I ; //Evaluate error
T DB150.DBW 8;
L 5;
L -1;
T DB150.DBW 12;
M150: NOP 0;
Notes

Position Multitool Example: Position Multitool
With the dialogue „Multitool“, a Multitool already in the spindle

L2
can be positioned. 9999,2
G1
9998,2
L1
9999,1 M1 Magazine 1
1 Sp Spindle
1 M1 G1 Gripper 1
G2 Gripper 2
Sp L1 Load loc. 1
9998,1 L2 Load loc. 2
2 G2
9998,3
Note:
The Multitool can only be positioned after the tool offset has
been deselected with D0.
1. Select a Multitool location.

2. Press the softkey “Position multitool“ -> Job to PLC
(DB71.DBX4.5=1).
Sequence Position Multitool
Job “Position Multitool“
Position spindle to a Multitool location

(DB1071.DBW10)
Acknowledge Job “Position

Multitool“.
Notes

Job: Position Multitool DB71 Acknowledgement Position Multitool with FC6

DBB0
PLC->NCK
I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
NewToolMag -1 When positioning MT =-1
serve serve tionin from tionin cate load NewToolLoc -1 When positioning MT =-1
DBB4 d d g NC- g
Multi- Pro- Mag- OldToolMag -1 When positioning MT =-1
tool gram azine
OldToolLoc -1 When positioning MT =-1
Data Reserved Ack.
in sta- Status 5 Process finished
DBB5 DB10 tus 3
71 MultitoolLoc DB1071.DBW10 Multitool location
Data for Multitool DB1071 Example: Position Multitool to location 2

DB1071.DBW10 =2

DBW10 Multitool location number
PLC Program example for acknowledgement with FC6 NETWORK Start Transfer

Position Multitool Start := DB150.DBX 16.0,//Start
TITLE =Ack position Multitool in-
terface 1 TaskIdent := DB150.DBB 0,
A I 86.0; NewToolMag := DB150.DBW 2,//Pos new tool
A DB71.DBX 0.0; //Interface 1 active NewToolLoc := DB150.DBW 4,
A DB71.DBX 4.5; //Multitool pos. active OldToolMag := DB150.DBW 6,//Pos old tool
FP M 150.6; OldToolLoc := DB150.DBW 8,
JCN M160; Status := DB150.DBW 10,//Status
T DB150.DBB 0; //DB71 Ready := DB150.DBX 16.1,
L 1; Error := DB150.DBW 14);
L -1; A DB150.DBX 16.1; //Poll ready
T DB150.DBW 4; L DB150.DBW 14; //Error information
T DB150.DBW 6; L 0;
L 5; R DB150.DBX 16.0; //Reset start
L DB1071.DBW 10;
T DB150.DBW 12; //Multitool location
M160: NOP 0;
Notes

Interruption to the loading/unloading sequence Sequence load magazine
Example: Load a tool into the magazine

Job “Load“ (DB71 Interface 2)
“CUTTER1“
2 “Reset DB71“
acknowledge
Interrupt 1
L2
9999,2
G1
9998,2 Position the correct magazine location
(DB71.DBW58/60) to the load location
L1
Sp Spindle
M1 G1 Gripper 1 2
G2 Gripper 2
Sp L1 Load loc. 1
Place the tool into the magazine by
9998,1 L2 Load loc. 2
hand
G2
9998,3
Examples of what can cause the loading sequence to be

aborted Acknowledge the “Load“ job
- Reset
- E-Stop
- Power failure
Job: Load magazine DB71 Acknowledgement Reset DB71 with FC6

DBB0
I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1 TaskIdent 1 DB71 interface
PLC->NCK
I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
NewToolMag -1 When process abort =-1
serve serve tion- from tionin cate load NewToolLoc -1 When process abort =-1
DBB34 d d ing NC- g
Multi- Pro- Mag- OldToolMag -1 When process abort =-1
tool gram azine
OldToolLoc -1 When process abort =-1
Data Reserved Ack
in Sta- Status 3 Process aborted
DBB35 DB10 tus 3
71 MultitoolLoc -1 When process abort =-1

Example: Load tool to magazine location 9
DB71.DBW54 =0
DB71.DBW58 =1
Notes

PLC Programming example with acknowledgement using FC6 User data block DB150
NETWORK Reset Interface 1

TITLE =Ack Reset DB71 Interface 1
A I 86.7;
A DB71.DBX 0.0; //Interface 1 active
FP M 153.0;
JCN M300;
L 1;
T DB150.DBB 0; //DB71
L 1;
L -1;
T DB150.DBW 2;
T DB150.DBW 4;
T DB150.DBW 6;
T DB150.DBW 8;
L 3;
L -1;
T DB150.DBW 12;
M300: NOP 0;
NETWORK Reset Interface 2

TITLE =Ack Reset DB71 Interface 2
A I 86.7;
FP M 153.1;
JCN M310;
L 1;
T DB150.DBB 0; //DB71
L 2;
L -1;
T DB150.DBW 2;
T DB150.DBW 4;
T DB150.DBW 6;
T DB150.DBW 8;
L 3;
L -1;
T DB150.DBW 12;
M310: NOP 0;

CALL FC 6 (//Tool management transfer block

NewToolMag := DB150.DBW 2,//Pos new tool Note:
NewToolLoc := DB150.DBW 4,
OldToolMag := DB150.DBW 6,//Pos old tool By directly writing to parameter $TC_MPP6[magazine
OldToolLoc := DB150.DBW 8,
Status := DB150.DBW 10,//Status No.,location No.] = 0, a tool can be removed from this maga-
MultitoolLoc := DB150.DBW 12, zine location (whether it is a real magazine, buffer or loading
Ready := DB150.DBX 16.1, magazine). All reservations of the removed tool are automati-
Error := DB150.DBW 14);
cally deleted.
A DB150.DBX 16.1; //Poll ready This does not involve an associated command output to the
R DB150.DBX 16.0; //Reset start PLC.
L DB150.DBW 14; //Error information
L 0;
<>I ; //Evaluate error
R DB150.DBX 16.0; //Reset start
Notes

Acknowledgement using DB71 Job: Load magazine Interface 2 DB71
Example: Load a tool into the magazine DB71 Loading / unloading points (NCK→PLC)
“CUTTER1“ DBB0
I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
2 DBB2 Standard end acknowledgement
PLC->NCK
I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
L2
9999,2 Re- Re- Posi- Order Posi- Relo- Un- Load
G1
9998,2 serve serve tionin from tionin cate load
DBB34 d d g NC- g
L1 Multi- Pro- Mag-
9999,1 1 M1 Magazine 1 tool gram azine
Sp Spindle
M1 G1 Gripper 1 Data Reserved Ack.
G2 Gripper 2 in sta-
Sp L1 Load loc. 1 DBB35 DB10 tus 3
9998,1 L2 Load loc. 2 71
G2 DBW50 Identification for loading station (fixed value 9999)

9998,3
Example: Load tool to magazine location 9 DBW54 Magazine no. (source) for unloading/reloading/positioning
DB71.DBW54 =0 DBW56 Location no. (source) for unloading/reloading/positioning
DB71.DBW56 =0
DB71.DBW58 =1 DBW58 Magazine no. (target) for loading/reloading/positioning
DB71.DBW60 =9 DBW60 Location no. (target) for loading/reloading/positioning
PLC Program example with acknowledgement using DB71
NETWORK NETWORK Ack DB71 Interface 2

Ack DB71 Interface 1 TITLE =Ack DB71 Interface 2
TITLE =Ack DB71 Interface 1
A I 86.0; A I 86.0;
O I 3.7; O I 3.7;
A DB71.DBX 0.0; //Interface 1 active A DB71.DBX 0.1; //Interface 2 active
= DB71.DBX 2.0; //Ack Interface 1 = DB71.DBX 2.1; //Ack Interface 2
NETWORK NETWORK Reset Interface 2

TITLE =Reset DB71 Interface 1
Reset Interface 1 TITLE =Reset DB71 Interface 2
A I 86.7; A I 86.7;
= DB71.DBX 5.0; //Status 3 = DB71.DBX 35.0; //Status 3
Notes

Sequence for Tool Change Procedure:
- Set up the machine data for the tool change

The tool change is done at the change location, which is
specified in the magazine configuration.
- Generate the tool change program L6
DB72 contains an interface area for each change location
- Write the PLC program for acknowledgment of the tool
which has been configured.
change commands
- Prepare tool change

Each interface is set up to handle these following Tool Man-
- Tool change sequence
agement situations:
- Hand tools
- Coordination between hand and magazine tools
- Prepare tool change
- Interruption to the tool change
- Execute tool change (triggered via M06)
- Recovery functions after an interruption
In order to inform the Tool Management of tool movements

the following functions are used in the machine PLC program
FC6 (Multitool) and FC8. Standard end acknowledgment via
DB72 is also available.
Set up the machine data for the tool change Programming the tool change
TEST_PROGRAM.MPF
Tool change with M function N10
N20
MD22550 = 1 An M function is used to start the „Tool N30 T=“CUTTER1” Prepare for change (PLC)
Change“ phase, which M function is speci- N40
fied by MD 22560. N50
Tool change program
The T command starts the „Prepare Tool“ N60 M06
L6 is called
phase. N70
MD22560 = 206 M Function for Tool Change N80
This M function triggers the start of the tool N90
change process. N100 M30 Program end
Tool change program L6
MD10715 = 6 This is the M function which calls a subpro-

gram to be called. The name of the subpro-
gram is given in MD10716.
MD10716 = L6 The name of the subprogram which is
called when the M function specified in
MD10715 is programmed.
The tool change program, L6 is called whenever M6 is pro-

grammed.
Notes

Allow hand tools Suppress alarm output for hand tools
MD22562 Response to tool change errors MD11415 Suppression of alarm output

Standard behaviour: During the tool change
preparation only those tools are recognized Bit 16 = 0 Alarms 17212, 17214, 17215, 17216 for
whose data are assigned to a magazine. hand tools are not masked out
Bit 1 = 1 Manual tools permitted
Bit16=0 No masked out alarms for hand tools
Bit16=1 Masked out alarms for hand tools
Hand tools
- 17212 ”Load hand tool to spindle/tool holder”
The NC part program can also call tools which are not as-
- 17214 ”Remove hand tool from spindle/tool holder”
signed to a magazine. Such tools need to be manually loaded
- 17215 ”Remove hand tool from buffer location”
into the machine (e.g. directly into the spindle) for the dura-
- 17216 ”Remove hand tool from tool holder and load hand
tion of their use. When the program has finished with the
tool”
hand tool ,it has to be manually removed from the machine.
Tool Management uses DB72.DBX4.5 and DBX4.6 to inform

Ignore location reservation with asynchronous Transfer
the PLC program that a hand tool is involved in the change.
The machine operator gets one of these alarms 17212,
17214, 17215 ,17216 to warn that manual action is needed to MD20310 Activation of Tool Management
make the tool change. The alarms are reset when the PLC
program acknowledges the tool change. Bit 24 = 1 Asynchronous transfer command no. 8 and
9: Ignore location reservation
The location reservation of the tool in the magazine will be

ignored. Thus it is possible to move a tool to this location (e.g.
via asynchronous transfer).
Generate the tool change program L6 Variables associated with the L6 program
Variable Explanation
The L6, tool change program has to take the machine layout
into consideration. The L6 program is stored in the manufac- GETSELT Read the T number of the prepared tool
turer cycles or the user cycles directory of the control .
$TC_MPP6 T no. of tool in specified magazine loca-
tion
$P_TMNOIS The internal number (1-32000) applies to
a:
=0: Multitool
=1: Normal tool
=2: Magazine
$TC_MTPP6 T number of the tool on this Multitool
location
$TC_MTP_POS Multitool location
$P_TOOL Active cutting edge number
$A_MYMTN Number of the Multitools which contains
this tool.
$TC_MTP8 Multitool status
- Bit 15=1: Hand tool
$TC_TP8 Tool status
- Bit 15=1: Hand tool
$P_SEARCH Block search is active
Notes

Example of an L6, tool change program
;ToolChange Cycle (example) ;

; ;
; ;oldTool in Multitool ?
; T_Spi=$TC_MPP6[9998,1] Old tool in Mul-
def int T_Prep, T_No, T_Spi, D_No, D_act, MT_No if T_Spi>=1 titool?
def int MT_Position=-1 if $P_TMNOIS[T_Spi]==0
def bool new_Multitool=false, old_Multitool=false, old_Multitool=true
new_Manualtool=false, old_Manualtool=false else
; old_Multitool=false
; endif
; ;
;-- read and check prepared and active Tool, read active D ;oldTool==manualTool ?
-Number -- if old_Multitool==true
GETSELT(T_Prep) if $TC_MTP8[T_Spi] B_and 'B1000000000000000'
T_No=$TC_MPP6[9998,1] old_Manualtool=true
if T_No>=1 else Old tool hand
if $P_TMNOIS[T_No]==0 ;Multitool old_Manualtool=false
T_Spi=$TC_MTPP6[T_No,$TC_MTP_POS[T_No]] endif
tool?
else else
T_Spi=T_No Read which tool is if $TC_TP8[T_Spi] B_and 'B1000000000000000'
endif old_Manualtool=true
endif coming and which tool else
; is in the spindle right old_Manualtool=false
D_act=$P_TOOL now . endif
; endif
; endif
if T_Prep==-1 ;
;in case of MD22562 $MC_Tool_Change_Error_Mode Bit0==1 ;
; ;---------------------------------------------------------
;machine function for special or alternative ToolChange ;--- start ToolChange ---
; ;--- machine functions for ToolChange ---
endif ;---------------------------------------------------------
; ;
; if $P_SEARCH==false
;prepared Tool in spindle: set D-Number and goto End ;
if T_Prep==T_Spi ;axis to ToolChange Position Position axes/
D_No=D_act New tool already in the G90 G00 D0 G53 Z0 spindle
gotof Corr spindle? ;
endif endif
; ;
;T0 programmed and no Tool in Spindle: set D-Number and ;
goto End M206 ;ToolChange M-code
Tool change -> PLC
if((T_Prep==0)and(T_Spi==0)) T0/Spindle emp- ;
D_No=0 ty? ;
gotof Corr ;D0 and goto End D_No=1 ;for example
endif ; Activate D-No.
; ;
; if $P_SEARCH==false
;newTool in Multitool ;
if T_Prep>=1 ;further machine functions
if $A_MYMTN[T_Prep]>=1 Is new tool in ;
new_Multitool=true Multitool? endif
MT_No=$A_MYMTN[T_Prep] ;
else ;
new_Multitool=false ;---------------------------------------------------------
endif ;--- choose D-Number and End
; ;---------------------------------------------------------
;newTool==manualTool ? ;
if new_Multitool==true Corr:stopre
if $TC_MTP8[MT_No] B_and 'B1000000000000000' ;
new_Manualtool=true if $P_SEARCH==false
else New tool hand ; Position axes/
new_Manualtool=false tool? ;move axis to start position spindle
endif G90 G00 G53 Z0
endif ;
if new_Multitool==false endif
if $TC_TP8[T_Prep] B_and 'B1000000000000000' ;
new_Manualtool=true D=D_No Activate D-No.
else ;
new_Manualtool=false ;
endif msg("")
endif M17
endif
Notes

Prepare tool change Example: Prepare tool change
L2
Programming 9999,2
G1 T=“CUTTER1“
9998,2
TEST_PROGRAM.MPF
L1 M1 Magazine 1
N10 9999,1 1
N20 Sp Spindle
N30 M1 G1 Gripper 1
G2 Gripper 2
N40 L1 Load loc. 1
N50 T=“CUTTER1” Prepare Tool –> PLC Sp
9998,1 L2 Load loc. 2
N60
N70 2
G2
N80 9998,3
N90
N100 M06 -> Call L6, do tool change Update Tool list
N110
N120
N130
N140
N150
N160 M30 Program end
Prepare for tool change -> Job to PLC (DB72.DBX4.2=1).
Sequence for prepare tool change Note
For a 1:1 change the new and old tools must satisfy all these
conditions:
Job “Prepare change“
- Neither tool is fixed location
- Both tools have the same size
1 - Both tools have the same location type
Position the magazine to the location

(DB72.DBW24/26) for the new tool
Acknowledge the “Prepare

change “ job
Update magazine position

-> Asynchronous transfer
Notes

Job: Prepare tool change Acknowledgement for prepare tool change with FC6

DBB0 TaskIdent 2 DB72 Interface
I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1

PLC->NCK I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1 NewToolMag DB72.DBW24 Source magazine for prepare
Tool Re- Load OldT T0 Pre- Per- Com tool change
remove man- in pare form pulso
main manual buffer chan chan ry NewToolLoc DB72.DBW26 Source location for prepare
DBB4 s in ual tool no (n ge ge chan tool change
spin- tool -42) (initia ge
dle te: OldToolMag DB72.DBW20 Destination magazine for pre-
M06) pare tool change
Data Reserved OldToolLoc DB72.DBW22 Destination location for pre-
Ack pare tool change
DBB5 in
Sta-
DB10
tus 3
Status 1 Process finished
72
MultitoolLoc -1 When prepare change =-1
DBW20 Buffer identification (fixed value 9998)
DBW22 Location in buffer

NETWORK Prepare change
DBW24 Magazine no. (source) for new tool TITLE =Ack prepare tool change
DBW26 Location no. (source) for new tool A I 86.0;

DBW28 Magazine no. (target) for old tool AN DB72.DBX 4.1;
A DB72.DBX 4.2; //Prepare active
DBW30 Location no. (target) for old tool FP M 151.0;
JCN M180;
Tool status for tool new L 2;
T DB150.DBB 0; //DB72
1:1 to be L 1;
DBB42 Man- Mas- to be ID
Chan un- disa- T DB150.DBB 1; //Interface 1
ual ter load- for L DB72.DBW 24;
ge loade bled
tool tool ed tool T DB150.DBW 2; //Source magazine for prepare
d
L DB72.DBW 26;
T DB150.DBW 4; //Source location for prepare
Example: 1:1 change Example: Not 1:1 Change L DB72.DBW 28;
DB72.DBW24 =1 DB72.DBW24 =1 OW W#16#0;
DB72.DBW26 =10 DB72.DBW26 =10 JN M182; //Tool in spindle? yes->
T DB150.DBW 6;
DB72.DBW28 =1 DB72.DBW28 =1 T DB150.DBW 8;
DB72.DBW30 =10 DB72.DBW30 =4 JU M181;
DB72.DBX42.6=1 DB72.DBX42.6=0 M182: L DB72.DBW 20;
T DB150.DBW 6; //Target magazine for prepare
L DB72.DBW 22;
T DB150.DBW 8; //Target location for prepare
M181: L 1;
L -1;
T DB150.DBW 12;
M180: NOP 0;
Notes

Asynchronous transfer (Update magazine position) PLC programming example for acknowledgement with FC6
NETWORK Prepare change

FC6 Parameter Explanation TITLE =Ack. prepare tool change
...

TaskIdent 4 Asynchronous transfer NETWORK Update mag. pos.
TITLE =Update magazine position
TaskIdentNo 1 Channel 1 ...
NewToolMag DB72.DBW24 Destination magazine for tool

NewToolLoc DB72.DBW26 Destination location for tool NETWORK Start Transfer
OldToolMag 9998 Source magazine of tool
OldToolLoc 1 Source location of tool Start := DB150.DBX 16.0,//Start
Status 5 Process finished TaskIdentNo := DB150.DBB 1,
NewToolMag := DB150.DBW 2,//Pos new tool
MultitoolLoc -1 Multitool position NewToolLoc := DB150.DBW 4,
OldToolMag := DB150.DBW 6,//Pos old tool
Status := DB150.DBW 10,//Status
NETWORK
Update mag. pos. MultitoolLoc := DB150.DBW 12,
Ready := DB150.DBX 16.1,
A I 86.1;
FP M 155.0;
A DB150.DBX 16.1; //Poll ready
JCN M500;
L 4;
T DB150.DBB 0; //Asynchronous transfer
L 0;
L 1;
T DB150.DBB 1; //Channel 1
L 9998;
T DB150.DBW 6; //Tool, from magazine
L 1;
T DB150.DBW 8; //Tool, from location
L DB72.DBW 24;
OW W#16#0; User data block DB150
JN M502; //T0? no->
L DB72.DBW 28;
T DB150.DBW 2; //Tool, to magazine
L DB72.DBW 30;
T DB150.DBW 4; //Tool, to location
JU M501;
M502: L DB72.DBW 24;
L DB72.DBW 26;
M501: L 5;
L -1;
T DB150.DBW 12;
M500: NOP 0;
Notes

Asynchronous transfer (Update magazine position old tool) Asynchronous transfer (Update magazine position new tool)
FC6 Parameter Explanation FC6 Parameter Explanation
Start TRUE Transfer is started Start TRUE Transfer is started

TaskIdent 4 Asynchronous transfer TaskIdent 4 Asynchronous transfer
TaskIdentNo 1 Channel 1 TaskIdentNo 1 Channel 1
NewToolMag DB72.DBW28 Destination magazine for tool NewToolMag DB72.DBW24 Destination magazine for tool
NewToolLoc DB72.DBW30 Destination location for tool NewToolLoc DB72.DBW26 Destination location for tool
OldToolMag 9998 Source magazine of tool OldToolMag 9998 Source magazine of tool
OldToolLoc 1 Source location of tool OldToolLoc 1 Source location of tool
Status 5 Process finished Status 5 Process finished
MultitoolLoc -1 Multitool position MultitoolLoc -1 Multitool position
NETWORK Update mag. pos. old tool NETWORK

Update mag. Pos. new tool
old tool new tool
A I 87.1; A I 87.4;
FP M 155.1; FP M 155.2;
JCN M510; JCN M520;
L 4; L 4;
T DB150.DBB 0; //Asynchronous transfer T DB150.DBB 0; //Asynchronous transfer
L 1; L 1;
T DB150.DBB 1; //Channel 1 T DB150.DBB 1; //Channel 1
L 9998; L 9998;
T DB150.DBW 6; //Tool, from magazine T DB150.DBW 6; //Tool, from magazine
L 1; L 1;
T DB150.DBW 8; //Tool, from location T DB150.DBW 8; //Tool, from location
L DB72.DBW 28; L DB72.DBW 24;
OW W#16#0; OW W#16#0;
JN M511; //Tool in spindle? yes-> JN M521; //T0? no->
JU M510; JU M520;
M511: L DB72.DBW 28; M521: L DB72.DBW 24;
T DB150.DBW 2; //Tool, to magazine T DB150.DBW 2; //Tool, to magazine
T DB150.DBW 4; //Tool, to location T DB150.DBW 4; //Tool, to location
L 5; L 5;
T DB150.DBW 10; //Status 5 T DB150.DBW 10; //Status 5
L -1; L -1;
T DB150.DBW 12; T DB150.DBW 12;
S DB150.DBX 16.0; //Start FC6 S DB150.DBX 16.0; //Start FC6
M510: NOP 0; M520: NOP 0;
Notes

Sequence for tool change Example: Tool change with 1:1 change
L2
Programming 9999,2
G1 T=“CUTTER1“
9998,2
TEST_PROGRAM.MPF
L1 2 1 M1 Magazin 1
N10 9999,1
N20 Sp Spindle
N30 M1 G1 Gripper 1
1 2 G2 Gripper 2
N40 L1 Load Location 1
N50 T=“CUTTER1” Prepare tool Sp
9998,1 L2 Load Location 2
N60
N70 G2
N80 9998,3
N90
N100 M06 -> L6 Do tool change -> PLC
N110
N120
N130
N140
N150
Tool change -> Job to PLC (DB72.DBX4.1=1).
Sequence: Tool change with 1:1 change Note:
For a 1:1 change the new and old tools must satisfy all these
conditions:
Job “Execute tool change“
- Neither tool is fixed location
- Both tools have the same size
1 - Both tools have the same location type
Old tool from spindle to gripper 2 and

new tool from magazine to gripper 1
-> intermediate acknowledgement
(Mag -> Gr1, Sp -> Gr2)
Old tool from gripper 2 to magazine

and new tool from gripper 1 to spindle
-> intermediate acknowledgement
(Gr 1 -> Sp, Gr 2 -> Mag)
Acknowledge “Execute tool

change “ job
Notes

Job: Execute tool change Intermediate acknowledgement (Mag -> Gr 1, Sp -> Gr 2)

DBB0 TaskIdent 2 DB72 Interface
I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1

I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
PLC->NCK NewToolMag 9998 Source magazine of new tool
Tool Re- Load OldT T0 Pre- Per- Com
remove man- in pare form pulso NewToolLoc 2 Source location of new tool
main manual buffer chan ry
DBB4 s in ual tool no (n chan ge chan
spin- tool (initia ge OldToolMag 9998 Destination magazine for old
-42) ge
dle te: tool
M06)
OldToolLoc 3 Destination location for old
Data Reserved tool
Ack
DBB5 in
Sta-
Status 105 Intermediate positions
DB10 reached
tus 3
72 MultitoolLoc -1 Multitool position
NETWORK Mag -> Gr 1, Sp -> Gr 2
DBW22 Location in buffer TITLE =Intermediate ack M1 -> Gr1,
Sp -> Gr2
DBW24 Magazine no. (source) for new tool
A I 86.2;
DBW26 Location no. (source) for new tool A DB72.DBX 0.0; //Interface 1 active
A DB72.DBX 4.1; //Change active
DBW28 Magazine no. (target) for old tool A DB72.DBX 4.2;
FP M 152.0;
DBW30 Location no. (target) for old tool JCN M200;
L 2;
Tool status for tool new T DB150.DBB 0; //DB72
L 1;
1:1 to be
DBB42 Man- Mas- to be ID T DB150.DBB 1; //Interface 1
Chan un- disa- L DB72.DBW 24;
ual ter load- for
ge loade bled OW W#16#0;
tool tool ed tool
d JN M204; //T0? no->
T DB150.DBW 2;
Example: Tool change with 1:1 change T DB150.DBW 4;
JU M203;
DB72.DBW24 =1 M204: L 9998;
DB72.DBW26 =10 T DB150.DBW 2; //Source magazine of new tool
DB72.DBW28 =1 L 2;
T DB150.DBW 4; //Source location of new tool
DB72.DBW30 =10 M203: L DB72.DBW 28;
DB72.DBX42.6=1 OW W#16#0;
JN M202; //Tool in spindle? yes->
T DB150.DBW 6;
T DB150.DBW 8;
The job remains unchanged, the tools are still in their respec- JU M201;
tive starting positions. M202: L 9998;
T DB150.DBW 6; //Target magazine for old tool
L 3;
T DB150.DBW 8; //Target location for old tool
M201: L 105;
L -1;
T DB150.DBW 12;
SET ;
M200: NOP 0;
Notes

Intermediate acknowledgement (Gr 1 -> Mag, Gr 2 -> Sp) Acknowledgement for “Execute Change“ with FC6

TaskIdent 2 DB72 Interface TaskIdent 2 DB72 Interface
TaskIdentNo 1 Interface 1 TaskIdentNo 1 Interface 1
NewToolMag DB72.DBW20 Source magazine of new tool NewToolMag DB72.DBW20 Source magazine of new
tool
NewToolLoc DB72.DBW22 Source location of new tool
OldToolMag DB72.DBW28 Destination magazine for old OldToolMag DB72.DBW28 Destination magazine for
tool old tool
OldToolLoc DB72.DBW30 Destination location for old OldToolLoc DB72.DBW30 Destination location for old
tool tool
Status 105 Intermediate positions Status 1 Process finished
reached
MultitoolLoc -1 Multitool position MultitoolLoc DB1072.DBW10 Multitool position
NETWORK Gr 1 -> Sp, Gr 2 -> Mag NETWORK Final Acknowledge

TITLE =Intermediate ack Gr1 -> Sp, TITLE =Ack perform change
Gr2 -> Mag
A I 86.4;
A I 86.3; A DB72.DBX 0.0; //Interface 1 active
A DB72.DBX 0.0; //Interface 1 active A DB72.DBX 4.1; //Change active
A DB72.DBX 4.1; //Change active A DB72.DBX 4.2;
A DB72.DBX 4.2; FP M 151.1;
FP M 152.1; JCN M190;
JCN M210; L 2;
L 2; T DB150.DBB 0; //DB72
T DB150.DBB 0; //DB72 L 1;
L 1; T DB150.DBB 1; //Interface 1
T DB150.DBB 1; //Interface 1 L DB72.DBW 24;
L DB72.DBW 24; OW W#16#0;
OW W#16#0; JN M194; //T0? no->
JN M214; //T0? no-> T DB150.DBW 2;
T DB150.DBW 2; T DB150.DBW 4;
T DB150.DBW 4; JU M193;
JU M213; M194: L DB72.DBW 20;
M214: L DB72.DBW 20; T DB150.DBW 2; //Source magazine of new tool
T DB150.DBW 2; //Source magazine of new tool L DB72.DBW 22;
L DB72.DBW 22; T DB150.DBW 4; //Source location of new tool
T DB150.DBW 4; //Source location of new tool M193: L DB72.DBW 28;
M213: L DB72.DBW 28; T DB150.DBW 6; //Target magazine for old tool
OW W#16#0; L DB72.DBW 30;
JN M212; //Tool in spindle? yes-> T DB150.DBW 8; //Target location for old tool
T DB150.DBW 6; L 1;
T DB150.DBW 8; T DB150.DBW 10; //Status 1
JU M211; A DB72.DBX 5.7;
M212: L DB72.DBW 28; JC M192;
T DB150.DBW 6; //Target magazine for old tool L -1;
L DB72.DBW 30; T DB150.DBW 12;
T DB150.DBW 8; //Target location for old tool JU M191;
M211: L 105; M192: L DB1072.DBW 10;
T DB150.DBW 10; //Status 105 T DB150.DBW 12; //Multitool location
L -1; M191: SET ;
T DB150.DBW 12; S DB150.DBX 16.0; //Start FC6
SET ; M190: NOP 0;
M210: NOP 0;
Notes

PLC programming example for acknowledgement with FC6
NETWORK Mag -> Gr 1, Sp -> Gr 2

TITLE =Intermediate ack M1 -> Gr1,
Sp -> Gr2
...
NETWORK Gr 1 -> Sp, Gr 2 -> Mag

TITLE =Intermediate ack Gr1 -> Sp,
Gr2 -> Mag
...
NETWORK Final Acknowledge

TITLE =Ack perform change
...


MultitoolLoc := DB150.DBW 12,

L 0;
User data block DB150
Notes

Example: Tool change not 1:1 change Job: Execute tool change
L2
9999,2 DB72 Signals from spindle (NCK->PLC)
G1 T=“CUTTER1“
9998,2 Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
L1 Interface (I) active

5 4 3 M1 Magazine 1
DBB0
9999,1 Sp Spindle I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
M1 G1 Gripper 1
1 2 G2 Gripper 2 DBB2 Standard end acknowledgement
Sp L1 Load loc. 1 PLC->NCK I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
9998,1 L2 Load loc. 2
remove man- in pare form pulso
G2 main manual buffer chan ry
9998,3 DBB4 s in ual tool no (n chan ge chan
spin- tool -42) ge (initia ge
dle te:
M06)
Sequence for non-1:1 tool change Reserved
Data
Ack
DBB5 in
Sta-
DB10
tus 3
Job “Execute tool change“ 72
1 DBW22 Location in buffer
DBW24 Magazine no. (source) for new tool

Old tool from spindle to gripper 2
-> Intermediate acknowledgement DBW26 Location no. (source) for new tool
(Sp -> Gr 2) Magazine no. (target) for old tool
DBW28
2 DBW30 Location no. (target) for old tool

Old tool from gripper 2 to magazine 1:1 to be
-> Intermediate acknowledgement DBB42 Man- Chan Mas- to be ID
un- disa-
(Gr 2 -> Mag) ual ge ter load- for
loade bled
tool tool ed tool
d
3
Example: Tool change not 1:1 change
Position magazine to new tool location DB72.DBW24 =1
(DB72.DBW24/26) DB72.DBW26 =10
DB72.DBW28 =1
DB72.DBW30 =4
4 DB72.DBX42.6=0
New tool from magazine to gripper 1

-> Intermediate acknowledgement The job remains unchanged , the tools are still in their
(Mag -> Gr 1)
New tool from gripper 1 to spindle

-> Intermediate acknowledgement
(Gr 1 -> Sp)

change“ job
Notes

Intermediate acknowledgement (Sp -> Gr 2) Intermediate acknowledgement (Gr 2 -> Mag)

NewToolMag 0 Source magazine of new tool NewToolMag 0 Source magazine of new tool
NewToolLoc 0 Source location of new tool NewToolLoc 0 Source location of new tool
OldToolMag 9998 Destination magazine for old OldToolMag DB72.DBW28 Destination magazine for old
tool tool
OldToolLoc 3 Destination location for old OldToolLoc DB72.DBW30 Destination location for old
tool tool
Status 105 Intermediate positions Status 105 Intermediate positions
reached reached
NETWORK Sp -> Gr 2 NETWORK

TITLE =Intermediate ack Sp -> Gr2 Gr 2 -> Mag
TITLE =Intermediate ack Gr2 -> M1
A I 87.2; A I 87.3;
A DB72.DBX 4.1; //Change active A DB72.DBX 4.1; //Change active
A DB72.DBX 4.2; A DB72.DBX 4.2;
FP M 152.2; FP M 152.3;
JCN M220; JCN M230;
L 2; L 2;
T DB150.DBB 0; //DB72 T DB150.DBB 0; //DB72
L 1; L 1;
T DB150.DBB 1; //Interface 1 T DB150.DBB 1; //Interface 1
OW W#16#0; OW W#16#0;
JN M224; //T0? no-> JN M234; //T0? no->
JU M223; JU M233;
M224: L -1; M234: L -1;
T DB150.DBW 2; //Source magazine of new tool T DB150.DBW 2; //Source magazine of new tool
M223: L DB72.DBW 28; M233: L DB72.DBW 28;
OW W#16#0; OW W#16#0;
JN M222; //Tool in spindle? yes-> JN M232; //Tool in spindle? yes->
JU M221; JU M231;
M222: L 9998; M232: L DB72.DBW 28;
T DB150.DBW 6; //Target magazine for old tool T DB150.DBW 6; //Target magazine for old tool
L 3; L DB72.DBW 30;
T DB150.DBW 8; //Target location for old tool T DB150.DBW 8; //Target location for old tool
M221: L 105; M231: L 105;
L -1; L -1;
T DB150.DBW 12; T DB150.DBW 12;
SET ; SET ;
M220: NOP 0; M230: NOP 0;
Notes

Intermediate acknowledgement (Mag -> Gr 1) Intermediate acknowledgement (Gr 1 -> Sp)

NewToolMag 9998 Source magazine of new tool NewToolMag DB72.DBW20 Source magazine of new tool
NewToolLoc 2 Source location of new tool NewToolLoc DB72.DBW22 Source location of new tool
OldToolMag 0 Destination magazine for old OldToolMag 0 Destination magazine for old
tool tool
OldToolLoc 0 Destination location for old OldToolLoc 0 Destination location for old
tool tool
Status 105 Intermediate positions Status 105 Intermediate positions
reached reached
NETWORK Mag -> Gr 1 NETWORK Gr 1 -> Sp

TITLE =Intermediate ack M1 -> Gr1 TITLE =Intermediate ack Gr1 -> Sp
A I 87.5; A I 87.6;
A DB72.DBX 4.1; //Change active A DB72.DBX 4.1; //Change active
A DB72.DBX 4.2; A DB72.DBX 4.2;
FP M 152.4; FP M 152.5;
JCN M240; JCN M250;
L 2; L 2;
T DB150.DBB 0; //DB72 T DB150.DBB 0; //DB72
L 1; L 1;
T DB150.DBB 1; //Interface 1 T DB150.DBB 1; //Interface 1
OW W#16#0; OW W#16#0;
JN M244; //T0? no-> JN M254; //T0? no->
JU M243; JU M253;
M244: L 9998; M254: L DB72.DBW 20;
T DB150.DBW 2; //Source magazine of new tool T DB150.DBW 2; //Source magazine of new tool
L 2; L DB72.DBW 22;
T DB150.DBW 4; //Source location of new tool T DB150.DBW 4; //Source location of new tool
M243: L DB72.DBW 28; M253: L DB72.DBW 28;
OW W#16#0; OW W#16#0;
JN M242; //Tool in spindle? yes-> JN M252; //Tool in spindle? yes->
JU M241; JU M251;
M242: L -1; M252: L -1;
T DB150.DBW 6; //Target magazine for old tool T DB150.DBW 6; //Target magazine for old tool
M241: L 105; M251: L 105;
L -1; L -1;
T DB150.DBW 12; T DB150.DBW 12;
SET ; SET ;
M240: NOP 0; M250: NOP 0;
Notes

Acknowledgement for „Execute tool change“ with FC6 PLC programming example for acknowledgement with FC6
NETWORK Sp -> Gr 2
FC6 Parameter Explanation TITLE =Intermediate ack Sp -> Gr2
...

TaskIdent 2 DB72 Interface NETWORK Gr 2 -> Mag
TITLE =Intermediate ack Gr2 -> M1
TaskIdentNo 1 Interface 1 ...
NewToolMag DB72.DBW20 Source magazine of new

tool
NewToolLoc DB72.DBW22 Source location of new tool NETWORK Mag -> Gr 1
TITLE =Intermediate ack M1 -> Gr1
OldToolMag DB72.DBW28 Destination magazine for ...
old tool
OldToolLoc DB72.DBW30 Destination location for old
tool
NETWORK Gr 1 -> Sp
Status 1 Process finished TITLE =Intermediate ack Gr1 -> Sp
...
MultitoolLoc DB1072.DBW10 Multitool position
NETWORK Final Acknowledge NETWORK Final Acknowledge

TITLE =Ack perform change TITLE =Ack perform change
...
A I 87.7;
A DB72.DBX 4.1; //Change active
A DB72.DBX 4.2;
FP M 156.1;
JCN M690;
L 2;
T DB150.DBB 0; //DB72
L 1;
L DB72.DBW 24;
OW W#16#0; NewToolMag := DB150.DBW 2,//Pos new tool
JN M694; //T0? no->
T DB150.DBW 2;
T DB150.DBW 4;
JU M693;
M694: L DB72.DBW 20;
T DB150.DBW 2; //Source magazine of new tool
L DB72.DBW 22;
T DB150.DBW 4; //Source location of new tool
M693: L DB72.DBW 28;
L DB72.DBW 30;
L 0;
L 1;
A DB72.DBX 5.7;
JC M692;
L -1;
T DB150.DBW 12;
JU M691;
M692: L DB1072.DBW 10;
M691: SET ;
M690: NOP 0;
Notes

Hand tools Example: Change hand tool
Programming
L2
9999,2
TEST_PROGRAM.MPF G1
9998,2
N10
N20 L1 M1 Magazine 1
N30 9999,1 Sp Spindle
N40 G1 Gripper 1
M1
N50 T=“CUTTER1” Prepare tool G2 Gripper 2
N60 Sp L1 Load loc. 1
N70 9998,1 L2 Load loc. 2
N80
N90 G2
N100 M06 -> L6 Do tool change -> PLC 1 2 9998,3
N110
N120
N130 T=“CUTTER1“
N140
N150
Tool change -> Job to PLC (DB72.DBX4.1=1 and

DB72.DBX4.5/4.6=1).
Sequence for hand tool Note:
A hand tool only exists as such if it is called out in the part

program, and at that time is not loaded in a magazine.
Take old hand tool out of the spindle
Place new hand tool in the spindle

change “ job
Notes

Job: Execute tool change DB72 PLC programming example for acknowledgement with FC6
Signals from spindle (NCK->PLC) NETWORK Execute change

DB72 TITLE =Ack perform change
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 A I 87.7;
Interface (I) active A DB72.DBX 4.1; //Change active
DBB0 A DB72.DBX 4.2;
I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
FP M 156.1;
DBB2 Standard end acknowledgement JCN M690;
L 2;
PLC->NCK I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1 T DB150.DBB 0; //DB72
L 1;
Tool Re- Load OldT T0 Pre- Per- Com T DB150.DBB 1; //Interface 1
remove man- in pare form pulso L DB72.DBW 24;
DBB4 s in ual tool no (n chan ge chan OW W#16#0;
spin- tool -42) ge M06 ge JN M694; //T0? no->
dle T DB150.DBW 2;
T DB150.DBW 4;
Data Reserved JU M693;
Ack M694: L DB72.DBW 20;
DBB5 in
Sta- T DB150.DBW 2; //Source magazine of new tool
DB10
tus 3 L DB72.DBW 22;
72 T DB150.DBW 4; //Source location of new tool
M693: L DB72.DBW 28;
DBW20 Buffer identification (fixed value 9998) T DB150.DBW 6; //Target magazine for old tool
L DB72.DBW 30;
DBW22 Location in buffer T DB150.DBW 8; //Target location for old tool
L 1;
DBW24 Magazine no. (source) for new tool T DB150.DBW 10; //Status 1
A DB72.DBX 5.7;
DBW26 Location no. (source) for new tool JC M692;
L -1;
DBW28 Magazine no. (target) for old tool T DB150.DBW 12;
JU M691;
DBW30 Location no. (target) for old tool M692: L DB1072.DBW 10;
M691: SET ;
Example: Change hand tools S DB150.DBX 16.0; //Start FC6
M690: NOP 0;
DB72.DBW24 =9999
DB72.DBW26 =1
DB72.DBW28 =9999
DB72.DBW30 =1 NETWORK Start Transfer

Acknowledgement for „Execute change“ with FC6 TaskIdent := DB150.DBB 0,
FC6 Parameter Explanation OldToolMag := DB150.DBW 6,//Pos old tool
Start TRUE Transfer is started MultitoolLoc := DB150.DBW 12,
TaskIdent 2 DB72 Interface Error := DB150.DBW 14);
TaskIdentNo 1 Interface 1 A DB150.DBX 16.1; //Poll ready

NewToolMag DB72.DBW20 Source magazine of new L DB150.DBW 14; //Error information
tool L 0;
NewToolLoc DB72.DBW22 Source location of new tool R DB150.DBX 16.0; //Reset start
OldToolMag DB72.DBW28 Dest. magazine for old tool

OldToolLoc DB72.DBW30 Dest. location for old tool
MultitoolLoc DB1072.DBW10 Multitool position
Notes

Example: Old tool hand tool , new tool magazine tool Job: Execute tool change DB72

L2
9999,2 Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
G1 T=“CUTTER1“
9998,2 Interface (I) active
DBB0
L1 3 2 M1 Magazine 1 I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
9999,1 Sp Spindle DBB2 Standard end acknowledgement
M1 G1 Gripper 1
G2 Gripper 2 PLC->NCK I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
Sp L1 Load loc. 1 Tool Re- Load OldT T0 Pre- Per- Com
9998,1 L2 Load loc. 2 remove man- in pare form pulso
DBB4 s in ual tool no (n chan ge chan
G2 spin- tool -42) ge (initia ge
1 9998,3 dle te:
M06)
Data Reserved
Ack
DBB5 in
Sta-
DB10
tus 3
72
Sequence for tool change: Hand -> Magazine
DBW22 Location in buffer
Job “Execute tool change“ DBW24 Magazine no. (source) for new tool
DBW26 Location no. (source) for new tool
DBW28 Magazine no. (target) for old tool

1
DBW30 Location no. (target) for old tool
Take the hand tool from the spindle
-> Intermediate acknowledgement
1:1 to be
(Sp -> LL) DBB42 Man- Mas- to be ID
Chan un- disa-
ual ge ter load- for
loade bled
2 tool tool ed tool
d
New tool from magazine to gripper 1 Example: Tool change: Hand -> Magazine
-> Intermediate acknowledgement DB72.DBW24 =1
(Mag -> Gr 1) DB72.DBW26 =10
DB72.DBW28 =9999
3 DB72.DBW30 =1
New tool from gripper 1 to spindle The job remains unchanged , the tools are still in their
-> Intermediate acknowledgement respective starting positions
(Gr 1 -> Sp)

change“ job
Notes

Intermediate acknowledgement with FC6 (Sp -> LL) PLC programming example for acknowledgement with FC6
NETWORK Sp -> LL
FC6 Parameter Explanation TITLE =Intermediate ack Sp -> LL
...

TaskIdent 2 DB72 Interface NETWORK Mag -> Gr 1
TITLE =Intermediate ack M1 -> Gr1
TaskIdentNo 1 Interface 1 ...
NewToolMag 0 Source magazine of new tool

NewToolLoc 0 Source location of new tool
NETWORK Gr 1 -> Sp
TITLE =Intermediate ack Gr1 -> Sp
OldToolMag 9999 Destination magazine for old ...
tool
OldToolLoc 1 Destination location for old
tool
NETWORK Final Acknowledge
Status 105 Intermediate positions TITLE =Ack perform change
reached ...
MultitoolLoc -1 Multitool position
NETWORK Sp -> LL NETWORK Start Transfer

TITLE =Intermediate ack Sp -> LL TITLE =Tool management status transfer
A I 86.5; CALL FC 6 (//Tool management transfer block

A DB72.DBX 0.0; //Interface 1 active Start := DB150.DBX 16.0,//Start
A DB72.DBX 4.1; //Change active TaskIdent := DB150.DBB 0,
A DB72.DBX 4.2; TaskIdentNo := DB150.DBB 1,
A DB72.DBX 4.6; //Handtool OUT NewToolMag := DB150.DBW 2,//Pos new tool
FP M 152.6; NewToolLoc := DB150.DBW 4,
JCN M260; OldToolMag := DB150.DBW 6,//Pos old tool
L 2; OldToolLoc := DB150.DBW 8,
T DB150.DBB 0; //DB72 Status := DB150.DBW 10,//Status
T DB150.DBB 1; //Interface 1 Ready := DB150.DBX 16.1,
L DB72.DBW 24; Error := DB150.DBW 14);
OW W#16#0;
JN M264; //T0? no-> A DB150.DBX 16.1; //Poll ready
T DB150.DBW 4; L DB150.DBW 14; //Error information
JU M263; L 0;
M264: L -1; <>I ; //Evaluate error
T DB150.DBW 2; //Source magazine of new tool R DB150.DBX 16.0; //Reset start
M263: L DB72.DBW 28;
OW W#16#0;
JN M262; //Tool in spindle? yes->
T DB150.DBW 6;
T DB150.DBW 8;
JU M261;
M262: L 9999;
L 1;
M261: L 105;
L -1;
T DB150.DBW 12;
SET ;
M260: NOP 0;
Notes

Interruption to the tool change Sequence: Abort tool change
Example: Abort 1:1 tool change

L2
Interrupt
9999,2
G1 T=“CUTTER1“
9998,2 1
L1 2 1 M1 Magazine 1 Old tool from spindle to gripper 2 und

9999,1 Sp Spindle New tool from magazine
M1 G1 Gripper 1 (DB72.DBW24/26) tp gripper 1
1 2 G2 Gripper 2 -> Intermediate acknowledgement
Sp L1 Load loc. 1 (Mag -> Gr 1, Sp -> Gr 2)
9998,1 L2 Load loc. 2
G2
9998,3
“Reset DB72“
acknowledge
2
Examples of what can cause the tool change to be aborted
Old tool from gripper 2 to magazine
- Reset and new tool von gripper 1 to spindle
- E-Stop -> Intermediate acknowledgement
- Power failure (Gr 1 -> Sp, Gr 2 -> Mag)
Acknowledge „Execute tool

change“ job
Notes

Job: “Execute tool change“ Acknowledgement Reset DB72 with FC6

DBB0
I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
PLC->NCK NewToolMag -1 When process abort =-1
remove man- in pare form pulso NewToolLoc -1 When process abort =-1
main manual buffer chan chan ry
DBB4 s in ual tool no (n ge ge chan
spin- tool -42) (initia ge OldToolMag -1 When process abort =-1
dle te:
M06) OldToolLoc -1 When process abort =-1
Data Reserved Status 3 Process aborted
Ack.
DBB5 in
Sta-
DB10 MultitoolLoc -1 When process abort =-1
tus 3
72

Example: Tool change with 1:1 change
DBW22 location in buffer (INT) DB72.DBW24 =1
Location no. (source) for new tool (INT)
DB72.DBW26 =10
DBW24
DB72.DBW28 =1
DBW26 Magazine no. (target) for old tool (INT) DB72.DBW30 =10
DBW28 Location no. (target) for old tool (INT)
DBW30 Tool new: location type (INT)
PLC programming example

NETWORK Reset DB72
TITLE =Ack Reset DB72 Interface 1 CALL FC 6 (//Tool management transfer block
A I 86.7; TaskIdent := DB150.DBB 0,
A DB72.DBX 0.0; //Interface 1 active TaskIdentNo := DB150.DBB 1,
FP M 153.2; NewToolMag := DB150.DBW 2,//Pos new tool
JCN M320; NewToolLoc := DB150.DBW 4,
L 2; OldToolMag := DB150.DBW 6,//Pos old tool
T DB150.DBB 0; //DB72 OldToolLoc := DB150.DBW 8,
T DB150.DBB 1; //Interface 1 MultitoolLoc := DB150.DBW 12,
L -1; Ready := DB150.DBX 16.1,
T DB150.DBW 2; Error := DB150.DBW 14);
T DB150.DBW 4;
L 3; L DB150.DBW 14; //Error information
T DB150.DBW 10; //Status 3 L 0;
L -1; <>I ; //Evaluate error
M320: NOP 0;
Notes

Recovery Functions Sequence: Tool changer recovery
Example: Tool changer recovery 1
New tool from gripper 1 to spindle

L2 -> Asynchronous transfer (Gr 1 -> Sp)
Recovery
9999,2
G1 T=“CUTTER1“
9998,2
2
L1 1 M1 Magazine 1
9999,1 Sp Spindle Old tool from gripper 2 to magazine
M1 G1 Gripper 1 -> Asynchronous transfer (Gr 2 ->
2 G2 Gripper 2
Mag)
Sp L1 Load loc. 1
9998,1 L2 Load loc. 2
G2
9998,3
Note:
Asynchronous transfers are used to inform the Tool Man-

agement of tool movements which have been initiated by
the PLC without a specific job request from Tool Manage-
ment in the NC.
Asynchronous transfer with FC6 (Gr 1 -> Sp)

NETWORK Gr 1 -> Sp
TITLE =Asyn. transfer Gr1 -> Sp
FC6 Parameter Explanation A I 88.0;

FP M 154.0;
JCN M400;
Start TRUE Transfer is started L 4;
T DB150.DBB 0; //Asynchronous transfer
TaskIdent 4 Asynchronous transfer L 1;
TaskIdentNo 1 Channel 1 L 9998;
T DB150.DBW 6; //Tool, from magazine
NewToolMag 9998 Destination magazine for tool L 2;
T DB150.DBW 8; //Tool, from location
NewToolLoc 1 Destination location for tool L 9998;
OldToolMag 9998 Source magazine of tool L 1;
L 1;
OldToolLoc 2 Source location of tool T DB150.DBW 10; //Status 1
L -1;
Status 1 Process finished T DB150.DBW 12;
MultitoolLoc -1 Multitool position M400: NOP 0;
Notes

Asynchronous transfer with FC6 (Gr 2 -> Mag) PLC programming example for asyn. transfer with FC6
NETWORK Save data

FC6 Parameter Explanation TITLE =Save data for recovery function
A I 86.0;
Start TRUE Transfer is started O I 87.0;
TaskIdent 4 Asynchronous transfer AN DB72.DBX 4.1;
A DB72.DBX 4.2; //Prepare active
TaskIdentNo 1 Channel 1 FP M 154.4;
JCN M440;
L DB72.DBW 24;
NewToolMag DB150.DBW22 Destination magazine for tool T DB150.DBW 18; //Source magazine of new tool
L DB72.DBW 26;
NewToolLoc DB150.DBW24 Destination location for tool T DB150.DBW 20; //Source location of new tool
L DB72.DBW 28;
OldToolMag 9998 Source magazine of tool T DB150.DBW 22; //Target magazine for old tool
L DB72.DBW 30;
OldToolLoc 3 Source location of tool T DB150.DBW 24; //Target location for old tool
M440: NOP 0;
NETWORK Gr 1 -> Sp
MultitoolLoc -1 Multitool position TITLE =Asyn. Transfer Gr1 -> Sp
...
NETWORK Gr 2 -> Mag

TITLE =Asyn. Transfer Gr2 -> M1 NETWORK Gr 2 -> Mag
TITLE =Asyn. Transfer Gr2 -> M1
A I 88.1; ...
FP M 154.1;
JCN M410;
L 4;
T DB150.DBB 0; //Asynchronous transfer NETWORK
L 1; TITLE =Tool management status transfer Start Transfer
L 9998; CALL FC 6 (//Tool management transfer block
T DB150.DBW 6; //Tool, from magazine Start := DB150.DBX 16.0,//Start
L 3; TaskIdent := DB150.DBB 0,
T DB150.DBW 8; //Tool, from location TaskIdentNo := DB150.DBB 1,
L DB150.DBW 22; NewToolMag := DB150.DBW 2,//Pos new tool
T DB150.DBW 2; //Tool, to magazine NewToolLoc := DB150.DBW 4,
L DB150.DBW 24; OldToolMag := DB150.DBW 6,//Pos old tool
T DB150.DBW 4; //Tool, to location OldToolLoc := DB150.DBW 8,
T DB150.DBW 10; //Status 1 MultitoolLoc := DB150.DBW 12,
L -1; Ready := DB150.DBX 16.1,
T DB150.DBW 12; Error := DB150.DBW 14);
M410: NOP 0; A DB150.DBX 16.1; //Poll ready
L 0;
User data block DB150
Notes

Customizing the Tool Management HMI The customization of the HMI is accomplished by making
changes to these configuration files.
- Technology Milling - sltmlistconfig.xml

The following screen areas of tool management can be cus- - Technology Turning - sltmturninglistconfig.xml
tomized to suit particular machine configurations.
- Reconfigure the tool list Template:

- Modify the list parameters
- Reconfigure a screen “Details“ There is a template located on the controller in this directory
- Reconfigure a screen “New tool - favorites“
- Reconfigure tool types Configuration file “oem_sltmlistconfig.xml“
- Give names to magazine locations “System CF Card\siemens\sinumerik\hmi\template\cfg“
- Generate custom texts
Custom text file “oem_sltmlistdialog_xxx.ts“
“System CF Card\siemens\sinumerik\hmi\template\lng“
Procedure:
- Create the configuration file

- Create the custom text file
Customize the HMI via configuration file Tooltip
Example for OEM tool list
3 The configured tool tip text “OEM 1 Tooltip“ will be displayed.
Longtext
2
1. New softkey “OEM Tool“ is displayed

2. New column for OEM parameter 1 is displayed The descriptive text “OEM 1 Longtext“ will be displayed.
3. Column heading is “OEM 1“
Notes

Create the configuration file
Example: OEM tool list
Filename of configuration file:
- sltmlistconfig.xml for Technology Milling

- sltmturnlistconfig.xml for Technology Turning
Copy the configuration file “sltmlistconfig.xml“ into the user or oem directory.
OEM directory
“System CF Card\oem\sinumerik\hmi\cfg“
User directory
“System CF Card\user\sinumerik\hmi\cfg“
Example: Configuration file “sltmlistconfig.xml“
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8" standalone="yes"?>
<CONFIGURATION>








<LISTCONFIGURATION>
<SlTmTooloemForm> Enable OEM tool list
<Enabled value="true" type="bool" />
</SlTmTooloemForm>
</LISTCONFIGURATION>




<LISTCONFIGURATION>
<SlTmTooloemForm> Define column for user parameter
<INSERT_COLUMN>
<COLUMN6> “ToolUser_1“
<TOOLTYPE_ALL>
<Item value="ToolUser_1" type="QString" />
</TOOLTYPE_ALL>
</COLUMN6>
</INSERT_COLUMN>
</SlTmTooloemForm>
</LISTCONFIGURATION>
</CONFIGURATION>
In this example the OEM Tool list will be enabled and the user parameter “ToolUser_1“ will be displayed in an new column. The
parameter “ToolUser_1“ refers to the OEM tool parameter $TC_TPC1.
The OEM tool parameters are activated via these NC machine data:
- MD18080 Bit 2=1 OEM-/CC- data available

- MD20310 Bit 2=1 OEM-/CC- functions active
- MD18094 = 1 Number of OEM tool parameters
Notes

Create the custom text file
Example: Custom texts for OEM tool list
Filename of Custom text file “sltmlistdialog_xxx.ts“ (xxx language code):
- sltmlistdialog_deu.ts for german custom texts

- sltmlistdialog_eng.ts for english custom texts
Copy the custom text file “sltmlistdialog_xxx.ts“ into the user or oem directory
OEM directory
“System CF Card\oem\sinumerik\hmi\lng“
User directory
“System CF Card\user\sinumerik\hmi\lng“
Example: Custom text file “sltmlistdialog_eng.ts“
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>

<!DOCTYPE TS><TS>




<context>
<name>SlTmListForm</name>




<message>
<source>TM_HL_TOOL_USER_1</source> Headline
<translation>OEM 1</translation>
<chars>30</chars>
</message>
<message>
<source>TM_TT_TOOL_USER_1</source> Tooltip
<translation>OEM 1 Tooltip</translation>
<chars>30</chars>
</message>
<message>
<source>TM_HL_TOOL_USER_1_LONG</source> Longtext
<translation>OEM 1 Longtext</translation>
<chars>30</chars>
</message>
</context>
</TS>
Notes

Tool change on a lathe with turret Example: Turret with 16 locations
On a lathe, the tool change is handled by the turret which is

configured in the magazine configuration.
L1
There is an area in DB73 reserved for each turret. 9999,1 M1 Magazine 1
H1 Tool holder 1
M1 L1 Load loc. 1
All interfaces are set up for the „Execute tool change“ com-
Sp H1 Sp Spindle
mand, which is triggered by the NC instruction “T-number“. 9998,1
These functions: FC6 (Multitool), FC7 (Turret) und FC8, (all

contained in the PLC base program) as well as the Standard
end acknowledgment with DB73, as used to inform Tool Man-
agement of the tool positions.
Procedure:
- Activate Tool Management
- Configure the turret magazine
- Generate the TCHANGE program
- Tool change with turret
Notes

Activate Tool Management
Overview of the machine data
Settings
TM
10717 $MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME ““ Name of tool-changing cycle for T function replacement
15710 $MN_TCA_CYCLE_NAME ““ Name of tool-changing cycle for TCA function replacement
17530 $MN_TOOL_DATA_CHANGE_COUNT 1FH 1FH Mark tool data change for HMI
ER
18080 $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MA 0H Bit 0 = 1 Memory reservation for tool management (SRAM)
SK Bit 1 = 1 - Bit 0: Provide magazine management data
Bit 3 = 1 - Bit 1: Provide monitoring data
- Bit 3: Consider adj. Location
- Bit 10: The multitool function is available
18082 $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL 30 100 Number of tools the NCK can manage (SRAM)
18083 $MN_MM_NUM_MULTITOOL 15 Number of multitools the NCK can manage (SRAM)
18084 $MN_MM_NUM_MAGAZINE 3 Number of magazines the NCK can manage (SRAM)

18085 $MN_MM_NUM_MULTITOOL_LOCATI 30 Number of multitool locations the NCK can manage (SRAM)
ONS
18086 $MN_MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATIO 30 Number of magazine locations the NCK can manage (SRAM)
N
18100 $MN_MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN 30 200 Tool offsets in the TO range (SRAM)
_TOA
19320 $ON_TECHNO_FUNCTION_MASK 0H Bit 4 = 1 Activation of tool management
- Bit 4: Tool monitoring and Magazine management
20110 $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK 1H 41H Definition of basic control settings after reset/part program end
- Bit 0: RESET mode
- Bit 6: Active tool length compensation
20124 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHO 0 1 Tool holder number
LDER
20310 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK 0H Bit 0 = 1 Activation of tool management functions
Bit 1 = 1 - Bit 0: Magazine management active
Bit 3 = 1 - Bit 1: Monitoring functions active
Bit 14= 1 - Bit 3: Adjacent location treatm.
Bit 16 = 1 - Bit 14: Automatic tool change during RESET and Start
- Bit 16: Programming T=“Location number“
20320 $MC_TOOL_TIME_MONITOR_MASK 0H 1H Time monitoring for tool in tool holder
- Bit 0: Monitoring tool in tool holder 1
22550 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE 0 0 New tool offset with T function
22560 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE 6 M function for tool change
28450 $MC_MM_TOOL_DATA_CHG_BUFF_ 400 400 Buffer for tool data changes (DRAM)
SIZE
Notes

Set up the machine data for the tool change Tool change program, TCHANGE
MD10717 = Name of the subprogram which is called

TCHANGE when a T command is programmed.
Tool change triggered by T function
MD22550 = 0 The „tool change“ phase is activated by the MD15710 = Name of the subprogram which is called
T function for the new tool. TCHANGE when TCA command is programmed.
The TCHANGE program is called whenever a T command is

programmed in the part program.
Programming the tool change
TEST_PROGRAM.MPF
N10
N20
Tool change program
N30 T=“ROUGH_TOOL1”
TCHANGE is called
N40
N50
N60
N70
N80
N90
Define tool holder Activation of “T=Location number“
MD20124 = 1 Tool holder number

MD20310 Tool Management Mask
Bit 16 = 1 Programming T=Location number

If a tool holder number is defined, then the number in
$TC_MPP5 is interpreted as the tool holder number, and not
as the spindle number. The automatic address extension for If “T=Location number“ is active, then tools can be pro-
T is then also the tool holder number and no longer the spin- grammed via “T=Location number“.
dle number.
The tool holder must be defined if the lathe has more than one Example: Tool change with turret
spindle .
T=“ROUGH_TOOL1“
Example: Tool change with turret T3
T2
L1
H1 Tool holder 1
L1 M1/T1 L1 Load loc. 1
9999,1 M1 Magazine 1 Sp H1 Sp Spindle
H1 Tool holder 1 9998,1
M1 T8
L1 Load loc. 1
Sp H1 Sp Spindle T7
9998,1
Notes

Configure the turret magazine Start the magazine configuration
Example: Turret with 16 locations

Define a magazine
L1
H1 Tool holder 1
M1 L1 Load loc. 1 1
Sp H1 Sp Spindle
9998,1
M1
Start HMI Startup-Tool
1. Set up a new magazine (turret with 16 locations)
Define the buffers Define load locations
Define the spindle

Define load location 1
Sp
L1
2
1
1. Define the spindle as a buffer location.

2. Assign the Spindle to the magazine 1. Assign load location 1 to magazine
(Distance to change location.=0). (Distance to change location.=0).
Notes
A102 Page 100 840D sl SINUMERIK Oper-

Define the magazine configuration Define the search strategy.
Define a new magazine configuration
2 3
3
1. Set *location search* to “first location forward“.
2. Set *location coding* to “fixed“.
3. Set *consider adjacent location* to “on“ .
1. Define a new magazine configuration.

2. Assign the real magazine to the magazine configuration.
3. Assign the locations to the magazine configuration.
1. Set *location search* to “first location forward“. 3. Set *consider adjacent location* to “on“ .
2. Set *location coding* to “fixed“. Generate configuration file (INI file)
The configuration file is generated as an INI file and

stored within “HMI Startup-Tool“.
Notes

Configuration file (INI file)

N960 ;
N10 ; N970 $TC_MPP1[9999,1]=7
N20 ; 02-11-2011 16:03:17 N980 $TC_MPP2[9999,1]=0 Load loc. 1
N30 ; N990 $TC_MPP3[9999,1]=0
N40 ; ---------------------------------------- N1000 $TC_MPP4[9999,1]=2
N50 ; Magazin configuration: Mag_conf N1010 $TC_MPP5[9999,1]=1
N60 ; ---------------------------------------- N1020 ;
N70 ; N1030 ; Offsets
N80 ; Delete old data N1040 ;
N90 ; N1050 $TC_MDP2[1,1]=0 Distances to
N100 $TC_MAP1[0]=0 N1060 $TC_MDP1[1,1]=0 change loc.
N110 $TC_DP1[0,0]=0 N1070 ;
N120 ; N1080 ; End of file
N130 ; Configuration N1090 ;
N140 ; N1100 M17
N150 $TC_MAMP1="Mag_conf"
N160 $TC_MAMP2=257 Search strate-
N170 ; gy
N180 ; Magazine
N190 ;
N200 $TC_MAP1[1]=3
N210 $TC_MAP2[1]="Magazine" Variables in the configuration file
N220 $TC_MAP3[1]=81
N230 $TC_MAP6[1]=1 Magazine 1
N240 $TC_MAP7[1]=16 Parameter Explanation
N250 $TC_MAP10[1]=257
N260 ;
N270 $TC_MAP1[9998]=7 $TC_MAMP1 Identifier of the configuration magazine
N280 $TC_MAP2[9998]="Buffer magazine"
N290 $TC_MAP3[9998]=17 $TC_MAMP2 Type of tool search (Bit 0-7) and Art type of
N300 $TC_MAP6[9998]=1 Magazine empty location search (Bit 8-15)
N310 $TC_MAP7[9998]=1 9998 - Bit 0=1: active tool/ min. Duplo
N320 $TC_MAP10[9998]=0 - Bit 8=1: first location forward
N330 ; $TC_MAP1 Type of magazine (3=Turret, 7=Buffer maga-
N340 $TC_MAP1[9999]=9
N350 $TC_MAP2[9999]="Loading magazine" zine, 9=Loading magazine)
N360 $TC_MAP3[9999]=17 $TC_MAP2 Identifier of magazine
N370 $TC_MAP6[9999]=1
N380 $TC_MAP7[9999]=1 Magazine $TC_MAP3 Status of magazine
N390 $TC_MAP10[9999]=0 9999 - Bit 0=1: active magazine
N400 ; - Bit 4=1: Magazine may be moved
N410 ; Locations
N420 ; - Bit 6=1: Magazine is fixed location coded
N430 $TC_MPP1[1,1]=1 $TC_MAP6 Number of tiers (box magazine only)
N450 $TC_MPP3[1,1]=1 $TC_MAP7 Number of columns
N460 $TC_MPP4[1,1]=2
N470 $TC_MPP5[1,1]=0 to $TC_MAP10 Current tool search strategies of magazine,
… see MAMP2.
N850 $TC_MPP1[1,16]=1 $TC_MPP1 Location type (1=Magazine location,
N870 $TC_MPP3[1,16]=1 2=Spindle/tool holder, 7=Loading point)
N880 $TC_MPP4[1,16]=2 $TC_MPP2 Location type (0=every tool fits in this loca-
N890 $TC_MPP5[1,16]=0 tion)
N900 ; $TC_MPP3 Consider adjacent location(1=on, 0=off)
N910 $TC_MPP1[9998,1]=2
N920 $TC_MPP2[9998,1]=0 Spindle/tool $TC_MPP4 Location state
N930 $TC_MPP3[9998,1]=0 holder
N940 $TC_MPP4[9998,1]=2 - Bit 1=1: Free to accept a tool
N950 $TC_MPP5[9998,1]=1 $TC_MPP5 Location type index
magazine and location of first internal maga-
zine (loading magazine 9999)
magazine and location of second internal
magazine (buffer magazine 9998)
Notes

Load the magazine data into the NC (INI file) The configuration INI file is transferred to the „Workpiece“
directory of the NC.
Select AUTO mode and press NC-Start .
1 The configuration is loaded. All magazine and buffer data will

be created new.
2
After the successful loading of the configuration file, the INI
file in the „Workpiece“ directory of the NC is deleted.
After the successful loading of the configuration file, the mag-

azine and buffers will be displayed by the control in the pa-
rameter area.
1. Select the configuration file.

2. Press softkey “Load“ .
Display on the controller
Layout of the tool list

1. Turret locations 1 to 16
Notes

Load the magazine data into the PLC (DB4) Magazine configuration (DB4)
1
2
1 - Turret magazine (Magazine 1)

2 - Buffer magazine (Magazine 9998)
3 - Load magazine (Magazine 9999)
1. Press the Softkey “Create PLC data“ to load the config-
uration. This action loads the magazine parameters to
DB4.
Interface for magazine configuration (DB4) After successful loading of the PLC data and after the PLC
has been restarted all the interface data blocks for die Tool
Management will be re-initialised.
DB4 Interface magazine configuration (HMI  PLC)
Number of magazines including buffer magazine and load-
DBB64
ing magazine
<
DBW65
Magazine number
(...)
DBB67 Magazine type (1: Chain, 3: Turret, 5: Box magazine,
(...) 7: Buffer magazine, 9: Loading magazine)
DBW68
Number of locations
(...)
>
DBW n Number of spindles
Initial addresses of the Magazines The Alarm 410151 “Magazine data for the tool management
missing in the PLC“ will be no longer displayed.
Magazine 1: DBW65
Magazine 2: DBW70
Magazine 3: DBW75
Address = (Content DBB64 * 5) + 65
Notes

Generate the TCHANGE program Variables associated with the TCHANGE program
The TCHANGE, tool change program has to take the machine

layout into consideration. The TCHANGE program is stored in Variable Explanation
the manufacturer cycles or the user cycles directory of the
control . $C_T_PROG Bool variable, indicates if the T was
programmed with a number, eg T4
$C_TS_PROG Bool variable, indicates if the T was
Example of the TCHANGE program programmed with a string, e.g.
T=“ROUGH“
$C_TCA Substitution for TCA instruction is ac-
;T-Change Cycle (example)
;including TCA-substitution
tive
; $C_T When T is programmed with the num-
;Machine data to set ber. This returns the number, eg 4 in
;MD10717 $MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME="TCHANGE"
;MD15710 $MN_TCA_CYCLE_NAME="TCHANGE" the case of T4
; $C_TE Address extension for the T instruction
;---------------------------------------------------------
;--- Output T-Function --- $C_DUPLO_PROG Bool variable, indicates whether or not
;--------------------------------------------------------- the variable $C_DUPLO contains a
;
if(($C_T_PROG==1)or($C_TS_PROG==1)or($C_TCA==1))
duplo number
if $C_T_PROG==1 ;T=numerisch $C_THNO_PROG Bool variable, indicates whether or not
if $C_T==0
T=Location number the variable $C_THNO contains a tool
if $C_TE>=1
T[$C_TE]=0
holder number
else $C_TS Tool name (String)
T0
endif $C_DUPLO Programmed duplo number
else
if $C_TE>=1 $C_THNO Programmed tool holder or spindle
T[$C_TE]=$C_T number
else
T=$C_T
endif
endif
endif
;
if $C_TS_PROG==1 ;T=string
if $C_TCA==1
if $C_DUPLO_PROG==1
if $C_THNO_PROG>=1
TCA($C_TS,$C_DUPLO,$C_THNO)
else
TCA($C_TS,$C_DUPLO)
endif
else TCA(“Identifier“)
if $C_THNO_PROG>=1
TCA($C_TS,,$C_THNO)
else
TCA($C_TS)
endif
endif
else
if $C_TE>=1
T[$C_TE]=$C_TS
else T=“Identifier“
T=$C_TS
endif
endif
endif
endif
;
;
;---------------------------------------------------------
;--- Continue T-Change (machine functions) ---
;---------------------------------------------------------
;
;
;
m17
Notes

Tool change with turret Program examples
T=“Identifier“
Programming -> T=“ROUGH_TOOL1“
TEST_PROGRAM.MPF T=Location number

N10 -> T3 or T=3
N20
N30 TCA (“Tool identifier“, Duplo no., Tool holder no.)
N40 -> TCA(“ROUGH_TOOL1“, 1, 1)
N50 T=“ROUGH_TOOL1” -> Tool change -> PLC
N60 The TCA command forces the tool change to take place, re-
N70 gardless of the status of the tool. It is used ,for example with
N80 the “Measure Tool “ feature.
N90
N100
N110
N120
N130
N140
N150
Tool change -> Job from PLC (DB73.DBX4.1=1).
Example: Tool change with turret Sequence: Tool change with turret
T=“ROUGH_TOOL Job “Execute tool change“
1
L1
9999,1 M1 Magazine 1 1
H1 Tool holder 1
M1 L1 Load loc. 1
H1
Position turret to new tool location
Sp Sp Spindle
9998,1 (DB73.DBW24 und 26)

change“ job
Notes

Job : Execute tool change PLC program example for acknowledgement with FC6
Signals from circular magazine (NCK -> PLC) NETWORK Execute tool change
DB73 TITLE =Ack perform change
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 A I 86.0;
Interface (I) active A DB73.DBX 4.1; //Change with t-no active
DBB0 FP M 151.0;
I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
JCN M180;
Standard end acknowledgement L 3;
DBB2 T DB150.DBB 0; //DB73
PLC->NCK I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1 L 1;
Re- Re- Re- Re- T0 Re- Per- Ob- L DB73.DBW 24;
serve move serve serve serve form ligato OW W#16#0;
DBB4 d man- d d d chan ry JN M182; //T0? no->
ual ge chan T DB150.DBW 2;
T DB150.DBW 4;
tool ge
T no JU M181;
M182: L DB73.DBW 20;
Data Reserved Ack T DB150.DBW 2; //Source magazine of new tool
in Sta- L DB73.DBW 22;
DBB5 DB10 tus 3 T DB150.DBW 4; //Source location of new tool
73 M181: L DB73.DBW 28;
L DB73.DBW 30;
DBW24 Circular magazine no.
L 1;
DBW26 Location no. for new tool T DB150.DBW 10; //Status 1
L -1;
DBW28 Magazine no. for old tool T DB150.DBW 12;
DBW30 Location no. for old tool M180: NOP 0;
Example: Change to turret position 3

DB73.DBW24 =1
DB73.DBW26 =3 NETWORK
DB73.DBW28 =0 Start Transfer
DB73.DBW30 =0
Acknowledgement for “Execute tool change“ via FC6 OldToolMag := DB150.DBW 6,//Pos old tool
FC6 Parameter Explanation Ready := DB150.DBX 16.1,
Start TRUE Transfer is started A DB150.DBX 16.1; //Poll ready
TaskIdent 3 DB73 Interface L DB150.DBW 14; //Error information
L 0;
TaskIdentNo 1 Interface 1 <>I ; //Evaluate error
NewToolMag DB73.DBW20 Source magazine of new
tool
OldToolMag DB73.DBW28 Destination magazine for
old tool
OldToolLoc DB73.DBW30 Destination location for old
tool
MultitoolLoc -1 Multitool position
A102: END
Notes

A102 END Tool management

A110 Setup Milling
Sinumerik
Operate
Module Description:
In this module a simple milling machine with the axes X1, Y1 and Z1, the rotary axes A1, C1 and
the main spindle SP1 is to be setup for milling. The individual commissioning steps are to be
checked from time to time to show the result of the parameterization.
The preparation of the tool list, the cycle selections, the block search and various basic settings
are also part of the training scope. There will be a detailed description of the selections to be made
for JOG-TSM.
Module Objective:
By means of this module you will learn and get to know the meaning of the Machine and Setting
data to be used as well as the various means available in order to configure the machine to suit the
particular requirements.
The functions will be parameterized in several blocks and subsequently tested to check correct
working.
Content:
Menu and Technology settings
Sinumerik
Manufacturer Cycles
Setup for Milling
Cycle settings
Tool List Setup
Basic Settings
JOG-TSM
Block Search
Simulation

EN_A110 V1.1
A110

Setup Milling A110
Setup Milling:
START
Simulation
Overview
MD and SD
Menu and
Technology
settings
Manufacturer
Cycles
Setup Milling:
END
Setup for
Milling
Cycle
Settings
Tool List
Setup
Basic
Settings
JOG-TSM
Block search
Notes

A110 Setup Milling
Overview Machine data and setting data
Basic settings Machine data/setting data
Settings
Milling
10260 $MN_CONVERT_SCALING_SYSTEM 0 1 Enable basic system conversion
$MN_FRAME_GEOAX_CHANGE_MO
10602 0 1 Frames when changing geometry axes
DE
10714 $MN_M_NO_FCT_EOP -1 32 M function for spindle active after reset
10715 $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE[0] -1 6 M function to be replaced by a subroutine
10716 $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME[0] ““ L6 Subroutine name for M function replacement
10722 $MN_AXCHANGE_MASK 0H 4H Bit 2 = 1: Parameters for axis replacement behavior

Bit 0: 15110: REORG not possible
Bit 1: 10763 The path component of the block in the con-
11410 $MN_SUPPRESS_ALARM_MASK 108000H 108003H tour plane is zero
Bit 15: 5000 Communication order cannot be executed
Bit 20: 2900 Reboot is delayed
Bit 0 = 1: Machining is stopped with the loading of the last
action block after search run
Bit 1 = 1: Automatic ASUP start after output of the action
11450 $MN_SEARCH_RUN_MODE 0H 7H
blocks
Bit 2 = 1: The output of the auxiliary functions in the action
blocks is suppressed
$MN_TOOL_DATA_CHANGE_COUN
17530 1FH 1FH Mark tool data change for HMI
TER
Bit 0 = 1: Memory for TM-specific data is provided
$MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_M
18080 0H BH Bit 1 = 1: Memory for monitoring data (WZMO) is provided
ASK
Bit 3 = 1: Memory to consider adjacent location is provided
19320 $ON_TECHNO_FUNCTION_MASK 0H Bit 4 = 1 Bit 4 = 1: Tool management with magazine data enabled
Bit 0 = 1: G codes acc. to $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUE

Bit 6 = 1: Current setting for active tool length offset is re-
20110 $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK 1H 4041H
tained after reset/end-of-part-program
Bit 14= 1: The current setting of the basic frame is retained
20128 $MC_COLLECT_TOOL_CHANGE 1 0 No tool change commands after search run

$MC_CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VAL
20130 0 1 Tool and cutting edge remain activated
UE
Group 16: Feedrate override 3 = CFIN
[15] = 1 [15] = 3 Group 22: Tool offset type 2 = CUT2DF
[21] = 1 [21] = 2 Group 42 Toolholder 1 = TCOABS (for swivel)
20150 $MC_G_CODE_RESET_VALUE [41] = 1 [41] = 1 Group 52: Frame rotation in relation to workpiece 1 = PA-
[51] = 1 [51] = 1 ROTOF (2 = PAROT, for swivel)
[52] = 1 [52] = 1 Group 53: Frame rotation in relation to tool 1 = TOROTOF
(for swivel)
Group 6: Plane selection remains active after Reset
[5] = 0 [5] = 1
Group 8: Zero point offset remains active after Reset
[7] = 0 [7] = 1
20152 $MC_G_CODE_RESET_MODE Group 13: Work piece dimensioning inch/metric default
[12] = 0 [12] = 0
after reset
[21] = 0 [21] = 0
Group 22: Tool correction type default after reset
$MC_WAB_MAXNUM_DUMMY_BLO maximum number of blocks w/o traversing movement with
20202 5 10
CKS SAR
$MC_CUTCOM_MAXNUM_CHECK_
20240 4 4 Blocks for look-ahead contour calculation with TRC
BLOCKS
$MC_CUTCOM_MAXNUM_DUMMY_ maximum number of blocks without traversing motion in
20250 3 5
BLOCKS TRC
Notes

Setup Milling A110
Settings
Milling
Bit 0 = 1: Tool management active
Bit 1 = 1: Tool monitoring function active
20310 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK 0H 80400BH Bit 3 = 1: Consider adjacent location active
Bit 14 = 1: automatic tool change during RESET and Start
Bit 23 = 1: On offset selection no synchronization with HL
20320 $MC_TOOL_TIME_MONITOR_MASK 0H 1H Bit 0 = 1: Time monitoring for tool in tool holder 1
Function mask for external language
20734 $MC_EXTERN_FUNCTION_MASK 0H 8H Bit 3 = 1: Errors in ISO scanner are not output, the block is
transferred to the Siemens translator.
22550 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE 0 1 Tool change with M function
22560 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE 6 206 M function for tool change

Bit 0 = 1: System frame for actual value setting and scratch-
Bit 0 = 1
24006 $MC_CHSFRAME_RESET_MASK 1H ing is active after reset.
Bit 5 = 0
Bit 5 = 0: System frame for cycles is deleted on reset
Bit 0 = 0: System frame for actual value setting and scratch-
$MC_CHSFRAME_RESET_CLEAR_ Bit 0 = 0
24007 0H ing is active after reset.
MASK Bit 5 = 1
$MC_CHSFRAME_POWERON_MAS
24008 0H 0H Reset channel system frames after power on
K
Adjustment of SZS coordinate system
24030 $MC_FRAME_ACS_SET 0 1 - without cycle frames
- with progr. offset
Bit 0 = 1: Measurement of total operating time is active for
all part programs
Bit 1 = 1: Measurement of current program runtime is active
27860 $MC_PROCESSTIMER_MODE 0H 73H Bit 4 = 1: Measurement also with active dry run feed
Bit 5 = 1: Measurement also with program test
Bit 6 = 1: $AC_CYCLE_TIME is not deleted on start by
ASUP and PROG_EVENT
Bit 0 = 1: Counter $AC_REQUIRED_PARTS is activated
27880 $MC_PART_COUNTER 0H 901H Bit 8 = 1: Counter $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS is active
Bit 11 = 1: Increment $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS with GOTOS
28000 $MC_MM_REORG_LOG_FILE_MEM 50 75 Memory space for REORG (DRAM)

$MC_MM_NUM_REORG_LUD_MOD Number of blocks for local user variables in REORG
28010 8 20
ULES (DRAM)
Bit 0 = 1: System frame for setting actual value and scratch-
28082 $MC_MM_SYSTEM_FRAME_MASK 21H 21H ing
Bit 5 = 1: System frame for cycles
$MC_MM_SYSTEM_DATAFRAME_M Bit mask for configuring channel-specific system frames in
28083 F9FH F9FH
ASK the data storage
$MC_MM_TOOL_DATA_CHG_BUFF
28450 400 400 Buffer for tool data changes (DRAM)
_SIZE
35040 $MA_SPIND_ACTIV_AFTER_RESET 0 2 Own spindle RESET
42440 $SC_FRAME_OFFSET_INCR_PROG 1 0 Zero offsets in frames
42442 $SC_TOOL_OFFSET_INCR_PROG 1 0 Tool length offsets
42528 $SC_CUTCOM_DECEL_LIMIT 0 1 Feed lowering on circles with tool radius compensation

Change of tool length components with change of active
42940 $SC_TOOL_LENGTH_CONST 0 0
plane
Assignment of tool length compensation independent of tool
42950 $SC_TOOL_LENGTH_TYPE 0 0
type
Notes

A110 Setup Milling
Basic settings Technology data
Settings
Milling
Bit mask for available search modes (ShopMill/ShopTurn)
Bit 0: Block search with calculation without approach
$MNS_BLOCK_SEARCH_MODE_MA
51024 1H Bit 1: Block search with calculation with approach
SK_JS
Bit 3: Skip EXTCALL programs
Bit 5: Block search with test run
Bit mask for available block search modes
$MNS_BLOCK_SEARCH_MODE_MA Bit 1: Block search with calculation with approach
51028 33H
SK Bit 3: Skip EXTCALL programs
Bit 4: Block search without calculation
Set actual value selection
0 = Set actual value is not offered.
51038 $MNS_SET_ACT_VALUE 1 1 = If a user frame (settable work offset e.g. G54) is active,
it will be used. In G500 Set actual values is not offered
(system frame is no longer used).
$MNS_PROGRAM_CONTROL_MOD Options for machine - program influence:
51039 1H
E_MASK Bit 0: Program test function available
Automatic operating area switchover to machine
Bit 0: When selecting a program in the program manager,
the operating area does not automatically switch over to
Machine.
Bit 1: When switching the type of operation via the MCP,
$MNS_SWITCH_TO_MACHINE_MAS
51040 0H the operating area is not automatically switched over to
K
Machine.
Bit 2: Do not switch automatically in Programs during pro-
gram selection.
Bit 3: No auto. Start of block search on selection / execu-
tion under Programs.
Function mask Simulation
Bit 0: No automatic start on simulation selection
51226 $MNS_FUNCTION_MASK_SIM 0H Bit 1: Deactivate simulation
Bit 6: Enable handwheel as simulation override
Bit 7: Interpretation of handwheel values as absolute values
Function mask Cross-technology
51228 $MNS_FUNCTION_MASK_TECH 0H Bit 0: G code programming without multi-channel data
Bit 1: Enable print function of editor
$MCS_DISP_COORDINATE_SYSTE
52000 0 0 0: Vertical milling machine
M
0: Plane selection on the operator panel
17: always G17
52005 $MCS_DISP_PLANE_MILL 0 0
18: always G18
19: always G19
Technology
0: no specific configuration
52200 $MCS_TECHNOLOGY 0 2
1: turning
2: milling
Extended technology
52201 $MCS_TECHNOLOGY_EXTENSION 0 0 1: turning: extended technology Turning has not yet been
implemented for Milling
2: milling
Notes

Setup Milling A110
Settings
Milling
Meaning of the axes
0 = no special meaning; 1 = tool spindle (driven tool); 2 = C
axis of the tool spindle (driven tool); 3 = main spindle
(turning); 4 = C axis of the main spindle (turning); 5 = coun-
52206 $MCS_AXIS_USAGE 0 0 terspindle (turning); 6 = C axis of the counterspindle
(turning); 7 = linear axis of the counterspindle (turning);
tailstock (turning); 9 = steady rest (turning); 10 = B axis
(turning), 12 = B axis of the counter spindle (turning),
13 = Traverse travel X of the counter spindle (turning)
Axis attributes
Bit 0: Rotates around the 1st geometry axis (applies to
rotary axes)
Bit 1: Rotates around the 2nd geometry axis (applies to
rotary axes)
Bit 2: Rotates around the 3rd geometry axis (applies to
rotary axes)
[0] = 0H -X
Bit 3: Positive direction of rotation is counterclockwise
[1] = 0H -Y
(applies to rotary axes)
[2] = 0H -Z
52207 $MCS_AXIS_USAGE_ATTRIB 0H Bit 4: Displayed direction of rotation for M3 is counterclock-
[3] = 0H -SP1
wise (applies to spindles)
[4] = 81H -A
Bit 5: Direction of rotation M3 corresponds to rotary axis
[5] = 44H -C
minus (applies to spindles)
This bit must be set analog to PLC bit DBnn.DBX17.6!
(nn = 31 + machine data index)
Bit 6: Show rotary axis as offset target for measruning
Bit 7: Offer rotation axis in position pattern
Bit 8: reserved
Bit 9: Spindle is not SPOS-capable
Function mask Display
Bit 0: Measuring system for programs always in the base
system
Bit 1: Face view when turning in the school coordinate sys-
tem
Bit 2: Hide “T,S,M” softkey in JOG area
52210 $MCS_FUNCTION_MASK_DISP 3H 13H
Bit 3: Generate automatic end-of-program in MDI
Bit 4: Show follow-on tool in T,F,S window
Bit 5: Hide softkey “Actual machine values“
Bit 6: Hide tool radius/diameter in T,F,S window
Bit 7: Hide tool lenght in T,F,S window
Bit 8: Hide tool icon in T,F,S window
Bit 0: Enable Swivel
Bit 1: No optimized travel along software limit switches
Bit 2: Approach logic for step drill (ShopTurn)
Bit 3: Call block search cycle for ShopMill/ShopTurn
Bit 4: Approach logic through cycle (ShopTurn)
Bit 5: Call block search cycle for SERUPRO
52212 $MCS_FUNCTION_MASK_TECH 0H Bit 3 = 1 Bit 6: Work offset value ZV cannot be entered as an abso-
lute value (ShopTurn)
Bit 7: Detect the expiry of tool lives (ShopMill/ShopTurn)
Bit 8: Manual machine (ShopMill/ShopTurn)
Bit 9: Selection/deselection of work offset via softkey
Bit 10: reserved
Bit 11: Switch off layer check for drilling and milling tools
(ShopTurn)
Notes

A110 Setup Milling
Settings
Milling
Function mask Milling
Bit 0: Enable cylinder surface transformation (ShopMill)
Bit 3: Enable inside/rear machining
52214 $MCS_FUNCTION_MASK_MILL 0H
Bit 4: Enable spindle clamping (C axis)
Bit 5: Enable spindle control of tool spindle via surface
Bit 6: Enable spindle control of turning spindle via surface
Function mask Drilling
52216 $MCS_FUNCTION_MASK_DRILL 0H Bit 0: CYCLE84 Unhide input fields Technology
Bit 1: CYCLE840 Unhide input fields Technology
Enable fast M functions
Bit 0: Coolant OFF
52229 $MCS_ENABLE_QUICK_M_CODES 0H Bit 1: Coolant 1 ON
Bit 2: Coolant 2 ON
Bit 3: Coolant 1 and 2 ON
$MCS_M_CODE_ALL_COOLANTS_
52230 9 M-code for all coolants OFF
OFF
52231 $MCS_M_CODE_COOLANT_1_ON 8 M-code for coolant 1 ON
52232 $MCS_M_CODE_COOLANT_2_ON 7 M-code for coolant 2 ON
$MCS_M_CODE_COOLANT_1_AND
52233 -1 M-code for coolant 1 + 2 ON
_2_ON
$MCS_NAME_TOOL_CHANGE_PRO
52240 “” “M6” Tool change program for G code steps
G
Function mask Tool management
Bit 0: Create tool on magazine location not allowed.
Bit 1: Load/unload disable, if machine is in reset.
Bit 2: Load/unload disable on Emergency stop.
Bit 3: Load/unload tool to/from spindle is disabled.
Bit 4: Loading is executed directly in the spindle.
52270 $MCS_TM_FUNCTION_MASK 0H
Bit 7: Create tool using the tool number.
Bit 8: Fade out Relocate tool.
Bit 9: Fade out Position magazine.
Bit 10: Reactivate tool using Position magazine.
Bit 11: Reactivate tool in all monitoring modes.
Bit 12: Fade out Reactivate tool.
Distance between individual magazine locations.
52271 $MCS_TM_MAG_PLACE_DISTANCE 70 Is used for graphical display of magazine and tools in tool
management.
Number of load station
= 0: If a query window is on the surface or if only one load-
52274 $MCS_TM_LOAD_STATION 0 ing station is available there will be no pop-up window
= 1: fixed loading station 1
= 2: fixed loading station 2
ShopMill only:
52281 $MCS_TOOL_MCODE_FUNC_ON -1
M-code for tool-specific function ON
M-code for tool-specific function OFF
52282 $MCS_TOOL_MCODE_FUNC_OFF -1 If both M commands of a function equal -1, the correspond-
ing field will not be displayed
X=0
Axis position at start of simulation
53230 $MAS_SIM_START_POSITION 0 Y=0
Only adjust with geometry axes
Z=300
Notes

Setup Milling A110
Settings
Milling
Bit 0: Diameter display for rotary tools.
Bit 1: Default direction of rotation for all turning tools
Bit 2: Create tool without suggesting name.
Bit 3: Input disable for tool name and tool type in the case of
loaded tools.
Bit 4: Input disable for loaded tools unless the channel is not
in reset.
54215 $SNS_TM_FUNCTION_MASK_SET 0H Bit 0 = 1 Bit 5: Accrue tool wear entries additively.
Bit 6: Entry of tool ID in numerical format.
Bit 7: Hide tool monitoring parameters.
Bit 8: Diameter display for transverse axis geometry.
Bit 9: Diameter display for transverse axis wear.
Bit 10: Enable loading/relocation of tool in buffer locations
Bit 11: Creation of new tool in gripper locations is disabled
Bit 12: Do not unload measuring tools if ”Unload all” function
is executed.
$SCS_MAX_INPUT_FEED_PER_RE
55200 1 Feedrate input upper limit for mm/rev
V
$SCS_MAX_INPUT_FEED_PER_TIM
55201 10000 Feedrate input upper limit for mm/min
E
$SCS_MAX_INPUT_FEED_PER_TO
55202 1 Feedrate input upper limit for mm/tooth
OTH
$SCS_FUNCTION_MASK_TECH_SE Bit 0: Tool preselection active (ShopMill only)
55212 6H 7H
T Bit 1: Calculate thread depth from thread pitch
Bit 2: Refer to Table for thread diameter and depth
Bit 0: Default setting - milling cycles with synchronous oper-
55214 $SCS_FUNCTION_MASK_MILL_SET 5H ation
Bit 2: Depth calculation in milling cycles without parameter
SC
Bit 1: Boring CYCLE86: consider rotation of the tool plane
when positioning the spindle
Bit 2: Boring CYCLE86: consider swiveled table kinematics
$SCS_FUNCTION_MASK_DRILL_SE
55216 18H when positioning the spindle (tool carrier)
T
Bit 3: Tapping CYCLE84: monitoring machine data 31050
and 31060 of the spindle
Function mask High Speed Settings CYCLE832
$SCS_FUNCTION_MASK_MILL_TOL Bit 0: Unhide technology fields CYCLE832
55220 0H
_SET Bit 1: Orientation tolerance (OTOL) as a tolerance factor,
enter it directly
Function mask Swivel CYCLE800
Bit 0: Display input field "No swivel"
Bit 1: Retraction variant Z, Z XY or fixed position
= 0: Retract Z or retract Z XY
= 1: Retract to fixed position 1 or 2
$SCS_FUNCTION_MASK_SWIVEL_S
55221 CH Bit 2: Allow selection "Deselection" of the swivel data block
ET
Bit 3: Show active swivel plane under Swivel in JOG
Bit 4: Optimized positioning in basic position (pole position)
of the kinematics
The settings of the Swivel function mask affect all swivel
data records.
Notes

A110 Setup Milling
Setup Milling Configuration of the axes and spindle
Pre-requisite: Machine axis name
Sinumerik Operate is already installed, PLC commissioning

MD10000
has been carried out, the tool management set-up has been
$MN_AXCONF_MACHAX_ Machine axis name
completed.
NAME_TAB
Options: Default: X1, Y1, Z1, A1, B1, C1 Change to:
In order for the required function to be achieved on your ma-

chine, the following software options must be available: Description:
MD10000[0] =X1
 "ShopMill/ShopTurn" MD10000[1] =Y1
Order Nr. 6FC5800-0AP17-0YB0 MD10000[2] =Z1
MD10000[3] =A1 → SP1
 "Residual material detection and machining" MD10000[4] =B1 → A1
Order Nr. 6FC5800-0AP13-0YB0 MD10000[5] =C1
 "Simultaneous recording (real-time simulation)"

Order Nr. 6FC5800-0AP22-0YB0
 "3D simulation 1 (finished part)"

Assignment of geometry axis to channel axis Machine axis number valid in channel
MD20070
MD20050 Machine axis number valid in
Assignment of geometry axis $MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_
$MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_ channel
to channel axis USED
ASSIGN_TAB
Default: 1, 2, 3, 0, 0, 0 Change to:
Default: 1, 2, 3 Change to:
Description:
Description:
MD20070[0] =1
MD20050[0] = 1 MD20070[1] =2
MD20050[1] = 2 MD20070[2] =3
MD20050[2] = 3 MD20070[3] =0 → 4
MD20070[4] =0 → 5
MD20070[5] =0 → 6
Geometry axis name in channel
Channel axis name in channel
MD20060 MD20080
Geometry axis name in chan- $MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_ Channel axis name in channel
$MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_
nel NAME_TAB
NAME_TAB
Default: X, Y, Z, A, B, C Change to:
Default: X, Y, Z Change to:
Description:
Description: MD20080[0] =X
MD20080[1] =Y
MD20060[0] = X MD20080[2] =Z
MD20060[1] = Y MD20080[3] =A → SP1
MD20060[2] = Z MD20080[4] =B → A
MD20080[5] =C
Notes

Setup Milling A110
Modulo conversion for rotary axis / spindle Description:

AX4: SP1
MD30310 Modulo conversion for rotary MD30320 =0 → 1 Actual value display Modulo
$MA_ROT_IS_MODULO axis / spindle AX5: A1
MD30320 =0 → 1 Actual value display Modulo
Default: 0 Change to:
AX6: C1
MD30320 =0 → 1 Actual value display Modulo
Description:
AX4: SP1
Rotary axis / spindle
MD30310 =0 → 1 Modulo-transformation for rotary axis
AX5: A1
MD30310 =0 → 1 Modulo-transformation for rotary axis MD30300
$MA_IS_ROT_ACHSE
AX6: C1
Modulo 360 degrees displayed for rotary axis or spindle Description:
AX4: SP1
MD30320 Modulo 360 degrees displayed MD30300 =0 → 1 axis is a rotary axis
$MA_DISPLAY_IS_MODULO for rotary axis or spindle
AX5: A1
MD30300 =0 → 1 axis is a rotary axis
AX6: C1
Assignment of spindle to machine axis Check of the set axes and spindles:
MD35000
Assignment of spindle to ma-
$MA_SPIND_ASSIGN_TO_
chine axis
MACHAX
Description:
Definition of the spindle. The spindle is defined if the spindle
number is entered into this MD.
AX4: SP1
MD35000 =0 → 1 Assignment of spindle to the machine axis
(spindle S1)
Notes

A110 Setup Milling
Manufacturer cycles Note:
For the individual matching the following cycles are included The cycle PROG_EVENT.SPF is a standard Siemens cycle
in the standard cycle package: and should not be changed by the manufacturer. For the
manufacturer cycles CYCPE1MA.SPF or CYCPE_MA.SPF,
the corresponding jump-out markers are prepared at the
Manufacturer‘s cycle for matching to the functions beginning and at the end of PROG_EVENT.SPF.
CUST_800.SPF
swivelling plane and tool swivelling (CYCLE800).
CUST_832.SPF
Manufacturer‘s cycle for matching to the function High At the beginning of the cycle PROG_EVENT
Speed Settings CYCLE832).
 CYCPE1MA in the directory CMA
Manufacturer’s cycle for matching to the function multi-
CUST_CLAMP.SPF
ple workpiece clamping At the end of the cycle PROG_EVENT
Standard cycle for the support of the functionality of:  CYCPE_MA.SPF in the directory CMA
 Block search when milling or turning is activated
PROG_EVENT.SPF
 Block search and swivelling plane For these cycles templates are not available. If the
CYCPE1MA.SPF and CYCPE_MA.SPF manufacturer cycles
 Block search and tool indexing
are loaded in the NC, the program branches from
PROG_EVENT to the manufacturer cycles as appropriate.
Copying the Manufacturer cycles Setting-up for milling

Matching of the coordinate systems to the user interface
1. Select the Setup mode for "Commissioning"
2. Press the Softkey "System data". Coordinate system position

3. Open the directory NC-data / Cycles / Stand- MD52000
ard cycles and select the required cycle. $MCS_DISP_COORDINATE_ Coordinate system position
SYSTEM
4. Press the Softkey "Copy" and open the direc-
Default: 0 Change to: No change
tory NC-data / Cycles / Manufacturer's cycles.
5. Press the Softkey "Paste".

Now this cycle is available for individual
matching
Note:
Only the cycles intended for the machine matching commenc-
ing with CUST_.*.SPF can be copied into the manufacturer or
user directory when using the access level "Manufacturer".
The cycle "PROG_EVENT.SPF is a standard cycle that can
neither be copied nor altered. It is listed here only to indicate
the scope for manufacturer-specific matching.
Notes

Setup Milling A110
Selection table of the possible coordinate systems
Description:
This MD is used to match the coordinate system of the user
interface to the coordinate system of the machine. In the user
interface all help images, the animated graphics, the simula-
tion as well as the input fields with circular direction indica-
tion.
The coordinate system can take on any of the shown posi-
tions.
The typical selection for vertical milling machine is 0 = Pre-
setting
Plane selection Milling The machining planes are specified as shown:
MD52005
$MCS_DISP_PLANE_MILL Plane selection Milling Plane Tool axis
Default: 0 Change to: No change Z
X/Y
G17
MD52005 = 0 Y
Z/X
G18
Typical vertical function = G17
X
Y/Z
Description: G19
0: Plane selection in the user interface

This setting makes sense only if the machining plane on
the machine can be switched, e.g. by the use of angular
milling heads.
17: always G17
18: always G18
19: always G19
Notes

A110 Setup Milling
Continuation MD52005
Example planar milling:
Plane selection by means of the toggle key:

G17 (XY), G18 (ZX), G19 (YZ) or no plane
Technology MD52201 presently not applicable:
MD52200
$MCS_TECHNOLOGY
Technology Meaning of the axes in the channel
Default: 0 Change to: 2 MD52206[x] Meaning of the axes in the

$MCS_AXIS_USAGE channel
Description:
0: No specific configuration Default: 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 Change to: No change
1: Turning
2: Milling MD52206[0] =0
Please also note MD 52201 MD52206[1] =0
$MCS_TECHNOLOGY_EXTENSION. MD52206[2] =0
MD52206[3] =0
Selection of 2 specifies milling as the main technology. This MD52206[4] =0
means, the Softkeys for drilling and milling will be shown MD52206[5] =0
along the lower edge of the screen.
Description:
No matching specification of the machine datum is required

for the sample machine being described here.
Extended technology
Note:
MD52201
If high-speed extension spindles are used, a 2 must be en-
$MCS_TECHNOLOGY_EXTE Extended technology
tered into the respective machine datum of the extension
NSION
spindle. An extension spindle is not included in the axis con-
Default: 0 Change to: No change figuration used here.
Notes

Setup Milling A110
Axis attributes Description:

In case of machines with rotary axes it is possible - in conjunc-
tion with the function:
MD52207[x]
Axis attributes "work piece measuring - edge alignment” - to determine the
$MCS_AXIS_USAGE_ATTRIB
angular correction
Default: 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 Change to: No change For this the following settings are necessary for the rotary ax-
es:
Description: MD52207[4] axis A = 0 → 81H

MD52207[5] axis C = 0 → 44H
Bit 0: Rotates around the 1st geometry axis (applies to rotary Bit 2 = 1: rotates around the 3rd geometry axis
axes) Bit 6 = 1: Show rotary axis as correction destina-
tion for measuring
Bit 1: Rotates around the 2nd geometry axis (applies to rotary
axes)
Example: Measuring zero-point work piece - align edge
Bit 2: Rotates around the 3rd geometry axis (applies to rotary
axes)
Bit 6: Show rotary axis as offset target for measuring
Note:
The Bits 3, 4 and 5 have no meaning in conjunction with

ShopMill.
Number of actual values with large font Only display spindles in actual values window
when in axis mode
MD52010
Number of actual values with
$MCS_DISP_NUM_AXIS_BIG MD51023 Only display spindles in actual
large font
_FONT $MNS_ACT_VALUE_SPIND_ values window when in axis
MODE mode
Description: Description:
Number of actual values with large font, Max. value 31. The display of the spindles in the actual value windows can
be influenced by means of this. If the datum is set to 1 the
spindles will be shown in the actual value window only while
they are in the axis mode. The axes are displayed below the
geometry and auxiliary axes. Axes that are not in the axis
mode are shown as gaps.
If set to 0 the spindles will be displayed at all times.
Notes

A110 Setup Milling
Function mask display Bit 0: This function is present-

ly not yet available. In a
ShopMill program it is
MD52210 always possible to se-
$MCS_FUNCTION_MASK_ Function mask display lect "mm dimensions" or
DISP "inch dimensions" in the
Default: 3H Change to: No change program header.
MD52210 Bit 0 = 1
MD52210 Bit 1 = 1
Description: Bit 1: Takes no effect in the Milling technology.

Bit 0: Meas. sys. for programs always in the base system
Bit 2=0: The Softkey "T,S,M" is shown in the mode JOG .
tem
This setting is in line with the basic setting of Shop-
Bit 2: Hide "T,S,M" softkey in Jog area
Mill.
Bit 3: Generate automatic end-of-program in MDI (with Soft-
key "Delete blocks")
Bit 2=1: The Softkey "T,S,M" is hidden in the mode JOG.
Bit 3=0: Under MDA the command End-of-program will not Bit 4 = 1 The follow-up tool is shown in the T;F;S-window.
be generated automatically after "Block delete". This setting makes sense only in conjunction with
tool prepare on a machine featuring a double grip-
per.
Bit 3=1: Under MDA the M-command entered in MD 10714

$M_NO_FCT_EOP will automatically be generated
as end-of-program command after "block delete". In
Note: Also see the setting of SD 55210
this example configuration it is M32.
$SCS_FUNCTION_MASK_TECH_SET, Bit 0
"Tool pre-selection activated"
Bit 4=0: The follow-up tool is not shown in the T;F;S-window
Notes

Setup Milling A110
Function mask Cross-technology Bit 0 and Bit 1 make sense only in conjunction with swivelling.
A more detailed description will be found in Module "A111
swivelling".
MD52212
Function mask Cross-
$MCS_FUNCTION_MASK_
technology
TECH
Default: 0H Change to: 8H

Bit 2: This Bit is not relevant in the technology Milling . In the
ShopMill cycles the longest cutting edge is taken into
account when retracting (retraction to the safety level).
MD52212 Bit 3 = 0 → 1
MD52212 Bit 5 = 0
Bit 0 and 1 are meaningful for swivelling

Bit 3 = 0 Bit 3 = 1
Description:
The ShopMill cycle The ShopMill cycle
Bit 0: Enable swivel E_S_ASUP is not carried E_S_ASUP will be carried
Bit 1: No optimized travel along software limit switches out after block search. out after block search. De-
Bit 2: Approach logic for step drill (ShopTurn) tails regarding this setting
Bit 3: Call block search cycle for ShopMill/ShopTurn are contained in the section
Bit 4: Approach logic through cycle (ShopTurn) "Block search"
Bit 6: Work offset value ZV cannot be entered (ShopTurn)
Bit 5 = 0 Bit 5 = 1 Cycle Settings-Drilling

Block search cycle for The standard cycle CY-
SERUPRO will not be CLE207 will be called up after
MD52216
called up. Block search with SERUPRO.
$MCS_FUNCTION_MASK_ Function mask Drilling
DRILL
The setting of Bit 3 is not ef-
fective in this case. The Default: 0H Change to: No change
E_S_ASUP will not be called
The setting = 0 is neces- up.
sary for single-channel
ShopMill machines. Description:
This setting must be used only
for multi-channel machines. Bit 0 = 0 Hide input fields Technology
1 Show input fields Technology
CYCLE84 (without compensating chuck)
Bit 1 = 0 Hide input fields Technology
1 Show input fields Technology
CYCLE840 (with compensating chuck) valid only for
ShopMill.
Notes

A110 Setup Milling
Continued MD52216 MD52216 Bit 0 = 1 MD52216 Bit 1 = 1

Technology fields will be Technology fields will be
shown with the selection shown with the selection
Bit 0 = 0 Bit 1 = 0 "without compensating "with compensating chuck
Technology fields will not be shown in either case: chuck (Cycle84) (Cycle840)
"with compensating chuck" "without compensating chuck
Function mask Cross-technology Bit 1 = 0 The thread depth will not be evaluated automatically
The value for the thread depth "H1" must be entered manual-
SD55212 ly from a table.
$SCS_FUNCTION_MASK_
technology
TECH_SET Bit 1 = 1 The thread depth will be evaluated from the metric
thread pitch.
SD55212 Bit 0 = 0 → 1
SD55212 Bit 1 = 1
SD55212 Bit 2 = 1
Description:
Bit 0: Tool pre-selection activated
Bit 1: Evaluate thread depth from metric pitch
Bit 2: Transfer thread diameter and thread depth from table

Directly after the exchange has been completed, the
tool will be prepared.
The generation of the follow-up tool occurs only with
JobShop cycles.
Bit 1: Automatic evaluation of the thread depth for metric
threads
Bit 2: Transfer thread diameter and thread depth from table.
Notes

Setup Milling A110
SD55212 Continued Bit 2 = 1 Thread diameter and depth from a table
Only if in the table the column "without" is selected and for P

the unit "mm/rev" will the thread depth "H1" in the yellow-
backed fields be calculated automatically. These automatical-
ly obtained values can be overwritten by the operator. If the
thread pitch is entered again, the thread depth will be calcu-
lated once more automatically.
Different factors are stored for the internal and external

threads:
- Internal threads: 0,5413
- External threads: 0,6134
As soon as the line ”Table ISO metric" is selected, the table is

activated for the various threads.
The yellow-backed fields for nominal diameters and thread

depth H1 will be filled in with tabular values depending on the
chosen thread.
Notes

A110 Setup Milling
Cycle Settings-Milling Bit 0 = 1
SD55214
$SCS_FUNCTION_MASK_ Function mask Milling
MILL_SET
Default: 5H Change to: No change
Description:
Bit 0: Default setting for milling with synchronous operation
Bit 1: not assigned
SC
Bit 0 The machining sense (Up-cut/down-cut) can be fixed

or selectable via the “toggle” key.
Bit 2 = 0 Bit 2 = 1 Function mask Drilling

The subdivision of cuts in The subdivision of cuts in
direction of infeed is cal- direction of infeed is ob-
culated including the safe- tained without the safety SD55216
ty gap SC for the path gap SC for the path from $SCS_FUNCTION_MASK_ Function mask Drilling
from Z0+SC to Z1 Z0 to Z1 DRILL_SET
SD55216 Bit 3 = 1
SD55216 Bit 4 = 1
Note:
The safety gap is specified in the program header.
Notes

Setup Milling A110
SD55216 Continued Description:
Description: Bit 0: Reversal of the spindle direction of rotation

when tapping
Bit 0: Tapping CYCLE84: Reversal of spindle rotation direc- This setting is no longer required as from SW
tion in the cycle 2.6 SP1, since it has been superseded by the
NCK.-function.
Bit 1: Boring CYCLE86: Taking into account the rotation of
the work piece plane when positioning the spindle Bit 1 = 1: Taking into account the rotation of the tool plane
Bit 2: Boring CYCLE86: Taking into account the indexed (CYCLE 86)
table kinematics (tool carrier) when positioning the In the boring cycle,CYCLE86 the spindle is po-
spindle sitioned on the parameter SPOS when reaching
the boring depth. If SPOS=0 the tool cutting
Bit 3: Tapping CYCLE84: (without compensating chuck). edge points in the positive direction of the 1st
Monitoring the machine data 31050[x] and 31060[x] of axis of the plane (G17 towards X+).
the spindle
Bit 4: Tapping CYCLE840: (with compensating chuck). Moni- If the setting is varied by using Bit 1 = 1, a rota-
toring the machine data 31050[x] and 31060[x] of the tion about the tool axis (e.g. ROT Z180) will be
spindle taken into account for the spindle positioning.
Bit 5: Tapping CYCLE84: Evaluation of the point of braking in Bit 2 = 1: Taking into account indexed table kinematics
case of G33 (CYCLE 86)
See description Bit1
The denominator of the gearbox is contained in MD31050[x] With the selection of Bit 2 = 1 an indexed kine-
while MD31060[x] contains the numerator. Together the two matics will be taken into account when position-
provide the gear ratio for the spindle. This is required for mon- ing the spindle.
itoring the feed obtained from the speed x the pitch.
Description: Cycle Settings

Bit3 = 1: Tapping CYCLE84: Monitoring the machine data
Upper limit feedrate/rev
31050 $MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM (divider
of gearbox ratio) and 31060
$MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO_NUMERA (numerator of SD55200
gearbox ratio) of the spindle for the boring axis $SCS_MAX_INP_FEED_PER_ Upper limit feedrate/rev
REV
The monitoring is activated only if MD35590
Default: 1 mm/U Change to: No change
$MA_PARAMSET_CHANGE_ENABLE = 2.
This setting permits a parameter block change by
Description:
the PLC-interface or by the command SCPARA
(servo parameter block programming). Upper limit for the selection of the federate/rev
If the monitoring is activated the alarm 61127
[Channel %1: ] Block %2 (gear ratio of the tapping
axis incorrectly defined) will be set:
Upper limit feedrate/min
Bit 4 = 1: Similar to Bit3, however, for the cycle CYCLE840
SD55201
Bit 5: Calculation of the commencing of braking for G33 $SCS_MAX_INP_FEED_PER_ Upper limit feedrate/min
CYCLE840) TIME
This function is not available at present.
Default: 10000 mm/min Change to: No change
Description:
Upper limit for the input of the feedrate in mm/min
Notes

A110 Setup Milling
Upper limit feedrate/tooth Setting up the tool list
SD55202 These settings are applicable only to JobShop programs

$SCS_MAX_INP_FEED_PER_ Upper limit feedrate/tooth
TOOTH
Default: 1 mm Change to: No change
MD52229
$MCS_ENABLE_QUICK_M_ Enable fast M functions
Description: CODES
Upper limit for the selection of the feedrate/tooth
Description:
Bit 0: Coolant OFF
Bit 1: Coolant 1 ON
Bit 2: Coolant 2 ON
This MD is used to declare the commands used for the cool-

ant control (see MD52230 - MD52233) as being fast M-
commands (M=QU…). In case of fast commands the program
progress continues without waiting for the acknowledgement
of the M-command by the PLC.
In the tool list there are input fields for coolant 1 and coolant 2 M-code for all coolants OFF
for each tool. The select key can be used to toggle the func-
tion "coolant ON/OFF". The respective M-functions are put MD52230
out if the tool is changed by means of the part-program. The $MCS_M_CODE_ALL_ M-code for all coolants OFF
M-commands will not be put out if the tool is exchanged by COOLANTS_OFF
means of the T,S,M mask.
Description:
M-Code for all coolant OFF
M-code for coolant 1 ON

MD52231
$MCS_M_CODE_COOLANT_1 M-code for coolant 1 ON
_ON
Description:
M-Code for coolant 1 ON
Notes

Setup Milling A110
M-code for coolant 2 ON M-code for both coolants ON

MD52232
$MCS_M_CODE_COOLANT_2 M-code for coolant 2 ON MD52233
_ON $MCS_M_CODE_COOLANT_ M-code for both coolants ON
1_AND_2_ON
Default: -1 Change to: No change
Description:
M-Code for coolant 2 ON Description:
M-Code for coolant 1 + 2 ON
Already defined: M8 = Coolant 1 ON

M7 = Coolant 2 ON
If in the JobShop tool list both coolants (coolant 1 and coolant

2) have been selected, the following M-command is generat-
ed:
-1: M-command for coolant 1 on (setting of MD52231) and
M-command for coolant 2 on (setting of MD52232)
>0: the M-command selected in this MD.

A separate M-command for both coolants is to be used if
the M-commands for coolant 1 and coolant 2 are grouped
in one M-commands group, however both coolants are to
be activated after a block search.
M-code for tool-specific function ON
MD52281[x]
M-code for tool-specific func-
$MCS_TOL_MCODE_FUNC_
tion ON
ON
Description:
In MD52281[0] - [3] ON and
in MD52282[0] - [3] OFF up to 4 additional columns for tool-
specific functions can be activated in the tool list. These can
then be selected in the columns M1- M4 (see screenshot
"Tool list" on the following page).
Description:
M-Code for tool-specific function ON
The value -1 means that the M-function will not be put out. If
both M-commands of a function = -1, the associated field in
the surface will not be shown.
Notes

A110 Setup Milling
M-code for tool specific function OFF Function mask Tool management
MD52282[x] MD52270 Function mask Tool manage-

M-code for tool-specific func-
$MCS_TOOL_MCODE_FUNC $MCS_TM_FUNKTION_MASK ment
tion OFF
_OFF
Description:
Description: Bit 0: Create tool on a magazine location not permitted.
M-Code for tool-specific function ON Tools can only be created outside the magazine.
The value -1 means that the M-function will not be put out. If Bit 1: Loading/unloading is not possible while the machine is
both M-commands of a function = -1, the associated field in not in Reset.
the surface will not be shown. Tools can only be loaded or unloaded if the respective
channel is at rest.
Bit 2: Loading/unloading locked during emergency OFF

Tools can only be loaded or unloaded if the Emergency
OFF is not activated.
Bit 3: Loading/unloading tools to/from spindle disabled.

Tools cannot be loaded to or unloaded from the
spindle.
Bit 4: Loading takes place in the spindle directly.

The tools are only loaded exclusively in the spindle.
Bit 5: reserved
Bit 6: reserved Notes:

This MD must be matched to the circumstances of the ma-
Bit 7: Create tool by means of the T-number.
chine. By hiding those functions on the user interface that are
The T-number of the tool must be entered when a new
not applicable to the machine, the PLC can be spared unnec-
tool is created.
essary actions to prevent operation errors.
Bit 8: Hide 'Re-locate tool'
Bit 7: Create tool using the T-number
The function 'Re-locate tool' is suppressed on the user
This function is intended for machines with tool man-
interface.
agement but without magazine configuration. The de-
Bit 9: Hide 'Magazine positioning' fault setting must not be changed.
The function 'magazine positioning' is suppressed on
the user interface.
Bit 10: Re-activation of tool using magazine positioning

Before re-activation the tool is located on the loading
position.
Bit 11: Re-activating the tool in all monitoring modes.

When re-activating a tool, all monitoring modes for this
tool released in the NC will also be re-activated; i.e.
also those monitoring modes that are not selected for
the respective tool, but which are dormant in the back-
ground.
Bit 12: Hide 'Tool re-activation'

The function "Tool re-activating" is suppressed on the
user interface.
Notes

Setup Milling A110
Load station Tool management The following screenshots show a configuration with two
loading stations and the setting MD52274 = 0.
MD52274
Load station Tool manage-
$MCS_TM_TOOL_LOAD_
ment
STATION
MD52274 = 0 → max. 16
Description:
If only one loading station is configured: The setting = 0

= 0: There will be no pop-up window.
If more than 1 loading station is configured, you can select
between
= 0: A query window appears on the surface to select the
loading point.
= 1: fixed loading station 1, the window does not appear
= 2: fixed loading station 2, the window does not appear
Acknowledge the selection made with OK
Function mask Tool management Bit 5: Evaluation of tool wear inputs additively
The input of wear data will be added to any existing
SD54215 wear values.
Function mask Tool manage-
$SNS_TM_FUNCTION_MASK
ment Bit 6: Numeric input of the tool identification
_SET
No name will be assigned to a new tool being created.
Default: 0H Change to: 1H Only numerical characters are permitted .
Bit 0 = 0 → 1 Diameter readout for rotating tools Bit 7: Hiding the tool monitoring parameter
The tool monitoring parameter will not be shown on the
Description: user interface.
Bit 0: Diameter readout for rotating tools
It is not the radius value, but the diameter value that is
shown for rotating tools.
Bit 1: Default direction of rotation for all turning tools is M4

When turning tools are created, the direction of rotation
is preset to M4.
Bit 2: Creating tools without assigning a name

When creating a new tool the input field for the tool
name remains empty.
Bit 3: Input interlock for tool name and tool type for loaded
tools
Tool name and tool type cannot be changed for loaded
tools.
Notes

A110 Setup Milling
Continued SD54215 Bit 0 = 0 permanent radius readout for all tools
Description:
Bit 8: Diameter readout for transverse axis - geometry

The geometry value of the transverse axis is shown as
a diameter value.
Bit 9: Diameter readout for transverse axis - wear

The wear value of the transverse axis is shown as
diameter value.
Bit 10: Release of Tool loading / Tool re-location to buffer

station
The magazine number can be entered in the loading
dialog. This permits access to the buffer station using
the magazine number 9998.
Bit 11: The creation of new tools in the gripper locations is

blocked.
Bit 0 = 1 Diameter readout for rotating tools Bit10 = 1 Release of Tool relocation to buffer station
Notes

Setup Milling A110
Continued SD54215 Checking the tool management
The locations 1 = spindle, 2 = gripper 1 and 3 = gripper 2 can

be loaded directly by means of the magazine number 9998.
In the tool list these are the uppermost three lines without
numbering.
Marked tools can be unloaded. As soon as the cursor is
In the shown example the "TWIST_DRILL_8" is loaded in the
moved to a free magazine location the Softkey "New tool"
spindle.
appears for the creation of a new tool.
By horizontal scrolling the fields for all tool-specific M- Basic settings

functions M1 … M4 appear.
Reset-defiant settings
Definition of basic control settings after reset/PP

end
MD20110 Definition of basic control set-

$MC_RESET_MODE_MASK tings after reset/PP end
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 Bit-masks
4 0 4 1 Hex
The various types of tools are shown in the selection list.
Notes

A110 Setup Milling
Continued MD20110 Description:

Bit 0 = 1
Bit 16: Reset response "Master spindle"
Bit 6 = 0 → 1
Bit 17: Reset response "Master tool holder"
Bit 14 = 0 → 1
Bit 18: Reset response "Reference axis for G96/G961/G962"
Bit 19: Reserved "variable SW limit switches disabled"
Description:
Determination of the basic control settings after booting and The Bits 4 to 11, 16 and 17 are only evaluated if Bit 0 = 1.
reset/end-of-part-program with respect to the G-codes
(especially the current plane and selectable zero-point offset), Meaning of the individual Bits:
tool length and transformation by the setting of the following
bits: Bit 0 (LSB) = 0:
Bit 0: Reset mode Initial setting after booting:
Bit 1: Suppression of aux. function output on tool selection - G-Codes as per $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES
Bit 2: Selection of the reset response after power ON; e.g. - Tool length offset not active
the tool offset - Transformation not active
Bit 3: Selection of the reset response after the end of the - no coupled axes groupings active
test mode in respect of active tool offsets. - no tangential correction active
Bit 4: Reserved - no axial rotational feed active
Bit 5: Reserved - path rotational feed with master spindle
Bit 6: Reset response "Active tool length offset" (Default)
Bit 7: Reset response "Active kinematics transformation"
Bit 8: Reset response "Coupled-motion axes" Initial setting after Reset or after end-of-part-program :
Bit 9: Reset response "Tangential correction" The current settings will be retained.
Bit 10: Reset response "Synchronous spindle" With the next part-program Start the following Initial settings
Bit 11: Reset response "Rotational feed" will become active:
Bit 12: Reset response "Geo-axis replacement"
Bit 13: Reset response "Master value coupling"
Bit 14: Reset response "Initial frames"
Bit 15: Reset response "Electronic gearbox"
- G-Codes as per $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES Description:

- Tool length offset not active
- Transformation not active Initial setting after Reset or after End-of-part program:
- No coupled-motion groupings active Depending on $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK Bit 6 to 7 the
- No tangential offsets active current settings for
- No master value couplings active - Tool length offset
- No axial rotational feedrate active - Transformation
- Path rotational feedrate with master spindle will either be retained or changed to the initial settings as
(Default) stored in the MDs.
Bit 0 (LSB) = 1: Depending on Bit 8 and 9 the current settings of coupled mo-
Initial setting after booting: tion axes or tangentially corrected axes will either be retained
- G-Codes as per $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES or switched OFF.
- Tool length offset active as per
$MC_TOOL_RESET_VALUE, Projected synchronous spindle coupling:
$MC_CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE and The coupling will be un-selected depending on the setting of
$MC_SUMCORR_RESET_VALUE $MC_COUPLE_RESET_MODE_1.
- Transformation active per $MC_TRAFO_RESET_VALUE
- Geo axis replacement as per Non-projected synchronous spindle coupling:
$MC_GEOAX_CHANGE_RESET Depending on Bit 10 the coupling will either be switched OFF
- No coupled-motion groupings active or retained.
- No tangential correction active Depending on Bit 14 the initial frame will be retained or un-
selected.
Initial setting after reset or after end-of-part-program:
Depending on the setting of $MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE Note:
the current settings for the G-groups will be retained or set to The setting of Bit 0 = 1 must be set for JobShop-uses,
the initial values stored in $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES. such that the settings of the Bits 4 to 11, 16 and 17 can
be evaluated.
Notes

Setup Milling A110

Bit 2 = 1 :
Bit 1 = 0:
If the tool and/or magazine management is not activated:
Auxiliary function output (D,T,M,) to the PLC when selecting
- If both Bits 0 and 6 both have the value = 1 (0x41), then the
tools according to the MDs $MC_TOOL_RESET_VALUE,
tool offsets of the last tool to be active in NCK after the first
$MC_CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE,
reset after Power ON will be active.
$MC_TOOL_PRESEL_RESET_VALUE and
(The value of the programmed tool depends on the value of
$MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE.
the machine datum $MC_TOOL_PRESEL_RESET_VALUE.)
T, M will not generally be put out as auxiliary functions if the
magazine management is activated.
Caution:
The function utilizes its own communication in order to put out
T, M also - among others - to the PLC. NCK is not aware of the conditions at the machine.
Bit 1 = 1: Not relevant, if the tool and or the magazine management is

Suppress auxiliary function output to the PLC when selecting active.
tools.
T, M will not generally be put out as auxiliary functions if the Bit 3 = 0:
tool and magazine management is activated. With or without tool management:
- End of the test mode: "Retain the current setting for the ac-
Bit 2 = 0 : tive tool length offset" (Bits 0 and 6 are set) refers to the pro-
If tool and magazine management is not active: gram that was active before switching ON the test mode.
- No tool correction after power On is active. Active and pro-
grammed T depend on the additional settings of the machine
datum (Bits 0, 6).
If the tool or the magazine management are not active:
- not relevant
Bit 3 = 1: Description:
On any meaning only if the tool management is active:
Bit 6 = 1:
- End of the test mode: "Retain the current setting for the ac-
The current setting for the active tool length offset remains in
tive tool length offset" (Bits 0 and 6 are set) refers to the pro-
force after reset/End-of-part-program.
gram that was active before switching ON the test mode.
If the tool and/or magazine management is active, that tool
(Generally speaking the tool in the spindle is the active tool if
will be selected which is presently loaded in the master spin-
the tool management is activated. Exception only for
dle (generally = master tool holder).
$MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT = -2.)
If the tool in the master spindle happens to be blocked, the
"blocked"-status will be ignored. .
Bit 4 = 0: Reserved
Bit 4 = 1: Reserved
However, it must be remembered that after the end of pro-
gram or a program interruption either the last programmed
Bit 5 = 0: Reserved
value for the master spindle or master tool holder, or the val-
Bit 5 = 1: Reserved
ue specified by $MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND or
$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER will determine
Bit 6 = 0:
the master spindle or the master tool holder.
Initial setting for the active tool length offset after Reset/End-
(The selection is made by Bit 16 or Bit 17.)
of-part program as per $MC_TOOL_RESET_VALUE,
A special case is $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT = -2:
$MC_USEKT_RESET_VALUE and
If a tool has been changed on the spindle, but no new correc-
$MC_SUMCORR_RESET_VALUE.
tion D has been programmed, then the previous tool is still
Is $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE = 1, the tool specified by
active in the NCK.
$MC_TOOL_PRESEL_RESET_VALUE is additionally pre-
If an interruption takes place in this state, - e.g. by pressing
selected.
the reset key, the correction will be specified by the lowest D-
If the tool and/or magazine management is active, it is not the
number of the tool in the master spindle.
datum $MC_TOOL_RESET_VALUE that is used, instead
$MC_TOOL_RESET_NAME will be used.
Notes

A110 Setup Milling
MD20110 continued Description:

Bit 9 = 0:
Note:
Tangential correction will be switched OFF with Reset/End-of
The setting Bit 6=1 is necessary to ensure that after a
-part-program.
reset/End-of-part-program the previously programmed
tool and the previously programmed cutting edge re-
Bit 9 = 1:
mains activated (for instance, if the tool was changed via
Tangential correction remains activated after Reset/End-of-
the T,S,M-mask) and if for example the JobShop-
part program.
functions in the mode of operation JOG "Zero point work
piece" or "Tool measurement" can be carried out with
Bit 10 = 0:
this tool.
Non-projected synchronous spindle coupling will be switched
OFF after Reset/End-of-part-program.
Bit 7 = 0:
Initial setting for active transformation after Reset/End-of-part-
Bit 10 = 1:
program as per $MC_TRAFO_RESET_VALUE.
Non-projected synchronous spindle coupling remains acti-
vated after Reset/End-of-part-program.
Bit 7 = 1:
The current setting for the active transformation remains op- Bit 11 = 0:
erative after Reset/End-of-part-program.
With Reset/End-of-part-program the setting datum
$SA_ASSIGN_FEED_PER_REV_SOURCE of all non-active
Bit 8 = 0:
axes/spindles will be set to =0, i.e. feed no longer takes
Coupled-motion groupings will be de-activated after Reset/
place with rotational feedrate and the setting for path and
End-of-part-program.
synchronous axes will be reset to the master spindle
(Default).
Bit 8 = 1:
Coupled-motion groupings remain active after Reset/End-of-
part-program.
Bit 11 = 1: Description:
The current setting for the rotational feedrate remains activat-
ed after a Reset/End-of-part-program. When a part program is Bit 14 = 0:
started, the setting datum The basic frame is cancelled
$SA_ASSIGN_FEED_PER_REV_SOURCE will be reset to 0
for all non-active axes/spindles, i.e. feed no longer takes place Bit 14 = 1:
with rotational feedrate and the setting for path and synchro- The current setting for the basic frame is retained.
nous axes will be reset to the master spindle (Default).
Note:
Bit 12 = 0: The setting Bit 14 = 1 is necessary to retain the channel-
If the machine datum $MC_GEOAX_CHANGE_RESET is set, specific basic work offset (WO), which was activated
a changed geometry axis attribution will be cancelled with with G500, after a Reset/End-of-part-program.
reset or with End-of-part program. The initial setting specified After activation of the basic WO (JOG-T,S,M-mask -
in the machine data for the geometry axis attribution is activat- Work offset - basic reference) the values in the Work
ed. offset base are transferred to the Total basic WO and
then from there to be transferred for activation also to
Bit 12 = 1: the Total WO.
A changed geometry axis attribution remains activated after a
Reset/End-of-part-program.
Bit 13 = 0:
Master value couplings are cancelled with Reset/End-of-part-
program.
Bit 13 = 1:
Master value couplings remain active after Reset/End-of-part-
program.
Notes

Setup Milling A110
Continued MD20110 Bit 15 = 0:

Active electronic gearboxes remain activated after Reset/End-
of-part-program.
Bit 15 = 1:
Active electronic gearboxes are cancelled with Reset/End-of-
part-program.
Bit 16 = 0:
Initial setting for the master spindle as per
$MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND.
Bit 16 = 1:
The current setting of the master spindle (SETMS) is retained.
This Bit in case of
$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER = 0 has also an
effect on the response of Bit 6.
Note:
The setting of Bit 16 is not applicable to ShopMill.
Description: The previously described settings in MD20110

correspond to the further MD-settings in:
Bit 17 = 0:
Initial setting for the master tool holder as per MD20120 $MC_TOOL_RESET_VALUE
$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER. MD20130 $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE
MD20150 $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES
Bit 17 = 1: MD20152 $MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE
The current setting for the master tool holder (SETMTH) is MD20140 $MC_TRAFO_RESET_VALUE
retained. (Bit17 is of importance only if the tool or magazine MD20112 $MC_START_MODE_MASK
management is active and if MD20121 $MC_TOOL_PRESEL_RESET_VALUE
$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER > 0. Otherwise MD20118 $MC_GEOAX_CHANGE_RESET
Bit 16 applies to the setting for the master spindle if the tool
or magazine management is active. This Bit also has an ef-
fect on Bit 6.
Bit 18 = 0:
Reference axis for G96/G961/G962 as per MD 20100:
$MC_DIAMETER_AX_DEF.
If SCC is used for an own spindle reset Bit 18 = 1 is recom-
mended (see also MD 20112: $MC_START_MODE_MASK,
Bit 18).
Bit 18 = 1:
The reference axis for G96/G961/G962 is retained.
Bit 19: Reserved!
Notes

A110 Setup Milling
Tool edge with length compensation during runup Corresponds to:

(reset/end of part program) MD20110 $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK
MD20112 $MC_START_MODE_MASK
MD20130 Tool edge with length com- Note:

$MC_CUTTING_EDGE_ pens. during runup (reset/end
RESET_VALUE of pp) This setting is necessary to ensure that after a reset/End
-of-part-program the previously programmed tool and
Default: 0 Change to: 1 the previously programmed cutting edge remains acti-
vated (for instance, if the tool was changed via the T,S,M
-mask) and if for example the JobShop-functions in the
MD20130 = 0 → 1 mode of operation JOG "Zero point work piece" or "Tool
measurement" can be carried out with this tool.
Description:
Specification of the cutting edge, which depending on
MD20110 $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK and after part pro-
gram Start depending on MD20112
$MC_START_MODE_MASK is used to select the tool length
offset after booting and after Reset /End-of-part-program.
With active tool management and with Bit 0 and Bit 6 set in
MD20110 $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK at selection, the last
offset of the tool active at power OFF (as a rule the tool in the
spindle) is effective after booting.
Initial setting of G groups Description:
MD20150 Denomination Group Standard value

$MC_GCODE_RESET_ Initial setting of G groups for 840D sl
VALUES
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[0] 1 2 (G1)
Default: Change to: No change GCODE_RESET_VALUES[1] 2 0 (inactive)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[2] 3 0 (inactive)
MD20150[15] = 1 → 3 (CFIN) GCODE_RESET_VALUES[3] 4 1 (STARTFIFO)
MD20150[21] = 1 → 2 (CUT2DF) GCODE_RESET_VALUES[4] 5 0 (inactive)
MD20150[41] = 1 (TCOABS) GCODE_RESET_VALUES[5] 6 1 (G17)
MD20150[51] = 1 (PAROTOF) GCODE_RESET_VALUES[6] 7 1 (G40)
MD20150[52] = 1 (TOROTOF) GCODE_RESET_VALUES[7] 8 1 (G500)
Description: GCODE_RESET_VALUES[11] 12 1 (G601)
Specification of the G-Codes, which after booting and Reset/ GCODE_RESET_VALUES[12] 13 2 (G71)
End-of-part program are activated depending on
MD20110 $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK and GCODE_RESET_VALUES[14] 15 2 (G94)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[15] 16 1 (CFC)
MD20152 $MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE as well as after part
program Start depending on GCODE_RESET_VALUES[16] 17 1 (NORM)
MD20112 $MC_START_MODE_MASK.
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[18] 19 1 (BNAT)
As a default value the index of the G-codes in the respective GCODE_RESET_VALUES[19] 20 1 (ENAT)
groups must be stated. GCODE_RESET_VALUES[20] 21 1 (BRISK)
Notes

Setup Milling A110
Continued MD20150 GCODE_RESET_VALUES[41] 42 1 (TCOABS)

GCODE_RESET_VALUES[44] 45 1 (SPATH)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[45] 46 1 (LFTXT)
Denomination Group Standard value
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[46] 47 1 (G290 SINUME
for 840D sl
RIK-mode)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[21] 22 1 (CUT2D)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[48] 49 1 (CP)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[22] 23 1 (CDOF)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[49] 50 1 (ORIEULER)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[23] 24 1 (FFWOF)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[50] 51 1 (ORIVECT)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[24] 25 1 (ORIWKS)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[51] 52 1 (PAROTOF)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[25] 26 2 (RMI)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[52] 53 1 (TOROTOF)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[26] 27 1 (ORIC)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[53] 54 1 (ORIROTA)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[27] 28 1 (WALIMON)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[54] 55 1 (RTLION)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[28] 29 1 (DIAMOF)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[55] 56 1 (TOWSTD)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[29] 30 1 (COMPOF)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[56] 57 1 (FENDNORM)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[57] 58 1 (RELIEVEON)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[58] 59 1 (DYNNORM)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[32] 33 1 (FTOCOF)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[59] 60 1 (WALCS0)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[33] 34 1 (OSOF)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[60] 61 1 (ORISOF)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[34] 35 1 (SPOF)
…
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[35] 36 1 (PDELAYON)
...
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[36] 37 1 (FNORM)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[69] 70 1 (not specified)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[37] 38 1 (SPIF1)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[38] 39 1 (CPRECOF)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[39] 40 1 (CUTCONOF)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[40] 41 1 (LFOF)
Notes: MD20150[51] = 1 (exact)

Group 52: Tool-related Frame rotation
(exact) means that this setting is necessary in conjunction Value: 1 = PAROTOF
with JobShop; (variable) means that this should be seen as a The tool related Frame rotation is deactivated.
suggestion and that another setting is permissible. The work piece coordinate system is not aligned
to the work piece.
MD20150[15] = 3 (variable) MD20150[52] = 1 (variable)

Group 16: Feedrate correction on internal and external Group 52: Tool-related Frame rotation
curves Value: 2 = TOROTOF
Value: 3 = CFIN The tool related Frame rotation is de-activated.
This setting provokes a constant feedrate on
internal curves and acceleration on external
curves
MD20150[21] = 2 (variable)
Group 22: Tool correction type
Value: 2 = CUT2DF
2½-D-tool correction caused by Frame
The tool correction acts relative to the current
Frame (oblique plane)
MD20150[41] = 1 (exact)
Group 42: Tool carrier
Value: 1 = TCOABS
Determination of the tool length components
from the current tool orientation
Notes

A110 Setup Milling
Reset response of G groups A list of the G-functional groups can be found with MD20150
MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES.
MD20152
Reset response of G groups Notes:
$MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE
(exact) means that this setting is necessary in conjunction
Default: 0 Change to: with JobShop; (variable) means that this should be seen as a
suggestion and that another setting is permissible.
MD20152[5] = 1 (exact)
MD20152[5] = 1 (exact)
MD20152[7] = 1 (exact)
Group 6: Plane selection
MD20152[12] = 0 (exact)
Value: 1
MD20152[21] = 0 (variable)
A plane switch (e.g. G17 for facing) programmed
in the part-program remains active after Reset/
Description:
MD20152[7] = 1 (exact)
This machine datum is evaluated only if in MD20110
Group 8: Selectable zero point offset
$MC_RESET_MODE_MASK the Bit 0 is set. For each entry Value: 1
in MD20150 $MN_GCODE_RESET_VALUES (that is for
A zero point offset (e.g. G54) programmed in the
each G group) this MD is used to specify whether
part program remains active after Reset/End-of-
part-program. This permits for example the acti-
= 0: in case of a Reset/End-of-part-program the setting as vation of a zero point offset in the mode-of-
per $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES is used again
operation JOG_T,S,M-mask Parameter zero
or
point offset.
= 1: the current setting is retained after Reset/End-of-part-
program
Description: Activation and impact of program runtime measure-

ment
MD20152[12] = 0 (exact) MD27860

Activation and impact of pro-
Group 13: Work piece dimensioning inch/metric $MC_PROCESSTIMER_ MO-
gram runtime measurement
Value: 0 DE
In the user interface it is possible in the mode-of- Default: 0H Change to: 73H
operation JOG Basic softkey line ">" Settings per
Softkey "Switching Inch" to toggle the measuring MD27860 Bit 0 = 0 → 1
system from metric to inch and vice versa. MD27860 Bit 1 = 0 → 1
MD27860 Bit 4 = 0 → 1
MD20152[21] = 0 (variable) MD27860 Bit 5 = 0 → 1
Group 22: Tool correction type MD27860 Bit 6 = 0 → 1
Value: 0
After Reset/End-of-part-program the tool correc- Description:
tion defined in MD20150[15] is activated once
more. CUT2DF in this configuration example. Under the function program runtime timers are provided as
system variables. While the NCK-specific timers are always
activated (for timings since the last control unit boot), the
channel-specific timers must be started by means of this da-
tum.
Meaning:
Bit 0 = 0
No timing of the total runtime for all part programs
Notes

Setup Milling A110
Bit 0 = 1 Bit 5 = 0 No timing during program test

The timing of the total runtime for all part programs is
Bit 5 = 1 Timing also during program test
active ($AC_OPERATING_TIME)
Bit 6 only if Bit 1 = 1:
Bit 1 = 0
No timing of the current program runtime Bit 6 = 0
Delete $AC_CYCLE_TIME also after Start by ASUP and
Bit 1 = 1
PROG_EVENTs.
The measurement of the current program run-time is active
($AC_CYCLE_TIME) Bit 6 = 1
$AC_CYCLE_TIME will not be deleted after Start by ASUP
Bit 2 = 0
and PROG_EVENTs.
No timing of the tool cutting time
Bit 2 = 1
Timing of the tool cutting time is active Bit 7 = 0 $AC_CUTTING_TIME counts only with active tool.
($AC_CUTTING_TIME)
Bit 7 = 1 $AC_CUTTING_TIME counts independently of tool.
Bit 3
Reserved
Bit 8 = 0
Bits 4 only if Bit 0 and 1= 1:
$AC_CYCLE_TIME will not be deleted in case of a jump with
Bit 4 = 0 No timing during active test run feed motion GOTOS to the program start.
Bit 4 = 1 Timing also during active test run feed motion
Description: Work piece counters
Bit 8 = 1 A difference is made between the following work piece coun-

$AC_CYCLE_TIME will be deleted in case of a jump with ters:
GOTOS to the program start.  Number of the command work pieces
Bit 9 only if Bit 0, 1 = 1: System variable $AC_REQURED_PARTS
Setting by means of Bit 0 and 1
Bit 9 = 0  Total number of work pieces (actual work pieces) fin-
$AC_OPERATING_TIME, $AC_CYCLE_TIME: No timing
ished since the Start
when Override = 0.
System variable $AC_TOTAL_PARTS
Bit 9 = 1 Setting by means of Bit 4, 5 and 7
$AC_OPERATING_TIME, $AC_CYCLE_TIME: Timing also if  Number of all work pieces (actual work pieces) finished
Override = 0. since the Start
Bit 10 to 31 System variable $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS
Reserved Setting by means of Bit 8, 9 and 11
 Number of work pieces finished as per the own strate-
gy
System variable $AC_SPECIAL_PARTS
Setting by means of Bit 12, 13 and 15
Notes

A110 Setup Milling
Continued Work piece counters Activation of workpiece counter
In the user interface of the MD27880 Activation of workpiece coun-

mode-of-operation AUTO the $MC_PART_COUNTER ter
mask shown alongside can be
opened by selecting Time/ Default: 0H Change to: 901H
Counter
MD27880 Bit 0 = 0 → 1
MD27880 Bit 8 = 0 → 1
MD27880 Bit 11 = 0 → 1
The following assignment applies:

- Parameter "Workpieces, setpoint": Bit 0 = 1: Counter $AC_REQUIRED_PARTS is activated
$AC_REQUIRED_PARTS Further meaning of Bit 1-3 only if Bit 0 =1 and
- Parameter "Workpieces, actual": $AC_REQUIRED_PARTS > 0:
$AC_ACTUAL_PARTS
Further meaning of Bit 1 - 3 only if Bit 0 = 1 and
$AC_REQUIRED_PARTS > 0:
Bit 1 = 0: Alarm/VDI-output if $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS corre-

sponds to $AC_REQUIRED_PARTS
Bit 1 = 1: Alarm/VDI-output if $AC_SPECIAL_PARTS corre-

sponds to $AC_REQUIRED_PARTS
Bit 2: reserved Bit 9 = 0: Counter $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS is increased by the

value 1 after a VDI-output of M02/M30
Bit 3: reserved
Bit 9 = 1: Counter $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS is increased by the
Bit 4 = 1: Counter $AC_TOTAL_PARTS is active value 1 after the output of the M-command from MD
PART_COUNTER_MCODE[1]
$AC_TOTAL_PARTS > 0: Bit 10: reserved
Bit 5 = 0: Counter $AC_TOTAL_PARTS is increased by the Bit 11 = 1: Counter $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS is increased by

value 1 after a VDI-output of M02/M30. the value 1 after a jump back with GOTOS.
Bit 5 = 1: Counter $AC_TOTAL_PARTS is increased by the Bit 12 = 1: Counter $AC_SPECIAL_PARTS is active

value 1 after the output of the M-command from MD
PART_COUNTER_MCODE[0] Further meaning of Bit 13-15 only if Bit 12 =1 and
$AC_REQUIRED_PARTS > 0:
Bit 6 : reserved
Bit 13 = 0: Counter $AC_SPECIAL_PARTS is increased by
Bit 7 = 1: Counter $AC_TOTAL_PARTS is increased by the the value 1 after a VDI-output of M02/M30
value 1 after a jump back with GOTOS
Bit 8 = 1: Counter $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS is active the value 1 after output of the M-command from
MD PART_COUNTER_MCODE[2]
$AC_REQUIRED_PARTS > 0: Bit 14: reserved
Notes

Setup Milling A110
Continued MD27880 In a G code part program the program repetition can be done
by
Bit 15 = 1: Counter $AC_SPECIAL_PARTS is increased by  the command GOTOS or#
the value 1 after a jump back with GOTOS.
 ….
GOTOS ;Repeat
Application example: M30
 a self-defined M command
MD27880 PART_COUNTER = 101H …
Bit 0 = 1: Counter $AC_REQUIRED_PARTS "Work pieces M33 ; Repeat
Command" activate M30
Bit 8 = 1: Counter $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS "Work pieces Actu-
al" activate The number of work pieces is to be set in the mode-of-
operation AUTO in the mask “Time/Counter” by the parame-
MD 27882[1] PART_COUNTER_MCODE = 32 ter “Workpieces, setpoint”.
Part program: Relevant PLC interface signals:

Activating the part program repetition is done by setting the
In such a JobShop-Program the program repeat can be PLC interface signal "Chan1".A_ProgJump//DB21.DBX384.0
switched ON in the automatically generated End-of-program to 1.
block by means of the parameter "Repetition". In this case the When the actual number of workpieces matches the number
command GOTOS will be generated. of setpoint the PLC interface signal "Chan1".E_WS_Step//
DB21.DBX317.1 is set to 1.
Memory space for REORG (DRAM) Bit 0 = 1 System frame for Actual value set and scratching
Bit 5 = 1 System frame for cycles
MD28000 Description:
Memory space for REORG
$MC_MM_REORG_LOG_
(DRAM) Bit-mask for the projecting of channel-specific system frames,
FILE_MEM
which are evaluated in the channel.
Default: 50 Change to: 75
Bit 0: System frame for actual value set and scratching
Bit 1: System frame for external zero point offset
Number of blocks for local user variables in Bit 2: System frame for TCARR and PAROT
REORG (DRAM) Bit 3: System frame for TOROT and TOFRAME
Bit 4: System frame for work piece reference points
Bit 5: System frame for cycles
MD28010 Number of blocks for local Bit 6: System frame for transformations
$MC_MM_NUM_REORG_ user variables in REORG Bit 7: System frame $P_ISO1FR for ISO G51.1 mirror
LUD_ MODULES (DRAM) Bit 8: System frame $P_ISO2FR for ISO G68 2DROT
Bit 9: System frame $P_ISO3FR for ISO G68 3DROT
Default: 8 Change to: 20 Bit 10: System frame $P_ISO4FR for ISO G51 Scaling
Bit 11: System frame $P_RELFR for rel. coordinate systems
Projecting of channel-specific system frames
Note:
MD28082 The system frames for actual value set and scratching
$MC_MM_SYSTEM_FRAME_ System frames (SRAM) (basic reference=) and for cycles are required for
MASK JobShop installations.
Default: 21H Change to:
Notes

A110 Setup Milling
JOG-TSM Tool change

Definition of basic control settings after Reset/PP
In the operation mode JOG the input masks for "T,S,M", end
"Position" and "Face milling" are available. These permit sim-
ple functions to be carried out such:
- T,S,M: Tool changes, spindle functions, ZPO-selections MD20110 Definition of basic control
- Position: axes and spindles positioning $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK settings after reset/PP end
- Face milling: roughing of a corner with chamfers and/or ra-
dii. Default: 1H Change to: 4041H
After the data have been entered and NC-Start initiated the MD20110 = 1H → 4041H
file MA_JOG_STEP1.MPF will be generated in the directory
"Workpieces - TEMP " in the program-manager and execut- Bit 6 = 0 → 1
ed.
To ensure that such functions as e.g. tool selection and spin- Description:
dle Start will remain activated also after Reset and End-of
program, respective machine data are required, which will be Bit 6: Reset behaviour "active tool length correction"
described below.
The settings will be described with the T,S,M-Mask; the input

masks Position and Roughing do not require special settings.
Bit 6 = 1: Activation of tool management functions

The current setting for the active tool length correction re-
mains active also after Reset/End-of-part program. MD20310
If the tool or magazine management is active, that tool is se- Activation of tool management
$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_
lected which happens to be in the master spindle (generally functions
MASK
referred to as master-tool holder).
If the tool in the master spindle is locked, the "locked" status Default: 0H Change to: 80400BH
will be ignored.
Bit 0 - 3 must be set as in MD18080
It must be borne in mind that after end-of-program, program
$MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
abort either the last programmed value for the master spindle
respectively the master tool holder or else the value specified
Bit 0 = 0 → 1 Magazine management active
by $MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND respectively
Bit 1 = 0 → 1 Monitoring functions active
$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER for the master
Bit 3 = 0 → 1 Adjacent location treatment
spindle respectively the master-tool holder will be used.
Bit 14 = 0 → 1 autom. tool change during Reset and Start
Bit 23 = 0 → 1 On offset selection no synchronization
with HL
Description:
Bit 14 = 1: Reset-Mode
Tool and correction selection as per the settings of MD20110
$MC_RESET_MODE_MASK and
MD20112 $MC_START_MODE_MASK.
Bit 14 = 0: No Reset mode
Notes

Setup Milling A110
Spindle Own spindle RESET
These settings are required to enable spindles to be started MD35040

from the T,S,M mask. $MA_SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER Own spindle RESET
_RESET
M function for spindle active after reset
MD35040 = 0 → 2
MD10714 M function for spindle active
$MN_M_NO_FCT_EOP after reset Description:
MD35040 $MA_SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET defines
Default: -1 Change to: 32 the response of the spindle after channel reset NC/PLC inter-
face signal DB21-30 DBX7.7 (Reset) and program end (M2,
M30).
MD10714 = -1 → 32 (Suggestion M32)
This MD is only active in the spindle mode open-loop control
Description:
mode. In the positioning or oscillation mode, the spindle is
With Start in the manual mode-of-operation (T,S,M-mask, always stopped.
position) the part-program MA_JOG_STEP1 will be generat-
ed and executed.
This part-program will be finished with the M-function in Settings for the control unit:
MD10714. The setting of MD35040 = 2 ensures that the spin-
dle remains active also after the end-of-program. AX4:SP1
MD35040 =0 → 2 Own spindle-RESET
Limitations see MD10715 $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE
MD35040 $MA_SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET = 0: Start main spindle via the T,S,M-mask

 Spindle stops (with M2/M30 and channel and mode
group reset) T,S,M-mask with inputs for spindle speed and direction
 • Program is aborted of rotation of the main spindle S1
MD35040 $MA_SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET= 1:
 Spindle does not stop
 • Program is aborted Enter speed and direction of
rotation
MD35040 $MA_SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET= 2:
• Spindle does not stop at the M function configured via and actuate NC-Start
MD10714 $MN_M_NO_FCT_EOP (e.g. M32).
• However, the spindle stops at channel or mode group reset.
The NC/PLC interface signal DB31, ... DBX2.2 (Delete dis-

tance-to go/
Spindle reset) is always effective, independent of MD35040 MA_JOG_STEP1 is generat-
$MA_SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET. ed
Not relevant to:

• Spindle modes other than open-loop control mode.
Corresponds to:
NC/PLC interface signal DB21-30 DBX7.7 (Reset)
NC/PLC interface signal DB31, ... DBX2.2 (Delete distance-to
go/spindle reset)
Notes

A110 Setup Milling
Continued Start main spindle via the T,S,M-mask Monitoring the tool change
Description:
 M3 G972 S1=1000
Starting of the spindle
Note:
In case of a ShopMill installation there will be no
CUST_TECHCYC call-ups for the spindle control from the
T,S,M-mask and during program execution.
Note on spindle direction of rotation:

The assignment of the direction arrow for the spindle
M-function M3/M4 is effected via the MD52207
$MCS_AXIS_USAGE_ATTRIB.
Shown in the T,F,S-field is the tool currently loaded in the

spindle. Use the cursor keys to select the required tool and
thereafter transfer it by means of the Soft-Key "In
manual" .
Notes

Setup Milling A110
Loading the new tool
The tool will be loaded into the T,F,S mask with Cycle Start.
The selected tool "Finisher" is now displayed in the T,S,M The PLC-tool change functions provided by the machine man-
mask. ufacturer are executed in the background for this process.
Gear step
Parameterize gear stage change
MD35010
Parameterize gear stage
$MA_GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_
change
ENABLE
Default: 0H Change to: 1H With NC-Start the program
MA_JOG_STEP1 will be gen-
Number of gear stages erated - in this example for
the selection of the gear
stage 2 = M42.
MD35090
Number of gear stages
$MA_NUM_GEAR_STEPS
Description:
Number of prepared gear stages.
The first gear stage is always activated.
Note:
The selection field Gear stage appears only if in MD35010 for
the spindle Bit 0 = 1 is set.
Notes

A110 Setup Milling
Inch/Metric-switching Description:
Switching the measuring systems with HMI-Softkey

Below once again a summation of the machine data settings
0. Hide Softkey inch/metric switching
required for Inch/metric switching.
1. Display Softkey inch/metric switching
Selection of Inch/metric switching. :
Enable basic system conversion
MD10260
Enable basic system conver-
$MN_CONVERT_SCALING_
sion
SYSTEM
Note:
MD 20152[12] = 0 must be set for the position readouts to be
converted.
Block search Bit 3 = 0 → 1
Description:
Parameterization for block search
Bit 0: Enabled Swivel
MD11450 Parameterization for block Bit 2: Approach logic for step drill (ShopTurn)
$MN_SEARCH_RUN_MODE search Bit 3: Call block search-cycle for ShopMill/ShopTurn
Default: 0H Change to: 7H Bit 6: Work offset value ZV cannot be entered (ShopTurn)
Note:
Bit 0 = 0 → 1 Put out alarm 10208 to PROG_EVENT
The setting of Bit 3=1 ensures that the tool programmed after
Bit 1 = 0 → 1 automatic ASUP-Start (PROG_EVENT) the block search is duly changed and that the spindle rotates
in the tool-assigned direction at the speed programmed in
Bit 2 = 0 → 1 No collection of auxiliary functions
the destination block. For installations without ShopMill this
Bit needs not to be set, however, the machine manufacturer
Function mask Cross-technology must ensure that the tool and spindle functions are gathered
and put out during the block search.
MD52212
$MCS_FUNCTION_MASK_
technology
TECH
Notes

Setup Milling A110
Tool change commands to PLC after search run 1: Tool changing commands and tool preparation commands
are gathered and passed on to the PLC with program Start
when the search run has attained the destination block.
MD20128
Tool change commands to 0: all tool and/or magazine specific commands that were
$MC_COLLECT_TOOL_
PLC after search run gathered during the block search will not be put out to the
CHANGE
PLC with the next program Start! That means that also pro-
Change to: 0 grammed POSM, TCI, TCA will not be passed on to the PLC.
Default: 1
when ShopMill/ShopTurn
Note 1:
Without an active magazine management the tool change-M-
code will not be gathered, if it is not assigned to an auxiliary
MD20128 = 1 → 0 No gathering of tools during the block
function group. With an active magazine management this
search
corresponds to an MD-value = 0.
Description:
Note 2:
This MD is of any meaning only with activated magazine
The value = 0 is sensible for instance if after reaching the
management (MD18080
search destination the gathered tool change commands are
$MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, MD20310
transferred to the PLC in an ASUP-program with the aid of
$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK).
the commands GETSELT, GETEXET.
It specifies whether after block search with evaluation tool
changing commands, tool preparation commands (generally
tool changing commands) are put out to the PLC or not put
out to the PLC.
Simulation Axis position at start of simulation
Adjustment of SZS coordinate system (settable ze- MD53230

Axis position at start of simula-
$MAS_SIM_START_
ro system) tion
POSITION
Default: 0 Change to: 500, 500, 200 mm
MD24030 Adjustment of SZS coordinate
$MC_FRAME_ACS_SET system
AX1: X1
MD53230 = 0 → e.g. 500 mm
AX2: Y1
MD53230 = 0 → e.g. 500 mm
MD24030 = 0 → 1
AX3: Z1
Description: MD53230 = 0 → e.g. 200 mm
0: SZS results from the WCS transformed with
Description:
$P_CYCFRAME and $P_PFRAME.
Axis position at the Start of the simulation.
$P_CYCFRAME.
Note:
The position readouts show the SZS-coordinate system if
"WCS" is selected. For the further axes and spindles this MD should be left on 0.
Depiction of the coordinate systems and the Frame chain
Notes

A110 Setup Milling
Notes

Setup Milling A110
Machine —> JOG
MD52010 BIG_FONT = 3
depending on MD52011
MD20098[X] Bit 0 = MCS actual

value window
MD52210 FUNCTION_MASK_DISP
Bit 4 = 1 Show follow-on tool in T,F,S window
MD51040 SD55212 FUNCTION_MASK_ TECH_SET
SWITCH_TO_MACHINE_MASK Bit 0 = 1 Tool pre-selection active
MD52206 AXIS_USAGE, Meaning of the axes in the channel

MD52200 TECHNOLOGY = 2
MD52207 AXIS_USAGE_ATTRIB, Axis attributes
Softkey Description
selection
MD52210 FUNKTION_MASK Bit 2 = 1
MD52200 = 2 =2: Technology Milling
MD51040 SWITCH_TO_MACHINE_MASK, Automatic operating area switchover to machine

Bit 0: When selecting a program in the program manager not automatically switch over
Bit 1: When switching the operating mode via the MCP not automatically switch over
Bit 2: When program selection in program not automatically switch over MD52200 = 2 =2: Technology Milling
Bit 3: When selection / execution under program not automatically start of block search
MD52210 Bit 2 = 0 Show Softkey “T,S,M“ in JOG

Bit 2 = 0 area
Notes

A110 Setup Milling
Softkey Description
Machine —> JOG —> WCS selection
MD20098[X] Bit 16 = WCS actual

value window
Switchover Switchover Softkey from MCS to WCS via

MCS/WCS PLC (DB19)
Softkey Description
Machine —> JOG —>MCS selection
MD51023 ACT_VALUE_SPIND = 1
Spindles are displayed only if in axis
mode, SP1 not displayed
(Default setting)

MCS/WCS PLC (DB19)
Spindles are always displayed (Scroll bar
on the right, down)
alternative
Notes

Setup Milling A110
Machine —> JOG —> T,S,M

MD20110 RESET_MODE_MASK
Bit 6 = 1 Tool lenght compensati-
on is retained even after RESET
MD20130 = 1 Tool and tool edge
number retain active
MD20310 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
Bit 16 = 0 Tool name
Tool management function mask
Bit 14 = 1 Automatic Tool change during Reset and Start
MD35040
SPIND_ACTIV_AFTER_RESET
= 2 Own spindle reset
MD35000 AX4:SP1 = 1
The spindle must be configured
MD35010 GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE of AX4:SP1 Bit 1 = 1

and
MD35090 NUM_GEAR_STEPS of SP1 Number of gear steps = 5
Notes

A110 Setup Milling
MD20152[7] G_CODE_RESET_MODE = 1 Work

Work offset is retained even after Reset
MD20152[5] G_CODE_RESET_MODE = 1
Switch over machining plane
MD52005 DISP_PLANE_MILL = 0
Plane selection on the operator panel
Machine —> JOG —> Set WO
The softkey is highlighted if no G500 is active

and MCS is not selected
Notes

Setup Milling A110
Softkey Description
Machine —> JOG —> Measure workpiece selection
SD54780 Bit 2 = 1 Activate calibration for electronic

Bit 2 = 1 workpiece probe
Example:
Choice for the 4 free assign-
able vertical softkeys
The 4 marked softkeys are free assignable
Machine —> JOG —> Measure workpiece
MD52000 DISP_COORDINATE_SYSTEM = 0, Coordinate system position

0: Vertical machine, right support, 6: Vertical machine, left support
Selection
Depending on the selection different

softkeys are displayed
Notes

A110 Setup Milling
SD54780 Bit 3 = 1
Select probe calibration data fileld
MD52207[X] AXIS_USAGE_ATTRIB, Axis attributes

Bit 6 = 1: Show rotary axis as offset target for measruning
Example: Selection
MD52207[5] AXIS_USAGE_ATTRIB = 44H
Bit 6 = 1: Show rotary axis as correction
destination for measuring in addition to
coordinate rotation
Notes

Setup Milling A110
Softkey Description
Machine —> JOG —> Measure tool selection
SD54782 Bit 2 = 1 Enable automatic tool measure-

Bit 2 = 1 ment

Bit 2 = 1 ment

Bit 2 = 1 ment
SD54782 Bit 2 = 0
SD54782 Bit 2 = 1
Machine —> JOG —> Measure tool
SD54782 Bit 3 = 1
Select tool probe calibration data field
Notes

A110 Setup Milling
Machine —> JOG —> Position
MD20098[3] Bit 20 = 0 Fade out spindle SP1
not displayed
Machine —> JOG —> Face milling
SD55200 MAX_INP_FEED_PER_REV, Upper limit feedrate/rev

SD55201 MAX_INP_FEED_PER_TIME, Upper limit feedrate/min
SD55202 MAX_INP_FEED_PER_TOOTH, Upper limit feedrate/thooth
SD43220 SPIND_MAX_VELO_G26, Programmable upper spindle limitation G26

SD43230 SPIND_MAX_VELO_LIMS, Spindle speed limitation with G96
Notes

Setup Milling A110
Softkey Description
Machine —> JOG —> Settings selection
MD10260 = 1 =1: Enable basic system conversion
MD10260 CONVERT_SCALING = 1
Softkey Description
selection
MD51067=1 =1: Show handwheel window

(Handwheel must be configured in
MD11350)
Notes

A110 Setup Milling
Parameter —> Tool list
SD54215 TM_FUNCTION_MASK
Bit 0 = 0 Always radius
Bit 0 = 1 Diameter display for rotating tools
Bit 10 = 1 (Multitool)
MD52281[X] TOOL_MCODE_FUNC_ON e.g. 51, 53, 55, 57

MD52282[X] TOOL_MCODE_FUNC_OFF e.g. 52, 54, 56, 58
These columns are displayed with Shop-

Mill/ShopTurn option only
Softkey Description
selection
MD52270 TM_FUNCTION_MASK
Bit 0 = 1 Create tool on magazine location not allowed
Bit 7 = 1 Create tool using the tool number
SD54215 TM_FUNCTION_MASK_SET
Bit 2 = 1 Create tool without name suggestion
Bit 3 = 1 Input disable for tool name and tool type in loaded tools
Bit 4 = 1 Input disable for loaded tools, if the channel is not in Reset
Bit 11 = 1 Creating tool in gripper disabled
MD19320 Bit 4 = 1 Enable Tool Management

Bit 4 = 1
Notes

Setup Milling A110
SD54215 TM_FUNCTION_MASK Bit 1 = 0 M3 right

SD54215 TM_FUNCTION_MASK Bit 1 = 1 M4 left
Default direction of rotation for new created tools
MD52229 ENABLE_QUICK_M_CODES
MD52230 M_CODE_ALL_COOLANTS_OFF
MD52231 M_CODE_COOLANT_1_ON
MD52233 M_CODE_COOLANT_1_AND_2_ON

Softkey Description
Parameter —> Tool wear Sichtbar
Bit 5 = 1 Calculate tool wear inputs additively
SD54215 TM_FUNCTION_MASK_SET MD52270 Bit 12 = 0 Enable Reactivate tool

Bit 7 = 1 Fade out tool monitoring parameters Bit 12 = 0
These columns are displayed with active tool time

monitoring only MD20320 Bit 0 = 1
Bit 10 = 1 Reactivate tool using Position magazine
Bit 11 = 1 Reactivate tool in all monitoring modes
Bit 12 = 1 Fade out Reactivate tool
Notes

A110 Setup Milling
Softkey Description
Parameter —> Magazine selection
MD52270 Bit 8 = 0 Enable Relocate tool

Bit 8 = 0
MD52270 Bit 9 = 0 Enable Position magazine

Bit 9 = 0
Bit 8 = 1 Fade out Relocate tool
Bit 9 = 1 Fade out Position magazine
Parameter —> Load tool
Bit 1 = 1 Load/unload disable, if machine is not in reset
Bit 2 = 1 Load/unload disable on Emergency stop
Bit 3 = 1 Load/unload tool to/from spindle is disabled
Bit 4 = 1 Loading is executed directly in the spindle
MD52274 TM_TOOL_LOAD_STATION
Default setting = 0 All configured stations are taken
into account
Notes

Setup Milling A110
Softkey Description
Parameter —> Load tool selection
MD18080 Bit 10 = 1 The multitool function is available

Bit 10 = 1
SD54215 TM_FUNCTION_MASK_SET Bit 10 = 1

Enable load/relocate tool on buffer locations
Magazine 9998 Location 1 = Spindle
Magazine 9998 Location 2 = Gripper 1
Magazine 9998 Location 3 = Gripper 2
Parameter —> Setting data
MD35000 AX4:SP1 = 1
Assignment of spindle to machine axis,
otherwise this field is not displayed
Notes

A110 Setup Milling
Machine —> MDA
Bit 3 = 1 The M-code entered in MD10714 M_NO_FCT_EOP is
generated automatically after pressing the “Delete blocks“ softkey
Softkey Description
selection
Notes

Setup Milling A110
Machine —> TEACH IN —> Teach program
The “Teach prog.“ softkey is displayed when

selecting TEACH IN at the MCP
Softkey Description
selection
MSTT Taste Switchover operating mode from MDA to

TEACH IN TEACH IN via PLC (DB11)
Notes

A110 Setup Milling
Softkey Description
Machine —> AUTO —> Time / Counter selection
MD27860 PROCESSTIMER_MODE
Bit 0 = 1 Measuring total runtime for all part programs
Bit 1 = 1 Measuring current program runtime
Bit 4 = 1 Measuring during active dry run feedrate
Bit 5 = 1 Measuring during program test
Bit 6 = 1 $AC_CYCLE_TIME is not deleted on start by ASUP
and PROG_EVENTs MD28400 = 1 =1: Activate basic blocks with absolute
values
MD27860 Bit 0 =1: Softkey Time/Counter

MD27880 PART_COUNTER or Bit 8 = 1 =0: Softkey Times (Default setting)
Bit 0 or 8 or both =1
MD27880 PART_COUNTER
Bit 0 = 1 Counter $AC_REQUIRED_PARTS
Bit 8 = 1 Counter $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS
Bit 11 = 1 Increment AC_ACTUAL_PARTS
with GOTOS
Softkey Description
selection
OPTION Simultan. recording (real-time simulation)
Notes

Setup Milling A110
Machine —> AUTO —> Overstore
Bit 3 = 1 The M-code entered in MD10714 M_NO_FCT_EOP is
Machine —> AUTO —> Program control

The marked selection is
displayed here
MD51039 PROGRAM_CONTROL_MODE_MASK
Bit 0 = 1 Program test function available
Selection
Notes

A110 Setup Milling
Softkey Description
Machine —> AUTO —> Block search (ShopMill) selection
MD51024 Bit 0 Bit mask for available search modes in

MD51024 BLOCK_SEARCH_MODE_MASK_JS and Bit 1 = 1 ShopMill program
Bit 0 and 1 =1
MD51024 BLOCK_SEARCH_MODE_MASK_JS, Bit mask for available search modes = 3H

Bit 1: Block search with calculation with approach
(Default setting = 1H)
Softkey Description
Machine —> AUTO —> Block search (G code program) selection

MD51028 BLOCK_SEARCH_MODE_MASK and Bit 1 = 1 G code program
Bit 0 and 1 =1
MD51028 BLOCK_SEARCH_MODE_MASK Bit mask for available search modes = 33H

Notes

Setup Milling A110
Program —> Edit
MD52200 TECHNOLOGY = 2 Milling
Softkey Description
selection
Notes

A110 Setup Milling
Softkey Description
Program manager —> New selection
OPTION ShopMill/ShopTurn
PROGRAM MANAGER, New
Program —> Edit
ShopMill/ShopTurn option required
The same program shown as G code

w/o ShopMill/ShopTurn option
Notes

Setup Milling A110
Program —> Edit —> Program header
Bit 0 = 0 Unhides input field for mm/
inch
Selection
MD52005 DISP_PLANE_MILL
= 0 plane selection on the operator panel
Program —> Edit—> Program header
SC = Safety distance
Selection
SD55214 FUNCTION_MASK_MILL_SET
Bit 2 = 1 Depth calculation in milling cycles w/o SC
Default setting = 1
Bit 0 = 1 Milling cycles with synchronous operation
Default setting = 1
Notes

A110 Setup Milling
Program —> Drilling
MD52216 FUNCTION_MASK_DRILL
Bit 0 CYCLE 84 (w/o compensat. chuck)
Bit 1 CYCLE 840 (with compensat. chuck)
CYCLE 840 for ShopMill only
Bit 0 = 1 Unhide input fields Technology
SD55216 FUNCTION_MASK_DRILL_SET
Bit 0 = Reverse the direction of spindle rotation during tapping
Bit 1 = Boring (CYCLE86) Consider rotation of the tool plane
Bit 2 = Boring (CYCLE86) Consider swiveled table kinematics
Bit 3 = Tapping (CYCLE84) Monitoring spindle MD 31050/31060
Bit 5 = Tapping (CYCLE840) Calculation of the break point at G33
Notes

Setup Milling A110
Program —> Milling
SD55212 FUNCTION_MASK_TECH_SET
Bit 1 = 1 Calculate thread depth from metric
thread lead
Note: As soon as the line table "None" is
selected, the parameter H1 can be overwritten
Selection Table
Bit 2 = 1 Refer to the table for thread diameter and depth
Note: As soon as the line table "ISO metric" is selected, the table is
activated for the various threads
Notes

A110 Setup Milling
Softkey Description
Program —> Contour milling selection
Softkey bar with Residual OPTION Residual material detection and machining
material detection and
machining option
OPTION Residual material detection and machining
Softkey Description
Program —> Simulation selection
MD51226 FUNCTION_MASK_SIM
Bit 0 = 1 No automatic start on simulation selection
OPTION 3D simulation 1 (finished part)
MD53230 SIM_START_POSITION
Axis position at start of simulation
for AX1:X1 e.g. 500mm
for AX2:Y1 e.g. 500mm
for AX3:Z1 e.g. 200mm
Notes

Setup Milling A110
Program —> Measure workpiece
Softkey bar with Measu-

rement cycles option
Program —> Measure tool
Softkey bar with Measu-

rement cycles option
A110: END
Notes

A110 END Setup Milling

A111 Setup Swivelling
Sinumerik
Operate
Module Description:
In this module a milling machine with the axes X1, Y1 and Z1, a tool spindle SP1, a swivel head A1
as well as a swivel table C1 is to be set up. The individual setup steps will be checked at times in
order to show the result of the parameterization.
The setting up of a swivelling block follows in a further step.
The functionality of the manufacturer cycle CUST_800.SPF will be explained.
At the end the swivelling function will be tested under JOG and in the part program by means of an
example.
Module Objective:
With the aid of this module you will learn know the meaning of the MDs and SDs that must be ad-
dressed as well as the various means to configure the machine according to the requirements.
The functions will be parameterized in blocks and in the end tested for correct function.
Content:
Sinumerik
Machine data set-up
Swivelling data block set-up
Set up the CUST_800.SPF
Application in JOG and part program

EN_A111_V1.1
A111

Setup Swivelling A111
Swivelling
set up:
START
Overview
Machine and
setting data
Machine data
set-up
Swivelling
data block
set-up
Set up the
CUST_800.SPF
Application in
JOG and
part program
Swivelling
set up:
END
Notes

Settings
MD Identifier Default Swivelling
Description
$MN_FRAME_GEOAX_CHANGE_
MODE
18088 $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_ CARRIER 0 1 Maximum number of definable tool carriers
18114 $MN_MM_ENABLE_TOOL_ ORIENT 0 Assign tool cutting edge orientation
Group 42: Tool carrier = 1 (TCOABS)

Group 52: Work piece related frame rotation = 2
[41] = 1 [41] = 1
(PAROTOF)
[51] = 1 [51] = 2
20150 $MC_G_CODE_RESET_VALUE Group 53: Tool related frame rotation = 1 (TOROTOF)
[52] = 1 [52] = 1
Group 54: Vector rotation for polynomial programming
[53] = 1 [53] = 1
= >1 in cases of rotary axes with Hirth tooth
system or angled tools are used
[41] = 0
20152 $MC_G_CODE_RESET_MODE [51] = 0
[52] = 0
Tool carrier: rotary axis setting with axis positions not
20196 $MC_TOCARR_ROTAX_ MODE 2
defined
$MC_TOOL_PARAMETER_DEF_
20360 0 Bit 10 = 1 Definition of tool parameters
MASK
21100 $MC_ORIENTATION_IS_ EULER 1 0 Angle definition for orientation programming
$MC_TOCARR_ROT_OFFSET_
21186 0 Offset of TOCARR rotary axes from WO
FROM_FR
22530 $MC_TOCARR_CHANGE_M_CODE 0 M code at change of tool carrier

Active system frames after reset
24006 $MC_CHSFRAME_RESET_ MASK Bit 4 = 1 System frame for work piece reference points is
Bit 4 = 0 Bit 4 = 1
active after reset.
Deletion of system frames after reset
$MC_CHSFRAME_RESET_CLEAR_ Bit 2 = 0 Bit 2 = 1 rotary table reference (PAROT) delete
24007
MASK Bit 3 = 0 Bit 3 = 1 tool reference (TOROT,..) delete
Bit 4 = 0 Bit 4 = 1 Workpiece reference delete
Reset channel system frames after power on
$MC_CHSFRAME_POWERON_ Bit 2 = 0 Bit 2 = 1 rotary table reference (PAROT) reset
24008
MASK Bit 3 = 0 Bit 3 = 1 tool reference (TOROT,..) reset
Bit 4 = 0 Bit 4 = 1 Workpiece reference reset
$MC_USER_FRAME_POWERON_ Parameterize properties for settable frame
24080 Bit 0 = 0
MASK Bit 0 = 0 Settable zero offset via power on not active.
Setting up system frames (SRAM)
Bit 2 = 0 Bit 2 = 1 Bit 2: rotary table reference ($P_PARTFRAME)
28082 $MC_MM_SYSTEM_FRAME_MASK
Bit 3 = 0 Bit 3 = 1 Bit 3: tool reference ($P_TOOLFRAME)
Bit 4 = 0 Bit 4 = 1 Bit 4: Workpiece reference ($P_WPFRAME)
Setting up data management system frames (SRAM)
$MC_MM_SYSTEM_ DATAFRAME_ Bit 2 = 1 Bit 2: rotary table reference ($P_PARTFRAME)
28083
MASK Bit 3 = 1 Bit 3: tool reference ($P_TOOLFRAME)
Bit 4 = 1 Bit 4: Workpiece reference ($P_WPFRAME)
Notes

Settings
MD Identifier Default Swivelling
Description
Bit 0 = 0 no modulo rotary axis programming
Bit 0 = 0 Bit 0 = 1 Bit 0 = 1 modulo rotary axis programming
30455 $MA_MISC_FUNKTION_ MASK
Bit 2 = 0 Bit 2 = 1 Bit 2 = 0 Positioning rotary axis as programmed
Bit 2 = 1 Positioning rotary axis along the shortest path
10000m
32010 $MA_JOG_VELO_RAPID Rapid traverse in jog mode
m/min
42940 $SC_TOOL_LENGTH_CONST 0
plane
Assignment of tool length compensation independent of
42950 $SC_TOOL_LENGTH_TYPE 0
tool type
$SC_TOCARR_FINE_
42974 0 Fine offset TCARR ON / OFF
CORRECTION
42980 $SC_TOFRAME_MODE 1000 2000 Frame definition at TOFRAME, TOROT and PAROT
Bit 0 = 1 The swivelling plane and tool swivelling is re-

52212 $MCS_FUNCTION_MASK_ TECH Bit 0 = 0 Bit 0 = 1
leased
Bit 0: Display input field "Swivelling no"
$SCS_FUNCTION_MASK_SWIVEL_ Bit 1: Retraction variant Z; Z XY or fixed position
55221 0
SET Bit 2: "De-selection" swivelling block display
Bit 3: Active swivelling plane display
$SCS_MILL_SWIVEL_ALARM_ = 0: Cycle alarms are hidden
55410 0
MASK = 1: Cycle alarms are displayed
Notes

Swivelling
The function swivelling permits with the help of swivel heads

or swivel tables to machine oblique faces. The swivelling is
possible both in the mode-of-operation JOG and also in AU-
TOMATIC.
For this you can program the swivelling axes (A, B, C) of the
machine or else you can simply state the rotations about the
swivelling axes (X, Y, Z) of the work piece coordinate system
as shown on the respective work piece drawing. The rotation
of the work piece coordinate system in the program are then
automatically converted during the machining of the work
piece into rotations of the respective swivelling axes of the
machine.
The swivel axes are always rotated to place the machining

plane perpendicular to the tool axis for machining. During
machining, the machining plane is permanently set.
When the coordinate system is swivelled, the previously set
work offset is automatically converted for the swivelled state.
Machine data set-up Description:
Function mask Cross-technology Bit 0 = 0 Swivelling plane and swivelling tool is not released
MD52212 Bit 0 = 1 The swivelling plane and tool swivelling is re-

Function mask Cross- leased
$MCS_FUNCTION_MASK_
technology
TECH
The following functions are available:
Mode-of-operation JOG:
MD52212 Bit 0 = 1 Mode-of-operation Pro-

gram - Various:
Bit 0 and 1 are meaningful for swivelling
Description: For details see section "Application in JOG and part program"
Function mask, all technologies in this module.
Bit 0: Enable swivelling
Bit 1: No optimized travel along software limit switches Bit 1= 0 optimized travelling along Software limit switches
Bit 2: Start-up logic for step drill (ShopTurn)
Bit 3: Call block search cycle for ShopMill/ShopTurn Bit 1 = 1 no optimized travelling along Software limit switch-
Bit 4: Approach logic through cycle (ShopTurn) es
Bit 6: Work offset value ZV cannot be entered (ShopTurn) The function "optimized travelling along Software limit switch-
es" is only important for machines with swivel head or mixed
kinematics and will be clarified by means of the following dia-
grams.
Notes

The first diagram shows the axis motion if the coordinate sys- The second diagram shows the axis motion in case of a swiv-
tem is not swivelled. elled coordinate system.
1. Retraction from the work piece to the retraction plane RP 1. Retraction from the work piece to the retraction plane RP
2. Travelling along the retraction plane to the next machining 2. Travelling along the retraction plane to the next machining
position position. Here the machining space at the machine would
3. Infeed to the work piece be exceeded and from this a software limit switch alarm
would be raised as a result. This alarm will be avoided by
optimized travelling along the software limit switch.
3. Travelling along the Software limit switch.
4. Infeed to the work piece.
Function mask Swivel CYCLE800 Description:
Bit 0: Input field "Swivelling":

SD55221
Function mask Swivel
$SCS_FUNCTION_MASK_
CYCLE800 In the editor mask Swiv-
SWIVEL_SET
elling plane is the selec-
Default: 0H Change to: tion "Swivelling yes/no"
= 0 not released
Description:
Bit 0: Display input field "Swivelling no" = 1 released
Bit 1: Retraction variant Z; Z XY or fixed position
Bit 2: "De-selection" swivelling block display
Bit 3: Active swivelling plane display
Notes

Bit 1: Retraction variant: =1 with fixed points

In the editor mask Swiv- Note:
elling plane is the selec- Instead of “Z” and “Z, XY” the
tion "retraction" parameters “Fixed point 1” and
“Fixed point 2” are displayed.
= 0 without fixed point.
The positions for X, Y and Z
Note: axis are defined in the param-
The further selections of Z, Z eters $TC_CARR38[n] …
XY, Max. tool direction, etc. $TC_CARR40[n].
in the parameter "Retraction"
are set in the swivelling block
by means of the parameter
§TC_CARR37[n].
Continuation of MD55221 Bit 3: active swivelling plane display:

In the mask Swivelling in JOG the active swivelling plane
Bit 2: De-selection swivelling = 0 not displayed
block: = 1 displayed
In the editor mask swiv-
elling plane and in swiv-
elling-JOG is the de-
selection of the swivel-
ling block
= 0 not released
The parameter "TC" is
hidden.
= 1 released
The parameter "TC" with
the selection "AC-
MIXED" for the selection
or 0 for the de-selection
appears.
Notes

Hide and unhide cycle alarms for CYCLE800

MD10602 = 0 → 1
SD55410 Description:
Hide and unhide cycle alarms
$SCS_MILL_SWIVEL_ALARM
for CYCLE800 Geometry axes can be switched over in the following states:
_MASK
Default: 0H Change to:  Selection and de-selection of transformations
= 0: Cycle alarms are hidden  Switchable geometry axes GEOAX()
= 1: Cycle alarms are displayed
The current total frame is then defined as follows:
Description:
0: The current total frame is cancelled.
Swivelling in the mode of operation JOG: the cycle alarms
62186 and 62187 can be hidden or displayed. 1: The current total frame is recalculated when geometry
axes are switched over. Translations, scaling and mirror-
Bit 0: error analysis 62186 - active work offset G%4 and ing for the new geometry axes become active. The rota-
base (base relation) include rotations tions of the old geometry axes still apply.
Bit 1: error analysis 62187 - active base and base relation
(G500) include rotations 2: The current total frame is recalculated when geometry
axes are switched over. Translations, scaling and mirror-
ing for the new geometry axes become active. If rotations
Frames when changing geometry axes were active before switching over to the current base
frames, current settable frame or programmable frame,
switchover is aborted with an alarm.
MD10602
Frames when changing geom-
$MN_FRAME_GEOAX_
etry axes
CHANGE_MODE
3: The current total frame is deleted when selecting and de- MD18088 = 0 → 1
selecting transformations. When the GEOAX() command
is entered, the frame is recalculated and transaction, Description:
scaling and mirroring for the new geometry axes become
Maximum number of definable tool carriers for orientable
active. The rotations of the old geometry axes still apply.
tools in the TO area. The value is divided by the number of
active TO units. The integer result states how many tool carri-
ers can be defined for each TO unit. The data for defining a
tool carrier are set with the system variables
$TC_CARR1, ... $TC_CARR65
The data are stored in battery-backed memory.

Number of swivelling data sets
Application example(s):
Maximum number of definable tool carriers
2 channels are taken to be active, with one TO-unit (= default)
in each channel. Three carriers are to be defined in channel
MD18088 1 , one carrier in channel 2. The value to be set is 6, because
Maximum number of definable
$MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_ 6 / 2 = 3. I.e. in each TO-unit there are a max of 3 carrier defi-
tool carriers
CARRIER nitions.
Notes

Assign tool cutting edge orientation Value = 2:

Not only the system parameter $TC_DPV[n, m] but also the
additional three system parameters $TC_DPV3[n, m],
MD18114 $TC_DPV4[n, m] and $TC_DPV5[n, m] are assigned to each
Assign tool cutting edge orien-
$MN_MM_ENABLE_TOOL_ tool cutting edge D=m of the tool T=n, with the aid of which
tation
ORIENT any spatial tool orientation can be defined. T, D are the NC
Default: 0 Change to: addresses T and D with which the tool change or the tool
selection and the offset selection are programmed.
MD18114 = 0 Value = 3:
Not only the system parameters $TC_DPV[n, m] and
Note: $TC_DPV3 - $TC_DPV5 but also the additional three system
parameters $TC_DPVN3[n, m], $TC_DPVN4[n, m] and
This machine data is used only in conjunction with angled $TC_DPVN5[n, m] are assigned to each tool cutting edge
tools. D=m of the tool T=n, with the aid of which a vector (normal
vector) can be defined that is preferably perpendicular to the
Description: tool orientation. The normal vector may be modified so that it
The function allows an orientation deviating from the default lies in the plane formed by the orientation and the pro-
value to be assigned to each tool cutting edge. grammed normal vector but perpendicular to the orientation.
Value = 0: The orientation and the possibly modified normal vector

The tool orientation function is inactive. together define a complete orientation coordinate system.
The machine data affects the requirement for battery-backed
Value = 1: memory.
The system parameter $TC_DPV[n, m] is assigned to each
tool cutting edge D=m of the tool T=n, with the aid of which
one of 6 possible tool orientations in positive or negative co-
ordinate direction can be defined.
Initial setting of G groups Reset response of G groups
MD20150[x] MD20152[x]
$MC_GCODE_RESET_ Initial setting of G groups Reset response of G groups
$MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE
VALUES
Default: Change to: Default: Change to:
Description: MD20152[41] = 0
MD20152[51] = 0
Definition of the G codes which become active on run-up and MD20152[52] = 0
reset or at part program end depending on MD20152
$MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE and at part program start
depending on MD20112 $MC_START_MODE_MASK. Description:
The swivel of the G codes in the respective groups must be This MD is only evaluated if bit 0 is set in MD20110
programmed as the default value. $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK.
Group 42: Tool carrier Setting this MD equal to 0 specifies that for each entry in
MD20150[41] = 1 (TCOABS) MD20150 $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES the setting after
Group 52: Work piece related frame rotation a reset/end of part-program is once more the setting as per
MD20150[51] = 2 (PAROTOF) MD20150 $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES.
Group 53: Tool related frame rotation
MD20150[52] = 1 (TOROTOF) For further details see module A110.
Group 54: Vector rotation for polynomial programming
MD20150[53] = >1 in cases of rotary axes with Hirth tooth
system or angled tools are used
Notes

Offset of TOCARR rotary axes from WO (Work offset) MD20196 = 2H
Description:
MD21186
Offset of TOCARR rotary axes The MD is bit-coded. Bit 0 applies to orientable tool carriers
$MC_TOCARR_ROT_
from WO with one axis, bit 1 for those with 2 axes.
OFFSET_FROM_FR
When the axis positions of an orientable tool carrier are deter-
mined from a specified frame, it might happen that the re-
MD21186 = 0 quired orientation is achieved at any position of a rotary axis.
Description: This MD specifies how the rotary axis position is defined in

these cases:
Rotary axes offset for the orientable tool carrier is automati-
cally accepted from the work offset activated on activation of If the relevant bit is 0, the position of the rotary axis will be 0;
the orientable tool carrier for the rotary axes. a possibly necessary rotation is performed through the speci-
fied frame.
If the relevant bit is 1, the rotation is performed by means of

the rotary axis of the orientable tool carrier. The resulting
frame will no longer include a rotation.
Tool carrier:
Rotary axis setting with axis positions not defined
MD20196
Tool carrier: rotary axis setting
$MC_TOCARR_ROTAX_
with axis positions not defined
MODE
Example: MD20360 Bit 10 = 0 → 1

Description:
A tool in its basic position points into the Z direction, and an
axis of the orientable tool carrier rotates the work piece Definition of the effects of tool parameters.
around Z (C-Axis). If the tool shall be oriented in parallel with Bit no. Meaning when bit is set
the Z axis of a rotating frame, and if the frame only rotates ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
around the Z axis, the tool orientation will not be changed, if Bit 0: (LSB):
the C axis is rotated. The condition saying that the tool is to For turning and grinding tools, the wear parameter of
point in the direction of the Z axis defined by the frame is the transverse axis is included in the calculation as a
therefore fulfilled for any position of the Z axis. diameter value.
Bit 1:
For turning and grinding tools, the tool length compo-
nent of the transverse axis is included in the calculation
as a diameter value.
Bit 2:
If a wear component or a length component is included
Definition of tool parameters in the calculation as a diameter value, the tool may
only be used in the plane that was active when the tool
MD20360 was selected. If the bit is set, a plane change leads to
$MC_TOOL_PARAMETER_ Definition of tool parameters an alarm.
DEF_MASK Bit 3:
Zero offsets in frames in the transverse axis are includ-
Default: 0H Change to: ed in the calculation as a diameter value.
Bit 4:
PRESET value is included in the calculation as a diam-
eter value
Bit 5:
Include the external work offset in the transverse axis
in the calculation as a diameter value
Notes

Continuation of MD20360 Bit12:

The tool parameter $TC_DP15 is not interpreted as
wear of the tool radius but as wear of the tool diameter.
Description:
Bit13:
Bit 6: During JOG of circles, the circle centre coordinate is
Read actual values of the transverse axis as diameter always a radius value, see SD42690
values. (AA_IW, AA_IEN, AA_IBN, AA_IB. Notice! Not $SC_JOG_CIRCLE_CENTRE.
AA_IM.) Bit14:
Bit 7: Absolute values of the transverse axis with cycle
Display all actual values of the transverse axis as di- masks in the radius
ameter values, irrespective of the G code of group 29 Bit15:
(DIAMON / DIAMOF) Incremental values of the transverse axis with cycle
Bit 8: masks as diameter
Always display the distance-to-go as a radius in the
work (WCS)
Bit 9: Angle definition for orientation programming
During DRF hand-wheel travel of a transverse axis,
only half the distance of the specified increment is trav-
MD21100
elled (on condition that MD11346 Angle definition for orientation
$MC_ORIENTATION_IS_
$MN_HANDWH_TRUE_DISTANCE = 1). programming
EULER
Bit10:
Activate the tool component of an active, orientable Default: 1 Change to: 0
tool carrier even if no tool is active.
Bit11:
The tool parameter $TC_DP6 is not interpreted as a MD21100 = 1→ 0
tool radius but as a tool diameter.
M code at change of tool carrier

Description:
This data is only active for MD21102 MD22530
M code at change of tool carri-
$MC_ORI_DEF_WITH_G_CODE = 0 $MC_TOCARR_CHANGE_M_
er
CODE
MD = 0 (FALSE): Default: 0 Change to:
The values programmed with A2, B2, C2 during orien-
tation programming are interpreted as an RPY angle
(in degrees). The orientation vector is produced by MD22530 = 0
rotating a vector in direction Z first by C2 around the Z
axis, then by B2 around the new Y axis and finally by Description:
A2 around the new X axis. In contrast to Euler angle
programming, all three values influence the orientation The absolute value of this machine data indicates the number
vector in this case. of the M code, which is output at the VDI interface when a
tool carrier is activated.
MD = 1 (TRUE):
The values programmed with A2, B2, C2 during orien-  If the MD is positive, the unchanged M code is always
tation programming are interpreted as Euler angles (in output.
degrees). The orientation vector is produced by rotat-  If the MD is negative, the number of the tool carrier is add-
ing a vector in direction Z first by A2 around the Z axis, ed to the absolute value of the machine data and the num-
then by B2 around the new X axis and finally by C2 ber is output.
around the new Z axis. This means that the value of C2
is meaningless. Special cases:
If the number of the M code to be output or the absolute value
of this MD is set to one of the values 0 to 6, 17 or 30. It is not
monitored whether an M code created in this way will conflict
with other functions.
Notes

Active system frames after reset Bit 5: System frame for cycles is active after reset.
Bit 6: Reserved; reset behaviour dependent on MD20110

MD24006
Active system frames after $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK.
$MC_CHSFRAME_RESET_
reset
MASK
Bit 7: System frame $P_ISO1FR (ISO G51.1 Mirror) is active
Default: 0H Change to: after reset.
MD24006 Bit 4 = 0 → 1 Bit 8: System frame $P_ISO2FR (ISO G68 2DROT) is active
after reset.
Description:
Bit 9: System frame $P_ISO3FR (ISO G68 3DROT) is active
Bit mask used for the reset setting of the channel-specific after reset.
system frames included in the channel.
Bit 10: System frame $P_ISO4FR (ISO G51 Scale) is active
Bit 0: System frame for actual value setting and scratching is after reset.
active after reset.
Bit 11: System frame $P_RELFR is active after reset.
Bit 1: System frame for external work offset is active after
reset. Related to:
MD28082 $MC_MM_SYSTEM_FRAME_MASK
Bit 2: Reserved, for TCARR and PAROT see MD20150
$MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES[].
Bit 3: Reserved, for TOROT and TOFRAME see MD20150

Bit 4: System frame for work piece reference points is

active after reset.
Deletion of system frames after reset Bit 4: System frame for work piece reference points is delet-
ed on reset.
MD24007
Deletion of system frames after Bit 5: System frame for cycles is deleted on reset.
$MC_CHSFRAME_RESET_
reset
CLEAR_ MASK
Bit 6: Reserved; reset behaviour depends on MD20110
Default: 0H Change to: $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK.
Bit 7: System frame $P_ISO1FR (ISO G51.1 Mirror) is delet-

MD24007 Bit 2 = 0 ed on reset.
MD24007 Bit 3 = 0
MD24007 Bit 4 = 0 Bit 8: System frame $P_ISO2FR (ISO G68 2DROT) is delet-
ed on reset.
Description:
Bit mask used to delete channel-specific system frames from Bit 9: System frame $P_ISO3FR (ISO G68 3DROT) is delet-
the data management on reset. ed on reset.
Bit 0: System frame for actual value setting and scratching is Bit 10: System frame $P_ISO4FR (ISO G51 Scale) is deleted
deleted on reset. on reset.
Bit 1: System frame for external work offset is deleted on Bit 11: System frame $P_RELFR is deleted on reset.
reset.
Bit 2: Reserved, for TCARR and PAROT, see MD20150

Bit 3: Reserved, for TOROT and TOFRAME, see MD20150

Notes

Reset channel system frames after power on Bit 3: System frame for TOROT and TOFRAME is deleted
after Power On.
MD24008 Bit 4: System frame for work piece reference points deleted
Reset channel system frames
$MC_CHSFRAME_ after Power On.
after power on
POWERON_ MASK
Bit 5: System frame for cycles retained after Power On.
MD24008 Bit 2 = 0 Bit 6: System frame for transformations deleted after Power
MD24008 Bit 3 = 0 On.
MD24008 Bit 4 = 0
Bit 7: System frame $P_ISO1FR (ISO G51.1 Mirror) is de-
Description: leted after power ON.
This machine data defines whether channel-specific system
frames are reset in the data management on Power On. That Bit 8: System frame $P_ISO2FR (ISO G68 2DROT) is de-
is offsets and rotations are set to 0, scalings to 1. Mirroring is leted after power ON.
disabled.
Bit 9: System frame $P_ISO3FR (ISO G68 3DROT) is de-
The selection can be made separately for individual system leted after power ON.
frames.
Bit 10: System frame $P_ISO4FR (ISO G51 Scale) is delet-
Bit 0: System frame for set actual value and scratching is ed after power ON.
deleted after Power On.
Bit 11: System frame $P_RELFR is deleted after power ON.
Bit 1: System frame for external work offset is deleted after
Power On. Related to:
MD28082 $MC_MM_SYSTEM_FRAME_MASK
Bit 2: System frame for TCARR and PAROT is deleted after
Power On.
Parameterize properties for settable frame
MD24080
Parameterize properties for
$MC_USER_FRAME_
settable frame
POWERON_ MASK
Description:
Setting the following bits activates certain properties of the
settable frame:
Bit 0 = 0: default behaviour.
Bit 0 = 1: if MD20152 $MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE[7] = 1,

the last active settable frame is selected again ac-
cording to G code group 8 after power up of the con-
trol.
Notes

System frames (SRAM) Bit 4: System frame for work piece reference points

MD28082
$MC_MM_SYSTEM_FRAME_ System frames (SRAM)
Bit 6: System frame for transformations
MASK
Default: 21H Change to: Bit 7: System frame $P_ISO1FR for ISO G51.1 Mirror

MD28082 Bit 2 = 0 → 1
MD28082 Bit 3 = 0 → 1 Bit 9: System frame $P_ISO3FR for ISO G68 3DROT
MD28082 Bit 4 = 0 → 1
Bit 10: System frame $P_ISO4FR for ISO G51 Scale
Description:
Bit mask for configuring channel-specific system frames in- Bit 11: System frame $P_RELFR for relative coordinate sys-
cluded in the channel. tems
Bit 0: System frame for setting actual value and scratching
Bit 1: System frame for external work offset
Bit 2: System frame for TCARR and PAROT
Bit 3: System frame for TOROT and TOFRAME
System frames (SRAM) Bit 4: System frame for work piece reference points

MD28083
$MC_MM_SYSTEM_ System frames (SRAM)
Bit 6: System frame for transformations
DATAFRAME_MASK
Default: F9FH Change to: Bit 7: System frame $P_ISO1FR for ISO G51.1 Mirror

MD28083 Bit 2 = 1
MD28083 Bit 3 = 1 Bit 9: System frame $P_ISO3FR for ISO G68 3DROT
MD28083 Bit 4 = 1
Bit 10: System frame $P_ISO4FR for ISO G51 Scale
Description:
Bit mask for configuring channel-specific system frames in Bit 11: System frame $P_RELFR for relative coordinate sys-
the data storage (SRAM). tems
Bit 0: System frame for setting actual value and scratching
Bit 1: System frame for external work offset
Bit 2: System frame for TCARR and PAROT
Bit 3: System frame for TOROT and TOFRAME
Notes

Axis functions Bit 1 =1:

MD30455 Determination of reference point position of rotary, distance
$MA_MISC_FUNKTION_ Axis functions coded encoders within the configured modulo range.
MASK For rotary axes with MD30310 $MA_ROT_IS_MODULO=0
using rotary, distance-coded encoders MD34200
Default: 0H Change to: $MA_ENC_REFP_MODE=3, the reference point position is
MD30455 Bit 0 = 0 → 1 determined as a function of MD30330
MD30455 Bit 2 = 0 → 1 $MA_MODULO_RANGE and MD30340
$MA_MODULO_RANGE_START. This is automatically
Description: adapted to the motion limits of the modulo range.
This bit is irrelevant for rotary axes with MD30310
This setting must be done for those axes which are declared $MA_ROT_IS_MODULO=1, since the reference point posi-
as modulo axes, in this example the axis MC1. tion is always determined within the modulo range.
Bit 0 =0: Bit 2 =0:

Modulo rotary axis/spindle: Programmed positions must be Modulo rotary axis positioned at G90 with AC by default
within the modulo range. Otherwise, an alarm is output.
Bit 2 =1:
Bit 0 =1: Modulo rotary axis positioned at G90 with DC by default
If positions outside the modulo range are programmed, no (shortest path)
alarm is output. The position is modulo-converted internally.
Example: B-5 is equivalent to B355, POS[A]=730 is identical Bit 3 =0:
to POS[A]=10, and SPOS=-360 behaves like SPOS=0 With spindle/axis disable, $VA_IM, $VA_IM1, $VA_IM2 sup-
(modulo range 360 degrees). ply the setpoint value
Bit 1 =0: Bit 3 =1:

Determination of reference point position of rotary, distance With spindle/axis disable, $VA_IM, $VA_IM1, $VA_IM2 sup-
coded encoders analogue (1:1) in relation to the mechanical ply the actual value
absolute position.
Description: Bit 7 = 0:
Bit 4 =0: Synchronous spindle, correct synchronism error: Correction
Synchronous spindle coupling, following spindle: Cancellation value $AA_COUP_CORR[Sn] is continuously calculated as
of feedrate enable will decelerate the coupled group. long as the NC/PLC interface signal DB31, ... DBX31.6
(Correct synchronism) is set and setpoint-related synchro-
Bit 4 =1: nism is present.
Following spindle: Feedrate enable only refers to the interpo-
lation share of the overlaid motion (SPOS, etc.) and has no Bit 7 = 1:
impact on the coupling. Synchronous spindle, correct synchronism error: Correction
value $AA_COUP_CORR[Sn] is calculated only at the mo-
Bit 5 = 0: ment the NC/PLC interface signal DB31, ... DBX31.6 (Correct
Synchronous spindle coupling, following spindle: Position synchronism) is set from 0 to 1.
control, feed forward control, and parameter block are set
corresponding to the leading spindle. Bit 8 = 0:
Absolute encoders can only be readjusted in the enabled
Bit 5 =1: state MD34210=1.
Synchronous spindle coupling: The parameters of the follow-
ing spindle are set as in the uncoupled case. Bit 8 = 1:
Absolute encoders can also be readjusted in the adjusted
Bit 6 =0: state MD34210=2.
Programming of FA, OVRA, ACC, and VELOLIM is applied
separately for spindle and axis modes. The assignment is
made by the programmed axis or spindle identifier.
Bit 6 =1:
Programming of FA, OVRA, ACC, and VELOLIM is applied in
concert for spindle and axis modes, irrespective of the pro-
grammed identifier.
Notes

Rapid traverse in jog mode Change of tool length components with change of
active plane
MD32010
Rapid traverse in jog mode
$MA_JOG_VELO_RAPID
Change of tool length compo-
SD42940
nents with change of active
Default: 10000mm/min Change to: $SC_TOOL_LENGTH_CONST
plane
Description: Default: 0 Change to:
The axis velocity entered applies when the rapid traverse
override key is pressed in JOG mode and when the axial SD42940 = 0
feedrate override is set to 100%.
Description:
The value entered must not exceed the maximum permissible
axis velocity (MD32000 $MA_MAX_AX_VELO). If this setting data is not equal to 0, the assignment of tool
length components (length, wear, base dimensions) to geom-
This machine data is not used for the programmed rapid trav- etry axes is not changed when the machining plane (G17 -
erse G0. G19) is changed.
MD irrelevant to:
Operating modes AUTOMATIC and MDI Note:
Related to: A detailed description of SD42940 will be found in module
MD32000 $MA_MAX_AX_VELO (maximum axis velocity) A110.
MD32040 $MA_JOG_REV_VELO_RAPID
(revolution feedrate for JOG with rapid traverse override)
NC/PLC interface signal DB21-30 DBX12.5, DBX16.5,
DBX20.5
(Rapid traverse override)
NC/PLC interface signal DB21-30 DBB4
(Feedrate override A-H)
Assignment of tool length compensation independ- Fine offset TCARR ON / OFF

ent of tool type
SD42974
Assignment of tool length com- $SC_TOCARR_FINE_ Fine offset TCARR ON / OFF
SD42950
pensation independent of tool CORRECTION
$SC_TOOL_LENGTH_TYPE
type
SD42974 = 0
SD42950 = 0
Description:
Description: = 0: no fine offset of the vectors of the swivelling block
This setting data defines the assignment of the tool length = 1: Fine offset of the vectors of the swivelling block. The
components to the geometry axes independently of the tool parameters of the swivelling block $TC_CARR41[n] ...
type. It can assume any value between 0 and 2. Any other $TC_CARR65[n] take effect.
value is interpreted as 0.
Note: Frame definition at TOFRAME, TOROT and PAROT

A detailed description of SD42950 will be found in module
A110. SD42980 Frame definition at TOFRAME,
$SC_TOFRAME_MODE TOROT and PAROT
SD42980 = 1000 → 2000
Notes

Swivel data block set-up
For every swivel head, swivel table or combination of both, a swivel data a set has to be compiled.
Swivel data sets may be assigned to several channels (refer to machine data).
A swivel data set consists of parameters $TC_CARR1[n] to $TC_CARR65[n], n = number of swivel data set.
In the operating area Setup, the swivel data set parameters ($TC_CARR1[n] to $TC_CARR65[n]) can be read in/out . Program-
ming with relevant value assignment is also possible in a NC program (manufacturer cycle). After program start, swivel data set
parameters are immediately active.
Offset vectors I1 to I4
The vectors always contain three components, which represent the reference to the X, Y and Z machine axes. The positions in
the kinematic chain are measured by the machine manufacturer; they are always relevant with respect to a swivel head / swivel
table (swivel data set). Offset vectors I1 to I4 refer to the non-swiveled state of the rotary axes (machine kinematics basic set-
ting).
I1 $TC_CARR1…...3[n]
I2 $TC_CARR4…...6[n]
I3 $TC_CARR15...17[n]
I4 $TC_CARR18...20[n]
Rotary axis vectors V1 and V2

V1 $TC_CARR7…...9[n]
V2 $TC_CARR10...12[n]
Kinematic types
Kinematic selection with $TC_CARR23[n]=“T“ (Typ T)

$TC_CARR23[n]=“P“ (Typ P)
$TC_CARR23[n]=“M“ (Typ M)
Swivel head (type T) Swivel table (type P) Swivel head + swivel table (type M)
Offset vector I1 Offset vector I2 Offset vector I1

Rotary axis vector V1 Rotary axis vector V1 Rotary axis vector V1
Offset vector I2 Offset vector I3 Offset vector I2
Rotary axis vector V2 Rotary axis vector V2 Offset vector I3
Offset vector I3 Offset vector I4 Rotary axis vector V2
Offset vector I4
Notes

Swivel head Swivelling tool carrier

The swivelling axes are on the swivel head. The kinematics type is "T".
I3 distance from the tool adapter to the pivot point/intersection of the 2nd rotary axis
I2 distance from the pivot point/intersection of the 2nd rotary axis to the pivot point/intersection of the 1st rotary axis
I1 closure of the I1=-(I2+I3) vector chain, if the swivel head cannot be changed
Swivel table Swivelling work piece carrier (swivel table)

The swivelling axes are on the work piece table. The kinematics type is "P".
I2 distance from the machine reference point to the pivot point/intersection of the 1st rotary axis
I3 distance from the pivot point/intersection of the 1st rotary axis to the pivot point/intersection of the 2nd rotary axis (or to
the reference point of the tool adapter)
I4 closure of the I4=-(I2+I3) vector chain, if the swivel table cannot be changed
Swivel head / Swivel table Mixed kinematics: (swivel head and swivel table
Of the swivelling axes one is on the spindle head and one on the work piece table. The kinematics type is "M".
I2 distance from the tool adapter to the pivot point/intersection of the 1st rotary axis
I1 closure of the I1=-I2 vector chain, if the swivel head cannot be changed..
I3 distance from the machine reference point to the pivot point/intersection of the 2nd rotary axis (or to
the reference point of the tool adapter)
I4 closure of the I4=-I3 vector chain, if the swivel table cannot be changed.
Swivel data block set-up
● Which kinematics type is it?

Swivel head, swivel table or mixed kinematics of swivel head and swivel table.
● What are the names of the rotary axes of the kinematics?

Manual rotary axes are permitted and don't have to be determined in the NC.
● What is the 1st or 2nd rotary axis of a swivel data set?

Rule: Rotary axis 2 is based on rotary axis 1. With mixed kinematics, rotary axis 1 is always the axis for the tool
orientation.
● Is the traversing direction of the linear axes and the rotary axes correct?
Right-hand rule: If the linear axis or the rotary axis moves the workpiece, the direction of motion of the axis and also
the sign of the rotary axis vector change.
● Which rotary axis rotates around which axis of the coordinate system or the machine axis (axes)?
This defines the rotary axis vectors of the kinematics.
Example 1:
Head kinematics. Rotary axis 2 rotates around axis Y → rotary axis vector V2xyz = 0,1,0
Example 2:
Table kinematics. Rotary axis 1 rotates around axis X → rotary axis vector V1xyz = -1,0,0
Notes

The configuration described is one of mixed kinematics

with the rotary axes type „M“ with the rotary axes. Offset Kinematics 24 0
Angular offset *) 26 0
A1: in the tool heads with a swivelling range of +90 .. -90 de-
grees Angle grid *) 28 0
C1: in the work piece table with a swivelling range of 0 .. 360 Name of rotary axis 2 36 “C“
degrees
Range of angles 31, 33 0 360
Parameter Offset Kinematics 25 0
$TC_CARR
Angular offset *) 27 0
Name 34 “AC-MIXED“
Angle grid *) 29 0
Kinematics 23 “M“
*) for Hirth-toothing
X Y Z
Offset vector I1 41 - 43 0 0 0
Retraction position 38 - 40 200 200 150
Offset vector I1 1-3 0 0 -100
Rotary axis vector V1 7-9 1 0 0
Offset vector I2 4-6 0 0 100
Offset kinematics 64 0
Offset vector I3 15 - 17 0 0 0 rotary axis 1
Rotary axis vector V2 10 - 12 0 0 -1 Offset kinematics 65 0
rotary axis 2
Name of rotary axis 1 35 “A“ $TC_CARR41[n] to $TC_CARR65[n] are envisaged for the
fine offset of the rotary axis and offset vectors.
Range of angles 30, 32 -90 +90
Select Swivel data with
Notes

Retract settings
The settings in the "Selection fields Retraction" corresponds to SD55221 $SCS_FUNCTION_MASK_SWIVEL_SET, Bit 1 Re-
traction variant.
Notes

1 Manually
$TC_CARR37[n]
In the swivelling block parameter $TC_CARR37[n] the display 2 Semi-automatically
variants are shown decoded in ones; tens, etc.
Thousands Selection field Direction: Direction reference of
rotary axes
In the used data block the parameter $TC_CARR37[1] =
415008004 is assumed. In the table the settings are high- 0 No display of direction reference,
lighted. CYCLE800(_DIR) = -
3 Direction reference Rotary axis 1 optimized
Decimal place Meaning (selection - in basic position)
Ones Selection of swivelling mode 4 Direction reference Rotary axis 2 optimized
(selection - in basic position)
0 Axis by axis
5 No display Direction reference
1 Axis by axis + projection angle
CYCLE800(_DIR) = +
2 Axis by axis
8 Direction reference Rotary axis 1 opti-
+ projection angle + space angle
mized (selection + in basic position)
3 Axis by axis + directly
9 Direction reference Rotary axis 2 optimized
4 Axis by axis + projection angle + directly (selection + in basic position)
5 A.by axis + proj. angle + space angle + direct. Ten-thousands Selection field tracking / B-axis kinematics
Tens Rotary axis 1 0 No, no selection of tracking

0 Automatically 1 Selection Tracking (TRAORI)
1 Manually 2 No Tracking, B-axis kinematics
2 Semi-automatically 3 Selection Tracking + B-axis kinematics
Hundreds Rotary axis 2
Hundred thou- 0 reserved
0 Automatically sands
Decimal place Meaning Hundred mil- Release of swivelling block, swivelling block change
lions and tool change
Hundred- 0 reserved
thousands
0 No release of swivelling block
One million and Selection field retraction
4 Swivelling block released
ten millions
swivelling block- and tool change auto-
00 No retraction matically
01 Retraction Z Swivelling block change automatically and
tool change manually
02 Retraction Z XY
03 Retraction Z or Z XY swivelling block change manually and tool
change automatically
04 Retraction in tool direction max.
08 Retraction in tool direction inc. Swivelling block- and tool change manual-
ly
15 Retraction in Z, Z XY or Tool direction

max. or Tool direction inc
Note:
The tracking of the tool tip when swivelling requires the commissioning of the function TRAORI. For this the option "Machining
package 5-axes” is required. This option is not available with the NCK-Export-Version and is not described for this reason.
Interrelation of TOOLCARRIER ⇔ 5-axis transformation (transformer type 24, 40, 56):
For 5-axis transformation, transformer type 72 in MD24100: $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_1 can be used.
In the case of transformer type 72, the vectors of the TOOLCARRIER in MD24582: $MC_TRAFO5_TCARR_NO_1 are used.
Notes

Example : Swivel table "TABLE"
Vectors relate to the basic setting of the kinematics.
Rotary axis vector V1: Rotary axis A rotates around X.
Rotary axis vector V2: Rotary axis C rotates around Z.
Offset vector I2: Distance from the reference point of the

machine to the pivot point/intersection of
rotary axis 1
Offset vector I3: Distance from the pivot point of rotary axis 1
to the pivot point/intersection of
rotary axis 2
Offset vector I4: Closure of vector chain I4=-(I2+I3)
Side view of the machine from the X direction
Spindle (tool adapter) is positioned on a block

dimension above the top edge of the table (rotary axis
C) or the center of the table.
A measuring rod in the spindle is used to

determine the turning center of rotary
axis C.
Notes

Side view of the machine from the Y direction
Kinematik Schwenktisch TABLE
X Y Z
Offset vector 260.000 200.000 0.000

I2
Rotary axis vector V1 -1.000 0.000 0.000
Offset vector I3 0.000 0.020 20.400
Rotary axis vector V2 0.000 0.000 -1.000
Offset vector I4 -260.000 -200.020 -20.400
Rotary axes A
Rotary axis 1
Angular range -90.000 90.000
Rotary axis 2 C
Angular range 0.000 360.000
Notes

Set up the CUST_800.SPF Copying manufacturer cycles
Adaptations 1. Select the "Start-up" operating area.
During swivelling, all axis positions are approached using the

CUST_800.SPF cycle. The call is exclusively made by the
swivel cycle CYCLE800 respectively by the cycles 2. Press the "System data" softkey.
E_TCARR (ShopMill) or F_TCARR (ShopTurn).
In cycle CUST_800.SPF, the function markers (_M2: to 3. Open the directory NC data/Cycles/Standard
_M59) are prepared and documented. Also refer to the follow- cycles and select the manufacturer cycles.
ing diagram “Call-up structure for swivelling”.
If you modify the cycle CUST_800.SPF, proceed as follows: 4. Press the "Copy" softkey and open the NC
data/Cycles/Manufacturer cycles directory.
1. Copy cycle CUST_800.SPF from the directory
/NC data/Cycles/Standard cycles
5. Press the "Paste" softkey.
2. Insert cycle CUST_800.SPF into directory The cycles are available for you to individual-
/NC data/Cycles/Manufacturer cycles. ly adapt them.
Note:
By means of the access stage "Manufacturer" it is only possi-
ble to copy into the manufacturer or user directory those cy-
cles starting with CUST_.*.SPF and which are envisaged for
the machine matching.
CUST_800.SPF _MODE A jump is made to markers _M2 to _M59

Copying and in pasting into manufacturer cycles _TC1 Number of the swivel head/table (CYCLE800)
_A1 Angle of rotary axis 1
_A2 Angle of rotary axis 2
1. Feed evaluation in percent (%) for swivelling in
JOG mode
_TC2
2. Number of the new swivel head/table replacement
under ShopMill
Incremental position during retraction in the incre-
_T_POS
mental tool direction (see marker)
Retraction before swivelling
If the cycle CUST_800.SPF is not modified, the axis Z

Parameter of the manufacturer cycle CUST_800.SPF (marker _M41) or the axis Z will during retraction be trav-
ersed to the positions first followed by the axes X, Y (marker
CUST_800 (INT _MODE, INT _TC1, REAL _A1, REAL _A2, _M42) in the MCS system (Machine coordinate System).
INT _TC2, REAL _T_POS) Specified in the system variables $TC_CARR38[n] to
SAVE DISPLOF $TC_CARR40[n] are the freely available position values. Dur-
ing retraction the active cutting edge (D0) is de-selected and
re-selected after the retraction.
If retraction in direction of the tool is agreed, the tool axis will
be retracted as far as the software end position (in the tool
direction by the maximum amount) or else it will be retracted
by an incremental amount away from the work piece in the
direction of the tool. The tool lengths will be taken into ac-
count accordingly.
Notes

Call-up structure for swivelling
The diagram below shows the call-up structure from a
ShopMill part program: ProgramGuide program:
Description:
The cycle E_TCARR is used for milling machines (ShopMill) and the cycle F_TCARR for turning machines (ShopTurn).
Notes

CYCLE800 structured chart

Sequence in AUTOMATIC mode
Structure: CYCLE800.SPF / CUST_800.SPF
Notes

Structure: E_TCARR.SPF
Notes

Call-up sequences of the manufacturer cycle Mode-of-operation AUTO:

CUST_800.SPF
Part program with selection of the swivelling block with swiv-
The following description shows a couple of call-up sequenc-
elling and without retraction:
es of the customers cycle CUST_800.SPF.
 _M4: Load new swivel head automatically
Mode-of-operation JOG:  _M40: User Init
Selection of the swivelling block, with or without swivelling:  _M20: Automatic swivelling of the rotary axes 1 and 2
 _M40: User Init  _M14: Retraction after swivelling
 _M20: Automatic swivelling of the rotary axes 1 and 2
Part program with de-selection of the swivelling block:
De-selection of the swivelling block:
 _M11: Initializing the swivelling angle on program start
 _M40: User Init
 _M6: Change swivel head automatically
Swivelling with retraction:  _M40: User Init
 _M40: User Init  _M14: Retraction after swivelling:
 _M41: with retraction mode "Z"
_M42: with retraction mode "Z, XY"
_M44: with retraction mode "Tool direction max."
_M45: with retraction mode "Tool direction inc."
There will be no call-up of CUST_800 in case of a tool
change from the T,S,M-mask, no matter whether a swivelling
block is selected or not.
Mode-of-operation AUTO:
Part program without Swivelling with tool change, no swivel-

ling block activated, without retraction:
 _M2: Magazine tool change
 _M12: Swivelling after tool change (AUTO)
Part program without Swivelling with tool change, swivelling

block activated, without retraction:
 _M11: Initializing the swivelling angle on program start
 _M2: Magazine tool change
 _M12: Swivelling after tool change (AUTO)
Notes

Variable used in CUST_800: _TC_N_WZ: = 0: tool tracking not activated

= 1: tool tracking activated
_A1: contains the angular position evaluated in _TC1: Number of the swivelling block
CYCLE800 of the first rotary axis; is used
also as transfer parameter for the _TC2: Only for JobShop: Number of the new swiv-
E_SWIV_H for positioning the first rotary elling block for swivelling block change,
axis. otherwise: Override value for swivelling in
JOG
_A2: contains the angular position evaluated in
CYCLE800 of the second rotary axis; is used _T_POS: Transfer parameter evaluated by CYCLE800
also as transfer parameter for the for the retraction in tool direction :
E_SWIV_H for positioning the second rotary max.: as far as Software limit switch
axis. inc.: The value entered in the swivelling
mask for incremental retraction is re-
_SC_NO_VAL: Used as indicator that the rotary axis position calculated by CYCLE800 to a new absolute
is not defined. position taking into account the Software
limit switch.
_TC_FR: Retraction mode:
= 0: No retraction $P_EP[_AX1]: The system variable provides the current
= 1: Z or fixed point 1 WCS command position of the first rotary
= 2: Z XY or fixed point 2 axis.
= 4: Tool direction max.
= 5: Tool direction max. $P_EP[_AX2]: The system variable provides the current
WCS command position of the second rotary
Note: axis.
By means of the command MOD10 the tens-
place of this variable, which has no meaning
for the retraction mode, is hidden.
Note on markers _M2 to _M13 Note on markers _M14 to _M15

If the swivel data set (SDS) or tool is changed, the linear axes Depending on the values of the retraction plane and the pro-
are retracted using the last retraction mode (modal). grammed swivel plane, it is possible that the linear axes now
If this behaviour is not desired in milling/turning, the corre- also travel the swivelled retraction plane while running up
sponding calls must be commented out with a semicolon (;). from the current position to the software limit switches after a
The E_SWIV_H or F_SWIV_H cycle is called in milling/ block search. To avoid this problem, marker _M14 in the
turning (see markers _M2 to _M9) in the CUST_800.SPF CUST_800.SPF is called after swivelling. The E_SP_RP(30)
manufacturer cycle. cycle preset there runs up to the milling retraction plane,
whereby travel may be along the software limit switches. An
Parameter E_SWIV_H (Par1, Par2, Par3) appropriate retraction after block search can be set at marker
_M15.
 Par1: Number of swivel data set (_TC1)
 Par2: Angle of 1st rotary axis Note on markers _M20 to _M31
 Par3: Angle of 2nd rotary axis
Markers _M20 to _M31 are distinguished by machine kine-
matics with two rotary axes or one rotary axis. A distinction is
Modification examples also made between automatic rotary axes (known to the
NCU) and manual (semi-automatic) rotary axes. There is only
If the rotary axes (swivel head/table) are not to be positioned ever one valid marker for swivelling with the active swivel
during swivel data change / tool change, the call of the data set.
E_SWIV_H cycle can be commented out at the relevant
markers. If the rotary axes are to move to a certain position,
an angle value can be transferred to parameters Par 2, Par 3. Note on marker _M35
Run through _M35 for block search and a swivel data set with
manual rotary axes.
Notes

Note on marker _M40 _M42: retraction in Z XY or fixed point 2

The retraction positions are determined by the swivelling
This marker is envisaged for user applications such as swiv- block parameter:
elling without active tool correction - $TC_CARR38[n] for the X-axis
- $TC_CARR39[n] for the Y-axis
If the swivelling of the rotary axes without active tool cutting - $TC_CARR40[n] for the Z-axis
edges (D0) is not possible, then this can be rectified in the The retraction positions are approached in the machine coor-
cycle CUST_800.SPF: dinate system (departure block with SUPA D0).
_M40: _M43: not used

IF ((NOT $P_TOOL) AND _TC1)
LOOP _M44: Retraction in tool direction max.
MSG ("no tool cutting edge active") The retraction position is evaluated from the Software limit
M0 switch position. The approach takes place in the work piece
STOPRE coordinate system (departure block with G90).
ENDLOOP
ENDIF _M45: Retraction in tool direction inc.
GOTOF_MEND The retraction position is defined incrementally to the current
position in the swivelling mask. The input value is converted
internally into an absolute position taking into account the
Note on markers _M41 to _M45 Software limit switch. The approach takes place in the work
piece coordinate system (departure block with G90).
_M41: retraction in Z or fixed point 1
The retraction position of the Z-axis is determined by the
swivelling block parameter $TC_CARR40[n] for the Z-axis.
The retraction position is approached in the machine coordi-
nate system (departure block with SUPA D0).
Note on marker _M46 Note on tool change + swivelling

The retraction before the swivelling after a block search can As a rule the functions Swivelling (CYCLE800) and the tool
be set with the marker _M46. The variable _E_VER is 1, if it change on a machine are independent of one another. Hence
is a milling program. in case of a technological sequence involving several tools
e.g. centring, drilling, tapping etc. the swivelled working plane
can be maintained.
Note on markers _M57 to _M59 If for the mechanical operation of the tool changes the rotary
axes of the activated swivelling block are involved or if these
The markers _M57 to _M59 are used for swivelling in JOG
must be retracted, then this must be taken into account in the
and active 5-axis transformation (TRAORI).
tool changing program. After the tool change the same rotary
axis positions as before the tool change will be approached. If
linear axes (geo axes) are involved with the tool change, the
Note on "Tracking tool"
rotations in the NC (swivelling frame) do not need to be
The tracking of the tool requires that the 5-axis transformation cleared, instead the linear axes can be positioned as machine
has been arranged, which is equivalent to the respective axes by means of the commands G153 or SUPA.
swivelling block. The programming part for tool tracking is
included in the markers _M20, _M21, _M22 and _M30. The
first 5-axis transformation will be called up with TRAORI(1).
Note:
The function "Tracking tool" is not available with the NCK

Export version that is subject of this module.
Notes

Application in JOG and part program
Swivelling in JOG
Shown below is how the swivelling configuration can be test-

ed.
Basic setting:
The axes are positioned by means of the mask "Position":
X = 0, Y = 0, Z = 100, A = 0 and C = 0
A tool is selected, the tool length is 80mm, no values are en-
tered in the zero point offset.
Before swivelling there is the following outset position:
Thereafter follows by means of JOG-swivelling a swivelling by

90 degree about the X-axis.
From this result the following axis positions:
Description:
The following diagram shows the position of the spindle head The point of rotation of the spindle head has the following
in the basic position. The coordinate system is not swivelled. position in the machine coordinate system:
The vector I2 is defined in the swivelling block with $TC- Y-axis: WCS-Position = 0
CARR6[1] = 100. The vector I1 with $TC_CARR3[1] = -100 Z-axis: WCS-Position (100) + ZL (80) + I2 (100) = 280
closes the vector chain. The tool length ZL is taken to be 80.
Notes

Continuation Swivelling in JOG The coordinate system is being tracked with the rotation
about the X-axis, in this diagram it is rotated by 90 degrees
anti-clockwise. The following new axis positions result:
The next diagram shows the position of the spindle head after
swivelling by 90 degree about the X-axis:
Y = 280: This corresponds to the previous Z-axis position in
the rotation centre of the spindle head.
Z = -180: This position results from the previous Y-position in

the rotation centre of the spindle head + the vector
I2 + the tool length ZL.
A1 = 90: A rotation about the X-axis by 90 degrees corre-

sponds to an A1-axis position of 90 degrees.
The following describes a programming example which

demonstrates the swivelling and a subsequent machining
operation with planar milling and drilling on the swilled face.
Notes

Continuation Swivelling in AUTO (part program)
Notes

Continuation Swivelling in AUTO (part program)
Note:
For better representation in the 3D view the function
"Section" was used.
Selection of the simulation: Details - Section
Using the softkeys "X +" to "Z -" the section axes can be set.
Under "Details - rotate view" the work piece can be rotated

into the required position.
Note:
By means of the machine data settings described in this mod-
ule the swivelled coordinate system remains unchanged after
Reset/end of part program. This permits for instance in case
of a tool failure to stop the program by means of reset and
thereafter to retract the tool from a swivelled bore using the
JOG-functions.
In this case the work piece coordinate system must be select-

ed on the machine control panel and to traverse the Z-axis in
the +-direction. Together with a rotation about the X-axis ad-
ditionally to the Z-axis, the Y-axis will be traversed according
to the swivelled plane on the machine. On the user interface
this can be checked by switching to "Actual values MCS".
A111: END
Notes

A111 END Setup Swivelling

A120 Setup Turning
Sinumerik
Operate
Module Description:
In this module a simple turning machine with the axes X1 and Z1, a main spindle C1 as well as a
driven tool TOOL is to be set up for turning and the subtechnology milling. The individual setup
steps are to be checked from time to time to show the result of the parameterization.
The preparation of the tool list, the cycle selections, the search run and various basic settings are
also part of the training scope. There will be a detailed description of the selections to be made for
JOG-TSM, TRANSMIT/TRACYL and for the main .
Module Objective:
By means of this module you will get to know the meaning of the Machine and Setting data to be
used as well as the various means available in order to configure the machine to suit the particular
requirements.
The functions will be parameterized in several blocks and subsequently tested regarding the func-
tion.
Content:
Manufacturer Cycles
Setup for Turning

Sinumerik
Cycle settings
Tool list setup
Basic settings
JOG-TSM
Block search
Simulation
TRANSMIT/TRACYL
Clamping jaws, cut-off and parts gripper

EN_120_V1.1
A120

Setup Turning A120
Setup Turning:
START
Simulation
Overview
MD and SD
TRANSMIT
TRACYL
Manufacturer
Cycles
Clamping jaws,
cut-off and parts
gripper
Setup for
Turning
Menu and
Technology
settings
Cycle
Settings
Setup Turning:
END
Tool List
Setup
Basic
Settings
JOG-TSM
Block search
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
Settings
Turning
10260 $MN_CONVERT_SCALING_SYSTEM 0 1 Enable basic system conversion
$MN_FRAME_GEOAX_CHANGE_MO
DE
10610 $MN_MIRROR_REF_AX 0 0 Reference axis for mirroring
10714 $MN_M_NO_FCT_EOP -1 32 M function for spindle active after reset
10722 $MN_AXCHANGE_MASK 0H 4H Parameters for axis replacement behavior

Bit 0: 15110: REORG not possible
Bit 1: 10763 The path component of the block in the con-
11410 $MN_SUPPRESS_ALARM_MASK 108000H 108003H tour plane is zero
Bit 15: 5000 Communication order cannot be executed
Bit 20: 2900 Reboot is delayed
Bit 0 = 1: Machining is stopped with the loading of the last
action block after search run
Bit 1 = 1: Automatic ASUP start after output of the action
11450 $MN_SEARCH_RUN_MODE 0H 7H
blocks
Bit 2 = 1: The output of the auxiliary functions in the action
blocks is suppressed
11470 $MN_REPOS_MODE_MASK 8H 8H Mask for support of special alarm outputs
$MN_TOOL_DATA_CHANGE_COUN
17530 1FH 1FH Mark tool data change for HMI
TER
Bit 0 = 1: Memory for TM-specific data is provided
$MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_M
18080 0H BH Bit 1 = 1: Memory for monitoring data (WZMO) is provided
ASK
Bit 3 = 1: Memory to consider adjacent location is provided
19320 $ON_TECHNO_FUNCTION_MASK 0H Bit 4 = 1 Bit 4 = 1: Tool management with magazine data enabled
20100 $MC_DIAMETER_AX_DEF ““ X Geometry axis with transverse axis function
Bit 0 = 1: G codes acc. to MD20150.
Bit 6 = 1: Current setting for active tool length offset is re-
20110 $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK 1H 4041H tained after reset/end-of-part-program
Bit 14= 1: The current setting of the basic frame is retained
Bit 16 = 0: Initial setting for master spindle acc. to MD20090
$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLH
20124 0 1 Tool holder number
OLDER
20128 $MC_COLLECT_TOOL_CHANGE 1 0 No tool change commands after search run
$MC_CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VAL
20130 0 1 Tool and cutting edge remain activated
UE
[5] = 1 [5] = 2 Group 6: Plane selection 2 = 18
[15] = 1 [15] = 3 Group 16: Feedrate override 3 = CFIN
20150 $MC_G_CODE_RESET_VALUE [21] = 1 [21] = 2 Group 22: Tool offset type 2 = CUT2DF
[28] = 1 [28] = 2 Group 29 Radius/diameter programming 2 = DIAMON
[48] = 1 [48] = 3 Group 49 Point-to-point motion 3 = PTPG0
Group 6: Plane selection remains active after Reset
[5] = 0 [5] = 0
Group 8: Zero point offset remains active after Reset
[7] = 0 [7] = 1
Group 13: Work piece dimensioning inch/metric default
[12] = 0 [12] = 0
20152 $MC_G_CODE_RESET_MODE after reset
[14] = 0 [14] = 1
Group 15: Type of feed remains active after Reset
[15] = 0 [15] = 0
Group 16: Feed correction remains active after Reset
[21] = 0 [21] = 0
Group 22: Tool correction type default after reset
$MC_WAB_MAXNUM_DUMMY_BLO maximum number of blocks w/o traversing movement with
20202 5 10
CKS SAR
$MC_CUTCOM_MAXNUM_CHECK_
20240 4 4 Blocks for look-ahead contour calculation with TRC
BLOCKS
$MC_CUTCOM_MAXNUM_DUMMY_ maximum number of blocks without traversing motion in
20250 3 5
BLOCKS TRC
Notes

Setup Turning A120
Settings
Turning
Bit 0 = 1 Tool management active
Bit 1 = 1 Tool monitoring function active
Bit 3 = 1 Consider adjacent location active
20310 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK 0H 81400BH
Bit 14 = 1 automatic tool change during RESET and Start
Bit 16 = 1 Programming T=’Location number’
Bit 23 = 1 On offset selection no synchronization with HL
20320 $MC_TOOL_TIME_MONITOR_MASK 0H 1H Bit 0 = 1: Time monitoring for tool in tool holder 1
Function mask for external language
20734 $MC_EXTERN_FUNCTION_MASK 0H 8H Bit 3 = 1: Errors in ISO scanner are not output, the block is
transferred to the Siemens translator.
22550 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE 0 0 Tool change with T function
Bit 0 = 1: System frame for actual value setting and
Bit 0 = 1
24006 $MC_CHSFRAME_RESET_MASK 1H scratching is active after reset.
Bit 5 = 0
Bit 0 = 0: System frame for actual value setting and
$MC_CHSFRAME_RESET_CLEAR_ Bit 0 = 0
24007 0H scratching is active after reset.
MASK Bit 5 = 1
$MC_CHSFRAME_POWERON_MAS
24008 0H 0H Reset channel system frames after power on
K
Adjustment of SZS coordinate system
24030 $MC_FRAME_ACS_SET 0 1 - without cycle frames
- with progr. offset
Adaptation of active frames
24040 $MC_FRAME_ADAPT_MODE 0H 7H
Setting necessary for TRANSMIT/TRACYL
Bit 0 = 1: Measurement of total operating time is active for
all part programs
Bit 1 = 1: Measurement of current program runtime is active
27860 $MC_PROCESSTIMER_MODE 0H 73H Bit 4 = 1: Measurement also with active dry run feed
Bit 5 = 1: Measurement also with program test
Bit 6 = 1: $AC_CYCLE_TIME is not deleted on start by
ASUP and PROG_EVENT
Bit 0 = 1: Counter $AC_REQUIRED_PARTS is activated
27880 $MC_PART_COUNTER 0H 901H Bit 8 = 1: Counter $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS is active
Bit 11 = 1: Increment $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS with GOTOS
28000 $MC_MM_REORG_LOG_FILE_MEM 50 75 Memory space for REORG (DRAM)
$MC_MM_NUM_REORG_LUD_MOD Number of blocks for local user variables in REORG
28010 8 20
ULES (DRAM)
Bit 0 = 1 System frame for setting actual value and scratch-
28082 $MC_MM_SYSTEM_FRAME_MASK 21H 21H ing
$MC_MM_SYSTEM_DATAFRAME_M Bit mask for configuring channel-specific system frames in
28083 F9FH F9FH
ASK the data storage
$MC_MM_TOOL_DATA_CHG_BUFF
28450 400 400 Buffer for tool data changes (DRAM)
_SIZE
35040 $MA_SPIND_ACTIV_AFTER_RESET 0 2 Own spindle RESET
42440 $SC_FRAME_OFFSET_INCR_PROG 1 0 Zero offsets in frames
42442 $SC_TOOL_OFFSET_INCR_PROG 1 0 Tool length offsets
42528 $SC_CUTCOM_DECEL_LIMIT 0 1 Feed lowering on circles with tool radius compensation

42940 $SC_TOOL_LENGTH_CONST 0 18
plane
Assignment of tool length compensation independent of
42950 $SC_TOOL_LENGTH_TYPE 0 2
tool type
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
Settings
Turning
Bit mask for available search modes (ShopMill/ShopTurn)
$MNS_BLOCK_SEARCH_MODE_MA
51024 1H Bit 1: Block search with calculation with approach
SK_JS
Bit mask for available block search modes

$MNS_BLOCK_SEARCH_MODE_MA Bit 1: Block search with calculation with approach
51028 33H
SK Bit 3: Skip EXTCALL programs
Set actual value selection
51038 $MNS_SET_ACT_VALUE 1 1 = If a user frame (settable work offset e.g. G54) is active,
it will be used. In G500 Set actual values is not offered
(system frame is no longer used).
$MNS_PROGRAM_CONTROL_MOD Options for machine - program influence:

51039 1H
E_MASK Bit 0: Program test function available
Automatic operating area switchover to machine

Bit 0: When selecting a program in the program manager,
the operating area does not automatically switch over to
Machine.
Bit 1: When switching the type of operation via the MCP,
$MNS_SWITCH_TO_MACHINE_MAS
51040 0H the operating area is not automatically switched over to
K
Machine.
Bit 2: Do not switch automatically in Programs during pro-
gram selection.
Bit 3: No auto. Start of block search on selection / execu-
tion under Programs.
Function mask Simulation

51226 $MNS_FUNCTION_MASK_SIM 0H Bit 1: Deactivate simulation

51228 $MNS_FUNCTION_MASK_TECH 0H Bit 0: G code programming without multi-channel data
0: Vertical lathe, right hand head

6: Vertical lathe, left hand head
$MCS_DISP_COORDINATE_SYSTE 33: Horizontal lathe with machining in front of the turning
52000 0 34
M centre
34: Horizontal lathe with machining behind the turning cen-
tre
52005 $MCS_DISP_PLANE_MILL 0 0 Milling: 0: Plane selection on the operator panel
52006 $MCS_DISP_PLANE_TURN 18 18 Turning: Always G18

Technology
52200 $MCS_TECHNOLOGY 0 1
1: turning
2: milling
Extended technology
52201 $MCS_TECHNOLOGY_EXTENSION 0 2 1: turning: extended technology Turning has not yet been
implemented for Milling
2: milling
Notes

Setup Turning A120
Settings
Turning
Meaning of the axes
[0] = 0 -X 0 = no special meaning; 1 = tool spindle (driven tool); 2 = C
[1] = 0 -Z axis of the tool spindle (driven tool); 3 = main spindle
[2] = 3 -C (turning); 4 = C axis of the main spindle (turning); 5 = coun-
52206 $MCS_AXIS_USAGE 0 [3] = 1 -Tool ter spindle (turning); 6 = C axis of the counter spindle
[4] = 0 -Y (turning); 7 = linear axis of the counter spindle (turning);
[5] = 7 -Z2 tailstock (turning); 9 = steady rest (turning); 10 = B axis
[6] = 5 -SP2 (turning), 12 = B axis of the counter spindle (turning),
Axis attributes
Bit 0: Rotates around the 1st geometry axis (applies to
rotary axes)
Bit 1: Rotates around the 2nd geometry axis (applies to
rotary axes)
Bit 2: Rotates around the 3rd geometry axis (applies to
rotary axes)
Bit 3: Positive direction of rotation is counter clockwise
(applies to rotary axes)
[6]=18H -
52207 $MCS_AXIS_USAGE_ATTRIB 0H Bit 4: Displayed direction of rotation for M3 is counter clock-
SP2
wise (applies to spindles)
Bit 5: Direction of rotation M3 corresponds to rotary axis
minus (applies to spindles)
Bit 8: reserved
Function mask Display
Bit 0: Measuring system for programs always in the base
system
tem
Bit 2: Hide “T,S,M” softkey in JOG area
52210 $MCS_FUNCTION_MASK_DISP 3H
Bit 3: Generate automatic end-of-program in MDI
Bit 7: Hide tool length in T,F,S window
52212 $MCS_FUNCTION_MASK_TECH 0H Bit 3 = 1 Bit 6: Work offset value ZV cannot be entered as an abso-
lute value (ShopTurn)
Bit 10: reserved
Bit 11: Switch off layer check for drilling and milling tools
(ShopTurn)
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
Settings
Turning
Bit 0: Enable cylinder surface transformation (ShopMill)
52214 $MCS_FUNCTION_MASK_MILL 0H
Bit 4: Enable spindle clamping (C axis)
52216 $MCS_FUNCTION_MASK_DRILL 0H Bit 0: CYCLE84 Unhide input fields Technology
Bit 1: CYCLE840 Unhide input fields Technology
Function mask Turning
Bit 0: Enable zoom under manual for tool measurement
Bit 1: Enable parts gripper for cut-off
Bit 2: Enable tailstock
Bit 3: Enable spindle control of main spindle via surface
Bit 4: Enable spindle control of counter spindle via surface
52218 $MCS_FUNCTION_MASK_TURN 0H Bit 5: Enable spindle control of tool spindle via surface
Bit 6: Enable balance cutting for dual-channel stock remov-
al
Bit 7: Retraction during stock removal along contour with
G1
Bit 8: Input spindle chuck data in the program
Bit 9: Additional entry of tailstock data in the program
Bit 0: Coolant OFF
52229 $MCS_ENABLE_QUICK_M_CODES 0H Bit 1: Coolant 1 ON
Bit 2: Coolant 2 ON
$MCS_M_CODE_ALL_COOLANTS_
52230 9 M code for all coolants OFF
OFF
52231 $MCS_M_CODE_COOLANT_1_ON 8 M code for coolant 1 ON
52232 $MCS_M_CODE_COOLANT_2_ON 7 M code for coolant 2 ON
$MCS_M_CODE_COOLANT_1_AND
52233 -1 M code for coolant 1 + 2 ON
_2_ON
[0]: M code for Open chuck with non-rotating main spindle
52250 $MCS_M_CODE_CHUCK_OPEN ““ [1]: M code for Open chuck with non-rotating counter spin-
dle
$MCS_M_CODE_CHUCK_OPEN_RO [0]: M code for Open chuck with rotating main spindle
52251 ““
T [1]: M code for Open chuck with rotating counter spindle
[0]: M code for Close chuck main spindle

52252 $MCS_M_CODE_CHUCK_CLOSE ““
[1]: M code for Close chuck counter spindle
Bit 0:Create tool on magazine location not allowed.
Bit 1:Load/unload disable, if machine is in reset.
Bit 2:Load/unload disable on Emergency stop.
Bit 3:Load/unload tool to/from spindle is disabled.
Bit 4:Loading is executed directly in the spindle.
52270 $MCS_TM_FUNCTION_MASK 0H
Bit 7:Create tool using the tool number.
Bit 8:Fade out Relocate tool.
Bit 9:Fade out Position magazine.
Bit 10:Reactivate tool using Position magazine.
Bit 11:Reactivate tool in all monitoring modes.
Bit 12:Fade out Reactivate tool.
Notes

Setup Turning A120
Settings
Turning
53220 $MAS_AXIS_MCS_POSITION 0 Position of axis in the Machine
X=400 Axis position at start of simulation

53230 $MAS_SIM_START_POSITION 0
Z=0 Only adjust with geometry axes
[0]: Spindle chuck: Chuck dimension ZC1
[1]: Spindle chuck: Stop dimension ZS1
53240 $MAS_SPINDLE_PARAMETER 0 [2]: Spindle chuck: Jaw dimension ZE2 (counter spindle
only)
in the data set of the main spindle and the counter spindle
Spindle jaw type only for counter spindle
53241 $MAS_SPINDLE_CHUCK_TYPE 0 = 0: Jaw type 1
= 1: Jaw type 2
[0] Tailstock diameter
53242 $MAS_TAILSTOCK_PARAMETER 0
[1] Tailstock length
Bit 0: Diameter display for rotary tools.
Bit 1: Default direction of rotation for all turning tools
Bit 2: Create tool without suggesting name.
Bit 3: Input disable for tool name and tool type in the case
of loaded tools.
Bit 4: Input disable for loaded tools unless the channel is
not in reset.
54215 $SNS_TM_FUNCTION_MASK_SET 0H Bit 0 = 1 Bit 5: Accrue tool wear entries additively.
Bit 6: Entry of tool ID in numerical format.
Bit 7: Hide tool monitoring parameters.
Bit 8: Diameter display for transverse axis geometry.
Bit 9: Diameter display for transverse axis wear.
Bit 10: Enable loading/relocation of tool in buffer locations
Bit 11: Creation of new tool in gripper locations is disabled
Bit 12: Do not unload measuring tools if ”Unload all” func-
tion is executed.
$SCS_MAX_INPUT_FEED_PER_RE
55200 1 Feedrate input upper limit for mm/rev
V
$SCS_MAX_INPUT_FEED_PER_TIM
55201 10000 Feedrate input upper limit for mm/min
E
$SCS_MAX_INPUT_FEED_PER_TO
55202 1 Feedrate input upper limit for mm/tooth
OTH
$SCS_FUNCTION_MASK_TECH_SE Bit 0: Tool pre-selection active (ShopMill only)
55212 6H
T Bit 1: Calculate thread depth from thread pitch
Bit 2: Refer to Table for thread diameter and depth
Bit 0: Default setting - milling cycles with synchronous oper-
55214 $SCS_FUNCTION_MASK_MILL_SET 5H ation
SC
Bit 1: Boring CYCLE86: consider rotation of the tool plane
when positioning the spindle
Bit 2: Boring CYCLE86: consider swiveled table kinematics
$SCS_FUNCTION_MASK_DRILL_SE
55216 18H when positioning the spindle (tool carrier)
T
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
Settings
Turning
Bit 0: New thread table during thread cutting
$SCS_FUNCTION_MASK_TURN_SE
55218 1H Bit 1: Reserved (CYCLE93)
T
Bit 2: Reserved (CYCLE93)
Bit 3: Chamfer in CYCLE930 as chamfer length (CHF)
$SCS_SUB_SPINDLE_REL_POSITIO
55232 0 Z retraction position for the counter spindle
N
Only for ShopTurn cycles with complete machining rough-
ing and finishing
55500 $SCS_TURN_FIN_FEED_PERCENT 100 - Grooving cycles : all
- Undercut cycles : “Thread DIN” and “Thread”
- Thread cycles : all
$SCS_TURN_ROUGH_O_RELEASE_
55505 1 Return distance stock removal for external machining
DIST
$SCS_TURN_ROUGH_I_RELEASE_
55506 0,5 Return distance stock removal for internal machining
DIST
$SCS_TURN_GROOVE_DWELL_TIM negative value in spindle revolutions
55510 -1
E positive value in seconds
$SCS_TURN_PART_OFF_CTRL_DIS
55540 0,1 Path for cut-off check
T
$SCS_TURN_PART_OFF_CTRL_FE
55541 0 Feedrate for cut-off check
ED
$SCS_TURN_PART_OFF_CTRL_FO
55542 10 Force in percent for cut-off check
RCE
$SCS_TURN_PART_OFF_RETRACTI
55543 0 Retraction path prior to cut-off with counter spindle
ON
55550 $SCS_TURN_FIXED_STOP_DIST 10 path for travel to fixed stop
55551 $SCS_TURN_FIXED_STOP_FEED 0 feedrate for travel to fixed stop
55552 $SCS_TURN_FIXED_STOP_FORCE 10 force for travel to fixed stop in %
$SCS_TURN_FIXED_STOP_RETRA
55553 0 retraction path prior to chucking after fixed stop
CTION
$SCS_TURN_CONT_RELEASE_ANG
55580 45 Contour turning: retraction angle
LE
$SCS_TURN_CONT_RELEASE_DIS
55581 1 Contour turning: retraction value
T
55582 $SCS_TURN_CONT_TRACE_ANGLE 5 Contour turning: minimum angle for rounding along contour
$SCS_TURN_CONT_VARIABLE_DE
55583 20 Contour turning: percentage for variable cutting depth
PTH
$SCS_TURN_CONT_BLANK_OFFSE
55584 1 Contour turning: blank allowance
T
Contour turning: feed interrupt time
$SCS_TURN_CONT_INTERRUPT_TI
55585 -1 negative value in spindle revolutions
ME
positive value in seconds
$SCS_TURN_CONT_INTER_RETRA
55586 1 Contour turning: retraction path after feed interrupt
CTION
$SCS_TURN_CONT_MIN_REST_MA Contour turning: minimum difference dimension residual
55587 50
T_AX1 machining axis 1
$SCS_TURN_CONT_MIN_REST_MA Contour turning: minimum difference dimension residual
55588 50
T_AX2 machining axis 2
$SCS_TURN_CONT_TOOL_BEND_R
55595 0,1 Contour plunge turning: retraction path due to tool bending
ETR
$SCS_TURN_CONT_TURN_RETRA
55596 0,1 Contour plunge turning: retraction depth prior to turning
CTION
Notes

Setup Turning A120
Setup Turning Configuration of the axes and spindles
Pre-requisite: Machine axis name
Sinumerik Operate is already installed, PLC commissioning

has been carried out, the tool management set-up has been MD10000
completed. $MN_AXCONF_MACHAX_ Machine axis name
NAME_TAB
Options: Default: X1, Y1, Z1, A1, B1, C1 Change to:
In order for the required function to be achieved on your ma-

chine, the following software options must be available: Description:
MD10000[0] =X1
 "ShopMill/ShopTurn" MD10000[1] =Y1 → Z1
Order Nr. 6FC5800-0AP17-0YB0 MD10000[2] =Z1→ C1
MD10000[3] =A1 → TOOL
 "Residual material detection and machining" MD10000[4] =B1 → Y1
Order Nr. 6FC5800-0AP13-0YB0 MD10000[5] =C1 → Z2
MD10000[6] =U1 → SP2
 "Simultaneous recording (real-time simulation)"
 "3D simulation 1 (finished part)"

 "TRANSMIT and peripheral surface transformation"

Assignment of geometry axis to channel axis Machine axis number valid in channel
MD20070
MD20050 Machine axis number valid in
Assignment of geometry axis $MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_
$MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_ channel
to channel axis USED
ASSIGN_TAB
Default: 1, 2, 3, 0, 0, 0 Change to:
Default: 1, 2, 3 Change to:
Description:
MD20070[0] =1
Description:
MD20070[1] =2
MD20050[0] = 1 MD20070[2] =3
MD20050[1] = 2 → 0 MD20070[3] =0 → 4
MD20050[2] = 3 → 2 MD20070[4] =0
MD20070[5] =0
MD20070[6] =0
Geometry axis name in channel
Channel axis name in channel
MD20080
MD20060
Geometry axis name in chan- $MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_ Channel axis name in channel
$MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_
nel NAME_TAB
NAME_TAB
Default: X, Y, Z, A, B, C Change to:
Default: X, Y, Z Change to:
Description:
MD20080[0] =X
Description: MD20080[1] =Y → Z
MD20080[2] =Z → C
MD20060[0] = X MD20080[3] =A → TOOL
MD20060[1] = Y MD20080[4] =B → Y
MD20060[2] = Z MD20080[5] =C → Z2
MD20080[6] =U→ SP2
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
Rotary axis / spindle Description:

AX3: C1
MD30300 MD30310 =0 → 1 Modulo-transformation for rotary axis
$MA_IS_ROT_ACHSE
AX4: TOOL
Description:
Modulo 360 degrees displayed for rotary axis or spindle
AX3: C1
MD30320 Modulo 360 degrees displayed
AX4: TOOL $MA_DISPLAY_IS_MODULO for rotary axis or spindle
Modulo conversion for rotary axis / spindle

Description:
AX3: C1
MD30310 Modulo conversion for rotary MD30320 =0 → 1 Actual value display Modulo
$MA_ROT_IS_MODULO axis / spindle
AX4: TOOL
Default: 0 Change to: MD30320 =0 → 1 Actual value display Modulo
Assignment of spindle to machine axis Check of the set axes and spindles:
MD35000
Assignment of spindle to ma-
$MA_SPIND_ASSIGN_TO_
chine axis
MACHAX
Description:
Definition of the spindle. The spindle is defined if the spindle
number is entered into this MD.
AX3: C1
(spindle S1)
AX4: TOOL
(spindle S3)
Notes

Setup Turning A120
Manufacturer Cycles Note:
The cycle PROG_EVENT.SPF is a standard Siemens cycle

For the individual matching the following cycles are included and should not be changed by the manufacturer. For the
in the standard cycle package: manufacturer cycles CYCPE1MA.SPF or CYCPE_MA.SPF,
the corresponding jump-out markers are prepared at the be-
ginning and at the end of PROG_EVENT.SPF.
CUST_TECHCYC.SPF For matching to the technological cycles.
At the beginning of the cycle PROG_EVENT
Standard cycle for the support of the functionality of: -  CYCPE1MA in the directory CMA
PROG_EVENT.SPF
• Block search when milling is activated At the end of the cycle PROG_EVENT
• Turning and indexing plane  CYCPE_MA.SPF in the directory CMA
• Tool indexing
For these cycles templates are not available. If the
CYCPE1MA.SPF and CYCPE_MA.SPF manufacturer cycles
are loaded in the NC, the program branches from
PROG_EVENT to the manufacturer cycles as appropriate.
Manufacturer cycle CUST_TECHCYC.SPF
The manufacturer‘s cycle CUST_TECHCYC.SPF is called up

by the
 ShopTurn cycles
 Standard cycle CYCLE92 (roughing)
Jump markers (_M1 to _M142), some of them already pre-

pared with entries, have been provided in the cycle
CUST_TECHCYC.SPF. These entries must be made to suit
the machine by the manufacturer. A listing of the jump mark-
ers together with a brief description will be found on the next
page. Further details can be found in the sections "JOG-
TSM", "Block search" and "Clamping jaws, chucks, part grip-
per and tailstock".
1. Copy the cycle CUST_TECHCYC.SPF from the directory /

NC-Data / Cycles / Standard cycles.
2. Paste in the Cycle CUST_TECHCYC.SPF in to following
directory: /NC-Data/Cycles/Manufacturer cycles
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
Extract from the CUST_TECHCYC.SPF Implementation of the matching
In the manufacturer‘s cycle CUST_TECHCYC.SPF the fol-

lowing jump-to markers have been prepared.
 Switching between spindle and C-axis mode of the

main spindle: _M1, _M2
Tool spindle: _M11, _M12
Counter spindle: _M21, _M22
 Spindle clamping and unclamping:

Main spindle: _M3, _M4
Tool spindle: _M13, _M14
Counter spindle: _M23, _M24
 Chuck flushing, opening and closing:

Main spindle: _M5, _M6, _M7, _M8
Counter spindle: _M25, _M26, _M27, M28, _M29
 Axis of the counter spindle after block search:

_M30
 Coupling and un-coupling of the driven tool

(engaging / disengaging the drive):
_M41, _M42
 Configuration of special functions when switching be- Setting-up for turning

tween the machining planes (no settings are neces-
Matching of the Coordinate systems to the user interface
sary here for cylinder mantle transformation or front
end machining with the C–axis.)
_M61 to _M68
Coordinate system position
 Positioning the part receptacle for cut-off operations,
moving it in and out. MD52000
_M100, _M101, _M102 $MCS_DISP_COORDINATE_ Coordinate system position
SYSTEM
 Configuration of special functions for tool changing Default: 0 Change to: 34
(these special functions will be called up after the
T-command has been put out.)
_M110, _M111, _M112, _M113, _M114 Selection table of the possible Coordinate systems
 Settings for coupling of the main and counter spindle

_M120
 Setting of specific aspects for starting and ending the

program
_M131, _M135, _M136
 Setting of specific aspects for the tool change after

block search:
_M140, _M141, _M142
Notes

Setup Turning A120
Continuation MD52000
Description:
With this MD you adapt the operator panel of the coordinate system
to the machine's coordinate system. Depending on the selected
position, all help screens, the simulation graphics, the simulation and
the input fields with the circular direction specified will change auto-
matically.
The Coordinate system can take one from the shown positions.
Typical settings are:
34: Horizontal lathe with machining behind the turning centre
(sloping bed turning machine)
33: Horizontal lathe with machining in front of the turning centre (flat
bed turning machine)
0 = Vertical lathe (round-about turning machine) right hand head
6 = Vertical lathe (round-about turning machine) left hand head
Plane selection Milling and Turning

MD52005
Plane selection Milling
$MCS_DISP_PLANE_MILL
MD52006
Plane selection Turning
$MCS_DISP_PLANE_TURN
MD52005 = 0 and MD52006 = 18 Technology

Description:
MD52200
Turning operation: The machining plane is set permanently to Technology
$MCS_TECHNOLOGY
G18.
Boring and milling operations: In the standard cycles the ma-
chining plane can be set by means of the parameter PL. In Default: 0 Change to: 1
the ShopTurn cycles the setting of the MD52005 has no ef-
fect. Description:
0: No specific configuration
The machining planes are specified as shown: 1: Turning
2: Milling
Please also note MD 52201
Plane Machining $MCS_TECHNOLOGY_EXTENSION.
Boring/milling The selection of 1 specifies turning as the main technology.
X/Y
front G17 This means, the Softkeys for turning will be shown along the
Turning lower edge of the screen.
Z/X
G18
Boring/milling
Y/Z
mantle G19
The Softkey boring is also shown if there are no driven tools.

In this case, however, only concentric drilling with a fixed drill
is possible.
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
Extended technology Meaning of the axes in the channel

MD52201 MD52206[x] Meaning of the axes in the
$MCS_TECHNOLOGY_EXTE Extended technology $MCS_AXIS_USAGE channel
NSION
Default: 0 Change to: 2 Default: 0, 0, 0, 0 Change to: 0, 0, 3, 1
If driven tools are available, it is at this stage possible to also MD52206[0] axis X1 = 0
activate the milling technology in addition to turning.. MD52206[1] axis Z1 = 0
MD52206[2] spindle C1 = 0 → 3 (Main spindle)
Description: MD52206[3] spindle TOOL = 0 → 1 (Tool spindle)
1: Turning Description:
2: Milling by means of driven tools with
TRANSMIT/TRACYL 0 = no specific meaning
1 = Tool spindle (driven tool)
Example: 2 = C-axis of the Tool spindle (driven tool)
Turning machine with milling technology 3 = Main spindle (turning)
MD 52200 $MCS_TECHNOLOGY = 1 4 = C-axis of the main spindle (turning)
MD 52201 $MCS_TECHNOLOGY_EXTENSION = 2 5 = Counter spindle (turning)
6 = C-axis of the counter spindle (turning)
The Softkey "milling" will be shown as well. 7 = Linear axis of the counter spindle (turning)
8 = Tailstock (turning)
9 = Steady (turning)
10 = B-axis (Turning)
Check of the installed axes and spindles: Axis attributes
MD52207[x]
Axis attributes
$MCS_AXIS_USAGE_ATTRIB
Default: 0, 0, 0, 0 Change to:
MD52207[2] = C1
Bit 4 = 0: M3 is clockwise when looking towards the spindle
head
Bit 5 = 0
Bit 3 = 0: C+ Direction of rotation clockwise when looking

towards the spindle head.
Note: If there is a separate C-axis drive, the entry for Bit 3

must be made in the data set of that drive.
Notes

Setup Turning A120
Description: In case of C-axis operation with the main spindle

Bit 3: The indicated positive direction of rotation is anti- The assignment of the direction of spindle rotation (M3/ M4)
clockwise (for rotary axes) to the positive direction of rotation of the C-axis is obtained
from the interface signal DB3n.DBX17.6 (with n = axis index
Bit 4: The indicated direction of rotation for M3 is anti- of the respective C-axis).
clockwise (for spindles) Bit 4 determines, whether M3 and C+ rotate in the same di-
rection (= 0) or in opposition (= 1). It must be ensured under
Bit 5: The direction of rotation for M3 corresponds to rotary all circumstances that Bit 5 is identical to DB3n.DBX17.6!
axis 'minus' (for spindles).
This Bit must be set analogue to the PLC-Bit
DBnn.DBX17.6 ! Our example machine:
(nn = 31 + machine axis index)
The machine features no separate drives for the spindle and
for the C-axis. This means that the settings in machine datum
2 possible configurations: 52207 must be entered according to the axis index for the
main spindle (Index [2]).
 spindle and C-axis with a drive
 Separate C-axis drive
Specifying the direction of rotation
In order for the direction of rotation of the spindle and the C-

axis to be shown correctly in the ShopTurn user interface and
to ensure that the correct direction of rotation is carried out
when programming ShopTurn functions, some settings must
be made that correspond with one another. In this case the
settings must be chosen according to the actual direction of
rotation of the spindle/C-axis of the machine.
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
From this derive the following setting possibilities for the main spindle. The settings for the machine data, however, depend on
the direction of viewing the coordinate axis.
No matter as to which of the four combinations of MD52207[2] Bit 3 und Bit 4 shown below the machine manufacturer selects, it
is imperative that the settings shown in one line for DB3n.DBX17.6 and MD52207[2] Bit 5 are used.
52207[2] C1 52207[2] C1 DB3n. 52207[2] C1

Rotation dir. of the main spindle Bit 3 Bit 4 DBX17.6 Bit 5
0 0 0 0
0 1 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 0 1 1
The setting of the machine datum MD52207 Bit 3 requires that viewing takes place in the direction of the negative Z axis. If, how-
ever, you prefer to view in the positive Z axis direction, the values must be reversed; i.e. "0" and "1" must be exchanged.
Note
The MD52207[2] of the main spindle is relevant for
 the readout of the spindle direction in the T,F,S window
 the readout within simulation simultaneous recording
 the rotation direction of the spindle after tool change according to the direction given in the tool list
Notes

Setup Turning A120
Function mask display Bit 0: This function is present-

ly not yet available. In a
ShopTurn program it is
MD52210 always possible to se-
$MCS_FUNCTION_MASK_ Function mask display lect "mm dimensions" or
DISP "inch dimensions" in the
Default: 3H Change to: program header.
MD52210 Bit 0 = 1
MD52210 Bit 1 = 1
Description:
Bit 1=0: Display of the coordinate system when machining the
Bit 0: Meas. system for programs always in the base system front face (G17)
tem
Bit 2: Hide "T,S,M" softkey in the JOG area
Bit 3: Generate automatic end-of-program in MDI (with Soft-
key "Delete blocks")
Bit 4: Show follow-on-tool in T,F,S-window
The display of the axis directions depends on the set- The axis direction are always displayed in the ordinary
ting for the position of the coordinate system in MD coordinate system independently of the setting of the
52000 $MCS_DISP_COORDINATE_SYSTEM; in this machine datum 52000
example = 34 for a horizontal lathe with machining be- $MCS_DISP_COORDINATE_SYSTEM.
hind the turning centre.
Bit 1=1: Display of the coordinate system during face machin- Bit 2=0: The Softkey "T,S,M" is shown in the mode JOG .
ing (G17) in the ordinary Coordinate system This setting is in line with the basic setting of Shop-
Turn
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
Continuation MD52210 Bit 4=0: The follow-up tool is not shown in the T,F,S-window
Bit 2=1: The Softkey "T,S,M" is hidden in the mode JOG.
Bit 3=0: Under MDA the command End-of-program will not Bit 4=1: The follow-up tool is shown in the T,F,S-window.
be generated automatically after "Block delete". This setting makes sense only in conjunction with
tool prepare on a machine featuring a double grasp-
er. In the configuration chosen for this example the
display of the follow-up tool is not possible.
Bit 3=1: Under MDA the M-command entered in MD 10714

$M_NO_FCT_EOP will automatically be generated
as End-of-program command after "block delete". In
this example configuration it is M32.
Function mask Cross-technology Bit 0 and Bit 1 are meaningless for the machine configuration
used here. These Bits are used in the technology Turning in
conjunction with a B-axis kinematics.
MD52212
$MCS_FUNCTION_MASK_
technology
TECH

Bit 2 = 0 Bit 2 = 1 (Step drill)
MD52212 Bit 3 = 1
MD52212 Bit 5 = 0
Bit 0 and 1 are meaningful for swivel

D2
Description:
Bit 0: Enable Swivel D1
Bit 1: No optimized travel along software limit switches The current cutting edge The longest cutting edge in
Bit 2: Approach logic for step drill (ShopTurn) will be taken into account direction of the active cutting
Bit 3: Call block search cycle for ShopMill/ShopTurn when retracting. edge is taken into account
Bit 4: Approach logic trough cycle (ShopTurn) when retracting.
Notes

Setup Turning A120
Continuation MD52212 Bit 5 = 0 Bit 5 = 1

Block search cycle for The standard cycle CY-
SERUPRO will not be CLE207 will be called up
called up. after Block search with SE-
RUPRO.
The setting of Bit 3 is not

effective in this case. The
The setting = 0 is provided F_S-ASUP will not be called
for single-channel Shop- up.
Turn machines.
This setting must be used
only for multi-channel ma-
Bit 3 = 0 Bit 3 = 1 chines.
The ShopTurn cycle The ShopTurn cycle

F_S_ASUP is not carried F_S_ASUP will be carried out
out after block search. after block search. Details
Bit 6 = 0 Bit 6 = 1
regarding this setting are
contained in the section
"Block search". In the program header of a In the program header of a
ShopTurn program the param- ShopTurn program the pa-
eters "Description of zero rameters "Description of
point offsets" and "ZV" appear zero point offsets" and "ZV"
and the operator can choose will not appear.
Bit 4 = 0 Fixed value (ShopTurn only) whether the zero point offset
is to be described.
MD52214
$MCS_FUNCTION_MASK_ Function mask Milling
MILL
Valid only for milling as a sub-technology of turning!
MD52214 = Bit 4 = 0 → 1 Release of spindle clamp (C-axis)

in operation masks Boring/Milling
Description:
Bit 0: reserved
Bit 1: reserved
Bit 2: reserved
Bit 4: Spindle clamping enable (C-axis)
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
Continuation MD52214 Usage
Bit 3 = 1 Release of machining internally/at the rear 1. Machining at the rear refers to the face of the work piece
opposite the front face. The work piece must be clamped
in such a manner that machining on the rear using the
Machining at rear Machining internal required tool is possible on the rear of the work piece. The
infeed along the Z-axis (e.g. drilling depth) is in the positive
direction.
HSP HSP
2. Internal machining is possible on large internal work piece
diameters using a suitable tool. The infeed along the X-
axis (e.g. drilling depth) takes place in the positive direc-
tion.
With the release of "machining internally/at rear" an additional Boring: Clamping OFF
input parameter appears in the boring, milling and position
masks depending on the face to be machined.
Axial face: front / rear Boring: Clamping ON
Milling: Plunging with

clamping OFF
Mantle: external / internal
Bit 4 = 1: Enable spindle clamp (C-axis)
With the release of the spindle clamping an additional input

parameter will appear in the boring and milling masks
"clamping OFF / clamping ON" .
Milling: Plunging with

clamping ON
Notes

Setup Turning A120
Function mask Drilling MD52216 Bit 0 = 0 Technology fields will not be shown
MD52216
$MCS_FUNCTION_MASK_ Function mask Drilling
DRILL
Description:
Bit 0: CYCLE84 Show technology fields (without compensat-
ing chuck)
Bit 1: CYCLE840 Show technology fields
The selection "with compensating chuck (CYCLE840)"
is not available for ShopTurn.
Note: The release of the technology requires an axis

optimization!
MD52216 Bit 0 = 1 Technology fields are being shown Function mask Turning
MD52218
$MCS_FUNCTION_MASK_ Function mask Turning
TURN
MD52218 Bit 2 = 0 → 1
Description:
Bit 0: Enable zoom under manual for tool measuring (see
description for Tool measurement)
Bit 1: Enable parts gripper for cut-off
Bit 2: Enable Tailstock
Bit 3: reserved
Bit 4: Enable lead screw of main spindle through surface
Bit 5: Enable lead screw of tool spindle through surface
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
Continuation MD52218 When "Yes" a further param-

eter "XM" (Depth parts grip-
per extend) appears.
Bit 1 = 0 Bit 1 = 1
In the mask "Cut-off" the In the mask "Cut-off" the pa-
parameter "Parts gripper" rameter "Parts gripper" is
is not shown". being shown".
When the parts gripper is released, there will be jumps from

the machining cycles for the cut-off to the Manufacturer‘s
cycle CUST_TECHCYC.SPF
- ShopTurn program: Mode 100, 101 and 102
- ProgramGuide program. Mode 101 and 102
 Mode 100. Positioning the parts gripper before the cut-off

This call-up occurs only with a ShopTurn-Program, if prior
to the cut-off the tool has been positioned (the axis is still at
the retraction level).
 Mode 101. Extending the parts gripper before the cut-off Bit 3: reserved
This jump occurs if the X-axis has attained the position de-
fined under XM for the cut-off. Bit 4: Enable spindle control of main spindle via the user in-
terface
 Mode 102. Closing the parts gripper after the cut-off.
This jump occurs when the X-axis during the cut-off has Bit 5: Enable spindle control of tool spindle via the user inter-
attained the end-position as defined under X2. face
These settings are reserved and must be left with the default-
setting 0.
Extract from the Manufacturer‘s cycle CUST_TECHCYC.SPF
with the modes 100 - 102, which have been provided for the
parts gripper. At this point the machine manufacturer can
undertake the machine-specific matching.
Notes

Setup Turning A120
Continuation MD52218 Bit 2 = 1 Tailstock released
Bit 2 = 0 Tailstock not released
SD55212 Bit 0 = 0 for a turret "0"

SD55212 Bit 1 = 1
SD55212 Bit 2 = 1
Description:
Bit 0: Tool pre-selection active
Bit 1: Calculate thread depth from metric thread lead
Bit 2: Refer to the table for thread diameter and depth

Directly after the exchange has been completed, the
tool will be prepared
The generation of the follow-up tool occurs only with
JobShop cycles
Bit 1: Automatic evaluation of the thread depth for metric
threads
Bit 2: Transfer thread diameter and thread depth from table.
SD55212
$SCS_FUNCTION_MASK_
technology
TECH_SET
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
Continuation SD55212
Bit 1 = 0 The thread depth will not be evaluated automatically

The value for the thread depth "H1" must be entered manual-
ly from a table.
Bit 1 = 1 The thread depth will be evaluated from the metric

thread pitch.
Only if in the table the column "without" is selected and for P

the unit "mm/rev" will the thread depth "H1" in the yellow-
backed fields be evaluated automatically. These automatical-
ly obtained values can be overwritten by the operator. If the
thread pitch is entered again, the thread depth will be evaluat-
ed once more automatically.
Different factors are stored for the internal and external

threads:
- Internal threads: 0,5413
- External threads: 0,6134
Bit 2 = 1 Thread diameter and depth from a table
As soon as the line table "ISO metric" is selected, the table is


chosen thread.
Notes

Setup Turning A120
Continuation SD55212
Bit 2 = 1 Thread diameter and depth from a table
As soon as the line table "ISO metric" is selected, the table is


chosen thread, the value H1 being the thread depth.
Function mask Milling Bit 0 = 1 Default setting for milling down-cut
SD55214
$SCS_FUNCTION_MASK_ Function mask Milling
MILL_SET
Description:
Bit 0: Default setting for milling with synchronous operation
Bit 1: Not assigned
SC
Bit 0 is used as setting for the initial commissioning. If there-

after the program header for milling is opened, the
toggle key can be used to select between climb milling
and conventional milling. The selection made here
remains activated.
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
Continuation SD55214 Note:

The safety gap is specified in the program header.
Bit 2 = 0 Bit 2 = 1
The subdivision of cuts in The subdivision of cuts in
direction of infeed is ob- direction of infeed is ob-
tained including the safety tained without the safety
gap SC for mantle and gap SC for mantle and
face milling for the path face milling for the path Function mask Drilling
from Z0+SC to Z1. from Z0 to Z1.
SD55216
$SCS_FUNCTION_MASK_ Function mask Drilling
DRILL_SET
SD55216 Bit 3 = 1
SD55216 Bit 4 = 1
Bit 0: Reverse the direction of spindle rotation during tapping Bit 0: Reversal of the spindle direction of rotation
(CYCLE84) when tapping
This setting is no longer required as from SW
Bit 1: Consider rotation of the tool plane (CYCLE86)
2.6 SP1, since it has been superseded by the
Bit 2: Consider swivelled table kinematics (CYCLE86) NCK-function.
Bit 3: Monitoring spindle MD31050/31060 (CYCLE84)
Bit 1 = 1: Taking into account the rotation of the tool plane
Bit 4: Monitoring spindle MD31050/31060 (CYCLE840) (CYCLE 86)
In the cycle CYCLE86 Boring the spindle is po-
Bit 5: Calculation of the brake point at G33 (CYCLE840)
sitioned on the parameter SPOS when reaching
the boring depth. If SPOS=0 the tool cutting
The denominator of the gearbox is contained in MD31050[x]
edge points in the positive direction of the 1st
while MD31060[x] contains the numerator. Together the two
axis of the plane (G17 towards X+).
provide the gear ratio for the spindle. This is required for
monitoring the feed obtained from the speed x the pitch.
If the setting is varied by using Bit 1 = 1, a rota-
tion about the tool axis (e.g. ROT Z180) will be
taken into account for the spindle positioning.
Bit 2 = 1: Taking into account indexed table kinematics

(CYCLE 86)
See description Bit 1
With the selection of Bit 2 = 1 an indexed kine-
matics will be taken into account when position-
ing the spindle.
Notes

Setup Turning A120
Continuation SD55216 Function mask Turning
Description: SD55218
$SCS_FUNCTION_MASK_ Function mask Turning
Bit 3 = 1: Tapping CYCLE84: Monitoring the machine data TURN_SET
31050 $MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM (divider
of gearbox ratio) and 31060 Default: 1H Change to:
$MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO_NUMERA (numerator of
gearbox ratio) of the spindle for the boring axis.
SD55218 Bit 0 = 1
The monitoring is activated only if MD35590
$MA_PARAMSET_CHANGE_ENABLE = 2 Description:
This setting permits a parameter block change by
the PLC-interface or by the command SCPARA Bit 0: New thread table for thread cutting
(servo parameter block programming). Bit 1: Reserved (CYCLE93)
If the monitoring is activated the alarm 61127
[Channel %1: ] Block %2 (gear ratio of the tapping Bit 2: Reserved (CYCLE93)
axis incorrectly defined) will be set:
Bit 0: For the types of thread ISO metric, Whitworth BSW,
Whitworth BSP and UNC a table is included, which will
Bit 4 = 1: Similar to Bit 3, however, for the cycle CYCLE840
be used when this Bit is activated.
Bit 5: Calculation of the commencing of braking for G33
CYCLE840)
This function is not available at present.
Cycle settings Return distance stock removal for external machin-

ing
Roughing feedrate for complete machining in %
SD55505
Return distance stock removal
$SCS_TURN_ROUGH_O_
SD55500 for external machining
Roughing feedrate for com- RELEASE_DIST
$SCS_TURN_FIN_FEED_
plete machining in % Default: 1mm Change to:
PERCENT
Default: 100% Change to: Description:

This setting datum states the
Description:
distance parallel to the axis by
When complete machining has been selected (roughing and which the tool will be retracted
finishing) the percentage specified in this datum will be used during machining. If the safety
for the finishing feedrate F . distance specified in the pro-
gram is less than this setting
The selection complete machining (roughing in finishing) is datum, then the safety dis-
only available in technology turning: tance will be applicable.
 Grooving cycles “Groove 1”, “Groove 2” and “Groove 3”
-1: Retraction will always take
 Undercut cycles “Thread DIN” and “Thread” place by the safety distance
 Thread cycles “longitudinal”, “taper”, “face” and “chain” SC specified in the program
header.
This setting datum is effective

only for the roughing cycles
1-3 and not during contouring.
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
Return distance stock removal for internal machin- Description:

ing This setting datum states
the distance parallel to the
axis by which the tool will
SD55506 be retracted during ma-
Return distance stock removal
$SCS_TURN_ROUGH_I_ chining. If the safety dis-
for internal machining
RELEASE_DIST tance specified in the pro-
gram is less than this set-
Default: 0,5mm Change to: ting datum, then the safety
distance will be applicable.
-1: Retraction will always

take place by the safety
distance SC specified in
the program header.
This setting datum is effec-

tive only for the roughing
cycles 1-3 and not during
contouring.
Tool clearance time for grooving at the base (neg. Contour turning: Retraction angle
value=rotations)
SD55580
Contour turning: retraction
$SCS_TURN_CONT_
SD55510 Tool clearance time for groov- angle
RELEASE_ANGLE
$SCS_TURN_GROOVE_ ing at the base (neg. val-
DWELL_TIME ue=rotations) Default: 45Grad Change to:
Default: -1s Change to:
Description:
Description: This setting datum specifies
If in the course of a cycle, e.g. plunging and extended rough- the angle at which the tool is
ing (CYCLE952) a dwell period is included, then the value of lifted off the surface when
this setting datum will be used. roughing during contouring.
 negative Value: Dwell in spindle revolutions
 positive Value: Dwell in seconds
Notes

Setup Turning A120
Contour turning: retraction value Contour turning: minimum angle for rounding
along contour
SD55581
Contour turning: retraction
$SCS_TURN_CONT_ SD55582 Contour turning: minimum
value $SCS_TURN_CONT_TRACE_ angle for rounding along con-
RELEASE_DIST
ANGLE tour
Default: 1mm Change to:
Default: 5Grad Change to:
Description:
Description:
This setting datum specifies
the distance, by which the tool This setting datum specifies
is lifted off the surface in both the angle between cutting
directions when contouring. edge and the contour as from
which the cutting depth is var-
ied such as to remove any
remaining material.
Contour turning: percentage for variable cutting Contour turning: Blank allowance
depth
SD55584
Contour turning: blank allow-
SD55583 $SCS_TURN_CONT_BLANK_
Contour turning: percentage ance
$SCS_TURN_CONT_ OFFSET
for variable cutting depth
VARIABLE_DEPTH
Default: 1mm Change to:
Default: 20% Change to:
Description:
Description: This setting datum states the distance (machining allowance)
of the raw material as from which switching from G0 to G1
Percentage for variable cut-
takes place during contouring, in order to compensate for
ting depth when contouring.
possible blank allowances.
The variable cutting depth can
be selected for roughing and
residual material removal.
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
Contour turning: Feed interrupt time (neg. values = Contour turning:

revolutions) Retraction after feed interrupt
SD55585 Contour turning: feed interrupt SD55586

Contour turning: Retraction
$SCS_TURN_CONT_ time (neg. values = revolu- $SCS_TURN_CONT_
INTERRUPT_TIME tions) path after feed interrupt
INTER_RETRACTION
Default: -1s Change to: Default: 1mm Change to:
Feed interruption times during Retraction path feed interrupt during contour turning, contour
contouring, contour grooving grooving and plunge turning:
and plunging
R>0: retraction path after feed interrupt (the setting datum
 Negative Value: feed inter- 55585 $SCS_TURN_CONT_INTERRUPT_TIME is now inef-
ruption in revolutions fective!)
 Positive Value: feed inter- =0: no retraction path
ruption in seconds
This setting datum is effective
only if the setting datum
55586
$SCS_TURN_CONT_INTER_
RETRACTION equals 0.
Contour turning: minimum difference dimension Contour turning: minimum difference dimension
residual machining axis 1 residual machining axis 2
SD55588 Contour turning: minimum

SD55587 Contour turning: minimum
$SCS_TURN_CONT_MIN_ difference dimension residual
$SCS_TURN_CONT_MIN_ difference dimension residual
REST_MAT_AX2 machining axis 2
REST_MAT_AX1 machining axis 1
This MD defines the limit value for stock removal of residual This MD specifies the limiting value for the removal of residu-
material in the direction of the 1st axis. al material in the direction of the 2nd axis.
Example: Example:
If the MD is set to 50% and the finishing allowance is 0,5 mm, If this MD is set to 50% and the finishing allowance is 0.5mm,
the residual material, which is thinner than 0.25mm, will not any residual material thinner than 0.25mm will not be re-
be machined in a separate pass, instead it will be removed moved by means of an extra pass, instead it will be removed
with the finishing pass. together with the finishing pass.
Note: Note:
If residue machining is programmed and the residual material If residue machining is programmed and the residual material
is less than defined in the setting data 55587 and 55588, in is less than specified in the setting data 55587 and 55588, in
other words there is no residual material, the alarm 61732 "no other words there is no residual material during roughing, the
residual material" will appear.. alarm 61732 "no material to be machined" will appear.
Notes

Setup Turning A120
Contour plunge turning: Retraction path due to tool

bending
SD55595
Contour plunge turning: retrac-
$SCS_TURN_CONT_TOOL_
tion path due to tool bending
BEND_RETR
Default: 0,1mm Change to:
Description:
Due to the bending of the tool when grooving it is not possible
to traverse right up to the contour during roughing. This SD
specifies the lateral distance to the previous cut, by which the
successive cut will be shortened each time.
The sketch right illustrates the settings for the setting data
55595 and 55596.
a: Bending of the tool = Distance to the previous cut =

SD55595
b: Tool length difference due to the bending of the tool = Re-

traction between grooving (plunging to the next depth) and
roughing (turning operation) = SD55596
Contour plunge turning: Retraction depth prior to Upper limit feedrate/min

turning
SD55201
SD55596 $SCS_MAX_INP_FEED_PER_ Upper limit feedrate/min
Contour plunge turning: retrac- TIME
$SCS_TURN_CONT_TURN_
tion depth prior to turning
RETRACTION
Default: 10000 mm/min Change to:
Default: 0,1mm Change to:
Description:
Description: Feedrate input upper limit for mm/min
Retraction between grooving and turning in order to compen-
sate for the difference in tool length caused by deflection of
the tool (see sketch under SD55595).
Upper limit feedrate/tooth
Upper limit feedrate/rev SD55202

$SCS_MAX_INP_FEED_PER_ Upper limit feedrate/tooth
SD55200 TOOTH
$SCS_MAX_INP_FEED_PER_ Upper limit feedrate/rev
REV Default: 1 mm Change to:
Default: 1 mm/U Change to:

Description:
Description: Feedrate input upper limit for mm/tooth
Feedrate input upper limit for mm/rev
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
Setting up the tool list In the JobShop tool list there are input fields for coolant 1 and
coolant 2 for each tool. The select key can be used to toggle
the function "Coolant ON/OFF". The respective M-functions
These settings are applicable only to JobShop programs
are put out if the tool is changed by means of the part-
program, The M-commands will not be put out if the tool is
Enable fast M functions exchanged by means of the T,S,M mask.
MD52229
$MCS_ENABLE_QUICK_M_ Enable fast M functions
CODES
Description:
Bit 0: Enable fast M functions: coolant OFF
Bit 1: Enable fast M functions: coolant 1 ON
Bit 2: Enable fast M functions: coolant 2 ON
Bit 3: Enable fast M functions: coolants 1 and 2 ON
This MD is used to declare the commands used for the cool-

ant control (see MD52230 - MD52233) as being fast M-
commands (M=QU…). In case of fast commands the program
progress continues without waiting for the acknowledgement
of the M-command by the PLC.
M code for all coolants OFF M code for coolant 2 ON
MD52230 MD52232
$MCS_M_CODE_ALL_ M code for all coolants OFF $MCS_M_CODE_COOLANT_2 M code for coolant 2 ON
COOLANTS_OFF _ON
Default: 9 Change to: Default: 7 Change to:
M-Code for all coolants OFF M-Code for coolant 2 ON
M code for coolant 1 ON
MD52231
$MCS_M_CODE_COOLANT_1 M code for coolant 1 ON
_ON
Description:
M-Code for coolant 1 ON
Notes

Setup Turning A120
M code for both coolants ON Function mask Tool management
MD52233 MD52270 Function mask Tool manage-

$MCS_M_CODE_COOLANT_ M code for both coolants ON $MCS_TM_FUNKTION_MASK ment
1_AND_2_ON
Default: -1 Change to:
Description:
Description: Bit 0: Create tool on a magazine location not permitted. Tools
M-Code for Coolant 1 + 2 ON can only be created outside the magazine.
Already defined: M8 = Coolant 1 ON Bit 1: Loading/unloading is not possible while the machine is
M7 = Coolant 2 ON not in Reset.
Tools can only be loaded or unloaded if the respective
If in the JobShop tool list both coolants have been selected, channel is at rest.
the following M-command will be put out. Bit 2: Loading/unloading locked during emergency OFF
-1: M-command for coolant 1 OFF is MD52231 and M- Tools can only be loaded or unloaded if the Emergency
command for coolant 2 OFF is MD52232 OFF is not activated.
Bit 3: Loading/unloading tools to/from spindle disabled.

>0: the M-command selected in this MD.
Tools cannot be loaded to or unloaded from the
A separate M-command for both coolants is to be used if
spindle.
the M-commands for coolant 1 and coolant 2 are grouped
in an M-commands group, however both coolants are to Bit 4: Loading takes place in the spindle directly.
be activated after a block search. The tools are only loaded exclusively in the spindle.
Bit 5: reserved Note:

Bit 6: reserved
This MD must be matched to the circumstances of the ma-
chine. By hiding those functions on the user interface that are
Bit 7: Create tool using the tool number. Specify the tool's
not applicable to the machine, the PLC can be spared unnec-
T-number when creating the tool.
essary actions to prevent operation errors..
Bit 8: Hide 'Re-locate tool'
Bit 7: Create tool using the T-number
The function 'Re-locate tool' is suppressed on the user
This function is intended for machines with tool man-
interface.
agement but without magazine configuration. The de-
Bit 9: Hide 'Magazine positioning' fault setting must not be changed.
The function 'magazine positioning' is suppressed on
the user interface.
Bit 10: Reactivate tool using Position magazine. Prior to re-

activating the tool is positioned at the loading position.
Bit 11: Reactivate tool in all monitoring modes. When re-

activating a tool, all monitoring modes enabled in the
NC are reactivated for this tool, even the monitoring
modes, which have not been set for the relevant tool,
but are available in the background only.
Bit 12: Hide 'Tool re-activation'

The function "Tool re-activating" is suppressed on the
user interface.
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
Load station Tool management In the turning machine configuration described here there is
only one loading station is configured. The query on the right
regarding the selection of the loading station does not ap-
MD52274 pear.
Load station Tool manage-
$MCS_TM_TOOL_LOAD_
ment
STATION
Function mask tool management
MD52274 = 0 → max. 16 SD54215

Function mask Tool manage-
$SNS_TM_FUNCTION_MASK
ment
Description: _SET
If more than 1 loading station is configured, a pop-up window Default: 0H Change to: 1H
appears when a tool is created with a query in which station
the tool is to be loaded.
Bit 0 = 0 → 1 Diameter display for rotating tools
= 0: If a query window is on the user interface or if only one
loading station is available there will be no pop-up win- Description:
dow Bit 0: Diameter display for rotating tools
It is not the radius value, but the diameter value that is
= 1: fixed loading station 1, the window does not appear shown for rotating tools.
= 2: fixed loading station 2, the window does not appear Bit 1: Default direction of rotation for all turning tools is M4
When turning tools are created, the direction of rotation
If only one loading station is configured: The setting = 0 is preset to M4.
Bit 2: Create tool without name proposal

When creating a new tool the input field for the tool
name remains empty.
Bit 3: Input disable for tool name and tool type of loaded
tools.
Tool name and tool type cannot be changed for loaded
Description:
tools.
Bit 8: Diameter display for transverse axis - Geometry
Bit 4: Input disable for loaded tools, if the channel is not in
The geometry value of the transverse axis is shown as
Reset.
a diameter value.
While the program is in progress the data for loaded
tools cannot be changed.
Bit 9: Diameter display for transverse axis - Wear
The wear value of the transverse axis is shown as
Bit 5: Calculate tool wear inputs additively
diameter value.
The input of wear data will be added to any existing
wear values.
Bit 10: Enable loading/ relocating of tools on buffer location
The magazine number can be entered in the loading
Bit 6: Numerical input of the tool ident
dialog. This permits access to the buffer station using
No name will be assigned to a new tool being created.
the magazine number 9998.
Only numerical characters are permitted .
Bit 11: Creation of new tools in gripper location is disabled.
Bit 7: Fade out tool monitoring parameter
The tool monitoring parameter will not be shown on the
user interface.
Notes

Setup Turning A120
Continued SD54215 Bit 0 = 1 Diameter readout for rotating tools
Bit 0 = 0 permanent radius readout for all tools
Description:
As soon as the cursor is moved to a line with a rotating tool,
the term 'Radius' in the header line will be replaced by a di-
ameter symbol.
Bit 1 = 1 M4 Tool 14 has been newly created Checking the tool management
Bit 1 = 0 M3 Tool 15 has been newly created
Marked tools can be off-loaded. As soon as the cursor beam

is moved to a free magazine location or below the magazine
the Softkey "New tool" appears for the creation of a new tool.
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
By horizontal scrolling the fields for the direction of rotation of

the tools and the selection of Coolant 1 ON/OFF and
Coolant 2 ON/OFF, appear.
The function Multitool, as selected with MD18080 Bit 10 is

also included in the selection list for the various types of tools
with cutting directions.
Basic settings Bit 0 = 1

Bit 6 = 0 → 1
Bit 14 = 0 → 1
Reset-resistant settings Bit 16 = 0
Definition of basic control settings after reset/PP Description:

end Determination of the basic control settings after booting and
Reset/End-of-part-program with respect to the G-codes
(especially the current plane and selectable zero-point offset),
MD20110 Definition of basic control set- tool length and transformation by the setting of the following
$MC_RESET_MODE_MASK tings after reset/PP end bits:
Default: 1H Change to: 4041H Bit 0: Reset mode

Bit 1: Suppression aux. function during tool selection
Bit 2: RESET behaviour Power On
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 Bit 3: End of testing mode
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 4: Reserved
Bit 5: Reserved
0 0 0 0
Bit 6: Active tool length compensation
Bit 7: Active kinematics transformation
Bit 8: Coupled-motion axes
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Bit 9: Tangential correction
Bit 10: synchronous spindle
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 Bit-masks
Bit 11: Rotary feedrate
4 0 4 1 Hex Bit 12: Geo axis change
Bit 13: Master vale coupling
Bit 14: Base frame
Bit 15: Electronic gearbox
Notes

Setup Turning A120
Continued MD20110 - G-Codes as per $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES

Description: - Transformation not active
- No coupled-motion groupings active
Bit 16: Master spindle
- No tangential offsets active
Bit 17: Master tool holder
- No master value couplings active
Bit 18: Response of the reference axis for G96/G961/G962
- No axial rotational feedrate active
Bit 19: Reserved (changeable SW limit switch ineffective)
- Path rotational feedrate with master spindle
(Default)
The Bits 4 to 11, 16 and 17 are only evaluated if Bit 0 = 1.
Bit 0 (LSB) = 1:
Meaning of the individual Bits:
Initial setting after booting:
- G-Codes as per $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES
Bit 0 (LSB) = 0:
- Tool length offset active as per
Initial setting after booting:
$MC_TOOL_RESET_VALUE,
- G-Codes as per $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES
$MC_CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE and
$MC_SUMCORR_RESET_VALUE
- Transformation not active
- Transformation active per $MC_TRAFO_RESET_VALUE
- no coupled axes groupings active
- Geo axis replacement as per
- no tangential correction active
$MC_GEOAX_CHANGE_RESET
- no axial rotational feed active
- No coupled-motion groupings active
- path rotational feed with master spindle
- No tangential correction active
(Default)
Initial setting after reset or after end-of-part-program:
Initial setting after Reset or after end-of-part-program :
Depending on the setting of $MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE
The current settings will be retained.
the current settings for the G-groups will be retained or set to
With the next part-program Start the following initial settings
the initial values stored in $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES.
will become active:
Description: Bit 1 = 0:
Auxiliary function output (D,T,M,) to the PLC when selecting
Initial setting after Reset or after end-of-part program:
tools according to the MDs $MC_TOOL_RESET_VALUE,
Depending on $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK Bit 6 to 7 the
current settings for
$MC_TOOL_PRESEL_RESET_VALUE and
- Tool length offset
$MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE.
- Transformation
will either be retained or changed to the initial settings as
magazine management is activated.
stored in the MDs.
The function utilizes its own communication in order to put out
T, M also - among others - to the PLC.
Depending on Bit 8 and 9 the current settings of coupled mo-
tion axes or tangentially corrected axes will either be retained
Bit 1 = 1:
or switched OFF.
Suppress auxiliary function output to the PLC when selecting
tools.
Projected synchronous spindle coupling:
The coupling will be de-selected depending on the setting of
tool and magazine management is activated.
$MC_COUPLE_RESET_MODE_1.
Bit 2 = 0 :
Non-projected synchronous spindle coupling:
If tool and magazine management is not active:
Depending on Bit 10 the coupling will either be switched OFF
- No tool correction after power On is active. Active and pro-
or retained.
grammed T depend on the additional settings of the machine
Depending on Bit 14 the initial frame will be retained or de-
datum (Bits 0, 6).
selected.
If the tool or the magazine management are not active:
- meaningless.
Note:
The setting of Bit 0 = 1 must be set for JobShop-uses,
such that the settings of the Bits 4 to 11, 16 and 17 can
be evaluated.
Notes

A120 Setup Turning

Meaningful only if the tool management is active:
Description: - End of the test mode: "Retain the current setting for the ac-
tive tool length offset" (Bits 0 and 6 are set) refers to the pro-
Bit 2 = 1 :
gram that was active before switching ON the test mode.
If the tool and/or magazine management is not activated:
(Generally speaking the tool in the spindle is the active tool if
- If both Bits 0 and 6 both have the value = 1 (0x41), then the
the tool management is activated. Exception only for
tool offsets of the last tool to be active in NCK after the first
$MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT = -2.)
reset after Power ON will be active.
(The value of the programmed tool depends on the value of
Bit 4 = 0: Reserved
the machine datum $MC_TOOL_PRESEL_RESET_VALUE.)
Bit 4 = 1: Reserved
Caution:
Bit 5 = 0: Reserved
NCK is not aware of the conditions at the machine. Bit 5 = 1: Reserved
Meaningless, if the tool and or the magazine management is Bit 6 = 0:

active. Initial setting for the active tool length offset after Reset/End-
of-part program as per $MC_TOOL_RESET_VALUE,
Bit 3 = 0: $MC_USEKT_RESET_VALUE and
With or without tool management: $MC_SUMCORR_RESET_VALUE.
- End of the test mode: "Retain the current setting for the ac- Ist $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE = 1, the tool specified by
tive tool length offset" (Bits 0 and 6 are set) refers to the pro- by $MC_TOOL_PRESEL_RESET_VALUE is additionally pre-
gram that was active before switching ON the test mode. selected.
If the tool and/or magazine management is active, it is not the
datum $MC_TOOL_RESET_VALUE that is used, instead
$MC_TOOL_RESET_NAME will be used.
Description: Note:
The setting Bit 6=1 is necessary to ensure that after a
Bit 6 = 1:
reset/End-of-part-program the previously programmed
The current setting for the active tool length offset remains in
tool and the previously programmed cutting edge re-
force after reset/End-of-part-program.
mains activated (for instance, if the tool was changed via
If the tool and/or magazine management is active, that tool
the T,S,M-mask) and if for example the JobShop-
will be selected which is presently loaded in the master spin-
functions in the mode of operation JOG "Zero point work
dle (generally = master tool holder).
piece" or "Tool measurement" can be carried out with
If the tool in the master spindle happens to be blocked, the
this tool.
"blocked"-status will be ignored. .
Bit 7 = 0:
However, it must be remembered that after the end of pro-
Initial setting for active transformation after Reset/End-of-part-
gram or a program interruption either the last programmed
program as per $MC_TRAFO_RESET_VALUE.
value for the master spindle or master tool holder, or the val-
ue specified by $MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND or
Bit 7 = 1:
$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER will determine
The current setting for the active transformation remains op-
the master spindle or the master tool holder.
erative after Reset/End-of-part-program.
(The selection is made by Bit 16 or Bit 17.)
Bit 8 = 0:
A special case is $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT = -2:
Coupled-motion groupings will be de-activated after Reset/
If a tool has been changed on the spindle, but no new correc-
tion D has been programmed, then the previous tool is still
active in the NCK.
Bit 8 = 1:
If an interruption takes place in this state, - e.g. by pressing
Coupled-motion groupings remain active after Reset/End-of-
the reset key, the correction will be specified by the lowest D-
part-program.
number of the tool in the master spindle.
Notes

Setup Turning A120

The current setting for the rotational feedrate remains activat-
Description: ed after a Reset/End-of-part-program. When a part program
is started, the setting datum
Bit 9 = 0:
$SA_ASSIGN_FEED_PER_REV_SOURCE will be reset to 0
Tangential correction will be switched OFF with Reset/End-of-
for all non-active axes/spindles, i.e. feed no longer takes
part-program.
place with rotational feedrate and the setting for path and
synchronous axes will be reset to the master spindle
Bit 9 = 1:
(Default).
Tangential correction remains activated after Reset/End-of-
part program.
Bit 12 = 0:
If the machine datum $MC_GEOAX_CHANGE_RESET is
Bit 10 = 0:
set, a changed geometry axis attribution will be cancelled with
Non-projected synchronous spindle coupling will be switched
reset or with end-of-part program. The initial setting specified
OFF after Reset/End-of-part-program.
in the machine data for the geometry axis attribution is acti-
vated.
Bit 10 = 1:
on-projected synchronous spindle coupling remains activated
Bit 12 = 1:
after Reset/End-of-part-program.
A changed geometry axis attribution remains activated after a
Bit 13 = 0:
Master value couplings are cancelled with Reset/End-of-part-
program.
Bit 13 = 1:
Master value couplings remain active after Reset/End-of-part-
program.
Continued MD20110
Description:
Bit 14 = 0:
The basic frame is cancelled
Bit 14 = 1:
The current setting for the basic frame is retained.
Note:
The setting Bit 14 = 1 is necessary to retain the channel- Bit 15 = 0:
specific basic offset, which was activated with G500, af- Active electronic gearboxes remain activated after Reset/End
ter a Reset/End-of-part-program. -of-part-program.
After activation of the basic offset (JOG-T,S,M-mask -
zero point offset - basic reference) the values in the zero Bit 15 = 1:
point offset base are transferred to the overall base Total Active electronic gearboxes are cancelled with Reset/End-of-
WO and then from there to be transferred for activation part-program.
also to the overall Total WO.
Bit 16 = 0:
Initial setting for the master spindle as per
$MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND.
Bit 16 = 1:
The current setting of the master spindle (SETMS) is re-
tained. This Bit in case of
$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER = 0 has also
an effect on the response of Bit 6.
Notes

A120 Setup Turning

Reference axis for G96/G961/G962 as per MD 20100:
Note on Bit 16: $MC_DIAMETER_AX_DEF.
The setting of Bit 16 = 0 is important for ShopTurn- If SCC is used for an own spindle reset Bit 18 = 1 is recom-
machines. The following spindles are used on the ma- mended (see also MD 20112: $MC_START_MODE_MASK,
chine as configured here: Bit 18).
- Main spindle
- Tool spindle Bit 18 = 1:
and in a further module The reference axis for G96/G961/G962 is retained.
- Counter spindle
The command SETMS(..) is used within cycles for ad- Bit 19: Reserved!
dressing the spindles (M and S-command).
Description: The previously described settings in MD20110

correspond to the further MD-settings in:
Bit 17 = 0:
Initial setting for the master tool holder as per MD20120 $MC_TOOL_RESET_VALUE
$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER. MD20130 $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE
MD20150 $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES
Bit 17 = 1: MD20152 $MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE
The current setting for the master tool holder (SETMTH) is MD20140 $MC_TRAFO_RESET_VALUE
retained. (Bit17 is of importance only if the tool or magazine MD20112 $MC_START_MODE_MASK
management is active and if MD20121 $MC_TOOL_PRESEL_RESET_VALUE
$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER > 0. Otherwise MD20118 $MC_GEOAX_CHANGE_RESET
Bit 16 applies to the setting for the master spindle if the tool
or magazine management is active. This Bit also has an ef-
fect on Bit 6.
Tool edge with length compensation during run-up Corresponds to:

(reset/end of pp) MD20110 $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK
MD20112 $MC_START_MODE_MASK
MD20130 Tool edge with length com- Note:

$MC_CUTTING_EDGE_ pens. during runup (reset/end
RESET_VALUE of pp) This setting is necessary to ensure that after a reset/End-
of-part-program the previously programmed tool and the
Default: 0 Change to: 1 previously programmed cutting edge remains activated
(for instance, if the tool was changed via the T,S,M-mask)
and if for example the JobShop-functions in the mode of
MD20130 = 0 → 1 operation JOG "Zero point work piece" or "Tool measure-
ment" can be carried out with this tool.
Description:
Specification of the cutting edge, which depending on
MD20110 $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK and after part pro-
gram Start depending on MD20112
$MC_START_MODE_MASK is used to select the tool length
offset after booting and after Reset /End-of-part-program.
With active tool management and with Bit 0 and Bit 6 set in
MD20110 $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK at selection, the last
offset of the tool active at power OFF (as a rule the tool in the
spindle) is effective after booting.
Notes

Setup Turning A120
Initial setting of G groups Description:
MD20150 Denomination Group Standard value

$MC_GCODE_RESET_ Initial setting of G groups for 840D sl
VALUES
Default: Change to: GCODE_RESET_VALUES[1] 2 0 (inactive)
MD20150[5] = 1 → 2 (G18) GCODE_RESET_VALUES[3] 4 1 (STARTFIFO)
MD20150[15] = 1 → 3 (CFIN) GCODE_RESET_VALUES[4] 5 0 (inactive)
MD20150[21] = 1 → 2 (CUT2DF) GCODE_RESET_VALUES[5] 6 1 (G17)
MD20150[28] = 1 → 2 (DAIMON) GCODE_RESET_VALUES[6] 7 1 (G40)
MD20150[48] = 1 → 3 (PTPG0) GCODE_RESET_VALUES[7] 8 1 (G500)
Specification of the G-Codes, which after booting and Reset/ GCODE_RESET_VALUES[12] 13 2 (G71)
End-of-part program are activated depending on GCODE_RESET_VALUES[13] 14 1 (G90)
MD20110 $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK and GCODE_RESET_VALUES[14] 15 2 (G94)
MD20152 $MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE GCODE_RESET_VALUES[15] 16 1 (CFC)
as well as after part program Start depending on GCODE_RESET_VALUES[16] 17 1 (NORM)
MD20112 $MC_START_MODE_MASK. GCODE_RESET_VALUES[17] 18 1 (G450)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[18] 19 1 (BNAT)
As a default value the index of the G-codes in the respective GCODE_RESET_VALUES[19] 20 1 (ENAT)
groups must be stated. GCODE_RESET_VALUES[20] 21 1 (BRISK)
Description: Group Standard value Description: Group Standard value

for 840D sl for 840D sl
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[21] 22 1 (CUT2D) GCODE_RESET_VALUES[46] 47 1 (G290 SINUME

GCODE_RESET_VALUES[22] 23 1 (CDOF) RIK-mode)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[23] 24 1 (FFWOF) GCODE_RESET_VALUES[47] 48 3 (G462)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[24] 25 1 (ORIWKS) GCODE_RESET_VALUES[48] 49 1 (CP)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[25] 26 2 (RMI) GCODE_RESET_VALUES[49] 50 1 (ORIEULER)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[26] 27 1 (ORIC) GCODE_RESET_VALUES[50] 51 1 (ORIVECT)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[27] 28 1 (WALIMON) GCODE_RESET_VALUES[51] 52 1 (PAROTOF)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[28] 29 1 (DIAMOF) GCODE_RESET_VALUES[52] 53 1 (TOROTOF)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[29] 30 1 (COMPOF) GCODE_RESET_VALUES[53] 54 1 (ORIROTA)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[30] 31 1 (G810) GCODE_RESET_VALUES[54] 55 1 (RTLION)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[31] 32 1 (G820) GCODE_RESET_VALUES[55] 56 1 (TOWSTD)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[32] 33 1 (FTOCOF) GCODE_RESET_VALUES[56] 57 1 (FENDNORM)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[33] 34 1 (OSOF) GCODE_RESET_VALUES[57] 58 1 (RELIEVEON)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[34] 35 1 (SPOF) GCODE_RESET_VALUES[58] 59 1 (DYNNORM)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[35] 36 1 (PDELAYON) GCODE_RESET_VALUES[59] 60 1 (WALCS0)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[36] 37 1 (FNORM) GCODE_RESET_VALUES[60] 61 1 (ORISOF)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[37] 38 1 (SPIF1) …
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[38] 39 1 (CPRECOF) ...
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[39] 40 1 (CUTCONOF) GCODE_RESET_VALUES[69] 70 1 (not specified)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[40] 41 1 (LFOF)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[41] 42 1 (TCOABS)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[44] 45 1 (SPATH)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[45] 46 1 (LFTXT)
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
Continued MD20150 MD20150[28] = 2 (exact)

Group 29: Radius/diameter programming
Value: 2 = DIAMON
Note: Modal diameter programming ON
(exact) means that this setting is necessary in conjunction The effect is independent of the programmed
with JobShop; (variable) means that this should be seen as a measuring mode (G90/G91).
suggestion and that another setting is permissible. The diameter programming is shown on the
user interface by means of a diameter symbol in
front of the X-axis readout.
MD20150[5] = 2 (exact)
Group 6: Plane selection MD20150[48] = 3 (variable)
Value: 2 = G18 Group 49: Point-to-point-motion
The is the basic setting for turning. Value: 3 = PTPG0
Point-to-point-motion only with G0, otherwise
MD20150[15] = 3 (variable) continuous path motion
Group 16: Feedrate correction on internal and external
curves
Value: 3 = CFIN
This setting provokes a constant feedrate on
internal curves and acceleration on external
curves.
MD20150[21] = 2 (variable)
Value: 2 = CUT2DF
2½-D-tool correction caused by Frame
The tool correction acts relative to the current
Frame (oblique plane)
Description:
The sketch below illustrates the setting PTPG0.
In the course of a facing operation travelling from one Point 1
to another Point 2 is intended.
When travelling at feedrate (G1) an interpolation between the
X-axis and the C-axis takes place. This results in the behav-
iour of the X-axis as shown in the lower sketch in that the axis
firstly travels from the starting point X1 in the minus-direction
(the distance towards the centre point reduces) to the point
XP and then from there in the plus-direction to the destination
Point X2. In conjunction with the interpolation with the C-axis
in effect a straight line is being traversed from Point 1 to Point
2. This behaviour corresponds to the programming of CP
(continuous path).
When travelling at rapid traverse rate (G0) the motion of the X

-axis first in the negative and then in the positive direction is
not very sensible. By the setting of PTPG0 the axis will move
directly from the starting point X1 to the destination point X2.
When projected onto the front face of the work piece this rep-
resents a spiral-like motion.
Notes

Setup Turning A120
Reset response of G groups A list of the G-functional groups can be found with MD20150
MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES.
MD20152 Note:
Reset response of G groups
$MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE (exact) means that this setting is necessary in conjunction
with JobShop; (variable) means that this should be seen as a
Default: Change to: suggestion and that another setting is permissible.
MD20152[5] = 0 (exact) MD20152[5] = 0 (exact)

MD20152[7] = 1 (exact) Group 6: Plane selection
MD20152[12] = 0 (exact) Value: 1
MD20152[14] = 1 (exact) A plane switch (e.g. G17 for facing) programmed
MD20152[15] = 0 (exact) in the part-program remains active after Reset/
MD20152[21] = 0 (variable) End-of-part-program.
Description:
This machine datum is evaluated only if in MD20110
$MC_RESET_MODE_MASK the Bit 0 is set. For each entry
in MD20150 $MN_GCODE_RESET_VALUES (that is for
each G group) this MD is used to specify whether
= 0: in case of a Reset/End-of-part-program the setting as

per $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES is used again
or
= 1: the current setting is retained after Reset/End-of-part-
program
Description:
MD20152[14] = 1 (exact)
MD20152[7] = 1 (exact) Group 15: Type of feed
Group 8: Selectable zero point offset Value: 1
Value: 1 The last type of feed G93 to G97 to be pro-
A zero point offset (e.g. G54) programmed in the grammed remains active after Reset/End-of-part
part program remains active after Reset/End-of- -program.
part-program. This permits for example the acti- In the user interface it is possible in the mode-of-
vation of a zero point offset in the mode-of- operation JOG - Position to position the axes
operation JOG_T,S,M-mask Parameter zero with rapid traverse or at feedrate in mm/min or
point offset. mm/rev. The type of feed programmed in this
mask remains active.
MD20152[12] = 0 (exact)
Group 13: Work piece dimensioning inch/metric MD20152[15] = 0 (exact)
Value: 0 Group 16: Feed correction on internal or external curves
In the user interface it is possible in the mode-of- Value: 0
operation JOG Basic strip ">" Settings per Soft- After Reset/End-of-part-program the feed correc-
key "Switching Inch" to toggle the measuring tion defined in MD20150[15] is activated once
system from metric to inch and vice versa. more.
in this configuration example.
MD20152[21] = 0 (variable)
Value: 0
After Reset/End-of-part-program the tool correc-
tion defined in MD20150[15] is activated once
more. CUT2DF in this configuration example.
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
Definition of tool parameters Bit 3:

Zero point offsets of Frames in the transverse axis will be
MD20360 evaluated as diameter values.
$MC_TOOL_PARAMETER_ Definition of tool parameters
Bit 4:
DEF_MASK
PRESET value is evaluated as diameter value.
Default: 0H Change to: 1H Bit 5:
Evaluate external zero point offsets in the transverse axis as
MD20360 Bit 0 = 0 → 1 diameter values.
Bit 6:
Description:
Read actual values of the transverse axis as diameter value
Definition of the effect of tool parameters. (AA_IW, AA_IEN, AA_COMM, AA_IB, Caution: but not
Bit Nr. Meaning when the Bit is set. AA_IM)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Bit 7:
Bit 0: (LSB):
Readout of all actual values of the transverse axis as diame-
For turning and grinding tools, the wear parameter of the
ter values independently of the G-Code of the Group 29
transverse axis is included in the calculation as a diameter
(DIAMON / DIAMOF)
value.
Bit 8:
Bit 1:
Display of the distance to go in WCS always as a radius.
For turning and grinding tools, the tool length component of
the transverse axis is included in the calculation as a diame-
Bit 9:
ter value.
During DRF-handwheel traverse of an axis only half of the
Bit 2: specified increment is actually travelled. (providing MD11346
If a wear component or a length component is included in the $MN_HANDWH_TRUE_DISTANCE = 1)
calculation as a diameter value, the tool may only be used in
the plane that was active when the tool was selected. If the bit
is set, a plane change raises an alarm
Maximum number of blocks w/o traversing move-

Bit 10:
Permit activation of the tool component of an active indexable ment with SAR
tool carrier even if no tool is active..
Bit 11: MD20202 Maximum number of blocks
The tool parameter $TC_DP6 is not interpreted as tool radius, $MC_WAB_MAXNUM_ w/o traversing movement with
but as a tool diameter. DUMMY_BLOCKS SAR
Bit 12:
The tool parameter $TC_DP15 is not interpreted as wear on Default: 5 Change to: 10
the tool radius, but as wear of the tool diameter.
Bit 13: MD20202 = 5 → 10
During JOG of circles, the circle centre Coordinate is always
a radius value, see SD42690 SC_JOG_CIRCLE_CENTRE. Description:
Bit 14: Maximum number of blocks that can appear between the
Absolute values of the transverse axis for cycle masks as a SAR (soft approach and retraction) block and the traversing
radius block which determines the direction of the approach or re-
Bit 15: traction tangent.
Incremental values of the transverse axis for cycle masks as
diameters. This setting is required in conjunction with the JobShop-
cycles. A typical use is illustrated by the screenshot below
Note: taken from a continuous path milling operation on a contour
using the approach and leaving strategy "Semi-circle".
For turning machines it is sensible to enter and evaluate
the tool wear correction value for turning tools in the X-
axis as a diameter, since the wear is determined on the
work piece diameter.
Notes

Setup Turning A120
Continued MD20202 Blocks for look-ahead contour calculation with TRC
MD20240
Blocks for look-ahead contour
$MC_CUTCOM_MAXNUM_
calculation with TRC
CHECK_BLOCKS
Description:
Indicates the maximum number of blocks with traversing in-
formation at the offset plane that are considered simultane-
ously for collision detection with active TRC (tool radius com-
pensation).
Note:
The Standard setting should not be undercut.
Maximum number of blocks without traversing mo- Time monitoring for tool in tool holder
tion in TRC
MD20320
Time monitoring for tool in tool
MD20250 Maximum number of blocks $MC_TOOL_TIME_MONITOR
holder
$MC_CUTCOM_MAXNUM_ without traversing motion in _MASK
DUMMY_BLOCKS TRC
MD20320 Bit 0 = 0 → 1
MD20250 = 3 → 5
Description:
Note: The setting Bit 0 = 1 is required for the life-time monitoring of
The value 5 represents a value based on experience for the tool in the tool holder 1. The machine configuration used
JobShop installations. here only uses one tool holder.
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
Active system frames after reset Deletion of system frames after reset
MD24006 MD24007
Active system frames after $MC_CHSFRAME_RESET_
Deletion of system
$MC_CHSFRAME_RESET_
MASK
reset CLEAR_MASK frames after reset
Default: 0H Change to: 1H Default: 0H Change to: 20H
MD24006 Bit 0 = 0 → 1
MD24006 Bit 5 = 0 MD24007 Bit 0 = 0
MD24007 Bit 5 = 0 → 1
Description:
Bit-mask for the reset setting of the channel-specific system Description:
frames, which will be evaluated with the channel. Bit-mask for deleting channel-specific system frames in the
data management on Reset..
Bit 0: System frame active for preset. actual value/ scratching
The attribution Bit-Nr. - System frame is identical to MD24006
Note:
Bit 0 = 0: The system frame for setting actual values and

scratching (basic reference) will not be deleted with Re-
set/End-of-part-program.
Bit 5 = 1: The system frame for cycles will be deleted with

Reset channel system frames after power ON Description:
MD24008 Bit-mask for matching the active frame to the axis constella-
Reset channel system frames tion
$MC_CHSFRAME_
after power ON
POWERON_MASK
Bit 0: Adjustment of rotations.
Bit 1: Rectangular shear angle
Bit 2: Geo axes are not scaled
Note:
Adaptation of active frames Bit 0 = 1, Bit 1 = 1 and Bit 2 = 1:
This setting is absolutely necessary for the function the
ShopTurn cycles in conjunction with TRANSMIT/
MD24040 Adaptation of active TRACYL.
$MC_FRAME_ADAPT_MODE frames
Notes

Setup Turning A120
Activation and impact of program runtime measure- Bit 0 = 1

ment The timing of the total runtime for all part programs is
active ($AC_OPERATING_TIME)
MD27860 Bit 1 = 0
Activation and impact of pro- No timing of the current program runtime
$MC_PROCESSTIMER_
gram runtime measurement
MODE Bit 1 = 1
The measurement of the current program run-time is active
Default: 0H Change to: 73H ($AC_CYCLE_TIME)
Bit 2 = 0
MD27860 Bit 0 = 0 → 1 No timing of the tool cutting time
MD27860 Bit 1 = 0 → 1 Bit 2 = 1
MD27860 Bit 4 = 0 → 1 Timing of the tool cutting time is active
MD27860 Bit 5 = 0 → 1 ($AC_CUTTING_TIME)
MD27860 Bit 6 = 0 → 1
Bit 3
Description: Reserved
Under the function program runtime timers are provided as Bits 4,5 only if Bit 0, 1 = 1:
system variables. While the NCK-specific timers are always Bit 4 = 0 No timing during active test run feed motion
activated (for timings since the last control unit boot), the
channel-specific timers must be started by means of this da- Bit 4 = 1 Timing also during active test run feed motion
tum. Bit 5 = 0 No timing during program test
Meaning: Bit 5 = 1 Timing also during program test
Bit 0 = 0 Bit 6 only if Bit 1 = 1:
No timing of the total runtime for all part programs
Description: Bit 9 only if Bit 0, 1 = 1:

Bit 6 = 0 Bit 9 = 0
Delete $AC_CYCLE_TIME also after Start by ASUP and $AC_OPERATING_TIME, $AC_CYCLE_TIME: No timing
PROG_EVENTs. when Override = 0.
Bit 6 = 1 Bit 9 = 1
$AC_CYCLE_TIME will not be deleted after Start by ASUP $AC_OPERATING_TIME, $AC_CYCLE_TIME: Timing also if
and PROG_EVENTs. Override = 0.
Bit 7 only if Bit 2 = 1: Bit 10 to 31
Reserved
Bit 7 = 0 $AC_CUTTING_TIME counts only with active tool.
Bit 7 = 1 $AC_CUTTING_TIME counts independently of tool.
Bit 8 = 0
$AC_CYCLE_TIME will not be deleted in case of a jump with
GOTOS to the program start.
Bit 8 = 1
$AC_CYCLE_TIME will be deleted in case of a jump with
GOTOS to the program start.
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
Work piece counters In the user interface of the

mode-of-operation AUTO the
A difference is made between the following work piece coun- mask shown alongside can be
ters: opened by selecting Time/
 Number of the command work pieces Counter
System variable $AC_REQURED_PARTS
Setting by means of Bit 0 and 1
 Total number of work pieces (actual work pieces) fin-
ished since the Start
System variable $AC_TOTAL_PARTS
Setting by means of Bit 4, 5 and 7 The following attribution applies:
 Number of all work pieces (actual work pieces) fin- - Param "Workpiece Command" = $AC_REQUIRED_PARTS
ished since the Start - Param "Work pieces Actual" = $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS
System variable $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS
Setting by means of Bit 8, 9 und 11
 Number of work pieces finished as per the own strate- Activation of workpiece counter
gy
System variable $AC_SPECIAL_PARTS
Setting by means of Bit 12, 13 and 15 MD27880 Activation of workpiece coun-
$MC_PART_COUNTER ter
MD27880 Bit 0 = 0 → 1
MD27880 Bit 8 = 0 → 1
MD27880 Bit 11 = 0 → 1
Bit 0 = 1: Counter $AC_REQUIRED_PARTS is activated Bit 6 : reserved

Further meaning of Bit 1-3 only if Bit 0 =1 and
$AC_REQUIRED_PARTS > 0: Bit 7 = 1: Counter $AC_TOTAL_PARTS is increased by the
value 1 after a jump back with GOTOS
$AC_REQUIRED_PARTS > 0: Bit 8 = 1: Counter $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS is active
Bit 1 = 0: Alarm/VDI-output if $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS corre- Further meaning of Bit 9 - 11 only if Bit 8 = 1 and
sponds to $AC_REQUIRED_PARTS $AC_REQUIRED_PARTS > 0:
Bit 1 = 1: Alarm/VDI-output if $AC_SPECIAL_PARTS corre- Bit 9 = 0: Counter $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS is increased by the
sponds to $AC_REQUIRED_PARTS value 1 after a VDI-output of M02/M30
Bit 2: reserved Bit 9 = 1: Counter $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS is increased by the
Bit 3: reserved PART_COUNTER_MCODE[1]
Bit 4 = 1: Counter $AC_TOTAL_PARTS is active Bit 10: reserved
Further meaning of Bit 5 - 7 only if Bit 4 = 1 and Bit 11 = 1: Counter $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS is increased by
$AC_TOTAL_PARTS > 0: the value 1 after a jump back with GOTOS.
Bit 5 = 0: Counter $AC_TOTAL_PARTS is increased by the
value 1 after a VDI-output of M02/M30.
Bit 5 = 1: Counter $AC_TOTAL_PARTS is increased by the

PART_COUNTER_MCODE[0]
Notes

Setup Turning A120
Continued MD27880 PLC-Program example:
Bit 12 = 1: Counter $AC_SPECIAL_PARTS is active U Marker_ProgJump_ON

S "Chan1".A_ProgJump //DB21.DBX384.0
//Program jump control
Further meaning of Bit 13-15 only if Bit 12 =1 and
$AC_REQUIRED_PARTS > 0: U "Chan1".E_WS_Step //DB21.DBX317.1
//Com.num.parts attained
Bit 13 = 0: Counter $AC_SPECIAL_PARTS is increased by R "Chan1".A_ProgJump //DB21.DBX384.0
the value 1 after a VDI-output of M02/M30 R Marker_NC_Start
R Marker_ProgJump_ON
U "Chan1".A_ProgJump //DB21.DBX384.0
the value 1 after output of the M-command from MD
U "Chan1".MDyn[32] /DB21.DBX198.0 ;
PART_COUNTER_MCODE[2] //M32 decoded
S Marker_NC_Start
Bit 14: reserved
U Marker_NC_Start
Bit 15 = 1: Counter $AC_SPECIAL_PARTS is increased by U "Chan1".E_ChanReset //DB21.DBX35.7
the value 1 after a jump back with GOTOS. S "Chan1".A_NCStart //DB21.DBX7.1
Part program:
Application example:
In such a JobShop-Program the program repeat can be
MD27880 PART_COUNTER = 101H switched ON in the automatically generated End-of-program
Bit 0 = 1: Counter $AC_REQUIRED_PARTS "Work pieces block by means of the parameter "Repeat". In this case the
Command" activate command GOTOS will be generated.
Bit 8 = 1: Counter $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS "Work pieces Actu-
al" activate G-Code-Program_1: G-Code-Program_2:
… ...
MD 27882[1] PART_COUNTER_MCODE = 32 M32; Repeat GOTOS; Repeat
M30 M30
Memory space for REORG (DRAM) Bit 0 = 1 System frame for Actual value set and scratch-
ing
MD28000
Memory space for REORG
$MC_MM_REORG_LOG_ Description:
(DRAM)
FILE_MEM
Bit-mask for the projecting of channel-specific system frames,
Default: 50 Change to: 75 which are evaluated in the channel.
Bit 0: Set actual value and scratch

Number of blocks for local user variables in RE- Bit 1: External work offset
ORG (DRAM) Bit 2: TCARR and PAROT
Bit 3: TOROT and TOFRAME
Bit 4: Workpiece reference points
MD28010 Number of blocks for local Bit 5: Cycles
$MC_MM_NUM_REORG_ user variables in REORG Bit 6: Transformations
LUD_ MODULES (DRAM) Bit 7: ISO G51.1 Mirror
Bit 8: ISO G68 2DROT
Default: 8 Change to: 20 Bit 9: ISO G68 3DROT
Bit 10: ISO G51 Scale
Projecting of channel-specific system frames Bit 11: Relative coordinate systems
Note:
MD28082 The system frames for actual value set and scratching
$MC_MM_SYSTEM_FRAME_ System frames (SRAM) (basic reference) and for cycles are required for JobShop
MASK installations.
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
Projecting of channel-specific system frames in the Traversing from zero offset with incr. programming
data management
SD42442
Traversing from tool offset with
$SC_TOOL_OFFSET_INCR_
MD28083 incr. programming
PROG
$MC_MM_SYSTEM_ System frames (SRAM)
DATAFRAME_MASK Default: 1 Change to: 0
Default: F9FH Change to:
Feed reduction on circles with tool radius compen-
sation
Traversing from zero offset with incr. programming SD42528 Feed reduction on circles with
$SC_CUTCOM_DECEL_LIMIT tool radius compensation
SD42440
Traversing from zero offset
$SC_FRAME_OFFSET_INCR_ Default: 0 Change to: 1
with incr. programming
PROG
SD42528 = 0 → 1
Note:
This setting is required for JobShop installations. It avoids the
"stopping" of the axes in such circular sections if the diameter
of the milling cutter is only marginally smaller than the ma-
chining radius.
Change of tool length components with change of Assignment of tool length compensation independ-
active plane ent of tool type
Change of tool length compo- Assignment of tool length com-

SD42940 SD42950
nents with change of active pensation independent of tool
$SC_TOOL_LENGTH_CONST $SC_TOOL_LENGTH_TYPE
plane type
Default: 0 Change to: 18 Default: 0 Change to: 2
SD42940 = 0 → 18 SD42950 = 0 → 2
Note:
Note:
The setting = 18 is required for ShopTurn installations, see The setting = 2 is required for ShopTurn installations,
also SD42950 $SC_TOOL_LENGTH_TYPE. see also SD42940 $SC_TOOL_LENGTH_CONST.
With the setting the setting data

SD42940 $SC_TOOL_LENGTH_CONST and
SD42950 $SC_TOOL_LENGTH_TYPE
the tool lengths are rigidly assigned to the geometry axes
independently of the tool type:
Length 1 = X
Length 2 = Z
Lange 3 = Y
Notes

Setup Turning A120
JOG-TSM MD20110 Definition of basic control set-

$MC_RESET_MODE_MASK tings after reset/PP end
In the operation mode JOG the input masks for "T,S,M",
"Position" and "Roughing" are available. These permit simple Default: 1H Change to: 4041H
functions to be carried out such
- T,S,M: Tool changes, spindle functions, zero point offset-
selections MD20110 = 1H → 4041H
- Position: axes and spindles positioning
- Roughing: roughing of a corner with chamfers and/or radii. Bit 6 = 0 → 1
After the data have been entered and NC-Start initiated the A detailed description of MD20110 can be found in Sec-
file MA_JOG_STEP1.MPF will be generated in the directory tion Basic settings.
"Workpieces - TEMP" and carried out in the program-
manager. Description:
Bit 6: Reset behaviour "active tool length correction"
To ensure that such functions as e. g. tool selection and spin-
dle Start will remain activated also after reset and end-of,
Bit 6 = 1:
respective machine data are required, which will be described
below. The current setting for the active tool length correction re-
The settings will be described with the T,S,M-Mask; the input mains active also after Reset/end-of-part program.
masks Position and Roughing do not require special settings. If the tool or magazine management is active, that tool is se-
lected which happens to be in the master spindle (generally
referred to as master-tool holder).
If the tool in the master spindle is locked, the "locked" status
Tool changes
will be ignored.
Definition of basic control settings after reset/PP
end
It must be borne in mind that after end-of-program, program Description:

abort either the last programmed value for the master spindle
respectively the master tool holder or else the value specified Bit 14 = 1: Reset-Mode
by $MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND respectively Tool and correction selection as per the settings of MD20110
$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER for the master $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK and
spindle respectively the master-tool holder will be used. MD20112 $MC_START_MODE_MASK.
Bit 14 = 0: No Reset mode
Activation of tool management functions
MD20310 Note:
Activation of tool management
$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_
functions In case of turning machines featuring a turret the setting with
MASK
Bit 16=1 "Programming T=Location number" the program-
Default: 0H Change to: 81400BH ming of the turret place can be selected in addition to the tool
name. In the T,S,M-mask appears the following selection
means:
Bit 0 - 3 must be set as in MD18080
$MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
Bit 0 = 0 → 1 Magazine management active

Bit 1 = 0 → 1 Monitoring functions active
Bit 3 = 0 → 1 Adjacent location treatment
Bit 14 = 0 → 1 autom. tool change during Reset and Start
Bit 16 = 0 → 1 Programming T = "Location number"
Bit 23 = 0 → 1 On offset selection no synchronization with
HL
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
Continuation of tool change The cycle CYCLE206 called up with the tool change in turn
calls the manufacturer cycle CUST_TECHCYC in the mode
110 and 111.
Selection and transfer of a
tool from the list of tools in the
T,S,M-mask (the direct input Extract from the CUST_TECHCYC.SPF:
of the name is also possible)
With NC-Start the part-

program MA_JOG_STEP1 is
generated in directory Work
pieces - TEMP and the tool
change is carried out.
Description:
 CYCLE210(0)
checks the configuration settings for ShopTurn, as for
instance axis and spindle assignment.
 CYCLE206
obtains the tool name and the cutting edge number as
transfer parameters.
 M32
The M-command defined under MD10714
_M110: This mode is called up after the tool change. No en- _M112: Is called up before the tool change when the retrac-
tries are prepared. tion plane is reached (the retraction plane is defined
for the X and Z-axis in the part program)
_M111:This jump is provided in case the tool change takes
place from a ShopTurn-program and the tool change _M113: Is called up if just a cutting edge, but no tool, has
is set up with the M-command (MD22550 been programmed.
$MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE = 1). The ShopTurn- Here a special case is being considered where on
cycle F_HOME.SPF for the approach of the tool one tool there is a cutting edge for external and an-
changing position will be called up. other or internal machining. If now a change between
these two cutting edges is programmed (together with
Further jump accesses in the CUST_TECHCYC are provided a simultaneous change from external to internal ma-
for the tool change, which, however, are called up only during chining) there will be no approach of the tool changing
the program execution. point from the ShopTurn cycles. The change of the
cutting edge takes place close to the work piece and
the starting point of the internal machining will be ap-
proached along the shortest possible path. In order to
avoid collisions with the work piece the ShopTurn
cycle F_HOME for the approach of the tool changing
point is called up.
_M114: Is called up after the tool change.
Notes

Setup Turning A120
Spindle Own spindle RESET
These settings are required to enable spindles to be started MD35040

from the T,S,M mask. $MA_SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER Own spindle RESET
_RESET
MD35040 = 0 → 2
MD10714 M function for spindle active Description:

$MN_M_NO_FCT_EOP after reset
MD35040 $MA_SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET defines the
response of the spindle after channel reset NC/PLC interface
Default: -1 Change to: 32 signal DB21-30 DBX7.7 (Reset) and program end (M2, M30).
MD10714 = -1 → 32 (Suggestion M32) This MD is only active in the spindle mode open-loop control
mode. In the positioning or oscillation mode, the spindle is
Description: always stopped.
With Start in the manual mode-of-operation (T,S,M-mask,
position) the part-program MA_JOG_STEP1 will be generat-
ed and executed.
This part-program will be finished with the M-function in
MD10714. The setting of MD35040 = 2 ensures that the spin-
dle remains active also after the end-of-program.
Limitations see MD10715 $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE
MD35040 $MA_SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET = 0: Settings for the control unit:

 Spindle stops (with M2/M30 and channel and mode group AX1: X1
reset)
MD35040 =0 remains
 Program is aborted
AX2: Z1
MD35040 $MA_SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET= 1: MD35040 =0 remains
 Spindle does not stop AX3: C1
 Program is aborted MD35040 =0 → 2 Own spindle-RESET (Main spindle)
AX4: TOOL
MD35040 $MA_SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET= 2: MD35040 =0 → 2 Own spindle-RESET (Tool spindle)
 Spindle does not stop at the M function configured via
MD10714 $MN_M_NO_FCT_EOP (e.g. M32).
 However, the spindle stops at channel or mode group
reset.
The NC/PLC interface signal DB31, ... DBX2.2 (Delete dis-

tance-to go/Spindle reset) is always effective, independent of
MD35040 $MA_SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET.
Not relevant to:

 Spindle modes other than open-loop control mode.
Corresponds to:
NC/PLC interface signal DB21-30 DBX7.7 (Reset)
NC/PLC interface signal DB31, ... DBX2.2 (Delete distance-to
go/spindle reset)
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
Start main spindle via the T,S,M-mask MA_JOG_STEP1 is generat-

ed
T,S,M-mask with inputs for spindle speed and direction
of rotation of the main spindle S1
Main spindle S1 select
Description:
 SETMS(1)
declares the main spindle S1 as master spindle
Enter speed and direction of  CUST_TECHCYC(4)
rotation Call-up of CUST_TECHCYC in mode 4 "Main spindle C-
axis clamping release"
and actuate NC-Start  CUST_TECHCYC(2)
Call-up of CUST_TECHCYC in mode 2 "Main spindle
switch to spindle mode-of-operation"
 M1=4 G972 S1=1000
Starting of the spindle
Note on spindle direction of rotation:

The assignment of the direction arrow for the spindle
M-function M3/M4 is effected via the MD52207
$MCS_AXIS_USAGE_ATTRIB (see Module A045-1).
Listed here are all the CUST_TECHCYC jump accesses en-

visaged for the main spindle.
Extract from the CUST_TECHCYC.SPF:
Description:
For the switching of the main spindle into the C-axis mode or
spindle mode and for clamping or unclamping of the main
spindle the following jump accesses into the manufacturer
cycle CUST_TECHCYC.SPF are prepared:
_M1: Switching the main spindle into the C-axis mode.
_M2: switching from the C-axis mode into the spindle mode
_M3: Main spindle clamp
_M4: Main spindle unclamp
Notes

Setup Turning A120
Continued, Start main spindle via the T,S,M-mask From this derives the following logic:
The IF-query is fulfilled, if the main spindle is not in the mode-
of-operation 2 = positioning and not in the mode-of-operation
4 = axis mode-of-operation or the Prog_Event is in the mode
5 = block search.
Description: The subsequent line positions the main spindle to 0 degrees:
_M1: Switching to the C-axis mode SPOS[_F_S_NR[0]]=0
When switching into the C-axis mode there is a difference The query ensures that the main spindle is not positioned
whether in the C-axis mode the main spindle is driven by the again, if it had already been switched into the axis mode be-
spindle drive or by a separate feed drive motor. forehand.
1. No separate feed drive available: 2. Separate feed drive fitted:

The following entry is prepared: The IF-query described above and the subsequent ENDIF-
IF (($P_SMODE[_F_S_NR[0]]<>2)AND($P_SMODE command must be invalidated and replaced by the logic for
[_F_S_NR[0]]<>4))OR($P_PROG_EVENT==5) the engaging of the separate feed drive. This should prefera-
bly be done in a separate manufacturer cycle, e.g. AX-
Variable _F_S_NR: The spindle index of the main, the tool IS_C1_ON.SPF.
and the counter spindle can be freely defined by the machine
manufacturer. In order to permit the CUST_TECHCYC to be _M1: Main spindle: Change to C axis mode
generally valid for all applications, the spindle index will be AXIS_C1_ON
determined via the variable _F_S_NR from the given axis GOTOF _MEND
configurations (set by means of MD52206
$MCS_AXIS_USAGE). The following applies:
_F_S_NR[0] holds the spindle index of the main spindle
_F_S_NR[1] holds the spindle index of the tool spindle
_F_S_NR[2] holds the spindle index of the counter spindle
Example for the manufacturer cycle AXIS_C1_ON.SPF: _M2: Switching of the main spindle to the spindle mode:
1. No separate feed drive available:
PROC AXIS_C1_ON The following entry is prepared :
IF $P_SEARCH==1 GOTOF _END IF($SP_MODE[_F_S_NR[0]]<>1
IF $P_SIM==1 GOTOF _END ;N20 M[_F_S_NR[0]]=
; Do not execute cycle during block search and simulation ENDIF
IF $A_IN[24]==1 The line N20 will be executed only if the main spindle is not in
;If feedback from the PLC, that the drive is already coupled, the spindle mode and can be supplemented by "5". By means
;do not execute cycle; of the command M5 the counter spindle is switched back to
; Release digital inputs and outputs via MD10350/MD10360 the spindle mode.
GOTOF _END
ENDIF
M[_F_S_NR[0]]=41 ;Select gearbox stage 1 for main spindle
SPOSA[[_F_S_NR[0]]=0 ;Position main spindle
WAITS(1) ;wait until the spindle position is reached
STOPRE
G0 C0 ;C-axis positioning
STOPRE
M64 ;M-command for engaging the C-axis
MARK1:
IF $A_IN[24]==1 GOTOF MARK2
;Query whether the engaging has been completed
GOTOB MARK1 ; Jump back to engaging completed
MARK2:
_END:
IF $P_SIM==1 ;Simulation active
M[_F_S_NR[0]]=70 ;Switch main spindle into the axis mode
ENDIF
M17
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
Continued: Extract from the CUST_TECHCYC.SPF

_M3: Main spindle: C axis clamping
2. Separate feed drive available: The following entry is prepared:
As described for the previous mode a further manufacturer ;N30 M[_F_S_NR[0]]=
cycle should be used for disengaging the separate feed drive: ;N35 $AC_PRTIME_A_INC=1.5
AXIS_C1_OFF.SPF and this is called up in the mode _M2.
Enter the M-command for clamping the main spindle in the
_M2: ; Main spindle: Change to spindle mode line N30. The line N35 is prepared for matching the machin-
AXIS_C1_OFF ing time evaluated during the simulation to the real machining
GOTOF _MEND time (delay caused by the activation of the clamping must be
taken into account).
Example for the manufacturer cycle AXIS_C1_OFF.SPF:
_M4: Main spindle: Release C axis clamping
PROC AXIS_C1_OFF The following entry is prepared:
IF $P_SEARCH==1 GOTOF _END ;N40 M[_F_S_NR[0]]=
IF $P_SIM==1 GOTOF _END ;N45 $AC_PRTIME_A_INC=1.5
; Do not carry out cycle during block search and simulation
M65 ;M-command for disengaging C-axis Enter the M-command for the clamping of the counter spindle
MARK1: in line N40. The line N45 is prepared for matching the ma-
IF $A_IN[23]==1 GOTOF MARK2 chining time evaluated during the simulation to the real ma-
;Query, whether the disengaging has been completed chining time (delay caused by the un-clamping must be taken
GOTOB MARK1 into account).
MARK2:
ENDIF
_END:
M17
Monitoring the tool change
Use the cursor keys to select the required tool and

Shown in the T,F,S-field is the tool currently loaded in the thereafter transfer it by means of the Soft-Key "In
spindle. manual" .
Notes

Setup Turning A120
Loading the new tool
The tool will be loaded into the T,F,S mask with Cycle Start.
The PLC-tool change functions provided by the machine
The selected tool "Finisher" is now displayed in the T,S,M manufacturer are executed in the background for this pro-
mask. cess.
Gear step Description:

Number of prepared gear stages.
Parameterize gear stage change The first gear stage is always activated.
MD35010 Note:
Parameterize gear stage
$MA_GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ The selection field Gear stage appears only if in MD35010 for
change
ENABLE the spindles Bit 0 = 1 is set.
MD35090
$MA_NUM_GEAR_STEPS
Default: 5 Change to: With NC-Start the program

MA_JOG_STEP1 will be gen-
erated - in this example for the
selection of the gear stage 2
of the main spindle M1=42.
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
T,S,M-mask: Zero point offset Machining level
In the T,S,M-mask to select a The initial setting of the machining level of a turning machine
zero point offset by means of is G18 as per MD20150[5] = 2.
the parameter Zero point off-
set (G54,…) or it can be de-
selected by means of the se-
lection "Basic setting". Depending on the setting of MD20152[5] the switching of the
plane remains operative after a reset/end-of-program.
MD20152[5]=0 MD20152[5]=1
In order for the selection and de-selection of the Zero point

offset remains activated also after reset/end of part-program,
the setting of MD20152[7]=1 is required.
Inch/Metric-switching
Below follows once more a summation of the machine data

settings required for Inch/Metric-switching. The details to
these MDs can be found in section "Basic settings".
Enable basic system conversion
MD10260
Enable basic system conver-
$MN_CONVERT_SCALING_
sion
SYSTEM
Note:
Description: MD 20152[12] = 0 must be set for the position readouts to be
converted.
Switching the measuring systems with HMI-Softkey
0. Hide Softkey inch/metric switching
1. Display Softkey inch/metric switching
Selection of Inch/Metric-switching:
Notes

Setup Turning A120
Manufacturer cycle CUST_TECHCYC.SPF Overview of the CUST_TECHCYC-jump accesses
In the cycle CUST_TECHCYC.SPF function marks (_M1 to Description:

_M142) are prepared and documented. Match the cycle if
necessary under manufacturer cycle. This section provides an overview of the CUST_TECHCYC-
jump accesses, including a note where the description can be
found.
 Main spindle:
1-2 Switching axis/spindle mode:
A120: Section JOG-TSM
3-4 Clamping ON/OFF:
5-8 Chuck open/close, chuck flushing:
A120: Section Jaws, chuck, …
Tool spindle:
11 - 12 Switching axis/spindle mode:
13 - 14 Clamping ON/OFF:
Counter spindle:
21 - 22 Switching axis/spindle mode:
A121: Sub spindle
23 - 24 Clamping ON/OFF:
A121: Sub spindle
25 - 29 Chuck open/close, chuck flushing
A121: Sub spindle
 30: Positioning the 4th axis after block search: Note:

A120: Section Block search In order to clarify the call-ups of the CUST_ECHCYC it is
possible to display the call-up mode by adding a message
 41 - 42: Engaging/disengaging a driven tool: during commissioning:
A120: Section JOG-TSM, CUST_TECHCYC
; MODE:
 61 - 68: Switching turning/milling, mantle-front face C, MSG ("CUST_TECHCYC-Mode = "<<_MODE)
mantle-front face Y, B-axis and block search: M0
A120: Section JOG-TSM, CUST_TECHCYC STOPRE
MSG()
 100 - 102: Part receptacle:
A120: Section Jaws, chuck, ...
 110 - 114: Tool change:

A120: Section JOG-TSM, CUST_TECHCYC
 120 - 126: Engaging of main/counter spindle:

A121: Section Sub spindle
 131 - 136: ShopTurn program-control:

A120: Section: JOG-TSM, CUST_TECHCYC
 140 - 142: Block search:

A120: Section Block search
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
Tool spindle
After the selection of the tool

spindle S3, input of the speed,
selection of the direction of
rotation and NC-Start the pro-
gram shown alongside is gen-
erated.
The CUST_TECHCYC (42) is

called up after tool spindle
Stop.
Extract from the CUST_TECHCYC.SPF
Description: Note:
In the program sequence the CUST_TECHCYC call-ups are
_M11 - _M14
obtained from the ShopTurn cycles depending on the pro-
These jump accesses for the tool spindle relate to the jump
grammed technology - in case of driven tools by the boring
accesses _M1 - _M4 for the main spindle and have already
and milling cycles. For this all shown jump accesses are pos-
been described there. The entries differ only with respect to
sible..
the spindle index in the variable _F_S_NR.
The call-ups in mode 11 (switching the tool spindle into the C
-axis mode) and mode 13 (tool spindle clamp) are not possi-
_M41: Engaging a driven tool
ble in the T,S,M-mask.
The following entry is prepared:
_M41: ; Engage driven tool
;N410 M[_F_S_NR[1]]=
GOTOF _MEND
The line N410 must be completed with the M-command for
engaging the driven tool.
_M42: Disengaging a driven tool

_M42: ; Disengage driven tool
N420 M[_F_S_NR[1]]=5 ; Stop spindle
;N425 M[_F_S_NR[1]]=
GOTOF _MEND
In block N420 the tool spindle is stopped. The line N425 must
be completed with the M-command for disengaging the driven
tool.
Notes

Setup Turning A120
Program control
Description:
The modes 131 - 136 will be called up only by a ShopTurn

program.
_M131: At the beginning of a program

_TC_N_WZ=0
_TC_A_WZ=0
GOTOF _MEND
The variables _TC_N_WZ and _TC_A_WZ are meaningful
only in conjunction with a B-axis.
Description:
_M132: at the end of the program header

_N1320 F_HOME
GOTOF _MEND
Block N1320 calls up the ShopTurn-cycle F_HOME for the
approach of the tool changing position defined in the program
header.
_M135: at the end of a program loop of a ShopTurn pro-

gram
No entry is prepared.
_M136: at the end-of-program of a ShopTurn program

_N1360 F_HOME
GOTOF _MEND
Block N1360 calls up the ShopTurn-cycle F_HOME for the
approach of the tool changing position defined in the program
header.
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
Block search Bit 3 = 0 → 1
Description:
Parameterization for search run
MD11450 Parameterization for search Bit 2: Approach logic for step drill (ShopTurn)
$MN_SEARCH_RUN_MODE run Bit 3: Call block search cycle for ShopMill/ShopTurn
Bit 4: Approach through cycle (ShopTurn)
Default: 0H Change to: 7H Bit 6: Work offset value ZV cannot be entered (ShopTurn)
Bit 0 = 0 → 1 Response to output of alarm 10208 Note:
Bit 1 = 0 → 1 Automatic ASUP start after action blocks The setting of Bit 3=1 ensures that the tool programmed after
the block search is duly changed and that the spindle rotates
Bit 2 = 0 → 1 Response to Auxf output (spindle) in the tool-assigned direction at the speed programmed in the
destination block. For installations without ShopMill this Bit
needs not to be set, however, the machine manufacturer
Function mask Cross-technology must ensure that the tool and spindle functions are gathered
and put out during the block search.
MD52212
$MCS_FUNCTION_MASK_
technology
TECH
Tool change commands to PLC after search run 1: Tool changing commands and tool preparation commands
are gathered and passed on to the PLC with program Start
when the search run has attained the destination block.
MD20128 0: all tool and/or magazine specific commands that were
Tool change commands to gathered during the block search will not be put out to the
$MC_COLLECT_TOOL_
PLC after search run PLC with the next program Start! That means that also pro-
CHANGE
grammed POSM, TCI, TCA will not be passed on to the PLC.
Change to: 0
Default: 1
when ShopMill/ShopTurn Note 1:
Without an active magazine management the tool change-M-
MD20128 = 1 → 0 No gathering of tools during the block code will not be gathered, if it is not assigned to an auxiliary
search function group. With an active magazine management this
corresponds to an MD-value = 0.
Description:
Note 2:
This MD is of any meaning only with activated magazine
management (MD18080 The value = 0 is sensible for instance if after reaching the
$MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, MD20310 search destination the gathered tool change commands are
$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK). transferred to the PLC in an ASUP-program with the aid of
It specifies whether after block search with evaluation tool the commands GETSELT, GETEXET.
changing commands, tool preparation commands (generally
tool changing commands) are put out to the PLC or not put
out to the PLC.
Notes

Setup Turning A120
Simulation
Adjustment of SZS Coordinate system
MD24030 Adjustment of SZS Coordinate

$MC_FRAME_ACS_SET system
MD24030 = 0 → 1
Description:
$P_CYCFRAME and $P_PFRAME.

$P_CYCFRAME.
The position readouts show the SZS-Coordinate system if

"WCS" is selected.
Depiction of the Coordinate systems and the Frame chain
Description: Axis position at start of simulation
The SZS-Coordinate system is different to the WCS Coordi- MD53230

nate system by Axis position at start of simula-
$MAS_SIM_START_
 Cycle frame tion
POSITION
 Programmable frames (G54, …) Default: 0 Change to: 500, 200 mm
 Transformation (TRANS, ROT, SCALE)
With the setting of MD24030 $MC_FRAME_ACS_SET = 1

the programmable frames are taken into account in the posi- AX1:X1
tion readouts. MD53230 = 0 → e.g. 500 mm
AX2:Z1
MD53230 = 0 → e.g. 200 mm
Description:
Axis position at the Start of the simulation.
The simulation is possible only, if for at least one geo-axis a
value not equal to 0 has been set.
Note:
For the further axes and spindles this MD should be left on 0.
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
Simulation depiction Note:

To permit better observation of the simulation it is advisable
to reduce the rapid traverse rate by means of the override
switch. The percentage settings do not represent a linear
function. A setting of about 60 - 80% are practicable.
Alternatively to the vertical Softkeys the override setting can

also be obtained using the following keys:
Override increase: and
Override reduction: and
TRANSMIT/TRACYL for the main spindle

 Front face machining main spindle: Transformation 1
General aspects MD 24100 $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_1=256 (with C–axis)
MD 24100 $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_1=257 (with Y–axis)
By means of the functions cylinder mantle transformation and
front face machining both the mantle as well as the front face  Front face machining counter spindle: Transformation 2
of the work piece can be machined. MD 24200 $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_2=256 (with C_2–axis)
The functions cylinder mantle transformation (TRACYL) and
front face machining (TRANSMIT) are a Software–Option.  Cylinder mantle transformation main spindle: Transfor-
mation 3 without slot side face correction (with C–axis):
The functions must be set up additionally by means of the MD 24300 $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_3=512
machine data.
With slot side face correction and Y–correction:
_________________________________________________ MD 24300 $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_3=514
Note 1:
There is a difference between the set-ups of TRANSMIT and  Cylinder mantle transformation counter spindle: Transfor-
TRACYL depending on whether a Y-axis is available or not. mation 4 without slot side face correction (with C_2–axis):
Described here is the set-up as applicable when no Y-axis is MD 24400 $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_4=512
available.
With slot side face correction and Y–correction:
Note 2: MD 24400 $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_4=514
There are 4 differing sets of data, all of which must be set up;
- 2 for the main spindle (TRANSMIT/TRACYL) and 2 for the
counter spindle (TRANSMIT/TRACYL):
_________________________________________________
Notes

Setup Turning A120
Note 3: MD10602 $MN_FRAME_GEOAX_CHANGE_MODE = 1

MD24040 $MC_FRAME_ADAPT_MODE = 7H
With the function TRANSMIT/TRACYL a non-existent Y-axis
is simulated by means of an interpolation between X/C (in The data blocks for TRANSMIT and TRACYL described be-
case of TRANSMIT) respectively Z/C (in case of TRACYL). In low are conceived for the configured horizontal lathe with
this configuration example there is, apart from the main spin- machining behind the turning centre and with the axis config-
dle, no separate C-axis as feed drive for the C-axis mode. uration as shown above. Nevertheless such requirements as
Therefore, the channel index of the main spindle must be the direction of rotation of the C-axis in case of the transfor-
entered for the C-axis into the configuration data for TRANS- mation or the input of an offset might require an adaptation
MIT/TRACYL. this set of data.
As a reminder; this is how the machine is already config-

ured:
The tables on the next pages gives an overview of the data
Index blocks for TRANSMIT and TRACYL.
20080[0] $MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB = X 1
20080[1] $MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB = Z 2
20080[2] $MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB = C 3
20080[3] $MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB = TOOL 4
20080[4] $MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB = Y 0
20080[5] $MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB = Z2 0
20080[6] $MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB = SP2 0
These MDs were already set up and described.
Front face machining (TRANSMIT)

type
Trafo Trafo type1 TRANSMIT
type
C-axis without C-axis with Y- C-axis without C-axis with Y-

MD MD
Y-axis axis Y-axis axis
MD24100 256 257 MD24200 256 257
Main Spindle
Counter Spindle
MD24110[0] 1 (X) 1 (X) MD24210[0] 1 (X) 1 (X)

MD24110[1] 2 —> 3 (C) 2 —> 3 (C) MD24210[1] 2 —> 7 (SP2) 2 —> 7 (SP2)
MD24110[2] 3 —> 2 (Z) 3 —> 2 (Z) MD24210[2] 3 —> 2 (Z) 3 —> 2 (Z)
MD24110[3] 4 —> 0 4 —> 5 (Y) MD24210[3] 4 —> 0 4 —> 5 (Y)
MD24110[4] 5 —> 0 5 —> 0 MD24210[4] 5 —> 0 5 —> 0
MD24120[0] 0 —> 1 (X) 0 —> 1 (X) MD24220[0] 0 —> 1 (X) 0 —> 1 (X)
MD24120[1] 0 —> 3 (C) 0 —> 3 (C) MD24220[1] 0 —> 7 (SP2) 0 —> 7 (SP2)
MD24120[2] 0 —> 2 (Z) 0 —> 2 (Z) MD24220[2] 0 —> 2 (Z) 0 —> 2 (Z)
MD24300 512 514 MD24400 512 514
Trafo type4 TRACYL
Trafo type3 TRACYL
MD24310[0] 1 (X) 1 (X) MD24410[0] 1 (X) 1 (X)

MD24310[1] 2 —> 3 (C) 2 —> 3 (C) MD24410[1] 2 —> 7 (SP2) 2 —> 7 (SP2)
MD24310[2] 3 —> 2 (Z) 3 —> 2 (Z) MD24410[2] 3 —> 2 (Z) 3 —> 2 (Z)
MD24310[3] 4 —> 0 4 —> 5 (Y) MD24410[3] 4 —> 0 4 —> 5 (Y)
MD24310[4] 5 —> 0 5 —> 0 MD24410[4] 5 —> 0 5 —> 0
MD24320[0] 0 —> 1 (X) 0 —> 1 (X) MD24420[0] 0 —> 1 (X) 0 —> 1 (X)
MD24320[1] 0 —> 3 (C) 0 —> 3 (C) MD24420[1] 0 —> 7 (SP2) 0 —> 7 (SP2)
MD24320[2] 0 —> 2 (Z) 0 —> 2 (Z) MD24420[2] 0 —> 2 (Z) 0 —> 2 (Z)
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
Front face machining with TRANSMIT Rotary axis offset TRANSMIT 1
Offset of rotary axis for the 1st TRANSMIT transfor- MD24905

Rotary axis offset TRANSMIT
mation $MC_TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_
1
FRAME_1
MD24900 Default: 0 Change to: 1
Offset of rotary axis for the 1st
$MC_TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_
TRANSMIT transformation
OFFSET_1
Default: 0 Grad Change to: MD24905 =0 → 1
Description:
MD24900 =0 0: the axial offset of the rotary axis is not taken into account.
Description: 1: the axial offset of the rotary axis will be taken into account.
Indicates the offset of the rotary axis for the first agreed
TRANSMIT transformation in degrees in relation to the neu- 2: the axial offset of the rotary axis will be taken into account
tral position while TRANSMIT is active. up to the SZS.
The rotary position of the XY-plane of the Cartesian Coordi- If the work piece is to be rotated during machining with
nate system in relation to the defined zero position of the ro- TRANSMIT, then this cannot be achieved by programming
tary axis C can be entered here. the rotary axis in the channel, since this is occupied by a ge-
ometry axis (Y). An offset of the rotary axis in the transfor-
mation frame (TRANS, ROT, SCALE) will be taken into ac-
count during TRANSMIT if the setting is = 1.
Corresponds to:
MD24030 $MC_FRAME_ACS_SET
Sign of rotary axis for 1st TRANSMIT transfor- Restriction of working range in front of / behind the
mation pole, 1st TRANSMIT
MD24910
Sign of rotary axis for 1st MD24911 Restriction of working range in
$MC_TRANSMIT_ROT_SIGN
TRANSMIT transformation $MC_TRANSMIT_POLE_SIDE front of / behind the pole, 1st
_IS_PLUS_1
_FIX_1 TRANSMIT
MD24910 =1 → 0 MD24911 =0 → 1
Indicates the sign with which the rotary axis is taken into Restriction of the working range in front of/behind the pole or
account in the TRANSMIT transformation for the first agreed no restriction, i.e. travelling through the pole.
TRANSMIT transformation for each channel.
The assigned values have the following meaning:
Corresponds to:
0: No restriction of the working range. Travelling through the
MD24960 $MC_TRANSMIT_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_2
pole.
Note:
1: Working range of the linear axis for positions >= 0,
The requirements at the machine such as direction of rotation (if the tool length correction parallel to the linear axis = 0)
of the spindle/C-axis might necessitate different settings to If on the turning machine travelling in the X-axis beyond
the ones shown here. the turning centre (-X) is not possible.
2: Working range of the linear axis for positions <=0,
(if the tool length correction parallel to the linear axis = 0)
Notes

Setup Turning A120
Continuation of Restriction of the working range in Vector of base tool for 1st TRANSMIT transfor-
front of / behind the pole, 1st TRANSMIT mation
The sketch below shows the behaviour with the setting of
MD24911 = 1. MD24920[x]
Vector of base tool for 1st
$MC_TRANSMIT_BASE_
This setting is usual, since normally no or very little traverse is TOOL_1
available in the X-axis beyond the turning centre.
Default: 0, 0, 0 mm Change to:
Machining takes place in the following steps:
 Traverse along the X-axis to the pole MD24920[0] =0
 Rotation of the rotary axis by 180 degrees. During this MD24920[1] =0
motion the X-axis remains stationary MD24920[2] =0
 Machining of the remainder of the block. The X-axis
Description:
motion is now away from the centre in the positive
direction. This states a basic offset of the tool zero point for the 1st
TRANSMIT-transformation. Only if there is an offset from the
turning centre will this MD be required. For the standard ma-
chining the default applies.
The index i takes on the values 0, 1, 2 for the 1st to the 3rd
geometry axis.
Corresponds to:
MD24970 $MC_TRANSMIT_BASE_TOOL_2
Creating a machining program for front face machining

with the main spindle.
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
Notes

Setup Turning A120
Test of the machining
Cylinder mantle transformation (TRACYL)

type
Trafo
type
Trafo

MD MD
MD24100 256 257 MD24200 256 257
Main Spindle
Trafo type1 TRANSMIT
Counter Spindle
MD24110[0] 1 (X) 1 (X) MD24210[0] 1 (X) 1 (X)

MD24110[1] 2 —> 3 (C) 2 —> 3 (C) MD24210[1] 2 —> 7 (SP2) 2 —> 7 (SP2)
MD24110[2] 3 —> 2 (Z) 3 —> 2 (Z) MD24210[2] 3 —> 2 (Z) 3 —> 2 (Z)
MD24110[3] 4 —> 0 4 —> 5 (Y) MD24210[3] 4 —> 0 4 —> 5 (Y)
MD24110[4] 5 —> 0 5 —> 0 MD24210[4] 5 —> 0 5 —> 0
MD24120[0] 0 —> 1 (X) 0 —> 1 (X) MD24220[0] 0 —> 1 (X) 0 —> 1 (X)
MD24120[1] 0 —> 3 (C) 0 —> 3 (C) MD24220[1] 0 —> 7 (SP2) 0 —> 7 (SP2)
MD24120[2] 0 —> 2 (Z) 0 —> 2 (Z) MD24220[2] 0 —> 2 (Z) 0 —> 2 (Z)
MD24300 512 514 MD24400 512 514
Trafo type3 TRACYL
Trafo type4 TRACYL
MD24310[0] 1 (X) 1 (X) MD24410[0] 1 (X) 1 (X)

MD24310[1] 2 —> 3 (C) 2 —> 3 (C) MD24410[1] 2 —> 7 (SP2) 2 —> 7 (SP2)
MD24310[2] 3 —> 2 (Z) 3 —> 2 (Z) MD24410[2] 3 —> 2 (Z) 3 —> 2 (Z)
MD24310[3] 4 —> 0 4 —> 5 (Y) MD24410[3] 4 —> 0 4 —> 5 (Y)
MD24310[4] 5 —> 0 5 —> 0 MD24410[4] 5 —> 0 5 —> 0
MD24320[0] 0 —> 1 (X) 0 —> 1 (X) MD24420[0] 0 —> 1 (X) 0 —> 1 (X)
MD24320[1] 0 —> 3 (C) 0 —> 3 (C) MD24420[1] 0 —> 7 (SP2) 0 —> 7 (SP2)
MD24320[2] 0 —> 2 (Z) 0 —> 2 (Z) MD24420[2] 0 —> 2 (Z) 0 —> 2 (Z)
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
Mantle machining with TRACYL (without slot side

face correction)
Offset of rotary axis for the 1st TRACYL transfor-

mation
MD24800
Offset of rotary axis for the 1st
$MC_TRACYL_ROT_AX_
TRACYL transformation Rotary axis offset TRACYL 1
OFFSET_1
Default: 0 Grad Change to: MD24805
$MC_TRACYL_ROT_AX_ Rotary axis offset TRACYL 1
MD24800 =0 FRAME_1
Description:
Indicates the offset of the rotary axis for the first agreed
TRACYL transformation in degrees in relation to the neutral
position while TRACYL is active.
The rotary position of the mantle plane in relation to the rotary

axis C can be entered here.
MD24805 =0 → 1 Sign of rotary axis for 1st TRACYL transformation
Description:
0: the axial offset of the rotary axis will not be taken into ac-
MD24810
count. Sign of rotary axis for 1st
$MC_TRACYL_ROT_SIGN_
TRACYL transformation
IS_PLUS_1
1: the axial offset of the rotary axis will be taken into ac-
count.
2: the axial offset of the rotary axis will be taken into ac-
count up to the SZS.
MD24810 =1
If the work piece is to be rotated during machining with
TRANSMIT, then this cannot be achieved by programming Description:
the rotary axis in the channel, since this is occupied by a ge- Indicates the sign with which the
ometry axis (Y). An offset of the rotary axis in the transfor- rotary axis is taken into account in
mation frame (TRANS, ROT, SCALE) will be taken into ac- the TRACYL transformation for
count during TRANSMIT if the setting is = 1. the first agreed TRACYL transfor-
mation.
Corresponds to:
MD24030 $MC_FRAME_ACS_SET
Corresponds to:
MD24860 $MC_TRACYL_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_2
Notes

Setup Turning A120
Vector of base tool for 1st TRACYL transformation Creating a machining program for mantle machining with
the main spindle.
MD24820[x]
Vector of base tool for 1st
$MC_TRACYL_BASE_
TOOL_1
MD24820[0] =0 Tool list

MD24820[1] =0
MD24820[2] =0
Description:
Indicates a basic offset of the tools zero for the 1st TRACYL
transformation. The offset is referenced to the geometry axes
valid when TRACYL is active. The basic offset is included
with and without selection of the tool length compensation.
Programmed length corrections have an additive effect with
respect to the basic tool.
The index i takes on the values 0, 1, 2 for the 1st to 3rd ge-
ometry axes.
Corresponds to:
MD24870 $MC_TRACYL_BASE_TOOL_2
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
Continue: Vector of base tool for 1st TRACYL trans-

formation
Testing the machining
Chuck, jaws, part receptacle and tailstock
This section describes

 the functions for opening closing and flushing of the chuck
for the main spindle
 The setting and dimensions of the jaws fr the main spindle
 The settings for part receptacle and
 The settings of the tailstock
Chuck
Machine data for the definition of M-commands
Notes

Setup Turning A120
M code for open chuck with non-rotating spindle M code for open chuck with rotating spindle
MD52250[x] MD52251[x]
M code for Open chuck with M code for Open chuck with
$MCS_M_CODE_CHUCK_ $MCS_M_CODE_CHUCK_
non-rotating spindle rotating spindle
OPEN OPEN_ROT
Default: - Change to: Default: - Change to:
Description:
Description:
e.g.: "M34" or "M1=34"
e.g.: "M34" or "M1=34"
Elements:
Elements:
MD52251[0] = Main spindle
MD52251[1] = Counter spindle
MD52250[1] = Counter spindle
M-code for Close chuck Chuck flushing, close, open
MD52252[x] For the control of the chuck functions there are jump exits
$MCS_M_CODE_CHUCK_ M- code for Close chuck from the ShopTurn cycles into the manufacturer-cycle
CLOSE CUST_TECHCYC.SPF.
Default: - Change to:

Description:
e.g.: "M34" or "M1=34"
Elements:
MD52251[1] = counter spindle
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
Continuation of Chuck flushing, close, open Note:

The definition of the M-commands for opening and closing
the chuck of the main and counter spindle does not occur in
CUST_TECHCYC.SPF but by way of machine data. This is
necessary in order for the opening and closing of the chuck
and the associated work piece movement to be shown cor-
rectly in the simulation also with G-programs. The M-
command for flushing the chuck occurs directly in Mode 5
since this is not necessary for the simulation.
Description:
The machine data are evaluated in the modes _M6, _M7 and
_M8. If the machine data contain a numerical value only, then
this will be put out as M-function without an extension. If the
machine datum contains an auxiliary function with an exten-
sion, e.g. M1=34, then this will be executed out as a string.
Jaws for the main spindle
Spindle chuck data
MD53240[x] ZC1: The parameter ZC1 is

$MAS_SPINDLE_ Spindle chuck data used for manual meas-
PARAMETER uring of tools if the
Default: 0, 0, 0 Change to: chuck of the main spin-
dle is used as reference.
Description: Furthermore for the sim-
ulation of the faceplate.
for AX3:C1
ZS1: The parameter ZS1 is
MD53240[0] =0 → e.g. 200 mm only used in the simula-
Chuck dimensions = ZC1 in the mask Spindle chuck data tion for the depiction of
MD53240[1] =0 → e.g. 120 mm the jaws.
Stop dimensions = ZS1 in the mask Spindle chuck data
MD53240[2] =0
Jaws dimensions = ZE2 in the mask Spindle chuck data
The inputs for the parameters "ZC1" for chuck dimensions
In case of the main spindle the selection for the type of jaws and "ZS1" for the dead stop dimensions are written into the
is not available. This machine datum 53240[2] is meaning- machine data MD53240[0] and MD53240[1] of the data block
less. of the C-axis. These entries are then transferred to the data
block of the spindle if there exists a separate C-axis as feed
The dimensions depend on the used jaws and can be drive for the C-axis mode apart from the main spindle.
changed by the machine operator.
Notes

Setup Turning A120
Part receptacle
MD52218
$MCS_FUNKTION_MASK_TURN
Description:
MD52218 Bit 1 = 0 → 1 Release of the part receptacle
Example:
In case of a work piece ZI = 150mm long, ZB is theoretically
120mm, since 30mm were entered in ZS1 as the dead stop
dimension. For safety reasons, however, a further allowance
must be made to ensure that the tools do not damage the
surface of the chuck jaws.
MD52218 Bit 1 = 0 MD52218 Bit 1 = 1
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
Continuation of Part receptacle
Description: Program mask Cutting-off cycle
No entries are prepared in the CUST_TECHCYC-jump ac- ShopTurn program: programGuide program:
cesses for the part receptacle.
_M100: This mode is used only in a ShopTurn-program, The

call-up occurs when the tool in the X-axis is on the
retraction level at the height of the cut-off position.
_M101: This mode is used both in ShopTurn programs as

also in a programGuide program. It is called up when
during the cut-off the position XM defined in the input
mask for the extension of the part receptacle has
been reached.
_M102: This mode is used both in ShopTurn programs as

also in a programGuide program. It is called up when
the destination depth of the cut-off is reached; it can
be used for swivelling the part receptacle into posi-
tion. Description:
The parameter ”Parts gripper” appears in the input masks

with the release of the part receptacle in MD52218 Bit 1 = 1.
If this is set to "yes" a further parameter XM appears for the
definition of the position for the extension of the part recepta-
cle. The destination depth, defined in parameter X2, is at the
same time the position for positioning the part receptacle.
Notes

Setup Turning A120
Tailstock activation
Software-Option
For the depiction of the tailstock the option "ShopMill/
ShopTurn" is required.
MD52218
$MCS_FUNKTION_MASK_TURN
Description:
MD52218 Bit 2 = 0 → 1 Release of tailstock
The tailstock dimensions are set up in the mask "Spindle

chuck data".
Tailstock data Tailstock programming
MD53242[x] Tailstock data After release of the tailstock in MD52218 the parameter
$MAS_TAILSTOCK_ "Tailstock" appears additionally in the program header of a
PARAMETER ShopTurn-Program.
Enter the mechanical dimensions of the tailstock
Default: 0 mm Change to: actual dimensions
Description:
MD53242[0]: Tailstock diameter
MD53242[1]: Tailstock length
The inputs into the parameters "XR1" for tailstock diameter

and "ZR1" for tailstock length must be entered into the ma-
chine data MD53242[0] and MD53242[1] of the data set for
the C-axis. These entries are then transferred to to data set of
the spindle C1. The tailstock dimensions are used in the sim-
ulation for the depiction of the tailstock.
With tailstock "yes" a further

parameter XRR for the defini-
tion of the retraction level in
the X-axis for the prevention of
collisions with the tailstock.
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
Tailstock depiction in the simulation
Notes

Setup Turning A120
Machine —> JOG
MD52010 BIG_FONT = 3
depending on MD52011
MD20098[X] Bit 0 = MCS actual

value window SD55212 FUNCTION_MASK_ TECH_SET
Bit 0 = 0 Tool preselection not active
MD51040
SWITCH_TO_MACHINE_MASK MD52206 AXIS_USAGE, Meaning of the axes in the channel
MD52207 AXIS_USAGE_ATTRIB, Axis attributes
MD52200 TECHNOLOGY = 1
Softkey Description
selection
MD52210 FUNKTION_MASK Bit 2 = 1
MD52200 = 1 =1: Technology Turning
MD51040 SWITCH_TO_MACHINE_MASK, Automatic operating area switchover to machine

Bit 0: When selecting a program in the program manager not automatically switch over
Bit 1: When switching the operating mode via the MCP not automatically switch over MD52200 = 1 =1: Technology Turning
Bit 2: When program selection in program not automatically switch over
Bit 3: When selection / execution under program not automatically start of block search
MD52210 Bit 2 = 0 Show Softkey “T,S,M“ in JOG

Bit 2 = 0 area
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
Softkey Description
Machine —> JOG —> WCS selection
MD20098[X] Bit 16 = WCS actual

value window
MD20100 DIAMETER_AX = X
and MD52200 TECHNOLOGY = 1
and no DIAMOF or MCS active Switchover Softkey from MCS to WCS via
Switchover
MD20150[28] = 2 DIAMON PLC (DB19)
MCS/WCS
Softkey Description
Machine —> JOG —> MCS selection
Spindles are displayed only if in axis
mode, C1 not displayed
(Default setting)

MCS/WCS PLC (DB19)
Spindles are always displayed
alternative
Notes

Setup Turning A120

MD20110 RESET_MODE_MASK
Bit 6 = 1 Tool lenght compensati-
on is retained even after RESET
MD20130 = 1 Tool and tool edge
number retain active
Bit 16 = 1 Tool name or location number
Bit 16 = 1 enables the choice:
- Tool name
- Location number
Tool management function mask
Bit 14 = 1 Automatic Tool change during Reset and Start
MD35040
SPIND_ACTIV_AFTER_RESET
= 2 Own spindle reset
MD35000 AX3:C1 = 1
MD35000 AX4:TOOL = 3
MD35000 AX7:SP2 = 2
These selection fields are displayed
for the configured spindles only
MD35010 GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE of AX3:C1 Bit 1 = 1

and
MD35090 NUM_GEAR_STEPS of C1 Number of gear steps = 5
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
MD20152[7] G_CODE_RESET_MODE = 1
Work offset is retained even after Reset
Machine —> JOG —> Set WO
The softkey is highlighted if no G500 is active

and MCS is not selected
Notes

Setup Turning A120
MD52000 DISP_COORDINATE_SYSTEM = 34, Coordinate system position

33: Horizontal lathe with machining in front of the turning centre, 34: Horizontal lathe with machi-
ning behind the turning centre
Selection
Depending on the selection different

softkeys are displayed
Softkey Description
Machine —> JOG —> Measure tool selection

Bit 2 = 1 ment
MD52218 Bit 0 =1 Enable zoom under manual for tool

Bit 0 = 1 measurement

Bit 2 = 1 ment
Selection
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
MD52218 Bit 0 = 1
Enable zoom
SD54782 Bit 3 = 1
Select tool probe calibration data field
Notes

Setup Turning A120
Machine —> JOG —> Position
MD20098[2] Bit 20 = 0 Fade out spindle C1

MD20098[3] Bit 20 = 0 Fade out spindle TOOL
MD20098[6] Bit 20 = 0 Fade out spindle SP2
not displayed
Machine —> JOG —> Stock removal
SD55200 MAX_INP_FEED_PER_REV, Upper limit feedrate/rev

SD55201 MAX_INP_FEED_PER_TIME, Upper limit feedrate/min
SD55202 MAX_INP_FEED_PER_TOOTH, Upper limit feedrate/thooth
SD43220 SPIND_MAX_VELO_G26, Programmable upper spindle limitation G26

SD43230 SPIND_MAX_VELO_LIMS, Spindle speed limitation with G96
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
Softkey Description
Machine —> JOG —> Settings selection
MD35000 AX3:C1 = 1
MD35000 AX7:SP2 = 2
These selection fields are displayed
for the configured spindles only
MD10260 = 1 1: Enable basic system conversion
MD10260 CONVERT_SCALING = 1
Softkey Description
selection
MD51067 = 1 =1: Show handwheel window

(Handwheel must be configured in
MD11350)
Notes

Setup Turning A120

MD18080 SD54215 TM_FUNCTION_MASK_SET
TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK Bit 0 = 1 Diameter display for rotating tools
Bit 10 = 1 (Multitool)
Bit 8 = 1 Diameter display for transverse axis - Geometry
Softkey Description
selection
Bit 0 = 1 Create tool on magazine location not allowed
Bit 7 = 1 Create tool using the tool number
Bit 2 = 1 Create tool without name suggestion
Bit 3 = 1 Input disable for tool name and tool type in loaded tools
Bit 4 = 1 Input disable for loaded tools, if the channel is not in Reset
Bit 11 = 1 Creating tool in gripper disabled
MD19320 Bit 4 = 1 Enable Tool Mamagement

Bit 4 = 1
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
SD54215 TM_FUNCTION_MASK Bit 1 = 0 M3 right

SD54215 TM_FUNCTION_MASK Bit 1 = 1 M4 left
Default direction of rotation for new created tools
MD52229 ENABLE_QUICK_M_CODES
MD52230 M_CODE_ALL_COOLANTS_OFF
MD52233 M_CODE_COOLANT_1_AND_2_ON

Softkey Description
Parameter —> Tool wear selection
Bit 5 = 1 Calculate tool wear inputs additively
Bit 9 = 1 Diameter display for transverse axis - Wear
Turning tools
ΔRadius
MD52270 Bit 12 = 0 Enable Reactivate tool

SD54215 TM_FUNCTION_MASK_SET Bit 12 = 0
Bit 7 = 1 Fade out tool monitoring parameters
These columns are displayed with active tool time

monitoring only MD20320 Bit 0 = 1
Bit 10 = 1 Reactivate tool using Position magazine
Bit 11 = 1 Reactivate tool in all monitoring modes
Bit 12 = 1 Fade out Reactivate tool
Notes

Setup Turning A120
Softkey Description
Parameter —> Magazine selection
MD52270 Bit 8 = 0 Enable Relocate tool

Bit 8 = 0
MD52270 Bit 9 = 0 Enable Position magazine

Bit 9 = 0
Bit 8 = 1 Fade out Relocate tool
Bit 9 = 1 Fade out Position magazine
Softkey Description
Parameter —> Tool load selection
Bit 1 = 1 Load/unload disable, if machine is not in reset
Bit 2 = 1 Load/unload disable on Emergency stop
Bit 3 = 1 Load/unload tool to/from spindle is disabled
Bit 4 = 1 Loading is executed directly in the spindle
MD18080 Bit 10 = 1 The multitool function is available

Bit 10 = 1
MD52274 TM_TOOL_LOAD_STATION
Default setting = 0 All configured stations are taken into account
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
Softkey Description
Parameter —> Setting data selection
MD35000 AX3:C1 = 1
MD35000 AX7:SP2 = 2
Assignment of spindles to machine axes,
otherwise this fields are not displayed
Softkey Description
Parameter —> Setting data selection
The input fields for the MD53241 AX7:SP2 = X

tailstock data are display- 0 = Clamp from outside
ed only, if MD52218 Bit 2 = Jaw type 1
= 1 and the ShopMill/ 1 = Clamp from inside
ShopTurn option is set = Jaw type 2
MD53240[0] AX7:SP2 = 50
MD35240[1] AX7:SP2 = 40
MD53240[0] AX3:C1 = 40 MD35240[2] AX7:SP2 = 30
MD35240[1] AX3:C1 = 30
Tailstock Tailstock
MD53242[0] AX7:SP2 = 42 MD53242[0] AX3:C1 = 41
MD35242[1] AX7:SP2 = 72 MD35242[1] AX3:C1 = 71
Notes

Setup Turning A120
Machine —> MDA
Bit 3 = 1 The M code entered in MD10714 M_NO_FCT_EOP is
Softkey Description
selection
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
Machine —> TEACH IN —> Teach program
The “Teach prog.“ softkey is displayed when

selecting TEACH IN at the MCP
Softkey Description
selection
MSTT Taste Switchover operating mode from MDA to

TEACH IN TEACH IN via PLC (DB11)
Notes

Setup Turning A120
Softkey Description
Machine —> AUTO —> Time / Counter selection
MD27860 PROCESSTIMER_MODE
Bit 0 = 1 Measuring total runtime for all part programs
Bit 1 = 1 Measuring current program runtime
Bit 4 = 1 Measuring during active dry run feedrate
Bit 5 = 1 Measuring during program test
Bit 6 = 1 $AC_CYCLE_TIME is not deleted on start by ASUP
and PROG_EVENTs =1: Activate basic blocks with absolute
MD28400 = 1
values
MD27880 Bit 0 =1: Sotkey Time/Counter

MD27880 PART_COUNTER oder Bit 8 = 1 =0: Softkey Times (Default setting)
Bit 0 or 8 or both =1
MD27880 PART_COUNTER
Bit 0 = 1 Counter $AC_REQUIRED_PARTS
Bit 8 = 1 Counter $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS
Bit 11 = 1 Increment AC_ACTUAL_PARTS
with GOTOS
Softkey Description
selection
OPTION Simultan. recording (real-time simulation)
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
Machine —> AUTO —> Overstore
Bit 3 = 1 The M code entered in MD10714 M_NO_FCT_EOP is
Machine —> AUTO —> Program control

The marked selection is
displayed here
MD51039 PROGRAM_CONTROL_MODE_MASK
Bit 0 = 1 Program test function available
Selection
Notes

Setup Turning A120
Softkey Description
Machine —> AUTO —> Block search (ShopTurn) selection

MD51024 BLOCK_SEARCH_MODE_MASK_JS and Bit 1 = 1 ShopTurn program
Bit 0 and 1 =1
MD51024 BLOCK_SEARCH_MODE_MASK_JS, Bit mask for available search modes = 3H

(Default setting = 1H)
Softkey Description
Machine —> AUTO —> Block search (G code program) selection

MD51028 BLOCK_SEARCH_MODE_MASK and Bit 1 = 1 G code program
Bit 0 and 1 =1
MD51028 BLOCK_SEARCH_MODE_MASK Bit mask for available search modes = 33H

Notes

A120 Setup Turning
Softkey Description
Machine —> AUTO —> Simultaneous recording selection

Softkey bar with 3D
simulation option
Notes

Setup Turning A120
Program —> Edit
MD52200 TECHNOLOGY = 1 Turning
Softkey Description
selection
MD52201 TECHNOLOGY_EXT = 2
Subtechnology Milling

MD52201 = 2 =2: Subtechnology Milling
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
Softkey Beschreibung
Program manager —> Neu Anwahl
OPTION ShopMill/ShopTurn
PROGRAM MANAGER, New
Program —> Edit
ShopMill/ShopTurn option required
The same program shown as G code

w/o ShopMill/ShopTurn option
Notes

Setup Turning A120
Bit 0 = 0 Unhides input filed for mm/
inch
Selection
MD52212 FUNCTION_MASK_TECH
Bit 6 = 0, if 1 the Work offset value ZV
cannot be entered
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
Selection
MD52218 FUNCTION_MASK_TURN
Bit 2 = 1 Enable tailstock
SC = Safety distance
Bit 2 = 1 Depth calculation in milling cycles w/o SC
Selection
Bit 0 = 1 Milling cycles with synchronous operation
Notes

Setup Turning A120
MD52214 FUNCTION_MASK_MILL
Bit 4 = 1 Enable spindle clamping
MD52214 FUNCTION_MASK_MILL
Bit 3 = 1 Enable inside/rear machining
Milling: Longitudinal slot insertion

with closed clamping
Bit 0 CYCLE84
Bit 0 = 1 Unhide input fields Technology
Bit 1 CYCLE840 not relevant for ShopTurn
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
SD55216 FUNCTION_MASK_DRILL_SET
Bit 0 = Reverse the direction of spindle rotation during tapping
Bit 1 = Boring (CYCLE86) Consider rotation of the tool plane
Bit 2 = Boring (CYCLE86) Consider swiveled table kinematics
Bit 5 = Tapping (CYCLE840) Calculation of the break point at G33
Notes

Setup Turning A120
Program —> Turning
MD52218 FUNCTION_MASK_TURN
Bit 1 = 1 Enable parts gripper for cut-off
All grooving cycles, undercut thread and thread cycles

SD55500 TURN_FIN_FEED_PERCENT, Roughing feedrate for
complete machining in %
- Grooving cycles: all
- Undercut: Undercut thread DIN und Undercut thread
- Thread cycles: all
Stock removal:
SD55505 TURN_ROUGH_O_RELEASE_DIST, Return distance stock removal for external machining
SD55506 TURN_ROUGH_I_RELEASE_DIST, Return distance stock removal for internal machining
Groove:
SD55510 TURN_GROOVE_DWELL_TIME, Negative value = clearance time in spindle revolutions
Positive value = clearance time in seconds
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
Bit 1 = 1 Calculate thread depth from metric
thread lead
Note: As soon as the line table "None" is selec-
ted, the parameter H1 kann be overwritten
Table
Selection
Bit 2 = 1 Refer to the table for thread diameter
and depth
Note: As soon as the line table "ISO metric" is
selected, the table is activated for the various
threads
Notes

Setup Turning A120
Softkey Description
Program —> Contour turning selection

Contour turning:
SD55580 TURN_CONT_RELEASE_ANGLE, Retraction angle
SD55581 TURN_CONT_RELEASE_DIST, Retraction value
SD55582 TURN_CONT_TRACE_ANGLE, Minimum angle for rounding along contour
SD55583 TURN_CONT_VARIABLE_DEPTH, Percentage for variable cutting depth
SD55584 TURN_CONT_BLANK_OFFSET, Blank allowance
SD55585 TURN_CONT_INTERRUPT_TIME, Feed interrupt time (neg. values = revolutions)
SD55586 TURN_CONT_INTER_RETRACTION, Retraction path after feed interrupt OPTION Residual material detection and machining
SD55587 TURN_CONT_MIN_REST_MAT_AX1, Min. difference dimension res. machining axis 1
SD55588 TURN_CONT_MIN_REST_MAT_AX2, Min. difference dimension res. machining axis 2
Plunge turning:
SD55595 TURN_CONT_TOOL_BEND_RETR, Retraction path due to tool bending
SD55596 TURN_CONT_TURN_RETRACTION, Retraction depth prior to turning
MD52210 FUNCTION_MASK
Bit 1 = 1 Front view for turning in
school coordinate system (Default)
TRANSMIT and TRACYL

must be configured
MD52210 FUNCTION_MASK
Bit 1 = 0 Front view in coordina-
te system of the machine
Notes

A120 Setup Turning
Selection
Selection of the machining plane for Subtechnology

milling (MD52201 = 2)
Bit 2 = 1 Refer to the table for thread diameter
and depth
Note: As soon as the line table "ISO metric" is Table
selected, the table is activated for the various
threads
Selection
Notes

Setup Turning A120
Program —> Various —> counter spindle
M codes for open/close chuck:

MD52250[X] M_CODE_CHUCK_OPEN, M code for Open chuck with non-rotating
spindle
MD52251[X] M_CODE_CHUCK_OPEN_ROT, M code for Open chuck with rotating
spindle
MD52252[X] M_CODE_CHUCK_CLOSE, M code for Close chuck
Machining with counter spindle: Fixed stop

SD55550 TURN_FIXED_STOP_DIST, Distance for travel to fixed stop
SD55551 TURN_FIXED_STOP_FEED, Feedrate for travel to fixed stop
SD55552 TURN_FIXED_STOP_FORCE, Force in percent travel to fixed stop
SD55553 TURN_FIXED_STOP_RETRACTION, Retraction path prior to chucking
after travel to fixed stop
MD37050 AX6:Z2 FIXED_TURN_ALARM_MASK, Enable of the fixed stop alarms
SD55232 SUB_SPINDLE_REL_POS, Z retraction position for the counter spindle
Machining with counter spindle: Cut-off check

SD55540 TURN_PART_OFF_CTRL_DIST, Distance for cut-off check
SD55541 TURN_PART_OFF_CTRL_FEED, Feedrate for cut-off check
SD55542 TURN_PART_OFF_CTRL_FORCE, Force in percent for cut-off check
SD55543 TURN_PART_OFF_RETRACTION, Retraction path prior to cut-off with
counter spindle
Softkey Description
Program —> Simulation selection
MD51226 FUNCTION_MASK_SIM
Bit 0 = 1 No automatic start on simulation selection
MD53230 SIM_START_POSITION
for AX1:X1 e.g. 500mm, for AX2:Z1 e.g. 200mm.
The simulation is possible only, if for at least one geo-
axis a value not equal to 0 has been set.
MD52200 TECH-
NOLOGY = 0
MD52200 TECH-
Notes

A120 END Setup Turning
Program —> Measure workpiece
MD52201 = 0
no Subtechnology
MD52201 = 2
Measurement cycles option
Program —> Measure tool
MD52201 = 0
no Subtechnology
MD52201 = 2
Measurement cycles option
B120: END
Notes

A121 Setup Y-axis
Sinumerik
Operate
Module Description:
A turning machine with the linear axes X1 and Z1 as well as a main spindle C1 and a driven tool
TOOL, now an additional Y-axis is to be added and tested.
The way of checking the undertaken parameterization is shown by means of examples and illustra-
tions.
Module Objective:
By means of this module you will learn which MD's must be adapted in order to retrofit a Y-axis to
an operative machine and at the end check it's function. In case of the transformations the special
aspects regarding the slot-wall correction will be pointed out.
Content:
Sinumerik
Setting up the Y-axis
TRANSMIT/TRACYL
Machining examples

EN_A121_V1.1
A121

Setup Y-axis A121
Extension
Y-axis:
START
Setting up
the Y-axis
TRANSMIT/
TRACYL
Machining
examples
Extension
Y-axis:
END
Notes

A121 Setup Y-axis
Setting up the Y-axis Assignment of geometry axis to the channel axis:
Specification of the axes and their sequence for the layout on

MD10000[x] the display screen.
$MN_AXCONF_MACHAX_ Machine axis name The assignment must be made channel-specifically for all
NAME_TAB geometry axes. If no assignment is made for one geometry
Default: X1, Y1, Z1, A1, B1, axis, then this axis will be non-existent and cannot be pro-
Change to: grammed (with the name as specified under MD20060
C1, U1
$MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB).
MD10000[0] =X1 MD20050[x]

Assignment of geometry axis
MD10000[1] =Y1 → Z1 $MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_
to channel axis
MD10000[2] =Z1 → C1 ASSIGN_TAB
MD10000[3] =A1→ TOOL Default: 1, 2, 3 Change to:
MD10000[4] =B1 → Y1
MD10000[5] =C1 → Z2
MD10000[6] =U1 → SP2
The basic machine was originally commissioned with an axis-
New: gap.
MD10000[4] =B1 → Y1
Standard current new
axis axis axis
MD20050[0] 1 X 1 X 1 X
MD20050[1] 2 Y 0 5 Y
MD20050[2] 3 Z 2 Z 2 Z
MD20070[x] MD20080[x]
Machine axis number valid in $MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_ Channel axis name in channel
$MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_
channel NAME_TAB
USED
Default: 1, 2, 3, 0, 0, 0 Change to: Default: X, Y, Z, A, B, C, U Change to:
MD20070[0] =1
MD20070[1] =2 MD20080[0] =X
MD20070[2] =3 MD20080[1] =Y → Z
MD20070[3] =4 MD20080[2] =Z → C
MD20070[4] =0 → 5 MD20080[3] =A → TOOL
MD20070[5] =0 MD20080[4] =B → Y
MD20070[6] =0 MD20080[5] =C → Z2
MD20080[6] =U→ SP2
New:
MD20070[4] =0 → 5 New:
MD20080[4] =B → Y
Notes

Setup Y-axis A121
Description:
MD52206[x] Meaning of the axes in the
$MCS_AXIS_USAGE channel 0 = No special meaning
1 = Tool spindle (driven tool)
Default: 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 Change to: 2 = Extension spindle (driven tool)
3 = Main spindle (Turning)
4 = C-axis of the main spindle (Turning)
Meaning of the axes in the channel: 5 = Counter spindle (Turning)
MD52206[0]: Meaning of the axes in the channel = 0 6 = C-axis of the counter spindle (Turning)
MD52206[1]: Meaning of the axes in the channel = 0 7 = Linear axis of the counter spindle (Turning)
MD52206[2]: Meaning of the axes in the channel = 3 8 = Tailstock (Turning)
MD52206[3]: Meaning of the axes in the channel = 1 9 = Steady (Turning)
MD52206[4]: Meaning of the axes in the channel = 0 10 = B-axis (Turning)
MD52206[5]: Meaning of the axes in the channel = 0
New: Validation of the changed MD's

Matching the MD's for the Y-axis AX5:Y1

MD30130 =0 → 1 for real axis, 0 for simulation (command
value)
MD30240 =0 Simulation (actual value encoder)
MD30300 =0
MD30310 =0
MD30320 =0
MD30350 =0 → 1 for axis simulation
MD34000 =1 → 0 axis without a reference point stop
Text in Italics mark entries for simulated axes.
Some of the undertaken changes will be activated only after

renewed Power ON (Softkey “Reset (po) )“ valid.
Scrolling the axes with Softkey Axis +/-)
The axis “Y1“ is now also visible in the machine configuration.
All axes, spindles and rotary axes can be traversed in both

directions by means of the operating elements.
Notes

A121 Setup Y-axis
Check of the installed axes and spindles:
The Y-axis is now available.
As a reminder:
MD52010 $MCS_DISP_NUM_AXIS_BIG_FONT is set to 3,
hence the 3 geo-axes are shown in large type.
The axis Y1 is now available.
Setting up the oblique Y-axis
_________________________________________________
Note:
The "Oblique Y-axis“ must be regarded as a special case. In

order to be able to use this function, the option “Oblique axis“
is required, - Order Nr. 6FC5800-0AM28-0YB0.
The "Oblique Y-axis“ is not part of this documentation.
Function
If your turning machine features an oblique axis (i.e. an axis
that is not perpendicular to the axes X and Z) you can still
programme the entire machining operation in Cartesian co-
ordinates. The control unit transforms the Cartesian co-
ordinates into the motions of the oblique axis using the func-
tion oblique axis (TRAANG).
Notes

Setup Y-axis A121
TRANSMIT/TRACYL  Cylinder mantle transformation main spindle: Transfor-

mation 3 without slot side wall correction (with C–axis):
General aspects MD 24300 $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_3=512
The basic information and machine data settings have al- with slot side wall correction and Y–correction
ready been described in module A120. Only the differences MD 24300 $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_3=514
and specialities regarding the transformations TRANSMIT
and TRACYL in conjunction with the Y-axis.  Cylinder mantle transformation counter spindle: Transfor-
mation 4 without slot side wall correction (with C_2–axis):
_________________________________________________ MD 24400 $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_4=512
with slot side wall correction and Y–correction:
Note 1:
MD 24400 $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_4=514
There are 4 different sets of data that all have to be set up; The following axes are being assumed for the configuration of
2 for the main spindle (TRANSMIT/TRACYL) and 2 for the TRANSMIT/TRACYL:
counter spindle (TRANSMIT/TRACYL): Index
_________________________________________________ 20080[0] $MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB = X 1
 Front face machining main spindle: Transformation 1 20080[2] $MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB = C 3
MD 24100 $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_1=256 (with C–axis) 20080[3] $MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB = TOOL 4
MD 24100 $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_1=257 (with Y–axis) 20080[4] $MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB = Y 5
 Front face machining counter spindle: Transformation 2
MD 24200 $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_2=256 (with C_2–axis) The table alongside shows the settings of TRAFO_TYPES 1
MD 24200 $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_2=257 (with Y–axis) and 3 for machining with the main spindle and the TRA-
FO_TYPES 2 and 4 for machining with the counter spindle.
Slot side wall correction
Description:
If the machine features a real Y-axis, an extended TRACYL-
variant "Type 514“ can be projected. This permits the machin-
ing of slots with side wall correction: Slot side wall and bottom
are perpendicular to one another - even if the cutter diameter
is less than the slot width. This under other circumstances is
possible only if the diameter is the same as the slot width.
The following sketches show the machining of a slot The slot side wall correction is available only for
 without slot side wall correction: By rotation of the  longitudinal slots
C-axis the slot walls are not parallel
 transverse slots
 With slot side wall correction: The slot width is ob-
tained by the displacement of the Y-axis - the slot  slots in any direction (contours)
walls are now parallel to one another
The transformation of the type 514 in case of a machine with
a further linear axis makes use of the redundancy in order to
obtain a better tool correction. Applicable for the second line-
ar axis (Y-axis) is now:
● a reduced working range and
● that the second linear axis should not be used for exe-
cution of the part-program.
A programming example will be found on the following pages.
Notes

A121 Setup Y-axis
TRANSMIT/TRACYL
type
type
MD MD
MD24100 256 257 MD24200 256 257
Main Spindle
Counter Spindle
MD24110[0] 1 (X) 1 (X) MD24210[0] 1 (X) 1 (X)
MD24110[1] 2 —> 3 (C) 2 —> 3 (C) MD24210[1] 2 —> 7 (SP2) 2 —> 7 (SP2)
MD24110[2] 3 —> 2 (Z) 3 —> 2 (Z) MD24210[2] 3 —> 2 (Z) 3 —> 2 (Z)
MD24110[3] 4 —> 0 4 —> 5 (Y) MD24210[3] 4 —> 0 4 —> 5 (Y)
MD24110[4] 5 —> 0 5 —> 0 MD24210[4] 5 —> 0 5 —> 0
MD24120[0] 0 —> 1 (X) 0 —> 1 (X) MD24220[0] 0 —> 1 (X) 0 —> 1 (X)
MD24120[1] 0 —> 3 (C) 0 —> 3 (C) MD24220[1] 0 —> 7 (SP2) 0 —> 7 (SP2)
MD24120[2] 0 —> 2 (Z) 0 —> 2 (Z) MD24220[2] 0 —> 2 (Z) 0 —> 2 (Z)
MD24400 512 514
Trafo type4 TRACYL

MD24300 512 514
Trafo type3 TRACYL
MD24310[0] 1 (X) 1 (X) MD24410[0] 1 (X) 1 (X)

MD24310[1] 2 —> 3 (C) 2 —> 3 (C) MD24410[1] 2 —> 7 (SP2) 2 —> 7 (SP2)
MD24310[2] 3 —> 2 (Z) 3 —> 2 (Z) MD24410[2] 3 —> 2 (Z) 3 —> 2 (Z)
MD24310[3] 4 —> 0 4 —> 5 (Y) MD24410[3] 4 —> 0 4 —> 5 (Y)
MD24310[4] 5 —> 0 5 —> 0 MD24410[4] 5 —> 0 5 —> 0
MD24320[0] 0 —> 1 (X) 0 —> 1 (X) MD24420[0] 0 —> 1 (X) 0 —> 1 (X)
MD24320[1] 0 —> 3 (C) 0 —> 3 (C) MD24420[1] 0 —> 7 (SP2) 0 —> 7 (SP2)
MD24320[2] 0 —> 2 (Z) 0 —> 2 (Z) MD24420[2] 0 —> 2 (Z) 0 —> 2 (Z)
Validation of the changed MD's
After all parameters have been entered they

must be validated by means of the Soft-Key
“Set MD active (cf)“.
Furthermore a re-boot is required for the simu-

lation and the graphical simulation. This can be
achieved either by means of the Softkey "HMI
Reboot“ or by switching the machine OFF and
back ON again.
Notes

Setup Y-axis A121
Machining examples Create contour description:

 Front face C, Starting point X=25 abs, Y =10 abs
In the drilling and milling cycles and in the contour descrip-  Straight X=-15 abs
tions the following machining faces can be selected in case of  Straight Y=0 abs
a real Y-axis:
 Mantle C
 Mantle Y
 Front face C
 Front face Y
Tool list
1st Machining example on the front face C
Continuous path milling on front face C and technology data Starting the simulation:
Note:
In order for the depiction of the simulation to correspond to
the depiction of the contour programming, the transformation
has been deactivated (TRAFOOF) following the continuous
path milling and the C-axis positioned into the basic position
(G0 C1=0). Otherwise the depiction would be shown in the
last C-axis position to be approached =180 degrees; in other
words rotated by 180 degrees.
Notes

A121 Setup Y-axis
2nd machining example front face Y Create contour description:

 Front face Y, Starting point X=25 abs, Y =10 abs
 Straight X=-15 abs
 Straight Y=0 abs
Continuous path milling front face Y and technology data: Start simulation:
The depiction in the simulation corresponds to the depiction

in contour input mask.
Notes

Setup Y-axis A121
3rd programming example for mantle face machining Program header with blank definition:
with slot side wall correction
Create contour description: Contour description:
A slot with parallel walls is to be milled. For this it is not the

contour of the slot that is to be programmed, instead it is an
imaginative central path of a bolt being moved along the slot
that has to be programmed.
 Mantle C, starting point Y=0 abs, Z=10 abs

 Straight Z=-40 abs
 Straight Z=0 abs
For the slot side wall correction it is most important, that the
contour is programmed back to the starting point since the
slot mill traverses along this contour with the necessary Y-
axis offset.
Notes

A121 END Setup Y-axis
Continuous path milling and technology data: Machining sequence:
Note: Tool "M_FRAESER_8“, diameter = 8 mm

Offset to the programmed contour D = 6 mm
The slot side wall correction must be used only in conjunction Resulting slot width: 12 mm (= 2x D)
with the radius correction. The input parameter D determines
the width of the slot = offset to the programmed path. In case of cylinder mantle curve transformation with slot side
wall correction the axis used for the correction (Y-axis) should
be set to 0 (y=0) such that the slot will be machined centrally
to the programmed slot centre line.
Travelling paths:
The entry into the slot takes place at a position of -2 mm
(D - tool diameter), the return path takes place at a Y-position
of +2 mm (-D + tool diameter).
The difference in the Y-axis is therefore 4mm. If the slot-mill
diameter of 8 mm is added the slot width of 12mm is ob-
tained.
The simulation below shows the retraction from the slot.
Simulation depiction:
Note:
In the mask "Path milling “ the radius correction "to the left of
the contour“ is selected. Alternatively it is also possible to
select the radius correction "to the right of the contour“. The
only difference is the direction of traverse in the slot, i.e. when
entering the slot the Y-axis is positioned on +2 mm, on the
way back on -2 mm. The result on the work piece is identical.
A121: END
Notes

A122 Setup Counter spindle/Tailstock
Sinumerik
Operate
Module Description:
In this module a counter spindle will first of all be set up and shown as to which settings are re-
quired for the axis Z2 and the spindle SP2. In a subsequent step the technologies TRANSMIT will
be set up for the counter spindle and the technology TRACYL for the available axes/spindles. After
that follows the configuration for "Traverse to fixed stop" as well as for cutting-off. Lastly the setting
up of the counter spindle tailstock will be described.
A simple machining example using the main and the counter spindle, supported by illustrations, will
be used to thoroughly check the functionality.
A more complex machining example for facing with the main spindle, followed by circumferential
machining using the counter spindle and finally a facing operation with the counter spindle will be
used to check the functionality of TRANSMIT and TRACYL. This example, too, will be illustrated by
pictures showing the machining progress.
Module Objective:
With the aid of this module you will learn matching of general MD, channel MD and axis MD, in or-
der to extend the functionality of the machine and to equip the counter spindle with the technology
TRANSMIT/TRACYL. The travelling to a fixed stop as well as the cutting-off and the setting-up of a
tail stock for the counter spindle complete the functionality of the machine.
Content:
Sinumerik
Counter spindle set-up
TRANSMIT TRACYL for the counter spindle set-up
Travelling to a fixed stop
Tailstock for the counter spindle set-up
Machining example MSp - CSp
Machining example MSp - CSp TRANSMIT TRACYL

EN_A122_V1.1
A122

Setup Counter spindle/Tailstock A122
Machining
Counter spindle/ example
Tailstock set-up: MSp - CSp
START TRANSMIT
TRACYL
Counter Counter spindle/

spindle Tailstock set-up:
set-up END
TRANSMIT
TRACYL for
the counter
spindle
set-up
Travelling to
a fixed stop
Tailstock for
the counter
spindle
set-up
Machining
example
MSp - CSp
Notes

Counter spindle set-up Before machining the rear face, the counter spindle must
grab the work piece, pull it away from the main spindle and
If your machine features a counter spindle, you will be able to move it to the new machining location.
machine work pieces using turning, drilling and milling opera-
tions on all faces without having to re-load the work piece
manually.
Setting-up the axis and spindle Meaning of the axes in the channel
_________________________________________________
Meaning of the axes in the chan-
Note: MD52206 $MCS_AXIS_USAGE
nel
The spindle denominations C2 and C3 are not permissible,
[4] = 7 Linear axis of the counter spindle (Turning)
since these denominations are already used in the numerical
range of MD10620 – MD10640.
[5] = 8 Counter spindle (Turning)
If these abbreviations are used, the error message 4020
"Denomination C2 used repeatedly in the machine datum
$MN_AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB“
_________________________________________________
Default =0
MD10000[5] =C1 → Z2 MD52206[5] = 0 → 7 Linear axis of the counter spindle

MD10000[6] =U1 → SP2 MD52206[6] = 0 → 5 Counter spindle
MD20070[5] =0 → 6
MD20070[6] =0 → 7
MD20080[5] =C → Z2
MD20080[6] =U → SP2
Notes

Matching of the axis MD for rotary axis/spindle AX6:Z2 (Linear axis of the counter spindle)
MD30130 = 0 → 1 for real axis, 0 for simulation (command
value)
MD30240 = 0 = Simulation (actual value Encoder)
MD30300 = 0 remains
MD30310 = 0 remains
MD30320 = 0 remains
MD30350 = 0 → 1 for axis simulation
Text in italics shows entries for simulated axes.

________________________________________________
Note:
In the axis MD's 32000, 32010, 32020, 35100, 35110, 35120,
35130, 36200 the speeds of the - possibly - available gearbox
steps and their minimum and maximum limits must be en-
tered depending on the machine execution.
(Scrolling of axes using Softkey axis +/-) ________________________________________________
AX7:SP2 (Counter spindle)
MD30130 = 0 → 1 for real axis, 0 for Simulation (com. value)
MD30240 = 0 = Simulation (actual value encoder)
MD30300 = 0 → 1 axis is rotary axis
MD30310 = 0 → 1 Modulo transformation for rotary axis
MD30320 = 0 → 1 actual value readout Modulo
MD30350 = 0 → 1 for axis simulation
MD34000 = 1 → 0 axis without reference cam
MD35000 = 0 → 2 Assignment spindle to machine axis
(spindle S2)
Check of the installed axes and spindles:
The axis Z2 and the spindle SP2 is now available.
Notes

Own spindle RESET MD35040 $MA_SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET = 1:

 Spindle does not stop.
MD35040 Own spindle RESET
$MA_SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET  Program is terminated.
This machine datum defines the spindle response after a channel reset MD35040 $MA_SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET= 2:
NC/PLC-interface signal DB21-30 DBX7.7 (Reset) and end-of-program  spindle does not stop for the M-function projected in
(M2, M30). MD10714 $MN_M_NO_FCT_EOP (e.g. M32).
This functionality is required for instance in order to be able to start the
spindle continuously (e.g. for scratching).  however, the spindle stops on channel or Bag-reset.
Default: 0 Change to: 2 The NC/PLC-interface signal DB31, ... DBX2.2 (clear distance
-to-go/spindle reset) always acts independently of MD35040
$MA_SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET.
Change for main and tool spindles:
Not applicable to:
MD35040 of AX3:C1 = 2  Spindle modes-of-operation other than program mode.
MD35040 of AX4:TOOL = 2
Corresponds to:
New
NC/PLC-interface signal DB21-30 DBX7.7 (Reset)
MD35040 of AX7: SP2 of 0 → 2 NC/PLC-interface signal DB31, ... DBX2.2 (clear distance-to-
go/spindle reset)
MD35040 $MA_SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET = 0:
 Spindle stops (after M2/M30 and channel-as well as Bag-
Reset).
 Program is terminated.
MD10714 $MN_M_NO_FCT_EOP M function for spindle active

after reset
32 means „M32“ for the end-of-program of a program produced in the

mode-of-operation „JOG“ or „MDA“
The setting was already implicated on the basic machine
Suggestion: M32
Limitations: see MD10715 $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE
Corresponds to:
MD35040 $MA_SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET
MD10715 $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE,
MD20094 $MC_SPIND_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR
MD22254 $MC_AUXFU_ASSOC_M0_VALUE
Note:
A detailed description can be found in module A120 in
the section JOG-T,S,M.
Notes

Travelling direction Description:

By means of this MD the direction of motion of the machine
The following settings must be made to inform the user inter- can be reversed. The conventions, however, will not be lifted
face and the cycles in which direction the spindles and rotary in this case; i.e. the rules will be upheld.
axes are rotating.
The direction of rotation of an NC-rotary axis is specified via _________________________________________________
the MD32100 $MA_AX_MOTION_DIR.
Note:
For SINAMICS-Drives it is recommended to utilise the direc-
These settings are: tion reversal in the drive. See P1821 under the control Unit
Specific to machine manufacturers. MD (Drive MD).
With reference to the work piece the main and the counter
Traversing direction (not spindle must have the same direction-of-rotation and speed in
MD32100 $MA_AX_MOTION_DIR order to enable the transfer of the work piece from the main
control direction)
to the counter spindle under synchronous running conditions.
-1 Direction reversal
0, 1 No direction reversal The machine manufacturer cycle CUST_TECHCYC.SPF is
called up in the ShopTurn cycles.
Default: 1
Here the default for the coupling of the main and counter
spindle can be changed Mark _M120.
_________________________________________________
Specifying the direction of rotation As a reminder: Here once more the axis indexes
MD52206[5] = 7 Linear axis of the counter spindle (Turning)

Set the directions of rotation for the user interface in the fol-
lowing machine datum: MD52206[6] = 5 Counter spindle (Turning)
Attributes of the axes
MD52207[x] Note:
Axis attributes
MCS_AXIS_USAGE_ATTRIB In order to be able to use the counter spindle on your ma-
chine, the following software-options will be required:
Direction of rotation is counter-clockwise (for rotary
Bit 3
axes)
 "Travelling to a fixed stop with Force Control"
Indicated direction of rotation for M3 is counter- Order Nr. 6FC5800-0AM01-0YB0
Bit 4
clockwise (for spindles) Is required if cutting-off in the counter spindle is envis-
aged.
Direction of rotation M3 means rotary axis minus (for
Bit 5 spindles). This Bit must be set analogous to the
PLC-Bit DBnn.DBX17.6!
 “Generic coupling "CP-STATIC“
Default: 0H
Notes

From this derive the following setting possibilities for the counter spindle. The settings of the machine data, however, depend on
the direction of viewing the co-ordinate axis.
No matter as to which of the four combinations of MD52207[6] Bit 3 und Bit 4 shown below the machine manufacturer selects, it
is imperative that the settings shown in one line for DB3n.DBX17.6 and MD52207[6] Bit 5 are used.
52207[6] SP2 52207[6] SP2 DB3n. 52207[6] SP2

Direction of rotation counter spindle Bit 3 Bit 4 DBX17.6 Bit 5
1 1 0 0
1 0 1 1
0 0 0 0
0 1 1 1
The setting of the machine datum MD52207 Bit 3 assumes that the direction of viewing is in direction of the negative Z-axis . If,
however, you are looking in the positive direction of the co-ordinate axis, the values must be reversed; i.e. "0" and "1" must be
interchanged.
Note:
The MD52207[6] of the counter spindle affects
 the readout of the spindle direction in the user interface
 the depiction in the simulation and for sketching
 the direction of rotation of the spindle after a tool change according to the direction of rotation from the tool.
Notes

Setting up TRANSMIT and TRACYL for the counter

spindle  Front face machining Main spindle: Transformation 1
MD 24100 $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_1=256 (with C–axis)
General aspects
 Front face machining counter spindle: Transformation 2
With the functions cylinder mantle transformation and front MD 24200 $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_2=256 (with C_2–axis)
face machining both the cylindrical surface as well as the MD 24200 $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_2=257 (with Y–axis)
front face of a work piece can be machined.
 Cylinder mantle transformation Main spindle: Transfor-
The functions cylinder mantle transformation (TRACYL) and mation 3 without slot side face correction (with C–axis):
front face machining (TRANSMIT) are a Software option. MD 24300 $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_3=512
The functions must be set up additionally by means of ma- With slot side face correction and Y–Correction:
chine data. MD 24300 $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_3=514
_________________________________________________  Cylinder mantle transformation counter spindle: Transfor-

Note 1: mation 4 without slot side face correction (with C_2–axis):
MD 24400 $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_4=512
TRANSMIT and TRACYL are set up differently depending on
whether a Y-axis is available or not. Described here is the With slot side face correction and Y–correction:
method used without a Y-axis. MD 24400 $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_4=514
Note 2:
There are 4 different sets of data that must all be set up; 2 for
the main spindle (TRANSMIT/TRACYL) and 2 for the counter
spindle (TRANSMIT/TRACYL):
Note 3: These MD's were already configured in the module A120

in section TRANSMIT/TRACYL for the main spindle.
With the function TRANSMIT/TRACYL a non-existent Y-axis
will be simulated by an interpolation between X/C (in case of MD10602 $MN_FRAME_GEOAX_CHANGE_MODE = 1
TRANSMIT) or Z/C (in case of TRACYL). In this configuration MD24040 $MC_FRAME_ADAPT_MODE = 7H
example there is beside the counter spindle no separate C-
axis as feed drive for the C-axis mode-of-operation. For this The sets of data for TRANSMIT and TRACYL described be-
reason the channel index of the counter spindle must be en- low are as required for the horizontal lathe with machining
tered for the C_2-axis into the configuration data for TRANS- behind the turning centre as configured here and the axis
MIT/TRACYL.. configuration as described above. Nevertheless the condi-
tions on the machine might require matching of this set of
data, such as for instance the direction of rotation of the
As a reminder: the machine is already configured thus: C-axis in case of the transformation or the input of an offset.
Index
20080[0] $MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB = X 1
20080[2] $MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB = C 3
20080[3] $MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB = TOOL 4
20080[4] $MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB = Y 5
Notes

Front face machining (TRANSMIT )

type
type
MD MD
MD24100 256 257 MD24200 256 257
Main Spindle
Counter Spindle
MD24110[0] 1 (X) 1 (X) MD24210[0] 1 (X) 1 (X)
MD24110[1] 2 —> 3 (C) 2 —> 3 (C) MD24210[1] 2 —> 7 (SP2) 2 —> 7 (SP2)
MD24110[2] 3 —> 2 (Z) 3 —> 2 (Z) MD24210[2] 3 —> 2 (Z) 3 —> 2 (Z)
MD24110[3] 4 —> 0 4 —> 5 (Y) MD24210[3] 4 —> 0 4 —> 5 (Y)
MD24110[4] 5 —> 0 5 —> 0 MD24210[4] 5 —> 0 5 —> 0
MD24120[0] 0 —> 1 (X) 0 —> 1 (X) MD24220[0] 0 —> 1 (X) 0 —> 1 (X)
MD24120[1] 0 —> 3 (C) 0 —> 3 (C) MD24220[1] 0 —> 7 (SP2) 0 —> 7 (SP2)
MD24120[2] 0 —> 2 (Z) 0 —> 2 (Z) MD24220[2] 0 —> 2 (Z) 0 —> 2 (Z)
MD24400 512 514
Trafo type4 TRACYL

MD24300 512 514
Trafo type3 TRACYL
MD24310[0] 1 (X) 1 (X) MD24410[0] 1 (X) 1 (X)

MD24310[1] 2 —> 3 (C) 2 —> 3 (C) MD24410[1] 2 —> 7 (SP2) 2 —> 7 (SP2)
MD24310[2] 3 —> 2 (Z) 3 —> 2 (Z) MD24410[2] 3 —> 2 (Z) 3 —> 2 (Z)
MD24310[3] 4 —> 0 4 —> 5 (Y) MD24410[3] 4 —> 0 4 —> 5 (Y)
MD24310[4] 5 —> 0 5 —> 0 MD24410[4] 5 —> 0 5 —> 0
MD24320[0] 0 —> 1 (X) 0 —> 1 (X) MD24420[0] 0 —> 1 (X) 0 —> 1 (X)
MD24320[1] 0 —> 3 (C) 0 —> 3 (C) MD24420[1] 0 —> 7 (SP2) 0 —> 7 (SP2)
MD24320[2] 0 —> 2 (Z) 0 —> 2 (Z) MD24420[2] 0 —> 2 (Z) 0 —> 2 (Z)
Front face machining (TRANSMIT ) Rotary axis offset TRANSMIT 2
Offset of rotary axis for the 2nd TRANSMIT trans- MD24955

formation $MC_TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_ Rotary axis offset TRANSMIT 2
FRAME_2
MD24950 Default: 0 Change to: 1

Offset of rotary axis for the 2nd
$MC_TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_
OFFSET_2
MD24955 = 0 → 1 required
Default: 0 Grad Change to:
Description:
MD24950 = 0 0: axial rotary axis offset is not considered
Description: 1: axial rotary axis offset is considered
States the offset of the rotary axis in degrees in relation to the 2: axial rotary axis offset is considered until SZS.
zero position while TRANSMIT is active for the second
agreed TRANSMIT-transformation. The SZS-frames include transformed rotations around the
rotary axis.
Corresponds to:
MD24900 $MC_TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1 For further details see description of the first TRANSMIT-
function for the main spindle in module A120.
For further details see description of the first TRANSMIT-
Notes

Sign of rotary axis for 2nd TRANSMIT transfor- Restriction of working range before/behind the
mation pole, 2. TRANSMIT
MD24960 MD24961 Restriction of working range

Sign of rotary axis for 2nd
$MC_TRANSMIT_ROT_ $MC_TRANSMIT_POLE_ before/behind the pole, 2.
SIGN_IS_PLUS_2 SIDE_FIX_2 TRANSMIT
Default: 1 Change to: 0 Default: 0 Change to: 1
MD24960 = 1 → 0 Match to the machine conditions MD24961 = 0 → 1
Indicates the sign with which the rotary axis is taken into Restriction of the working range before/behind the pole or
account in the TRACYL transformation for the 2nd agreed else no restriction; i.e. travelling through the pole.
TRACYL transformation for each channel. The sign of the
virtual Y-axis is meant in this context. The assigned values have the following meaning:
Corresponds to: 1: Working area of linear axis for positions >= 0,
MD24910 $MC_TRANSMIT_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1 (if tool length correction parallel to the linear axis = 0)
2: Working area of linear axis for positions <=0,
(if tool length correction parallel to the linear axis = 0)
0: No restriction of working area. Traversal through pole.
For further details see description of the first TRANSMIT-

Vector of base tool for 2nd TRANSMIT transfor-

mation
MD24970[x]
Vector of base tool for 2nd
$MC_TRANSMIT_BASE_
TOOL_2
MD24970[0] = 0
MD24970[1] = 0
MD24970[2] = 0
Description:
States a basic offset for the tool zero point offset for the 2nd
TRANSMIT-transformation. This MD will only be required. For
the standard application the default is applicable.
The index i takes the values 0, 1, 2 for the 1st to the 3rd ge-
ometry axis.
Corresponds to:
MD24920 $MC_TRANSMIT_BASE_TOOL_1
Notes

Cylinder mantle transformation (TRACYL)

type
Trafo
type
MD MD
MD24200 256 257
Counter Spindle
MD24100 256 257
Main Spindle
MD24110[0] 1 (X) 1 (X) MD24210[0] 1 (X) 1 (X)

MD24110[1] 2 —> 3 (C) 2 —> 3 (C) MD24210[1] 2 —> 7 (SP2) 2 —> 7 (SP2)
MD24110[2] 3 —> 2 (Z) 3 —> 2 (Z) MD24210[2] 3 —> 2 (Z) 3 —> 2 (Z)
MD24110[3] 4 —> 0 4 —> 5 (Y) MD24210[3] 4 —> 0 4 —> 5 (Y)
MD24110[4] 5 —> 0 5 —> 0 MD24210[4] 5 —> 0 5 —> 0
MD24120[0] 0 —> 1 (X) 0 —> 1 (X) MD24220[0] 0 —> 1 (X) 0 —> 1 (X)
MD24120[1] 0 —> 3 (C) 0 —> 3 (C) MD24220[1] 0 —> 7 (SP2) 0 —> 7 (SP2)
MD24120[2] 0 —> 2 (Z) 0 —> 2 (Z) MD24220[2] 0 —> 2 (Z) 0 —> 2 (Z)
MD24400 512 514
Trafo type4 TRACYL

MD24300 512 514
Trafo type3 TRACYL
MD24310[0] 1 (X) 1 (X) MD24410[0] 1 (X) 1 (X)

MD24310[1] 2 —> 3 (C) 2 —> 3 (C) MD24410[1] 2 —> 7 (SP2) 2 —> 7 (SP2)
MD24310[2] 3 —> 2 (Z) 3 —> 2 (Z) MD24410[2] 3 —> 2 (Z) 3 —> 2 (Z)
MD24310[3] 4 —> 0 4 —> 5 (Y) MD24410[3] 4 —> 0 4 —> 5 (Y)
MD24310[4] 5 —> 0 5 —> 0 MD24410[4] 5 —> 0 5 —> 0
MD24320[0] 0 —> 1 (X) 0 —> 1 (X) MD24420[0] 0 —> 1 (X) 0 —> 1 (X)
MD24320[1] 0 —> 3 (C) 0 —> 3 (C) MD24420[1] 0 —> 7 (SP2) 0 —> 7 (SP2)
MD24320[2] 0 —> 2 (Z) 0 —> 2 (Z) MD24420[2] 0 —> 2 (Z) 0 —> 2 (Z)
Mantle machining with TRACYL for the counter Rotary axis offset TRACYL 2
spindle (without correction of slot side edge )
MD24855
$MC_TRACYL_ROT_AX_ Rotary axis offset TRACYL 2
FRAME_2
Offset of rotary axis for the 2nd TRACYL transfor-
mation Default: 0 Change to: 1
MD24850 MD24855 = 0 → 1
Offset of rotary axis for the 2nd
$MC_TRACYL_ROT_AX_
OFFSET_2 Description:
Default: 0 Grad Change to: 0: axial rotary axis offset is not considered.
1: axial rotary axis offset is considered.

MD24850 = 0
2: axial rotary axis offset is considered until SZS.
Description:
Indicates the offset of the rotary axis in degrees in relation to The SZS frames include transformed axial rotary axis offsets.
the neutral position for the 2nd agreed TRACYL transfor-
mation for each channel For further details see description of the 1st TRACYL-function
. for the main spindle in module A120.
Irrelevant:
if no TRACYL is active
For further details see description of the 1st TRACYL-function

for the main spindle in module A120.
Notes

Sign of rotary axis for 2nd TRACYL transformation Vector of base tool for 2nd TRACYL transformation
MD24860 MD24870[x]
Sign of rotary axis for 2nd Vector of base tool for 2nd
$MC_TRACYL_ROT_SIGN_ $MC_TRACYL_BASE_
TRACYL transformation TRACYL transformation
IS_PLUS_2 TOOL_2
Default: 1 Change to: Default: 0, 0, 0 mm Change to:
MD24860 = 1 match to the machine conditions MD24870[0] = 0

MD24870[1] = 0
Description: MD24870[2] = 0
Indicates the sign with which the rotary axis is taken into Description:
account in the TRACYL transformation for the 2nd agreed
TRACYL transformation for each channel. Indicates a basic offset of the tools zero for the 2ndTRACYL
. transformation. The offset is referenced to the geometry axes
valid when TRACYL is active. The basic offset is included
Corresponds to: with and without selection of the tool length compensation.
MD24810 $MC_TRACYL_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1 Programmed length corrections have an additive effect with
respect to the basic tool.
For further details see description of the 1. TRACYL-function The index i takes the values 0, 1, 2 for the 1st to 3rd geome-
for the main spindle in module A120. try axes.
Corresponds to:
MD24820 $MC_TRACYL_BASE_TOOL_1
Activation of the undertaken alterations Switching between axis mode and clamping
After all parameters have been entered and validated by Extract from the CUST_TECHCYC.SPF
means of the softkey “Set MD active (cf)“ one further step is
necessary.
Turn the main switch OFF once and turn it back ON again to
cause the control to re-boot. By this the control unit is
matched to the undertaken alterations.
Notes

Continue: Switching between axis mode and Description:

clamping For the switching of the counter spindle into the C-axis mode-
of-operation and for clamping or unclamping of the counter
spindle the following jumps into the manufacturer cycle
CUST_TECHCYC.SPF have been prepared:
_M21: Switching of the counter spindle into the C-axis mode-
of-operation.
_M22: Switching of the C-axis mode to the spindle mode
_M23: Counter spindle clamping
_M24: Counter spindle release clamping
Description: The following line positions the counter spindle to 0 degrees:

SPOS[_F_S_NR[2]]=0
_M21: Switching to the C-axis mode This query ensures that the counter spindle is not positioned
When switching to the C-axis mode there is a difference, again if it was switched into the axis mode beforehand.
whether the C-axis mode is carried out with the drive of the
counter spindle or by means of a separate feed drive. 2. Separate feed drive fitted:
The IF-query described above and the subsequent ENDIF-
1.No separate feed drive fitted: command must be replaced by the logic for the coupling of
The following entry is provided : the separate feed drive. This should preferably be effected in
IF (($P_SMODE[_F_S_NR[2]]<>2)AND($P_SMODE a separate manufacturer cycle, e.g. AXIS_C2_ON.SPF.
[_F_S_NR[2]]<>4))OR($P_PROG_EVENT==5) _M21: Sub spindle: Change to C axis mode
AXIS_C2_ON
Variable _F_S_NR: The spindle index of the main, the tool GOTOF _MEND
and the counter spindle.
In order to enable the CUST_TECHCYC-draft to be generally Example for the manufacturer cycle AXIS_C2_ON.SPF:
valid for all applications the spindle index is determined by PROC AXIS_C2_ON
means of the variable _F_S_NR from the existing axis config- IF $P_SEARCH==1 GOTOF _END
urations (setting via MD52206 $MCS_AXIS_USAGE. IF $P_SIM==1 GOTOF _END
The following applies: ; Cycle not to be carried out during block search and
_F_S_NR[0] contains the spindle index of the main spindle ; simulation
_F_S_NR[1] contains spindle index of the tool spindle IF $A_IN[24]==1
_F_S_NR[2] contains spindle index of the counter spindle ;Cycle not to be carried out on report by the PLC, that the
feed drive is already coupled
From this derives the following logic: GOTOF _END
The IF-query is fulfilled, if the counter spindle is not in the ENDIF
mode-of-operation 2 = positioning and not in the mode-of- M[_F_S_NR[2]]=41 ;Select counter spindle gear stage 1
operation 4 = axis mode or the program event is in the mode SPOSA[[_F_S_NR[2]]=0 ;Positioning of counter spindle
5 = block search. WAITS(1) ;Wait until spindle position is reached
Notes

Continuation of extract from CUST_TECHCYC.SPF

2. Separate feed drive fitted:
As described in the previous mode a further manufacturer
STOPRE cycle for un-coupling the separate feed drive is used: AX-
G0 SP2=0 ;SP2-axis positioning IS_C2_OFF.SPF and this is called up in _M22.
STOPRE
M66 ;M-command for coupling the SP2-axis _M22: ; Sub spindle: Change to spindle mode
MARK1: AXIS_C2_OFF
IF $A_IN[24]==1 GOTOF MARK2 GOTOF _MEND
;Query whether coupling has taken place
GOTOB MARK1 ; Jump back until coupling is completed Example for manufacturer cycle AXIS_C2_OFF.SPF:
MARK2:
_END: PROC AXIS_C2_OFF
IF $P_SIM==1 ;Simulation active IF $P_SEARCH==1 GOTOF _END
M[_F_S_NR[2]]=70 ;Switch counter spindle to the axis mode IF $P_SIM==1 GOTOF _END
ENDIF ; Cycle not to be carried out with block search and simulation
M17 M67 ;M-command for un-coupling the SP2-axis
MARK1:
_M22: Switching the counter spindle to the spindle IF $A_IN[24]==0 GOTOF MARK2
mode: ;Query, whether un-coupling is completed
1. no separate feed drive : GOTOB MARK1
The following entry has been prepared: MARK2:
IF($SP_MODE[_F_S_NR[2]]<>1 ENDIF
;N220 M[_F_S_NR[2]]= _END:
ENDIF M17
Line N220 can be extended by „5“. The counter spindle will
be switched back to the spindle mode with the command M5
_M23: Sub spindle: C axis clamping Coupling

The following entry has been prepared:
;N230 M[_F_S_NR[2]]=
;N235 $AC_PRTIME_A_INC=1.5 Extract from CUST_TECHCYC.SPF
In line N230 enter the M-command for clamping the counter

spindle. Line N235 has been prepared for matching the time
evaluated in the simulation to the real machining time.
_M24: Sub spindle: Release C axis clamping

The following entry has been prepared:
;N240 M[_F_S_NR[2]]=
;N245 $AC_PRTIME_A_INC=1.5
In line N240 enter the M-command for clamping the counter

spindle. Line N235 has been prepared for matching the time
evaluated in the simulation to the real machining time.
Notes

Continued: Coupling Description:
Definition of coupling counter spindle/main spindle

_M120: Definition of the coupling of spindle [2], spindle [0]
_M121: End of C-axis mode-of-operation after COUPOF
_M125: Change to main spindle
_M126: Change to counter spindle
_M120: Definition: Coupling counter spindle/main spindle

N1200 COUPDEF(SPI(_F_S_NR[2]),SPI(_F_S_NR[0]),1,1,
”NOC”,”DV”)
The prepared COUPDEF-command for coupling the main
and counter spindle can be made to suit by the machine man-
ufacturer, for example to change the direction of rotation be-
tween the two spindles.
_M121, _M125 and _M126:

No entries prepared here.
Chuck MD52251[0] Main spindle

MD52251[1] Counter spindle
Machine data for definition of the M-commands
Description:
M code for Open chuck with non-rotating spindle
M-Code for open chuck with rotating spindle.
e.g.: "M35" or "M1=35"
MD52250[x]
M code for opening chuck with
$MCS_M_CODE_CHUCK_
non-rotating spindle
OPEN
Default: Change to:

M code for Close chuck
MD52250[0] Main spindle MD52252[x]

MD52250[1] Counter spindle $MCS_M_CODE_CHUCK_ M code for closing the chuck
CLOSE
Description:
Default: Change to:
M-Code for opening chuck with non-rotating spindle.
e.g.: "M34" or "M1=34"
MD52252[0] Main spindle
M code for Open chuck with rotating spindle MD52252[1] Counter spindle
Description:
MD52251[x]
M code for opening chuck with M-Code for Close chuck
$MCS_M_CODE_CHUCK_
rotating spindle e.g.: "M36" or "M1=36"
OPEN_ROT
Default: Change to:
Notes

Chuck flushing, closing, opening
Description: Note:
Chuck of the counter spindle opening, closing and flushing The M-commands for opening and closing the chucks of the
main and the counter spindle are not defined by
_M26: Counter spindle chuck closing
CUST_TECHCYC.SPF. but by the machine data. This is nec-
if chuck [1] not closed, then closing
essary for the opening and closing of the chucks and the as-
sociated work piece motions to be correctly shown in the sim-
_M27: Counter spindle, chuck opening while stationary
ulation of G-code programmes.
if chuck [1] not open, then opening
Description:
_M28: Counter spindle, chuck opening while rotating
if chuck [1] not open while rotating, then opening The machine data are evaluated in the modes _M26, _M27
and _M28 . If the machine data contain only a numerical val-
_M29: Counter spindle, de-selection of chuck flushing ue then this will be put out as an M-function without an exten-
sion. If the machine datum contains an auxiliary function
with extension, e.g.. M1=34, then this will be carried out as a
string.
Notes

Clamping jaws counter spindle Note 1

Alteration to the machine data will automatically be trans-
Spindle chuck data ferred to the menu display Spindle chuck data and vice versa.
_________________________________________________
MD53240[x] In case of machines that feature a Y-axis, a parking position

Spindle chuck data must be created for this spindle to ensure collision-free work-
$MAS_SPINDLE_PARAMETER
ing. The default 0 is usually adequate.
_________________________________________________
Description: Note 2
for AX7:SP2 In order to show the counter spindle firstly without tailstocks,
it is sensible to temporarily take out a setting of the module
MD53240[0] = 0 → e.g. 50 mm A120!
Chuck dimension = ZC2 in the mask Spindle chuck data _________________________________________________
MD53240[1] = 0 → e.g. 40 mm
Stop dimension = ZS2 in the mask Spindle chuck data MD52218 = 4H → 0H
MD53240[2] = 0 → e.g. 22 mm AX3:C1

MD53242[0] =30 → 0
Jaw dimension = ZE2 in the mask Spindle chuck data
MD53242[1] =40 → 0
The dimension for ZE2 takes effect only when the jaw type 2
is selected; Z1 would be shifted by this amount.
Check of the entries made in the window "Spindle chuck

data"
The entries for the parameters "ZC2" chuck dimension and

"ZS2 stop dimension for the counter spindle are identical in
MD53240.
_________________________________________________
Note:
The input field ZE2 for the jaw dimensions be shown only if
the jaw type 2 has been selected.
_________________________________________________
Notes

Spindle chuck data Z1
MD53241
Spindle jaw type
$MAS_SPINDLE_CHUCK_TYPE
Z1
Description:
for AX7:SP2
0 = Jaw type 1 = Clamping from outside

1 = Jaw type 2 = Clamping from inside
Jaw type 1:
Jaw type 1: Z1 lies in the WKS on the front edge of the
clamping jaws; so if for instance Z1 = -10, the work piece will
be inserted by 10 mm.
Jaw type 2:
Jaw type 2: Z1 lies on the inner jaw step; so for Z1 = 0, the
work piece will be inserted right up to the jaw step.
Travelling to a fixed stop MD37000 Bit 0 = 0 → 1
Travelling to a fixed stop is required to enable the controlled Description:

transfer of a work piece, that was being machined in the main Activation of sub functions of "Travel to fixed stop".
spindle, to the counter spindle for continued machining.
Release of Travelling to a fixed stop
Bit 0 = 0: Travel to fixed stop not available.
Bit 0 = 1: Travel to fixed stop can be started only from the
Travel to fixed stop mode NC program with the command FXS[x]=1.
Release of the safe brake test

MD37000 Bit 1 = 0: Safe brake test not available
Travel to fixed stop mode
$MA_FIXED_STOP_MODE Bit 1 = 1: Safe brake test can be executed under the control
of the PLC.
_________________________________________________
Note:
When enabling these functions the user must ensure that
Travelling to a fixed stop and Safe brake test are not called
up simultaneously.
_________________________________________________
Notes

Retract position Z for counter spindle MD37050 = 1 → 2
Description:
MD55232 Retract position Z for coun- In this example Z2 is the linear axis of the counter spindle.
$SCS_SUB_SPINDLE_REL_POS ter spindle Hence the parameter list for AX6:Z2 must be selected and
there MD37050 = 2 must be set. .
Default: 0 Change to: e.g. 700mm
The machine datum determines whether the alarms:
20091 "Fixed stop not reached",
MD55232 e.g. 700mm
20094 "Fixed stop aborted" and
25042 "FOC: Standstill monitoring" are output.
Description:
Z-retract position for the counter spindle (Z2) MD = 0
Suppresses alarm 20091 "Fixed stop not reached"
MD = 2
Suppression of alarms
Enable of the fixed stop alarms 20091 "Fixed stop not reached" and
20094 "Fixed stop aborted"
MD = 3
MD37050 Suppression of alarm 20094 "Fixed stop aborted"
Enable of the fixed stop
$MA_FIXED_STOP_ALARM_ Add value 8
alarms
MASK Suppression of alarm 25042 "FOC: Standstill monitoring"
=2 Suppression of the alarms 20091 and 20094 Description:
Default: 1 Change to: 2 Independently of the setting of the alarm mask it is possible to
read errors during approach of the fixed stop from the status
variable $AA_FXS.
Default 1 = Alarms 20091, 20094 and 25042 will be raised. 1. Work piece reception by counter spindle
In setting data described below the paths, the feedrate, and

The alarms 20091 "Fixed stop not reached" and 20094 "Fixed
the force for the travelling to a fixed stop will be defined.
stop aborted" will be suppressed, since the function Travelling
to a fixed stop is also used for checking cutting-off operations
(see description below).
In order to recognise erroneous behaviour all the same when

travelling to a fixed stop, these alarms are replaced by a cycle Counter spindle: path for travel to fixed stop
alarm:
61254 [channel %1: ] block %2: Error while travelling to a SD55550 Counter spindle: path for
fixed stop $SCS_TURN_FIXED_STOP_DIST travel to fixed stop
Default: 10 mm Change to:
Counter spindle: Feedrate for travel to fixed stop
SD55551
Counter spindle: feedrate
$SCS_TURN_FIXED_STOP_
for travel to fixed stop
FEED
Notes

Counter spindle: Force for travel to fixed stop in %

Fixed stop
MSp CSp
SD55552
Counter spindle: force for 10mm
$SCS_TURN_FIXED_STOP_
travel to fixed stop in % Rap-trav.
FORCE
Default: 10 % Change to:
-X
Between the travelling to a fixed stop and the chucking the 0,1mm
counter spindle can retract a small amount in order to relieve
pressure on the work piece.
SD55550
Counter spindle: Retraction path prior to chucking e.g. 10mm
after fixed stop SD55551
e.g. 10mm/min
SD55553 Counter spindle: retraction SD55552
$SCS_TURN_FIXED_STOP_ RE- path prior to chucking after e.g. 10%
TRACTION fixed stop SD55553
e.g. 0,1mm
Default: 0 mm Change to: 0,1
Sequence: Retraction path prior to cut-off with counter spindle

1. The counter spindle travels with G0 to the work piece in
the main spindle until the distance specified in SD55550
SD55543 Retraction path prior to cut
has been reached. $SCS_TURN_PART_OFF_RETRACTION -off with counter spindle
2. The remaining distance will be travelled at the feedrate

defined in SD55551 and with the reduced force as defined
in SD55552 right up to the work piece.
3. The counter spindle retracts by the amount defined in SD

55553 in order to relieve the work piece. Chucking and pulling
4. Chucking the work piece in the counter spindle.

MSp CSp
2. Cut-off
After chucking there is the possibility to cut off the work piece.
Prior to this the counter spindle can be retracted a small
amount together with the work piece to create a tensile force
in the work piece. This relieves the tool a little bit during the
parting.
SD55543
e.g. 1mm
Notes

Cut-off check Feedrate for cut-of check
After the cut-off a check can be carried out and during turning SD55541
the function "Travelling to a fixed stop" can be used. The cut- Feedrate for cut-off
$SCS_TURN_PART_OFF_CTRL_
off check can either be set up by means of the following check
FEED
channel specific setting data or it can be deactivated:
Path for cut-off check Force for cut-off check in %
SD55540 SD55542
$SCS_TURN_PART_OFF_CTRL_ Path for cut-off check Force for cut-off check
$SCS_TURN_PART_OFF_CTRL_FO
DIST in %
RCE
Default: 0.1 mm Change to: Default: 10 % Change to:
MSp Cut-off CSp Sequence:

1. The counter spindle travels by the amount defined in
SD55543 to obtain a tensile force.
2. Cutting-off
3. For cut-off check the counter spindle retracts at the

feedrate defined in SD55541 with reduced force as per
SD55540 SD55542 the distance from SD55540.
e.g. 1mm
SD55541
e.g. 1mm/min
SD55542
e.g. 10%
Notes

Note: Setting up the counter spindle tailstock
The function „Travelling to a fixed stop“ is also used for the

On machines that feature a counter spindle, the counter spin-
cutting-off check. The cutting off is taken to be successful, if
dle can be used as a tailstock by clamping a quill-point in the
the travelling to a fixed stop fails.
chuck. The mask „Spindle chuck data“ is laid out for both the
definition of the tailstock dimensions (diameter and length) of
The alarms 20091 and 20094 are suppressed by changing
the main and also of the counter spindle.
the configuration of MD37050 to 2.
Alarm Alarm Text Opening the input mask Spindle chuck data
20091 The axis %1 has not reached the fixed stop

20094 Axis %1 end stop has been aborted.
In order to recognise a mal-function during the cut-off check, Depiction of the spindle chuck data for “Tailstock release“
these alarms are replaced by the cycle alarm 61255:
[channel %1: ] Block %2: Error on cut-off: Tool breakage?
Release of tailstock depiction
MD52218
$MCS_FUNKTION_MASK_TUR Function mask Turning
N
The tailstock is displayed when in the "program" tailstock is
selected.
MD52218 Bit 2 = 1 Enable tailstock
Notes

Depiction of the spindles after “Tailstock release“ and Cursor Depiction of the tailstock after “Tailstock release“, cursor on
position on ZC1. The fields for XR1, ZR1, XR2 and ZR2 have position XR2 and the tailstock data have been entered manu-
not yet been filled in. ally.
The mechanical dimensions must be entered in the input

fields XR1, ZR1, XR2 and ZR2.
Tailstock data for the counter spindle ________________________________________________

Note:
MD53242[x] The entries in the mask Spindle chuck data correspond di-
Tailstock data rectly to the entries in MD53242[0] and MD53242[1] of
$MAS_TAILSTOCK_PARAMETER
AX3:C1 and AX7:SP2.
Default: 0 mm Change to: ________________________________________________
AX7:SP2
MD53242[0] = 42 mm = XR2 Tailstock diameter
MD53242[1] = 72 mm = ZR2 Tailstock length
Tailstock data for the main spindle
MD53242[x]
Tailstock data
$MAS_TAILSTOCK_PARAMETER
AX3:C1
MD53242[0] = 41 mm = XR1 Tailstock diameter
MD53242[1] = 71 mm = ZR1 Tailstock length
Notes

Machining program: Counter spindle

Machining example Main spindle - Counter spindle
Example:
By means of a simple machining example with the main spin-
dle followed by the counter spindle the sequence is to be
tested.
The programming of the operations with the counter spindle

is carried out in the same manner as for the main spindle, for
instance the location of cutting. For the machining with the
counter spindle the Z-axis is mirrored (within the cycles). Only
the cutting edge position must suit the actual cutting direction.
This way of programming permits part programmes to be run
both with the main spindle and also with the counter spindle.
Tool list
Preparation:
The tools used in this example must have been edited and
must have the correct cutting edge orientation.
Roughing 1
Roughing 2
Roughing 3
Notes

The axes must first of all be traversed to a safe location

(retracted) using the mode-of-operation JOG.
X-axis e.g. to + 300 mm
Z-axis e.g. to + 200 mm
A check of the machining sequences can be made having

completed the inputs and selecting graphic simulation after
CYCLE START . The run then occurs in real time.
The machining progress is illustrated below in several stages.
Start Cut main spindle
Notes

Transfer to the counter spindle Cut counter spindle
Machining completed Simulation

Another way of checking
The depiction on the screen is very much the same, only the
'machining rate' is considerably higher.
Alteration of the speed to about. 60%
Notes

Start Cut main spindle
Transfer to the counter spindle Cut counter spindle
Notes

Machining completed Machining example main spindle with TRANSMIT

and counter spindle with TRACYL and TRANSMIT
Example:
By means of a simple machining program for facing with the
main spindle followed by turning and facing with the counter
spindle the sequence is to be tested.
Tool list
Preparation:
The tools used in this example must have been edified and
must have the correct cutting edge orientation.
Machining program: MSp and CSp
Note:
In the last two program steps the symbol for the front face
machining with the counter spindle is the same as that for
machining on the main spindle. For the machining with the
counter spindle the Z-axis is mirrored. .
Reason:
The programming is generally speaking the same as for ma-
chining with the main spindle. Hence these programs can be
run on the main as well as on the counter spindle.
Machining time:
At the end of the graphic simulation the established machin-
ing time of 02:35.9 will be entered In the bottom program line.
Notes

Notes

Preparation:
The axes must first of all be retracted using the mode-of-
operation JOG.
X-axis e.g. to + 300 mm
Z-axis e.g. to + 200 mm
A check of the machining sequences can be made having

completed the inputs and selecting graphic simulation after
CYCLE START . The run then occurs in real time.
.
The machining progress is illustrated below in several stages.
Start, work piece in the main spindle End of the front face machining
Notes

A122 END Setup Counter spindle/Tailstock
Transfer of the work piece to the counter spindle Retraction of the counter spindle
The tool is being retracted End of the machining
A122: END

A011 Run MyScreens
Sinumerik
Operate
Module Description:
Run MyScreens is a function of the Sinumerik 840D sl which allows the manufacturer to write cus-
tom screens.
The screens are intended as an interface to the specific functions offered by the OEM.
Module Objective:
Upon completion of this module the course participant will be able to create Run MyScreens dis-
play screens.
Content:
Sinumerik
General Information
Basic Configuration Information
Creating Run MyScreens User Files
Language Dependent Texts
Parameters and Variable Description
A011
A011

Run MyScreens A011
Run MyScreens:
START
General
Information
Basic
Configuration
Information
Creating
Run MyScreens
User Files
Language
Dependant
Texts
Parameters
and
Variable
Descriptions
Run MyScreens:
END
Notes

A011 Run MyScreens
General Information
The Run MyScreens function is configured using ASCII files. These files contain the descriptions of the user interface.
As standard, up to 5 screens can be configured. Further screens are available via a licensed option Sinumerik Integrate Run
MyScreens, order No: 6FC5800-0AP64-0YB0.
In order to create images for the screens, a graphic programme is required, e.g. Paint Shop Pro® and Paint® are programmes
which are compatible with the 840D sl controller.
Run MyScreens can be used for the following functions:

1. Display of dialogs and provision of:
 Soft-keys
 Variables tables (this function will be available with a later level of implementation)
 Text and help text
 Graphic displays and help displays
2. Calling up dialogs by means of:

 The (entry) soft-keys
 PLC selection
3. Dynamic re-structuring of dialogs:

 Changing or deleting soft-keys
 Defining and designing variable fields
 Showing, replacing and deleting (language-dependent/independent) display texts
 Showing, replacing and deleting display texts (language dependent/individual)
4. Initiating actions when:

 Showing dialogs
 Entering values (variables)
 Pressing soft-keys
 Closing dialogues
5.. Exchange of data between dialogs.
6. Variables
 Reading (NC, PLC, user variables)
 Writing (NC, PLC, user variables)
 Linking with mathematical, comparative or logic
operators
7. Executing functions:
 Subroutines
 File functions
 PI Services
8. Taking into account levels of protection defined for use groups.
Notes

Run MyScreens A011
Basic Configuration Information
Configuration files are used to create the screens.

These configuration files are automatically interpreted by the
controller.
The files are not available as standard and have to be creat-
ed by the user using an ASCII editor (e.g. Notepad® or di-
rectly on the controller).
The “easyscreen.ini“ file is a master file which is required to

specify which other files are to be used to create a user
screen.
These files contain the information which determine what is
displayed on a particular screen.
The screen is split into different areas:
1 Main dialog area

2 Title bar containing screen name (Left) and
“Long text” description of the selected
variable (Right)
3 Variable input/output field
4 Variable name “Short text”
5 Graphics related text
6 Unit text
Operating areas overview To enable custom screens in other area of the controller, the
“easyscreen.ini” file has to be modified.
Operating area Permissible position for start soft-keys
There are eight areas in total:-
Machine JOG HSK6
Machine Area-Sub divided into:-
Machine MDA HSK6 Jog
MDA
Machine AUTO HSK6 Auto
Parameter HSK7
Parameter Area
Program HSK6
Program Edit Area
Program-Manager HSK2-8, 12-16, if not used for networked
drives Program Manager Area
Diagnostics HSK7 Diagnosis Area

Commissioning HSK7 Start-up Area
Notes

A011 Run MyScreens
Example of how all the areas are specified within the “easyscreen.ini” file:-
The three Machine Areas are specified by the “Menu” entry.

SlMaJogMillMenuHU, SlMaJogTurnMenuHU = Jog screen
SlMaAutoMenuHU = Auto screen
SlMaMdaMenuHU = MDA screen
Each area should have a “com” file specified.
[STARTFILES]
StartFile01 = area := AreaMachine, dialog := SlMachine, menu := SlMaJogMillMenuHU, startfile := ma_jog.com
StartFile02 = area := AreaMachine, dialog := SlMachine, menu := SlMaAutoMenuHU, startfile := ma_auto.com
StartFile03 = area := AreaMachine, dialog := SlMachine, menu := SlMaMdaMenuHU, startfile := ma_mda.com
StartFile04 = area := AreaParameter, dialog := SlParameter, startfile := param.com
StartFile05 = area := AreaProgramEdit, dialog := SlProgramEdit, startfile := aeditor.com
StartFile06 = area := AreaProgramManager, dialog := SlPmDialog, startfile := progman.com
StartFile07 = area := AreaDiagnosis, dialog :=SlDgDialog, startfile := diag.com
StartFile08 = area := AreaStartup, dialog :=SlSuDialog, startfile := startup.com
Creating Run MyScreens User Files Creating the “easyscreen.ini” file on the controller
The files required for the Run MyScreens function need to be This file sets up the links to the files which are to be used to
created. This can be done directly on the controller by navi- create the user screens, it also determine which operating
gating to the relevant folders. Use the following key sequence areas these files are available in. The file has to be located in
to locate the “System data” area. any of the following paths/directories:-
“System CF card\oem\sinumerik\hmi\cfg”
“System CF card\user\sinumerik\hmi\cfg”
Use the cursor keys to locate and open this directory.
Notes

Run MyScreens A011
To create the file select the “New” soft-key and ensure that the “Any” soft-key is selected.
The “Any” soft-key allows the file type to be determined by the user. In the dialogue box type in the name of the file and confirm
with the “OK” soft-key.
The file name must be in lowercase due to the LINUX operating system.
The newly created file will be automatically opened in preparation for editing.
Example: easyscreen.ini file

The following example will show how the “easyscreen.ini” file is used to specify the “Parameter” area of the controller as the area
from where the “Run MyScreens” are to be accessed.
(area := Area Parameter)
The “com” file, the content of which will determine what appears on the Run MyScreens screens, is also declared here.
(startfile := param.com)
The first step is to enter the header ([STARTFILES])

The code for specifying the controller area and “com” file is then entered on a new line as shown below.
[STARTFILES]
StartFile01 = area := AreaParameter, dialog := SlParameter, startfile := param.com
Creating the User Files on an external PC
As mentioned previously it is possible to create the Run MyScreens files directly on the controller or offline using an ASCII editor
(e.g. Notepad®).
These files have to be transferred to the controller and placed in the correct folders using the USB/CF Interfaces or with Ac-
cess MyMachine software.
Below: The easyscreen.ini file located in the cfg directory
Notes

A011 Run MyScreens
Creating the “param.com” file Below: The param.com file located in the proj directory.
The param.com file has been declared in the “easyscreen.ini”

file and now needs to be created.
Code contained within the param.com file is used to create

soft keys and display texts and graphics etc.
The file needs to be created and placed in one of the following

folders:
“System CF card\oem\sinumerik\hmi\proj”
“System CF card\user\sinumerik\hmi\proj”
Example: param.com file Storage path for the image files:

“System CF card\oem\sinumerik\hmi\ico\ico640”
It is necessary to specify a soft-key to be used as the entry “System CF card\user\sinumerik\hmi\ico\ico640”
point to the Run MyScreens.
Further soft-keys can be assigned within the Run MyScreens if To see the results of the example we have to locate the
required. “parameter” area of the control.
The example defines the 7th horizontal soft-key as the entry

point, the soft-key will have the text “Run MyScreens” (on 2
lines).
HS7=("Run %nMyScreens")
When the soft-key is pressed a Mask (mask1) will be loaded: The 7th horizontal soft-key contains the text specified in the
PRESS(HS7) “param.com” file: HS7=("Run %nMyScreens").
LM("mask1")
END_PRESS
//END
The Mask contains the code which determines the content of

the Run MyScreens.
The first line of the mask (Mask header) contains the mask
name, text and graphic information.
The following example shows mask1 with the title of Picture

Test. An image named tiger.bmp, will be displayed when HS7 is
pressed. The image will be positioned 110 pixels from the left
and 25 pixels from the top of the screen.
//M(mask1/ "Picture Test" / "tiger.bmp" / / / 110, 25)
Notes

Run MyScreens A011
Screen title/name tiger.bmp image
Mask header information: Parameter Description
The various parameters are separated by the “Forward slash” Graphic The position of the graphic in pixels. Distances
character (/). Position Position are from the left and top of the dialogue
screen and are separated by a comma.
//M(Identifier/header/Graphic/Dimension/Variable/Graphic Attributes CM (Column Mode) Column alignment.
position/Attributes)
CM0: Default, the column distribution is carried
Parameter descriptions: out separately for each line.
CM1: The column distribution is of the ling with

the most columns applies to all lines.
Parameter Description
CB: (Change Block) Response when the dialogue
Identifier Label of dialogue/mask.
is opened. The CB attribute can also be used on
Header Name of the screen. individual variables, in this case the individual
setting has priority over the CB setting in the
Graphics Name of image to be displayed. Mask Header.
Dimension Position and size of the dialogue. (Distance from CB0: All change blocks associated with the dia-
the left hand side, right hand side, width, height) logue are processed when it is opened.
Values in pixels and separated by commas
Variable The cursor can be assigned to a variable. The CB1: Change blocks are only processed if the
first variable has an index of 1, the remaining relevant value changes.
variables are indexed in the order that they were
configured.
Notes

A011 Run MyScreens
Adding Dialogue Elements: //S(START)
Dialogue Elements refer to long and short texts, graphics texts, HS7=("Run %nMyScreens")
unit texts and I/O fields. Additional soft-keys can also be added. PRESS(HS7)
LM("mask1")
The dialogue elements are added below the mask header. END_PRESS
//END
In the following example (Shown in red text) a soft-key with the
label “Variable Test” is added. When the soft-key is pressed the //M(mask1/"Picture Test"/"tiger.bmp"///110,25)
screen will display a list of four variables. The four variables are
defined under a new mask (mask2-Workpiece Dimensions). HS1=("Variable %nTest")
PRESS(HS1)
The parameters of the variables defined in mask2 are separated LM("mask2")
by the forward slash character (/). END_PRESS
//END
A detailed description of the Dialogue Element parameters can
be found in chapter ”Parameters and Variable Descriptions”. //M(mask2/"Workpiece Dimensions"/)
Def Var1=(R2///"Length of component","R0 X Length"///"$R[0]")
Def Var2=(R2///"Width of component","R1 Y Width"///"$R[1]")
Def Var3=(R3///"Height of component","R2 Z Height"///"$R[2]")
Def Var4=(I///"Main spindle speed","R3 Spindle speed"///"$R[3]")
VS8=("EXIT")
PRESS(VS8)
EXIT
END_PRESS
//END
The additional soft-key can now be seen. Screen title/name Long text of the selected variable.
Short text Input field
Values entered in the input field will be transferred to relevant

When the soft-key is pressed the defined variable will be dis-
variable.
played.
Notes

Run MyScreens A011
Detailed Analysis: Def Var1=(R2///"Length of component","R0 X Length"///"$R[0]")

R parameter 0 as a real number to 2 decimal places, sets the
//M(Mask1/"Workpiece Dimensions") Name of Mask1: component length:
HS1=("Variable %nTest") Determines the text for horizontal

soft-key 1 as “Variable Test”:
Def Var2=(R2///"Width of component","R1 Y Width"///"$R[1]")

R parameter 1 as a real number to 2 decimal places, sets the
When the soft-key is pressed mask2 will be loaded. component width:
PRESS(HS1)
LM("mask2")
END_PRESS
Def Var3=(R3///"Height of component","R2 Z Height"///"$R[2]") VS8=("EXIT") Determines the text for vertical soft-key 8 as
R parameter 2 as a real number to 3 decimal places, sets the “EXIT”:
component height:
Checking the entered values
Values can be entered directly on the custom screen. These

values are transferred directly to the variables.
They can be checked by viewing the variables on the standard
screen by pressing the “User variable” soft-key.
Def Var4=(I///"Main spindle speed","R3 Spindle speed"///"$R[3]")
R parameter 3 as an integer, sets the spindle speed:
Notes

A011 Run MyScreens
Language Dependant Texts Example Text File:

It is possible to configure the Run MyScreens configuration ;VERSION:SLP.02.05.QJM Otc 16, 2010
files so that the Run MyScreens language matches that of ;CHANGE :SLP.02.04.QJM Jun 30, 2010
the system.
In order to do this it is necessary to create one text file for 85100 0 0 "English%nMyScreens"
each required language. 85101 0 0 "English Mask Header"
The text that is to be displayed is contained within the text 85102 0 0 "English Long Text"
files. 85103 0 0 "English Short Text"
The Run MyScreens configuration files use identifiers to en-
sure that the correct text is displayed.
The files containing the text can be placed in the following

locations: Identifier Not used Required text
“System CF card\oem\sinumerik\hmi\lng” Allowable range of identifiers 85000 to 89899

“System CF card\user\sinumerik\hmi\lng”
“System CF card\addon\sinumerik\hmi\lng” Part of the file name can be assigned by the user but must
also contain the correct 3 letter language coding. This is so
that the system can display the contents of the correct file.
Filename Examples: The files for English and German can be seen located in the
OEM area.
easyscr_eng.txt English filename example
easyscr_deu.txt German filename example
User part File

of extension
filename
Language
coding
Example of a second text file for the German language
85100 0 0 "Deutsch%nMyScreens" The identifier is used in place of the text in the param.com file.
85101 0 0 "Deutsch Mask Header" The identifier has to be prefixed by the $ symbol.
85102 0 0 "Deutsch Long Text" The text associated with the identifier will be displayed.
85103 0 0 "Deutsch Short Text"
Notes

Run MyScreens A011
Example param.com file for language dependent text. The language file needs to be declared in the “easyscreen.ini”
file. No language coding is required.
//S(START) Declarations of other text files may also be present.
HS7=($85100)
PRESS(HS7) ;VERSION:SLP.02.01.H56 Nov 10, 2009

LM("mask1") ;CHANGE :
END_PRESS
//END [STARTFILES]
//M(mask1/$85101/"tiger.bmp"///110,25) StartFile04 = area := AreaParameter, dialog := SlParameter,

HS1=("Variable %nTest") startfile := param.com
PRESS(HS1)
LM("mask2") [LANGUAGEFILES]
END_PRESS LngFile01 = almc.txt
//END LngFile02 = alsc.txt
LngFile03 = aluc.txt
//M(mask2/"Workpiece Dimensions"/) LngFile04 = easyscr.txt
Def Var1=(R2///$85102, $85103///"$R[0]") [SYSTEM]

System = 0
VS8=("EXIT")
PRESS(VS8)
EXIT
END_PRESS
//END
Setting the controller language: When using the examples shown earlier it can be seen that the
text displays change with the selected language.
The controller language is selected via the “Start-up” menu.
Or
English long and short texts:
German long and short texts:
Notes

A011 Run MyScreens
Parameters and Variables Descriptions Detailed description:
When a variable is assigned certain properties can be set. 1. Variable type

These properties are contained rounded brackets, each proper- R[x] Real number, “x” indicates the number of decimal
ty is separated by a forward slash (/) places displayed
If a property is not used, the slash still needs to be present. I Integer.
S[x] String,”x” indicates the string length.
Basic description: C Character (Individual character)
B Boolean number
DEF Var1=(1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10) V Variant type
1. Variable type 2a. Limit values-

2. Limit values, toggle field or table identifier A minimum and a maximum value can be specified. The values
3. Default are separated by a comma, the minimum value is specified first.
4. Texts Values can be in I, C and R decimal formats or as characters in
5. Attributes the format “A” , “F”
6. Help display The limit value also works in conjunction with the limit attrib-
7. System or user variable ute, see the attribute property for more information.
8. Position of short text
9. Position of I/O field (Left, top, width, height) 2b. Toggle field-
10. Colours Creates a list of predefined entries in the I/O field. The list is
initiated by the “*” character.
The entries can be assigned a value.
The Limit value is interpreted as a list for the Toggle field.
If only a “*” is used, a variable Toggle field is generated.
2c. Table Identifiers- 5. Attributes-

Identifiers can be assigned to tables containing NCK/PLC val- The following properties can be influenced by the attributes
ues of the same type. The “%” character is used to differentiate  Input mode
an identifier from a toggle field or limit value.
 Access level
A comma is required after the identifier, the file name containing
the table information is then typed.  Alignment of short text
 Font size
3. Default setting-  Handling limit values
The value in the assigned variable can take on various states.  Response when screen is opened (Change block)
This depends on whether a default value, system or user varia-
ble (Or both) has been assigned to the variable field (I/O or tog- The attributes are separated by commas, and are not valid for
gle field) toggle fields.
Toggling is not possible until a valid value is assigned to the
variable. Input mode:-
Attribute Effect
4. Texts- wr0 I/O field invisible, short text visible.
Text possibilities are- wr1 Read only, no inputting of data, short text visible.
 Long text = text displayed when each element is high- (Default setting)
lighted. wr2 Read & write possible, long and short text visible.
 Short text = name of the element wr3 As with wr1 but with I/O field visible, long and short
 Graphics text = text relating to the graphics, if used. text visible.
wr4 All elements invisible.
 Unit text = unit of the variable e.g. mm, rpm etc
wr5 As wr2 except entries are immediately active.
with wr2 the entry becomes active exiting the field
The texts types are separated by commas and need enclosing
or pressing enter/input/return.
in speech marks:- /”Long”, “Short”, “Graphics”, “Unit”/
Notes

Run MyScreens A011
Access level:- Limits:

Attribute Level Password/Key position Checking whether the value of the variable is within the limits
ac7 7 Not released specified by the limit values.
ac6 6 SUNRISE Attribute Effect
ac5 5 EVENING li0 No check.
ac4 4 CUSTOMER li1 Check with respect to minimum
ac3 3 Key switch pos 3 li2 Check with respect to maximum.
ac2 2 Key switch pos 2 li3 Check with respect to minimum and maximum.
ac1 1 Key switch pos 1
ac0 0 Key switch pos 0
Behaviour when opening (Change block):
Alignment of short text:-
Attribute Effect
Attribute Effect
cb0 The change block defined for this variable is
al0 Left justified (Default)
processed when the screen opens (Default).
al1 Right justified
cb1 The change block defined for this variable is
al2 Centred
processed if there is a change in the value of the
variables.
Font size:
Attribute Effect
The “cb” attributes, specified in the variables definition, take
fs1 8pt. font size (Default)
precedence over the globally specified attributes in the “screen
fs2 16pt font size
form” definition.
The clearance between lines is defined. The default font size
allows 16 lines. The graphics and unit text can only be 6. Help Display-
configured in the default font size.
The name of the HTML file containing the help text needs to be
typed in speech marks. The display appears automatically if the
cursor is positioned on the variable.
Notes

A011 Run MyScreens
7. System or user variables- PLC Data Syntax
The variable to be viewed is entered here, these have to be Byte y of bit z of data block x DBx.DBXy.z
contained within speech marks. The variable must be
addressed in the correct way. Byte y of data block x DBx.DBBy
Word y of data block x DBx.DBWy

Addressing Variables:
Double word y v. of data block x DBx.DBDy
Machine Data Syntax String y with length z from data block x DBx.DBSy.z
Global machine data $MN_... Real y of data block x DBx.DBRy
Axis specific machine data $MA_... Flag byte x bit y Mx.y
Channel specific machine data $MC_... Flag byte x MBx
Flag word x MWx

Setting Data Syntax
Flag double word x MDx
Global setting data $SN_...
Input byte x bit y IBx.y
Axis specific setting data $SA_...
Channel specific setting data $SC_...
System variable Syntax
R parameter 1 $R[1]
PLC Data Syntax 8. Position of short text
Input byte x IBx The Short Text defined in attribute No.4 is positioned using
parameter No.8.
Input word x IWx The measurements are in pixels and relate to the top left
corner of the main dialogue body.
Input double word x IDx
Three values can be entered to define the position from the left,
Output byte x bit y QBx.y
the position from the top and the width of the short text.
Output byte x QBx Each entry has to be separated by a comma.
Output word x QWx The following example would position the text “Short text” 200
pixels from the left and 100 pixels from the top with a width of
Output double word QDx 250 pixels:
Def Var1=(R2///" ","Short text"///"$R[0]"/200, 100, 250//)

Soft-key Status Syntax
Visible (Default) Se1
Disabled (Grey text) Se2
Displayed(Last soft-key used) Se3
Notes

Run MyScreens A011
9. Position of I/O field 1. Colours
The I/O field can be positioned and sized using parameter The foreground and background colours of the I/O field can be
No.9. chosen by using parameter No.10.
The measurements are in pixels and relate to the top left The default colours are foreground: Black, background: White.
corner of the main dialogue body. These are determined by the “Write mode” (See parameter 5)
The following table shows index numbers to be used to achieve

Four values can be entered to define the position from the left, the required colour.
the position from the top and the width and height of the I/O The foreground colour is defined first, followed by a comma then
field. the background colour:
Each entry has to be separated by a comma.
The following example would position the I/O field for the Index Colour
defined variable, 600 pixels from the left and 100 pixels from
the top with a width of 100 pixels and a height of 150 pixels: 1 Black
2 Red/brown
Def Var1=(R2///" "," "///"$R[0]"//600, 400, 100, 150/) 3 Dark green
4 Light grey
5 Dark grey
6 Blue
7 Red
8 Brown
9 Yellow
10 White
A011: END
Notes

A011 END Run MyScreens

A006 Electrical Cabinet Design
Sinumerik
Operate
Module Description:
Technological advances have resulted in the reduction in size of electronic equipment. The result
being that the equipment is more prone to heat, dust and moisture damage.
By calculating the power loss of the components and therefore ensuring the correct cooling
requirements of a particular cabinet, it is possible to reduce the failure rate of these and other com-
ponents.
It is also essential that the cabinets are designed to prevent/minimise the ingress of contaminants.
Module Objective:
Upon completion of this module you will know the design criteria of electrical cabinets.
Content:
Sinumerik
Module Theory and Objective
Arrhenius’ Law
Choice of Cabinet
Cabinet Cooling
Equipment Mounting
Cables, plugs and sockets
Cabinet Sealing
Miscellaneous
A006
A006

Electrical Cabinet Design A006
Electrical Cabinet
Design:
START
Choosing a
Cabinet
Arrhenius’
Law
Cabinet
Cooling
Equipment
Mounting
Cables, plugs
and sockets
Cabinet
Sealing
Miscellaneous
Electrical Cabinet
Design:
END
Notes

Choosing a Cabinet A general rule is that the energy dissipated is approximately

50Watts/m² of free cabinet wall assuming a 10° temperature
Most of the heat within an electrical control cabinet is produced difference between the cabinet and the outside air.
by the drive components.
Example 1:- A cabinet with a width of 3 m, a height of 2 m and
Sinamics drives are available in internally or externally cooled a depth of 1 m sited with its back to a wall has an effective
variants. surface area of approximately 13 m².
The internally cooled drive types dissipate heat within the
cabinet and will usually require a cooling unit to remove this 2m x 3m = 6m² (Front)
heat. 2m x 1m = 2m² (left side)
The externally cooled drive types dissipate heat to the outside 2m x 1m = 2m² (Right side)
of the cabinet and may not require cooling units. 3m x 1m = 3m² (Top)
Total = 13m²
It may be preferable to always use cooler units as this allows
the cabinet to be sealed which is the best option for stopping Therefore this cabinet is able to dissipate approximately 650 W.
the entry of contaminants. Within the cabinets it may also be (50W x 13m²)
necessary to install fans to ensure the air is circulated and If the actual losses of the cabinet equipment are higher than
prevent “Hot spots” from forming. this, other cooling measures have to be implemented.
The technical specifications of the individual hardware compo- Example 2:-
nent will provide details of the power loss measured in Watts. Internally cooled 36Kw Active Line Module-Power loss = 630W
Calculations are made to see if the cabinet can dissipate the Internally cooled 18A Single Motor Module-Power loss = 165 W
heat naturally. Internally cooled 30A Single Motor Module-Power loss = 630 W
The cabinet manufacturer can supply details of the heat-loss of
the cabinet. These few items alone add up to 1425 W which would require
Natural heat dissipation occurs through the cabinet walls extra cooling if fitted into the cabinet described in example 1.
providing the wall is in free air and not against a wall for
example.
Cabinet Ambient Temperature
The ideal ambient temperature for the cabinet is 35°C.

The cooling unit should be set to achieve this temperature.
If the temperature is allowed to get too high the lifetime of the
components will be reduced.
If the temperature is set too low there is a risk of condensation
forming on the electronic components which can also be
detrimental to the equipment.
Notes

Arrhenius Law
The following graph demonstrates Arrhenius Law and shows the effects that increased temperature has on the lifetime of elec-
tronic components.
It can be seen that an increase in temperature by 10 K will result a 50 % increase in the failure rate (50 % reduction in life time).
Expected
Life Defect
Time Rate
120% — 9.00
— 8.00
100%
— 7.00
80% — 6.00
— 5.00
60%
— 4.00
40% — 3.00
— 2.00
20%
— 1.00
0% — 0.00
-10K -5K 0K 5K 10K 15K 20K 25K 30K
Temperature Change
Notes

Cabinet Cooling
The inlets and outlets of the cooling units must have a
Cabinet cooling is usually accomplished using fans and filters clearance of at least 200mm.
or cooling units. Example:
≥ 200mm
The fans and filter option would normally be used on low pow- Roof mounted
er installations or where the drive units are of the cooling units
externally cooled type.
A drawback of this method is that the fans pull air from outside Outlet
the cabinet via filters. Even if the filters are serviced regularly it m
≥ 200mm 0m
is impossible to keep all contaminants out of the cabinet. 20
≥
t
le
le
In
In
Cooling units allow the cabinets to be air-tight as the air within Potential
the cabinet is re-circulated through the cooling unit. obstruction
A thermostat should be employed to regulate the temperature Electrical Electrical
cabinet cabinet
to the recommended 35°C.
If a higher temperature is unavoidable (max 50°C) the drive
units have to be de-regulated.
It is important to position the cabinet and cooling devices to

ensure correct operation.
A cabinet placed in such a position where it restricts the venti-
lation inlet/outlet can prevent the cabinet from being cooled
correctly or result in the cooling unit becoming damaged due
to excessive work cycles. The use of baffles is recommended to prevent ventilation short
The cooling device should also be positioned to ensure the circuits where the exhaust air is taken directly into the cooling
cool air is reaching the desired areas and that the warm air is units.
extracted and not allowed to cause hot spots within the cabi-
net.
Cabinets with cooling units. Outlet Cooling

unit
Inlet
Correct installation of cooling units.
The cool air should be directed to the bottom of the drive. The
internal drive fans and natural convection will draw the air
through the drives.
The cool air from the cooling unit should not be directed
straight onto/into the drives, it should be allowed to mix with Ducting
the warmer air already in the cabinet, This will minimise the
risk of condensation forming.
Cabinet top mounted cooling units require a method of direct-

ing the cool air from the cooling unit to the bottom of the Drive
drives. equipment
In the case of a door mounted unit it may be necessary to

direct the cool air with the use of baffles.
Example of cabinet cooling with roof mounted cooling units:

Temperature
Measuring
point
Cabinet top mounted cooling unit.
Notes

Example of cabinet cooling with door mounted cooling units: It is advisable that the cooling units are switched off
automatically when the cabinet door is opened.
Large differences between the outside air temperature and the

cabinet temperature can lead to condensation forming when
the cabinet doors are opened. This should be taken into
consideration when the cabinet thermostat is set.
Outlet
A by-product of cooling units is water. For obvious reasons it
must be ensured that this water is not allowed to enter the
electrical cabinet . This is particularly important for roof mount-
ed cooling units as any leaking water could drip directly onto
the drive equipment.
≥ 200mm Cooling
unit The outside of the cooling unit must be protected from any
Drive possible contamination such as coolant, machine waste etc.
equipment
Baffle
Temp.
Meas.
point Inlet
Cabinet door mounted cooling unit.
Outlet Cooling
Cabinet cooling sins. unit
Inlet
The following diagrams are examples of cabinet cooling sins:
Air short circuit due

to lack of ducting Cabinet top
mounted cooling
unit without
ducting
Drive
equipment
Notes

Cabinet cooling sins continued. Air short circuit/contamination

due to cabinet sealing problems
Air intake restricted due to
narrow gap between cooling
unit and drive equipment.
< 200mm
≥ 200mm
Drive
equipment Drive
equipment
Baffle
Temp.
Meas.
Cold air directed straight point
onto drive equipment will
cause condensation
problems. Air short circuit/
contamination due to cabi-
net sealing problems
Cold air outlet at the

top of the cooling
unit.
Drive
equipment
Warm air intake at the

bottom of the cooling
unit.
Wrong type of cooling unit used.
Notes

Cabinets Without Cooling Units
For cabinets with externally cooled drive units it is possible that Outlet
the cooling can be achieved with fans drawing air from the via filter
outside via a filter.
Natural convection causes the warm air to exit via a filter.
The fact that air is being drawn directly from the outside means
that this system can never be airtight.
Having a fan for the inlet side only ensures that the cabinet is
positively pressurised which helps keep contaminants from
entering. Drive Fan & filter type cool-
It is extremely important that the filters are service regularly to equipment ing system
avoid ingress of contaminants and to maintain the efficiency of
the cooling process.
Example: Cabinet with externally cooled drive units.
Temperature
Measuring points
Inlet via
Fan &
filter unit
Notes

Equipment Mounting Cable

ducting
The correct mounting of equipment is important with respect
to the cooling process and for Electromagnetic compatibility ≥ 80mm
measures.
Air flow to drive units:
It is essential that the air flow to the drive units is unrestricted.

Other electrical equipment, including cable ducting and ca- Drive
bles, must be mounted a suitable distance away from the top equipment
and bottom sides of the drive units. The minimum clearance
distance for Sinamics S120 drives is 80mm.
Examples: Correct mounting methods for drive equipment.
≥ 80mm
Cable
ducting
Diagram showing minimum Photograph of correctly

distance between drive units installed drive units. Cables
and other cabinet components. and ducting are not causing
restrictions to the air flow.
Example:- Externally cooled

Example:- Externally cooled
drive modules with heat-sink
drive module heat-sinks
cover and fan/filter.
protruding from the rear of a
The fan takes air in at the
cabinet with a cut-out ready to
bottom and the cover creates
accept another module.
a chimney effect to give a
good cooling effect.
Notes

Equipment Mounting continued. Example: A bare metal backplane ready for the drive modules
to be mounted, note the earth bonding cables, one for each
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) drive module.
To cut down on the interference effects caused by the high

frequency drive equipment certain measures can be taken.
One of these includes the positioning of the equipment within
the cabinet.
By positioning the line module, reactor and filter in close prox-
imity to each other, cables lengths can be kept to a minimum
thus cutting down on emissions.
Further reductions in emissions can be achieved by screening
the cables.
The mounting plate for the equipment should be one of bare
metal, this acts as a central earth point and also improves the
EMC.
Example: How shielded cable can be grounded. Example of a filter, reactor and line module installation.
Filter
Cable screen
ground point
Reactor
Line Module
Notes

Equipment mounting continued
A typical cabinet layout demonstrating the close proximity of the filter, reactor and line module in order to reduce the interference
effects of the high frequency drive current.
The use of shielded cables is also necessary to further eliminate this Interference.
Shielding plates offer the best method for grounding the shields.
The power cables and the signal cables should also be run separately from each other throughout the machine and not just in
the electrical cabinet.
It is not permissible to connect any other equipment between the line module and the filter and reactor.
Remaining
Equipment
Filter
Shielded DriveCLiQ
Cables
Shielded Power Cables
Comb Power Module Add.

Axis
Line Module and Module
Main
4 Motor Modules
Switch
Filter Reactor
Protection
Shield plate for

≥ 100mm grounding the shields
Shielded Power Cables

Shielded Motor Cables
Notes

Cables, Plugs and Sockets

Example: Correctly shielded cables
Shielding
Shielded power cables are recommended between the Sin-

amics line filter, reactor and line module. If the cable length is
1m or less the cables can be twisted and not shielded.
Signal cables and power cables should be kept separate by a

distance of at least 0.2m.
Cables should be kept as close as possible to objects with a

ground potential, this reduces crosstalk between cables.
Where the cable shield is grounded it should be done with the

use of grounding plates, this allows a large surface area of the
shield to be connected. The use of a wire to connect the shield
to ground is not permitted as the wire then becomes an aerial
which can introduce problems.
Failure to observe all of the above can lead to intermittent

faults.
The shielding of cables has a downside in that it causes addi-

tional losses in the line filter, reactor, in-feed and motor mod-
ules. This becomes worse the longer the cable length and can
cause overheating of the drive components.
A maximum of 50m is allowed for each motor module and a
maximum of 150m for each drive system.
Example: An Incorrectly shielded cable Examples of cabinet cable entries:
Without plugs and sockets
With plugs and sockets
Shielding that is connected via a plug & socket housing must

use a metallic housing with a continuous metallic contact.
Metalized housings are not permitted, over a period of time the
metalized coating becomes worn and fails to be conductive to
the levels required.
To maintain the airtight properties of the cabinet, cable outlets
should use methods which form a seal and any unused open-
ings blanked off.
Notes

Cables, Plugs and Sockets Encoder and motor cables in close proximity.
Cabling Sins
Encoder and power cables in close proximity:
Cabinet Sealing
A cabinet that isn’t sealed correctly can lead to a multiple of

problems. Poor Sealing can be caused by cable entries, poorly
fitting doors, etc. Top
A poorly sealed cabinet can:-
 Influence the air circulation and cause overheating due

to hotspots forming and air short circuits.
 Lead to a high moisture content which can in turn lead

to component failure.
 Emit electrical interference, causing problems with oth-

er nearby equipment.
 Allow harmful, conductive contaminants to enter

causing component failure.
Bottom
The cabinet door should always be closed and locked during
normal running operation, access should only be with a key or
tool and by authorised personnel.
Below:-An example of a poorly fitting cabinet door.
Notes

Miscellaneous
Coil Suppression
Poor Electromagnetic compatibility can also affect other

cabinet mounted components.
To deal with this suppressing devices can be used on any item
with a coil. (Except servo motors)
AC components use RC networks for suppression while DC
components use diodes.
Below:-Example of 3 phase AC suppressors
AC Suppressor
A006: END
Notes

A006 END Electrical Cabinet Design

Appendix A Hardware Differences
Sinumerik
Operate
Hardware
Differences:
START
NCU
Differences
Digital I/O
Hardware
Differences:
END
Sinumerik
Appendix A
NCU7x0.3: X122, X132 & X142 Interface Description

Ext. 24V
X122, X132 & X142 digital I/O interfaces are located beneath
the flip-down cover of the NCU. + M
X124
+ Sinumerik NCU7x0
+
X122 X132 X142 M
M
X122
1 DI 0
2 DI 1
3 DI 2
4 DI 3
5 DI 16
6 DI 17
7 M1
2*
8 M
9 DI/DO 8 1*
10 DI/DO 9 1*
11 M
12 DI/DO 10 1*
13 DI/DO 11 1*
14 M
3*
X132
1 DI 4
2 DI 5
3 DI 6
4 DI 7
5 DI 20
6 DI 21
7 M2
2*
8 M
9 DI/DO 12 1*
10 DI/DO 13 1*
11 M
12 DI/DO 14 1*
The Binary Connectors (BiCos) of X122 and X132 are used to 13 DI/DO 15 1*
assign Sinamics inputs/outputs to a specific function e.g. Ena- 14 M
3*
bling of drives, BERO’s, automatic line contactor control etc. X142
X142 is used for NC digital inputs and outputs. 1 Not used
2 Not used
default, remaining terminals can be assigned to a function via 3 NCK DI1
machine data. 4 NCK DI2
5 M
The status of the terminals is transferred to CU parameter 6 NCK DI3
r0722 which is referred to when assigning a function. 7 NCK DI4
8 M
9 NCK DO1
10 NCK DO2
11 M
1* Fast inputs/outputs (Must be shielded). 12 NCK DO3
2* Electrical isolation for digital inputs (DI) if jumper open.
13 NCK DO4
3* Can be parameterised as Inputs or outputs.
14 M
Notes
Appendix A Page 2 840D sl SINUMERIK Operate

Hardware Differences Appendix A
X122 - Sinamics I/O
X122 Signal Function/Default Setting BICO connection

Source Destination

CU-r0722.0 Infeed p0840
Pin 1 Sinamics DI 0
Infeed ready for non DriveCLiQ
SLM X21.1 Drive p0864
SLM (SLM <16Kw)
p0849
group)
(SH enable = p9601)
group)
(SH enable = p9601)
SH/SBC – Group 1 (Input) p9774 bit 1
Sinamics DI/O8
Pin 9 SINAMICS Safety Integrated CU-p0738 BICO from CU after the 1st
(Rapid input)
drive in the group
Sinamics DI/O9 p9774 bit 1
SH/SBC – Group 2 (Input) CU-p0739
Pin 10 (Rapid input) BICO from CU after the 1st
drive in the group
Sinamics DI/O10
(Rapid input)
Sinamics DI/O11 Probe 1: central measuring Each drive p0488, Index
Pin 13 CU p680[0]=3
(Rapid input) (Input) (MD13210=0) encoder 1, 2, 3=0
Notes
840D sl SINUMERIK Operate Page 3 Appendix A

X132-Sinamics I/O
X132 Signal Default setting (In bold)/ BICO connection

suggested setting
Source Destination
Pin 4 Sinamics DI 7 Line contactor feedback signal CU-r0722.7 LM-p0860

Sinamics DI/O Infeed operation (Output)
Pin 9 LM-r0863.0 CU-p0742
12 (Line Module with DriveCLiQ)
Sinamics DI/O Infeed ready to start (Output)
Pin 10 LM-r0899.0 CU-p0743
13 (If L M with DriveCLiQ)
Sinamics DI/O
14
Sinamics DI/O Probe 2: central measuring (Input) CU-p680[1]=6 Each drive p0489,
Pin 13
15 (MD13210=0) CU-p728 bit 15=0 Index 1, 2, 3=0
Notes

X142-NCK I/O

Pin 5 GND Ground
Pin 8 GND Ground
Pin 11 GND Ground
Pin 14 GND Ground
Notes

NCU 7x0.2: X122 & X132 Interface Description Connection diagram for X122/X132
X122 & X132 digital I/O interfaces are located beneath the flip-
down cover of the NCU.
External 24V
+ M
X122 X132
X124 Sinumerik NCU7x0

+
+
M
M
X122
1 DI 0
2 DI 1
3 DI 2
4 DI 3
5 M1
2*
6 M
7 DI/DO 8
8 DI/DO 9 1*
9 M
10 DI/DO 10 1*
11 DI/DO 11 1*
12 M
3*
X132
1 DI 4
2 DI 5
3 DI 6
4 DI 7
5 M1
2*
6 M
7 DI/DO 12
8 DI/DO 13 1*
9 M
10 DI/DO 14 1*
The Binary Connectors (BiCos) of X122 and X132 are used to 11 DI/DO 15 1*
assign Sinamics inputs/outputs to a specific function e.g. ena- 12 M
bling of drives, BERO’s, automatic line contactor control etc. 3*

default, remaining terminals can be assigned to a function via
1* Fast inputs/outputs (Must be shielded).
machine data.
2* Electrical isolation for digital inputs (DI) if jumper open.
The status of the terminals is transferred to CU parameter
r0722 which is referred to when assigning a function.
3* Can be parameterised as Inputs or outputs.
Notes

X122 - Sinamics I/O

suggested setting
Source Destination
Sinamics DI 0 CU-r0722.0 Infeed p0840
Pin 1 (Positive edge
required) Infeed ready for non DriveCLiQ
SLM X21.1 Drive p0864
SLM (SLM <16Kw)
p0849
p9620
(all drives in the group)
(SH enable = p9601)
p9620
(all drives in the group)
(SH enable = p9601)
Pin 5 Ground (M1) Ground for pins 1 to 4
Pin 6 Ground (M) Ground for pins 7, 8, 10, 11
SH/SBC 1 – Group 1 (Output) p9774 bit 1
Pin 7 Sinamics DI/O8 SINAMICS Safety Integrated CU-p0738 BICO from CU after the 1st
drive in the group
p9774 bit 1
SH/SBC 1 – Group 2 (Output) CU-p0739
Pin 8 Sinamics DI/O9 BICO from CU after the 1st
drive in the group
Pin 10 Sinamics DI/O10 Bero 1 - external zero mark (Input) CU-r0722.10 Drive p0495=2
Probe 1: Central Measuring
Each drive p0488,
Pin 11 Sinamics DI/O11 (Input) CU p680[0]=3
Index 1, 2, 3=0
(MD13210=0)
Notes

X132-Sinamics I/O

suggested setting
Source Destination
Pin 1 Sinamics DI 4 Digital Input $A_IN[1] CU-r0722.4 CU-p2082[0]
Digital Input $A_IN[4] CU-r0722.7 CU-p2082[3]
Pin 4 Sinamics DI 7 Line contactor feedback signal when set via
CU-r0722.7 LM-p0860
wizard screen
Pin 5 Ground (M1) Ground for pins 1 to 4

Digital Output $A_OUT[4] CU-p2091.3 CU-p0742
Pin 7 Sinamics DI/O 12 Infeed operation (Output)
LM-r0863.0 CU-p0742
(Line Module with DriveCLiQ)
Digital Output $A_OUT[3]
CU-p2091.2 CU-p0743
(If no DriveCLiQ LM)
Pin 8 Sinamics DI/O 13
Infeed ready to start (Output)
LM-r0899.0 CU-p0743
(If L M with DriveCLiQ)
Pin 10 Sinamics DI/O 14
Bero 2 - external zero mark (Input) CU-r0722.14 Drive p0495=5
Pin 11 Sinamics DI/O 15 Probe 2: Remote Measuring (Input) CU-p680[1]=0 Each drive p0489,
(MD13210=1) CU-p728 bit 15=0 Index 1, 2, 3=6
Appendix A: END
Notes

Appendix B
Sinumerik
Operate
Technology
Settings:
START
General
Machine Data
51000-51999
Channel
Machine Data
52000-52999
Axis
Machine Data
53000-53999
General Setting
Data
54000-54999
Sinumerik
Channel Setting
Data
55000-55999
Technology
Settings:
END
Siemens assumes no responsibility for its contents. Appendix B
General Machine Data
840D sl SINUMERIK Operate
Technology Settings
MD Identifier Description Old MD/GUD
51000 $MNS_DISP_RES_MM Display resolution in mm

51001 $MNS_DISP_RES_MM_FEED_PER_REV Display resolution in mm feedrate/rev
51002 $MNS_DISP_RES_MM_FEED_PER_TIME Display resolution in mm feedrate/min
51003 $MNS_DISP_RES_MM_FEED_PER_TOOTH Display resolution in mm feedrate/tooth
51004 $MNS_DISP_RES_MM_CONST_CUT_RATE Display resolution constant cutting speed m/min
51010 $MNS_DISP_RES_INCH Display resolution in inch 9011
51011 $MNS_DISP_RES_INCH_FEED_P_REV Display resolution in inch feedrate/rev
51012 $MNS_DISP_RES_INCH_FEED_P_TIME Display resolution in inch feedrate/min
51013 $MNS_DISP_RES_INCH_FEED_P_TOOTH Display resolution in inch feedrate/tooth
51014 $MNS_DISP_RES_INCH_CUT_RATE Display resolution constant cutting speed ft/min
51020 $MNS_DISP_RES_ANGLE Display resolution of angle
51021 $MNS_DISP_RES_SPINDLE Decimal places in speed entry field 9010, 9664
Page 2
51022 $MNS_DISP_RES_ROT_AX_FEED Display resolution of rotary axis feedrate

51023 $MNS_ACT_VALUE_SPIND_MODE Only display spindles in actual values window
This affects the display of the spindles in the axis actual values window.
0 = Spindles are always displayed
1 = Spindles are displayed only if in axis mode
51024 $MNS_BLOCK_SEARCH_MODE_MASK_JS Bit mask for available search modes (ShopMill/ShopTurn single-channel)
51025 $MNS_FRAMES_ACT_IMMEDIATELY Active data (frames) are activated immediately after change 9440
51026 $MNS_AXES_SHOW_GEO_FIRST When the machine data value is 1, the geometry axes of the channel are displayed first. 9421
Appendix B
51027 $MNS_ONLY_MKS_DIST_TO_GO Distance-to-go display in work window 9420
51028 $MNS_BLOCK_SEARCH_MODE_MASK Bit mask for available block search modes
Appendix B

Appendix B
Appendix B
51029 $MNS_MAX_SKP_LEVEL The machine data defines how many skip levels are made available for operation. 9423
51030 $MNS_SPIND_MAX_POWER Maximum value of the permissible spindle power rating in percent; the display bar in the 9428
machine image is shown in green within the range between 0 and the value stored in
SPIND_MAX_POWER.
51031 $MNS_SPIND_POWER_RANGE Scale end value for spindle power rating in percent; value must be equal to or greater than 9429
Technology Settings
SPIND_MAX_POWER.
The display bar in the machine image is shown in red in the range between the values of
SPIND_MAX_POWER and SPIND_POWER_RANGE.
51032 $MNS_STAT_DISPLAY_BASE Number basis for display of articulated joint STAT 9042
00: no display
02: binary value display
10: decimal value display
16: hexadecimal value display
51033 $MNS_TU_DISPLAY_BASE Number basis for display of rotary axis position TU 9243
00: no display
Page 3
02: binary value display

10: decimal value display
16: hexadecimal value display
51034 $MNS_TEACH_MODE Teach mode to be activated 9026
Bit 0: Default teach-in
Taught-in block is transferred to the program using the Accept softkey.
Bit 1: Acceptance of teach block can be blocked by the PLC.
DB19.DBX13.0 = 0 block is accepted.
DB19.DBX13.0 = 1 block is not accepted.
Bit 2: Block selection only explicitly
51035 $MNS_WRITE_FRAMES_FINE_LIMIT Input limit for all work offsets fine
51036 $MNS_ENABLE_COORDINATE_REL Display REL coordinate system
0 = no relative coordinate system selectable
1 = REL coordinate system can be selected as an alternative of the WCS/SZS coordinate
system
51037 $MNS_ENABLE_COORDINATE_ACS Activate settable coordinate system 9424

0 = WCS coordinate system is displayed.
1 = SZS coordinate system is displayed.
(SZS is WCS reduced by the offset components defined in MD24030)
Technology Settings
51038 $MNS_SET_ACT_VALUE Set actual value selection 9422
1 = If a user frame (settable work offset e.g. G54) is active, it will be used. In G500 Set ac-
tual values is not offered (system frame is no longer used).
51039 $MNS_PROGRAM_CONTROL_MODE_MASK Options for machine - program influence:
Bit 0: Program test function available
51040 $MNS_SWITCH_TO_MACHINE_MASK Automatic operating area switchover to machine
Bit 0: When selecting a program in the program manager, the operating area does not
automatically switch over to Machine.
Bit 1: When switching the type of operation via the MCP, the operating area is not auto-
matically switched over to Machine.
Bit 2: Do not switch automatically in Programs during program selection.
Bit 3: No auto. Start of block search on selection / execution under Programs.
51041 $MNS_ENABLE_PROGLIST_USER Activates the PLC program list of the USER area. The programs entered there can be se-
lected by the PLC for processing.
51042 $MNS_ENABLE_PROGLIST_INDIVIDUAL Activates the PLC program list of the INDIVIDUAL area. The programs entered here can be
Page 4
selected by the PLC for processing.

51043 $MNS_ENABLE_PROGLIST_MANUFACT Activates the PLC program list of the MANUFACTURER area. The programs entered here
can be selected by the PLC for processing.
51044 $MNS_ACCESS_SHOW_SBL2 Display protection level SBL2 9227
51045 $MNS_ACCESS_TEACH_IN Protection level TEACH IN 9219
51046 $MNS_ACCESS_CLEAR_RPA Protection level delete R variables 9221
51047 $MNS_ACCESS_READ_GUD_LUD Read user variable protection level 9211
51048 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_GUD_LUD Write protection level of user variables
51049 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_PRG_COND Write program control protection level 9214
51050 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_PROGRAM Write part program protection level 9217
51051 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_RPA Protection level write R variables 9222
Appendix B
51052 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_SEA Protection level write setting data 9215
Appendix B
51053 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_BASEFRAME Write basic work offset (basic frame) protection level
51054 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_CYCFRAME Write cycle frame protection level 9186

51055 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_EXTFRAME Write external work offset protection level 9188
Appendix B
Appendix B
51056 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_PARTFRAME Write table reference protection level 9184
51057 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_SETFRAME Write basic reference protection level
51058 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_TOOLFRAME Write basic tool reference protection level 9183

51059 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_TRAFRAME Write transformation frame protec. level 9187
Technology Settings
51060 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_USERFRAME Write settable work offset (G54 ... G599) protection level
51061 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_WPFRAME Write workpiece reference protection level 9185
51062 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_FINE Write protection level for fine offset of all work offsets 9203
51063 $MNS_ACCESS_SET_ACT_VALUE Set actual value protection level 9220

51064 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_PROGLIST Write protection level of program list in USER area
51065 $MNS_NUM_DISPLAYED_CHANNELS Number of channels displayed simultaneously 9034
51066 $MNS_ORDER_DISPLAYED_CHANNELS Channel numbers of the channels displayed

Page 5
Contains the numbers of the channels to be displayed under machine in the multi-
channel view, in the desired order and separated by commas, semicolons or spaces.
51067 $MNS_ENABLE_HANDWHEEL_WINDOW Show handwheel window.
If the machine data is set to 0, the window for handwheel assignment is hidden.
51068 $MNS_SPIND_DRIVELOAD_FROM_PLC1 Machine axis index of spindle 1 utilization display from PLC
51069 $MNS_SPIND_DRIVELOAD_FROM_PLC2 Machine axis index of spindle 2 utilization display from PLC
51070 $MNS_ACCESS_CAL_TOOL_PROBE Protection level for calibration of the tool probe (ShopTurn)
51071 $MNS_ACCESS_ACTIVATE_CTRL_E Protection level of CTRL-Energy
51072 $MNS_ACCESS_EDIT_CTRL_E Protection level of CTRL-Energy for changing profiles
51073 $MNS_ACCESS_SET_SOFTKEY_ACCESS Protection level of ”Adapt softkeys”
51160 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_CA_MACH_JOG Write protection level collision monitoring machine jog

51161 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_CA_MACH_AUTO Write protection level collision monitoring machine automatic
51162 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_CA_TOOL Write protection level collision monitoring tool
51198 $MNS_ACCESS_READ_TM_ALL_PARAM Protection level TM details - read all parameters
51199 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_TM_GRIND Protection level of tool management for writing grinding data
Technology Settings
51200 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_TM_GEO Write tool offset geometry data protection level 9201
51201 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_TM_WEAR Write tool offset wear data protection level 9202
51202 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_TM_WEAR_DELTA Protection level for restricted writing of tool wear values, 9203
s. SD 54213: TM_WRITE_DELTA_LIMIT
51203 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_TM_SC Write tool offset sum offset protection level 9204
51204 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_TM_EC Write tool offset use offsets protection level 9205
51205 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_TM_SUPVIS Write tool offset monitoring data protection level 9206
One authorization applies to all limit values: quantity, service life, wear and the monitor-
ing type.
51206 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_TM_ASSDNO Write tool offset unique D number protection level 9207
51207 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_TM_WGROUP Write tool offset wear groups (magazine location / magazine) protection level 9208
51208 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_TM_ADAPT Write tool offset tool adapter geometry data protection level 9209
Page 6
51209 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_TM_NAME Write tool offset tool name and duplo data protection level 9240
51210 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_TM_TYPE Write tool offset tool type protection level 9241
51211 $MNS_ACCESS_READ_TM Read tool offset data protection level 9200
51212 $MNS_TM_WRITE_WEAR_ABS_LIMIT With TM_WRITE_WEAR_ABS_LIMIT, the max. possible value of a tool wear is limited 9639
absolutely, independently of the current protection level (keyswitch position), i.e. also
independently of ACCESS_WRITE_TM_WEAR. Absolute and incremental wear limita-
tion can be combined, i.e. the wear can be changed incrementally up to the absolute
limit, see MD 51213.
51213 $MNS_TM_WRITE_WEAR_DELTA_LIMIT When entering tool offsets, the value of the change from the previous value to the new 9450
value cannot exceed the value set here.
With TM_WRITE_WEAR_DELTA_LIMIT, the change to a tool wear can be limited incre-
mentally, if the current protection level is the same as or higher than the one set in AC-
CESS_WRITE_TM_WEAR_DELTA. With the current protection level being the same or
higher than ACCESS_WRITE_TM_WEAR, an incremental limitation is no longer per-
Appendix B
formed. incremental wear limitation can be combined, i.e. the wear can be changed up
to the absolute limit, see MD 51212.
Appendix B
51214 $MNS_TM_WRITE_LIMIT_MASK Validity of the restricted tool wear input 9449

Bit 0: Use for cutting edge data, wear
Bit 1: Use for SC data, sum offsets
Bit 2: Use for EC data, use offsets
Bit 0+1+2: Use for all data, wear, SC, EC
Appendix B
Appendix B
51215 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_TM_ALL_PARAM Protection level TM details - write all parameters
51216 $MNS_ACCESS_TM_TOOL_CREATE Protection level TM create tool
51217 $MNS_ACCESS_TM_TOOL_DELETE Protection level TM delete tool
51218 $MNS_ACCESS_TM_TOOL_LOAD Protection level TM load tool
Technology Settings
51219 $MNS_ACCESS_TM_TOOL_UNLOAD Protection level TM unload tool
51220 $MNS_ACCESS_TM_TOOL_MOVE Protection level TM relocate tool
51221 $MNS_ACCESS_TM_TOOL_REACTIVATE Protection level TM reactivate tool
51222 $MNS_ACCESS_TM_TOOL_MEASURE Protection level TM measure tool
51223 $MNS_ACCESS_TM_TOOLEDGE_CREATE Protection level TM create tool cutting edge
51224 $MNS_ACCESS_TM_TOOLEDGE_DELETE Protection level TM delete tool cutting edge

Page 7
51225 $MNS_ACCESS_TM_MAGAZINE_POS Protection level TM position magazine
51226 $MNS_FUNCTION_MASK_SIM Function mask Simulation

Bit 1: Deactivate simulation
51228 $MNS_FUNCTION_MASK_TECH Function mask Cross-technology
Bit 0: G code programming without multi-channel data
51230 $MNS_ENABLE_LADDER_DB_ADDRESSES Activation of DB addresses in PLC Ladder Viewer
51231 $MNS_ENABLE_LADDER_EDITOR Activation of PLC Ladder Editor
51233 $MNS_ENABLE_GSM_MODEM Activation of GSM Modem for Easy Message

51235 $MNS_ACCESS_RESET_SERV_PLANNER Protection level for acknowledgement of maintenance tasks
51600 $MNS_MEA_CAL_WP_NUM The workpiece probe calibration data refer to the workpiece coordinate system (WCS)!
In the data fields, the workpiece probe calibration data of the technologies Milling and
Turning are stored!
51601 $MNS_MEA_CAL_EDGE_NUM The gauging block is exclusively used to calibrate the workpiece probe of the Turning
technology!
Technology Settings
51602 $MNS_MEA_CAL_TP_NUM The geometry data and calibration data of the tool probe refer to the machine coordinate system
(MCS)!
51603 $MNS_MEA_CAL_TPW_NUM The geometry data and calibration data of the tool probe refer to the workpiece coordinate sys-
tem (WCS)!
51618 $MNS_MEA_CM_ROT_AX_POS_TOL Entries in parameter $MN_MEA_CM_ROT_AX_POS_TOL are effective only if MD51740

$MNS_MEA_FUNCTION_MASK Bit 2 or Bit 16 is set.
The real angle position of the rotary axes can deviate from the programmed one (exact stop fine
window).
This deviation depends on the position control features of the axis. The maximum deviation ex-
pected on the concrete axis must be entered in this parameter. When the tolerance is exceeded,
alarm 61442 "Toolholder not in parallel with the geometry axes" is displayed.
51740 $MNS_MEA_FUNCTION_MASK Function mask for measuring cycles
Bit 0: Workpiece measurement, calibration status monitoring, measuring in automatic
Bit 1: Workpiece measurement, length reference of probe in infeed axis, for milling
Bit 2: Workpiece measurement, support of orientable toolholders
Bit 3: Workpiece measurement, correction angle for mono probe
Page 8
Bit 4: Workpiece measurement, probe fixed to machine, cannot be positioned

Bit 15: Workpiece measurement, traverse measuring block with path behaviour G60 exact stop
Bit 16: Tool measurement, support of orientable toolholders
51750 $MNS_J_MEA_M_DIST This parameter defines the measuring path in front of and behind the measuring setpoint. 9752
51751 $MNS_J_MEA_M_DIST_MANUELL Measuring path, manual measurement ((for "Measure in JOG")) [mm] (in front of and behind the 9753
measuring setpoint)
51752 $MNS_J_MEA_M_DIST_TOOL_LENGTH Measuring path for tool length measuring. 9754
51753 $MNS_J_MEA_M_DIST_TOOL_RADIUS Measuring path for tool radius measuring. 9755
51757 $MNS_J_MEA_COLL_MONIT_FEED Feedrate in the working plane with active collision detection. 9757
51758 $MNS_J_MEA_COLL_MONIT_POS_FEED Feedrate of the infeed axis with active collision detection, for "Measure in JOG". 9758
51770 $MNS_J_MEA_CAL_RING_DIAM Calibration ring diameter, for probe sphere calibration in the plane, for "Measure in JOG"
51772 $MNS_J_MEA_CAL_HEIGHT_FEEDAX Calibration height in the infeed axis for probe length calibration, for "Measure in JOG"
Appendix B
The calibration height must be entered with reference to the the workpiece coordinate system
(WCS)!
Appendix B
51780 $MNS_J_MEA_T_PROBE_DIAM_RAD Effective grinding wheel diameter of the tool probe for radius measurement on milling tools, for 9766
"Measure in JOG"
51784 $MNS_J_MEA_T_PROBE_APPR_AX_DIR Effective grinding wheel diameter of the tool probe for length measurement on milling tools, for 9768
"Measure in JOG"
51786 $MNS_J_MEA_T_PROBE_MEASURE_DIST Measuring path for tool probe calibration and tool measuring with stationary spindle, in front of 9772
and behind the expected switching position.
Channel Machine Data
Appendix B
Appendix B
52000 $MCS_DISP_COORDINATE_SYSTEM With this MD you adapt the operator panel of the coordinate system to the machine's coordinate 9650
system. Depending on the selected position, all help screens, the sequence graphic, the simula-
tion and the input fields with the circular direction specified will change automatically.
Also note MD 52210 $MCS_FUNCTION_MASK_DISP, bit 1.
52005 $MCS_DISP_PLANE_MILL Plane selection Milling 9660
0: plane selection on the operator panel
17: always G17
Technology Settings
18: always G18
19: always G19
52006 $MCS_DISP_PLANE_TURN Plane selection Turning
0: plane selection on the operator panel
17: always G17
18: always G18
19: always G19
52010 $MCS_DISP_NUM_AXIS_BIG_FONT Number of actual values with large font
52011 $MCS_ADJUST_NUM_AXIS_BIG_FONT Adapt the number of actual values with large font if the number of geometry axes changes, e.g.
Page 9
due to transformations like TRANSMIT or TRACYL.

0 = Only MD 52010 "DISP_NUM_AXIS_BIG_FONT" is valid. The number is assigned as a fixed
value.
1 = Only the geometry axes are displayed in large font. MD 52010
"DISP_NUM_AXIS_BIG_FONT" is ignored.
2 = The number of geometry axes plus the content of MD 52010 "DISP_NUM_AXIS_BIG_FONT"
are displayed in large font.
52200 $MCS_TECHNOLOGY Technology 9020
1: turning
2: milling
Also note MD 52201 $MCS_TECHNOLOGY_EXTENSION.
52201 $MCS_TECHNOLOGY_EXTENSION Extended technology
1: turning
2: milling
Also note MD 52200 $MCS_TECHNOLOGY.

Example:
Turning machine with milling technology
MD 52200 $MCS_TECHNOLOGY = 1
MD 52201 $MCS_TECHNOLOGY_EXTENSION = 2
Technology Settings
52206 $MCS_AXIS_USAGE Meaning of the axes in the channel

0 = no special meaning 9705, 9708,
1 = tool spindle (driven tool) 9802, 9803,
2 = auxiliary spindle (driven tool) 9804, 9805,
3 = main spindle (turning) 9806, 9807,
4 = C axis of the main spindle (turning) 9808.
5 = counter spindle (turning)
6 = C axis of the counter spindle (turning)
7 = linear axis of the counter spindle (turning)
8 = tailstock (turning)
9 = steady rest (turning)
10 = B axis (turning)
11 = reserved
12 = B axis of the counter spindle (turning)
52207 $MCS_AXIS_USAGE_ATTRIB Axis attributes
Bit 0: Rotates around the 1st geometry axis (applies to rotary axes) 9653, 9720,
Bit 1: Rotates around the 2nd geometry axis (applies to rotary axes) 9703, 9704,
Page 10
Bit 2: Rotates around the 3rd geometry axis (applies to rotary axes) 9706, 9707,
Bit 3: Positive direction of rotation is counterclockwise (applies to rotary axes) 9822, 9823,
Bit 4: Displayed direction of rotation for M3 is counterclockwise (applies to spindles) 9824, 9825.
Bit 5: Direction of rotation M3 corresponds to rotary axis minus (applies to spindles)
Bit 7: Offer rotation axis in position pattern 9727
Bit 8: Offer rotation axis to accept blank (at milling machines)
52210 $MCS_FUNCTION_MASK_DISP Function mask Display
Bit 0: Measuring system for programs always in the base system 9626 Bit 9
Bit 1: Front view for turning in school coordinate system 9719
Bit 2: Hide “T,S,M” soft key in JOG area
Bit 3: Generate automatic end-of-program in MDI (with the “Delete blocks” soft key)
Appendix B
Bit 7: Hide tool length in T,F,S window
Appendix B

Appendix B
Appendix B
52211 $MCS_FUNCTION_MASK_DISP _ZOA Function screen for displaying overview of work offsets
Bit 0: Show machine position
Bit 1: reserved
Bit 2: Display DRF offset
Bit 3: Display $AA_OFF position offset
Bit 4: Display $P_PARTFRAME
Bit 5: Display $P_SETFRAME
Technology Settings
Bit 6: Display $P_EXTSFRAME
Bit 7: Display $P_ISO1FRAME
Bit10: Display $P_ACTBFRAME
Bit 11: Display $P_IFRAME
Bit 12: Display $P_TOOLFRAME
Bit 13: Display $P_WPFRAME
Bit 14: Display $P_TRAFRAME
Bit 15: Display $P_PFRAME
Bit 17: Display $P_CYCFRAME
Page 11
Bit 18: Display sum of work offsets

Bit 19: Display offset of active tool
Bit 20: Display Work position
52212 $MCS_FUNCTION_MASK_TECH Function mask Cross-technology
Bit 0: Enable Swivel 9723
Bit 10: reserved
Bit 11: Switch off layer check for drilling and milling tools (ShopTurn)
Technology Settings
52214 $MCS_FUNCTION_MASK_MILL Function mask Milling

Bit 0: Enable cylinder surface transformation (ShopMill) 9721
Bit 1: Offer table to accept blank (at milling machines)
Bit 2: reserved
Bit 4: Enable spindle clamping (C axis) 9843
52216 $MCS_FUNCTION_MASK_DRILL Function mask Drilling
Bit 0: CYCLE84 Unhide technology fields
Bit 1: CYCLE840 Unhide technology fields
Bit 2: Thread tapping also without encoder (ShopMill)
52218 $MCS_FUNCTION_MASK_TURN Function mask Turning
Bit 0: Enable zoom under manual for tool measurement 9840
Bit 1: Enable parts gripper for cut-off 9841
Bit 2: Enable tailstock 9842
Bit 3: Enable spindle control of main spindle via surface 9897Bit 0
Page 12
Bit 4: Enable spindle control of counterspindle via surface 9897Bit 1

Bit 5: Enable spindle control of tool spindle via surface 9897Bit 2
Bit 6: Enable balance cutting for dual-channel stock removal
Bit 7: Retraction during stock removal along contour with G1
Bit 8: Input spindle chuck data in the program
Bit 9: Additional entry of tailstock data in the program
Bit 12: Deactivate thread synchronization
Bit 13: Stock rem. contour with CYCLE95 (828D programGUIDE without Advanced Technology)
52229 $MCS_ENABLE_QUICK_M_CODES Enable fast M functions
Bit 0: Coolant OFF
Bit 1: Coolant 1 ON
Bit 2: Coolant 2 ON
52230 $MCS_M_CODE_ALL_COOLANTS_OFF M code for all coolants OFF 9686
52231 $MCS_M_CODE_COOLANT_1_ON M code for coolant 1 ON 9680
Appendix B
52232 $MCS_M_CODE_COOLANT_2_ON M code for coolant 2 ON 9681
Appendix B
52233 $MCS_M_CODE_COOLANT_1_AND_2_ON M code for coolant 1 + 2 ON 9668
52240 $MCS_NAME_TOOL_CHANGE_PROG Tool change program for G code steps

Appendix B
Appendix B
52244 $MCS_SUB_SPINDLE_PARK_POS_Y Parking position of the Y axis with counter spindle 9849
52248 $MCS_REV_2_BORDER_TOOL_LENGTH Limit value of tool length X for 2nd revolver: 9838
Limit value = 0: There is only one revolver
Tool length < limit value: Tool belongs to 1st revolver/multifix
Tool length >= limit value: Tool belongs to 2nd revolver/multifix
52250 $MCS_M_CODE_CHUCK_OPEN M code for Open chuck with non-rotating spindle.
Technology Settings
Example: "M34" or "M1=34"
Elements:
[0]: Main spindle
[1]: Counterspindle
52251 $MCS_M_CODE_CHUCK_CLOSE_OPEN_ M code for Open chuck with rotating spindle.
ROT Example: "M34" or "M1=34"
Elements:
[0]: Main spindle
[1]: Counterspindle
52252 $MCS_M_CODE_CHUCK_CLOSE M code for Close chuck
Page 13

Elements:
[0]: Main spindle
[1]: Counterspindle
52253 $MCS_M_CODE_TAILSTOCK_FORWARD M code for quill forward
Elements:
[0]: Quill opposite main spindle
[1]: Quill opposite counterspindle
52254 $MCS_M_CODE_TAILSTOCK_BACKWARD M code for quill backward
Elements:
[0]: Quill opposite main spindle
[1]: Quill opposite counterspindle
52260 $MCS_MACHINE_JOG_INTERRUPT_PRIO Priory for start ASUP under machine JOG
Technology Settings
52270 $MCS_TM_FUNCTION_MASK Function mask Tool management

Bit 0: Create tool on magazine location not allowed. Tools can only be created outside the maga- 9478 Bit 3
zine.
Bit 1: Load/unload disable, if machine is not in reset. Tools can only be loaded/unloaded, if the 9478 Bit 9
appropriate channel is in reset state.
Bit 2: Load/unload disable on Emergency stop. Tools can only be loaded/unloaded, if Emergen- 9478 Bit 12
cy stop is not active.
Bit 3: Load/unload tool to/from spindle or relocate tool is disabled. Tools cannot be loaded to or 9478 Bit 15
unloaded from the spindle or relocated.
Bit 4: Loading is executed directly in the spindle. Tools are loaded exclusively directly in the spin- 9478 Bit 20
dle.
Bit 5: Use grinding configuration file.
Bit 6: Permit relocating to/from spindle despite a block (Bit 3).
Bit 7: Create tool using the tool number. Specify the tool's T number when creating the tool.
Bit 8: Fade out Relocate tool. The function 'Relocate tool" is faded out on the user interface.
Bit 9: Fade out Position magazine. The function 'Position magazine' is faded out on the user in-
terface.
Bit 10: Reactivate tool using Position magazine. Prior to reactivating the tool is positioned on the
Page 14
loading position.
Bit 11: Reactivate tool in all monitoring modes. When reactivating a tool, all monitoring modes
enabled in the NC are reactivated for this tool, even the monitoring modes, which have not
been set for the relevant tool, but are available in the background only.
Bit 12: Fade out Reactivate tool. The function 'Reactivate tool' is faded out on the user interface.
52271 $MCS_TM_MAG_PLACE_DISTANCE Distance between individual magazine locations. 9479

Is used for graphical display of magazine and tools in tool management.
52272 $MCS_TM_TOOL_LOAD_DEFAULT_MAG Default magazine for tool loading 9671
0 = No default magazine
52273 $MCS_TM_TOOL_MOVE_DEFAULT_MAG Default magazine for tool relocation 9687
0 = No default magazine
52274 $MCS_TM_TOOL_LOAD_STATION Number of load station 9673
0 = All configured stations are taken into account
52281 $MCS_TOOL_MCODE_FUNC_ON M code for tool-specific function ON 9739, 9741,
Appendix B
Value -1 means that the M function is not output. If both M commands of a function equal -1, the 9743, 9745.
corresponding field will not be displayed in the user interface.
Appendix B
52282 $MCS_TOOL_MCODE_FUNC_OFF M code for tool-specific function OFF 9740, 9742,

Value -1 means that the M function is not output. If both M commands of a function equal -1, the 9744, 9746.
corresponding field will not be displayed in the user interface.
Appendix B
Appendix B
52290 $MCS_SIM_DISPLAY_CONFIG Location of status display of the channel in the simulation (OP019 only)
Bit 0: Corner left/top
Bit 1: Corner right/top
Bit 2: Corner left/bott
Bit 3: Corner right/bott
52740 $MCS_MEA_FUNCTION_MASK Function mask for measuring cycles 9750, 9751
Bit 0: Workpiece measurement, CNC probe input _CHBIT[0]
Technology Settings
Bit 1: Workpiece measurement, measurement in third geometry axis (Y), for turning _CHBIT[19]
Bit 14: reserved
Bit 15: reserved
Bit 16: Tool measurement, CNC probe input _CHBIT[1]
52750 $MCS_J_MEA_FIXPOINT Z value for measuring against fixed point 9748
52751 $MCS_J_MEA_MAGN_GLAS_POS Zoom position for tool measurement 9820, 9821
[0] = Position in 1st axis
[1] = Position in 2nd axis
52800 $MCS_ISO_M_ENABLE_POLAR_COORD Polar coordinates
Page 15
0: OFF
1: ON
52802 $MCS_ISO_ENABLE_INTERRUPTS Interrupt process
0: OFF
1: ON
52804 $MCS_ISO_ENABLE_DRYRUN Machining skipped during tapping G74/G84 at DRY RUN
0: OFF
1: ON
52806 $MCS_ISO_SCALING_SYSTEM Basic system
0: not defined
1: METRIC
2: INCH
52808 $MCS_ISO_SIMULTAN_AXES_START Simultaneous approach to the boring position on all programmed axes
0: OFF
1: ON
52810 $MCS_ISO_T_DEEPHOLE_DRILL_MODE Select the type of deep hole drilling

0: deep hole drilling with chip breaking
1: deep hole drilling with stock removal
Axis Machine Data
Technology Settings
53220 $MAS_AXIS_MCS_POSITION Position of axis in the Machine
53230 $MAS_SIM_START_POSITION Axis position at start of simulation
53240 $MAS_SPINDLE_PARAMETER Spindle chuck data

[0]: Chuck dimension
[1]: Stop dimension
[2]: Jaw dimension
53241 $MAS_SPINDLE_CHUCK_TYPE Spindle jaw type
0 = Clamp from outside 9829
1 = Clamp from inside
53242 $MAS_TAILSTOCK_PARAMETER Tailstock data
[0]: Tailstock diameter 9836
[1]: Tailstock length 9837
53250 $MAS_CLAMPING_TOLERANCE Permissible tolerance when an axis jams
Page 16
General Setting Data

54215 $SNS_TM_FUNCTION_MASK_SET Function mask Tool management
Bit 0: Diameter display for rotating tools. For rotating tools the diameter is displayed instead of
the radius value. 9663
Bit 1: Default direction of rotation for all turning tools is M4. When creating turning tools the direc- 9826
tion of rotation is defaulted with M4.
Bit 2: Create tool without name suggestion. 9478 Bit 4
Bit 3: Input disable for tool name and tool type in loaded tools. When tools are loaded, the tool 9478 Bit 7
name and tool type can no longer be changed. 9478 Bit 6
Bit 4: Input disable for loaded tools, if the channel is not in Reset. 9478 Bit 10
Bit 5: Calculate tool wear inputs additively. Wear data are input additively to the already existing
wear value. 9478 Bit 11
Bit 6: Numerical input of the tool ident. Only numbers are permissible for tool ident input.
Bit 7: Fade out tool monitoring parameters. The tool monitoring parameters are faded out on the
Appendix B
user interface.
Bit 8: Diameter display for transverse axis - Geometry. The geometry value of the transverse axis
is displayed as diameter value.
Appendix B
Bit 9: Diameter display for transverse axis - Wear. The wear value of the transverse axis is dis-
played as diameter value.
Bit 10: Enable load/relocate tool on buffer locations. In the load dialog the magazine number can 9478 Bit 25
be entered. Thus it is possible to access the buffer using magazine number 9998.
Bit 11: Creating tool in gripper disabled.
Bit 12: Do not unload measuring tools if ”Unload all” function is executed.
Appendix B
Appendix B
54600 $SNS_MEA_WP_BALL_DIAM Effective sphere diameter of the probe sphere for the workpiece probe. _WP[x,0]
The value of this parameter is created by the operation "Calibrate workpiece probe"!
54601 $SNS_MEA_WP_TRIG_MINUS_DIR_AX1 Trigger point of the 1st measuring axis (abscissa) in negative traversing direction (X at G17) of the _WP[x,1]
workpiece probe.
The term "negative traversing direction" refers to the currently active workpiece zero point refer-
ence!
Technology Settings
54602 $SNS_MEA_WP_TRIG_PLUS_DIR_AX1 Trigger point of the 1st measuring axis (abscissa) in positive traversing direction (X at G17) of the _WP[x,2]
workpiece probe.
The term "positive traversing direction" refers to the currently active workpiece zero point refer-
ence!
54603 $SNS_MEA_WP_TRIG_MINUS_DIR_AX2 Trigger point of the 2nd measuring axis (ordinate) in negative traversing direction (Y at G17) of the _WP[x,3]
workpiece probe.
ence!
Page 17
54604 $SNS_MEA_WP_TRIG_PLUS_DIR_AX2 Trigger point of the 2nd measuring axis (ordinate) in positive traversing direction (Y at G17) of the _WP[x,4]
workpiece probe.
ence!
54605 $SNS_MEA_WP_TRIG_MINUS_DIR_AX3 Trigger point of the 3rd measuring axis (applicate) in negative traversing direction (Z at G17) of the _WP[x,5]
workpiece probe.
ence!
54606 $SNS_MEA_WP_TRIG_PLUS_DIR_AX3 Trigger point of the 3rd measuring axis (applicate) in positive traversing direction (Z at G17) of the _WP[x,6]
workpiece probe.
ence!
Technology Settings
54607 $SNS_MEA_WP_POS_DEV_AX1 The position deviation in the 1st measuring axis represents a geometrical offset of the centre _WP[x,7]
point of the probe sphere related to the electrical centre point of the probe in this axis!
54608 $SNS_MEA_WP_POS_DEV_AX2 The position deviation in the 2nd measuring axis represents a geometrical offset of the centre _WP[x,8]
point of the probe sphere related to the electrical centre point of the probe in this axis!
54609 $SNS_MEA_WP_STATUS_RT Calibration status of the axis positions reserved for internal use! _WP[x,9]
54610 $SNS_MEA_WP_STATUS_GEN Calibration status in general reserved for internal use! _WP[x,10]
54611 $SNS_MEA_WP_FEED Measure workpiece measuring feed for calibration.

This measuring feed is used for all subsequent workpiece measuring programs in conjunction
with the probe field.
54615 $SNS_MEA_CAL_EDGE_BASE_AX1 Calibration groove base of the 1st measuring axis (abscissa, Z at G18) _KB[x,2]
Page 18
This parameter is a geometrical component of the calibration groove and must be supplied by the
user!
54617 $SNS_MEA_CAL_EDGE_PLUS_DIR_AX1 Calibration groove edge in positive direction of the 1st measuring axis (abscissa, Z at G18) _KB[x,3]
user!
54618 $SNS_MEA_CAL_EDGE_MINUS_DIR_AX1 Calibration groove edge in negative direction of the 1st measuring axis (abscissa, Z at G18) _KB[x,4]
user!
Appendix B
Appendix B
Appendix B
Appendix B
54619 $SNS_MEA_CAL_EDGE_BASE_AX2 Calibration groove base of the 2nd measuring axis (ordinate, X at G18) _KB[x,6]
This parameter is a geometrical component of the calibration groove and must be supplied by
the user!
54620 $SNS_MEA_CAL_EDGE_UPPER_AX2 Calibration groove upper edge of the 2nd measuring axis (ordinate, X at G18) _KB[x,5]
the user!
54621 $SNS_MEA_CAL_EDGE_PLUS_DIR_AX2 Calibration groove edge in positive direction of the 2nd measuring axis (ordinate, X at G18) _KB[x,0]
Technology Settings
the user!
54622 $SNS_MEA_CAL_EDGE_MINUS_DIR_AX2 Calibration groove edge in negative direction of the 2nd measuring axis (ordinate, X at G18) _KB[x,1]
the user!
54625 $SNS_MEA_TP_TRIG_MINUS_DIR_AX1 Trigger point of the 1st measuring axis in negative direction (abscissa, X at G17, Z at G18) _TP[x,0]
The trigger point refers to the machine coordinate system (MCS).
Prior to calibration the approximate trigger point must be entered in the machine coordinate sys-
tem!
The exact value of this parameter is created by the operation "Calibrate tool probe"!
Page 19
54626 $SNS_MEA_TP_TRIG_PLUS_DIR_AX1 Trigger point of the 1st measuring axis in positive direction (abscissa, X at G17, Z at G18) _TP[x,1]
tem!
54627 $SNS_MEA_TP_TRIG_MINUS_DIR_AX2 Trigger point of the 2nd measuring axis in negative direction (ordinate, Y at G17, X at G18) _TP[x,2]
tem!
54628 $SNS_MEA_TP_TRIG_PLUS_DIR_AX2 Trigger point of the 2nd measuring axis in positive direction (ordinate, Y at G17, X at G18) _TP[x,3]
tem!
54629 $SNS_MEA_TP_TRIG_MINUS_DIR_AX3 Trigger point of the 3rd measuring axis in negative direction (applicate, Z at G17, Y at G18) _TP[x,4]
tem!
Technology Settings
54630 $SNS_MEA_TP_TRIG_PLUS_DIR_AX3 Trigger point of the 3rd measuring axis in positive direction (applicate, Z at G17, Y at G18) _TP[x,5]
tem!
54631 $SNS_MEA_TP_EDGE_DISK_SIZE Effective edge length or grinding wheel diameter of the tool probe. _TP[x,6]
Milling tools are normally measured with wheel-shaped probes while turning tools are measured 9765
with square probes.
54632 $SNS_MEA_TP_AX_DIR_AUTO_CAL Enabling axes and traversing directions for "Automatic calibration" of milling tool probes. _TP[x,7]
The default setting refers in X and Y to the plus and minus direction respectively, in Z only to the 9764
minus direction.
The parameter is divided into three components the functions of which are to be assigned to cali-
bration data records 1, 2 or 3!
The calibration data records are firmly assigned to tool measuring in the working planes G17 (1),
G18 (2) and G19 (3)!
Meaning of the parameter components
Decimal position:
Page 20
Ones: 1st geometry axis (X)

Tens: 2nd geometry axis (Y)
Hundreds: 3rd geometry axis (Z)
Value:
=0: Axis not enabled
=1: Only minus direction possible
=2: Only plus direction possible
=3: Both directions possible
54633 $SNS_MEA_TP_TYPE Tool probe type _TP[x,8]
0: Cube 9763
101: Wheel in XY, working plane G17
201: Wheel in ZX, working plane G18
301: Wheel in YZ, working plane G19
54634 $SNS_MEA_TP_CAL_MEASURE_DEPTH Distance between the upper tool probe edge and the lower milling tool edge. _TP[x,9]
For tool probe calibration this distance defines the calibration depth and for milling tool measuring 9767
the measuring depth!
Appendix B
This parameter does not apply to turning tool measuring!
54635 $SNS_MEA_TP_STATUS_GEN Calibration status general, reserved for internal use!
Appendix B
The value of this parameter is assigned when the “Calibrate tool probe“ procedure is executed!
54636 $SNS_MEA_TP_FEED Measuring feed for tool probe calibration in WMCS
This measuring feed is used for all subsequent tool measuring programs in conjunction with the
probe filed!
Appendix B
Appendix B
54640 $SNS_MEA_TPW_TRIG_MINUS_DIR_AX1 Trigger point of the 1st measuring axis in negative direction (abscissa, X at G17, Z at G18) _TPW[x,0]
The trigger point refers to the workpiece coordinate system (WCS).
Prior to calibration the approximate trigger point must be entered in the workpiece coordinate sys-
tem!
54641 $SNS_MEA_TPW_TRIG_PLUS_DIR_AX1 Trigger point of the 1st measuring axis in positive direction (abscissa, X at G17, Z at G18) _TPW[x,1]
Technology Settings
tem!
54642 $SNS_MEA_TPW_TRIG_MINUS_DIR_AX2 Trigger point of the 2nd measuring axis in negative direction (ordinate, Y at G17, X at G18) _TPW[x,2]
tem!
54643 $SNS_MEA_TPW_TRIG_PLUS_DIR_AX2 Trigger point of the 2nd measuring axis in positive direction (ordinate, Y at G17, X at G18) _TPW[x,3]
Page 21
tem!
54644 $SNS_MEA_TPW_TRIG_MINUS_DIR_AX3 Trigger point of the 3rd measuring axis in negative direction (applicate, Z at G17, Y at G18) _TPW[x,4]
tem!
54645 $SNS_MEA_TPW_TRIG_PLUS_DIR_AX3 Trigger point of the 3rd measuring axis in positive direction (applicate, Z at G17, Y at G18) _TPW[x,5]
tem!
54646 $SNS_MEA_TPW_EDGE_DISK_SIZE Effective edge length or grinding wheel diameter of the tool probe. _TPW[x,6]
Milling tools are normally measured with wheel-shaped probes while turning tools are measured
with square probes.

Technology Settings
54647 $SNS_MEA_TPW_AX_DIR_AUTO_CAL Enabling axes and traversing directions for "Automatic calibration" of milling tool probes. _TPW[x,7]
The default setting refers in X and Y to the plus and minus direction respectively, in Z only to the
minus direction.
The parameter is divided into three components the functions of which are to be assigned to cali-
bration data records 1, 2 or 3!
The calibration data records are firmly assigned to tool measuring in the working planes G17 (1),
G18 (2) and G19 (3)!
Meaning of the parameter components
Decimal position:
Ones: 1st geometry axis (X)
Tens: 2nd geometry axis (Y)
Hundreds: 3rd geometry axis (Z)
Value:
=0: Axis not enabled
=1: Only minus direction possible
=2: Only plus direction possible
=3: Both directions possible
Page 22
54648 $SNS_MEA_TPW_TYPE Tool probe type _TPW[x,8]

0: Cube
101: Wheel in XY, working plane G17
201: Wheel in ZX, working plane G18
301: Wheel in YZ, working plane G19
54649 $SNS_MEA_TPW_CAL_MEASURE_DEPTH Distance between the upper tool probe edge and the lower milling tool edge. _TPW[x,9]
For tool probe calibration this distance defines the calibration depth and for milling tool measur-
ing the measuring depth!
This parameter does not apply to turning tool measuring!
54650 $SNS_MEA_TPW_STATUS_GEN Calibration status general, reserved for internal use!
The value of this parameter is assigned when the “Calibrate tool probe“ procedure is executed!
54651 $SNS_MEA_TPW_FEED Measuring feed for tool probe calibration in WCS
This measuring feed is used for all subsequent tool measuring programs in conjunction with the
probe filed!
54652 $SNS_MEA_INPUT_TOOL_PROBE_SUB CNC measurement input for tool probe with reference to the counterspindle 9828
Appendix B
=0: Toolsetter no.=n+1, with reference to the main spindle
CNC measurement input corresponds to the value of $MCS_MEA_FUNCTION_MASK, bit16
=10: Toolsetter no.=n+1, with reference to the counterspindle
Appendix B
units digit =0, corresponds to CNC measurement input 1

=11: Toolsetter no.=n+1, with reference to the counterspindle
units digit =1, corresponds to CNC measurement input 2
Appendix B
Appendix B
54670 $SNS_MEA_CM_MAX_PERI_SPEED Max. permissible peripheral speed of the tool to be measured when the spindle rotates. _CM[0]
Monitoring parameter for tool measuring with rotating spindle. 9759
54671 $SNS_MEA_CM_MAX_REVOLUTIONS Max. permissible tool speed for tool measuring with rotating spindle. _CM[1]
The speed is automatically reduced when this value is exceeded. 9760
Monitoring parameter for tool measuring with rotating spindle.
54672 $SNS_MEA_CM_MAX_FEEDRATE Max. permissible feed for contact of the tool to be measured with the probe when the spindle ro- _CM[4]
Technology Settings
tates. 9771
54673 $SNS_MEA_CM_MIN_FEEDRATE Min. feed for first contact of the tool to be measured with the probe when the spindle rotates. _CM[4]
Too small feeds for large tool radii are thus avoided! 9761
54674 $SNS_MEA_CM_SPIND_ROT_DIR Direction of spindle rotation for tool measuring with rotating spindle (default: 4 = M4) _CM[5]
Notice: If the spindle is already rotating when the measuring cycle is called, the direction of rota-
tion is maintained independently of $SNS_MEA_CM_SPIND_ROT_DIR!
Page 23
54675 $SNS_MEA_CM_FEEDFACTOR_1 Feedrate factor 1, for tool measuring with rotating spindle _CM[6]
=0: Single probing with the feedrate calculated by the cycle (but at least with the value of 9769
$SNS_MEA_CM_MIN_FEEDRATE)
>=1: First probing with calculated feedrate (but at least with the value of
$SNS_MEA_CM_MIN_FEEDRATE).
54676 $SNS_MEA_CM_FEEDFACTOR_2 Feedrate factor 2, for tool measuring with rotating spindle _CM[7]
=0:Second probing with the feedrate calculated by the cycle (only effective with 9770
MEA_CM_FEEDFACTOR_1 > 0)
>=1: Second probing with calculated feedrate, feedrate factor 2
Third probing with calculated feedrate (tool speed is influenced by SD54749
$SNS_MEA_FUNCTION_MASK_TOOL, Bit 12)
Notice: - Feedrate factor 2 should be smaller than feedrate factor 1!
- If the value of feedrate factor 2 is 0, a third probing will not be not performed!
Technology Settings
54677 $SNS_MEA_CM_MEASURING_ACCURACY Required measuring accuracy for tool measuring _CM[3]
The value of this parameter always refers to the last contact of the tool with the probe! 9762
54689 $SNS_MEA_T_PROBE_MANUFACTURER Tool probe type (manufacturer) _TP_CF

These indications are required for tool measuring with rotating spindle. 9774
=0: No indication
=1: TT130 (Heidenhain)
=2: TS27R (Renishaw)
54691 $SNS_MEA_T_PROBE_OFFSET Measurement result offset for tool measuring with rotating spindle. _MT_COMP
=0: No offset 9775
=1: Cycle-internal offset (only effective with SD54689
$SNS_MEA_T_PROBE_MANUFACTURER<>0)
=2: Offset through user-defined offset table
54692 $SNS_MEA_T_CIRCULAR_ARC_DIST Arc distance for single cutting edge measuring from the radius
54693 $SNS_MEA_T_MAX_STEPS Max. number of contacts for single cutting edge measuring from the radius
Page 24
54695 $SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_RAD1 Parameter for user-defined measurement result offset for tool measuring with rotating spindle,
$SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_RAD1[0] ... this element always has value ZERO
$SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_RAD1[1] ... 1st tool radius
$SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_RAD1[2] ... 2nd tool radius
$SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_RAD1[3] ... 3rd tool radius
$SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_RAD1[4] ... 4th tool radius
$SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_RAD2[0] ... 1st peripheral speed
$SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_RAD2[1] ... offset value for radius regarding 1st radi-
us and 1st peripheral speed
$SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_RAD2[2] ... offset value for radius regarding 2nd radi-
$SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_RAD2[3] ... offset value for radius regarding 3rd radi-
$SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_RAD2[4] ... offset value for radius regarding 4th radi-
Appendix B
Appendix B
Appendix B
Appendix B
$SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_RAD3[0] ... 2nd peripheral speed
$SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_RAD3[1] ... offset value for radius regarding 1st radius
and 2nd peripheral speed
$SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_RAD3[2] ... offset value for radius regarding 2nd radius
$SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_RAD3[3] ... offset value for radius regarding 3rd radius
Technology Settings
$SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_RAD3[4] ... offset value for radius regarding 4th radius
$SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_RAD4[0] ... 3rd peripheral speed
and 3rd peripheral speed
Page 25

$SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_RAD5[0] ... 4th peripheral speed
and 4th peripheral speed
Technology Settings
$SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_RAD6[0] ... 5th peripheral speed
54705 $SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_LEN1 Parameter for user-defined measurement result offset for tool measuring with rotating spindle,
$SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_LEN1[0] ... this element always has value ZERO
$SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_LEN1[1] ... 1st tool radius
$SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_LEN1[2] ... 2nd tool radius
$SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_LEN1[3] ... 3rd tool radius
$SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_LEN1[4] ... 4th tool radius
Page 26
$SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_LEN2[0] ... 1st peripheral speed

$SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_LEN2[1] ... offset value for radius regarding 1st radius
and 1st peripheral speed
$SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_LEN2[2] ... offset value for radius regarding 2nd radius
$SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_LEN2[3] ... offset value for radius regarding 3rd radius
$SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_LEN2[4] ... offset value for radius regarding 4th radius
$SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_LEN3[0] ... 2nd peripheral speed
Appendix B
Appendix B
Appendix B
Appendix B
$SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_LEN4[0] ... 3rd peripheral speed
Technology Settings
$SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_LEN5[0] ... 4th peripheral speed
Page 27

$SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_LEN6[0] ... 5th peripheral speed
Technology Settings
54740 $SNS_MEA_FUNCTION_MASK Function mask for measuring cycles
Bit 0: Workpiece measurement, repeat measurement if _TDIF and _TSA are exceeded _CBIT[0]
Bit 1: Workpiece measurement, repeat measurement with alarm output and cycles stop at M0 _CBIT[1]
Bit 2: Workpiece measurement, exceeding _TUL, _TLL, _TDIF, cycles stop at M0 _CBIT[2]
Bit 3: Workpiece measurement, accept calibrated probe radius in the tool data _CBIT[15]
Bit 4: Workpiece measurement, calibr. meas. planes different for turn .mill. tech.
Bit 16: Tool measurement, repeat measurement if _TDIF and _TSA are exceeded _CBIT[0]
Bit 17: Tool measurement, repeat measurement with alarm output and cycles stop at M0 _CBIT[1]
Bit 18: Tool measurement, exceeding _TDIF, cycles stop at M0 _CBIT[2]
Bit 19: Tool meas. milling machine, spindle speed reduction during last touching _CHBIT[22]
54750 $SNS_MEA_ALARM_MASK Expert mode for cycle alarms
Bit 0 - 7 Workpiece measurement
Bit 0 =1 Alarms with cycle-internal states and coding are displayed (expert mode)!
Bit 1 - 7 Reserved
Bit 8 -16 Tool measuring
Bit 0 - 7 Reserved
54760 $SNS_MEA_FUNCTION_MASK_PIECE Setting for input screen, measuring cycles in Automatic, workpiece measuring
Page 28
Bit 1: Display softkey 3D measurement

Bit 3: Select probe calibration data field, enable
Bit 4: Select Calibrate Input measuring feed
Bit 6: Enable selection of WO compensation in basic reference
Bit 7: Enable selection of WO compensation in channel-specific basic WO
Bit 8: Enable selection of WO compensation in global basic WO
Bit 9: Enable selection of WO compensation in work offset
Bit 10: Enable selection of WO compensation in course and fine
Bit 11: Enable selection of tool offset wear and geometry
Bit 12: Enable selection of tool offset not inverted and inverted
Bit 13: Enable selection of tool offset radius, length L1, L2, L3
Bit 14: Enable selection of tool offset work offset
Bit 15: Enable selection of tool offset dimensional difference check
Bit 16: Selection of workpiece measurement with spindle reversal
Bit 17: Selection align workpiece probe in switching direction
Bit 18: Select Number of measurements
Bit 19: Select Offset with averaging
Appendix B
Bit 20: Select Empirical values
Bit 21: Select Additive setup offset
Bit 22: Select Calibrate to unknown or known center point
Appendix B
Bit 24: Select Calibrate with or without positional deviation

Bit 25: Selection zero offset when measuring the angularity of the spindle
Appendix B
Appendix B
54762 $SNS_MEA_FUNCTION_MASK_TOOL Setting for input screen, measuring cycles in Automatic, tool measuring
Bit 4: Select Calibrate Input measuring feed
Bit 5: Select Input feed and spindle speeds for contacting
Bit 7: Select Measure in MCS and WCS
Bit 8: Select Measure absolute and incremental
Bit 9: Select Tool offset Geometry and wear
Bit 10: Selection single cutting edge measuring
Technology Settings
Bit 11: Selection spindle reversal when calibrating on the plane
Bit 12: Select Number of measurements
Bit 13: Select Empirical values
54764 $SNS_MEA_FUNCTION_MASK_TURN Setting for input mask, Measuring cycles in Automatic, Workpiece turning
Bit 0: Measure Diameter inside/outside with reversal
Bit 1: Measure Diameter inside/outside “Travel under turning center“?
54780 $SNS_J_MEA_FUNCTION_MASK_PIECE Setting for input screen, Measure in JOG, workpiece measurement 9747
Bit 2: Activate calibration for electronic workpiece probe
Bit 5: Select WO as measuring basis
Page 29
Bit 6: Select WO compensation in basic reference, enable

Bit 7: Select WO compensation in channel basic frame, enable
Bit 8: Select WO compensation in global basic frame, enable
Bit 9: Select WO compensation in settable frame, enable
54782 $SNS_J_MEA_FUNCTION_MASK_TOOL Setting for input screen, Measure in JOG, tool measurement 9749
Bit 2: Enable automatic tool measurement
Bit 3: Select tool probe calibration data field, enable
Bit 10: Selection single cutting edge measuring
Bit 11: Selection spindle reversal when calibrating on the plane
Channel Setting Data
Technology Settings
55200 $SCS_MAX_INP_FEED_PER_REV Feedrate input upper limit for mm/rev 9665
55201 $SCS_MAX_INP_FEED_PER_TIME Feedrate input upper limit for mm/min 9664

55202 $SCS_MAX_INP_FEED_PER_TOOTH Feedrate input upper limit for mm/tooth 9666
55212 $SCS_FUNCTION_MASK_TECH_SET Function mask Cross-technology
Bit 0: Tool preselection active 9667
Bit 1: Calculate thread depth from metric thread lead 9640
Bit 2: Refer to the table for thread diameter and depth
55214 $SCS_FUNCTION_MASK_MILL_SET Function mask Milling
Bit 0: Default setting - milling cycles with synchronous operation 9827
Bit 2: Depth calculation in milling cycles without parameter SC _ZSD[9]
= 0: Depth calculation in milling cycles is carried out between reference plane + safety
clearance and depth
= 1: Depth calculation in milling cycles is carried out without inclusion of the safety clear-
ance
Note: Bit 2 is active with the following milling cycles: CYCLE61, CYCLE71, CYCLE76, CYCLE77, _ZSD[1]
Page 30
CYCLE79, CYCLE899, LONGHOLE, SLOT1, SLOT2, POCKET3, POCKET4

55216 $SCS_FUNCTION_MASK_DRILL_SET Function mask Drilling
Bit 0: reserved
Bit 1: Consider rotation of the tool plane (CYCLE86)
Bit 2: Consider swiveled table kinematics (CYCLE86)
Bit 3: Monitoring spindle MD 31050/31060 (CYCLE84)
Bit 4: Monitoring spindle MD 31050/31060 (CYCLE840)
Bit 5: reserved
Bit 6: Adapt spindle position to the tool orientation (CYCLE86)
Bit 7: Adapt direction of retraction path in the plane to active mirroring (CYCLE86)
55218 $SCS_FUNCTION_MASK_TURN_SET Function mask Turning
Bit 0: New thread table during thread cutting
Bit 3: Chamfer in CYCLE930 as chamfer length (CHF)
55220 $SCS_FUNCTION_MASK_MILL_TOL_SET Function mask High Speed Settings CYCLE832
Appendix B
Bit 0: Unhide technology fields CYCLE832
Bit 1: Orientation tolerance (OTOL) as a tolerance factor, enter it directly
Appendix B
Appendix B
Appendix B
55221 $SCS_FUNCTION_MASK_SWIVEL_SET Function mask Swivel CYCLE800
Bit 0: Display input field "No swivel"
Bit 1: Retraction variant Z, Z XY or fixed position
= 0: Retract Z or retract Z XY
= 1: Retract to fixed position 1 or 2
Bit 2: Allow selection "Deselection" of the swivel data block
Bit 3: Show active swivel plane under Swivel in JOG
Bit 4: Optimized positioning in basic position (pole position) of the kinematics
Technology Settings
Bit 5: reserved
Bit 6: Do not offer swivel mode “directly under swivel in JOG
55230 $SCS_CIRCLE_RAPID_FEED Rapid traverse feedrate in mm/min for positioning on circle path between circumferential grooves 9724
and contour elements
55231 $SCS_MAX_INP_RANGE_GAMMA Maximum input area alignment angle gamma 9863
55232 $SCS_SUB_SPINDLE_REL_POS Z retraction position for the counter spindle 9851
55260 $SCS_MAJOG_SAFETY_CLEARANCE Safety clearance for machine JOG
55261 $SCS_MAJOG_RELEASE PLANE Retraction plane for machine JOG

Page 31
55410 $SCS_MILL_SWIVEL_ALARM_MASK Hide and unhide cycle alarms CYCLE800

Bit 0: Error analysis 62186 - active work offset G%4 and base (base relation) include rotations
Bit 1: Error analysis 62187 - active base and base relation (G500) include rotations
55420 $SCS_MILL_SWIVEL_RESET_RETRACT Initial setting swivel: retract
= 0: no change
= 1: no
= 2: Z
= 3: Z XY
= 4: Tool direction max.
= 5: Tool direction inc.
55421 $SCS_MILL_SWIVEL_RESET_TRACK Initial setting swivel: tool correction
= 0: no change
= 1: do not correct
= 2: correct
55441 $SCS_MILL_TOL_TECHNO_ROUGH Settings for roughing High Speed Settings cycle CYCLE832 of G group 59 _TOLT[1]
55442 $SCS_MILL_TOL_TECHNO_SEMIFIN Settings for pre-finishing High Speed Settings cycle CYCLE832 of G group 59 _TOLT[2]
55443 $SCS_MILL_TOL_TECHNO_FINISH Settings for finishing High Speed Settings cycle CYCLE832 of G group 59 _TOLT[3]
55446 $SCS_MILL_TOL_VALUE_ROUGH Tolerance value for roughing High Speed Settings cycle CYCLE832 _TOLV[1]
55447 $SCS_MILL_TOL_VALUE_SEMIFIN Tolerance value for pre-finishing High Speed Settings cycle CYCLE832 _TOLV[2]
55448 $SCS_MILL_TOL_VALUE_FINISH Tolerance value for finishing High Speed Settings cycle CYCLE832 _TOLV[3]
Technology Settings
55460 $SCS_MILL_CONT_INITIAL_RAD_FIN This data affects the radius of the approach circle during contour pocket finishing. 9670
-1: The radius is selected to maintain a safety clearance to the finishing allowance in the starting
point.
>0: The radius is selected to maintain the value of this setting data to the finishing allowance in the
starting point.
55481 $SCS_DRILL_TAPPING_SET_GG12 Settings for tapping G group 12 cycle CYCLE84 and CYCLE840: 9855[0]
G group 12: Block change behaviour at exact stop (G60) 9856[1]
0 = Exact stop behaviour, same as before the cycle call
1 = G601
2 = G602
3 = G603
Index[0]: for tool spindle
Index[1]: for main spindle - for drilling in centre
55482 $SCS_DRILL_TAPPING_SET_GG21 Settings for tapping G group 21 cycle CYCLE84: 9855[0]
G group 21: Acceleration profile (SOFT, BRISK, ..) 9856[1]
0 = Acceleration behaviour, same as before the cycle call
Page 32
1 = SOFT
2 = BRISK
3 = DRIVE
55483 $SCS_DRILL_TAPPING_SET_GG24 Settings for tapping G group 24 cycle CYCLE84 and CYCLE840: 9855[0]
G group 24: Feedforward control (FFWON, FFWOF ) 9856[1]
0 = Feedforward control, same as before the cycle call
1 = FFWON
2 = FFWOF
55484 $SCS_DRILL_TAPPING_SET_MC Setting for tapping cycle CYCLE84 spindle operation at MCALL 9855[0]
0= Reactivate spindle operation at MCALL 9856[1]
1= Maintain position-controlled spindle operation at MCALL
Appendix B
55489 $SCS_DRILL_MID_MAX_ECCENT Maximum centre offset for centre drilling 9862
Appendix B
55490 $SCS_DRILL_SPOT_DIST Rough drilling depth for drill and thread milling 9682
Appendix B
Appendix B
55500 $SCS_TURN_FIN_FEED_PERCENT When selecting Complete machining (roughing and finishing), the percentage of the entered 9630
feedrate F as specified in this setting data is used for finishing.
55505 $SCS_TURN_ROUGH_O_RELEASE_DIST This setting data defines the distance by which the tool is returned from the contour during stock 9648
removal of an outer corner. This does not apply to stock removal of a contour.
-1: The distance is specified internally.
55506 $SCS_TURN_ROUGH_I_RELEASE_DIST This setting data defines the distance by which the tool is returned from the contour during stock 9649
removal of an inner corner. This does not apply to stock removal of a contour.
Technology Settings
-1: The distance is specified internally.
55510 $SCS_TURN_GROOVE_DWELL_TIME If a tool clearance time occurs in a cycle, e.g. deep hole drilling, grooving, the value of this setting 9621
data is used
- Negative value in spindle revolutions
- Positive value in seconds
55540 $SCS_TURN_PART_OFF_CTRL_DIST Path for cut-off check 9859
55541 $SCS_TURN_PART_OFF_CTRL_FEED Feedrate for cut-off check 9860
55542 $SCS_TURN_PART_OFF_CTRL_FORCE Force in percent for cut-off check 9861
Page 33
55543 $SCS_TURN_PART_OFF_RETRACTION Retraction path prior to cut-off with counter spindle
55550 $SCS_TURN_FIXED_STOP_DIST In this setting data you specify the distance to the programmed target position, after which the 9852
counter spindle travels with a special feedrate during travel to fixed stop (see setting data 55551
$SCS_TURN_FIXED_STOP_FEED).
55551 $SCS_TURN_FIXED_STOP_FEED In this setting data you specify the feedrate with which the counter spindle travels to a fixed stop. 9853
In setting data 55550 $SCS_TURN_FIXED_STOP_DIST you specify the distance after which the
tool travels in this feedrate.
55552 $SCS_TURN_FIXED_STOP_FORCE In this setting data you specify at which percentage of the driving force the counter spindle is to 9854
stop during travel to fixed stop.
55553 $SCS_TURN_FIXED_STOP_RETRACTION Retraction path prior to chucking after travel to fixed stop 9857
55580 $SCS_TURN_CONT_RELEASE_ANGLE This setting data defines the angle by which the tool is retracted from the contour during contour
turning roughing.
55581 $SCS_TURN_CONT_RELEASE_DIST This setting data defines the value by which the tool is retracted in both axes during contour turn- 9550
ing roughing. This applies to cutting, plunge-cutting and plunge turning.
55582 $SCS_TURN_CONT_TRACE_ANGLE This setting data specifies the angle between the cutting edge and the contour, at which the con- 9553
tour is rounded in order to remove residual material.
Technology Settings
55583 $SCS_TURN_CONT_VARIABLE_DEPTH Percentage for variable cutting depth during contour turning 9556
55584 $SCS_TURN_CONT_BLANK_OFFSET This setting data specifies the distance to the blank, after which contour turning is switched from 9552
G0 to G1 in order to adjust any possible blank allowances. This applies to cutting, plunge cutting
and plunge turning.
55585 $SCS_TURN_CONT_INTERRUPT_TIME Feed interrupt time during contour turning, contour grooving and plunge turning 9557
- Negative value in spindle revolutions
- Positive value in seconds
This setting data is effective only if setting data 55586 is 55586
$SCS_TURN_CONT_INTER_RETRACTION = 0.
55586 $SCS_TURN_CONT_INTER_RETRACTION Retraction path feed interrupt during contour turning, contour grooving and plunge turning: 9558
>0: Retraction path after feed interrupt (setting data 55585
$SCS_TURN_CONT_INTERRUPT_TIME is ineffective!)
=0: No retraction path
55587 $SCS_TURN_CONT_MIN_REST_MAT_AX1 This MD defines the limit value for stock removal of residual material in the direction of the 1st 9554
axis.
Page 34
Example:
If this MD is set to 50% and if the finishing allowance is 0.5 mm, the residual material which is
thinner than 0.25 mm is not removed in a separate machining step, but during finishing.
55588 $SCS_TURN_CONT_MIN_REST_MAT_AX2 This MD defines the limit value for stock removal of residual material in the direction of the 2nd 9555
axis.
Example:
If this MD is set to 50% and if the finishing allowance is 0.5 mm, the residual material which is
thinner than 0.25 mm is not removed in a separate machining step, but during finishing.
55595 $SCS_TURN_CONT_TOOL_BEND_RETR Retraction due to tool bending during plunge turning. In this setting data you specify the lateral 9560
distance to the last cut, by which each next cut will be shortened.
55596 $SCS_TURN_CONT_TURN_RETRACTION Retraction depth prior to plunge turning 9561
Appendix B
Appendix B
Appendix B
Appendix B
55613 $SCS_MEA_RESULT_DISPLAY Measurement result display _CHBIT[10]

=0: No measurement result display _CHBIT[11]
=1: The measurement result is displayed until cycle end _CHBIT[18]
=2: The measurement result is displayed until the start/call of the next cycle
=3: With the measurement result display, the cycle is stopped by an internal M0, with NC start,
the measuring cycle is continued and the measurement result display is deselected
=4: The measurement result display is only shown for cycle alarms 61303, 61304, 61305, 61306
Same behavior as with setting 3!
Technology Settings
55618 $SCS_MEA_SIM_ENABLE Selection of measuring cycle response in a simulated environment
= 0: Measuring cycles are not executed (measuring cycle is skipped internally)
= 1: Measuring cycles are executed; real axes are required!
During calibration no values are entered in the probe data fields,
no measurement result is displayed,
the measuring cycle is not logged,
the travel is performed without collision detection.
55619 $SCS_MEA_SIM_MEASURE_DIFF With this parameter simulated measurement errors can be specified on the measuring points. _MC_SIMDIFF
Provided that SD55618 $SCS_MEA_SIM_ENABLE=1 is used and that the measuring cycles are
Page 35
executed in a simulated environment of HMI Advanced or ShopMill / ShopTurn, a measurement

difference can be entered in this parameter. The value of the measurement difference must be
smaller than the measuring path in parameter _FA!
Otherwise cycle alarm 61301 "Probe does not switch" is output during active simulation.
55622 $SCS_MEA_EMPIRIC_VALUE_NUM Number of empirical values _EVMVNUM[0]
55623 $SCS_MEA_EMPIRIC_VALUE In its default setting the empirical value memory consists of 20 memory elements. _EV[n]
Using parameter $SCS_MEA_EMPIRIC_VALUE_NUM the number of memory elements can be
defined! Currently, however, these 20 memory elements can-not be changed!
In the empirical value memory, empirical values can be stored which are cleared with the currently
calculated difference between the setpoint and the actual value.
Using parameter _EVNUM the empirical value element to be cleared is addressed!
55624 $SCS_MEA_AVERAGE_VALUE_NUM Number of mean values _EVMVNUM[1]

Technology Settings
55625 $SCS_MEA_AVERAGE_VALUE In its default setting the mean value memory consists of 20 memory elements. _MV[n
Using parameter $SCS_MEA_AVERAGE_VALUE_NUM the number of memory elements can be
defined! Currently, however, these 20 memory elements can-not be changed!
In the mean value memory, the mean values calculated in connection with functionality "Automatic
tool offset with mean value creation" are stored.
Using parameter _EVNUM the mean value element to be used is addressed!
55628 $SCS_MEA_TP_FEED_MEASURE Feed for calibrating a tool probe with stationary spindle in AUTO and JOG 9773
55630 $SCS_MEA_FEED_MEASURE Feed for calibrating a workpiece probe in Automatic and JOG 9756
55632 $SCS_MEA_FEED_RAPID IN_PERCENT Traverse velocities for positioning in the measuring cycle between the measuring positions, with _SPEED[0]
rapid traverse velocity in per cent, with collision detection not active
Note:
If necessary, adapt the value of the rapid traverse velocity in per cent to the probe type used and to
the machine characteristics! This means that the maximum deflection of the actual probe type must
be considered!!
Page 36
Explanations:
In the measuring cycles any intermediate positions are calculated prior to the actual set of meas-
urements. These positions can be approached
- with collision detection (SD55740 $SCS_MEA_FUNCTION_MASK Bit0/Bit16=1) or
- without collision detection (SD55740 $SCS_MEA_FUNCTION_MASK Bit0/Bit16=0).
Depending on this setting different velocities are used for the approach:
- with collision detection (SD55740 $SCS_MEA_FUNCTION_MASK Bit0/Bit16=1):
With SD55634 $SCS_MEA_FEED_PLAN_VALUE the traversing feed is performed in the plane
and with SD55636 $SCS_MEA_FEED_FEEDAX_VALUE during traversing in the feed axis
(applicate).
If the probe switches when these intermediate positions are approached, the movement is stopped
and the alarm "Probe collision" is output.
- without collision detection (SD55740 $SCS_MEA_FUNCTION_MASK Bit0/Bit16=0):
The intermediate positions are approached with the maximum axis velocity (rapid traverse) in per-
cent as specified in SD55632 $SCS_MEA_FEED_RAPID_IN_PERCENT.
With SD55632 $SCS_MEA_FEED_RAPID_IN_PERCENT=0 and SD55632
$SCS_MEA_FEED_RAPID_IN_PERCENT=100 the maximum axis velocity is effective.
Appendix B
55634 $SCS_MEA_FEED_PLANE_VALUE Traverse velocity for intermediate positioning in the plane _SPEED[1]
Appendix B
Appendix B
Appendix B
55636 $SCS_MEA_FEED_FEEDAX_VALUE Traverse velocities for intermediate positioning in the measuring cycle in the infeed axis, with and _SPEED[2]
without collision detection.
Note:
If necessary, adapt the value of the velocity in the infeed axis to the probe type used and to the
machine characteristics! This means that the maximum deflection of the actual probe type must be
considered!!
Technology Settings
Explanations:
In the measuring cycles any intermediate positions are calculated prior to the actual set of meas-
urements. These positions can be approached
- with collision detection (SD55740 $SCS_MEA_FUNCTION_MASK Bit0/Bit16=1) or
- without collision detection (SD55740 $SCS_MEA_FUNCTION_MASK Bit0/Bit16=0).
Depending on this setting different velocities are used for the approach:
- with collision detection (SD55740 $SCS_MEA_FUNCTION_MASK Bit0/Bit16=1):
With SD55636 $SCS_MEA_FEED_FEEDAX_VALUE the traversing feed is performed in the infeed
axis (applicate).
If the probe switches when these intermediate positions are approached, the movement is stopped
Page 37
and the alarm "Probe collision" is output.

- without collision detection (SD55740 $SCS_MEA_FUNCTION_MASK Bit0/Bit16=0):
The intermediate positions are approached with the maximum axis velocity (rapid traverse) in per-
cent as specified in SD55632 $SCS_MEA_FEED_RAPID_IN_PERCENT.
With SD55632 $SCS_MEA_FEED_RAPID_IN_PERCENT=0 and SD55632
$SCS_MEA_FEED_RAPID_IN_PERCENT=100 the maximum axis velocity is effective.
55638 $SCS_MEA_FEED_FAST_MEASURE Rapid measuring feed _SPEED[3]
Note:
If necessary, adjust the value of the velocity to the probe type used and to the machine characteris-
tics!
This means that the maximum deflection of the actual probe type must be considered!!
The use of "Rapid measuring feed" depends of SD55740 $SCS_MEA_FUNCTION_MASK Bit4!
55640 $SCS_MEA_FEED_CIRCLE Circular feed for measuring circle segment
55642 $SCS_MEA_EDGE_SAVE_ANG Additional safe angle for measuring corner

Set $SCS_MEA_EDGE_SAVE_ANG=10 for compatibility programs.

Technology Settings
55740 $SCS_MEA_FUNCTION_MASK Function mask for measuring cycles

Bit 0: Workpiece measurement, collision monitoring _CHBIT[2]
Bit 1: Workpiece measurement, coupling spindle with coordinate rotation around Z in automatic _CHBIT[13]
Bit 2: Workpiece measurement, coupling spindle , positioning direction of spindle _CHBIT[14]
Bit 3: Workpiece measurement, no. of meas. attempts with non-switching of probe _CHBIT[15]
Bit 4: Workpiece measurement, approach velocity to the measuring point _CHBIT[17]
Bit 5: Workpiece measurement, retraction velocity from the measuring point _CHBIT[16]
Bit 6: Workpiece measurement, probe activation/deactivation with spindle motions
Bit 7: Measure kinematics, normalization basis of orientation vectors
Bit 8: Measure kinematics, measuring with TRAORI or TCARR (CYCLE800) active
Bit 14: Workpiece measurement, coupling spindle with coordinate rotation around Z in JOG E_MESS_SETT[0]
Bit 15: Workpiece measurement, known/unknown reference ring center point in JOG E_MESS_SETT[1]
Bit 16: Tool measurement, collision monitoring _CHBIT[2]
Bit 17: Tool measurement, no. of meas. attempts with non-switching of probe _CHBIT[15]
Bit 18: Tool measurement, approach velocity to the measuring point _CHBIT[17]
Bit 19: Tool measurement, retraction velocity from the measuring point _CHBIT[16]
55800 $SCS_ISO_M_DRILLING_AXIS_IS_Z Selection of the drilling axis
Page 38
0: Drilling axis is vertical to the active plane

1: Drilling axis is always "Z", independently of the active plane
55802 $SCS_ISO_M_DRILLING_TYPE Tapping type
0: Tapping without compensating chuck
1: Tapping with compensating chuck
2: Deep hole tapping with chip breakage
3: Deep hole tapping with stock removal
55804 $SCS_ISO_M_RETRACTION_FACTOR Factor for retraction speed (0...200%)
55806 $SCS_ISO_M_RETRACTION_DIR Retraction direction for precision drilling and reverse counter-sinking G76/G87
0: G17(-X) G18(-Z) G19(-Y)
1: G17(+X) G18(+Z) G19(+Y)
2: G17(-X) G18(-Z) G19(-Y)
3: G17(+Y) G18(+X) G19(+Z)
4: G17(-Y) G18(-X) G19(-Z)
Appendix B
55808 $SCS_ISO_T_RETRACTION_FACTOR Factor (1-200%) for retraction speed at tapping G84/G88
Appendix B
55810 $SCS_ISO_T_DWELL_TIME_UNIT Dwell time evaluation for deep hole drilling G83/G87
0: Seconds
1: Revolutions
Appendix B: END
Appendix C PLC Interface
Sinumerik
Operate
PLC Interface:
START
DB21-30
NC
Channels
Machine
Control
Panel
DB31-61
Axis/Spindle
DB2
PLC
Messages
DB71-74
Tool
Management
DB10
NCK
Interface
DB77
MCP
Signals
DB11
Mode
Group
PLC Interface:
END
DB18
SI
Signals
DB19
HMI
Sinumerik
Interface
DB20
PLC
Machine
Data
Appendix C
Appendix C PLC Interface Structure
Interface Description
Signals from/to Operator Component
Machine control panel, M version
Signals from machine control panel (keys)

Input display

IB n + 0 Spindle speed override Operating mode
IB n + 1 Machine function
REPOS REF Var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC
IB n + 2 Key- Key- Spindle start *Spindle stop Feed *Feed NC Start *NC Stop
switch switch posi- start stop
position 0 tion 2
IB n + 3 Reset Key- Single block Feedrate override
switch posi-
tion 1
E D C B A
IB n + 4 Direction keys Keyswitch Direction keys

position 3
plus minus Rapid trav- X 4th axis 7th axis
R15 R13 erse R1 R4 R7 R10
R14
IB n + 5 Axis selection
Y Z 5th axis Traverse 9th axis 8th axis 6th axis
R2 R3 R5 command R11 R9 R8 R6
MCS/WCS
IB n + 6 Unassigned customer keys
T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8
Notes
Appendix C Page 2 840D sl SINUMERIK Operate

PLC Interface Structure Appendix C
Signals to machine control panel (LEDs)

Output display
QB n + 0 Machine function Operating mode
1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC JOG TEACH IN MDA AUTO
QB n + 1 Feed *Feed NC Start *NC Stop Machine function

start stop
REPOS REF Var. INC 10000 INC
QB n + 2 Direction key Axis selection Single block Spindle start *Spindle stop
minus
R13 X 4th axis 7th axis
R1 R4 R7 R10
QB n + 3 Axis selection Direction key
plus
Z 5th axis Travel com- R11 9th axis 8th axis 6th axis R15
R3 R5 mand R9 R8 R6
MCS/WCS
R12
QB n + 4 Unassigned customer keys Y
T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 R2
QB n + 5 Unassigned customer keys
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8
Notes
840D sl SINUMERIK Operate Page 3 Appendix C

Machine control panel, T version
Signals from machine control panel (keys)

Input display

IB n + 1 Machine function
REPOS REF Var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC
IB n + 2 Keyswitch Keyswitch Spindle start *Spindle stop Feed start *Feed stop NC Start *NC Stop
position 0 position 2
IB n + 3 Reset Keyswitch Single block Feed override
position 1
E D C B A
IB n + 4 Direction keys Keyswitch Direction keys
position 3
+Y -Z -C
R15 R13 R14 R1 R4 R7 R10
IB n + 5 Direction keys
+X +C Rapid traver- Travel com- -Y -X +Z
R2 R3 se override mand MCS/ R11 R9 R8 R6
R5 WCS
R12
T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8
Signals to machine control panel (LEDs)

Output display

QB n + 0 Machine function Operating mode
1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC JOG TEACH IN MDA AUTO
QB n + 1 Feed start *Feed stop NC Start *NC Stop Machine function
REPOS REF Var. INC 10000 INC
QB n + 2 Direction keys Single block Spindle start *Spindle stop
+Y -Z -C
R13 R1 R4 R7 R10
QB n + 3 Direction keys
Travel com- -Y -X +Z
R3 R5 mand R11 R9 R8 R6 R15
MCS/WCS
QB n + 4 Unassigned customer keys Direction key
+X
T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 R2
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8
Notes

Machine control panel, slimline

Signals from slimline machine control panel (Keys and switches)
Input display

*NC Stop SP - SP 100% SP + SINGLEB JOG MDA AUTO
IB n + 1 Spindle Keyswitch Machine function

NC Start SP right *SP Stop SP left SS 3 REF. REPOS Teach in
IB n + 2 Feedrate Keyswitch Machine functions

Start *Stop Var. INC SS 0 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC
IB n + 3 Keyswitch Feed override

RESET SS 2 SS 1 E D C B A
IB n + 4 Direction keys Optional customer keys

plus minus Rapid trav-
R15 R13 erse R14 KT4 KT3 KT2 KT1 KT0
IB n + 5 Axis selection
T17 KT5 6 5 4 Z Y X
IB n + 6 Unassigned customer keys MCS/WCS Unassigned customer keys

T9 T10 T11 T12 T14 T15 T16

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8
Signals to slimline machine control panel (LEDs)

Output display
QB n + 0 NC Stop Spindle speed override Operating mode
SP - SP 100 % SP + SINGLEB JOG MDA AUTO
QB n + 1 NC Start Spindle Machine function

SP right SP Stop SP left unassigned REF. REPOS Teach in
QB n + 2 Feedrate Machine functions

Start Stop Var. INC unassigned 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC
QB n + 3 unassigned
unassigned unassigned unassigned unassigned unassigned unassigned unassigned unassigned
QB n + 4 Direction keys Optional customer keys

plus minus Rapid trav-
R15 R13 erse R14 KT4 KT3 KT2 KT1 KT0
QB n + 5 Axis selection
T17 KT5 6 5 4 Z Y X
QB n + 6 Unassigned customer keys Unassigned customer keys

T9 T10 T11 T12 MCS/WCS T14 T15 T16

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8
Notes

Signals from/to handheld unit (HHU, HT 2)
Signals from handheld unit (keys)

Input display

IB n + 0 Reserved Identifier
HT 2
IB n + 1 Reserved
IB n + 2
T9 T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1
IB n + 3
T16 T15 T14 T13 T12 T11 T10 T9
IB n + 4
T24 T23 T22 T21
IB n + 5 Acknowl- Rapid traverse/feed override switch

edgement
Keyswitch E D C B A
Digital
display
Notes

Signals to handheld unit (LEDs)

Output display

QB n + 0 always 1
New data for Line selection
QB n + 1 selected line
QB n + 2
L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 L1
QB n + 3
L16 L15 L14 L13 L12 L11 L10 L9
Digital display of handheld unit
QB n + 4 1st character (right) of the selected line
QB n + 5 2nd character of the selected line
QB ...
QB n + 18 15th character of the selected line
QB n + 19 16th character (left) of the selected line
Notes

Signals from/to handheld programming unit (HT 8)
Signals from machine control panel simulation

Interface HT 8  PLC

IB n + 0 Function key block
REF TEACH AUTO MDA JOG QUIT RESET WCS/MCS
IB n + 1 Function key block
Cntr Panel U4 U3 U2 U1 INC REPOS
Func (CPF)
IB n + 2 Change over Travel keys (JOG) positive direction
axes
Ax7-Ax12 Ax6 Ax5 Ax4 Ax3 Ax2 Ax1
Ax1-Ax6
IB n + 3 Travel keys (JOG) negative direction
Ax6 Ax5 Ax4 Ax3 Ax2 Ax1
IB n + 4
U9 U10 U11 U12 U13 U14 U15 U16
IB n + 5
U8 U7 U6 U5 SBL
IB n + 6 Start key block

Reserved HT 8 SF2 SF1 SF4 SF3 Start Stop
IB n + 7 Feedrate override
E D C B A
Notes

Signals to machine control panel simulation

Interface PLC  HT 8

QB n + 0 Function key block
REF TEACH AUTO MDA JOG QUIT RESET WCS/MCS
QB n + 1 Function key block
U4 U3 U2 U1 INC REPOS
QB n + 2 Travel keys (JOG) positive direction
Axes 7n Ax6 Ax5 Ax4 Ax3 Ax2 Ax1
QB n + 3 Travel keys (JOG) negative direction
For WCS: Ax6 Ax5 Ax4 Ax3 Ax2 Ax1
No MCS
QB n + 4
U9 U10 U11 U12 U13 U14 U15 U16
QB n + 5
U8 U7 U6 U5 SBL
QB n + 6 Start key block
Display travel SF2 SF1 SF4 SF3 Start Stop
keys
QB n + 7
Notes

PLC alarms / messages

FC 10 alarms in DB2 (FB1-Parameter "ExtendAlMsg"=False)
Channel areas (Parameter "ExtendAlMsg"=False)
DB2 Signals for PLC messages (PLC  HMI)

Byte (Message Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
type)
Channel 1
0 (EM) 510007 510006 510005 510004 510003 510002 510001 510000
Feed disable (alarm no.: 510000-510015)
1 (OM) 510015 510014 510013 510012 510011 510010 510009 510008
2 (EM) Feed and read-in disable byte 1 (alarm no.: 510100-510107)
4 (OM) Feed and read-in disable byte 3 (alarm no.: 510116-510123)
6 (EM) Read-in disable byte 1 (alarm no.: 510200-510207)
8 (OM) Read-in disable byte 3 (alarm no.: 510216-510223)
10 (EM) NC Start disable byte 1 (alarm no.: 510300-510307)
11 (OM) NC Start disable byte 2 (alarm no.: 510308-510315)
12 (EM) Feed stop GEOaxis 1 byte 1 (alarm no.: 511100-511107)
13 (OM) Feed stop GEOaxis 1 byte 2 (alarm no.: 511108-511115)
Notes

type)
Channel 2
18 (EM) 520007 520006 520005 520004 520003 520002 520001 520000
19 (OM) 520015 520014 520013 520012 520011 520010 520009 520008
Notes


(Message
type)
Channel 3
36 (EM) 530007 530006 530005 530004 530003 530002 530001 530000
37 (OM) 530015 530014 530013 530012 530011 530010 530009 530008
Notes


(Message
type)
Channel 4
54 (EM) 540007 540006 540005 540004 540003 540002 540001 540000
55 (OM) 540015 540014 540013 540012 540011 540010 540009 540008
Notes


(Message
type)
Channel 4
54 (EM) 540007 540006 540005 540004 540003 540002 540001 540000
55 (OM) 540015 540014 540013 540012 540011 540010 540009 540008
Notes


(Message
type)
Channel 6
90 (EM) 560007 560006 560005 560004 560003 560002 560001 560000
91 (OM) 560015 560014 560013 560012 560011 560010 560009 560008
Notes


(Message
type)
Channel 7
108 (EM) 570007 570006 570005 570004 570003 570002 570001 570000
109 (OM) 570015 570014 570013 570012 570011 570010 570009 570008
Notes


(Message
type)
Channel 8
126 (EM) 580007 580006 580005 580004 580003 580002 580001 580000
127 (OM) 580015 580014 580013 580012 580011 580010 580009 580008
Channel 9 and 10 not realized
Notes

Axis areas in DB2 (Parameter "ExtendAlMsg"=False)
type)
axis/spindle
144 (EM) 600107 600106 600105 600104 600103 600102 600101 600100
Feed stop/spindle stop for axis/spindle 1 (alarm no.: 600100-600115)
145 (OM) 600115 600114 600113 600112 600111 600110 600109 600108
146 (EM) Feed stop/spindle stop for axis/spindle 2 byte 1 (alarm no.: 600200-600207)
147 (OM) Feed stop/spindle stop for axis/spindle 2 byte 2 (alarm no.: 600208-600215)
159 (OM) Feed stop/spindle stop for axis/spindle 8 (alarm no.: 600808-600815)
Notes

type)
axis/spindle
axis 19 – 31 not realized
Notes

User areas in DB2 (Parameter "ExtendAlMsg"=False)
180 (EM) 700007 700006 700005 700004 700003 700002 700001 700000
User area 0 (alarm no.: 700000-700015)
181 (EM) 700015 700014 700013 700012 700011 700010 700009 700008
182 (EM) User area 0: byte 3 (alarm no.: 700016-700023)
184 (OM) User area 0: byte 5 (alarm no.: 700032-700039)
188 - 191 (EM) User area 1: bytes 1 - 4 (alarm no.: 700100-700131)
192 – 195 (OM) User area 1: bytes 5 - 8 (alarm no.: 700132-700163)
196 – 199 (EM) User area 2: bytes 1 - 4 (alarm no.: 700200-700231)
Notes


(Message type)
284– 287 (EM) User area 13: bytes 1 - 4 (alarm no.: 701300-701331)
Notes


(Message type)
Notes

FC10 alarms in DB2 (FB1-Parameter "ExtendAlMsg" = True)
Channel areas in DB2 (Parameter "ExtendAIMsg"=True)
DB2 Signals for PLC messsages (PLC  HMI)

type)
Channel 1
0
Feed disable (without alarm no.)
1
2 Feed and read-in disable byte 1 (without alarm no.)
6 Read-in disable byte 1 (without alarm no.)
10 NC Start disable byte 1 (without alarm no.)
11 NC Start disable byte 2 (without alarm no.)
12 Feed stop GEOaxis 1 byte 1 (without alarm no.)

18 - 119 Channel 2 - Channel 10 (without alarm no.)
Notes

type)
Channel 1
310 (EM) 510007 510006 510005 510004 510003 510002 510001 510000
311 (OM) 510015 510014 510013 510012 510011 510010 510009 510008
Notes

type)
Channel 2
328 (EM) 520007 520006 520005 520004 520003 520002 520001 520000
329 (OM) 520015 520014 520013 520012 520011 520010 520009 520008
Notes

type)
Channel 3
346 (EM) 530007 530006 530005 530004 530003 530002 530001 530000
347 (OM) 530015 530014 530013 530012 530011 530010 530009 530008
Notes

type)
Channel 4
364 (EM) 540007 540006 540005 540004 540003 540002 540001 540000
365 (OM) 540015 540014 540013 540012 540011 540010 540009 540008
Notes

type)
Channel 5
382 (EM) 550007 550006 550005 550004 550003 550002 550001 550000
383 (OM) 550015 550014 550013 550012 550011 550010 550009 550008
Notes

type)
Channel 6
400 (EM) 560007 560006 560005 560004 560003 560002 560001 560000
401 (OM) 560015 560014 560013 560012 560011 560010 560009 560008
407(EM) Read-in disable byte 2 (alarm no.: 560208-560215)
Notes

type)
Channel 7
418 (EM) 570007 570006 570005 570004 570003 570002 570001 570000
419 (OM) 570015 570014 570013 570012 570011 570010 570009 570008
Notes

type)
Channel 8
436 (EM) 580007 580006 580005 580004 580003 580002 580001 580000
437 (OM) 580015 580014 580013 580012 580011 580010 580009 580008
Notes

Channel 9
454 (EM) 590007 590006 590005 590004 590003 590002 590001 590000
455 (OM) 590015 590014 590013 590012 590011 590010 590009 590008
Notes

type)
Channel 10
472 (EM) 500007 500006 500005 500004 500003 500002 500001 500000
473 (OM) 500015 500014 500013 500012 500011 500010 500009 500008
Axis areas in DB2 (Parameter "ExtendAIMsg" = True)

(Message
type)
axis/spindle
120
Feed stop/spindle stop for axis/spindle 1 (without alarm no.)
121
122 - 181 Feed stop/spindle stop for axis/spindle 2 -
Feed stop/spindle stop for axis/spindle 31 (without alarm no.)
Notes


(Message
type)
axis/spindle
490 (EM) 600107 600106 600105 600104 600103 600102 600101 600100
Feed stop/spindle stop for axis/spindle 1 (alarm no.: 600100-600015)
491 (OM) 600115 600114 600113 600112 600111 600110 600109 600108
492 (EM) Feed stop/spindle stop for axis/spindle 2 (alarm no.: 600200-600207)
503 (OM) Feed stop/spindle stop for axis/spindle 7(alarm no.: 600708-600715)
Notes


(Message
type)
Notes

User areas in DB2 (Parameter "ExtendAIMsg" = True)
type)
182
User area 0: byte 0 (without alarm no)
183
184 - 308 User area 0: byte 1 -
User area 0: byte 63 (without alarm no)
Notes


(Message type)
554 (EM) 700007 700006 700005 700004 700003 700002 700001 700000
User area 0 (alarm no.: 700000-700015)
555 (EM) 700015 700014 700013 700012 700011 700010 700009 700008
562 - 565 (EM) User area 1 bytes 1 - 4 (alarm no.: 700100-700131)
566 - 569 (OM) User area 1 bytes 5 - 8 (alarm no.: 700132-700163)
630 - 633 (OM) User area 9 bytes 5 - 8 (alarm no.: 700932 - 700963)
Notes


(Message type)
Notes


(Message type)
Notes

Signals from/ to NCK, PLC, HMI

On-board NCK input and outputs to NCK (DB10)
DB10 Signals to NC (PLC  NCK)

DBB0 Disabling of digital NCK inputs /Z1-A2/
Digital inputs without hardware On-board inputs

Input 8 Input 7 Input 6 Input 5 Input 4 Input 3 Input 2 Input 1
DBB1 Setting of digital NCK inputs from PLC
Digital inputs without hardware On-board inputs

DBB2 - Unassigned
DBB3
DBB4 Disabling of digital NCK outputs /Z2-A4/

Digital outputs without hardware On-board outputs
Output 8 Output 7 Output 6 Output 5 Output 4 Output 3 Output 2 Output 1
DBB5 Overwrite screenform of digital NCK outputs /Z2-A4/

DBB6 Setting value of digital NCK outputs from PLC /Z2-A4/

DBB7 Input screenform of digital NCK outputs /Z2-A4/

st
DBB8 - Machine axis number table for FC 19, FC 24, FC 25, FC 26 (1 MCP)
DBB29
DBB30 Upper limit of machine axis numbers for FC 19, FC 24 (1st MCP)
With 0, the max. number of machine axis numbers applies
DBB32 - Machine axis number table for FC 19, FC 24, FC 25, FC 26 (2nd MCP)
DBB53
DBB54 Upper limit of machine axis numbers for FC 19, FC 24 (2nd MCP)
With 0, the max. number of machine axis numbers applies
Notes

General signals to NCK (DB10)
DB10 Signals to NC (PLC  NC)

DBB56 Keyswitch /Z1-A2/ Acknowl. Emergency
Emergency Stop
Stop /Z1-A2/
/Z1-A2/
Position 3 Position 2 Position 1 Position 0
DBB57 PC INC inputs in
shutdown mode group
(Only 840Di) area active
DBB58 Collision
detection off
DBB59
On board NCK/HMI inputs and outputs (DB10)

DB10 Signals from (NCK -> PLC)
DBB60 For free disposal Actual value of the digital ON-BOARD inputs of the NCK
On-board inputs /Z2-A4/
Input 4 Input 3 Input 2 Input 1
DBB61 -
DBB63
DBB64 Setpoint for the digital outputs of the NCK without hardware Setpoint for the digital on-board outputs of the NCK /Z2-A4/
/Z2-A4/
DBB65 - unassigned
DBB67
DBB68 Handwheel 1 moved
DBB71 Modification counter inch/metric system of units
DBB72 Status of the actual value display indicated (1st MCP)
HT 8  HMI Travel keys MCS/ Valid display

displayed WCS
DBB73 Status of the actual value display indicated (2nd MCP)
HT 8  HMI Travel keys MCS/ Valid display

displayed WCS
Notes

DB10 Signals from (NCK -> PLC)

st
DBB74 - Machine axis numbers of the displayed axes (1 MCP)
DBB79 MCP1AxisFromHMI
HT 8  HMI
DBB80 - Machine axis numbers of the displayed axes (2nd MCP)

DBB85 MCP2AxisFromHMI
HT 8  HMI
DBB86 Reserved
DBB88 Reserved
Notes

Selection/status signals from HMI (DB10)
DB10 Signals from NC (NCK  PLC)
DBB90
ePS  PLC
DBB91
PLC  ePS
DBB92
GP  PLC DP1 MPI/DP
Bus Bus
Slaves OK Slaves OK
DBB93 unassigned
DBB94 unassigned
DBB95 unassigned
DBB96 unassigned
DBB97 Channel number for handwheel 1 /Z2-H1

HMI  PLC
D C B A
DBB98 Channel number for handwheel 2 /Z2-H1

HMI  PLC
D C B A
DBB99 Channel number for handwheel 3 /Z2-H1/

HMI  PLC
D C B A
DBB100 Axis number for handwheel 1 /Z2-H1/

HMI  PLC
Machine axis Handwheel Contour E D C B A
/Z2-H1/ selected handwheel

HMI  PLC

HMI  PLC
DBB103 HMI battery HMI tempera AT box ready HMI HMI Remote
HMI  PLC alarm -ture limit /Z1-A2/ fan monitor- HD monitor- diagnosis
/Z1-A2/ active
/Z1-A2/ ing ing /FBFE/
Notes

General signals from NCK (DB10)

DBB104 NCK CPU 1. OB1 cycle Op2Key Op1Key HHU MCP 2 MCP 1
GP  PLC ready ready ready ready ready ready
/Z1-A2/
DBB105 Toolmanage-
GP  PLC ment command
cancellation
DBB106 EMER- Collision detec-
GENCY Stop tion off
active /Z2-M5/
/Z1-N2/
DBB107 Inch system NCU-link Probe actuated

/Z1-G2/ active /Z2-M5/
/Z2-B3/
Probe 2 Probe 1
DBB108 NC ready Drive ready Drives in HMI CPU HMI 2 CPU HMI2 CPU
/Z1-A2/ /Z1-A2/ Ready Ready
cyclic opera- ready
(HMI to (HMI to MPI)
tion OPI) /Z1-A2/ E_HMI2
/Z1-A2/ ready
/Z1-A2/
DBB109 NCK battery Air temp. Heat sink PC operat- NCK
alarm alarm temp. alarm ing system alarm present
/Z1-A2/ /Z1-A2/ NCU 573 /Z1-A2/
/Z1-A2/ fault
/HBI/
DBB110 Software cams minus /Z2-N3/
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24
DBB114 Software cams plus /Z2-N3/

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24
Notes


31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24
DBB118 ePS-Daten
ePS 
PLC
DBB119 ePS-Daten
ePS 
PLC
DBB120 ePS-Daten
ePS 
PLC
DBB121 ePS-Daten
ePS 
PLC
Notes

External digital inputs of the NCK (DB10)

DBB122 Disable the external digital NCK inputs
DBB123 Values from the PLC for the external digital NCK inputs



Notes

External digital outputs of the NCK (DB10)

DBB130 Disable the external digital NCK outputs /Z2-A4/
DBB131 Overwrite screenform for the external digital NCK outputs /Z2-A4/
DBB132 Value from the PLC for the external digital NCK outputs /Z2-A4/
DBB133 Default screenform for the external digital NCK outputs /Z2-A4/


Notes

Analog inputs of the NCK (external) (DB10)
DB10 Signals to NCK (PLC  NCK)

DBB146 Disable the analog NCK inputs /Z2-A4/
DBB147 Specified analog value for NCK from PLC /Z2-A4/

DBW148 Setpoint from PLC for analog input 1 of NCK /Z2-A4/
DBB164 unassigned
DBB165
Notes

Analog outputs of the NCK (external) (DB10)
DB10 Signals to NCK (PLC  NCK)

DBB166 Overwrite screenform for the analog NCK outputs /Z2-A4/
DBB167 Default screenform for the analog NCK outputs /Z2-A4/
DBB168 Disable the analog NCK outputs /Z2-A4/
DBB169 Reserved
DBW170 Setpoint from PLC for analog output 1 of NCK /Z2-A4/


External digital input and output signals of the NCK (DB10)
DB10 Signals from NCK (NCK  PLC)

DBB186 Actual value of external digital NCK inputs /Z2-A4/
DBB190 NCK setpoint for external digital NCK outputs /Z2-A4/
Notes

Analog input and output signals of the NCK (DB10)

DBW194 Actual value for analog input 1 of the NCK /Z2-A4/
DBW210 Setpoint for analog output 1 of the NCK /Z2-A4/
DBW226- Collision detection 8 bytes = 64 bits

DBW233
NCK  PLC
DBW234 - Collision detection 8 bytes = 64 bits
DBW241
PLC  NCK
Expansion handwheel signals from NCK (DB10)

Ethernet-Handrad stands still

DBB245
Handwheel 6 Handwheel 5 Handwheel 4 Handwheel 3 Handwheel 2 Handwheel 1
DBB246 Reserved
Notes

Mode group-specific signals to mode group 1 (DB11)
DB11 Signals to mode group 1 (PLC  NCK)

DBB0 Mode group BAG-Stopp Mode group Mode change Operating mode
reset Mode group stop disable /Z1-K1/
/Z1-K1/ stop Axes /Z1-K1/ /Z1-K1/ JOG MDA AUTO
plus spindle
DBB1 Single block Machine function

/Z1-K1/ /Z1-K1/
Type A Type B REF REPOS TEACH IN
DBB2 Machine function

Var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC
DBB3 unassigned
DB11 Signals from mode group 1 (NCK  PLC)

DBB4 Strobe mode
HMI  PLC /Z1-K1/
JOG MDA AUTO
DBB5 Strobe machine function

HMI  PLC /Z1-K1/
REF REPOS TEACH IN
DBB6 All channels NCK internal Mode Group Mode group Active operating mode
in reset state JOG active reseted ready /Z1-K1/
/Z1-K1/ /Z1-K1/ /Z1-K1/
JOG MDA AUTO
DBB7 Active machine function

/Z1-K1/
REF REPOS TEACH IN

Notes

DB11 Signals to mode group 2 (PLCNCK)

DBB20 Mode group Mode group Mode group Mode change Operating mode
reset stop stop disable /Z1-K1/
/Z1-K1/ Axes plus /Z1-K1/ /Z1-K1/
spindle
/Z1-K1/
JOG MDA AUTO
DBB21 Single block Machine function
/Z1-K1/
Type A Type B REF REPOS TEACH IN
DBB23 unassigned
DB11 Signals from mode group 2 (NCK  PLC)

DBB24 Strobe mode
/Z1-K1/
JOG MDA AUTO
DBB25 Strobe machine function
/Z1-K1/
REF REPOS TEACH IN
DBB26 All channels NCK internal Mode group Mode group Active operating mode
in reset state JOG active reseted ready /Z1-K1/
/Z1-K1/ /Z1-K1/ /Z1-K1/
/Z1-K1/
JOG MDA AUTO
DBB27 Active machine function
/Z1-K1/
REF REPOS TEACH IN
DBB28 Machine functions
Notes

Signals for Safety SPL (safe programmable logic) (DB18)
DB18 Signals for Safety SPL (PLC  PLC)

DBB0- unassigned
DBW34
DBB36 Stop E SPL READY

DBB37
Data area / error
DB18 Signals for Safety SPL (PLC  NCK)

Data area for SPL inputs/outputs
SPL_DATA.INSEP [1..32]
DBD38
SPL_DATA.INSEP [33..64]
DBD42
SPL_DATA.OUTSEP [1..32]
DBD46
SPL_DATA.OUTSEP [33..64]
DBD50
Data area for user SPL
DBD54 SPL_DATA.INSIP [1..32]
SPL_DATA.INSIP [33..64]
DBD58
SPL_DATA.OUTSIP [1..32]
DBD62
SPL_DATA.OUTSIP [33..64]
DBD66
SPL_DATA.MARKERSIP [1..32]
DBD70
SPL_DATA.MARKERSIP [33..64]
DBD74
Notes


SPL_DELTA.INSEP [1..32]
DBD78
SPL_DELTA.INSEP [33..64]
DBD82
SPL_DELTA.OUTSEP [1..32]
DBD86
SPL_DELTA.OUTSEP [33..64]
DBD90
SPL_DELTA.INSIP [1..32]
DBD94
SPL_DELTA.INSIP [33..64]
DBD98
SPL_DELTA.OUTSIP [1..32]
DBD102
SPL_DELTA.OUTSIP [33..64]
DBD106
SPL_DELTA.MARKERSIP [1..32]
DBD110
SPL_DELTA.MARKERSIP [33..64]
DBD114
CMDSI
DBD118
Systemfehler
DBD119 cross-checking
Error number
DBD120
0 = no error
1 - 320 = Signal number starting from SPL_DATA.INSEP [1]
Level indicator of cross-checking
DBD124
(diagnostics option: how many SPL signals currently differ in level)
Notes

Supplementary data areas

Data area for single-channel inputs/outputs
DBB128 PLCSIOUT [1 .. 8]
NCK  PLC
NCK  PLC

NCK  PLC
NCK  PLC
DBB132 PLCSIIN [1.. 8]

PLC  NCK
DBB133 PLCSIIN [9 .. 16]
PLC  NCK
PLC  NCK

PLC  NCK
SPL status
DBB136
PROFIsafe module(s) for

DBB138
th th th th
8 input byte 7 input byte 6 input byte 5 input byte 4th input byte 3rd input byte 2nd input byte 1st input byte
DBB139
PROFIsafe module(s) for

DBB140
th th th
8 output 7 output 6 output 5th output 4th output 3rd output 2nd output 1st output
byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte
DBB141
DBB142 -
DBB 149
DBB150 -
DBB157
DBB158 -
DBB188
Notes

F_SENDDP (transmitter)

1. F_SENDDP interface: FSDP[1].
DBW190
ERR_REAC
DBB192 SUBS_ON ERROR
DBB193
DBW194 DIAG
DBW196 RETVAL14
DBW198 RETVAL15

DBW200
ERR_REAC
DBB203
DBW204 DIAG
DBW206 RETVAL14
DBW208 RETVAL15

DBW210
ERR_REAC
DBB213
DBW214 DIAG
DBW216 RETVAL14
DBW218 RETVAL15
Notes

F_RECVDP (receiver)
DB18 SPL-Signals (PLC  NCK)

1. F_RECVDP interface: FRDP[1].
DBB220
SUBS[7] SUBS[6] SUBS[5] SUBS[4] SUBS[3] SUBS[2] SUBS[1] SUBS[0]
DBB221 SUBS[15] SUBS[14] SUBS[13] SUBS[12] SUBS[11] SUBS[10] SUBS[9] SUBS[8]
DBB222 REAC
DBB224 ACK_REI
DBB225 SEND- ACK_REQ SUBS_ON ERROR
DBW226 DIAG
DBW228 RETVAL14
DBW230 RETVAL15

DBB232
DBW234 REAC
DBB236 ACK_REI
DBB237 SEND- ACK_REQ SUBS_ON ERROR
DBW238 DIAG
DBW240 RETVAL14
DBW242 RETVAL15

DBB244
DBW246 REAC
DBB248 ACK_REI
DBB249 SEND MODE ACK_REQ SUBS_ON ERROR
DBW250 DIAG
DBW252 RETVAL14
DBW254 RETVAL15
Notes

SPL user data
DB18 SPL-Signals (PLC  NCK)

DBD256 SPL_USER_DATA[0]
Notes

Signals from/to operator panel (DB19)

DB19 Signals to operator panel (PLC  HMI)
DBB0 Actual value Back up HMI-Adv Clear Clear cancel Key disable Screen dark- Screen bright
in WCS travel record- shutdown recall alarms alarms /Z1-A2/ ening /Z1-A2/
0=MCS er HMI-Adv HMI-Adv /Z1-A2/
/Z1-A2/
Rights for the External
DBB1 external view- Viewer
er
DBB2
DBB4
DBB6 Analog spindle 1, capacity in percent
DBB7 Analog spindle 2, capacity in percent
DBB8 Channel number of machine control panel to HMI
DBB9 Reserved for selection Automato OEM2 OEM1

tool measure-
ment
DBB10 PLC Hardkeys (Values 1 ... 255, Default: 0 )
Reserved for hardkey function expansions
DBB11
DBB12
DBB13 part program Reserved Disable
Teach trans-
/Z1-A2/
fer
Select Load Unload IHsl/IM9
DBB14 0=act. FS RS-232 act. FS: Index of file to be transferred in the standard list.
1=pas. FS RS-232 pass. FS: Number of the control file for user file names.
DBB15 RS-232 act. FS: Index that specifies the axis, channel or tool no.
RS-232 pass. FS: Index of the file to be transferred in the user list
DBB16 1=pas FS Part program handling: Number of the control file for user file names.
/IHsl/IM9
DBB17 Part program handling: Index of the file to be transferred in the user list
/IHsl/IM9
DBB18
DBB19 Reserved (signal counter)
Notes

DB19 Signals from operator panel (HMI  PLC)

DBB20 MCS/WCS Simulation Language 2 Recall alarm Cancel alarm Cancel key Screen is dark
Change- active switched cleared cleared actuated /Z1-A2/
over /Z1-A2/ HMI-Emb. HMI-Adv HMI-Adv /Z1-A2/
/Z1-A2/ /Z1-A2/ /Z1-A2/
DBB21 Active HMI operating area
DBB22 Displayed channel number from the HMI /Z1-A2/
DBB23
DBB24 actual mask number from JobShop
DBB26 Part program handling status /Z1-A2/
Select Load Unload Active Error OK Reserved
DBB27 Error program handling /Z1-A2/
DBW28 Mask number for "Extend user interface" IHsl/BE2
DBB30 Control bits PLC --> HMI
Exit mask Request mask
DBB31 Control bits PLC --> HMI
Inactive bit Error, Not Mask exited Mask active Mask request- Mask request
possible to ed accepted
request
mask
DBB32 FunctionSelectionNo. from PLC
PLC  HMI Busy func- Strobe func-

tion tion
DBB33 Parameter 1 for FunctionSelectionNo. (function selection from DBB32)
PLC  HMI
PLC  HMI
PLC  HMI
DBB36 Error code for FunctionSelectionNo. (function selection from DBB32)
HMI  PLC
HMI  PLC
HMI  PLC
Notes


HMI  PLC
DBB40 - Reserved
DBB47
DBB48 PLC busy HMI strobe FunctionSelectionNo. from HMI

function function
HMI  PLC
DBB49 Error code for FunctionSelectionNo. (function selection from DBB48)
PLC  HMI
DBB50 - Interface 2nd HMI

DBB99 Assignment as for DBB0 to DBB49
DBB100 Switchover interface to HMI

Knocking interface (HMI announces itself to NCU)
ONL_REQUEST /Z2-B3/
Online request from HMI
HMI writes its client identification as online request
(bit 8-15: bus type, bit 0-7: HMI bus address)
DBB102 ONL_CONFIRM /Z2-B3/
Acknowledgment from PLC to online request
PLC writes HMI client identification as acknowledgment (bus type, HMI bus address;
as with DBB100).
DBB104 PAR_CLIENT_IDENT /Z2-B3/
HMI writes its client identification (bus type, HMI bus address; as with DBB100).
DBB106 PAR_HMI_TYP /Z2-B3/
Type of HMI as per NETNAMES.INI: Main / subordinate operator panel / server /...
DBB107 PAR_MSTT_ADR /Z2-B3/
HMI writes address of MCP to be activated; 255, when no MCP activated
DBB108 PAR_STATUS /Z2-B3/

PLC writes online enable for HMI
DBB109 PAR_Z_INFO /Z2-B3/

PLC writes additional info about status
DBB110 M_TO_N_ALIVE
Sign of life from PLC to HMI through M to N block
DBB112 Reserved bus type MCP
Notes


DBB113 ParOpKeyAdr
Direct key index knocking interface
DBB114 ParTcuIndex
TCU index knocking interface
DBB115 ParHt2Index
Ht2 index login interface
DBB116 Direct key address

1st online interface
DBB117 Direct key address

2nd nline interface
DBB118 TCU index

1st online interface
DBB119 TCU index

nd
2 online interface
Online interface HMI 1 (user)

DBB120 MMC1_CLIENT_IDENT /Z2-B3/
DBB122 MMC1_TYP /Z2-B3/

PLC writes PAR_MMC_TYP to MMCx_TYP when HMI goes online.
DBB123 MMC1_MSTT_ADR /Z2-B3/

PLC writes PAR_MSTT_ADR to MMCx_MSTT_ADR when HMI goes online.
DBB124 MMC1_STATUS /Z2-B3/

Connection status, HMI and PLC alternately write their requests/acknowledgments
DBB125 MMC1_Z_INFO /Z2-B3/

Additional info connection status (pos./neg. acknowledgment, error messages...)
DBB126 Reserved TCU1_ MMC1_ MMC1_ MMC1_ MMC1_ MMC1_ MMC1
SHIFT_ CHANGE_
LOCK ACTIVE_ ACTIVE_ ACTIVE_ MSTT_ SHIFT
DENIED CHANGED PERM REQ SHIFT_ LOCK
/Z2-B3/ /Z2-B3/ /Z2-B3/ /Z2-B3/ LOCK /Z2-B3/
/Z2-B3/
Notes


DBB127 Reserved Bus type MCP
DBB128 - Reserved Transline (Transline DB number)

DBB129
Online interface HMI 2 (user)
DBB130 MMC2_CLIENT_IDENT /Z2-B3/
DBB132 MMC2_TYP /Z2-B3/

PLC writes PAR_MMC_TYP to MMCx_TYP when HMI goes online
DBB133 MMC2_MSTT_ADR /Z2-B3/

PLC writes PAR_MSTT_ADR to MMCx_MSTT_ADR when HMI goes online
DBB134 MMC2_STATUS /Z2-B3/

Connection status, MMC and PLC alternately write their requests/acknowledgments
DBB135 MMC2_Z_INFO /Z2-B3/

Additional info connection status (pos./neg. acknowledgment, error messages...)
Reserved TCU2_ MMC2_ MMC2_ MMC2_ MMC2_ MMC2_ MMC2_

DBB136
SHIFT_
LOCK CHANGE_ ACTIVE_ ACTIVE_ ACTIVE_ MSTT_ SHIFT_
DENIED CHANGED PERM REQ SHIFT_ LOCK
/Z2-B3/ /Z2-B3/ /Z2-B3/ /Z2-B3/ LOCK /Z2-B3/
/Z2-B3/
DBB137 Reserved Bus type MCP
DBB138 – Reserved Transline (Transline DB number)

DBB139
DBB140 - Code carrier input parameters
DBB197 Optional package SINTDC on HMI-Advanced required
DBB198 - Code carrier return parameters

DBB250 - Commands
DBB256 - Commands for Paramtm.exe

DBB268 Traffic light status

Optional package TPM on HMI-Advanced required
DBD270 - Counter[1 ... 32]

DBD394 Optional package TPM on HMI-Advanced required
Notes

PLC machine data (DB20)
DB20 PLC machine data (PLC  operator)

DBW0 INT values
DBW
DBW INT values
DBB Bit arrays
DBB
DBB Bit arrays
DBD REAL values
DBD
DBD REAL values
Notes

Channel signals (DB21 - DB30)

Signals to/from NCK channel (DB21 – DB30)
DB21 - Signals to NCK channel (PLCNCK)

DB30
DBB0 Activate dry Activate M01 Activate sin- Activate DRF
run feedrate / /Z1-K1/ gle block /Z1- /Z2-H1/
Z1-V1/ K1/
DBB1 Activate pro- PLC action CLC over- CLC stop /Z3 Time moni- Synchron- Enable pro- Activate
gram test complete /Z1- ride /Z3-TE1/ -TE1/ toring act. ized action tection zones referencing /
/Z1-K1/ K1/ (tool manage OFF /Z1-A3/ Z1-R1/
-ment)
/FBSY/
DBB2 Skip block activate /Z1-K1/
/7 /6 /5 /4 /3 /2 /1 /0
DBB3 Nibbling and punching /K2-N4/
Manual re- Stroke not Stroke de- Stroke sup- Manual Stroke ena-
lease of operating /K2 layed /K2-N4/ pres-sion stroke enable ble
stroke 2 -N4/ /K2-N4/ /K2-N4/ /K2-N4/
DBB4 Feedrate override /Z1-V1/
H G F E D C B A
DBB5 Rapid traverse override /Z1-V1/
H G F E D C B A
DBB6 Feedrate Rapid trav- Program Delete Delete dis- Read-in disa- Feed disable
override erse override level abort / subroutine tance-to-go ble override /Z1-
active active Z1-K1/ no. of passes /Z1-A2/ /Z1-K1/ V1/
override /Z1- override /Z1-
V1/ V1/
DBB7 Reset Suppress NC Stop NC Stop /Z1- NC Stop to NC Start /Z1- NC Start
/Z1-K1// Start Lock axes plus K1/ block limit /Z1 K1/ disable /Z1-
spindle -K1/ K1/
/Z1-K1/
DBB8 Activate machine-related protection area /Z1-A3/
Area 8 Area 7 Area 6 Area 5 Area 4 Area 3 Area 2 Area 1
DBB9 Activate machine-related protection area /Z1-A3/
Area 10 Area 9
DBB10 Activate channel-specific protection area /Z1-A3/
DBB11 Activate channel-specific protection area /Z1-A3/
Area 10 Area 9
Notes

Control signals to geometry axes
DB21 - Signals to NCK channel (PLC  NCK)

DB30
Geometry axis 1
DBB12 Traversing keys Rapid trav- Traversing Feed stop /Z1 Activate handwheel
/Z2-H1/ erse over- key disable / -V1/ /Z2-H1/
pus mnus 3 2 1
DBB13 Geometry axis 1

machine function /Z2-H1/
DBB14 OEM signals geometry axis 1

Traversing keys Rapid trav- Traversing Feed stop /Z1 Activate handwheel
plus minus 3 2 1


Traversing keys Rapid trav- Traversing Feed stop /Z1 Activate handwheel
ride /Z2-H1/ Z2-H1/
plus minus 3 2 1

Notes

Operating signals from HMI/status signals from NC channel

DB21 – Signals from NCK channel (NCK  PLC,
DB30 HMI  PLC, PLC  NCK)

DBB24 Dry run M01 select- Select NCK- DRF select- ePS loading pro-
HMI  feedrate ed /Z1-K1/ related M01 ed /Z2-H1/ gram
selected /
PLC Z1-V1/
DBB25 Program REPOS Feedrate REPOSPATHMODE
HMI  test select- MODE override for
ed /Z1-K1/ EDGE rapid traverse
PLC selected /Z1-
V1/ 2 1 0
DBB26 Skip block selected /Z1-K1/

HMI  7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PLC
DBB27 Skip block selected
HMI  /Z1-K1/
PLC /9 /8
DBB28 OEM channel signals

PLC 
DBB29 Do not Switch off Switch off Activate Activate fixed feed
PLC  disable wear workpiece PTP /FBMA/, /Z1-V1/
tool monitoring counter motion
NCK
4 3 2 1
DBB30 No tool Activate NCK Neg. direc- Simulation Activate contour handwheel
PLC  change -related M01 tion simula-
contour Handwheel 3 Handwheel 2 Handwheel 1
NCK commands tion contour
/Z1-H2/ handwheel
handwheel
on
DBB31 Skip block active REPOS REPOSPATHMODE
PLC  MODE EDGE
NCK /9 /8 2 1 0
DBB32 Last action M00/M01 Approach Action Execution from
NCK  block ac- active block active / block ac- external source
PLC tive /Z1- /Z1-K1/ Z1-K1/ tive /Z1- active
K1/ K1/
DBB33 Program Transfor- M02/M30 Block search Handwheel Revolutio-nal Orientable Referencing active
NCK  test active / mation active active override feedrate active toolholder ac- /Z1-R1/
PLC Z1-K1/ active /Z1- /Z1-K1/ /Z1-K1/ active /Z1-V1/ tive
K1/ /Z2-H1/
DBB34 OEM channel signals feedback

NCK 
PLC
DBB35 Channel status /Z1-K1/ Program status /Z1-K1/

NCK 
PLC
Reset Interrupted Active Aborted Interrupted Stopped Waiting Running
DBB36 NCK alarm Channel- Channel Interrupt All axes station- All axes requiring
NCK  with pro- specific NCK ready processing ary /Z1-B1/ reference points
PLC cessing alarm present for opera- active are referenced
stop pre- /Z1-A2/ tion /Z1-K1/ /Z1-R1/
sent /Z1-
A2/
Notes

DB21 – Signals from NCK channel (NCK  PLC,

DB30 HMI  PLC, PLC  NCK)

DBB37 Stop at Read-in ena- CLC CLC CLC Contour handwheel active /Z2-H1/
NCK  block end ble is ignored stopped stopped active
PLC with SBL is /Z1-K1/ upper lower limit / /Z3-TE1/ Handwheel 3 Handwheel 2 Hand-
sup- limit /Z3- Z3-TE1/ wheel 1
pressed TE1/
/Z1-K1/
DBB38 Nibbling and punching /Z2-N4/
NCK 
PLC Acknowl. manual Stroke
stroke enable enable
/Z2-N4/ active
/Z2-N4/
DBB39 Protection
NCK  zones not
PLC guaran-
teed
Notes

Status signals of geometry axes
DB21 – Signals from NCK channel (NCK  PLC)
DB30
Traverse command Travel requests Handwheel active /Z2-H1/
/Z2-H1/
plus minus plus minus 3 2 1

active machine function
/Z2-H1/
DBB44
HMI  PLC

Traverse command Travel requests Handwheel active
/Z2-H1/ /Z2-H1/

/Z2-H1/
DBB50
HMI  PLC

Traverse command Travel requests Handwheel active
/Z2-H1/ /Z2-H1/

/Z2-H1/
DBB56
HMI  PLC
Notes

Change signals on auxiliary function transfer from NC channel
DB21 – Signals from NCK channel (NCKPLC)

DB30
DBB58 M fct. 5 M fct. 4 M fct. 3 M fct. 2 M fct. 1
change /Z1- change /Z1- change /Z1- change /Z1- change /Z1-
H2/ H2/ H2/ H2/ H2/
DBB59 M fct. 5 M fct. 4 M fct. 3 M fct. 2 M fct. 1
not decoded not decoded not decoded not decoded not decoded
DBB60 S fct. 3 quick S fct. 2 quick S fct. 1 quick S fct. 3 S fct. 2 S fct. 1
change /Z1- change /Z1- change /Z1-
H2/ H2/ H2/
DBB61 T fct 3 quick T fct. 2 quick T fct. 1 quick T fct. 3 T fct. 2 T fct. 1
change/Z1- change/Z1- change /Z1-
H2/ H2/ H2/
DBB62 D fct. 3 quick D fct. 2 quick D fct. 1 quick D fct. 3 D fct. 2 D fct. 1
change change/ change /Z1-
/Z1-H2/ Z1-H2/ H2/
DBB63 DL fct. quick DL fct.
change
DBB64 H fct. 3 quick H fct. 2 quick H fct. 1 quick H fct. 3 H fct. 2 H fct. 1
change /Z1- change /Z1- change /Z1-
H2/ H2/ H2/
DBB65 F fct. 6 F fct. 5 F fct. 4 F fct. 3 F fct. 2 F fct. 1
change /Z1- change /Z1- change /Z1- change /Z1- change /Z1- change /Z1-
H2/ H2/ H2/ H2/ H2/ H2/
DBB66 M fct. 5 quick M fct. 4 quick M fct. 3 quick M fct. 2 quick M fct. 1 quick
DBB67 F fct. 6 quick F fct. 5 quick F fct. 4 quick F fct. 3 quick F fct. 2 quick F fct. 1 quick
Notes

Transferred M/S functions

DB30
DBW68 Extended address M function 1 (binary)
/Z1-H2/
DBD70 M function 1 (binary)
/Z1-H2/
/Z1-H2/
/Z1-H2/
/Z1-H2/
/Z1-H2/
/Z1-H2/
/Z1-H2/
/Z1-H2/
DBD94 M function 5 (binary) /Z1-H2/
DBW98 Extended address S function 1 (binary)

/Z1-H2/
DBD100 S function 1 (REAL format)
/Z1-H2/
/Z1-H2/
/Z1-H2/
/Z1-H2/
/Z1-H2/
Notes

Transferred T/D/DL functions
DB21 - Signals from NCK channel (NCKPLC)

DB30
DBW116 Extended address T function 1 (16 bit INT)
DBW118 T function 1 (binary) /Z1-H2/

DBD118 For 8-decade T nos., T function 1 (32 bit DINT) is used in DBD 118 (see note)
DBW122 T function 2 (Int)
DBW126 T function 3 (Int)

DBB128 Extended address D function 1 (8 bit INT)
DBB129 D function 1 (binary) /Z1-H2/

DBW130 For 5-decade D nos., D function 1 (16 bit DINT) is used in DBD 130 (see note)
DBB131 D function 2 (8 bit Int)
DBB133 D function 3 (8 bit Int)

DBW134 Extended address DL function (16 bit INT)
DBD136 DL function (REAL)
Notes

Transferred H/F functions

DB30
DBW140 Extended address H function 1 (binary)
/Z1-H2/
DBD142 H function 1 (REAL or Dint)
/Z1-H2/
/Z1-H2/
DBD148 H function 2 (REAL or Dint) /Z1-H2/
/Z1-H2/
DBD154 H function 3 (REAL or Dint)
/Z1-H2/
DBW158 Extended address F function 1 (binary)
/Z1-H2/
DBD160 F function 1 (REAL format)
/Z1-H2/
/Z1-H2/
/Z1-H2/
/Z1-H2/
/Z1-H2/
/Z1-H2/
/Z1-H2/
DBW182 Extended address F function 5 (binary) /
Z1-H2/
/Z1-H2/
/Z1-H2/
/Z1-H2/
Notes

Decoded M signals (M0–M99)

DB30
DBB194 Dynamic M functions
M07 M06 M05 * M04 * M03 * M02 M01 M00

/Z1-H2/
M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M09 M08

/Z1-H2/
M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18 M17 M16

/Z1-H2/
M31 M30 M29 M28 M27 M26 M25 M24

/Z1-H2/
M39 M38 M37 M36 M35 M34 M33 M32

/Z1-H2/
M47 M46 M45 M44 M43 M42 M41 M40

/Z1-H2/
M55 M54 M53 M52 M51 M50 M49 M48

/Z1-H2/
M63 M62 M61 M60 M59 M58 M57 M56
DBB202 Dynamic M functions /

Z1-H2/
M71 M70 * M69 M68 M67 M66 M65 M64

/Z1-H2/
M79 M78 M77 M76 M75 M74 M73 M72

/Z1-H2/
M87 M86 M85 M84 M83 M82 M81 M80

/Z1-H2/
M95 M94 M93 M92 M91 M90 M89 M88

/Z1-H2/
M99 M98 M97 M96
DBB207
Notes

Active G functions

DB30
DBB208 Number of active G function of G function group 1 (binary) /Z1-K1/
... ...
DBB270 Number of active G function of G function group n-1 (binary) /Z1-K1/
DBB271 Number of active G function of G function group n (binary) /Z1-K1/
Signals for protection areas from NC channel

DB30
DBB272 Machine-related protection area preactivated /Z1-A3/
DBB273 Machine-related protection area preactivated /Z1-A3/
Area 10 Area 9
DBB274 Channel-specific protection area preactivated /Z1-A3/
DBB275 Channel-specific protection area preactivated /Z1-A3/
Area 10 Area 9
DBB276 Machine-related protection area violated /Z1-A3/
DBB277 Machine-related protection area violated /Z1-A3/
Area 10 Area 9
DBB278 Channel-related protection area violated /Z1-A3/
DBB279 Channel-related protection area violated /Z1-A3/
Area 10 Area 9
Notes

Instruction controlled signals to NC channel

DB21 – Signals to NCK channel (NCKPLC)
DB30
DBB280 Synch. action Reserved
disable re-
quest
DBB281 Synch. action
disabled
DBW282 - Reserved
DBW298
DBB300 Disable synchronized actions /FBSY/
No. 8 No. 7 No. 6 No. 5 No. 4 No. 3 No. 2 No. 1




Notes

DB21 -
Signals from NCK channel (NCKPLC)
DB30
DBB308 Synchronized actions can be disabled /FBSY/
Nr. 8 Nr. 7 Nr. 6 Nr. 5 Nr. 4 Nr. 3 Nr. 2 Nr.1

Nr. 16 Nr. 15 Nr. 14 Nr. 13 Nr. 12 Nr. 11 Nr.10 Nr.9

Nr. 24 Nr. 23 Nr. 22 Nr. 21 Nr. 20 Nr. 19 Nr.18 Nr.17


Nr. 40 Nr. 39 Nr. 38 Nr. 37 Nr. 36 Nr. 35 Nr. 34 Nr. 33



Cyclic Signals
DBB316 Active G functions

G00 geo.
DBB317
Tool missing PTP motion Travel re- Workpiece External
active quest drive setpoint language
/FB3/F2/ test reached mode active
DBB318
Overstore Dry-run Associat- Stop delayed TOFF move- TOFF active Search active ASUP
active feedrate edM01 ment active /FB1/F2 stopped
/F1/A2 active active /FB3/F2/ /FB1/K1/
/FB1/V1/ /FB3/H2/
DBB319
No tool Stop-delay- Repos Delay FTS Repos Path Repos Path Repos Path REPOS
change com- range not DEFERRA L Mode Ackn 2 Mode Ackn 1 Mode Ackn 0 MODE
mand active activated Chan /FB1/K1/ /FB1/K1/ /FB1/K1/ EDGE ACKN
FB1/K1 /FB1/K1/
Notes

Signals to/from orientation axes
DB21 - Signals to NCK channel (PLCNCK)

DB30
Orientation axis 1 /Z2-H1/
DBB320 Traversing keys
plus minus Rapid trav- Traversing Feed stop Activate handwheel

erse override key disable
(bit value coding)
DBB321 Orientation axis 1
DBB322 OEM signals orientation axis 1
plus minus Rapid trav- Traversing Feed Activate handwheel

erse override key stop (bit value coding)
disable
plus minus Rapid Traversing Feed Activate handwheel

traverse key stop (bit value coding)
override disable
Notes


DB30
DBB332 Travel command Travel request Handwheel active
plus minus plus minus (bit value coding)

Active machine function

DBB336
Travel command Travel request Handwheel active
(bit value coding)
plus minus plus minus

DBB340 Travel command Travel request Handwheel active
plus minus plus minus (bit value coding)

Notes

Tool management functions from NC channel

DB30
Modification signals tool management functions
DBB344 Last replace- Transfer to Tool limit Tool pre-
ment tool of new replace- value warning limit
tool group ment tool reached reached
DBB345 -
DBB347
Transferred tool management functions
DBD348 T number for tool prewarning limit (DINT)
DBD352 T number for tool limit value (DINT)
DBD356 T number of new replacement tool (DINT)
DBD360 T number of last replacement tool (DINT)
Notes

Signals from/to NC channel

DB30
CH_CYCLES_SIG_IN (Bit 0 - 7)
DBB364
CH_CYCLES_SIG_IN (Bit 8 - 15)
DBB365
CH_CYCLES_SIG_OUT (Bit 0 - 7)
DBB366
CH_CYCLES_SIG_OUT (Bit 8 - 15)
DBB367
CH_OEM_TECHNO_SIG_IN (DBB368 - DBB371)
DBB368
DBB369
DBB370
DBB371
DBB372 CH_OEM_TECHNO_SIG_OUT (DBB372 - DBB375)
DBB373
DBB374
DBB375
DBB376 ProgEventDisplay
DBB377 Stop conditi- Stop follow-

on ing collision
detection.
DBB378 Silence ASUP
ASUP aktive
DBB379
DBB380
DBB381
DBB382
DBB383
Notes

DB21 - Signals to NCK channel (PLC  NCK, NCK  PLC)

DB30
Control pro-
DBB384
gram
PLC NCK branch
DBB385
DBB386
DBB387
Active transformation number
DBB388
NCK  PLC
DBB389
NCK  PLC
DBB390
NCK  PLC
DBB391
NCK  PLC
Notes

Signals from/to axis/spindle (DB31 – DB61)

DB31 – Signals to axis/spindle (PLC  NCK)
DB61
DBB0 Feedrate override /Z1-V1/

Axis and
H G F E D C B A
spindle
Override Position Position Follow-up Axis/spindle Sensor fixed Acknowl. Acknowl.

DBB1 active measuring measuring mode disable stop /Z1-F1/ fixed stop fixed stop
Axis and /Z1-V1/ system 2 system 1 /Z1 /Z1-A2/ /Z1-A2/ reached /Z1- reached .
spindle /Z1-A2/ -A2/ F1/ /Z1-A2/
Clamping in Delete dis- Controller Cam activa-

DBB2 Reference point value /Z1-R1/ progress tance-to-go/ enable tion
Axis and /Z1-A3/ spindle reset /Z1-A2/ /Z2-N3/
4 3 2 1
spindle /A2, S1/
Program test Velocity/ Activate fixed feed /FBMA/, /Z1-V1/ Enable Accept exter-
axis/ spindle spindle travel to fixed nal ZO
DBB3 release speed limita- stop /Z1-K2/
Axis and tion /Z1-F1/
/Z1-A3/
spindle
4 3 2 1
Traversing keys Rapid trav- Traversing Feed stop/

DBB4 erse override key disable spindle stop Activate handwheel /Z2-H1/
/Z2-H1/
Axis and /Z2-H1/ /Z2-H1/ /Z1-V1/
plus minus 3 2 1
spindle
DBB5 Machine function /Z2-H1/

Axis and
spindle
OEM axis signals

DBB6
OEM axis signals
DBB7
Request PLC Activation Allocate NC axis to channel

axis/spindle signal with /Z2-K5/
/Z2-K5/ change of
D C B A
this byte
DBB8 /Z2-K5/
Note: DBX8.4: is automatically reset after assignment.
Lock parame- Control parameter block

ter set defini- /Z1-A2/
DBB9 tion from NC
C B A
/Z1-A2/
REPOS
DBB10 DELAY
Notes


DB61
Start brake
test
DBB11
Delay refer- Modulo Limit 2nd software limit switch Hardware limit switch
DBB12 ence point Enabled /Z1-A3/ /Z1-A3/
Axis approach /Z1 plus minus plus minus
-R1/
Jogging to JOG fixed- JOG fixed- JOG fixed-
DBB13 position point ap- point ap- point ap-
Axis proach 2 proach 1 proach 0
Activate pro- Suppress

DBB14 gram test program test
Axis
DBB15
Axis
Delete No n- Resynchronize spindle Gear has Actual gear stage /Z1-S1/
S value monitoring /Z1-S1/ changed over
DBB16
/Z1-S1/ when chang- 2 1 /Z1-S1/ C B A
Spindle ing gear
Invert M3/M4 Resynchronize spindle at Feedrate

/Z1-S1/ pos. override f.
DBB17 /Z1-S1/ spindle valid
2 1 /Z1-S1/
Spindle
Setpoint rot. direct. Pendel- Oscillating

DBB18 /Z1-S1/ freigabe via PLC
/Z1-S1/ /Z1-S1/
Spindle links rechts
Spindle override
DBB19 /Z1-V1/
Spindle H G F E D C B A
Release
brake
DBB20
Antrieb
Pulse enable n controller Motor Selec- Motor selection /Z1-A2/ Drive parameter set selection
DBB21 /Z1-A2/ integrator tion done /Z1-A2/
Antrieb disable /Z1-A2/
B A C B A
/Z1-A2/
Acknow- Deselect safe Deselect

DBB22 Selection of Safe speed ledgement- standstill safe velocity
Safety In- communi- and standstill
tegr. bit value 1 bit value 0 cation failure
Notes


DB61
Activate test SINAMICS Activate end

DBB23 stop brake close position pair Transmission of
Safety In- 2
tegr. bit value 2 bit value 1 bit value 0
Master/ slave Bitwert für Momenten- CC_Slave Achse steu- Schrittmot.

on CTRLOUT_changed: ausgleichs- Achse ern
Drehüber-
Regler
1 0 Kopplung wachung
DBB24 Sollwertausgabezuord. än- Ein unter-
dern drücken
(für Compile-Zyklen)
DBB25
Enable ESR Enable Compen-

DBB26 response slave axis sation control
Grinding overlay ON
Stop Resume
DBB27
Grinding HIAxMove Corr DEPBCS DEPMCS HIAxMove Corr DEPBCS DEPMCS
PLC checks AxStop, stop Stop at next Change re- Set reversal AX-RESUME AX- OscillAxExt-
DBB28 axis /Z2-P5/ reversal point versal point point /Z2-P2/ Reset Reversal
Grinding /Z2-P5/ /Z2-P5/ /Z2-P5/ /Z2-P5/ /Z2-P2/
Pendeln
Disable auto- Start gantry

matic syn- synchroni-
DBB29
zation Gantry
Coupling chroni-zation
Reserved
DBB30
Technology
Notes


DB61
DBB31 Clear syn- Clear syn- Disable syn- Resynchro-

Technology chro-nism chro-nism chroni-zation nize
Deselect Deselect Deselect Deselect

DBB32
external stop external stop external stop external stop
Safety Integr. E D C A
Select override
DBB33
Safety Integr. Bit value 3 Bit value 2 Bit value 1 Bit value 0
DBB34-
DBB55
Spindle Spindle Seperate

DBB56 inside speed feed drive as
PLC  HMI clamping display C axis en-
gaged
DBB57
Reserved
DBB58
DBB59
Notes

DB31 – Signals from axis/spindle (NCK  PLC)

DB61
Position reached with exact References synchronizes /Z1 Encoder limit frequency ex- NCU_Link Spindle
DBB60 stop -R1/ ceeded /Z1-A3/ Axis active /no axis
Axis and /Z1-B1/ /Z2-B3/ /Z1-S1/
Spindle fine coarse 2 1 1 2
DBB61 Current con- Speed con- Position con- Axis/spindle Follow-up Axis ready Axial alarm Travel re-
troller active troller active troller active stationary mode active quest
Axis and /Z1-A2/ /Z1-A2/ /Z1-A2/ (n < nmin) /Z1-A2/ /Z2-B3/ /Z1-F1/
Spindle /Z1-A2/
Axis contain- Force fixed Fixed stop Activate trav- Measure- Revolutio-nal Handwheel Software
er rotation stop limited / reached el to fixed ment active feedrate overlay ac- cams active /
DBB62 active Z1-F1/ /Z1-F1/ stop /Z1-F1/ active tive Z1-N3/
/Z2-M5/
/Z2-B3/ /Z1-V1/ /Z2-H1/
Axis/ spindle Axis stop PLC- AXRESET
Stop
disable active active controlled DONE
DBB63 /Z2-P2/ axis /Z2-P2/
HIAxMove Corr DEPBCS DEPMCS
active active active active /Z2-P2/
Traverse command Travel request Handwheel active /Z2-H1/

DBB64
/Z2-H1/
Axis and
Spindle plus minus plus minus 3 2 1
Active machine function /Z2-H1/

DBB65
Axis and
Spindle
OEM axis signals (Reserved)

DBB66
Axis and Activate
Spindle monitoring /
Z3-TE6/
DBB67
PLC axis/ Neutral axis/ Axis replace- New type NC axis/spindle in channel /Z2-K5/
spindle spindle ment pos- requested by
DBB68 /Z2-K5/ /Z2-K5/ sible PLC
/Z2-K5/ /Z2-K5/ D C B A
NCU number in NCU link network Control parameter block
DBB69 E D C B A C B A
Repos delay Repos shift Repos shift
DBB70 quit valid
PLC axis POS_RESTORED Brake test

DBB71 permanently active
assigned 2 1
REPOS
DBB72
DELAY
HMI  PLC
DBB73
HMI  PLC
Notes


DB61
Modulo limit
DBB74
enabled ac-
Axis tive
JOG- Position JOG fixed-point approach JOG fixed-point approach
DBB75 position JOG active reached active
Axis reached 2 1 0 2 1 0
Rounding Indexing axis Positioning Path axis Scratch
DBB76
axis in posi- in position axis pulse
Axis tion /Z2-P2/ /Z1-A2/
Reduced-
DBB77
speed coli-
Axis
F function (REAL format) for positioning axis
DBD78 /Z1-V1/
Axis
Gear change- Setpoint gear stage /Z1-S1/

DBB82 over
Spindle /Z1-S1/ C B A
Actual rotat. Speed moni- Spindle in Support area Geometry Set speed Speed limit
direction CW toring setpoint limits violated monitoring /Z1-S1/ exceeded /
DBB83
/Z1-S1/ /Z1-V1/ range /Z1-V1/ Z1-S1/
Spindle /Z1-S1/
increased limited
Active spindle operating mode /Z1-S1/ Tapping with- CLGON ac- SUG active Const. cut-
DBB84 out compen- tive (grinding ting speed
Control mode Oscillation Position-ing Synchronous
Spindle sating chuck / /Z1-S8/ wheel sur- active
mode mode mode
Z1-S1/ face speed)
Spindle in Tool with
DBB85
dynamic
Spindle position
limitation
M function (binary) for spindle (M3, M4, M5, M19, M70 and/or via MD specified)
DBW86 /Z1-S1/
Spindle
S function (floating-point) for spindle
DBD88 /Z1-S1/
Spindle
Motor brake RIL 3) Ramp-

DBB92 released function gen-
Drive erator Block
activ
Enable puls- n controller Drive Active motor /Z1-A2/ Active drive parameter set 0 … 7
DBB93 es integrator ready
B A C B A
Drive /Z1-A2/ disabled /Z1- /Z1-A2/
A2/
DBB94 nist  nsoll nist nx nist nmin Md  Mdx Ramp-up Temperature prewarning /Z1
Drive complete
/Z1-A2/ /Z1-A2/ /Z1-A2/ /Z1-A2/
/Z1-A2/ Heat sink Motor
DBB95
Drive
Master/ Bitwert für CTR- Master/ Slave Axis control Error rotation
slave active LOUT_changed: active monitoring
Compen- coarse fine
DBB96 /Z3-TE3/ 1 0 /Z3-TE6/
sation con-
Change setpoint output as- troller activ
Notes


DB61
OEM-Anwendung
Offset after Activate mir- Coupling Axis is slave
DBB97 turn-on point / roring active axis
Z3-TE6/ /Z3-TE6/
/Z3-TE6/ /Z3-TE6/
DBB98 Emergency Accel. warn- Speed warn- Overlaid Actual value Synchronism /Z2-S3/
retraction ing threshold ing threshold motion coupling
Synchronous coarse fine
active reached reached /Z2-S3/ /Z2-S3/
spindle
DBB99 Emergency Max. acce- Max. speed Synchro- Axis acce- Synchronis- Slave spindle Master spin-
retraction leration reached nization lerating moverride active dle active
Synchronous
enabled reached running back out /Z2-S3/ /Z2-S3/
spindle
Oscillation Oscillation Spark-out Error in oscil- Oscillation OscillAxEx-
DBB100
active motion active active lation cannot start / tReversal
Oscillation /Z2-P5/ /Z2-P5/ /Z2-P5/ /Z2-P5/ Z2-P5/ active
Gantry axis / Gantry lead- Gantry group- Gantry syn- Gantry warn- Gantry cut-off
Z2-G1/ ing axis ing is synchroni-zation ing limit ex- limit exceed-
DBB101
/Z2-G1/ chronous run ready to ceeded /Z2- ed /Z2-G1/
Gantry
/Z2-G1/ start G1/
DBB102
Gantry
Syn-
chronism
DBB103
being consi-
dered
Active infeed axis
DBB104 /Z2-P5/
Grinding Axis 8 Axis 7 Axis 6 Axis 5 Axis 4 Axis 3 Axis 2 Axis 1
Active infeed axis
DBB105 /Z2-P5/
Grinding
Axis 16 Axis 15 Axis 14 Axis 13 Axis 12 Axis 11 Axis 10 Axis 9
Active infeed axis
DBB106 /Z2-P5/
Grinding
Axis 24 Axis 23 Axis 22 Axis 21 Axis 20 Axis 19 Axis 18 Axis 17
Active infeed axis
DBB107 /Z2-P5/
Grinding Axis 31 Axis 30 Axis 29 Axis 28 Axis 27 Axis 26 Axis 25
Axis safely Communi- CRCerror Status pulses CRC or sign Safe opera-
DBB108 referenced cation failure deleted of life error tional stop /
Safety Integr. not acknow- safe speed
ledged active
DBB109 Actual position > cam position
Safety Integr. SN 4- SN 4+ SN 3- SN 3+ SN 2- SN 2+ SN 1- SN 1+
DBB110 n < nx Safe velocity active SG Safe zero

Safety Integr. speed active
B A
DBB111 Stop E Stop D Stop C Stop A/B

Safety Integr. active active active active
DBB112 Cam range bit for cam track 1

Safety Integr.
Notes


DB61

Safety Integr.

Safety Integr.

Safety Integr.
DBB116 Reserved
Safety Integr.
DBB117 Reserved Cam track

4 3 2 1

Safety Integr Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Safety Integr Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8


DBB122 Nockenbereichsbit für Nockenspur 3

DBB123 Nockenbereichsbit für Nockenspur 3



DBB126
Safety Integr
DBB127
Safety Integr
Program test
DBB128
Safety Integr Activate Suppress
DBB129
Safety Integr
DBB130
Safety Integr
DBB131
Safety Integr
Notes

Tool management interface

Interface for loading/unloading magazine (DB71)
DB71 Interface for loading/unloading magazine (NCK  PLC)
DBB0 Interface (I) active
I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
DBB1
I16 I15 I14 I13 I12 I11 I10 I9
DBB2 Standard end-of-acknowledgement
I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
DBB3
I 16 I 15 I 14 I 13 I 12 I 11 I 10 I9
DBB n + 0 Reserved Reserved Position- Order from NC- Positioning Relocate Unload Load
ing Program Magazine
Multitool
DBB n + 1 File in ex- Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Acknow-
tended area ledgemen
(DB1071) t
Status =
3
DBB n + 2
Assigned channel (8 bit INT)
DBB n + 3
Tool management no. (8 bit INT)
DBD n + 4
Unassigned parameter 1 (Dword)
DBD n + 8
DBD n + 12
DBW n + 16
Identification for loading/unloading station (Int), (fixed value 9999)
DBW n + 18
No. of loading station (INT)
DBW n + 20
Magazine no. (source) for unloading/reloading/positioning (INT)
DBW n + 22
Location no. (source) for unloading/reloading/positioning (INT)
Notes

DB71 Interface for loading/unloading magazine (NCK  PLC)

DBW n + 24
Magazine no. (target) for loading/reloading/positioning (INT)
DBW n + 26
Location no. (target) for loading/reloading/positioning (INT)
Reserved Loading/
DBB n + 28
unloading
without
magazine
movement
DBB n + 29
Reserved
Initial addresses of the loading/unloading stations:

Loading/unloading station 1: n= 4 Loading/unloading station 3: n= 64
Loading/unloading station 2: n= 34 Loading/unloading station 4: n= 94
Load interface 1 is responsible for spindle loading and reloading of tools, for relocating tools and for positioning at any location (e.g. buffer).
Notes

Interface for spindle as change position (DB72)

DB72 Signals from spindle (NCK  PLC)
I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
DBB1
I16 I15 I14 I13 I12 I11 I10 I9
DBB2 Standard end-of-acknowledgement
I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
DBB3
I 16 I 15 I 14 I 13 I 12 I 11 I 10 I9
DBB n Spindle Replace man- Replace manual OldT in buff- T0 Prepare Perform Compul-
ual tool tool er no (n-42) change change sory
Tool (initiate: change
remains M06)
in spin-
dle
DBB n + 1 File in Reserved Acknow-

extended ledgemen
t
area Status = 3
(DB1072
DBB n + 2
Assigned channel (8 bit INT)
DBB n + 3
Tool management no. (8 bit INT)
DBD n + 4
Unassigned parameter 1 (D word)
DBD n + 8
DBD n + 12
DBW n + 16 Buffer identification (Int), (fixed value 9998)

(corresponds to ”Target position for new tool”)
DBW n + 18 Relative location (target) in the buffer (INT)
DBW n + 20 Magazine no. (source) for new tool (INT)
DBW n + 22 Location no. (source) for new tool (INT)
DBW n + 24 Magazine no. (target) for old tool (INT)
Notes

DB72 Signals from spindle (NCK  PLC)

DBW n + 26 Location no. (target) for old tool (INT)
DBW n + 28 Tool new: location type (INT)
DBW n + 30 Tool new: size left (INT)
DBW n + 32 Tool new: size right (INT)
DBW n + 34 Tool new: size top (INT)
DBW n + 36 Tool new: size bottom (INT)
DBB n + 38 Tool status for tool new

Manual 1:1 Master tool to be loaded to be unloaded ignore disa- ID for tools
tool Change bled in buffer
DBB n + 39
Tool was Tool fixed Tool being Prewarning Tool meas- Tool Tool enabled Active tool
in use location changed limit reached ured disabled
coded
DBW n + 40 Tool new: T no. (INT)
DBW n + 42 If DBX (n+0.4) = 1, then buffer location of old tool is entered here.
DBW n + 44 Original magazine of new tool
DBW n + 46 Original location of new tool
Initial addresses of the buffers:

Spindle 1: n= 4
Spindle 2: n = 52
Notes

Interface for circular magazine (DB73)

DB73 Signals from circular magazine (NCK  PLC)
I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
DBB1
I16 I15 I14 I13 I12 I11 I10 I9
Standard end-of-acknowledgement
DBB2
I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
DBB3
I 16 I 15 I 14 I 13 I 12 I 11 I 10 I9
DBB n
Reserved Replace Reserved Reserved T0 Reserved Perform change Obligatory
manual (initiation: change
tool T no.)
DBB n + 1 File in exten- Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Acknowl-
ded area edgement
(DB1073) Status = 3
DBB n + 2 Assigned channel (8 bit INT)
DBB n + 3 Tool management no. (8 bit INT)
DBD n + 4 Unassigned parameter 1 (D word)
DBW n + 16 Reserved
DBW n + 18 Reserved
DBW n + 20 Circular magazine no. (INT)
DBW n + 22 Location no. for new tool (INT)
DBW n + 24 Magazine no. of the old tool
DBW n + 26 Location no. for old tool (INT)
DBW n + 28 Tool new: location type (INT)
DBW n + 30 Tool new: size left (INT)
DBW n + 32 Tool new: size right (INT)
DBW n + 34 Tool new: size top (INT)
DBW n + 36 Tool new: size bottom (INT)
Notes

DB73 Signals from circular magazine (NCK  PLC)

DBB n + 38 Manual tool 1:1 Master tool to be loaded to be unloaded ignore disa- ID for tools
Change bled in buffer
DBW n + 39 Tool status for tool new
Tool was in use Tool fixed Tool being Prewarning Prewarning Tool measured Tool Tool enabled
location changed limit limit reached disabled
coded reached
DBW n + 40 Tool new: T no. (INT)
DBW n + 42 Original location of new tool in this circular magazine
Initial addresses of the circular magazines: circular magazine 1: n = 4

2: n = 48
Interface for loading / unloading (Multitool) (DB1071)
DB1071 Loading / unloading points (NCK PLC)

Distance code
DBW n+0
Number of Multitool locations

DBW n+2
Multitool distance
DBW n+4
Multitool number
DBW n+8
Multitool location number

DBW n+10
Toolholder
DBW n+12
Reserved
DBW n+14
Reserved
DBW n+16
Reserved
DBW n+18
Notes

Interface for spindle (Multitool) (DB1072)

DB1072 Spindle (NCK  PLC)
Distance code
DBW n+0

DBW n+2
Multitool distance
DBW n+4
Multitool number (tool new)

DBW n+8
DBW n+10 Multitool location number (tool new)

Multitool number (tool old)
DBW n+12
Multitool location number (tool old)

DBW n+14
Location type
DBW n+16
Tool size left

DBW n+18
Tool size right

DBW n+20
Tool size above

DBW n+22
Tool size below

DBW n+24
Tool status
DBW n+26
T number of the tool

DBW n+28
Tool holder
DBW n+30
Original magazine of the new tool

DBW n+32
Original location of new tool

DBW n+34
Reserved
DBW n+36
Notes

Interface for Revolver (Multitool) (DB 1073)

DB1073 Revolver (NCK  PLC)
Distance code
DBW n+0

DBW n+2
Multitool distance
DBW n+4
Multitool number (tool new)

DBW n+8
Multitool location numberr (tool new)

DBW n+10
Multitool number (tool old)

DBW n+12
Multitool location numberr (tool old)

DBW n+14
Location type
DBW n+16
Tool size left

DBW n+18
Tool size right

DBW n+20
Tool size above

DBW n+22
Tool size below

DBW n+24
Tool status
DBW n+26
T number of the tool

DBW n+28
Tool holder
DBW n+30
Original magazine of the new tool

DBW n+32
Original location of new tool

DBW n+34
Reserved
DBW n+36
Notes

Signals to/from the machine control panel and HHU (GD communication)
DB77 Signals to and from the machine control panel and HHU
DBB0- Input signals from MCP1 to PLC, MPI Bus (GD communication)
DBB7
DBB8 - Output signals from MCP1 to PLC, MPI Bus (GD communication)
DBB15
DBD16 Status send MCP1, MPI bus (GD communication)
DBD20 Status receive MCP1, MPI bus (GD communication)
DBB24 - Input signals from MCP2 to PLC, MPI bus (GD communication)
DBB31
DBB32 - Output signals from MCP2 to PLC, MPI bus (GD communication)
DBB39
DBD40 Status send MCP2, MPI bus (GD communication)
DBD44 Status receive MCP2, MPI bus (GD communication)
DBB48 - Input signals from HHU to PLC, MPI bus (GD communication)
DBB53
DBB60 - Output signals from PLC to HHU, MPI bus (GD communication)
DBB79
DBD80 Status Send HHU, MPI bus (GD communication)
DBD84 Status Receive HHU, MPI bus (GD communication)
Appendix C: END
Notes

En 840D SL Complete Commissioning v45

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

En 840D SL Complete Commissioning v45

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

En 840D SL Complete Commissioning v45

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SINUMERIK 840D sl

This document was produced for training purposes.

Commissioning Manual for

Sinumerik 840D sl Software 4.5

A058 A031 A026

A084 A101 A016 A102 A110

Sinumerik 840D sl SW4.5

Electrical Cabinet Protocol attached Safety Integrated Protocol Attached

Machine Test Protocol Sinumerik 840D sl

Copyright  Siemens AG 2013 All Rights Reserved.

1.1 Schedule ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5

1.2 Participants carrying-out the test ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 5

2 SUMMARY AND RESULT ................................................................................................................................................................................... 6

2.1 Summary .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6

2.3 Release Siemens ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6

2.4 Release from Machine Tool Builder ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 6

3.1 Modified data ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 7

3.2 Data Backup .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 7

4 CHANGE LOG ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8

4.1 Changes to the machine. ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8

5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 9

5.2 Control ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 9

Copyright  Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved.

6 TEST OBJECTIVE ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 10

6.1 Note .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10

7 FUNCTIONS TESTED ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 11

8 DETAILED TEST ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 13

8.1 Machine area ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 13

8.2 Technology ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 26

8.3 Parameter ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 32

8.4 Geometry ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 35

8.5 Safety Integrated ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 35

Page 3/42 Date: 24.03.2014 Protocol version 1.2

Copyright  Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved.

8.6 Password protection................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 36

8.7 Various ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 37

Page 4/42 Date: 24.03.2014 Protocol version 1.2

Copyright  Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved.

Test carried out at (OEM Name):

1.2 Participants carrying-out the test

Name Company / Department

Page 5/42 Date: 24.03.2014 Protocol version 1.2

Copyright  Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved.

2 Summary and result

2.2.1 Exception List

2.3 Release Siemens

2.4 Release from Machine Tool Builder

Page 6/42 Date: 24.03.2014 Protocol version 1.2

Copyright  Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved.

3.2 Data Backup

- ____________ (NC Archive)

Page 7/42 Date: 24.03.2014 Protocol version 1.2

Copyright  Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved.

4.1 Changes to the machine.

Date Change Reason Tested Responsible person Signature

Page 8/42 Date: 24.03.2014 Protocol version 1.2

Copyright  Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved.